Mazda 2 Service Shop Repair Manual - 2007 - 2014

WORKSHOP REPAIR MANUAL
TECHNICAL GUIDE
WIRING DIAGRAMS 5826-10-09I
WIRING DIAGRAMS SUPP 5828-10-09L
BACK TO FRONT PAGE MAZDA2 2010.50MY TECNHICAL GUIDE
VIEW MAIN INDEX
FOREWORD
This Technical Guide explains each component or system operation and function for the
Mazda2. For proper repair and maintenance, a thorough familiarization with this manual
is important, and it should always be kept in a handy place for quick and easy reference.
All the contents of this manual, including drawings and specifications, are the latest
available at the time of printing. As modifications affecting repair or maintenance occur,
relevant information supplementary to this volume will be made available at Mazda
dealers. This manual should be kept up-to-date.
Ford Motor Company reserves the right to alter the specifications and contents of this
manual without obligation or advance notice.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or used in any form or by
any means, electronic or mechanical—including photocopying and recording and the
use of any kind of information storage and retrieval system—without permission in
writing.
2010 FMCSA
Ford Motor Company
of Southern Africa
BACK TO FOREWORD & FRONT PAGE MAZDA2 2010.50MY TECNHICAL GUIDE
CONTENTS
Title Section
Technical
GENERAL INFORMATION 00
Guide
APPLICATION: ENGINE 01
This manual is applicable to vehicles beginning with
the Vehicle Identification Numbers (VIN) shown on
the following page.
SUSPENSION 02
DRIVELINE/AXLE 03
BRAKES 04
TRANSMISSION/
TRANSAXLE 05
STEERING 06
HEATER, VENTILATION &

AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 07
RESTRAINTS 08
BODY & ACCESSORIES 09
ALPHABETICAL INDEX AI
BACK TO CHAPTER INDEX MAZDA2 2010.50MY TECNHICAL GUIDE
TO MODEL INDEX
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (VIN)
Australian specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

JM0 DE10Y1*0 100001—
General (R.H.D.) specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

JM6 DE10J100 100001—
Australian specs. (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

MM0 DE10Y100
General (R.H.D.) specs. (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

MM6 DE10J1*0
MM6 DE10Y1*0
BACK TO MAIN INDEX MAZDA2 2010.50MY TECNHICAL GUIDE
TO MODEL INDEX
SECTION
Toc of SCT INFORMATION . . . 00-00

GENERAL
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
00-00 GENERAL INFORMATION

AIM OF DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–1 Australian specs. (AutoAlliance
Product Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–1 Thailand (AAT) manufactured
Vehicle Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–1 vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–25
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER General (R.H.D.) specs. (AutoAlliance
(VIN) CODE [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–21 Thailand (AAT) manufactured
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–25
(VIN) CODE [5HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–22 UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–25
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Conversion to SI Units (Système
(VIN) CODE [3HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–24 International d'Unités) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–26
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Rounding Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–26
(VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–24 Upper and Lower Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–26
General (R.H.D.) specs. (Except NEW STANDARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–26
AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured
vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–25
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
AIM OF DEVELOPMENT
NG: GENERAL INFORMATION
id000000100100
Product Concept
x Pleasure to own and fun to drive
— Lightweight handling realizes pleasure in driving
x Comfortable, day-to-day driving enjoyment
— Pleasurable car-life and improved ride-comfort from smart and easy to use equipment and functions
— Self-expression through the advanced design and color coordination, endearing personal attachment
Vehicle Outline
Exterior design
x Realizes a strong and independent cosmopolitan presence with a feeling of lightness/compactness.
00-00–1
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
External View (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)
5HB
3HB
am2zzn0000107
00-00–2
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
External View (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)
4SD
5HB
am2zzn0000137
Interior design
x Effective and easy-to-use small storage spaces established around the driver’s seat.
x Constantly provides the optimum driving posture/position no matter the driver’s physique.
00-00–3
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
x Spaciousness in a compact size that realizes a feeling of relaxation.
3HB
5HB
4SD
EXCEPT
DRIVER SIDE
am2zzn0000138
Engine
Gasoline engine
x Mechanical
— ZJ (55 kW 1.3GE (European (L.H.D. U.K.) specs.), 63 kW 1.3GE) and ZY engines have been adopted.
— A miller cycle engine has been adopted which realizes high fuel economy performance. (ZJ (Miller Cycle
Engine))
00-00–4
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
— Variable valve timing that optimally adjusts valve timing in accordance with driving conditions has been
adopted.
x Intake, exhaust, control
— Stable combustion when the engine is cold or lightly loaded along with cleaner exhaust emissions and high
engine output have been obtained due to the adoption of a variable tumble system.
— High torque is obtained from the lower-middle to the high engine speed ranges due to the adoption of the
variable intake air system. (With variable intake air system)
— Maximum torque is achieved at all engine speeds due to the adoption of a variable valve timing system that
controls intake valve timing in accordance with driving conditions to attain highly efficient air charging.
— An exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system has been adopted resulting in cleaner exhaust emissions and
reduced fuel consumption.
x Control
— Drive-by-wire control has been adopted. It enables precise intake air control at all engine speed ranges.
— Two types of maximum output specifications, 55 kW and 63 kW, have been adopted for the ZJ engine. The
two output characteristics have been achieved by changing the throttle valve opening angle using drive-by-
wire control. (European (L.H.D. U.K.) specs.)
Diesel engine
x MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo
— The common rail injection system is a pressure accumulator injection system. This means that with this
system the fuel pressure is constantly present, whilst on conventional systems (for example with the
distributor type fuel injection pump), the fuel pressure always has to be generated for each injection
process.
On the common rail injection system, therefore, pressure generation and fuel injection are separated. The
injection pressure is, to a great extent, generated irrespective of engine speed and injected fuel quantity
and is made available in a common rail ready for injection.
— Advantages of the common rail injection system are:
x high injection pressure up
x injected fuel quantity, fuel pressure in the high pressure accumulator (rail) and start of injection all
matched to the operating conditions
x MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)
— The common rail injection system is a pressure accumulator injection system. This means that with this
system the fuel pressure is constantly present, whilst on conventional systems (for example with the
distributor type fuel injection pump), the fuel pressure always has to be generated for each injection
process.
On the common rail injection system, therefore, pressure generation and fuel injection are separated. The
injection pressure is, to a great extent, generated irrespective of engine speed and injected fuel quantity
and is made available in a common rail ready for injection.
— Advantages of the common rail injection system are:
x high injection pressure up
x injected fuel quantity, fuel pressure in the high pressure accumulator (rail) and start of injection all
matched to the operating conditions
00-00–5
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
Suspension
x Front suspension
— A strut-type front suspension has been adopted.
— Large-sized rubber mounts have been adopted for the front lower arm, improving the suspension rigidity.
— A separated input type shock absorber mount has been adopted, improving steering stability and ride
comfort.
FRONT SHOCK
FRONT ABSORBER AND FRONT SHOCK
STABILIZER CONTROL LINK STABILIZER COIL SPRING ABSORBER
FRONT LOWER ARM FRONT CROSSMEMBER
am2zzn0000070
00-00–6
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
x Rear suspension
— A torsion beam axle rear suspension has been adopted.
— Mono-tube rear shock absorbers with stable damping force have been adopted, improving handling
stability.
— Large-sized rubber bushings have been adopted for the torsion beam, improving riding comfort.
— A wider cabin space has been attained due to the separated positioning of the shock absorber and coil
spring.
REAR SHOCK
ABSORBER
TORSION
BEAM AXLE
REAR COIL
SPRING
am2zzn0000071
Brakes
x An intrusion-minimizing brake pedal mechanism has been adopted for improved safety.
x A power brake unit with a brake assist (dual servo ratio) mechanism has been adopted for improved safety.
x With the adoption of large diameter front disc brakes and rear drum brakes with wide linings, both high braking
performance and excellent brake-feel have been achieved.
x A vacuum pump has been adopted, improving braking force. (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
00-00–7
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
ZJ, ZY
R.H.D.
POWER
BRAKE UNIT
BRAKE PEDAL
MASTER
CYLINDER
REAR BRAKE (DRUM)
FRONT BRAKE (DISC)
am2zzn0000118
00-00–8
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
Antilock brake system (ABS)
x EBD has been adopted for improved safety.
x The ABS HU/CM, integrating both the hydraulic unit (HU) and control module (CM), has been adopted,
resulting in a size and weight reduction of the system.
x A semiconductor element type ABS wheel-speed sensor has been adopted, improving reliability and reducing
size and weight.
x An enhanced malfunction diagnosis system made possible by the use of Integrated Diagnostic Software
(IDS) has improved serviceability.
R.H.D.
ABS WARNING LIGHT
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
REAR ABS SENSOR

ROTOR
BRAKE SWITCH
REAR ABS WHEEL-

SPEED SENSOR
ABS HU/CM
FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
FRONT ABS SENSOR ROTOR

am2zzn0000116
Dynamic stability control (DSC)

x The DSC HU/CM, integrating both the hydraulic unit (HU) and control module (CM), has been adopted,
resulting in a size and weight reduction.
x A combined sensor, integrating both the yaw rate sensor and lateral-G sensor, has been adopted, improving
serviceability.
x The specialized controller area network (CAN) system has been adopted for use between the combined sensor
and DSC HU/CM, improving serviceability and reliability.
x An enhanced malfunction diagnosis system, used with the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS),
improving serviceability.
x Serviceability improved by the automatic configuration function.
00-00–10
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
R.H.D.
ABS WARNING LIGHT DSC OFF LIGHT
BRAKE SYSTEM
DSC WARNING LIGHT
INDICATOR
LIGHT
REAR ABS
WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR
DSC OFF SWITCH
EPS CONTROL
MODULE
COMBINED
SENSOR
REAR ABS
DSC HU/CM SENSOR ROTOR
BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR
(BUILT INTO DSC HU/CM)
PCM (ZJ, ZY)
PCM (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)) FRONT ABS SENSOR ROTOR
am2zzn0000117
Manual transaxle
F35M-R (ZJ or ZY)
x Five-speed F35M-R manual transaxle has been adopted.
00-00–13
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
x A double-cone synchronizer mechanism has been adopted for 1st and 2nd gears.
REVERSE
IDLER
3RD GEAR 1ST
GEAR GEAR
2ND
4TH
GEAR
GEAR
5TH
GEAR
PRIMARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY
5TH GEAR
SECONDARY
4TH GEAR
SECONDARY
3RD GEAR
SECONDARY
2ND GEAR
SECONDARY
1ST GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR
am2zzn0000056
B65M-R (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo or MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))

x Five-speed B65M-R manual transaxle has been adopted.
x A double-cone synchronizer mechanism has been adopted for 1GR and 2GR.
00-00–14
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
REVERSE
IDLER GEAR
1ST
GEAR
5TH 4TH 3RD 2ND
GEAR GEAR GEAR GEAR
PRIMARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY
5TH GEAR
SECONDARY
4TH GEAR
SECONDARY
3RD GEAR
SECONDARY
2ND GEAR
SECONDARY
1ST GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR
am2zzn0000096
00-00–15
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
Automatic transaxle
FN4A-EL (ZY)
x The FN4A-EL type automatic transaxle has been adopted.
x The construction and operation of the FN4A-EL automatic transaxle is essentially carried over from the
previous one.
FRONT
2-4 BRAKE PLANETARY FORWARD
BAND GEAR CLUTCH
REAR
PLANETARY
GEAR
TORQUE
CONVERTER
REVERSE
CLUTCH
3-4 CLUTCH OIL PUMP
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
LOW AND
PRIMARY GEAR
REVERSE
BRAKE
SECONDARY GEAR
OUTPUT GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
am2zzn0000017
Continuously variable transaxle (CVT)

x CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle) has been adopted with a newly developed DJVA-EL type TCC
mechanism.
x By enabling continuously changing gear ratios, the merits of CVT compared with a conventional step-type ATX
are as follows:
00-00–16
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
Fuel economy improvement
— Fuel economy is improved by enabling the vehicle to be driven in the best range for optimum engine
performance. A particular contribution to fuel economy has been made in the low vehicle speed range.
— Because of a wider gear ratio, the engine speed is reduced when driving at high speeds in high gear which
improves fuel economy.
Engine performance improvement
— Acceleration performance is improved
because acceleration can be maintained at
the maximum engine speed output. HIGH
ENGINE SPEED
CVT
STEP-TYPE
ATX
TIME
FULLY OPEN THROTTLE ACCELERATION
am3zzn0000289
— Smooth shifting and maximized engine HIGH

performance are possible without the uneven CVT
drive force of a step-type ATX.
STEP-TYPE
DRIVE FORCE
ATX
CVT DRIVE
1GR
FORCE
2GR UTILIZATION
3GR RANGE
4GR
WHEEL AXLE SPEED HIGH

DRIVE FORCE CHARACTERISTICS GRAPH
am3zzn0000289
00-00–17
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
PRIMARY PULLEY PLANETARY GEAR
TORQUE
CONVERTER
BELT
INPUT SHAFT
FORWARD
CLUTCH
REVERSE
BRAKE
REDUCTION DRIVE
GEAR
REDUCTION DRIVEN
GEAR
COUNTER GEAR
SECONDARY PULLEY
DIFFERENTIAL
am3zzn0000290
00-00–18
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
Electric power steering
x A column assist-type EPS has been adopted for all models.
x EPS provides smooth handling from low to high speeds as a result of the excellent steering feel provided by the
electronic control and the vehicle-speed responsive control.
x EPS does not require a power steering oil pump and generates assist force only when the steering wheel is
steered. As a result, engine load is lowered and fuel efficiency is improved.
R.H.D.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
STEERING WHEEL
EPS WARNING LIGHT
STEERING COLUMN
IINTERMEDIATE SHAFT
PCM (ZJ, ZY)
PCM
(MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo,
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
am2zzn0000122
Safety
x The adoption of the triple-H, strenghtened frames on the floor, sides and roof areas provides enhanced
protection.
x Injuries in a pedestrian-vehicle collision are minimized by the increased space between the hood and engine.
x Side air bags that effectively protect the chest area have been adopted for the front seats.
x Large curtain air bags have been adopted that deploy and cover the front and rear side windows to protect the
heads of the front and rear passengers.
x Pre-tensioner and load limiter mechanisms have been adopted for the front seat belts.
x Seat belt reminders have been adopted for the prevention of unfastened seat belts.
x An immobilizer system has been adopted. This anti-theft device prevents the engine from being started unless
the encrypted identification code, transmitted from a special electronic chip embedded in the key, corresponds
with the identification code registered in the vehicle.
End Of Sie
00-00–19
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) CODE [4SD]
id0000001002g4
End Of Sie
MM6 DE 1 0 Y 1 A 0 123456
Serial No.
(for Australian, General (R.H.D.) specs.)

No significance 0= Dummy
(for General (L.H.D.) specs.)
Plant W= AAT
(for Australian specs.)

(for General (L.H.D. R.H.D.) specs.)
Model year A= 2010

Check digit 0 to 9, X
Model change code 1
J= 1.3 L (ZJ)
Engine type Y= 1.5 L (ZY)

Body style 2= 4SD

Body style 1= Closed body
(for General (L.H.D.) specs.) 3= Without Curtain, Side airbag

Restraint system 4= With Curtain, Side airbag
Vehicle type DE= Mazda2
MM0= Australian specs., Mazda-AAT

MM6= General (R.H.D.) specs., Mazda-AAT
World manufacturer identification MM7= General (L.H.D.) specs., Mazda-AAT
am2zzw0000515
00-00–21
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) CODE [5HB]
id0000001002g3
Australian, General (L.H.D. R.H.D.) specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)
J M7DE 10 Y180 12 3 4 5 6
Serial No.
(for General (R.H.D.) specs.) No significance 0= Dummy

(for Australian specs., General (L.H.D.) specs.)
Model year 8= 2008, 9= 2009, A= 2010
Model change code 1
J= 1.3 L (ZJ)
JM0= Australian specs.

JM6= General (R.H.D.) specs.
World manufacturer identification JM7= General (L.H.D.) specs.
am2zzw0000447
00-00–22
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
Australian, General (L.H.D. R.H.D.) specs. (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)
MM6 DE 1 0 Y 1 A 0 123456
Serial No.

Plant W= AAT
(for Australian specs.)

Model year A= 2010

Check digit 0 to 9, X
Model change code 1
J= 1.3 L (ZJ)

Body style 4= 5HB


MM0= Australian specs., Mazda-AAT

World manufacturer identification MM7= General (L.H.D.) specs., Mazda-AAT
am2zzw0000515
End Of Sie
00-00–23
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) CODE [3HB]
id0000001002g2
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

Australian specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)
JM0 DE10Y1*0 100001—
General (R.H.D.) specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

JM6 DE10J100 100001—
Australian specs. (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

MM0 DE10Y100
General (R.H.D.) specs. (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

MM6 DE10J1*0
MM6 DE10Y1*0
UNITS
Electrical current A (ampere)

Electric power W (watt)
Electric resistance ohm
Electric voltage V (volt)
mm (millimeter)
Length
in (inch)
kPa (kilo pascal)
Negative pressure mmHg (millimeters of mercury)
inHg (inches of mercury)
kPa (kilo pascal)
Positive pressure kgf/cm2 (kilogram force per square

centimeter)
psi (pounds per square inch)
N·m (Newton meter)
kgf·m (kilogram force meter)
Torque kgf·cm (kilogram force centimeter)
ft·lbf (foot pound force)
in·lbf (inch pound force)
L (liter)
US qt (U.S. quart)
Imp qt (Imperial quart)
Volume ml (milliliter)
cc (cubic centimeter)
cu in (cubic inch)
fl oz (fluid ounce)
g (gram)
Weight
oz (ounce)
End Of Sie
id000000100300
00-00–25
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
Conversion to SI Units (Système International d'Unités)
x All numerical values in this manual are based on SI units. Numbers shown in conventional units are converted
from these values.
Rounding Off
x Converted values are rounded off to the same number of places as the SI unit value. For example, if the SI unit
value is 17.2 and the value after conversion is 37.84, the converted value will be rounded off to 37.8.
Upper and Lower Limits

x When the data indicates upper and lower limits, the converted values are rounded down if the SI unit value is
an upper limit, and rounded up if the SI unit value is a lower limit. Therefore, converted values for the same SI
unit value may differ after conversion. For example, consider 2.7 kgf/cm2 in the following specifications:
210—260 kPa {2.1—2.7 kgf/cm2, 30—38 psi}

270—310 kPa {2.7—3.2 kgf/cm2, 39—45 psi}
x The actual converted values for 2.7 kgf/cm2 are 265 kPa and 38.4 psi. In the first specification, 2.7 is used as
an upper limit, so the converted values are rounded down to 260 and 38. In the second specification, 2.7 is
used as a lower limit, so the converted values are rounded up to 270 and 39.
End Of Sie
NEW STANDARDS
id000000801400
x Following is a comparison of the previous standard and the new standard.
New Standard Previous Standard
Abbrevi- Abbrevi- Remark
Name Name
ation ation
AP Accelerator Pedal — Accelerator Pedal
APP Accelerator Pedal Position — Accelerator Pedal Position
ACL Air Cleaner — Air Cleaner
A/C Air Conditioning — Air Conditioning
A/F sensor Air Fuel Ratio Sensor — —
BARO Barometric Pressure — Atmospheric Pressure
B+ Battery Positive Voltage VB Battery Voltage
— Brake Switch — Stoplight Switch
— Calibration Resistor — Corrected Resistance #6
CMP sensor Camshaft Position Sensor — Crank Angle Sensor
LOAD Calculated Load Voltage — —
CAC Charge Air Cooler — Intercooler
CLS Closed Loop System — Feedback System
CTP Closed Throttle Position — Fully Closed
CPP Clutch Pedal Position — Clutch Position
CIS Continuous Fuel Injection System EGI Electronic Gasoline Injection System
CS sensor Control Sleeve Sensor CSP sensor Control Sleeve Position Sensor #6
00-00–26
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
Name Name
ation ation
CKP sensor Crankshaft Position Sensor — Crank Angle Sensor 2
DLC Data Link Connector — Diagnosis Connector
DTM Diagnostic Test Mode — Test Mode #1
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code (s) — Service Code(s)
DI Distributor Ignition — Spark Ignition
DLI Distributorless Ignition — Direct Ignition
EI Electronic Ignition — Electronic Spark Ignition #2
ECT Engine Coolant Temperature — Water Thermo
EM Engine Modification — Engine Modification
— Engine Speed Input Signal — Engine RPM Signal
EVAP Evaporative Emission — Evaporative Emission
EGR Exhaust Gas Recirculation — Exhaust Gas Recirculation
FC Fan Control — Fan Control
FF Flexible Fuel — Flexible Fuel
4GR Fourth Gear — Overdrive
— Fuel Pump Relay — Circuit Opening Relay #3
FSO
Fuel Shut Off Solenoid FCV Fuel Cut Valve #6
solenoid
GEN Generator — Alternator
GND Ground — Ground/Earth
HO2S Heated Oxygen Sensor — Oxygen Sensor With heater
IAC Idle Air Control — Idle Speed Control
— IDM Relay — Spill Valve Relay #6
— Incorrect Gear Ratio — —
— Injection Pump FIP Fuel Injection Pump #6
— Input/Turbine Speed Sensor — Pulse Generator
IAT Intake Air Temperature — Intake Air Thermo
KS Knock Sensor — Knock Sensor
MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp — Malfunction Indicator Light
MAP Manifold Absolute Pressure — Intake Air Pressure
MAF Mass Air Flow — Mass Air Flow
MAF sensor Mass Air Flow Sensor — Airflow Sensor
MFL Multiport Fuel Injection — Multiport Fuel Injection
OBD On-Board Diagnostic — Diagnosis/Self Diagnosis
OL Open Loop — Open Loop
— Output Speed Sensor — Vehicle Speed Sensor 1
OC Oxidation Catalytic Converter — Catalytic Converter
O2S Oxygen Sensor — Oxygen Sensor
PNP Park/Neutral Position — Park/Neutral Range
PID Parameter Identification — Parameter Identification
— PCM Control Relay — Main Relay #6
PSP Power Steering Pressure — Power Steering Pressure
PCM Powertrain Control Module ECU Engine Control Unit #4
— Pressure Control Solenoid — Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
Pulsed
PAIR Pulsed Secondary Air Injection — Secondary Air Injection System
injection
— Pump Speed Sensor — NE Sensor #6
RAM Random Access Memory — —
Injection
AIR Secondary Air Injection — Secondary Air Injection System with air
pump
SAPV Secondary Air Pulse Valve — Reed Valve
SFI Sequential Multipoint Fuel Injection — Sequential Fuel Injection
00-00–27
TO MODEL INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
Name Name
ation ation
— 1–2 Shift Solenoid Valve
— Shift Solenoid A
— Shift A Solenoid Valve
— 2–3 Shift Solenoid Valve
— Shift Solenoid B
— Shift B Solenoid Valve
— Shift Solenoid C — 3–4 Shift Solenoid Valve
3GR Third Gear — 3rd Gear
TWC Three Way Catalytic Converter — Catalytic Converter
TB Throttle Body — Throttle Body
TP Throttle Position — —
TP sensor Throttle Position Sensor — Throttle Sensor
TCV Timer Control Valve TCV Timing Control Valve #6
TCC Torque Converter Clutch — Lockup Position
Transmission (Transaxle) Control
TCM — EC-AT Control Unit
Module
Transmission (Transaxle) Fluid
— — ATF Thermosensor
Temperature Sensor
TR Transmission (Transaxle) Range — Inhibitor Position
TC Turbocharger — Turbocharger
VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor — Vehicle Speed Sensor
VR Voltage Regulator — IC Regulator
VAF sensor Volume Air Flow Sensor — Air Flow Sensor
Warm Up Three Way Catalytic
WUTWC — Catalytic Converter #5
Converter
WOT Wide Open Throttle — Fully Open
#1: Diagnostic trouble codes depend on the diagnostic test mode

#2: Controlled by the PCM
#3: In some models, there is a fuel pump relay that controls pump speed. That relay is now called the fuel pump
relay (speed).
#4: Device that controls engine and powertrain
#5: Directly connected to exhaust manifold
#6: Part name of diesel engine
End Of Sie
00-00–28
TO MODEL INDEX
ENGINE 01
SECTION
Toc of SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00

OUTLINE
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC EXHAUST SYSTEM[ZJ, ZY]. . . 01-15A
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A EMISSION SYSTEM[ZJ, ZY] . . 01-16A
MECHANICAL[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . 01-10A CHARGING SYSTEM
LUBRICATION[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . 01-11A [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-17A
COOLING SYSTEM IGNITION SYSTEM[ZJ, ZY] . . . 01-18
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A STARTING SYSTEM[ZJ, ZY] . . 01-19A
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-20
CONTROL SYSTEM[ZJ, ZY] . . 01-40A
FUEL SYSTEM[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . 01-14A
Toc of SCT
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
01-00 OUTLINE
ENGINE ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–2 Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–3
ENGINE FEATURES [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . 01-00–2 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–3
On-board Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–2 Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–3
Mechanical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–2 Intake-air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–5
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–3 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–5
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–3 Emission System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–5
Intake-air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–3 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–5
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–3 Control System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–5
Emission System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–3 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS [ZJ, ZY] . . . 01-00–5
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–3 Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–5
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
ENGINE ABBREVIATIONS
NG: ENGINE COMPLETE
id010000100100
ABS Antilock Brake System

ATX Automatic Transaxle
BDC Bottom Dead Center
BTDC Before Top Dead Center
CAN Controller Area Network
CCM Comprehensive Component Monitor
CM Control Module
CPU Central Processing Unit
CVT Continuously variable transaxle
DC Drive Cycle
DLC-2 Data Link Connector-2
EEPROM Electrically Erasable and Programmable
Read Only Memory
EX Exhaust
GMR Giant Magneto Resistance
HU Hydraulic Unit
IC Integrated Circuit
IN Intake
KOEO Key On Engine Off
KOER Key On Engine Running
M Motor
MTX Manual Transaxle
OCV Oil Control Valve
PCV Positive Crankcase Ventilation
RAM Random Access Memory
SST Special Service Tool
TDC Top Dead Center
End Of Sie
ENGINE FEATURES [ZJ, ZY]
id0100001002c0
On-board Diagnostic
To meet the EOBD regulations x Diagnostic test modes adopted
x DTCs adopted
x KOEO/KOER self test function adopted
Improved serviceability
x PID/DATA monitor function adopted
x Active command modes function adopted
Mechanical
x A variable valve timing mechanism has been adopted.
Improved engine performance
x Miller cycle has been adopted. (ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine))
x The shimless tappet has been adopted.
Reduced engine weight
x Main parts (cylinder head and cylinder block) are made of aluminum alloy.
x The cylinder head is made of aluminum alloy.
x A silent timing chain has been adopted.
Reduced engine noise and
x A highly rigid aluminum cylinder block and lower cylinder block have been adopted.
vibration
x A crankshaft pulley with torsional damper has been adopted.
x A pendulum type engine mount has been adopted.
01-00–2
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
x A serpentine type drive belt has been adopted.
x Drive belt tension is adjusted automatically with an auto-tensioner.
Improved serviceability x A timing chain has been adopted to eliminate the need for its replacement.
x An engine front cover with a service hole has been adopted. (for unlocking the chain adjust
ratchet and securing the tensioner arm.)
Lubrication
x Aluminum alloy oil pump cover adopted
Reduced weight
x Plastic oil strainer adopted
x Trochoid gear type oil pump adopted
Improved lubricity
x Oil jet valves adopted
Cooling System
Reduced weight x Down-flow type radiator with aluminum core and plastic tank adopted
Miniaturization x Built-in type water pump adopted
Reducedd engine noise and
x Electric cooling fan adopted
vibration
Improved serviceability x Longer-life engine coolant (type FL22) adopted
Intake-air System
Improved engine torque x Variable intake air system adopted (With variable intake air system)
Improved noise reduction x Resonance chamber adopted (With resonance chamber)
Improved emission gas purification x Variable tumble system adopted
Fuel System
Improved serviceability x Nylon tubes adopted for fuel hoses in the engine compartment and around the fuel
tank, and quick release connectors adopted for joints
Reduction of evaporative gas x Returnless fuel system adopted
Emission System
Improved exhaust gas purification x Catalytic converter system adopted
x Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system adopted
Charging System
Miniaturization x Non-regulator type generator with built-in power transistor adopted
Ignition System
Improved reliability x Independent ignition control system with distributorless ignition coils adopted
x Spark plugs with an iridium alloy center electrode and platinum tip ground electrode
Improved durability
adopted
Starting System
Improved startability x Reduction type starter adopted
Control System
Improved driveability x Drive-by-wire control adopted
x Variable intake air control adopted (With variable intake air system)
x Variable valve timing control adopted
Improved emission performance x Variable tumble control adopted
x A heater element is integrated with the A/F sensor and HO2S
x All-range air/fuel ratio sensor adopted
x EGR system adopted
Improved fuel economy x A drive-by-wire control (idle air control) has been adopted which contributes to
lower fuel consumption
x Current sensor adopted (With current sensor)
Wiring harness simplification x CAN adopted
x Camshaft position sensor with GMR element adopted
Improved accuracy
x Crankshaft position sensor with GMR element adopted
x Two-circuit throttle position sensor adopted
Improved reliability
x Two-circuit accelerator pedal position sensor adopted
01-00–3
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
End Of Sie
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS [ZJ, ZY]
id0100001003c0
Specification
Specifications
Item ZJ (Miller Cycle
ZJ ZY
Engine)
MECHANICAL
Cylinder arrangement and number In-line, 4-cylinder
Combustion chamber Pentroof
Valve system DOHC, timing chain driven, 16 valves
1,349 1,498
Displacement (ml {cc, cu in})
{1,349, 82.3} {1,498, 91.4}
74.0 u 78.4 78.0 u 78.4
Bore u stroke (mm {in})
{2.91 u 3.09} {3.07 u 3.09}
Compression ratio 10.0:1 11.0:1 10.0:1
1,461 1,324 1,520
(kPa {kgfcm2, psi}
Compression pressure {14.90, 211.9} {13.50, {15.50, 220.5}
=rpm?) [300] 192.0}[300] [300]
01-00–5
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Specifications
ZJ ZY
Engine)
Open BTDC (q) -9—31 -12—28 -9—31
IN
Close ABDC (q) 59—19 80—40 59—19
Valve timing
Open BBDC (q) 31 40
EX
Close ATDC (q) -1 -1
IN 0.27—0.33
Valve clearance (mm {in}) {0.0107—0.0129}
EX [Engine cold]
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Type Force-fed type
330—380
Oil pressure (reference value) (kPa {kgf cm2, psi}
{3.37—3.87, 47.9—55.1}
[Oil temperature: 100qC {212qF}] =rpm?) [3,000]
Oil pump Type Trochoid gear type
Type Full-flow, paper element
Oil filter Bypass
pressure (kPa {kgfcm2, psi}) 78—118 {0.80—1.20, 12.0—17.1}
Total (dry
(L {US qt, lmp qt}) 4.2 {4.4, 3.7}
engine)
Oil
replacemen (L {US qt, lmp qt}) 3.7 {3.9, 3.3}
Oil capacity (approx.
t
quantity)
Oil and oil
filter
(L {US qt, lmp qt}) 3.9 {4.1, 3.4}
replacemen
t
COOLING SYSTEM
Type Water-cooled, Electromotive
MTX: 5.0 {5.3,
MTX: 5.0 {5.3, 4.4} 4.4}
Coolant capacity (approx. quantity) (L {US qt, lmp qt})
CVT: 5.3 {5.6, 4.7} ATX: 4.8 {5.1,
4.2}
Water pump Centrifugal, V-ribbed belt-driven
Type Wax, bottom-bypass
Opening
(qC {qF}) 80—84 {176—183}
temperature
Thermostat
Full-open
(qC {qF}) 95 {203}
temperature
Full-open lift (mm {in}) 8.5 {0.33} or more
Radiator Type Corrugated fin
Cap valve
Cooling system cap opening (kPa {kgfcm2, psi}) 93.2—122.6 {0.951—1.250, 13.6—17.7}
pressure
Type Electric
Number of blades 5
Outer
Cooling fan (mm {in}) 320 {12.6}
diameter
Cooling fan
motor (W) 120
output
FUEL SYSTEM
Type Hi-ohmic
Injector Type of fuel delivery Top-feed
Type of drive Voltage
Regulating
Pressure regulator
pressure (kPa {kgfcm2, psi}) approx. 390 {3.97, 56.5}
Except for ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine): 42.8 {11.3, 9.41}
Fuel tank Capacity (L {US gal, lmp gal})
ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine): 41.0 {10.8, 9.02}
EMISSION SYSTEM
01-00–6
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Specifications
ZJ ZY
Engine)
Catalyst Type WU-TWC (monolith)
Evaporative emission
Type Charcoal canister type
control system
PCV system Type Closed type
CHARGING SYSTEM
Voltage (V) 12
Battery Type and capacity
(A·h) 46B24L (36), 50D20L (40), 55D23L (48), 75D23L (52)
(5-hour rate)
Output (V-A) 12-90
Generator Regulated voltage
Controlled by PCM
Self diagnosis function
IGNITION SYSTEM
Type SEI
Spark advance Electronic
1—3—4—2 (all cylinders independent firing)
CYLINDER No.
CRANKSHAFT
ENGINE
PULLEY
Ignition system
Firing order 1
MTX: ZJ46 18 110, ZJY6 18 110 ZJ46 18 110,

Spark plug Type
CVT: ZY51 18 110, ZYY1 18 110 ZJY6 18 110
STARTING SYSTEM
Type Coaxial reduction
ZJ38*: 1.0
Starter
Output (kW) 1.0 ZJ45*: 1.4
ZJ71*: 1.0
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
Neutral switch (MTX) ON/OFF
CPP switch (MTX) ON/OFF
ECT sensor Thermistor
IAT sensor (Inside MAF sensor) Thermistor
PCM temperature sensor Thermistor
CKP sensor GMR element
CMP sensor GMR element
TP sensor Hall element
APP sensor Hall element
Current sensor (With current sensor) Hall element
MAF sensor Hot-wire
A/F sensor Zirconia element (All-range air/fuel ratio sensor)
HO2S Zirconia element (Stoichiometric air/fuel ratio sensor)
MAP sensor Piezoelectric element
KS Piezoelectric element
* : The first four digits of the part number indicated on the starter nameplate
01-00–7
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
STARTER NAMEPLATE
am2zzw0000266
Recommended engine oil

Specifications
Item
Europe Except Europe
API SL or ACEA API SL or ACEA API SL/SM or
Grade API SG/SH/SJ/SL/SM or ILSAC GF–2/GF–3/GF–4
A3/A5 A3 ACEA A3/A5
40, 30, 20W–20, 20, 10W–30, 10W–40, 10W–50,
Viscosity 5W–30, 5W–20,
5W–30 10W–40 20W–40, 15W–40, 20W–50, 15W–50, 5W–20, 5W–
(SAE) 10W–40
30, 5W–40
Remarks Mazda genuine Dexelia oil e.g. — —
Fuel type
Research octane
Fuel Country
number
Tahiti, Vanuatu, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, UAE,
Bahrain, Sri Lanka, Kenya, Antigua, European countries, New
Premium unleaded fuel Caledonia, Turkey, Israel, Jordan, Canary Island, Reunion,
95 or above
(Conforming to EN228)*1 Guadalupe, Martinique, French Guiana, Cyprus, South Africa,
Vanuatu, Lebanon, Tunisia, Morocco, El Salvador, Panama,
Honduras, Nicaragua, Taiwan
91 or above Peru
Regular unleaded fuel Hong Kong, The Philippines, Bolivia, B. Virgin, Curacao, St.
(Conforming to Fuel Quality Martin, Indonesia, Malaysia, Nepal, Fiji, Bermuda, Barbados,
90 or above Trinidad and Tobago, Thailand, Syria, Chile, Guatemala,
Standards Act 2000)*2
Venezuela, Costa Rica, Ecuador, Colombia, Dominican Republic,
Australia
*1
: Europe
*2
: Australia
01-00–8
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Specifications
Item
MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo
Oil cooler Type Water-cooled
Oil filter Type Full-flow, paper element
Total (dry engine) (L {US qt, lmp qt}) 4.2 {4.4, 3.7}
Oil capacity
Oil replacement (L {US qt, lmp qt}) 3.4 {3.6, 3.0}
(approx.
quantity) Oil and oil filter
(L {US qt, lmp qt}) 3.8 {4.0, 3.3}
replacement
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant capacity (approx. quantity) (L {US qt, lmp qt}) 6.2 {6.6, 5.5}
Water pump Type Centrifugal, timing belt-driven
Opening
Thermostat (qC {qF}) 83 {181}
temperature
Cap valve
Cooling system cap opening (kPa {kgf/cm2, psi}) 135—155 {1.38—1.58, 19.6—22.4}
pressure
Type Electric
Number of blades 9
Cooling fan
Outer diameter (mm {in}) 340 {13.4}
Fan motor output (W) 200
FUEL SYSTEM
Injector Type Piezo-actuator driven
Fuel pump Type Timing belt driven
Fuel tank Capacity (L {US gal, lmp gal}) 42.8 {11.3, 9.41}
Fuel Type EN590 or the equivalent
EMISSION SYSTEM
EGR valve Type Electric
Intake throttle valve Type Electric
CHARGING SYSTEM
Voltage (V) 12
(A·h) 80D26L (55)
(5-hour rate)
With PTC heater: 12—150
Generator Output (V-A)
Without PTC heater: 12—120
STARTING SYSTEM
Starter
Output (kW) 1.4
CONTROL SYSTEM
CPP switch Type ON/OFF
ECT sensor Type Thermistor
Fuel temperature sensor Type Thermistor
IAT sensor (Inside MAF) Type Thermistor
CKP sensor Type Hall effect device
CMP sensor Type Hall effect device
APP sensor Type Potentiometer
MAF sensor Type Hot wire
MAP sensor Type Piezoelectric element
Fuel pressure sensor Type Piezoelectric element
BPP switch Type ON/OFF
IAT sensor No.2 Type Thermistor
01-00–9
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Item Specifications
Grade API CF or ACEA B1/B3/B5 API CF or ACEA B3 API CD/CE/CF-4 or ACEA B3/B4
Viscosity (SAE) 5W-30 10W-40 5W-30, 10W-30
Remarks Mazda genuine Dexelia oil e.g. —
Engine Performance Curve

MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo
170
160 N·m /2,000rpm
160
150
TORQUE
140
130
(N·m)
120
110
100
90
80
70
50 kW/4,000rpm
60
OUTPUT
50
40
(kW) 30
20
10
0
0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000
ENGINE SPEED (rpm)
am2zzn0000099
01-00–10
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Specifications
Item
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)
Total (dry engine) (L {US qt, lmp qt}) 4.25 {4.49, 3.74}
Oil capacity
Oil replacement (L {US qt, lmp qt}) 3.5 {3.7, 3.1}
(approx.
quantity) Oil and oil filter
(L {US qt, lmp qt}) 3.9 {4.1, 3.4}
replacement
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant capacity (approx. quantity) (L {US qt, lmp qt}) 6.2 {6.6, 5.5}
Water pump Type Centrifugal, timing belt-driven
Cap valve
Cooling system cap opening (kPa {kgf/cm2, psi}) 135—155 {1.38—1.58, 19.6—22.4}
pressure
Type Electric
Number of blades 9
Cooling fan
Fan motor output (W) 200
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel pump Type Timing belt driven
Fuel tank Capacity (L {US gal, lmp gal}) 42.8 {11.3, 9.41}
Fuel Type EN590 or the equivalent
EMISSION SYSTEM
EGR valve Type Electric
Intake shutter valve type Type Electric
CHARGING SYSTEM
Voltage (V) 12
(A·h) 80D26L (55)
(5-hour rate)
With PTC heater: 12—150
Generator Output (V-A)
Without PTC heater: 12—120
STARTING SYSTEM
Starter
Output (kW) 1.4
CONTROL SYSTEM
CPP switch Type ON/OFF
ECT sensor Type Thermistor
Fuel temperature sensor Type Thermistor
IAT sensor (Inside MAF) Type Thermistor
CKP sensor Type Hall effect device
CMP sensor Type Hall effect device
APP sensor Type Potentiometer
MAF sensor Type Hot wire
MAP sensor Type Piezoelectric element
Fuel pressure sensor Type Piezoelectric element
BPP switch Type ON/OFF
IAT sensor No.2 Type Thermistor
01-00–11
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Item Specifications
Grade API CF or ACEA B1/B3/B5 API CF or ACEA B3 API CD/CE/CF-4 or ACEA B3/B4
Viscosity (SAE) 5W-30 10W-40 5W-30, 10W-30
Remarks Mazda genuine Dexelia oil e.g. —
Engine Performance Curve
205 N·m /1,500—2,500 rpm
240
TORQUE
220
200
180
160 ·m)
140
120
80
66 kW /4,000 rpm
70
60
OUT PUT
50
40
(kW)
30
20
10
0
1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000
ENGINE SPEED (rpm)
am2zzn0000120
End Of Sie
01-00–12
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ZJ, ZY]
01-02A ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ZJ, ZY]

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC OUTLINE KOER (Key ON, Engine Running)
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–1 Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–19
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–1 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–2 PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–20
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–3 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
With Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–3 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES FUNCTION
Without Immobilizer System. . . . . . . . . 01-02A–5 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–21
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
TEST MODE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–7 EXTERNAL DIAGNOSTIC UNIT
Sending Diagnostic Data COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
(Mode 01). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–7 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–22
Sending Freeze Frame Data Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–22
(Mode 02). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–8 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–22
Sending Emission-related Malfunction ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
Code (DTC) (Mode 03) . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–9 MALFUNCTION DISPLAY FUNCTION
Sending Continuous Monitoring System [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–22
Test Results (pending code) Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–22
(Mode 07). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–14 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–23
DTC DETECTION LOGIC AND ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
CONDITIONS [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–14 DIAGNOSTIC DATA MEMORY FUNCTION
KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . 01-02A–19 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–23
KOEO (Key ON, Engine Off) Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–23
Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–19 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–23
TO MODEL INDEX

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id01
02c0100100
Features
x The PCM performs self-diagnosis to check for malfunctions in the engine control system.
x If a malfunction occurs in the engine control system, the driver is notified.
x On-board diagnosis can be performed easily using an external tester.
To meet the EOBD regulations x Diagnostic test modes adopted
Improved serviceability x DTCs adopted
x KOEO/KOER self test function adopted
x PID/DATA monitor function adopted
x Active command modes function adopted
01-02A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

Block Diagram
CONTROL MODULE
OBD SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION
INDICATION MIL
FUNCTION
TESTER
MEMORY
COMMUNICATION DLC-2 (CAN)
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
INTEGRATED
ACTIVE
PID DATA DIAGNOSTIC
DETECTION COMMAND
MONITOR SOFTWARE
FUNCTION MODES
FUNCTION ( IDS)
FUNCTION
FAIL-SAFE
FUNCTION
INPUT DEVICE ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OUTPUT DEVICE
am2zzn0000127
End Of Sie
01-02A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0102c0122200
With Immobilizer System
PCM
GND2
GND1
B+
BODY GND
IG1
MAF/IAT SENSOR
2R
e 2V
PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
2U
2S
2Q g
2I
MAP SENSOR 2AO 2BC e
2AP
ECT SENSOR
2AC
2Z THROTTLE VALVE ACTUATOR

A/F SENSOR
2AD 2BF
a 2BE
2BG
2D
HO2S
2AH 2AQ IGNITION COIL NO.1
b
2AR IGNITION COIL NO.2
2J
2AU IGNITION COIL NO.3
2AV IGNITION COIL NO.4

GENERATOR 2AE
2X a
CMP SENSOR
g 2N
CKP SENSOR 2Y 2AB b

EGR VALVE
2M
WITH CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 2K e
BRAKE SWITCH NO.2 1I 2O

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
1AU 2P
2T
1AF 2AF TO GENERATOR
2BB
KS
2AN 2BD
1BH 2BH
1E 2BA
1Z 2AG
1B VARIABLE TUMBLE
APP SENSOR SHUTTER VALVE
1F 2AK
1AD WITH VARIABLE INTAKE

2AJ AIR SYSTEM
1C
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
SHUTTER VALVE
u v w x y z 2AI
am2zzn0000131
01-02A–3
TO MODEL INDEX
ATX
k 1BF u v w x y z PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
1P
h 1BB
1T
ATX
1BG
D
1K
1BC
E
BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 1O
1G A
1D SHIFT SOLENOID
B
1AO 1H
REFRIGERANT C
PRESSURE SWITCH 1L
(LOW, HIGH)
1AC
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH (MIDDLE)
A/C RELAY
MANUAL A/C 1AN
COOLING FAN
i 1AW RELAY NO.1
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE 1AV
SENSOR COOLING FAN
i 1AG RELAY NO.2
1AZ
MAIN RELAY
IG2
IG1
STA
ATX TFT SENSOR 1AJ
1AH h
1AS
TR SWITCH 1AQ k
f
VSS FUEL PUMP RELAY STARTER
h 1AX
BATTERY
2AZ
1R IGNITION SWITCH
1BE k
1V 1AE
INPUT/TURBINE CAN SYSTEM
SPEED SENSOR 1A RELATED MODUL
1AI
FULL-AUTO A/C
HOLD SWITCH
1N 1BA CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
1X
NO.1 FUEL PUMP
f
2A
MTX
2E
NEUTRAL SWITCH NO.2
1J 2B
CPP SWITCH
1M 2F
NO.3 FUEL
2C INJECTOR
2AX
2G
2AS NO.4
2H
2AT
BODY GND
2L
2AW
GND2
OCV
GND1
g
IG1
+B
TP SENSOR 2W
PCM
am2zzw0000462
01-02A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

Without Immobilizer System
PCM
GND2
GND1
B+
BODY GND
IG1
MAF/IAT SENSOR
2R
e 2V
2U
2S
2Q g
2I
2AP
ECT SENSOR
2AC

A/F SENSOR
2AD 2BF
a 2BE
2BG
2D
HO2S
b
2J
GENERATOR 2AE
CMP SENSOR
g 2N 2X a
CKP SENSOR 2Y
2M 2AB b
WITH CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM EGR VALVE
BRAKE SWITCH NO.2 2K e
1I
2O
1AU
2P
1AF 2T
2AF TO GENERATOR
WITH CURRENT SENSOR
CURRENT •• • • • • 2BB
••
SENSOR
•• •••• 2BD
2AN 2BH
KS 1BH 2BA
1E 2AG
VARIABLE TUMBLE
1Z SHUTTER VALVE
1B 2AK
APP SENSOR
1F WITH VARIABLE INTAKE
2AJ AIR SYSTEM
1AD VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
SHUTTER VALVE
1C 2AI
u v w x y z
am2zzn0000131
01-02A–5
TO MODEL INDEX
ATX
k 1BF y z
u v w x PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
1P
h 1BB
1T
ATX
1BG
D
1K
1BC
E
1G A
1D SHIFT SOLENOID
B
1AO 1H
REFRIGERANT C
PRESSURE SWITCH 1L
(LOW, HIGH)
1AC
A/C RELAY
MANUAL A/C 1AN
COOLING FAN RELAY
i 1AW NO.1
1AV
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
COOLING FAN RELAY
SENSOR
i 1AG NO.2
1AZ
MAIN RELAY
IG2
IG1
STA
1AJ
ATX TFT SENSOR h STARTER
1AH
1AS
1AR k
TR SWITCH f
FUEL PUMP RELAY
VSS
h 1AX
BATTERY
2AZ
1R 1BE k IGNITION SWITCH
1V 1AE
CAN SYSTEM
INPUT/TURBINE
RELATED
SPEED SENSOR 1A 1AI
FULL-AUTO A/C
HOLD SWITCH
1N
1BA CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
NO.1 FUEL PUMP

f
2A
MTX
2E
NEUTRAL SWITCH NO.2
1J 2B
CPP SWITCH
1M 2F
NO.3 FUEL
2C INJECTOR
2AX
2G
2AS NO.4
2H
2AT
BODY GND
2L
2AW
GND2
GND1
OCV
IG1
+B
TP SENSOR 2W g
PCM
am2zzw0000462
End Of Sie
01-02A–6
TO MODEL INDEX

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM TEST MODE [ZJ, ZY]
id0102c0142500
x To match the OBD regulations, the following diagnostic test modes have been supported.
Diagnostic test mode Item
Mode 01 Sending diagnostic data (PID data monitor/On-board system readiness test)
Mode 02 Sending freeze frame data
Mode 03 Sending emission-related malfunction code (Diagnostic trouble code: DTC)
Mode 04 Clearing/resetting emission-related malfunction information
Mode 06 Sending intermittent monitoring system test results (DMTR)
Mode 07 Sending continuous monitoring system test results (pending code)
Mode 09 Request vehicle information
Sending Diagnostic Data (Mode 01)

PID data monitor
x The PID data monitor items are shown below.
PID data monitor table
Full names Unit
Monitor status since DTCs cleared No unit
Fuel system loop status Refer to list below.
LOAD %
ECT qC qF
Short term fuel trim %
Long term fuel trim %
MAP kPa
Engine speed rpm
Vehicle speed km/h mph
Spark advance q
IAT qC qF
MAF g/s
Absolute TP %
A/F sensor, HO2S location No unit
Input voltage from HO2S V
Short term fuel trim associated with HO2S %
OBD requirement according to vehicle design No unit
Time since engine start s
Distance travelled while MIL is activated km miles
EGR valve control signal %
Purge solenoid valve control signal %
Number of warm-ups since DTCs cleared No unit
Distance travelled since DTCs cleared km miles
Barometric pressure kPa
Lambda —
A/F sensor output current mA
Estimated catalyst converter temperature qC qF
Monitor status this driving cycle No unit
PCM voltage V
Absolute load value %
Theoretical air/fuel ratio coefficient to calculate target air/fuel ratio No unit
Relative TP %
TP from TP sensor No.2 %
APP from APP sensor No.1 %
APP from APP sensor No.2 %
Throttle actuator control signal %
Meaning of fuel system loop status

x The following information is displayed on the tester
— Feedback stops: ECT is lower than the determined feedback zone
— Feedback operating: A/F sensor, HO2S being used for feedback is normal
01-02A–7
TO MODEL INDEX

— Feedback stops: Open loop due to driving condition
— Feedback stops: Open loop due to detected system fault
— Feedback operating: Malfunction occurred in HO2S system
Sending Freeze Frame Data (Mode 02)

Freeze frame data
x The freeze frame data consists of data for vehicle and engine control system operation conditions when
malfunctions in the engine control system are detected and stored in the PCM.
x Freeze frame data is stored at the instant the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates, and only a part of the DTC
data is stored.
x For the freeze frame data, if there are several malfunctions in the engine control system, the data for the
malfunction which occurred initially is stored. Thereafter, if a misfire or fuel injection control malfunction occurs,
data from the misfire or fuel injection control malfunction is written over the initially stored data. However, if the
initially stored freeze frame data is a misfire or fuel injection control malfunction, it is not overwritten.
Snapshot data
x The snap shot data stores the currently detected DTC data.
x The recording timing for the freeze frame data/snap shot data differs depending on the number of DTC drive
cycles.
— For a DTC with a drive cycle number 1, only the malfunction determination data is recorded.
— For a DTC with a drive cycle number 2, both the malfunction determination and undetermined data is
recorded.
Freeze frame data table

Corresponding
Freeze frame data
Unit Description PID data monitor
item
item
Open Loop/
Closed
Loop/OL-
FUELSYS1 Fuel system status FUELSYS
Drive/OL-
Fault/CL-
Fault
LOAD % Calculated engine load —
ECT qC Engine coolant temperature ECT
SFT1 % Short term fuel trim SHRTFT1
LFT1 % Long term fuel trim LONGFT1
MAP kPa Manifold absolute pressure MAP
RPM RPM Engine speed RPM
VS KPH Vehicle speed VSS
SPARKADV ° Ignition timing SPARKADV
IAT qC Intake air temperature IAT
MAF g/sec Mass airflow MAF
TP % Throttle valve position No.1 TP1
RUNTM hh:mm:ss Time from engine start —
EGRPCT % Target EGR valve position SEGRP_DSD
EVAPPCT % Purge solenoid valve controlled value EVAPCP
WARMUPS — Number of warm-up cycle after DTC cleared —
CLRDIST Km Mileage after DTC cleared —
BARO kPa Barometric pressure —
CATTEMP11 qC Estimated catalytic converter temperature —
VPWR V Module supply voltage VPWR
ALV % Engine load LOAD
TP_REL % Relative throttle position TP REL
TP_B % Throttle valve position No.2 TP2
APP_D % Accelerator pedal position No.1 APP1
APP_E % Accelerator pedal position No.2 APP2
TAC_PCT % Target throttle valve position ETC_DSD
01-02A–8
TO MODEL INDEX

Snapshot data table
Corresponding
Snapshot data
Unit Definition PID data monitor
item
item
OL/CL/OL-
Drive/OL-
FUELSYS Fuel system status FUELSYS
Fault/CL-
Fault
LOAD_C % Calculated engine load —
ECT qC Engine coolant temperature ECT
SHRTFT1 % Short term fuel trim SHRTFT1
LONGFT1 % Long term fuel trim LONGFT1
MAP Pa Manifold absolute pressure MAP
VSS KPH Vehicle speed VSS
IAT qC Intake air temperature IAT
MAF g/sec Mass airflow MAF
TP1 % Throttle valve position No.1 TP1
EG_RUN_TIME — Time from engine start —
SEGRP_DSD % Target EGR valve position SEGRP DSD
EVAPCP % Purge solenoid valve controlled value EVAPCP
FLI % Fuel level in fuel tank —
CLR_CNT — Number of warm-up cycle after DTC cleared —
CLR_DIST km Mileage after DTC cleared —
FTP Pa Fuel tank pressure —
BARO Pa Barometric pressure —
CATT11_DSD qC Estimated catalytic converter temperature —
LOAD % Engine load LOAD
EQ_RAT11_DSD — Target equivalence ratio (lambda) EQ_RAT11_DSD
TP REL % Relative throttle position TP REL
AAT qC Ambient air temperature —
APP1 % Accelerator pedal position No.1 APP1
ETC_DSD % Target throttle valve position ETC_DSD
Sending Emission-related Malfunction Code (DTC) (Mode 03)

x The DTCs are shown below.
u: Applicable
—: Not applicable
Generator Self Test Memory
DTC No. Condition MIL Warning DC Monitor Item
Light Type*1 Function
P0011:00 CMP-timing over-advanced ON OFF 1 CCM C, R u
P0012:00 CMP-timing over-retarded ON OFF 2 CCM C, R u
A/F sensor heater,
P0030:00 A/F sensor heater control circuit problem ON OFF 2 C, O, R u
HO2S heater
A/F sensor heater,
P0031:00 A/F sensor heater control circuit low input ON OFF 2 C, O, R u
HO2S heater
A/F sensor heater control circuit high A/F sensor heater,
P0032:00 ON OFF 2 C, O, R u
input HO2S heater
A/F sensor heater,
P0037:00 HO2S heater control circuit low input ON OFF 2 C, O, R u
HO2S heater
A/F sensor heater,
P0038:00 HO2S heater control circuit high input ON OFF 2 C, O, R u
HO2S heater
01-02A–9
TO MODEL INDEX

MAF sensor circuit range/performance
P0101:00*6 problem ON OFF 2 CCM C u
P0102:00 MAF sensor circuit low input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0103:00 MAF sensor circuit high input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0107:00 MAP sensor circuit low input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0108:00 MAP sensor circuit high input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
IAT sensor circuit range/performance
P0111:00*6 problem ON OFF 2 CCM C u
P0112:00 IAT sensor circuit low input ON ON 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0113:00 IAT sensor circuit high input ON ON 1 CCM C, O, R u
Engine cooling
P0117:00 ECT sensor circuit low input ON OFF 1 C, O, R u
system
Engine cooling
P0118:00 ECT sensor circuit high input ON OFF 1 C, O, R u
system
P0122:00 TP sensor No.1 circuit low input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0123:00 TP sensor No.1 circuit high input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
Insufficient coolant temperature for Engine cooling
P0125:00*6 ON OFF 2 C u
closed loop fuel control system
P0130:00 A/F sensor circuit problem ON OFF 2 A/F sensor, HO2S C, O, R u
P0131:00 A/F sensor circuit low input ON OFF 2 A/F sensor, HO2S C, O, R u
P0132:00 A/F sensor circuit high input ON OFF 2 A/F sensor, HO2S C, O, R u
P0134:00 A/F sensor circuit no activity detected ON OFF 2 A/F sensor, HO2S C, R u
P0138:00 HO2S circuit high input ON OFF 2 A/F sensor, HO2S C, O, R u
P0140:00 HO2S circuit no activity detected ON OFF 2 A/F sensor, HO2S C, R u
P0222:00 TP sensor No.2 circuit low input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0223:00 TP sensor No.2 circuit high input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
Flash
P0300:00 Random misfire detected OFF 2 Misfire C, R u
/ON
Flash
P0301:00 Cylinder No.1 misfire detected OFF 2 Misfire C, R u
/ON
Flash
/ON
Flash
/ON
Flash
/ON
P0327:00 KS circuit low input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0328:00 KS circuit high input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0335:00 CKP sensor circuit problem ON OFF 1 CCM C, R u
P0340:00 CMP sensor circuit problem ON OFF 1 CCM C, R u
P0351:00*6 Ignition coil No.1 circuit problem ON OFF 2 CCM C, R u
P0352:00 *6 Ignition coil No.2 circuit problem ON OFF 2 CCM C, R u
P0401:00 *6 EGR flow insufficient detected ON OFF 2 EGR system C, R u
P0403:00 EGR control circuit problem ON OFF 2 CCM C, O, R u
P0443:00 Purge solenoid valve circuit problem ON OFF 2 CCM C, O, R u
Cooling fan relay No.1 control circuit
P0480:00 OFF OFF 1 Other C, O, R u
problem
Cooling fan relay No.2 control circuit
problem
P0500:00 VSS circuit problem ON OFF 2 CCM C u
*5 IAC system problem OFF OFF — Other R —
P0505:00
P0506:00 *6 IAC system RPM lower than expected ON OFF 2 CCM C u
01-02A–10
TO MODEL INDEX

P0507:00*6 lAC system RPM higher than expected ON OFF 2 CCM C u

Evaporator temperature sensor circuit
P0537:00*2 low input OFF OFF 1 Other C, O, R u
P0538:00*2 high input OFF OFF 1 Other C, O, R u
P0601:00 PCM memory check sum error ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0602:00 PCM programming error ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0604:00 PCM RAM error ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0606:00 PCM processor error ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P0610:00 PCM vehicle configuration error ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
Throttle valve actuator control circuit
P0638:00 ON OFF 1 CCM C u
range/performance problem
P0668:00 PCM temperature sensor circuit low input OFF OFF 1 Other C, O, R u
PCM temperature sensor circuit high
input
P0703:00*6 Brake switch input circuit problem ON OFF 2 CCM C u
P0704:00 *4 CPP switch circuit malfunction ON OFF 2 CCM C u
P0850:00 *4 Neutral switch input circuit problem ON OFF 2 CCM C u
*3 Immobilizer system problem OFF OFF — Other C, O —
P1260:00
P1515:00 *6 Current sensor circuit problem OFF OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
Variable tumble control circuit
P2008:00 ON OFF 2 CCM C, O, R u
malfunction
Variable valve timing control circuit low
input
Variable valve timing control circuit high
input
P2096:00 Target A/F feedback system too lean ON OFF 2 Fuel system C u
P2097:00 Target A/F feedback system too rich ON OFF 2 Fuel system C u
Throttle valve actuator power supply
P2101:00 ON OFF 1 CCM C, R u
circuit problem
Throttle valve actuator control module
processor error
performance error
TP sensor minimum stop range/
performance problem
Throttle valve actuator control system
range/performance problem
Throttle valve actuator control throttle
body range/performance problem
P2122:00 APP sensor No.1 circuit low input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P2123:00 APP sensor No.1 circuit high input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P2127:00 APP sensor No.2 circuit low input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
P2128:00 APP sensor No.2 circuit high input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
TP sensor No.1/No.2 voltage correlation
problem
APP sensor No.1/No.2 voltage
correlation problem
P2177:00 Fuel system too lean at off idle ON OFF 2 Fuel system C, R u
P2178:00 Fuel system too rich at off idle ON OFF 2 Fuel system C, R u
P2187:00 Fuel system too lean at idle ON OFF 2 Fuel system C, R u
P2188:00 Fuel system too rich at idle ON OFF 2 Fuel system C, R u
P2195:00 A/F sensor signal stuck lean ON OFF 2 A/F sensor, HO2S C u
P2196:00 A/F sensor signal stuck rich ON OFF 2 A/F sensor, HO2S C u
P2502:00 Charging system voltage problem OFF ON 1 Other C, R u
01-02A–11
TO MODEL INDEX

P2503:00 Charging system voltage low input OFF ON 1 Other C, R u
P2504:00 Charging system voltage high input OFF ON 1 Other C, R u
P2507:00 PCM power input signal low input ON OFF 1 CCM C, O, R u
U3000:41 PCM processor error OFF OFF — Other C, O —
*1
: C; CMDTC self test, O; KOEO self test, R; KOER self test
*2 : With manual air conditioner
*3
: With immobilizer system
*4
: MTX
*5 : KOER self test only
*6
: If equipped
Sending Continuous Monitoring System Test Results (pending code) (Mode 07)
x These appear when a problem is detected in a monitored system.
1-drive cycle type

x If any problems are detected in the first drive cycle, pending codes will be stored in the PCM memory, as well
as DTCs.
x After pending codes are stored, if the PCM determines that the system is normal in any future drive cycle, the
PCM deletes the pending codes.
2-drive cycle type

x The code for a failed system is stored in the PCM memory in the first drive cycle. If the PCM determines that
the system returned to normal or the problem was mistakenly detected, and deletes the pending code. If the
problem is found in the second drive cycle too, the PCM determines that the system has failed, and stores the
pending codes, and the DTCs.
x After pending codes are stored, if the PCM determines that the system is normal in any future drive cycle, the
PCM deletes the pending codes.
End Of Sie
DTC DETECTION LOGIC AND CONDITIONS [ZJ, ZY]
id0102c0100300
DTC No. Condition Detection condition

x If the actual valve timing advances excessively against the target
P0011:00 CMP-timing over-advanced valve timing with the following condition met:
— Variable valve timing control: maximum cam retard mode
x If the actual valve timing retards excessively against the target valve
P0012:00 CMP-timing over-retarded timing with the following condition met:
— Variable valve timing control: feedback hold mode
x If the A/F sensor impedance is 44 ohms or more for 20 s or more
A/F sensor heater control circuit
P0030:00 even though the A/F sensor heater control is operated for 200 s
problem
(MTX, CVT)/823 s (ATX).
x If the input voltage to the A/F sensor heater drive terminal in the PCM
A/F sensor heater control circuit low
P0031:00 is low for 1 s or more even though the A/F sensor is duty-controlled at
input
under 90% by the PCM.
x If the input voltage to the A/F sensor heater drive terminal in the PCM
A/F sensor heater control circuit high
P0032:00 is high for 1 s or more even though the A/F sensor is duty-controlled
input
at 10% or more by the PCM.
x If the input voltage to the HO2S heater drive terminal in the PCM is
P0037:00 HO2S heater control circuit low input low for 0.5 s or more even though the HO2S is duty-controlled at
under 90% by the PCM.
x If the input voltage to the HO2S heater drive terminal in the PCM is
P0038:00 HO2S heater control circuit high input high for 0.5 s or more even though the HO2S is duty-controlled at
10% or more by the PCM.
01-02A–12
TO MODEL INDEX

x The PCM monitors mass intake air flow amount when the engine is
running.
— If the mass intake air flow amount is above 96 g/s for 5 s and the
engine speed is less than 2,000 rpm with the engine running and
engine coolant temperature is more than 70 qC {158 qF}, the PCM
MAF sensor circuit range/ determines that the detected mass intake air flow amount is too
P0101:00*5 performance problem high.
— If the mass intake air flow amount is below 5 g/s for 5 s and the
engine speed is above 500 rpm with engine running and the
throttle opening angle more than 50% with the engine running, the
PCM determines that detected the mass intake air flow amount is
too low.
x If the input voltage is less than 0.21 V, the PCM determines that the
P0102:00 MAF sensor circuit low input
MAF sensor circuit has a malfunction.
x If the input voltage is more than 4.9 V, the PCM determines that the
P0103:00 MAF sensor circuit high input
MAF sensor circuit has a malfunction.
P0107:00 MAP sensor circuit low input
MAP sensor circuit has a malfunction.
P0108:00 MAP sensor circuit high input
MAP sensor circuit has a malfunction.
x The PCM compares the IAT with the ECT when the engine is running.
IAT sensor circuit range/performance If the IAT is higher than the ECT by 40 qC {72 qF} for 60 s, the PCM
P0111:00*5 problem determines that there is an IAT sensor circuit range/performance
problem.
x If the PCM detects that the IAT sensor voltage is less than 0.16 V, the
P0112:00 IAT sensor circuit low input
PCM determines that the IAT sensor circuit has a malfunction.
P0113:00 IAT sensor circuit high input
IAT sensor circuit has a malfunction.
x If the PCM detects that the ECT sensor voltage is less than 0.2 V, the
P0117:00 ECT sensor circuit low input
PCM determines that the ECT sensor circuit has a malfunction.
x If the PCM detects that the ECT sensor voltage is more than 4.9 V,
P0118:00 ECT sensor circuit high input
the PCM determines that the ECT sensor circuit has a malfunction.
x If the PCM detects that the TP sensor No.1 voltage is less than 0.1 V
P0122:00 TP sensor No.1 circuit low input while the engine is running, the PCM determines that the TP sensor
No.1 circuit has a malfunction.
x If the PCM detects that the TP sensor No.1 voltage is more than 4.9 V
P0123:00 TP sensor No.1 circuit high input after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the PCM
determines that the TP sensor No.1 circuit has a malfunction.
x The PCM monitors the ECT after cold engine start. If the ECT does
Insufficient coolant temperature for
P0125:00*5 closed loop fuel control not reach the specification in a certain period, the PCM determines
that the ECT for closed loop fuel control is insufficient.
x If the A/F sensor electrical resistance is 500 ohms or more for 2 s or
P0130:00 A/F sensor circuit problem
more even though the A/F sensor heater is operated.
x If the voltage for control of the A/F sensor in the PCM is 1.13 V (+
P0131:00 A/F sensor circuit low input
terminal) or lower, or 0.64 V ( terminal) or lower.
x If the voltage for control of the A/F sensor in the PCM is 3.59 V (+
P0132:00 A/F sensor circuit high input
terminal) or lower, or 3.54 V ( terminal) or lower.
x If the A/F sensor element impedance is 40 ohms or more even though
P0134:00 A/F sensor circuit no activity detected
54 s have elapsed since the heater was energized.
x If the input voltage is 1.2 V or more for 0.8 s or more, the PCM
P0138:00 HO2S circuit high input
determines that the HO2S circuit voltage is high.
x If the input voltage from the HO2S never exceeds 0.55 V for 30.4 s or
P0140:00 HO2S circuit no activity detected
more, the PCM determines that the HO2S circuit is not activated.
x If the input voltage is less than 0.1 V, the PCM determines that the TP
P0222:00 TP sensor No.2 circuit low input
sensor No.2 circuit input voltage is low.
P0223:00 TP sensor No.2 circuit high input
TP sensor No.2 circuit input voltage is high.
01-02A–13
TO MODEL INDEX

x The PCM monitors the CKP sensor input signal interval time. The
PCM calculates the change of interval time for each cylinder. If
change of interval time exceeds the preprogrammed criteria, the
PCM detects misfire in the corresponding cylinder. While the engine
is running, the PCM counts the number of misfires that occurred at
P0300:00 Random misfire detected
200 crankshaft revolutions and 1,000 crankshaft revolutions and
calculates the misfire ratio for each crankshaft revolution. If the ratio
exceeds the preprogrammed criteria, the PCM determines that a
misfire, which can damage the catalytic converter or affect emission
performance, has occurred.
P0301:00 Cylinder No.1 misfire detected x The PCM monitors the CKP sensor input signal interval time. The
P0302:00 Cylinder No.2 misfire detected PCM calculates the change of interval time for each cylinder. If the
change of interval time exceeds the preprogrammed criteria, the
P0303:00 Cylinder No.3 misfire detected PCM detects a misfire in the corresponding cylinder. While the engine
is running, the PCM counts the number of misfires that occurred at
200 crankshaft revolutions and 1,000 crankshaft revolutions and
P0304:00 Cylinder No.4 misfire detected calculates the misfire ratio for each crankshaft revolution. If the ratio
exceeds the preprogrammed criteria, the PCM determines that a
misfire, which can damage the catalytic converter or affect emission
performance, has occurred.
P0327:00 KS circuit low input
KS circuit has a malfunction.
P0328:00 KS circuit high input
KS circuit has a malfunction.
x If the PCM does not receive the input voltage from the CKP sensor for
P0335:00 CKP sensor circuit problem 4.2 s or more while the MAF is 1.43 g/s {0.189 lb/min} or more, the
PCM determines that there is a CKP sensor circuit problem.
x If there is no CMP sensor signal input even though there is a CKP
sensor signal input.
P0340:00 CMP sensor circuit problem
x If a malfunction is detected in the input pulse pattern from the CMP
sensor.
x The PCM monitors ignition signal to the ignition coil No.1 when the
following condition. If the ignition signal is not changed, the PCM
P0351:00*5 Ignition coil No.1 circuit problem determines that the ignition coil No.1 circuit has a malfunction.
MONITORING CONDITIONS
— Battery voltage: 11—15 V
x PCM monitors the difference in intake manifold pressures when the
P0401:00*5 EGR flow insufficient detected EGR is operated and when it is stopped. If the difference is too small,
the PCM determines that the EGR flow is insufficient.
x If the voltage of the EGR valve control signal remains low or high, the
P0403:00 EGR control circuit problem
PCM determines that there is the EGR valve control circuit problem.
x If the voltage of the purge solenoid valve control signal remains low or
P0443:00 Purge solenoid valve circuit problem high, the PCM determines that there is a purge solenoid valve control
circuit problem.
Cooling fan relay No.1 control circuit x If the voltage remain low or high, the PCM determines that the cooling
P0480:00
problem fan relay No.1 control has a malfunction.
Cooling fan relay No.2 control circuit x If the voltage remain low or high, the PCM determines that the cooling
P0481:00
problem fan relay No.2 control has a malfunction.
P0500:00 VSS circuit problem x If the wheel speed input via CAN from the ABS HU/CM is abnormal.
01-02A–14
TO MODEL INDEX

x The PCM cannot control idle speed toward target idle speed while
P0505:00*4 IAC system problem KOER self test.
x The actual idle speed is lower than expected by 100 rpm for 14 s
when the brake pedal is depressed (brake switch is on).
P0506:00*5 IAC system RPM lower than expected Note
x If the intake air temperature is below 10 qC {14 qF}, the PCM
cancels the diagnosis of DTC P0506:00.
x The actual idle speed is higher than expected by 200 rpm for 14 s
when the brake pedal is depressed (brake switch is on).
lAC system RPM higher than
P0507:00*5 expected Note
x If the intake air temperature is below 10 qC {14 qF}, the PCM
cancels diagnosis of DTC P0507:00.
x If the input voltage is less than 0.08 V for 16 s or more, the PCM
P0537:00*1 low input determines that the evaporator temperature sensor circuit has a
malfunction.
x If the input voltage is 4.9 V or more for 16 s or more, the PCM
P0538:00*1 high input determines that the evaporator temperature sensor circuit has a
malfunction.
P0601:00 PCM memory check sum error x The PCM internal malfunction.
P0602:00 PCM programming error x No configuration data in the PCM.
P0604:00 PCM RAM error x The PCM internal RAM error.
P0606:00 PCM processor error x If the CPU in the PCM has a malfunction.
P0610:00 PCM vehicle configuration error x The PCM data configuration error.
Throttle valve actuator control circuit x If the difference between the actual and target throttle positions is
P0638:00
range/performance problem within the specification.
x If the PCM detects that the PCM temperature sensor voltage is less
PCM temperature sensor circuit low
P0668:00 than the specification, the PCM determines that the PCM
input
temperature sensor has a malfunction.
x If the PCM detects that the PCM temperature sensor voltage is more
PCM temperature sensor circuit high
P0669:00 than the specification, the PCM determines that the PCM
input
temperature sensor has a malfunction.
x The PCM monitors the input signal from the brake switch. If the input
signal does not change while following decelerating 8 times, the PCM
determines that there is a brake switch input circuit problem.
P0703:00*5 Brake switch input circuit problem MONITORING CONDITIONS
— Vehicle speed is from above 30 km/h {19 mph} to 30 km/h {19
mph} or less
— Deceleration rate exceeds 2.35 km/h {1.5 mph} per 1 s
x The PCM monitors the input signal from the CPP switch. If the input
signal does not change while following decelerating 8 times, the PCM
determines that there is a CPP switch input circuit problem.
P0704:00*3 CPP switch circuit malfunction MONITORING CONDITIONS
— Vehicle speed: from above 30 km/h {19 mph} to 30 km/h {19 mph}
or less
x The PCM monitors changes in input voltage from neutral switch. If the
PCM does not detect voltage changes while running vehicle with
P0850:00*3 Neutral switch input circuit problem vehicle speed 30 km/h {19 mph} or more and clutch pedal turns press
and depress 10 times repeatedly, the PCM determines that there is a
neutral switch circuit problem.
Without advanced keyless and start system:
x If the instrument cluster detects a malfunction in the immobilizer
system.
P1260:00*2 Immobilizer system problem With advanced keyless and start system:
x If the keyless control module detects a malfunction in the immobilizer
system.
x The PCM monitors the input voltage from the current sensor. If the
P1515:00*5 Current sensor circuit problem input voltage is less than 0.24 V or more than 4.89 V, the PCM
determines that there is a current sensor circuit problem.
01-02A–15
TO MODEL INDEX

x If the PCM turns the variable tumble shutter valve actuator to open or
close but voltages do not coincide with the PCM signal voltages the
Variable tumble control circuit
P2008:00 PCM determines that the variable tumble control circuit has a
malfunction
malfunction.
x Variable tumble control IC error.
x If the variable valve timing control current is lower than the
Variable valve timing control circuit
P2088:00 specification even though the target duty ratio for the variable valve
low input
timing control is 99% or higher.
x If the PCM detects that the OCV drive current is as specified or more
Variable valve timing control circuit
P2089:00 when the OCV control duty target is 3% or less, the PCM determines
high input
that the variable valve timing control circuit is high.
x If the fuel correction amount corresponding to the HO2S target
P2096:00 Target A/F feedback system too lean voltage exceeds the specified value while performing HO2S feedback
correction.
x If the fuel correction amount corresponding to the HO2S target
P2097:00 Target A/F feedback system too rich voltage is lower than the specified value while performing HO2S
feedback correction.
x The PCM turns the main relay on but the input voltage is 5.0 V or
Throttle valve actuator power supply
P2101:00 less, the PCM determines that the main relay control circuit voltage is
circuit problem
low.
P2107:00 x The PCM internal malfunction.
processor error
P2108:00 x The PCM internal malfunction.
performance error
TP sensor minimum stop range/ x If the fully-open throttle position is 5.1 q or lower, or 15.9 q or more
P2109:00
performance problem even though the fully-open throttle position learning is finished.
Throttle valve actuator control system x If the duty ratio is 95% or more, the PCM determines that there is a
P2112:00
range/performance problem throttle valve actuator control system range/performance problem.
x The PCM compares the actual TP with initial setting TP when the
Throttle valve actuator control throttle ignition switch is turned off. If the TP is lower than the initial setting
P2119:00
body range/performance problem TP, the PCM determines that there is a throttle valve return spring
malfunction.
x If the input voltage is 0.35 V or less, the PCM determines that the
P2122:00 APP sensor No.1 circuit low input
APP sensor No.1 circuit input voltage is low.
x If the input voltage is 4.8 V or more, the PCM determines that the
P2123:00 APP sensor No.1 circuit high input
APP sensor No.1 circuit input voltage is high.
x If the input voltage is 0.35 V or less, the PCM determines that the
P2127:00 APP sensor No.2 circuit low input
APP sensor No.2 circuit input voltage is low.
x If the input voltage is 4.8 V or more, the PCM determines that the
P2128:00 APP sensor No.2 circuit high input
APP sensor No.2 circuit input voltage is high.
x The PCM compares the input voltage from TP sensor No.1 with the
TP sensor No.1/No.2 voltage input voltage from TP sensor No.2 when the engine is running. If the
P2135:00
correlation problem difference is more than the specification, the PCM determines that
there is a TP sensor No.1/No.2 voltage correlation problem.
x The PCM compares the input voltage from APP sensor No.1 with the
APP sensor No.1/No.2 voltage input voltage from APP sensor No.2 when the engine is running. If the
P2138:00
correlation problem difference is more than the specification, the PCM determines that
there is a APP sensor No.1/No.2 voltage correlation problem.
x The PCM monitors short term fuel trim (SHRTFT) and long term fuel
trim (LONGFT) during closed loop fuel control during off-idle. If the
P2177:00 Fuel system too lean at off idle LONGFT or the sum total of these fuel trims exceed preprogrammed
criteria, the PCM determines that fuel system is too lean during off-
idle.
trim (LONGFT) during closed loop fuel control at off-idle. If the
P2178:00 Fuel system too rich at off idle
LONGFT or the sum total of these fuel trims exceed preprogrammed
criteria, the PCM determines that fuel system is too rich at off-idle.
trim (LONGFT) during closed loop fuel control during idle. If the
P2187:00 Fuel system too lean at idle LONGFT or the sum total of these fuel trims and correction exceed
preprogrammed criteria, the PCM determines that fuel system is too
lean during idle.
01-02A–16
TO MODEL INDEX

x The PCM monitors the short term fuel trim (SHRTFT) and long term
fuel trim (LONGFT) during the closed loop fuel control at idle. If the
P2188:00 Fuel system too rich at idle LONGFT or the sum total of these fuel terms exceed the
preprogrammed criteria, the PCM determines that fuel system is too
rich at idle.
x The PCM monitors the A/F sensor output current when the following
conditions are met. If the input is 1.15 or more for 25 s, the PCM
determines that the A/F sensor signal remains lean.
P2195:00 A/F sensor signal stuck lean — ECT: 70 qC {158 qF} or more
— Engine speed: 1,000—3,200 rpm
— MAF amount: 6—80 g/s {0.80—10.58 lb/min}
— Target A/F feedback system status: feedback control
— Output voltage from the HO2S: 0.8 V or more
x The PCM monitors the A/F sensor output current when the following
conditions are met. If the input is 0.85 or less for 25 s, the PCM
determines that the A/F sensor signal remains rich.
P2196:00 A/F sensor signal stuck rich — ECT: 70 qC {158 qF} or more
— Engine speed: 1,000—3,200 rpm
— MAF amount: 6—80 g/s {0.80—10.58 lb/min}
— Target A/F feedback system status: feedback control
— Output voltage from the HO2S: 0.2 V or less
x The PCM determines that the generator output voltage is 17 V or
P2502:00 Charging system voltage problem
more or the battery voltage is 11 V or less while the engine running.
x If 5 s or more have elapsed with the generator output voltage 8.49 V
or lower and the battery output voltage 10 V or more even though the
P2503:00 Charging system voltage low input
generator target output current while the engine is running is 19.5 A
or more.
x The PCM determines that the generator output voltage is 18.5 V or
P2504:00 Charging system voltage high input
more or battery voltage is 16.0 V or more while the engine running.
x The PCM monitors the voltage of the backup battery positive
terminal. If the PCM detects that the battery positive terminal voltage
P2507:00 PCM power input signal low input
is 2.5 V or less for 2 s, the PCM determines that the backup voltage
circuit has a malfunction.
U3000:41 PCM processor error x The PCM internal EEPROM malfunction.
*1
: With manual air conditioner
*2 : With immobilizer system
*3
: MTX
*4
: KOER self test only
*5 : If equipped
End Of Sie
KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST [ZJ, ZY]
id0102c0100400
x On-board diagnosis is performed using the flow pre-set in the PCM, and according to the test execute
command sent to the PCM from the external tester.
x If a malfunction is detected as a result of the on-board diagnosis, a DTC is recorded in the PCM.
x Refer to the self test table for DTCs corresponding to the self-test function.
KOEO (Key ON, Engine Off) Self Test

x The KOEO self test is a powertrain control system self-diagnosis, performed when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position and the engine is stopped. A KOEO self test begins when the connected IDS sends an
execute command to the PCM.
x As the KOEO self test is performed, the PCM performs the inspection for set DTCs and if a malfunction is
detected, the DTC is displayed on the IDS
KOER (Key ON, Engine Running) Self Test

x The KOER self test is a powertrain control system self-diagnosis, performed when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position and the engine is idling. A KOER self test begins when the connected IDS sends an
execute command to the PCM.
x As the KOER self test is performed, the PCM performs the inspection for set DTCs and if a malfunction is
detected the DTC is displayed on the IDS
End Of Sie
01-02A–17
TO MODEL INDEX

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0102c0142100
x The PID/DATA monitor items are shown below.
PID/DATA monitor item table
—: Not applicable
Item Definition Unit/Condition
A/CL V A/C load signal voltage V
A/CT*1 Evaporator temperature qC qF
A/CT *2 — qC qF
*1 Evaporator temperature signal voltage V
A/CT V
A/CT V*2 — V
AC_REQ Refrigerant pressure switch (low) Off/On
ACCS A/C relay On/Off
AFR Target air-fuel ratio —
AFR_ACT Actual air-fuel ratio —
ALT_CUR_S*6 Current sensor V
ALTF Generator field coil control duty value %
ALTT V Generator output voltage V
APP*3 Accelerator pedal position %
%
APP1 APP sensor No.1
V
%
APP2 APP sensor No.2
V
ARPMDES Target engine speed RPM
*6 Current sensor A
BATT_CUR
BOO Brake switch On/Off
CHRGLP Generator warning light On/Off
COLP Refrigerant pressure switch (middle) On/Off
CPP*4 Clutch pedal position On/Off
*4 Shift lever position On/Off
CPP/PNP
qC qF
ECT Engine coolant temperature
V
EQ_RAT11 Actual lambda signal —
EQ_RAT11_DSD Target lambda —
ETC_ACT Throttle control q
%
ETC_DSD Throttle control desired
q
EVAPCP Purge solenoid valve duty value %
FAN1 Cooling fan relay No.1 control signal On/Off
FP Fuel pump relay On/Off
FUELPW Fuel injector duration sec
FUELSYS Fuel system status OL/CL/OL_Drive/OL_Fault/CL_Fault
HTR12 HO2S heater control On/Off
qC qF
IAT Intake air temperature
V
%
IMRC Variable tumble control
On/Off
%
IMTV*5 Variable intake air control
On/Off
INGEAR Gears are engaged On/Off
IVS CTP condition Idle/Off_Idle
KNOCKR Knocking retard q
LOAD Engine load %
LONGFT1 Long term fuel trim %
01-02A–18
TO MODEL INDEX

g/s
MAF Mass air flow
V
kPa psi Bar
MAP Manifold absolute pressure
V
MIL Malfunction indicator lamp On/Off
MIL_DIS Travelled distance since MIL illuminated km mile
O2S11 A/F sensor A
O2S12 HO2S V
PCM_T PCM temperature sensor qC qF
PCM_T_Max Maximum PCM temperature qC qF
RO2FT1 HO2S fuel trim %
RPM Engine speed RPM
SEGRP EGR control —
SEGRP DSD EGR valve position desired %
SHRTFT1 Short term fuel trim (front) %
SPARKADV Ignition timing q
TEST Test mode On/Off
TP REL Throttle position signal (relative value)) %
%
TP1 TP sensor No.1
V
%
TP2 TP sensor No.2
V
TPCT TP sensor voltage at CTP V
VPWR Battery positive voltage V
VSS Vehicle speed Km/h mph
VT ACT1 Actual valve timing q
Difference between target valve timing
VT DIFF1 q
and actual valve timing
VT DUTY1 OCV control %
*1
*2
: With full-auto air conditioner
*3 : ATX
*4
: MTX
*5
: With variable intake air system
*6 : With current sensor
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM ACTIVE COMMAND MODES FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0102c0105400
x The simulation items are shown below.
Simulation item table
u: Applicable
—: Not applicable
Item Applicable Component Unit/Condition
ACCS A/C relay On/Off
ALTF Generator field coil control duty value On/Off
ARPMDES Target engine speed RPM
EVAPCP Purge solenoid valve duty value %
FP Fuel pump relay On/Off
HTR12 HO2S heater control On/Off
IMRC Variable tumble control On/Off
IMTV*1 Variable intake air control On/Off
INJ_1 Fuel injector No.1 Off
01-02A–19
TO MODEL INDEX

Item Applicable Component Unit/Condition
SEGRP EGR valve —
TEST Test mode Off/On
VT Duty1 wt OCV %
*1
: With variable intake air system
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM EXTERNAL DIAGNOSTIC UNIT COMMUNICATION FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0102c0141800
Outline
x Function for allowing both the PCM and external tester to receive and send data.
x The DLC-2 has been adopted as the
communication medium.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR-2

am2zzn0000036
Function
x The types of data which the PCM and external tester can receive and send using the external tester
communication function include the following items:
— Recording of engine control system information in the PCM.
— Data related to exhaust emission such as input/output signals, the PCM-calculated values and system
status.
DLC-2 Outline
x The DLC-2 located in the driver compartment is a service connector defined by EOBD regulations.
x The following are functions for each terminal.
DLC-2
B+ CAN-L
CAN-H GND2 GND1
am2zzn0000127
Terminal Function
B+ Battery positive voltage
CAN-L CAN communication line
CAN-H CAN communication line
GND1 Ground (chassis)
GND2 Ground (signal)
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM MALFUNCTION DISPLAY FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0102c0142000
Outline
x Illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp to notify the driver of a malfunction occurring in the engine control
system.
01-02A–20
TO MODEL INDEX

x The malfunction indicator lamp is in the
instrument cluster. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
MIL
am2zzn0000132
Function
x The malfunction indicator lamp illuminates when a malfunction occurs in the engine control system, and it
illuminates at the same time a DTC is recorded in the PCM.
x The illumination/non-illumination conditions of the malfunction indicator lamp are determined by the number of
drive cycles. (See 01-02A-7 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM TEST MODE [ZJ, ZY].)
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC DATA MEMORY FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0102c0141700
Outline
x Records diagnostic data related to the engine control system in the PCM.
Function
x The diagnostic data recording/erasing conditions are determined by the number of drive cycles set for each
item. (See 01-02A-7 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM TEST MODE [ZJ, ZY].)
x Diagnostic data which can be recorded in the PCM are as follows:
— Number of DTCs
— Pending DTCs
— Freeze frame data
— On-board diagnostic system diagnosis condition
— DTC
x Another method for erasing diagnostic data is by using the memory clearing function of the external tester.
End Of Sie
01-02A–21
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]
01-10A MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

MECHANICAL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . 01-10A–1 VALVE MECHANISM STRUCTURAL
ENGINE STRUCTURAL VIEW VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–10
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–2 VALVE, VALVE SPRING, VALVE SEAL,
MILLER CYCLE ENGINE OUTLINE VALVE GUIDE CONSTRUCTION
[ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine)] . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–2 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–10
Miller cycle engine operation . . . . . . . . 01-10A–2 TAPPET CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . 01-10A–11
CYLINDER HEAD COVER CAMSHAFT CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–2 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–11
CYLINDER HEAD CONSTRUCTION TIMING CHAIN, CHAIN TENSIONER
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–3 CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–13
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–3 OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–13
CYLINDER BLOCK CONSTRUCTION VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–3 FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–14
CRANKSHAFT, MAIN BEARING Operation and purpose according to
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–4 driving condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–14
PISTON, PISTON RING, PISTON PIN VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–5 CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–15
CONNECTING ROD, CONNECTING VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM
ROD BEARING CONSTRUCTION OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–16
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–6 OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV)
ENGINE FRONT COVER CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–19
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–7 VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ACTUATOR
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–19
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–8 ENGINE MOUNT OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . 01-10A–20
DRIVE BELT CONSTRUCTION ENGINE MOUNT CONSTRUCTION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–8 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–21
VALVE MECHANISM OUTLINE ENGINE MOUNT OPERATION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–9 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–22
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

MECHANICAL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: ENGINE
id0110b7100100
Features
x A variable valve timing mechanism has been adopted.
Improved engine performance
x Miller cycle has been adopted. (ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine))
x The shimless tappet has been adopted.
Reduced engine weight
x Main parts (cylinder head and cylinder block) are made of aluminum alloy.
x The cylinder head is made of aluminum alloy.
x A silent timing chain has been adopted.
Reduced engine noise and
x A highly rigid aluminum cylinder block and lower cylinder block have been adopted.
vibration
x A crankshaft pulley with torsional damper has been adopted.
x A pendulum type engine mount has been adopted.
x A serpentine type drive belt has been adopted.
x Drive belt tension is adjusted automatically with an auto-tensioner.
Improved serviceability x A timing chain has been adopted to eliminate the need for its replacement.
x An engine front cover with a service hole has been adopted. (for unlocking the chain adjust
ratchet and securing the tensioner arm.)
End Of Sie
01-10A–1
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

ENGINE STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7119200
am2zzn0000046
End Of Sie
MILLER CYCLE ENGINE OUTLINE [ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine)]
id0110b71100d2
x The miller cycle engine is a high-efficiency engine which realizes high fuel economy performance by obtaining
a high-expansion ratio.
x The miller cycle engine realizes a high-expansion ratio without increasing its effective compression ratio by
decreasing the speed of the intake air valve close timing. If a past engine (Otto cycle engine) were to obtain a
high-expansion ratio, the effective compression ratio would increase and cause abnormal combustion.
x Combined with the CVT, both high fuel economy and acceleration performance are obtained.
Miller cycle engine operation

1. Intake air is introduced into the cylinder.
2. After completing the intake air operation, the intake air valve is left open momentarily even if the piston passes
the BDC, and a part of the intake air in the cylinder reverses back to the intake pipe.
(The reversed intake air is inducted into other cylinders and the same cylinders of the next cycle.)
3. The compression stroke starts from the position in which intake valve is closed (smaller compression).
4. Combustionolarger expansionosufficient energy absorptionohigh fuel economy performance is realized.
PART OF
INTAKE AIR
IN EX REVERSED
CLOSE
OPEN OPEN
INTAKE
AIR
1 2 DOES NOT 3 SMALLER 4 COMBUSTION

COMPRESS EXPANSION (LARGER
INTAKE AIR EXPANSION)
am2zzn0000125
End Of Sie
CYLINDER HEAD COVER CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7100200
x The cylinder head cover is made of integrated aluminum alloy, which is lightweight and sound absorbent.
x The oil filler cap is a screw-in type. The boss for installing the camshaft position (CMP) sensor is provided at the
front of the cylinder head cover.
01-10A–2
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]
OIL FILLER CAP
CAMSHAFT POSITION(CMP)
SENSOR BOSS
am2zzn0000000
End Of Sie
CYLINDER HEAD CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7100300
x The cylinder head is made of a highly heat conductive, lightweight, and aluminum alloy.
x Compact, pentroof combustion chambers have been adopted. The spark plugs are mounted at the top of the
combustion chambers to improve combustion efficiency.
x The intake/exhaust port layout is a cross flow type, (the angle between two valves is 30q, two intake valves and
two exhaust valves per cylinder) which improves air intake/exhaust efficiency.
x Knocking suppression and high pressurization are realized by the optimum shape of the intake air port.
x The cylinder head bolts are plastic region tightening bolts, tightened in three steps to insure tightening stability.
THE ANGLE
CYLINDER HEAD BOLT BETWEEN
TWO VALVES
(PLASTICITY AREA BOLT)
15° 15°
EXHAUST SIDE
INTAKE SIDE
INTAKE
PORT EXHAUST
PORT
ENGINE FRONT SIDE
am2zzn0000073
End Of Sie
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7100400
x Cylinder head gaskets are composed of 2-layer metal.
A-A SECTIONAL VIEW

BEAD PLATE
A A
STOPPER PLATE
am2zzn0000046
End Of Sie
CYLINDER BLOCK CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7100500
x The cylinder block is made of aluminum alloy cast with an iron liner, improving heat radiation and decreasing
weight.
01-10A–3
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

x The cylinder block is composed of an upper cylinder block and a lower cylinder block integrated with the main
bearing cap.
x With the adoption of the lower cylinder block, engine vibration has been reduced by improvement in joint rigidity
of the transaxle and supporting rigidity of the crankshaft.
x To improve blow-by gas ventilation efficiency, the upper cylinder block has an oil separator function with an oil
separator cover, PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) valve and a PCV valve installation area.
UPPER CYLINDER
OIL SEPARATOR COVER
BLOCK
OIL SEPARATOR COVER

ATTACHMENT PART
LOWER CYLINDER
BLOCK
PCV VALVE
am2zzn0000046
End Of Sie
CRANKSHAFT, MAIN BEARING CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7100800
x Cast iron shaft bearings (5) and counterweights (4) have been adopted to ensure appropriate crank balancing.
x An oil line for supplying oil to each journal is provided in the crankshaft. Crank pins and fillets on both sides of
the journal are rolled to bear heavy loads.
OIL PASSAGE
FILLET ROLL AREA

am2zzn0000046
x Upper and lower main bearings are made of aluminum alloy. The upper main bearing has oil grooves and oil
hole.
01-10A–4
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

x There is no upper and lower bearings" positioning tab for installing the main journal. Measure and attach the
main bearings (upper and lower) so that they are positioned at the center of the main bearing cap.
THRUST BEARING UPPER MAIN BEARING MAIN BEARING

OIL GROOVE JOURNAL
UPPER MAIN BEARING
MAIN BEARING
OIL HOLE
SPECIFIED
FRONT MEASUREMENT
LOWER MAIN BEARING
am2zzn0000001
x The main bearing can be selected from three types including the standard, 0.25 mm {0.01 in} over size and
0.50 mm {0.02 in} over size.
End Of Sie
PISTON, PISTON RING, PISTON PIN CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7100600
x The pistons are made of heat resistant, highly conductive aluminium alloy.
x Offset pistons are used to reduce piston-slapping noise.
x To prevent the piston from being reassembled in the wrong direction, an F mark is located on the side of piston.
x The ZJ engine model piston has valve recesses on the intake side. The ZY engine model has valve recesses
on the intake and exhaust sides.
x The compression ratio of the ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine) is increased in comparison to the ZJ by flattening the
pitted part of the piston top.
Piston specification
ITEM ZJ ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine) ZY
77.982—78.004
Outer diameter (mm {in}) 73.982—74.004 {2.9127—2.9135}
{3.0702—3.0710}
Offset quantity (mm {in}) 0.8 {0.03}
Compression height: HC (mm {in}) 27.43 {1.080} 26.88 {1.058}
Piston height: HD (mm {in}) 45.93 {1.808} 45.38 {1.787}
Compression ratio 10.0 11.0 10.0
01-10A–5
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]
PISTON SIDE VIEW

OFFSET
HC
HD
OUTER DIAMETER
PISTON UPPER VIEW
ZJ ZY
VALVE RECESS VALVE RECESS
ENGINE FRONT SIDE
VALVE RECESS
am2zzn0000047
x The following piston rings have been adopted: A barrel face ring for the top ring, a taper-under cut ring for the
second ring, two side rails and an expander for the oil ring. Also, low tensile load each piston rings have been
adopted for friction reduction and fuel consumption improvement.
x The piston pin is made of chrome steel alloy with superior rigidity.
TOP RING SECTIONAL VIEW
SECOND RING SECTIONAL VIEW
OIL RING SECTIONAL VIEW
SIDE RAIL
EXPANDER
am2zzn0000047
End Of Sie
CONNECTING ROD, CONNECTING ROD BEARING CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7100700
x The connecting rod is made of structurally sintered alloy to improve rigidity.
x The connecting rod bearing and the connecting rod cap are cast as a single unit.
x Dowel pins have been adopted on the connection area of the connecting rod and the connecting rod cap for
assembly precision improvement.
01-10A–6
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

x Plastic tightening bolts have been adopted for the connecting rod bolts, which are tightened in two steps to
insure tightening stability.
x There is no positioning tab for the large end of the connecting rod bearing. When installing the bearing,
measure so that the connecting rod and the bearing cap are positioned in the center.
CONNECTING ROD
UPPER CONNECTING ROD BEARING

CONNECTING ROD
JOURNAL
LOWER••CONNECTING ROD
BEARING
DOWEL PIN
CONNECTING ROD
BEARING
CONNECTING ROD CAP
PLASTIC REGION BOLT

2.4—2.8 mm {0.095—0.110 in}
am2zzn0000000
x The upper and lower bearing of the connecting rod bearing is made of aluminum alloy.
x The connecting rod bearings can be selected from three types including the standard, 0.25 mm {0.01 in} over
size and 0.50 mm {0.02 in} over size.
End Of Sie
ENGINE FRONT COVER CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7119100
x The engine front cover is made of aluminum alloy, and is integrated with the No.3 engine mounting bracket to
improve noise absorption and weight reduction.
x The service hole for unlocking the chain adjuster ratchet, and the service hole for securing the chain tensioner
arm when loosening the timing chain tension are on the front cover for serviceability improvement.
x The installation hole for the oil control valve (OCV), the oil passage, and the installation hole for the oil filter are
on the engine front cover. In addition, oil filter maintenance is not necessary.
01-10A–7
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]
ENGINE FRONT SIDE
No.3 ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET
FRONT VIEW BACK VIEW
OIL PASSAGE TO
VARIABLE VALVE
OCV INSTALLTION HOLE TIMING ACTUATOR
OIL FILTER INSTALLATION HOLE
SERVICE HOLE FOR SERVICE HOLE FOR

CHAIN TENSIONER TENSIONER ARM FIXATION
LOCK RELEASE
am2zzn0000047
End Of Sie
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7122300
x A crankshaft position (CKP) signal detecting plate has been adopted for the crankshaft pulley.
x A torsional damper, which prevents the crankshaft from wobbling, has also been adopted on the crankshaft.
PLATE FOR
FRONT VIEW
CKP SENSOR TORSIONAL SECTIONAL VIEW
SIGNAL DAMPER
DETECTION PLATE FOR
CKP SENSOR
SIGNAL
DETECTION
am2zzn0000047
End Of Sie
DRIVE BELT CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7102500
x A serpentine-type drive belt with a V-ribbed belt to drive the supplemental units has been adopted. This
shortens the engine length and improves serviceability.
x A drive belt auto tensioner with an embedded coil spring has been adopted to automatically maintain optimal
drive belt tension.
01-10A–8
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

With A/C
DRIVE BELT GENERATOR PULLEY
IDLER PULLEY
WATER PUMP PULLEY
A/C COMPRESSOR PULLEY
CRANKSHAFT
AUTO TENSIONER PULLEY
PULLEY
am2zzn0000051
Without A/C
DRIVE BELT GENERATOR PULLEY
IDLER PULLEY
WATER PUMP PULLEY
IDLER PULLEY
CRANKSHAFT
AUTO TENSIONER PULLEY
PULLEY
am2zzn0000051
End Of Sie
VALVE MECHANISM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7120000
x There are two intake ports and two exhaust ports for each cylinder. There are a total of 16 valves directly driven
by two camshafts.
x A variable valve timing mechanism has been adopted that insures the best valve timing depending on the
driving conditions by constantly changing the phase of the intake port side camshaft. (See:01-10A-13
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY].)
End Of Sie
01-10A–9
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

VALVE MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7120600
TIMING CHAIN
CAMSHAFT
TAPPET
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
VALVE ASSEMBLY
TENSIONER ARM
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ACTUATOR
CHAIN TENSIONER
CRANKSHAFT SPROCKET
CHAIN GUIDE
am2zzn0000001
End Of Sie
VALVE, VALVE SPRING, VALVE SEAL, VALVE GUIDE CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7101100
x The valves are made of heat-resistant steel for wear resistance improvement.
Valve specification
ITEM ZJ ZY
Intake valve Approx. 98.3 {3.87} Approx. 97.1 {3.82}
Valve full length (mm {in})
Exhaust valve Approx.98.7 {3.89} Approx.96.6 {3.81}
Intake valve Approx. 27.7 {1.09} Approx. 29.2 {1.15}
Valve umbrella diameter (mm {in})
Exhaust valve Approx. 24.0 {0.945} Approx. 25.9 {1.02}
Intake valve Approx. 5.5 {0.22}
Stem diameter (mm {in})
Exhaust valve Approx. 5.5 {0.22}
x The intake valve and the exhaust valve are tufftride processed to improve abrasion resistance.
x An equal pitch valve-type valve spring has been adopted. In addition, the upper diameter is smaller compared
to the bottom diameter. As a result, combustion efficiency has been improved by the reduced size of the upper
valve spring seat and the reduced load on the valve spring.
x The valve guide is made of sintered alloy to improve abrasion resistance.
01-10A–10
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

x The valve seat is integrated with the lower valve spring seat to simplify the unit and improve its serviceability.
VALVE KEEPER
UPPER VALVE
SPRING SEAT
VALVE SPRING
VALVE SEAL
VALVE GUIDE
VALVE
am2zzn0000001
End Of Sie
TAPPET CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7102200
x The tappet is shimless and integrated with the shim.
x The enhanced smooth-finishing precision on the cam lobe contact surfaces of the tappets enables reduced
friction and improved quietness.
x The valve clearance can be adjusted by replacing the tappet. The tappet type can be determined by its
engraved identification mark. The tappet thickness is set at between 2.85—3.49 mm {0.113—0.137 in}, and the
tappet thickness is indicated by the two digits after the decimal in the identification mark. The identification
mark can be used for reference when servicing, however, follow the servicing procedure to select a tappet.
CAMSHAFT
TAPPET SECTIONAL VIEW

CAM LOBE
CONTACT SURFACE
TAPPET
VALVE STEM CONTACT SURFACE IDENTIFICATION MARK POSITION
am2zzn0000054
End Of Sie
CAMSHAFT CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7101300
x A cast iron, highly rigid 5-axis hole camshaft has been adopted to insure higher reliability.
x Camshaft endplay is regulated at the rear of the No.1 journal.
x Lubricating oil is supplied from inside of the camshaft to each journal.
01-10A–11
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

x Additionally the cam lobe part is chill cast to improve wear resistance, and the width of the cam hill part is
shortened to reduce weight.
x The enhanced smooth-finishing precision on the cam lobe contact surfaces enables reduced friction and
improved quietness.
x There is an oil line supplying oil to the variable valve timing actuator located on the intake port side camshaft
(front of camshaft).
Camshaft specification
ZJ ZY
ITEM
IN EX IN EX
Lift (mm {in}) 8.0 {0.31} 6.8 {0.27} 8.0 {0.31} 7.2 {0.28}
Valve timing
ZJ ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine) ZY
VARIABLE VARIABLE
VARIABLE TDC DOMAIN TDC DOMAIN TDC
DOMAIN
1° 9° 1° 12° 1° 9°
31° 28° 31°
IN IN IN
EX EX EX
80°
59° 59°
40° 40°
31° 31°
19° 19°
VARIABLE VARIABLE BDC
VARIABLE BDC BDC
DOMAIN DOMAIN
DOMAIN
am2zzn0000124
x The intake side camshaft has a detection unit on the camshaft position (CMP) sensor integrated with the
camshaft.
CAM LOBE
CAM HEEL
THRUST
CAM JOURNAL CAM HEEL

EXHAUST
CAMSHAFT
CMP SENSOR SIGNAL

DETECTION PART
CAM JOURNAL
THRUST
CAM LOBE
INTAKE
CAMSHAFT
am2zzn0000129
End Of Sie
01-10A–12
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

TIMING CHAIN, CHAIN TENSIONER CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7101200
x A silent chain has been adopted for the timing chain to reduce noise caused when the timing chain is engaged
with sprockets.
x Engine oil inside the engine front cover lubricates the timing chain and each sprocket. The pin part of the timing
chain has special surface processing to improve wear resistance.
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
TIMING CHAIN
PIN GUIDE PLATE
TENSIONER
ARM MIDDLE••PLATE
CHAIN INNER PLATE
GUIDE
CHAIN
TENSIONER
CRANKSHAFT
SPROCKET
am2zzn0000001
x A chain tensioner employing a ratchet in conjunction with hydraulic pressure has been adopted for the timing
chain tensioner.
x The tension of the timing chain is constantly maintained using oil pressure and spring force in the chain
tensioner.
x The chain tensioner is composed of a ratchet which controls the plunger movement when the engine is started,
a plunger which presses the tensioner arm, a plunger spring, and a check ball which maintains hydraulic
pressure.
CAM SPRING
RATCHET
STOPPER
(ATTACHED TO
PLUNGER SERVICE PART• •
CHECK BALL
LINK PLATE
PLUNGER SPRING
BODY
••••••
am2zzn0000048
End Of Sie
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7101900
x A variable timing mechanism has been adopted that realizes optimum valve timing according to engine
operation conditions by continuously modifying the phases of the intake camshaft and crankshaft.
01-10A–13
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]
ENGINE WITH VARIABLE

VALVE TIMING MECHANISM
TORQUE
HIGH SPEED ENGINE
LOW-MIDDLE
SPEED ENGINE
ENGINE SPEED
am2zzn0000048
End Of Sie
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7101000
x The variable valve timing mechanism continuously modifies the phases of the variable valve timing actuator
and the intake camshaft using hydraulic pressure controlled by the oil control valve (OCV) so that optimal valve
timing is obtained according to engine operation conditions.
x The oil control valve (OCV) operation is based on signals from the PCM according to engine operation
conditions and it controls hydraulic pressure to the variable valve timing actuator.
Operation and purpose according to driving condition

Idling range, light load range
x Due to a reduction in the amount of overlap, less combusted gas is returned to the intake port. This stabilizes
idle speed in the idling range, improving fuel economy, and also ensures engine stability in the light load range.
Heavy load, low-middle speed range
x Low to mid-speed torque has been improved by increasing the speed of the intake air valve closing-time to
improve the volumetric efficiency of the intake valve at the point where intake air volume is at its highest.
Heavy load, high speed range
x Maximum output has been improved by slowing the close-timing of the intake air valve to improve volumetric
efficiency of the valve by slowing the air intake in relation to piston speed.
When temperature is low
x The overlap amount has been minimized to prevent combusted gas from returning to the intake port and to
reduce the additional fuel injection amount. This improves fuel economy and stabilizes fast idle speed.
x Combustion when the engine is cold has been stabilized by increasing the speed of the intake air valve close
timing to prevent the air-fuel mixture from flowing back to the intake air side. (ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine))
When engine is started or stopped
x Start ability has been improved because the overlap amount has been minimized to prevent combusted gas
from returning to the intake port.
01-10A–14
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]
HEAVY LOAD,
LOW-MIDDLE SPEED ••HEAVY LOAD,
RANGE HIGH SPEED RANGE
LOAD
• • • • • •• • • • • •• •• •• • •• •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•• • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • ••• •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••• •• •• • •• •• • • • • • • •
IDLING RANGE ••LIGHT LOAD RANGE
• • • • •• • • •• • ••• •• • • • • • • •• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• • •
ENGINE SPEED
am2zzn0000049
End Of Sie
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7120700
x The variable valve timing mechanism consists of a variable valve timing actuator, oil control valve (OCV), CKP
sensor, CMP sensor, and the PCM.
ELECTRIC SIGNAL
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP)SENSOR
VARIABLE VALVE
OCV TIMING ACTUATOR
PCM
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP)SENSOR
am2zzn0000002
01-10A–15
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram
ENGINE FRONT
COVER
CYLINDER HEAD COVER
CAMSHAFT CAP
VARIABLE
VALVE TIMING INTAKE CAMSHAFT
ACTUATOR
OCV CYLINDER HEAD
DRAIN
OIL PASSAGE IN
CYLINDER BLOCK
ENGINE FRONT COVER
OIL
FILTER
OIL PUMP
OIL PAN
OIL
am2zzn0000002
Component and function

Variable valve timing actuator x The phase difference between the variable timing actuator and camshaft on the intake
side changes continually based on the hydraulic pressure controlled by the oil control
valve (OCV).
Oil control valve (OCV) x Operated by current (duty signal) from the PCM. Controls the hydraulic oil passages to
the variable valve timing actuator.
CKP sensor x Inputs engine revolution signal to the PCM.
CMP sensor x Inputs cylinder identification signal to the PCM.
PCM x Controls the oil control valve (OCV) so that optimum valve timing is obtained according
to engine operation conditions.
End Of Sie
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7120800
x The variable valve timing actuator has two hydraulic chambers: a valve timing advance chamber and a valve
timing retard chamber. They are located between the integrated housing of the camshaft sprocket and the
camshaft integrated rotor. The oil pump supplies engine oil to each chamber. Hydraulic pressure applied to
each chamber is controlled by the oil control valve (OCV), and the relative phases of the camshaft sprocket and
the camshaft are modified to obtain optimum valve timing according to engine operation conditions.
At engine start
x When the stopper pin in the variable valve timing actuator engages with the rotor, which is at the position of
maximum valve timing retard due to spring force, the camshaft sprocket and the camshaft rotate as one unit.
When the oil pump pressure rises and the stopper pin is disengaged, it is possible to modify the relative angles
of the camshaft sprocket and the camshaft.
01-10A–16
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

Advancing valve timing
x When the spool valve in the oil control valve (OCV) moves to the left according to the PCM signal, hydraulic
pressure from the oil pump feeds into the valve timing advance passage, and finally to the valve timing advance
chamber in the variable valve timing actuator. Then, the rotor integrated with the camshaft rotates in the valve
timing advance direction, against the housing driven by the crankshaft, and the valve timing is advanced.
VARIABLE VALVE
TIMING ACTUATOR
STOPPER PIN
CAMSHAFT
VALVE TIMING
ADVANCE
CHAMBER
ROTOR FROM VALVE TIMING

RETARD CHAMBER
HOUSING
PCM
TO VALVE TIMING
ADVANCE CHAMBER
SPOOL VALVE
OCV
OIL
PUMP
OIL PAN
am2zzn0000048
01-10A–17
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

Retarding valve timing
x When the spool valve in the oil control valve (OCV) moves to the right according to the PCM signal, hydraulic
pressure from the oil pump feeds into the valve timing retard passage, and finally to the valve timing retard
chamber in the variable valve timing actuator. Then, the rotor integrated with the camshaft rotates in the valve
timing retard direction, against the housing driven by the crankshaft, and valve timing is retarded.
VARIABLE VALVE
TIMING ACTUATOR
STOPPER PIN
CAMSHAFT
VALVE TIMING
RETARD
CHAMBER
ROTOR TO VALVE TIMING

RETARD CHAMBER
HOUSING
PCM
FROM VALVE TIMING
ADVANCE CHAMBER
SPOOL VALVE
OCV
OIL
PUMP
OIL PAN
am2zzn0000048
01-10A–18
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

Maintaining intermediate valve timing
x The spool valve in the oil control valve (OCV) is located near the middle of the valve timing advance and retard
positions. Because of this, hydraulic pressures are maintained in both valve timing advance and retard
chambers of the variable valve timing actuator. At the same time, relative angles of the rotor and the housing
are fixed and maintained, resulting in fixed valve timing.
PCM
TO VALVE TIMING TO VALVE TIMING

ADVANCE CHAMBER RETARD CHAMBER
OIL PUMP
am2zzn0000048
End Of Sie
OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7102400
x The oil control valve (OCV) consists of a spool valve that switches the passages for engine oil, a coil that moves
the spool valve, a plunger, and a return spring.
COIL
RETURN SPRING
PLUNGER
SPOOL VALVE
am2zzn0000048
End Of Sie
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7102300
x The variable valve timing actuator consists of the following: a housing case integrated with the camshaft
sprocket, a cover, a camshaft integrated rotor, and a stopper pin that retains the rotor and case when the
engine stops. Also, the rotor has a chip seal that seals the valve timing advance chamber and the valve timing
retard chamber.
01-10A–19
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

x The variable valve timing actuator cannot be disassembled because it is a precision unit.
CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT
SPROCKET HOUSING CASE STOPPER PIN SPROCKET
COVER
ROTOR
TIP SEAL
am2zzn0000002
End Of Sie
ENGINE MOUNT OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7101400
x The pendulum-type layout of the engine mounting reduces noise in the cabin.
x The engine is supported at three points, and simplification of engine mount components has been attained.
x An oil-filled No.3 engine mount rubber has been adopted to reduce noise in the cabin.
x The exterior frame of the No. 3 and No. 1 engine mounts are made of aluminum alloy for weight reduction and
reduced vibration from the engine.
x The installation structure of the No. 4 engine mount has been simplified for serviceability improvement.
No.3 ENGINE
MOUNT No.1 ENGINE MOUNT
ATX
No.4 ENGINE
MOUNT
MTX, CVT
No.1 ENGINE
MOUNT
am2zzn0000124
End Of Sie
01-10A–20
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

ENGINE MOUNT CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7114000
x The exterior frame of the No.1 engine mount rubber is made of aluminum alloy, and is composed of a torque
rod-shaped structure including an anti-vibration function, which regulates the conventional rubber function and
the rotation from the powertrain.
x The No.3 engine mount rubber is oil-filled for noise reduction and vibration isolation.
No.3 ENGINE MOUNT No.1 ENGINE MOUNT No.4 ENGINE MOUNT
No.1 ENGINE MOUNT㧒ATX
RUBBER PART
No.3 ENGINE MOUNT No.4 ENGINE MOUNT
SECTIONAL VIEW
SECTIONAL VIEW
No.1 ENGINE MOUNT㧒MTX, CVT㧓
RUBBER PART
am2zzn0000124
End Of Sie
01-10A–21
TO MODEL INDEX
MECHANICAL [ZJ, ZY]

ENGINE MOUNT OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0110b7118500
x The engine is supported at the following three points: front part of the engine (No.3 engine mount), one side of
the transaxle (No.1 engine mount), and rear upper part of the transaxle (No.4 engine mount). The supporting
point at the side of the transaxle (No.1 engine mount) has been set at the transaxle"s lowest edge. With this
layout, the No.1 engine mount absorbs the rotation force generated under engine torque fluctuation and
transmitted to the power train, and distributes the rotation force to the front and rear part of the engine (swing
bob).
(POWER TRAIN SYSTEM UPPER SURFACE)
No.3 ENGINE
MOUNT
ENGINE
No.1 ENGINE
MOUNT
ENGINE
VEHICLE FRONT
VEHICLE
FRONT REAR
TRANSAXLE
No.4 ENGINE
MOUNT
TORQUE
(POWER TRAIN SYSTEM BACK)
No.3 ENGINE
MOUNT
ENGINE
ENGINE No.4 ENGINE
MOUNT
ENGINE
VEHICLE VEHICLE BACK
TRANSAXLE
FRONT REAR
No.1 ENGINE
MOUNT
TRANSAXLE No.1 ENGINE
MOUNT
am2zzn0000049
End Of Sie
01-10A–22
TO MODEL INDEX
LUBRICATION [ZJ, ZY]
01-11A LUBRICATION [ZJ, ZY]

LUBRICATION SYSTEM OUTLINE OIL PAN CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . 01-11A–2
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–1 OIL STRAINER CONSTRUCTION
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–1 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–2
LUBRICATION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL OIL PUMP CONSTRUCTION
VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–1 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–3
LUBRICATION SYSTEM FLOW OIL JET VALVE CONSTRUCTION/
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–2 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–3
OIL FILTER CONSTRUCTION Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–3
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–4
oc
TO MODEL INDEX

LUBRICATION SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: LUBRICATION SYSTEM
id011116100100
Features
x Aluminum alloy oil pump cover adopted
Reduced weight
x Plastic oil strainer adopted
x Trochoid gear type oil pump adopted
Improved lubricity
x Oil jet valves adopted
End Of Sie
LUBRICATION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id011116100200
OIL JET VALVE
O-RING
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
GASKET
OIL FILTER
OIL STRAINER
OIL PAN
OIL PUMP
OIL PAN DRAIN PLUG

GASKET
am2zzn0000127
End Of Sie
01-11A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

LUBRICATION SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id011116100300
VARIABLE
CAMSHAFT
VALVE TIMING
ACTUATOR
OCV
ORIFICE
OIL
FILTER
CHAIN
TENSIONER
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH MAIN

BEARING
OIL CRANKSHAFT
PISTON
FILTER
CONNECTING
OIL JET
ROD BEARING
VALVE
OIL PASSAGE
OIL RELIEF PASSAGE OIL PUMP
OIL BYPASS PASSAGE
OIL STRAINER OIL PAN
am2zzn0000062
End Of Sie
OIL FILTER CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: OIL FILTER
id011116100800
x The oil filter is installed on the left surface (vehicle front) of the cylinder block.
x The oil filter is a full-flow paper element type with an outer diameter of 68 mm {2.7 in} and height of 65 mm {2.6
in}.
End Of Sie
NG: OIL PAN
OUTER
DIAMETER
HEIGHT
am2zzn0000062
OIL PAN CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id011116100400
x A steel oil pan has been adopted.
x A silicon sealant with excellent sealing qualities has been adopted. Also, sealing slots have been adopted on
the oil pan attachment side to improve sealing performance.
End Of Sie
NG: OIL STRAINER EXTERNAL VIEW
SEALING SLOT
am2zzn0000062
OIL STRAINER CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id011116100700
x A plastic oil strainer with a resin filter in the middle of the strainer has been adopted for weight reduction.
01-11A–2
TO MODEL INDEX
EXTERNAL VIEW A-A SECTIONAL VIEW

OIL PUMP
ATTACHMENT SIDE A
RESIN FILTER
OIL STRAINER
A
OIL STRAINER
OIL SUPPLY INLET
am2zzn0000062
End Of Sie
OIL PUMP CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: OIL PUMP
id011116100600
x The oil pump is directly driven by the crankshaft to reduce engine noise.
x A lightweight and compact trochoid gear type oil pump with excellent heat-resistant and noise reduction
characteristics has been adopted. Due to this, oil discharge is stabilized.
x An efficient and compact trochoid gear type with 9.5 mm {0.37 in} wide rotors (inner rotor, outer rotor) has been
adopted for the oil pump.
x The oil pump consists of the oil pump body, inner rotor, outer rotor, relief valve, and oil pump cover.
x An aluminum alloy oil pump cover has been adopted to reduce weight.
x The relief valve component, which adjust the oil pressure, is built into the oil pump body.
OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR
OIL PUMP COVER
RELIEF VALVE COMPONENT

OIL PUMP BODY
am2zzn0000062
Oil pump specification (oil pump as single unit)

Item Rotation speed [rpm] Specification (kPa {kgf/cm2, psi})
Oil discharge pressure (reference value) 1,500 210—270 {2.15—2.75, 30.5—39.1}
[Oil temperature: 100qC {212qF}] 3,000 450—480 {4.59—4.89, 65.3—69.6}
End Of Sie
OIL JET VALVE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: OIL JET
id011116100500
Construction
x The oil jet valves are installed in the cylinder block. The oil jet valve nozzles are installed pointed toward the
back surface of each piston.
01-11A–3
TO MODEL INDEX

x The oil jet valves are designed to maintain optimum oil pressure in the engine by controlling the oil injection
according to the oil pressure applied to the check ball in the oil jet valves.
ENGINE FRONT SIDE
OIL
OIL
OIL JET VALVE
BOLT HOLE
am2zzn0000062
Operation
x Oil pressure applied to the check-ball in the oil jet valve opens and closes the oil passage-way to the nozzle
and controls oil injection starting and stopping.
x Oil pressure greater than the specified value applied to the check-ball in the oil jet valve opens the oil passage
to the spring-pressed nozzle, starting injection. Conversely, oil pressure less than the specified value applied to
the check-ball blocks the oil passage by spring force, stopping injection.
End Of Sie
OIL
OIL NOZZLE
OIL
PASSAGE
CHECK-BALL
SPRING
OIL PASSAGE (TO NOZZLE)
am2zzn0000128
01-11A–4
TO MODEL INDEX
COOLING SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]
01-12A COOLING SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–1 WATER PUMP CONSTRUCTION/
COOLING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–3
VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–1 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–3
COOLING SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–3
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–2 COOLING FAN COMPONENT
RADIATOR, COOLING SYSTEM CAP CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–2 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–3
THERMOSTAT CONSTRUCTION/ Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–3
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc
COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: COOLING SYSTEM
id011219100100
Features
Reduced weight x Down-flow type radiator with aluminum core and plastic tank adopted
Miniaturization x Built-in type water pump adopted
Reduced engine noise and vibration x Electric cooling fan adopted
Improved serviceability x Longer-life engine coolant (type FL22) adopted
End Of Sie
COOLING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id011219100200
COOLANT
COOLING FAN
RESERVE TANK
MOTOR
COOLING
SYSTEM CAP
WATER PUMP
COOLING RADIATOR
FAN COWLING
COOLING FAN COMPONENT
RADIATOR
THERMOSTAT
am2zzn0000062
End Of Sie
01-12A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

COOLING SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id011219100300
THROTTLE
BODY
CYLINDER HEAD
THERMOSTAT
COOLANT
EGR
RESERVE TANK
VALVE
CYLINDER BLOCK
RADIATOR
CVT OIL
COOLER *1
WATER PUMP
ENGINE COOLANT
FLOW DIRECTION HEATER
*1
: CVT
am2zzn0000128
End Of Sie
RADIATOR, COOLING SYSTEM CAP CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: THERMOSTAT
id011219100800
x A corrugated fin type radiator has been adopted.
x The radiator tanks are made of plastic and the core is made of aluminum for weight reduction.
x The down-flow direction of water inside the radiator causes air to bleed from the cooling system easier.
x Four mounting rubbers are utilized to decrease vibration.
x The radiator has an ATF oil cooler in the lower radiator tank. (ATX models)
x A low-pressure type cap has been adopted for the cooling system. It is installed on the radiator filler neck.
End Of Sie
CORE TANK
TANK
am2zzn0000063
THERMOSTAT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]

id011219100700
Construction
x A wax-type thermostat with a jiggle-pin has been adopted.
01-12A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

x The thermostat body is made of stainless steel with excellent corrosion resistance.
ENGINE COOLANT FLOW DIRECTION
JIGGLE-PIN
LOWER
ENGINE
RADIATOR
SIDE
HOSE SIDE
am2zzn0000063
Operation
x When the engine coolant temperature reaches 80—84 qC {176—183 qF}, the valve starts opening to allow
engine coolant to flow from the radiator stabilizing the engine coolant temperature. When the engine coolant
temperature decreases to approx. 77 qC {171 qF}, the valve closes to stop the engine coolant flow from the
radiator.
End Of Sie
WATER PUMP CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: WATER PUMP
id011219100400
Construction
x The water pump pulley, made of steel, and the water pump body, made of aluminum alloy, are integrated, and
the impeller is built into the cylinder block for size reduction
EXTERNAL VIEW SECTIONAL VIEW
WATER PUMP BODY IMPELLER

WATER PUMP PULLEY
am2zzn0000063
Operation
x The water pump is driven by the drive belt.
End Of Sie
COOLING FAN COMPONENT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: COOLING FAN
id011219141900
Construction
x The cooling fan component consists of the radiator cowling, cooling fan, and cooling fan motor.
x Electric cooling fan, which operates according to the fan control signal from the PCM, has been adopted. Due
to this, engine noise has been reduced and rapid engine warming-up is possible.
x The radiator cowling and cooling fan are made of plastic for weight reduction.
x Coolant reserve tank can be removed from the radiator cowling.
01-12A–3
TO MODEL INDEX
COOLANT
COOLING FAN MOTOR RESERVE TANK
COOLING RADIATOR
FAN COWLING
COOLING FAN COMPONENT
am2zzn0000063
Cooling fan, cooling fan motor specification

Item Specification
Number of blades 5
Cooling fan
Cooling fan motor output (W) 120
Operation
x Cooling fan operates according to the engine coolant temperature and whether the A/C is on or off. Two-stage
control has been adopted to the cooling fan with high and low speed rotation allowing noise reduction and
power savings. (See 01-40A-34 ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY].)
End Of Sie
01-12A–4
TO MODEL INDEX
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]
01-13A INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM OUTLINE VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–1 STRUCTURE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–5
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–1 With Variable Intake Air System . . . . . . 01-13A–5
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM
VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–2 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–6
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM DIAGRAM With Variable Intake Air System . . . . . . 01-13A–6
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–2 VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM VACUUM HOSE VALVE ACTUATOR FUNCTION
ROUTING DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . 01-13A–3 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–6
RESONANCE CHAMBER FUNCTION VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–3 VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/
With Resonance Chamber . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–3 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–6
AIR CLEANER CONSTRUCTION Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–6
THROTTLE BODY FUNCTION VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM
THROTTLE BODY CONSTRUCTION VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–4 STRUCTURE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–7
THROTTLE BODY OPERATION VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–4 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–8
INTAKE MANIFOLD CONSTRUCTION VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–4 ACTUATOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . 01-13A–8
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE
FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–5 ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/
With Variable Intake Air System. . . . . . 01-13A–5 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–8
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–8
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–8
TO MODEL INDEX

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
id0113a8100100
Features
End of Toc
Improved engine torque x Variable intake air system adopted (With variable intake air system)
Improved noise reduction x Resonance chamber adopted (With resonance chamber)
Improved emission gas purification x Variable tumble system adopted
End Of Sie
01-13A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id0113a8100200
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
AIR CLEANER
VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER

VALVE ACTUATOR
AIR HOSE
INTAKE MANIFOLD
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER VALVE

ACTUATOR
(WITH VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM)
THROTTLE BODY
RESONANCE CHAMBER
FRESH-AIR DUCT (WITH RESONANCE CHAMBER)
am2zzn0000110
End Of Sie
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0113a8102200
THROTTLE BODY FRESH-AIR DUCT

AIR CLEANER
INTAKE MANIFOLD
RESONANCE CHAMBER
(WITH RESONANCE CHAMBER)
PCM
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE : TO PCM

am2zzn0000124
End Of Sie
01-13A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM VACUUM HOSE ROUTING DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0113a8100400
VENTILATION HOSE
MAP SENSOR
PCV VALVE
am2zzn0000039
End Of Sie
RESONANCE CHAMBER FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: RESONANCE CHAMBER
id0113a8100900
With Resonance Chamber
x Installed on the fresh air duct to reduce intake air
noise. FRESH-AIR DUCT
End Of Sie
NG: AIR CLEANER
RESONANCE
CHAMBER
am2zzn0000108
AIR CLEANER CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0113a8101400
x The air cleaner is mainly composed of the air cleaner case, air cleaner cover and air cleaner element.
x The air cleaner construction suppresses intake air resistance for increased torque at all engine speeds.
Air Cleaner Element
x Non-woven fabric (dry type) has been adopted.
Air Cleaner Cover
x The PCM and attached PCM case have been integrated with the cover. The PCM is forced cooled by intake air
due to this integration. (See 01-40A-37 PCM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY].)
01-13A–3
TO MODEL INDEX

End Of Sie
NG: THROTTLE BODY
AIR CLEANER COVER
PCM
AIR CLEANER
ELEMENT
AIR CLEANER
CASE
am2zzn0000039
THROTTLE BODY FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0113a8101500
x An electronic throttle valve has been adopted which opens and closes the throttle valve with the actuator
according to a signal from the PCM. It enables precise intake air control at all engine speed ranges.
End Of Sie
THROTTLE BODY CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0113a8147700
x The throttle body construction is as shown in the figure.
ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
GEAR
MIDDLE GEAR
THROTTLE
VALVE GEAR VALVE
TP SENSOR
TP SENSOR
TP SENSOR
THROTTLE VALVE
SPRING
am2zzn0000039
End Of Sie
THROTTLE BODY OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0113a8147800
x The actuator is driven by a duty signal from the PCM. This driving force is transmitted to the actuator gear,
middle gear, and valve gear, and the throttle valve opens.
x Conversely, to close the throttle valve, the actuator is reversed by an opposite signal from the PCM, and the
throttle valve closes.
x The throttle valve opening angle is input to the PCM by the TP sensor.
x The throttle valve body has a control spring. If a malfunction occurs and the actuator cannot be controlled, the
throttle valve is maintained balanced at an opening angle of 6q by the spring. Due to this, the required amount
of air for vehicle operation is ensured.
End Of Sie
INTAKE MANIFOLD CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: INTAKE MANIFOLD
id0113a8100800
x Mainly consists of the variable intake air shutter valve actuator (with variable intake air system) and variable
tumble shutter valve actuator.
x The intake manifold is made of hard plastic for weight reduction.
x By lengthening the intake pipe, charging efficiency at low to middle engine speeds and low engine torque is
enhanced resulting in higher torque.
01-13A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

End Of Sie
NG: VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
VARIABLE TUMBLE
SHUTTER VALVE
ACTUATOR
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR

SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
(WITH VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
SYSTEM)
INTAKE MANIFOLD
am2zzn0000039
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0113a8150400
With Variable Intake Air System
x The variable intake air system maintains high torque from the low to high engine speed ranges.
x Changes the effective intake manifold length to enhance the inertia charging effect. As a result, higher torque is
obtained in all ranges.
x For the variable intake air control, refer to CONTROL SYSTEM, VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL. (See 01-
40A-16 VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40A-16 VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY].) (See 01-40A-16 VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ,
ZY].)
RELATION OF TORQUE BY VALVE
OPENING AND SHUTTING VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM
HIGH HIGH
ENGINE ENGINE
TORQUE TORQUE
:EFFECTIVE INTAKE MANIFOLD

LOW LENGTH IS LONG (CLOSE) LOW
:EFFECTIVE INTAKE MANIFOLD CLOSE OPEN
LENGTH IS SHORT (OPEN)
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
ENGINE SPEED ENGINE SPEED
am3zzn0000187
Inertia charging effect

— Airflow in the intake air pipe pulsates according to the opening and closing of the intake valve. When the
intake valve closes, intake air is compressed near the intake valve due to inertia force. The resulting
pressure wave is reflected to the throttle valve side by the intake valve and the wave is then reflected back
to the intake valve side when it reaches the dynamic chamber. The variable length intake manifold length is
controlled so that the pressure wave returns to the intake valve at the intake stroke. Due to this, air intake
volume increases, resulting in higher torque.
Effective intake air manifold length
— The effective intake manifold length is the length from the intake valve to the dynamic chamber.
— The effective intake manifold length changes according to the positioning of the reflected pressure wave
transmitted through the intake air pipe by the opening and closing of the variable intake air shutter valve in
the intake manifold.
End Of Sie
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM STRUCTURE [ZJ, ZY]
id0113a8150600
x Composed of the variable intake air shutter valve, variable intake air shutter valve actuator.
01-13A–5
TO MODEL INDEX
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
am2zzn0000039
End Of Sie
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0113a8150500
Operation condition
x For the operation condition, refer to CONTROL SYSTEM, VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL. (See 01-40A-16
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY].)
Except operation condition

x The variable intake air shutter valve is closed by
variable intake air shutter valve actuator
operation.
x Under this condition, the effective intake manifold
length is from the intake valve to the dynamic DYNAMIC
chamber (A—C). An inertia charging effect is CHAMBER A C
obtained due to this elongated intake manifold
length, air intake volume in the cylinder increases,
and higher torque is obtained at low and middle to
medium engine speeds.
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
SHUTTER VALVE (CLOSE)
am2zzn0000039
Operation condition
x The variable intake air shutter valve is opened by
variable intake air shutter valve actuator
operation.
x Under this condition, the effective intake manifold
length is from the intake valve to the chamber DYNAMIC
(B—C). The intake air inertia effect is obtained at CHAMBER C
middle and high engine speeds due to this B
shortened intake passage, increasing intake
airflow amount in the cylinder, and higher torque
at middle and high engine speeds is obtained.
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
End Of Sie
NG: VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR SHUTTER VALVE (OPEN)
am2zzn0000039
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0113a8151400
x The shutter valve actuator opens and closes the shutter valve.
End Of Sie
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
SOKYU_NG: VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
id0113a8151300
Construction
x The shutter valve actuator is mainly composed of a DC motor and gear.
x The variable intake air shutter valve opens and closes by the operation of the motor activated by the PCM.
Operation of the motor via activated directional switching switches the variable intake air shutter valve in the
direction of open or closed.
01-13A–6
TO MODEL INDEX

Operation
x The variable intake air shutter valve opens and closes by the operation of the motor activated by the PCM.
Operation of the motor via activated directional switching switches the variable intake air shutter valve in the
x When 12 V is applied to the variable intake air shutter valve actuator terminal A, the gear moves
counterclockwise and the variable intake air shutter valve opens. Conversely, when 12 V is applied to the
variable intake air shutter valve actuator terminal B, the gear moves clockwise and the variable intake air
shutter valve closes.
12 V terminal Gear rotation direction Shutter valve operation
A Counterclockwise Closeo Open
B Clockwise Openo Close
GEAR
GEAR ROTATION DIRECTION

A
B : VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER VALVE CLOSE TO OPEN
: VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER VALVE OPEN TO CLOSE
PCM
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR

OPEN• O
• N OPEN• O
• FF SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
CLOSE• O• FF CLOSE• O• N
••
• •
••
OPEN• O
• FF OPEN• O
• N
CLOSE• O• N CLOSE• O• FF
CURRENT DIRECTION
: VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER VALVE CLOSE TO OPEN
: VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER VALVE OPEN TO CLOSE
am2zzn0000039
End Of Sie
VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM
id0113a8147300
x The variable tumble system functions to lower emissions at cold-engine start.
x At cold-engine start, the variable tumble system increases intake airflow speed by closing the shutter valve to
narrow the intake passage. As a result, the air-fuel mixture quality from the injector is improved. Additionally,
the creation of a powerful air tumble in the combustion chamber promotes the atomization of the air-fuel
mixture. Due to this, emission efficiency is improved.
x For variable tumble control, refer to CONTROL SYSTEM, VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL. (See 01-13A-7
VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY].)
End Of Sie
VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM STRUCTURE [ZJ, ZY]
id0113a8147500
x Consists of the variable tumble shutter valve and variable tumble shutter valve actuator.
01-13A–7
TO MODEL INDEX
VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE

am2zzn0000040
End Of Sie
VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0113a8147400
x The variable tumble shutter valve closes
according to operation of the variable tumble
shutter valve actuator. At this time, the intake air
passage is narrower than normal, and the intake
airflow speed increases together with the creation
of a powerful air tumble in the combustion COMBUSTION
chamber. CHAMBER
x For the operation condition, refer to CONTROL
SYSTEM, VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL. (See AIR TUMBLE
01-40A-16 VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL VARIABLE TUMBLE
SHUTTER VALVE
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY].)
(CLOSED)
End Of Sie
NG: VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR am2zzn0000040
VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0113a8148700
x The shutter valve actuator opens and closes the shutter valve.
End Of Sie
VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0113a8151500
Construction
x The shutter valve actuator is mainly composed of a DC motor and gear.
x The variable tumble shutter valve opens and closes by the operation of the motor activated by the PCM.
Operation of the motor via activated directional switching switches the variable tumble shutter valve in the
Operation
x The variable tumble shutter valve opens and closes by the operation of the motor activated by the PCM.
Operation of the motor via activated directional switching switches the variable tumble shutter valve in the
x When 12 V is applied to the variable tumble shutter valve actuator terminal B, the gear moves counterclockwise
and the variable tumble shutter valve closes. Conversely, when 12 V is applied to the variable tumble shutter
valve actuator terminal A, the gear moves clockwise and the variable tumble shutter valve opens.
12 V terminal Gear rotation direction Shutter valve operation
A Clockwise Closeo Open
B Counterclockwise Openo Close
01-13A–8
TO MODEL INDEX
GEAR
GEAR ROTATION DIRECTION

: VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE TO OPEN
: VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE TO CLOSE
B A
PCM

OPEN• O
• N OPEN• O
• FF VALVE ACTUATOR
CLOSE• O• FF CLOSE• O• N
A
OPEN• O
• FF OPEN• O
• N
CLOSE• O• N CLOSE• O• FF
CURRENT DIRECTION
: VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE TO OPEN
: VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE TO CLOSE
am2zzn0000040
End Of Sie
01-13A–9
TO MODEL INDEX
FUEL SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]
01-14A FUEL SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

FUEL SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . 01-14A–1 FUEL PUMP UNIT FUNCTION
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–1 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–4
Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–1 FUEL PUMP UNIT CONSTRUCTION/
FUEL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–5
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–2 Fuel Pump Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–5
Engine Compartment Side. . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–2 Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–5
Fuel Tank Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–2 FUEL INJECTOR FUNCTION
FUEL SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–6
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–3 FUEL INJECTOR CONSTRUCTION/
Fuel Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–3 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–6
RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM OUTLINE QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–3 QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR
RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–3 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–6
FUEL TANK CONSTRUCTION Quick Release Connector
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–3 Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–7
NONRETURN VALVE FUNCTION Type A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–7
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–3 Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–7
NONRETURN VALVE CONSTRUCTION/ Type C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–8
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–4 FUEL PUMP RELAY FUNCTION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–8
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX

FUEL SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: FUEL SYSTEM
id0114b7100100
Features
Improved serviceability x Nylon tubes adopted for fuel hoses in the engine compartment and around the fuel
tank, and quick release connectors adopted for joints
Reduction of evaporative gas x Returnless fuel system adopted
Specification
Item Specification
Type Hi-ohmic
Injector Type of fuel delivery Top-feed
Type of drive Voltage
Pressure regulator control pressure (kPa {kgf/cm2, psi}) Approx. 390 {3.97, 56.5}
Fuel pump type Electric
Except for ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine): 42.8 {11.3, 9.41}
Fuel tank capacity (L {US gal, lmp gal})
ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine): 41.0 {10.8, 9.02}
Fuel type
Research octane
Fuel Country
number
Tahiti, Vanuatu, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, UAE,
Bahrain, Sri Lanka, Kenya, Antigua, European countries, New
Premium unleaded fuel Caledonia, Turkey, Israel, Jordan, Canary Island, Reunion,
95 or above
(Conforming to EN228)*1 Guadalupe, Martinique, French Guiana, Cyprus, South Africa,
Vanuatu, Lebanon, Tunisia, Morocco, El Salvador, Panama,
Honduras, Nicaragua, Taiwan
91 or above Peru
Regular unleaded fuel Hong Kong, The Philippines, Bolivia, B. Virgin, Curacao, St.
(Conforming to Fuel Quality Martin, Indonesia, Malaysia, Nepal, Fiji, Bermuda, Barbados,
90 or above Trinidad and Tobago, Thailand, Syria, Chile, Guatemala,
Standards Act 2000)*2
Venezuela, Costa Rica, Ecuador, Colombia, Dominican Republic,
Australia
*1
: Europe
*2 : Australia
End Of Sie
01-14A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

FUEL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id0114b7100200
Engine Compartment Side
FUEL DISTRIBUTOR
RELAY AND FUSE BLOCK
QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR

FUEL PUMP
RELAY
FRONT
FUEL INJECTOR
am2zzn0000040
Fuel Tank Side
BREATHER HOSE
FUEL TANK
NONRETURN VALVE JOINT HOSE
FUEL-FILLER PIPE
FUEL PUMP UNIT

am2zzn0000040
End Of Sie
01-14A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

FUEL SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0114b7100300
Fuel Flow
FUEL FILTER
(HIGH-PRESSURE)
FUEL PUMP UNIT
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL TANK
FUEL PUMP
FUEL FILTER
(LOW-PRESSURE)
: TO PCM
: FUEL FLOW
am2zzn0000043
End Of Sie
RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0114b7101000
Features
x The returnless fuel system reduces fuel evaporation in the fuel tank.
x The pressure regulator located in the fuel tank prevents fuel return from the engine compartment side, thereby
maintaining a low fuel temperature in the fuel tank. Due to this, formation of evaporative gas produced by a rise
in fuel temperature is suppressed.
x The pressure regulator is built into the fuel pump unit in the fuel tank.
End Of Sie
RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0114b7101100
x Fuel in the fuel tank is pumped out through the fuel filter (low-pressure) by the fuel pump, filtered by the fuel
filter (high-pressure), and then regulated to a specified pressure by the pressure regulator.
x The pressure regulated fuel is sent to the fuel injectors.
x After pressure regulation, unnecessary fuel is returned from the pressure regulator to inside the fuel pump unit.
End Of Sie
FUEL TANK CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: FUEL TANK
id0114b7101900
x A rollover valve that include check valve (two-way) is built-in. For the rollover valve, refer to the emission
system.
x Made of hard plastic for weight reduction.
End Of Sie
NONRETURN VALVE FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: NONRETURN VALVE
id0114b7102000
x Prevents fuel from spouting out due to evaporative gas pressure in the fuel tank when removing the fuel-filler
cap.
End Of Sie
01-14A–3
TO MODEL INDEX

NONRETURN VALVE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0114b7102100
x A single valve type has been adopted.
VALVE POSITION
x The nonreturn valve is built into the fuel tank. DURING REFUELING
x The nonreturn valve cannot be removed because
it is integrated with the fuel tank. Replace the fuel
tank if the nonreturn valve requires replacement.
x Under normal conditions, this valve is closed as FUEL
shown by the dotted line. When refueling, it opens
to the position shown by the solid line due to the FUEL TANK SIDE
flow of fuel. When refueling is finished, the valve
returns to the normal valve position due to spring
force. NORMAL VALVE POSITION
End Of Sie
NG: FUEL PUMP am2zzn0000061
FUEL PUMP UNIT FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0114b7101400
x The fuel pump suctions fuel from the fuel tank and pumps it to the fuel distributor.
End Of Sie
01-14A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

FUEL PUMP UNIT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0114b7101500
UPPER COVER
FUEL PUMP
FUEL FILTER (LOW-

PRESSURE)
FUEL GAUGE
SENDER UNIT
FUEL FILTER
(HIGH-PRESSURE)
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
LOWER COVER
am2zzn0000041
Fuel Pump Unit

x Mainly consists of a fuel filter (high-pressure), pressure regulator, fuel pump, fuel reserve cup, and fuel filter
(low-pressure).
x A pressure regulator is built-in due to the adoption of a returnless fuel system.
x A hard-plastic fuel pump unit, with an integrated fuel filter (high-pressure) and fuel pump, has been adopted to
simplify the fuel line.
x The fuel pump unit can be disassembled.
Pressure Regulator
x Built into the fuel pump unit due to adoption of a returnless fuel system.
x Mainly consists of a spring, release valve and diaphragm.
x Pressurizes fuel discharged by the fuel pump to approx. 390 kPa {3.97 kgf/cm2, 56.5 psi} using the spring,
diaphragm and release valve, and then pumps it to the fuel distributor.
01-14A–5
TO MODEL INDEX
x If fuel pressure exceeds approx. 390 kPa {3.97 kgf/cm2, 56.5 psi}, the release valve opens to discharge
unnecessary fuel pressure.
End Of Sie
FUEL INJECTOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: FUEL INJECTOR
id0114b7101200
x Injects fuel according to fuel injector control signals from the PCM.
End Of Sie
FUEL INJECTOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0114b7101300
x Installed on the intake manifold.
x Mainly consists of a coil, spring and needle valve.
x A signal is sent from the PCM causing exciting current passes through the coil and thereby pulling in the needle
valve. Since the ball that opens and closes the injection opening is integrated with the needle valve, it is pulled
together with the needle valve and fuel is injected.
x The amount of injection is determined by the
O-RING
open time of the needle valve (equal to the
energization time of the coil).
End Of Sie
NG: QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR
SPRING
COIL
NEEDLE VALVE
am2zzn0000042
QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0114b7102200
x Quick release connectors that can be easily connected/disconnected have been adopted to improve
serviceability.
End Of Sie
QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0114b7102300
x There are three types of quick release connectors.
01-14A–6
TO MODEL INDEX

Quick Release Connector Locations
FUEL TANK SIDE ENGINE ROOM SIDE
am2zzn0000041
Type A
x An SST is not used with this type.
x Mainly consists of a retainer and O-ring. The quick release connector is integrated with the fuel hose and
therefore cannot be disassembled.
x When the quick release connector is connected,
the fuel pipe projection is locked at the clamp lock
point. By pushing the clamp release tab to expand RELEASE TAB
the clamp, the lock point is released allowing the LOCK POINT
fuel pipe to be disconnected.
x To connect the quick release connector properly,
push it into the fuel pipe until a locking click sound
is heard.
am2zzn0000041
x New quick release connectors are fitted with a

checker tab that prevents improper fit. This
checker tab cannot normally be removed. When
CHECKER TAB
the quick release connector is properly connected
to the fuel pipe, the lock is released and the
checker tab comes off. Due to this, it can be
verified that the quick release connector is FUEL PIPE
completely connected.
am2zzn0000041
Type B
x An SST is not used with this type.
x Mainly consists of a retainer and O-ring. The quick release connector is integrated with the joint port and
therefore cannot be disassembled.
01-14A–7
TO MODEL INDEX

x When the quick release connector is connected,
the fuel pipe projection is locked at the clamp lock FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER
RETAINER
point. To release the quick connector lock for
type, follow the procedure in the order shown in
the figure.
am2zzn0000041
Type C
x To connect the quick release connector properly,
push it into the fuel pipe until a locking click sound
is heard. QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR
FUEL PIPE
SST
am2zzn0000042
x New quick release connectors are fitted with a

checker tab that prevents improper fit. This
checker tab cannot normally be removed. When
the quick release connector is properly connected
to the fuel pipe, the lock is released and the
checker tab comes off. Due to this, it can be
verified that the quick release connector is
completely connected.
End Of Sie
SOKYU_NG: ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
CHECKER TAB
FUEL PIPE
am2zzn0000042
FUEL PUMP RELAY FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0114b7100700
x Controls the fuel pump on/off according to control signals from the PCM.
End Of Sie
01-14A–8
TO MODEL INDEX
EXHAUST SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]
01-15A EXHAUST SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

EXHAUST SYSTEM OUTLINE EXHAUST SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-15A–1 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-15A–1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-15A–1
TO MODEL INDEX
EXHAUST SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

End of Toc
EXHAUST SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: EXHAUST SYSTEM
id0115b7125600
Features
x The exhaust piping is shorter due to the placement of the exhaust manifold at the rear of the engine for
improved exhaust performance. Moreover, due to the shorter distance to the catalytic converter, temperature
decrease of exhaust emission is prevented and catalyst is more efficient.
End Of Sie
EXHAUST SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id0115b7100100
ZJ
WU-TWC
A/F SENSOR
MIDDLE PIPE
MAIN SILENCER
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
HO2S
am2zzn0000103
ZY
WU-TWC
A/F SENSOR
PRESILENCER
MAIN SILENCER
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
HO2S
am2zzn0000103
End Of Sie
01-15A–1
TO MODEL INDEX
EMISSION SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]
01-16A EMISSION SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

EMISSION SYSTEM OUTLINE POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–1 (PCV) SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–1 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–5
Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–1 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
EMISSION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL (PCV) SYSTEM OPERATION
VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–2 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–6
Engine Compartment Side. . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–2 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–2 (PCV) VALVE FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . 01-16A–6
Fuel Tank Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–3 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS (EVAP) (PCV) VALVE CONSTRUCTION/
CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–6
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–3 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
EXHAUST GAS PURIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–3 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–6
Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–6
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURE
Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–6
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
SYSTEM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–7
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION PURGE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–7
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
SYSTEM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . 01-16A–4 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
EGR VALVE FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . 01-16A–4 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–7
EGR VALVE CONSTRUCTION/ FUEL-FILLER CAP FUNCTION
CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM FUEL-FILLER CAP CONSTRUCTION/
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–8
Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 CHARCOAL CANISTER FUNCTION
CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–8
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–5 CHARCOAL CANISTER
CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ROLLOVER VALVE FUNCTION
(PCV) SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]. . . . 01-16A–5 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–8
Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–5 ROLLOVER VALVE
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–8
Rollover Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–9
Check Valve (Two-Way). . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–9
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX

NG: EMISSION SYSTEM
EMISSION SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]

id0116b7100100
Feature
Improved exhaust gas purification x Catalytic converter system adopted
x Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system adopted
Specification
Item Specification
Catalyst form WU-TWC (monolith)
Evaporative emission (EVAP) control system Charcoal canister type
Positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) system Closed type
End Of Sie
01-16A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

EMISSION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7100200
Engine Compartment Side
EGR VALVE
VENTILATION HOSE
PCV VALVE
am2zzn0000042
Exhaust System
WU-TWC
am2zzn0000042
01-16A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

Fuel Tank Side
FUEL-FILLER CAP
ROLLOVER VALVE
CHARCOAL CANISTER
am2zzn0000042
End Of Sie
EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
SOKYU_NG: EMISSION SYSTEM
id0116b7094200
ROLLOVER VALVE
CHARCOAL VENTILATION HOSE

CANISTER
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WU-TWC
EGR PIPE
(INTAKE MANIFOLD SIDE)
PCV VALVE EGR VALVE
EGR PIPE (EXHAUST MANIFOLD SIDE) : TO PCM

am2zzn0000061
End Of Sie
EXHAUST GAS PURIFICATION SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: EXHAUST PURIFICATION SYSTEM
id0116b7100400
Feature
x The EGI system (fuel injection control, ignition control) burns fuel supplied to the engine at the theoretical air/
fuel ratio for improved purification efficiency of the catalytic converter system.
End Of Sie
NG: EGR SYSTEM
01-16A–3
TO MODEL INDEX

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7100500
Feature
x A high-capacity EGR valve have been adopted for improved reliability of the EGR valve, reduced fuel
consumption, cleaner exhaust emissions and improved output.
x An EGR valve with a stepping motor has been adopted for optimum control according to engine operation
conditions.
x For control of EGR system, refer to CONTROL SYSTEM, EGR CONTROL. (See 01-16A-4 EXHAUST GAS
RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY].)
End Of Sie
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7155200
x The high occurrence of the nitrogen oxide (NOx) at high temperatures has been reduced by recirculating
exhaust gas to the combustion chamber in order to lower the combustion temperature.
End Of Sie
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7100600
x Consists of an EGR valve, EGR pipe (intake manifold side) and EGR pipe (exhaust manifold side) to conduct
exhaust gas to the intake air system.
System diagram
EGR PIPE
(INTAKE MANIFOLD SIDE)
EGR VALVE
EGR PIPE (EXHAUST MANIFOLD SIDE)

am2zzn0000042
End Of Sie
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7100700
x The exhaust gas flows along the EGR passage in the EGR valve. Exhaust gas that has flowed past the EGR
valve flows through the EGR passage and EGR pipe (intake manifold side) and EGR pipe (exhaust manifold
side), and is conducted to the intake manifold.
x For the operation condition, refer to CONTROL SYSTEM, EGR CONTROL. (See 01-40A-29 EGR CONTROL
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY].)
End Of Sie
EGR VALVE FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: EGR VALVE
id0116b7102500
x Adjusts the amount of exhaust gas to be recirculated from the exhaust system to the combustion chamber
based on the EGR control signal from the PCM.
End Of Sie
EGR VALVE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7102600
x Consists of a stepper motor, valve, rod, and
spring. STEPPER MOTOR
x Operates based on the signal from the PCM to
drive the EGR valve stepping motor.
x The PCM determines the optimum EGR valve
opening angle based on the engine speed and SPRING
intake air amount when the engine is completely
warmed up and drives the EGR valve.
End Of Sie
NG: CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM
ROD
VALVE
am2zzn0000061
CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]

id0116b7101400
Feature
x Purifies contaminants in the exhaust gas by utilizing a chemical reaction in a three way catalytic converter.
End Of Sie
01-16A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7101500
x Consists of a three way catalytic converter and insulator.
x A catalytic converter utilizing a platinum—palladium—rhodium system has been adopted.
System diagram
End Of Sie WU-TWC
am2zzn0000042
CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]

id0116b7101600
x Contaminants in the exhaust gas (HC, CO, NOX) are purified by oxidization and deoxidization while passing
through the catalytic converter.
— Oxidization process
x Noxious HC (hydrocarbon) and CO (carbon monoxide) are bonded to oxygen which is converted to
non-noxious carbon dioxide and water.
O2 + HC + CO o CO2 + H2O
— Deoxidization process
x Noxious NOX (nitrogen oxide) is converted to non-noxious nitrogen and oxygen. A part of the oxygen
generated at this time is used in the oxidization process.
NOX o N2 + O2
End Of Sie
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: PCV SYSTEM
id0116b7101100
Feature
x A closed type PCV system has been adopted.
End Of Sie
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7101200
x Consists of a PCV valve and ventilation hose.
x The PCV valve is installed on the oil separator.
System diagram
VENTILATION HOSE
PCV VALVE
OIL SEPARATOR
am2zzn0000042
End Of Sie
01-16A–5
TO MODEL INDEX

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7101300
x Blowby gas (unburnt gas), including CO and HC exhausted from the crankcase, is forced into the intake air
system and burned in the combustion chamber to prevent its atmospheric release.
End Of Sie
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: PCV VALVE
id0116b7101700
x Adjusts the amount of blowby gas conducted to the intake air system according to the intake manifold vacuum.
x Regulates the air (including blowby gas) passing from the cylinder head cover to intake manifold during low
load (when vacuum in the intake manifold is high) to ensure an optimum air/fuel ratio.
End Of Sie
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7101800
x Consists of a spring and valves.
VALVE SPRING
am2zzn0000061
x The PCV valve ensures the passage of blowby TO INTAKE MANIFOLD

gas by opening the valve according to the intake
manifold vacuum, and adjusts the amount of gas
PCV VALVE
by spring force.
End Of Sie
NG: EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
FROM OIL SEPARATOR

am2zzn0000062
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]

id0116b7100800
Features
x With the adoption of the charcoal canister, release of evaporative gas into the atmosphere has been prevented.
x A duty solenoid valve (purge control valve) has been adopted for optimum control according to engine
operation conditions.
x For control of evaporative purge, refer to CONTROL SYSTEM, PURGE CONTROL. (See 01-16A-4 EXHAUST
GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY].)
End Of Sie
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURE [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7100900
x Consists of a purge solenoid valve, charcoal canister, rollover valve, and fuel-filler cap.
01-16A–6
TO MODEL INDEX

System diagram
ROLLOVER VALVE
CHARCOAL CANISTER
FUEL-FILLER CAP
: TO PCM
am2zzn0000043
End Of Sie
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7101000
x When the engine is stopped, evaporative gas in the fuel tank flows out when the pressure increases and is
absorbed by the charcoal canister.
x Evaporative gas that was absorbed by the charcoal canister passes through the solenoid valve together with air
introduced from the charcoal canister orifice when the engine is running, and is fed to the engine according to
engine operation conditions.
x If the pressure in the fuel tank decreases, air is introduced from the charcoal canister orifice through the
rollover valve. If the charcoal canister orifice is clogged, the fuel-filler cap negative pressure valve opens and air
is introduced to the fuel tank to prevent increased vacuum in the fuel tank, causing a load on the fuel tank.
x If there is a malfunction in the rollover valve, the fuel-filler cap positive pressure valve opens and evaporative
gas is released into the atmosphere to prevent increased pressure in the fuel tank, causing a load on it.
x For the operation condition, refer to CONTROL SYSTEM, PURGE CONTROL. (See 01-40A-31 PURGE
CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY].)
End Of Sie
PURGE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
id0116b7102300
x Adjusts the amount of evaporative gas to be introduced to the intake air system.
End Of Sie
PURGE SOLENOID VALVE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7102400
x Installed to the air hose in front of the throttle body.
x Consists of a coil, spring and plunger.
x Opens and closes the passage in the solenoid
valve according to the purge solenoid valve TO INTAKE MANIFOLD
control signal (duty signal) from the PCM to
control the amount of evaporative gas to be
introduced to the intake manifold according to
engine operation conditions.
x The signal sent from the PCM energizes the coil
and it becomes magnetized, pulling the plunger.
The passage between the ports opens when the FROM CHARCOAL CANISTER
plunger is pulled, and evaporative gas is INSTALLATION PART
introduced to the intake air system according to
:FLOW OF EVAPORATIVE GAS
intake manifold vacuum.
am2zzn0000137
End Of Sie
NG: FUEL FILLER CAP
01-16A–7
TO MODEL INDEX

FUEL-FILLER CAP FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7102700
x If the evaporative gas passage is closed for some reason, the fuel filler cap prevents the generation of positive
or negative pressure in the fuel tank, protecting it from deformation.
End Of Sie
FUEL-FILLER CAP CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7102800
x Consists of a positive pressure valve, negative pressure valve, spring, and O-ring.
x When there is positive pressure in the fuel tank due to evaporative gas, the evaporative gas is released into the
atmosphere. When there is negative pressure, air is introduced to the fuel tank.
x The positive pressure valve and negative
pressure valve opening pressures are higher than SPRING
the check valve (two-way) built into the rollover
valve, therefore the positive and negative O-RING
pressure valves are normally not open.
End Of Sie POSITIVE
NG: CHARCOAL CANISTER
PRESSURE
VALVE
NEGATIVE
PRESSURE
VALVE
am2zzn0000043
CHARCOAL CANISTER FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0116b7101900
x The charcoal canister contains activated charcoal that temporarily absorbs evaporative gas.
End Of Sie
CHARCOAL CANISTER CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7102000
x Installed on the side of the fuel tank.
x During purge solenoid valve operation,
atmosphere enters the charcoal canister from the
atmospheric orifice to entirely flood the activated
ATMOSPHERE SIDE
charcoal and release the evaporative gas.
End Of Sie
NG: ROLLOVER VALVE
FUEL TANK SIDE
PURGE SOLENOID
VALVE SIDE
am2zzn0000043
ROLLOVER VALVE FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0116b7102900
x The rollover valve prevents fuel flow into the evaporative gas passage during sudden cornering or vehicle
rollover.
x The built-in check valve (two-way) maintains a constant pressure in the fuel tank.
End Of Sie
ROLLOVER VALVE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0116b7103000
x The rollover valve is welded in a place along the evaporative gas passage on the upper surface of the fuel tank
and cannot be removed/installed.
x Press-fitted in the rollover valve in the fuel tank and cannot be removed/installed.
x Press-fitted in the check valve (two-way) in the rollover valve and cannot be removed/installed.
01-16A–8
TO MODEL INDEX
ROLLOVER VALVE
am2zzn0000043
Rollover Valve
x The rollover valve consists of a float, and spring.
x The rollover valve utilizes a combination of float weight, spring force, and buoyancy. When the float is sunk in
the fuel, the float (valve) closes to block the sealing surface of the passage.
Check Valve (Two-Way)

x Mainly consists of positive and negative pressure valves.
x The valve moves in response to the difference in air pressure between the fuel tank and the charcoal canister
sides, thereby changing the path of airflow.
x When the pressure in the fuel tank becomes positive, the evaporative gas path opens drawing evaporative gas
from the fuel tank into the charcoal canister.
x When the pressure in the fuel tank becomes negative due to fuel consumption or other factors, the evaporative
gas path opens, drawing air from the charcoal canister into the fuel tank.
End Of Sie
01-16A–9
TO MODEL INDEX
CHARGING SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]
01-17A CHARGING SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

CHARGING SYSTEM OUTLINE CHARGING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-17A–1 VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-17A–1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-17A–1 GENERATOR CONSTRUCTION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-17A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
CHARGING
NG: CHARGING SYSTEM
id0117241
Features
Miniaturization x Non-regulator type generator with built-in power transistor adopted
End Of Sie
CHARGING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id011724102200
BATTERY
GENERATOR
am2zzn0000063
End Of Sie
GENERATOR CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: GENERATOR
id011724102300
x With the elimination of the voltage regulator, generator control is carried out by the PCM. Excitation current in
the field coil is increased or decreased by the duty signal from the PCM sent to the power transistor built into
the generator. (See 01-40A-36 GENERATOR CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY].)
01-17A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

MTX, ATX
PULLEY FRONT COVER FRONT BEARING ROTOR REAR BEARING REAR COVER TERMINAL B
COMPONENT
REGULATOR COMPONENT
STATOR COIL (BUILT-IN POWER TRANSISTOR) RECTIFIER
am3zzn0000277
01-17A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

CVT
PULLEY FRONT COVER FRONT BEARING ROTOR REAR BEARING TERMINAL B
COMPONENT
STATOR COIL REGULATOR COMPONENT RECTIFIER REAR COVER

(BUILT-IN POWER TRANSISTOR)
am2zzn0000128
STATOR COIL P
D PCM
BATTERY
CAN
POWER TRANSISTOR
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
(WARNING LIGHT)
am3zzn0000277
x If there is malfunction in the charging system, the generator warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates.
(See 01-02A-7 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM TEST MODE [ZJ, ZY].)
End Of Sie
01-17A–3
TO MODEL INDEX
IGNITION SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]
01-18 IGNITION SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

IGNITION SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . 01-18–1 SPARK PLUG CONSTRUCTION
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-18–1 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-18–1
IGNITION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW IGNITION COIL CONSTRUCTION/
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-18–1 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-18–2
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-18–2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-18–2
01
TO MODEL INDEX

IGNITION SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: IGNITION SYSTEM
id011815100200
Features
End of Toc
Improved reliability x Independent ignition control system with distributorless ignition coils adopted
x Spark plugs with an iridium alloy center electrode and platinum tip ground electrode
Improved durability
adopted
End Of Sie
IGNITION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id011815100100
IGNITION COIL
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL
am2zzn0000063
End Of Sie
SPARK PLUG CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: SPARK PLUG
id011815100400
x An iridium spark plug with excellent durability and firing performance has been adopted.
x The extremely thin, center electrode has a diameter of 0.7 mm {0.03 in} (MTX, ATX), 0.5 mm {0.02 in} (CVT)
and is made of iridium alloy.
x Durability has been improved by the use of a platinum-tipped grounding electrode.
x Based on the thinner electrode (center electrode), electric discharge has been reduced and ignition has been
improved, resulting in stable ignition performance under all driving conditions.
01-18–1
TO MODEL INDEX

End Of Sie
NG: IGNITION COIL
IRIDIUM
ALLOY
PLATINUM-
CENTER
TIPPED
ELECTRODE
GROUNDING
ELECTRODE
ILLUSTRATION SHOWS MTX, ATX.

am2zzn0000128
IGNITION COIL CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]

id011815100300
Construction
x Direct ignition coils installed directly to each spark plug have been adopted. By adopting direct ignition coils,
high-tension leads have been eliminated in order to simplify the parts of the ignition system, preventing voltage
reduction, and improving the firing efficiency.
x Independent firing control has been adopted to eliminate firing without spark, increasing firing energy.
x The direct ignition coil consists of an ignition coil, ignition coil connector, and boot area, which has the same
function as the high-tension lead.
Operation
x The firing timing of the coil is controlled by the PCM for optimum ignition timing control.
IGNITION COIL ELECTRICAL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
IGNITION
IGNITION COIL EXTERNAL VIEW SWITCH PCM
IGNITION COIL
C B A
A CYLINDER
BATTERY NUMBER
C NO.4
B
A
C NO.3
B
A
BOOT
C NO.2
B
A
C NO.1
B
CONDENSER
am2zzn0000063
01-18–2
TO MODEL INDEX

Terminal layout
Terminal Signal
A Power supply
Three terminals B Ground
C Ignition coil control signal
End Of Sie
01-18–3
TO MODEL INDEX
STARTING SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]
01-19A STARTING SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

STARTING SYSTEM OUTLINE STARTING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-19A–1 VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-19A–1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-19A–1 STARTER CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . 01-19A–1
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
STARTING SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

STARTING SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: STARTING SYSTEM
id011915100200
Features
Improved startability x Reduction type starter adopted
End Of Sie
STARTING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id011915100100
STARTER
am2zzn0000064
End Of Sie
STARTER CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]
NG: STARTER
id011915100300
x A high torque coaxial reduction type starter has been adopted.
End Of Sie
IGNITION SWITCH
B M
PULL-IN COIL
MOTOR
BATTERY
HOLDING COIL
am2zzn0000064
01-19A–1
TO MODEL INDEX
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]
01-20 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-20–1 STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . 01-20–2
Component and function . . . . . . . . . . . 01-20–1 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM BLOCK
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-20–2
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
SOKYU_NG: CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
id0120c0100100
x The cruise control system enables driving at a constant speed by setting the vehicle speed with the cruise
control switch instead of operating the accelerator pedal.
x The PCM controls the throttle valve actuator to maintain the vehicle at a constant speed.
Component and function

Installation
Component Function
location
ABS/DSC (CAN The vehicle speed signal is sent to the PCM from either the ABS/DSC.
Engine
communication:
compartment
Vehicle speed signal)
Cruise ON The cruise control system main switch. The cruise control system goes into stand-by
control with the operation of the switch.
switch OFF The cruise control system main switch. The cruise control system is turned off with
the operation of the switch.
SET + If the switch is pressed upward when the vehicle speed exceeds 27 km/h {17 mph}
with the system in stand-by, the vehicle speed at the point when the switch is
pressed upward is stored in the PCM and the system initiates the cruise control.
The PCM controls acceleration by the pressing of the switch upward (tap-up
operation) or when the switch is continuously pressed upward during cruise control.
SET - If the switch is pressed downward when the vehicle speed exceeds 27 km/h {17
mph} with the system in stand-by, the vehicle speed at the point when the switch is Steering wheel
pressed downward is stored in the PCM and the system initiates the cruise control.
The PCM controls deceleration by the pressing of the switch downward (tap-down
operation) or when the switch is continuously pressed downward during cruise
control.
RESUME If the switch is pressed when the vehicle speed exceeds 27 km/h {17 mph} with the
system in stand-by and the previous pre-set vehicle speed stored in the PCM, the
system initiates the cruise control so that the vehicle speed is the pre-set vehicle
speed stored in the PCM.
CANCEL If the CANCEL switch is pressed during cruise control, the cruise control system
goes into stand-by (pre-set vehicle speed is stored).
Brake switch Depressing the brake pedal during cruise control switches the cruise control system
Brake pedal
to standby status.
CPP switch Depressing the clutch pedal during cruise control switches the cruise control system
Clutch pedal
to standby status.
Neutral switch Shifting to neutral during cruise control switches the cruise control system to standby Manual
status. transaxle
PCM The cruise control system is executed or stopped according to the cruise control
Engine
switch signals. The throttle valve actuator is operated so that the vehicle speed is the
compartment
pre-set vehicle speed during cruise control system.
Throttle valve The duty signal sent from the PCM adjusts the throttle valve opening angle.
Throttle body
actuator
Cruise main indicator This illuminates light while the cruise control system is in standby status.
light (Amber) Instrument
Cruise set indicator This illuminates light while the cruise control system is in control status. cluster
light (Green)
End Of Sie
01-20–1
TO MODEL INDEX

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id0120c0100200
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR LIGHT (AMBER)/

CRUISE SET INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN)
CPP SWITCH
PCM
BRAKE SWITCH
NEUTRAL
THROTTLE BODY SWITCH
(THROTTLE VALVE ACTUATOR)
am2zzn0000109
End Of Sie
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0120c0100300
BRAKE SWITCH THROTTLE VALVE ACTUATOR
ABS/DSC
(CAN COMMUNICATION: PCM
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL)
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
(CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR LIGHT/
CPP SWITCH CRUISE SET INDICATOR LIGHT)
NEUTRAL SWITCH
am2zzn0000109
End Of Sie
01-20–2
TO MODEL INDEX
PAGE 1 0F 2 CONTROL SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]
01-40A CONTROL SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE FUEL INJECTION CONTROL OUTLINE
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–2 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–19
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–2 FUEL INJECTION CONTROL BLOCK
Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–3 DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–20
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . 01-40A–4 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–20
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM Injection Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–20
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–5 Injection time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–21
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING Determination of effective injection
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–6 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–21
With Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–6 Fuel Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–24
Without Immobilizer System. . . . . . . . . 01-40A–8 FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTLINE
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM BLOCK [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–25
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–10 FUEL PUMP CONTROL BLOCK
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM RELATION DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–25
CHART [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–10 FUEL PUMP CONTROL OPERATION
MAIN RELAY CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–25
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–12 Operation Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–25
MAIN RELAY CONTROL BLOCK ELECTRONIC SPARK ADVANCE
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–12 OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–25
MAIN RELAY CONTROL OPERATION ELECTRONIC SPARK ADVANCE
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–12 BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–26
DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL OUTLINE ELECTRONIC SPARK ADVANCE
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–12 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–26
DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL BLOCK Ignition Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–26
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–13 Determination of Ignition Timing . . . . . . 01-40A–27
DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL OPERATION EGR CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . 01-40A–28
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–14 EGR CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
Idle Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–14 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–29
Accelerator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–14 EGR CONTROL OPERATION
Traction Control (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–15 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–29
Cruise Control (With cruise control Stepping Motor Operation
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–15 Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–29
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL Control outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–30
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 Target EGR valve position . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–30
With Variable Intake Air System. . . . . . 01-40A–16 Inhibition conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–30
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL PURGE CONTROL OUTLINE
BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–30
With Variable Intake Air System. . . . . . 01-40A–16 PURGE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–31
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 PURGE CONTROL OPERATION
With Variable Intake Air System. . . . . . 01-40A–16 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–31
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL Determination of Purge Solenoid Valve
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 Energization Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–31
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL BLOCK Calculation Method for Purge Flow
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–31
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL Operation condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–31
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR,
Operation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Inhibition conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–17 HEATER CONTROL OUTLINE
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–31
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–17 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR,
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–17 HEATER CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–32
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–17 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR,
Cleaning Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–17 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
Maximum Cam Retard Mode . . . . . . . . 01-40A–18 HEATER CONTROL OPERATION
Feedback Hold Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–18 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–32
Feedback Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–18 A/F sensor heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–32
Advance spark speed correction . . . . . 01-40A–19 HO2S heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–32
Valve timing determination . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–19 A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL OUTLINE
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–32
01-40A–1
TO MODEL INDEX
PAGE 2 0F 2 CONTROL SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL BLOCK PCM TEMPERATURE SENSOR
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–33 FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–42
A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL OPERATION PCM TEMPERATURE SENSOR
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–33 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
Operation Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–33 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–42
ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL OUTLINE MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL BLOCK MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–34 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–43
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–34 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP)
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–34 SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . 01-40A–43
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP)
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–35 SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL BLOCK [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–43
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–35 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–44
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–35 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
GENERATOR CONTROL OUTLINE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–36 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–44
GENERATOR CONTROL BLOCK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–36 SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . 01-40A–45
GENERATOR CONTROL OPERATION CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–36 SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
Determination of Field Coil Excitation [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–45
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–36 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–36 FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–46
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–37 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
PCM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–37 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–46
Function List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–37 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) FUNCTION
PCM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–47
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–37 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) CONSTRUCTION/
Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–37 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–47
NEUTRAL SWITCH FUNCTION AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR,
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–38 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
MTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–38 FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–48
NEUTRAL SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/ AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR,
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–38 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
MTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–38 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–48
SWITCH FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . 01-40A–39 A/F Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–48
MTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–39 HO2S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–48
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) A/F Sensor Heater, HO2S Heater . . . . . 01-40A–49
SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/ CURRENT SENSOR FUNCTION
MTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–40 With Current Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–49
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CURRENT SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
(ECT) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . 01-40A–40 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–49
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE With Current Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–49
(ECT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/ MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–40 (MAP) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . 01-40A–50
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . 01-40A–41 (MAP) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–50
SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–41
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
NG: ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
End of Toc id0140c4100100

Features
Improved driveability x Drive-by-wire control adopted
x Variable intake air control adopted (With variable intake air system)
x Variable valve timing control adopted
01-40A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

Improved emission performance x Variable tumble control adopted
x A heater element is integrated with the A/F sensor and HO2S
x All-range air/fuel ratio sensor adopted
x EGR system adopted
Improved fuel economy x A drive-by-wire control (idle air control) has been adopted which contributes to
lower fuel consumption
x Current sensor adopted (With current sensor)
Wiring harness simplification x CAN adopted
x Camshaft position sensor with GMR element adopted
Improved accuracy
x Crankshaft position sensor with GMR element adopted
x Two-circuit throttle position sensor adopted
Improved reliability
x Two-circuit accelerator pedal position sensor adopted
Specification
Item Specification
Neutral switch (MTX) ON/OFF
CPP switch (MTX) ON/OFF
ECT sensor Thermistor
IAT sensor (Inside MAF sensor) Thermistor
PCM temperature sensor Thermistor
CKP sensor GMR element
CMP sensor GMR element
TP sensor Hall element
APP sensor Hall element
Current sensor (With current sensor) Hall element
MAF sensor Hot-wire
A/F sensor Zirconia element (All-range air/fuel ratio sensor)
HO2S Zirconia element (Stoichiometric air/fuel ratio sensor)
MAP sensor Piezoelectric element
KS Piezoelectric element
x Thermistor
— Utilizes a characteristic of the semiconductor in which the resistance value fluctuates largely in accordance
with the temperature fluctuation.
— There are two types of thermistors, one with a negative characteristic in which the resistance value
decreases together with the increase in temperature, and the other with a positive characteristic in which
the resistance value increases together with the temperature increase.
x GMR element
— GMR (Giant Magneto Resistance): Giant magneto resistive element
— Utilizes the effect of GMR in which the electrical resistance fluctuates largely according to the changes in
magnetic flux.
— The amount of fluctuation in the electrical resistance increases by the use of a sensitive magnetic element.
x Hall element
— The generation of voltage utilizing the Hall effect occurs by passing electrical current perpendicular to the
magnetic field.
x Hot wire
— Utilizes a characteristic in which the amount of current supplied to the filaments fluctuates according to the
air speed and ambient temperature.
x Zirconia element
— Utilizes a characteristic of the zirconia element in which electromotive force occurs according the difference
in the acidic concentration of the exterior and interior surfaces of the zirconia element when its temperature
is high.
x Piezoelectric element
— Utilizes the piezoelectric effect of the piezoelectric element which produces voltage by the application of
pressure.
End Of Sie
01-40A–3
TO MODEL INDEX

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4100200
BRAKE SWITCH
CPP SWITCH
(MTX)
REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(LOW,MIDDLE,HIGH)
APP SENSOR
CMP SENSOR IGNITION COIL
OCV
EGR VALVE
MAP SENSOR
VALVE ACTUATOR
PCM
PCM TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CURRENT SENSOR
(WITH CURRENT SENSOR)
BATTERY
GENERATOR
CKP SENSOR
FUEL INJECTOR
MAF/IAT SENSOR
KS
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR ECT SENSOR
A/F SENSOR TP SENSOR
THROTTLE VALVE ACTUATOR
ATX MTX
HO2S TR SWITCH
NEUTRAL SWITCH
am2zzn0000124
End Of Sie
01-40A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4100300
VARIABLE TUMBLE
SHUTTER VALVE
FUEL INJECTOR ACTUATOR
VARIABLE
THROTTLE VALVE
TUMBLE
CMP SENSOR ACTUATOR
FUEL FILTER ROLLOVER SHUTTER
(HIGH- VALVE VALVE
CHARCOAL
PRESSURE) THROTTLE BODY
CANISTER VARIABLE
OCV INTAKE AIR MAP SENSOR
SHUTTER
VALVE
MAF/IAT SENSOR
CATALYTIC (WITH
CONVERTER VARIABLE
PRESSURE TP SENSOR
INTAKE AIR AIR CLEANER
REGULATOR A/F SYSTEM)
SENSOR
FUEL TANK
FUEL PUMP
FUEL FILTER
(LOW-PRESSURE) VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR PCM
ECT (WITH VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM )
HO2S
SENSOR KS
EGR VALVE
PCV VALVE
: TO PCM
CKP SENSOR
am2zzn0000104
End Of Sie
01-40A–5
TO MODEL INDEX

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4100400
PCM
GND2
GND1
B+
BODY GND
IG1
MAF/IAT SENSOR
2R
e 2V
2U
2S
2Q g
2I
2AP
ECT SENSOR
2AC

A/F SENSOR
2AD 2BF
a 2BE
2BG
2D
HO2S
b
2J

GENERATOR 2AE
2X a
CMP SENSOR
g 2N
CKP SENSOR 2Y 2AB b

EGR VALVE
2M
WITH CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 2K e
BRAKE SWITCH NO.2 1I 2O

1AU 2P
2T
1AF 2AF TO GENERATOR
2BB
KS
2AN 2BD
1BH 2BH
1E 2BA
1Z 2AG
1B VARIABLE TUMBLE
APP SENSOR SHUTTER VALVE
1F 2AK
1AD WITH VARIABLE INTAKE

2AJ AIR SYSTEM
1C
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
SHUTTER VALVE
u v w x y z 2AI
am2zzn0000104
01-40A–6
TO MODEL INDEX
ATX
k 1BF u v w x y z PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
1P
h 1BB
1T
ATX
1BG
D
1K
1BC
E
1G A
1D SHIFT SOLENOID
B
1AO 1H
REFRIGERANT C
PRESSURE SWITCH 1L
(LOW, HIGH)
1AC
A/C RELAY
MANUAL A/C 1AN
COOLING FAN
i 1AW RELAY NO.1
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE 1AV
SENSOR COOLING FAN
i 1AG RELAY NO.2
1AZ
MAIN RELAY
IG2
IG1
STA
ATX TFT SENSOR 1AJ
1AH h
1AS
TR SWITCH 1AQ k
f
VSS FUEL PUMP RELAY STARTER
h 1AX
BATTERY
2AZ
1R IGNITION SWITCH
1BE k
1V 1AE
INPUT/TURBINE CAN SYSTEM
SPEED SENSOR 1A RELATED MODUL
1AI
FULL-AUTO A/C
HOLD SWITCH
1N 1BA CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
1X
NO.1 FUEL PUMP
f
2A
MTX
2E
NEUTRAL SWITCH NO.2
1J 2B
CPP SWITCH
1M 2F
NO.3 FUEL
2C INJECTOR
2AX
2G
2AS NO.4
2H
2AT
BODY GND
2L
2AW
GND2
OCV
GND1
g
IG1
+B
TP SENSOR 2W
PCM
am2zzw0000462
01-40A–7
TO MODEL INDEX

Without Immobilizer System
PCM
GND2
GND1
B+
BODY GND
IG1
MAF/IAT SENSOR
2R
e 2V
2U
2S
2Q g
2I
2AP
ECT SENSOR
2AC

A/F SENSOR
2AD 2BF
a 2BE
2BG
2D
HO2S
b
2J
GENERATOR 2AE
CMP SENSOR
g 2N 2X a
CKP SENSOR 2Y
2M 2AB b
WITH CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM EGR VALVE
BRAKE SWITCH NO.2 2K e
1I
2O
1AU
2P
1AF 2T
2AF TO GENERATOR
WITH CURRENT SENSOR
CURRENT •• • • • • 2BB
••
SENSOR
•• •••• 2BD
2AN 2BH
KS 1BH 2BA
1E 2AG
VARIABLE TUMBLE
1Z SHUTTER VALVE
1B 2AK
APP SENSOR
1F WITH VARIABLE INTAKE
2AJ AIR SYSTEM
1AD VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
SHUTTER VALVE
1C 2AI
u v w x y z
am2zzn0000124
01-40A–8
TO MODEL INDEX
ATX
k 1BF y z
u v w x PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
1P
h 1BB
1T
ATX
1BG
D
1K
1BC
E
1G A
1D SHIFT SOLENOID
B
1AO 1H
REFRIGERANT C
PRESSURE SWITCH 1L
(LOW, HIGH)
1AC
A/C RELAY
MANUAL A/C 1AN
COOLING FAN RELAY
i 1AW NO.1
1AV
COOLING FAN RELAY
SENSOR
i 1AG NO.2
1AZ
MAIN RELAY
IG2
IG1
STA
1AJ
ATX TFT SENSOR h STARTER
1AH
1AS
1AR k
TR SWITCH f
FUEL PUMP RELAY
VSS
h 1AX
BATTERY
2AZ
1R 1BE k IGNITION SWITCH
1V 1AE
CAN SYSTEM
INPUT/TURBINE
RELATED
SPEED SENSOR 1A 1AI
FULL-AUTO A/C
HOLD SWITCH
1N
1BA CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
NO.1 FUEL PUMP

f
2A
MTX
2E
NEUTRAL SWITCH NO.2
1J 2B
CPP SWITCH
1M 2F
NO.3 FUEL
2C INJECTOR
2AX
2G
2AS NO.4
2H
2AT
BODY GND
2L
2AW
GND2
GND1
OCV
IG1
+B
TP SENSOR 2W g
PCM
am2zzw0000462
End Of Sie
01-40A–9
TO MODEL INDEX

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4100500
PCM TEMPERATURE SENSOR MAIN RELAY

(BUILT-INTO PCM) PCM
APP SENSOR NO.1, NO.2 THROTTLE VALVE ACTUATOR

MAIN RELAY CONTROL
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER
TP SENSOR NO.1, NO.2 VALVE ACTUATOR (WITH
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM)
DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL
MAF SENSOR
VALVE ACTUATOR
IAT SENSOR VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
CONTROL (WITH VARIABLE OCV
MAP SENSOR INTAKE AIR SYSTEM)
FUEL INJECTOR
ECT SENSOR VARIABLE TUMBLE
CONTROL FUEL PUMP RELAY
A/F SENSOR
VARIABLE VALVE
TIMING CONTROL IGNITION COIL
HO2S
CKP SENSOR FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
EGR VALVE
CMP SENSOR
FUEL PUMP CONTROL
KS A/F SENSOR HEATER
CURRENT SENSOR ESA CONTROL

(WITH CURRENT SENSOR) HO2S HEATER
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE EVAPORATIVE A/C RELAY

SENSOR PURGE CONTROL
(WITH MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER)
COOLING FAN RELAY No.1, No.2
IGNITION SWITCH EGR CONTROL
STARTER RELAY
BRAKE SWITCH NO.1
A/F SENSOR HEATER CONTROL GENERATOR (TERMINAL D: FIELD
BRAKE SWITCH NO.2 COIL)
(WITH CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM)
HO2S HEATER CONTROL CAN
TR SWITCH (ATX) A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL
NEUTRAL SWITCH (MTX)

ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL
CPP SWITCH (MTX)
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH

(MIDDLE) STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL
A/C SIGNAL
(A/C SWITCH, CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT, GENERATOR CONTROL
(LOW, HIGH))
CAN
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
BATTERY
GENERATOR
(TERMINAL P: STATOR COIL)
CAN
am2zzn0000125
End Of Sie
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM RELATION CHART [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4100600
x Each control system and their related input and output parts are as follows.
01-40A–10
TO MODEL INDEX

u: Applicable
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
EVAPORATIVE PURGE CONTROL

VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL


FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL
GENERATOR CONTROL
HO2S HEATER CONTROL
FUEL PUMP CONTROL
A/F SENSOR HEATER,

Item
EGR CONTROL
ESA CONTROL
MAIN RELAY
SYSTEM )
CAN
Input device
PCM temperature sensor
u u
(Built-into PCM)
APP sensor No.1, No.2 u u u u u u u
TP sensor No.1, No.2 u u u u u u u u u u u
MAF sensor u u u u u u u u
IAT sensor u u u u u u
MAP sensor u u u u u u
ECT sensor u u u u u u u u u u u
A/F sensor u u
HO2S u u
CKP sensor u u u u u u u u u u u u
CMP sensor u u u
KS u
Current sensor (With
u u
current sensor)
Evaporator temperature
sensor (With manual air u
conditioner)
Ignition switch u u u u
Brake switch No.1 u u u u
Brake switch No.2 (With
u
cruise control system)
Cruise control switch
(With cruise control u
system)
TR switch (ATX) u u u u
Neutral switch (MTX) u u u u u
CPP switch (MTX) u u u u u
Refrigerant pressure
u u u
switch (middle)
A/C signal (A/C switch,
Climate control unit,
u u u u u
refrigerant pressure
switch (low, high))
Vehicle speed signal u u u u u u u
Battery u u u u u
Generator (Terminal P:
u u
stator coil)
CAN u u u u u u u u
Output device
Main relay u
Throttle valve actuator u
Variable intake air shutter
valve actuator (With u
variable intake air system)
01-40A–11
TO MODEL INDEX
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
EVAPORATIVE PURGE CONTROL

VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL


FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL
GENERATOR CONTROL
HO2S HEATER CONTROL
FUEL PUMP CONTROL
A/F SENSOR HEATER,

Item
EGR CONTROL
ESA CONTROL
MAIN RELAY
SYSTEM )
CAN
Variable tumble shutter
u
valve actuator
OCV u
Fuel injector u
Fuel pump relay u
Ignition coil u
Purge solenoid valve u
EGR valve u
A/F sensor heater u
HO2S heater u
A/C relay u
Cooling fan relay No.1,
u
No.2
Starter relay u
Generator (Terminal D:
u
field coil)
CAN u
End Of Sie
MAIN RELAY CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4170300
x When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the main relay turns on.
x When the ignition switch is turned from on to off, the main relay turns on for a few seconds to activate the fully-
closed throttle learning function of the drive-by-wire control.
End Of Sie
MAIN RELAY CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4170100
x The PCM controls the main relay on/off, based on commands from the ignition switch or the drive-by-wire
control.
PCM
IGNITION SWITCH MAIN RELAY
am2zzn0000065
End Of Sie
MAIN RELAY CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4170200
x When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the main relay turns on and power is supplied to sensors
and devices.
x When the ignition switch is turned from on to off, a main relay on command signal is received the main relay
turns on from the drive-by-wire control.
x When the on request signal from the drive-by-wire control stop, the main relay turns off.
End Of Sie
DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4170400
x The drive-by-wire control calculates the optimum target throttle valve opening angle at all ranges of engine
speeds and controls the throttle valve actuator.
x The drive-by-wire control includes idle speed control, accelerator control, cruise control and excess vehicle
speed control.
01-40A–12
TO MODEL INDEX

Control List
Control name Control Outline
Idle speed control x Controls the throttle valve opening angle during idling so that the idle speed is at the
target idle speed.
Accelerator control x Controls the throttle valve opening angle according to the amount of AP depression.
Has a fully-closed throttle learning function for consistent setting of the optimum
throttle opening angle according to changes due to age deterioration.
Traction control (CVT) x Controls the throttle valve opening angle by torque down request signals from the
TCM.
Cruise control (With cruise control x Sets the vehicle speed by operation of the cruise control switch and controls the
system) throttle valve opening angle so that it becomes close to the set vehicle speed.
Excess vehicle speed control x If the vehicle reaches a high speed, the throttle valve is closed to keep the vehicle
speed below the speed limit.
End Of Sie
DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4170500
x The PCM calculates a throttle valve opening angle matching the engine operation conditions from the following
input signals and sends a duty signal to the throttle valve actuator.
PCM
CPP SWITCH (MTX)
ECT SENSOR
IAT SENSOR
CKP SENSOR
TP SENSOR NO.1, NO.2
APP SENSOR NO.1, NO.2
MAF SENSOR
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL THROTTLE VALVE ACTUATOR
TR SWITCH (ATX)
BRAKE SWITCH NO.1
BRAKE SWITCH NO.2

A/C SIGNAL
(A/C SWITCH, CLIMATE CONTROL
UNIT, REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
SWITCH (LOW, HIGH))
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
SWITCH (MIDDLE)
GENERATOR
(TERMINAL P: STATOR COIL)
CAN
am2zzn0000068
End Of Sie
01-40A–13
TO MODEL INDEX

DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4170600
Idle Speed Control
x Controls the throttle valve opening angle so that it is close to the target idle speed calculated by the PCM.
x The PCM calculates the target throttle opening angle by adding each type of correction to the basic duty value
which is the basis of the throttle valve opening angle, and then sends a duty signal to the throttle valve actuator.
The basic duty value is determined by the target engine speed.
x Each type of correction is as follows.
Correction
Correction Purpose Condition Amount of Correction
Water temperature Corrects changes in engine friction Determines correction Correction amount decreases
correction resistance based on changes in engine amount based on ECT. as ECT increases.
temperature.
Correction at engine Prevents idle speed dropping off after Directly after cranking and Correction amount increases
start engine start. engine-start. as ECT decreases.
Feedback correction Performs feedback control so that idle x Executes feedback x Correction amount
speed is close to the target idle speed. conditions when all of the decreases when the idle
following conditions are speed is higher than the
met: target idle speed.
— Vehicle stopped x Correction amount
— AP fully closed increases when the idle
speed is lower than the
target idle speed.
Learning correction Corrects air flow amount changes from Determined by the amount of Learning correction executed
changes in the engine due to aged feedback correction when when upper or lower limit of
deterioration such as engine friction external load correction and feedback correction exceeds
resistance and air leakage from the purge control stop. the fixed value.
throttle valve.
Purge correction Increase in air from purge control is Determined by the purge flow x Correction amount
subtracted from the target throttle amount and purge decreases as purge flow
opening angle. Increases throttle valve concentration when purge amount increases.
opening angle to prevent rotation control is executed. x Correction amount
fluctuation from changes in air/fuel ratio increases as purge flow
when purge concentration is high. concentration increases.
Load correction when Prevents engine speed drop after At acceleration from idle The amount of correction
vehicle accelerates vehicle accelerates from idle. increases as the idle speed
from idle (MTX) depression amount increases.
External load x Prevents engine speed drop when x When any of the following Correction amount increases
correction the A/C and electrical load are signals are input: as external load increases.
operating. — A/C amplifier (A/C
x Prevents engine speed revving switch)
when the A/C and electrical load — Refrigerant pressure
are off. switch (middle)
Fast idle up Rapidly activates the catalytic Synchronizes warm-up Correction amount increases
correction converter after cold-engine start. promotion spark retard as the ignition timing retard for
correction for electric spark the warm-up promotion spark
control. (See 01-40A-26 retard correction of the
ELECTRONIC SPARK ignition timing control
ADVANCE OPERATION [ZJ, advances.
ZY].)
Accelerator Control
x With the 55 kW 1.3GE and 63 kW 1.3GE engine specification models, the two output characteristics have been
achieved by changing the throttle valve opening angle according to the amount of accelerator depression. (ZJ
European (L.H.D. U.K. specs.)
x Controls the throttle valve opening angle through control of the throttle valve actuator, according to the amount
of AP depression.
x The PCM controls the throttle valve actuator so that the actual throttle valve opening angle is close to the target
throttle valve opening angle.
x The final throttle valve opening angle is determined by the sum of the target throttle opening angle during idling
and the target throttle valve opening angle during regular driving.
x The target throttle valve opening angle during regular driving is determined based on the transmission gear
position, the amount of AP depression and the engine speed. If the target throttle opening angle is at the fixed
value or less during regular driving, the PCM switches to idle speed control.
x The PCM sets the throttle valve to the fully-closed position when the ignition switch is on or off and executes the
idle position learning function to learn the throttle valve position. Due to this, changes in the throttle valve
opening angle due to age deterioration are corrected.
01-40A–14
TO MODEL INDEX

x When the ignition switch is off, a main relay on request is output and the fully-closed learning function is
executed. (See 01-40A-12 MAIN RELAY CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY].)
Traction Control (CVT)

x The PCM calculates the target throttle valve opening angle by the torque up/down request signal from the TCM.
Cruise Control (With cruise control system)

x Calculates the throttle valve opening angle based on the deviation of the actual vehicle speed from the set
vehicle speed which was set with the cruise control switch and sends a duty signal to the throttle valve actuator.
x The PCM controls the actual vehicle speed so that it is close to the set vehicle speed.
x The cruise control includes the cruise control operation condition and the cruise control stop condition.
Cruise control operation condition

x When all of the following conditions are met, execution of the cruise control system is enabled (cruise control
standby status).
— Cruise control ON switch: ON
— Vehicle speed: Exceeds 27 km/h {19 mph}
Cruise control stop condition

x When any of the following conditions are met even while in cruise control, the PCM stops the cruise control and
clears the set vehicle speed.
— Ignition switch: OFF
— Cruise control ON switch: OFF
— Cruise control related DTCs (P0564:00, P0571:00) detected
x When any of the following conditions are met even while in cruise control, the PCM stops the cruise control
while storing the set vehicle speed.
— Cancel switch: ON
— TR switch: P/N position switch: ON (ATX)
— Vehicle speed: Less than 22.5 km/h {13.9 mph}
— Brake switch No.1, No.2: ON
— The actual vehicle speed is 15 km/h {9.3 mph} or more lower than the set vehicle speed during cruise
control (ascending).
— Condition where actual vehicle speed is 15 km/h {9.3 mph} or more lower than the set vehicle speed
continues for 60 s or more even when the RESUME switch is on.
Cruise control function

x The cruise control includes accelerating, coasting, resume, tap-down, tap-up and downshift functions.
Function List
Function Contents
Accelerating x When any of the following conditions are met while driving in cruise control and when the RESUME
switch is continuously pressed, the PCM gradually increases the set vehicle speed.
— Except during resume operation
— The RESUME switch is on one time or more during resume operation.
Coasting x When the SET switch is continuously pressed, the PCM gradually decreases the set vehicle speed.
Resume x When the RESUME switch signal is input to the PCM during regular driving (cruise control is
stopped) and the previously set vehicle speed is stored in the PCM, the PCM sets the set vehicle
speed to the previously set vehicle speed and begins control.
Tap down x When all of the following conditions are met while driving in cruise control, the PCM decreases the
set vehicle speed by 1.6 km/h {1 mph} and controls the throttle valve actuator.
— During cruise control
— RESUME switch off
— The RESUME switch switches from off to on
— When actual vehicle speed is lower (set vehicle speed 2 km/h {-1.2 mph})
Tap-up x When all of the following conditions are met, the PCM increases the set vehicle speed by 1.6 km/h
{1 mph} and controls the throttle valve actuator so that the vehicle speed is close to the set vehicle
speed.
— During cruise control
— The RESUME switch switches from off to on
Downshift x When the following conditions are met, a downshift signal is sent to the CAN.
— RESUME switch on
— Target vehicle acceleration is not reached
Excess Vehicle Speed Control

x If the vehicle reaches a high speed, the throttle valve is closed to keep the vehicle speed below the speed limit.
End Of Sie
01-40A–15
TO MODEL INDEX

VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4176300
x Switches energization to the variable intake air shutter valve actuator according to engine speed to increase
the inertia charging effect.
End Of Sie
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4176100
x The PCM determines the engine operation conditions based on input signals and sends an operation signal to
the variable intake air shutter valve actuator.
PCM
CKP SENSOR
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR
TP SENSOR NO.1, NO.2 SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
SYSTEM)
am2zzn0000068
End Of Sie
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4176200
Operation conditions
x If any of the following conditions are met:
— Engine speed is 4,100 rpm or more
When operation conditions are not met
x The PCM energizes the closed-side circuit of the variable intake air shutter valve actuator, closing the variable
intake air shutter valve to enhance the inertia charging effect in the engine low to middle speeds and low load
ranges.
When operation conditions are met
x The PCM energizes the open-side circuit of the variable intake air shutter valve actuator, opening the variable
intake air shutter valve to enhance the inertia charging effect in the engine high speed and high-load range.
End Of Sie
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4176600
x At cold-engine start, the following occurs due to the closing of the variable tumble shutter valve for improved
cold engine exhaust emission performance.
— Improved intake airflow speed near injectors
— Strong air tumble occurs in the combustion changer, promoting vaporization mixture of intake air and fuel
End Of Sie
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4176400
the variable tumble shutter valve actuator.
ECT SENSOR
CKP SENSOR
VARIABLE TUMBLE
PCM SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
IGNITION SWITCH
MAF SENSOR
am2zzn0000068
End Of Sie
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4176500
Operation conditions
x When all of the following conditions are met, the PCM energizes the closed-side circuit of the variable tumble
shutter valve actuator. As a result, the variable tumble shutter valve closes.
— Engine speed is less than 3,250 rpm.
01-40A–16
TO MODEL INDEX

— Throttle valve opening angle is at specified value or less (changes according to engine speed and engine
coolant temperature)
— ECT is less than 60 qC {140qF} .
Inhibition conditions
x When any one of the following conditions are met, the variable tumble control is inhibited and the variable
tumble shutter valve is constantly open.
— DTC has been stored for the ECT sensor.
— DTC has been stored for the TP sensor.
End Of Sie
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4171200
x Variable valve timing control changes the intake valve timing according to engine operation conditions to
improve engine output, fuel economy, and exhaust emission performance.
End Of Sie
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4101600
x Based on the signals from the input sensors, the PCM determines the valve timing suitable for the engine
operation conditions, drives the OCV, and switches the hydraulic passages of the variable valve timing actuator
to provide appropriate valve timing.
ECT SENSOR
CKP SENSOR
CMP SENSOR
MAF SENSOR

OCV
PCM
IGNITION SWITCH
TR SWITCH (ATX)
CPP SWITCH (MTX)
CAN
am2zzn0000083
End Of Sie
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4171300
x The PCM divides the oil control valve OCV drive range into four modes according to engine operation
conditions. The OCV drive current is determined based on the target current calculated in each mode.
Cleaning Mode
Mode execution condition
x When the following condition is met:
— Fully-closed throttle valve during deceleration
Purpose
x Cleaning mode is to remove foreign material in the OCV hydraulic passages.
Operation
x The target current in the cleaning mode is fixed at 100 mA or 780 mA. A current of 100 mA and 780 mA flows
to the OCV alternately at certain intervals. When 100 mA current is supplied, the OCV opens the hydraulic
passage for the retard chamber and hydraulic pressure from the oil pump is introduced to the retard chamber.
When 780 mA current is supplied, the OCV opens the hydraulic passage for the advance chamber and
hydraulic pressure is introduced from the oil pump to the advance chamber. After repeating this operation
several times, foreign material mixed in the OCV is removed and the cleaning mode is completed.
01-40A–17
TO MODEL INDEX

Maximum Cam Retard Mode
x When any of the following conditions are met:
— Cranking
— Idling after completion of cleaning mode
— DTC stored for the following devices:
x ECT sensor
x CKP sensor
x CMP sensor
x TP sensor
x MAF sensor
x OCV
— 5 s just after the engine is started
Purpose
x Maximum cam retard mode stabilizes engine speed by maximally retarding the valve timing when the engine
speed is low during idling.
Operation
x When the target current in the maximum cam retard mode is fixed at 100 mA. When 100 mA current is
supplied, the OCV opens the hydraulic passage for the retard chamber and hydraulic pressure from the oil
pump is introduced to the retard chamber. Because of this, the variable valve timing actuator is fixed at the
maximum retard position (minimum overlap).
Feedback Hold Mode

x Target valve timing and actual valve timing are almost the same.
Purpose
x The feedback hold mode holds the valve timing by returning the OCV spool valve to the neutral position when
target valve timing suitable for the engine operation conditions is obtained.
Operation
x Though the target current in the feedback hold mode is basically around 600 mA, feedback operation is
performed at all times so that the present OCV drive current approaches the target current. Because the hold
current changes due to mechanical variation between engines and deterioration due to aging on OCV internal
parts, the PCM continues to learn the changing current (hold current learning value) to maintain the spool valve
in the neutral position.
ADVANCE
ADVANCE SPEED INCREASES

AS INCLINATION INCREASES
CHANGES ACCORDING TO MECHANICAL

VARIANCE AND AGED DETERIORATION
RETARD
APPROX. 100 MA APPROX. 600 MA APPROX. 1,000 MA
OCV OPERATION CURRENT

am2zzn0000068
Feedback Mode
x Except during cleaning, maximum cam retard, or feedback hold modes.
01-40A–18
TO MODEL INDEX

Purpose
x Feedback mode obtains valve timing suitable for engine operation conditions by performing the feedback
operation so that present OCV drive current is set closer to the target current determined by the PCM
according to engine operation conditions.
Operation
x Based on engine operation conditions, the target current is set between 100 mA (maximum retard) and 1,000
mA (maximum advance), using the neutral point of approx. 600 mA as a reference. Actually, the target current
is calculated by subtracting the current necessary for obtaining the target advance/retard amount, using a
reference at the hold-current learning value calculated from the neutral position of the spool valve.
Advance spark speed correction

x If there is a large difference between the target valve timing and the actual valve timing, the target current
correction is applied so that it is set closer to the target valve timing more quickly to raise the advance spark
speed by advancing the spool valve initialization operation.
x The variable valve timing actuator advance spark speed increases as the hydraulic passage in the OCV widens
and decreases as it narrows.
Valve timing determination

x The PCM controls current to the OCV to obtain optimum valve timing suitable for the engine operation
conditions (target valve timing).
x The PCM compares target valve timing with actual valve timing, and feeds back the result to change valve
timing smoothly.
Target valve timing

x Determined according to engine speed, engine coolant temperature and charging efficiency.
Actual valve timing

x Means present valve timing. Actual valve timing is calculated by adding the maximum cam retard learning value
for energization from the value detected by the CMP and CKP sensors.
Cam maximum retard learning value

x Though the intake camshaft valve timing (including maximum retard position) is detected based on the
difference between the signal from the sensor and signal from the CKP sensor, the difference between the
signals deviates due to the sensor installation condition. Because of this, the PCM stores the difference
between the signal build-ups at the maximum OCV retard position to prevent deviation in valve timing detection.
End Of Sie DUE TO INCORRECT ASSEMBLY
NORMAL DIFFERENCE
CMP SENSOR
SIGNAL
CKP SENSOR
SIGNAL
am2zzn0000068
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]

id0140c4101700
x Performs optimum fuel injection according to engine operation conditions.
End Of Sie
01-40A–19
TO MODEL INDEX

FUEL INJECTION CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4101800
x The PCM determines the engine operation conditions based on the input signals from each sensor, drives the
injectors at the optimum fuel injection time (fuel injection amount) and fuel injection timing to inject fuel.
ECT SENSOR PCM
IAT SENSOR
CKP SENSOR
SYNCHRONIZED
FUEL INJECTION
CMP SENSOR

EFFECTIVE
INJECTION TIME
INJECTION
MAF SENSOR TIME AT
ENGINE START
A/F SENSOR FUEL INJECTOR
BASIC
INJECTION TIME
HO2S
CORRECTIONS
MAP SENSOR

INEFFECTIVE
INJECTION TIME FUEL INJECTOR ACTUATION
BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 TIMING AND ACTUATION TIME
A/C SIGNAL NON-
(A/C SWITCH, CLIMATE SYNCHRONIZED
CONTROL UNIT, INJECTION
SWITCH (LOW, HIGH))
SWITCH (MIDDLE)
BATTERY
CAN
am2zzn0000108
End Of Sie
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4101900
Injection Timing
x There is synchronized fuel injection, which performs fuel injection by the setting of the crankshaft position, and
non-synchronized fuel injection which performs fuel injection when the condition for fuel injection is met
regardless of the crankshaft position.
Synchronized fuel injection

x The crankshaft rotation is synchronized by each intake and exhaust stroke of the cylinders, and fuel injection is
performed by the fuel injection timing and the injection amount corresponding to the input signals of the
following sensors.
— ECT sensor
— IAT sensor
— CKP sensor
— MAF sensor
Non-synchronized fuel injection

x The crankshaft rotation is not synchronized and fuel injection is performed by the injection timing and injection
amount as triggered by the input signals of the following sensors.
— ECT sensor
— IAT sensor
— TP sensor
01-40A–20
TO MODEL INDEX

— MAF sensor
Relation between synchronized and non-synchronized fuel injection

x If synchronized and non-synchronized fuel injection happen to occur together, fuel is injected by adding the fuel
injection timing of both.
Injection time
x The PCM calculates the fuel injection amount according to the engine operation conditions as the fuel injection
time and energizes the fuel injectors.
Fuel injector energization time and operation conditions

x The fuel injectors cause an operation delay with 1
the start of energization from the PCM. The PCM ON
calculates the fuel injection time by adding the INJECTION 3
2
non-injection time (ineffective injection time) to SIGNAL
the actual injection time (effective injection time), OFF
and energizes the fuel injectors for this time.
x The fuel injection time is based on the following FUEL INJECTOR
CURRENT
formula: 4
0
Fuel injection time = effective injection time + OPEN
ineffective injection time FUEL
INJECTOR 5
Ineffective injection time CLOSED
— The fuel injectors cause a delay in operation
due to a delay in the build-up of operation 1 FUEL INJECTION TIME
current from coil inductance with the start of 2 INEFFECTIVE INJECTION TIME
energization, and by the mass of the needle
3 EFFECTIVE INJECTION TIME
valve and plunger, and spring resistance. This
4 FUEL INJECTOR OPENING VALVE CURRENT
delay is the ineffective injection time.
5 FUEL INJECTOR VALVE OPENING TIME
— The non-injection time is affected by the am2zzn0000069
change in battery voltage. Accordingly, the
PCM sets the non-injection time according to
the battery voltage.
Effective injection time
— The fuel injector opening valve time which is the actual fuel injection time is called the effective injection
amount.
Determination of effective injection time

x The PCM divides the engine operation conditions into control zones according to engine speed and engine
load and determines the effective injection time at each control zone to perform optimum air/fuel ratio control in
all engine driving ranges.
LARGE
HIGH LOAD VOLUME
INCREASE ZONE
START EXCESSIVE
FEEDBACK ZONE
INTAKE AIR AMOUNT ZONE ENGINE SPEED
FUEL CUT ZONE
DECELERATION VOLUME
INCREASE ZONE (MTX)
DECELERATION
FUEL CUT ZONE
ENGINE SPEED HIGH
am2zzn0000069
Start zone
Purpose
x Improved engine startability
01-40A–21
TO MODEL INDEX

Control condition
x When engine speed is 500 rpm or less.
Determination of fuel injection time
x Determined according to engine coolant temperature and engine speed.
Excessive engine speed fuel cut zone
Note
x If the engine reaches a high engine speed, the following controls are performed to protect the engine:
1. To alert the driver that the engine has reached a high engine speed, fuel cut and fuel injection are
repeated at regular intervals.
2. If the engine reaches a high engine speed even if the above procedure is performed, a forced shift-up
is performed to lower the engine speed. (AT only)
Purpose
x Engine protection
Control conditions
x Engine speed is approx. 6,500 rpm or more
x All of the following conditions are met while the vehicle is stopped.
— Engine speed of 1,500 rpm or more continues for 5 min.
— Engine speed of 3,000 rpm or more continues for 2 min.
— Engine speed of 5,500 rpm or more continues for 10 s.
x Fuel injection time is set to 0 (fuel cut).
Deceleration Fuel Cut Zone

Purpose
x Improved fuel economy
x Prevents overheating of the catalytic converter
Control condition
x When the engine conditions are as follows
— Fully-closed throttle valve during deceleration (charging at fixed value or more)
— During driving under high load at engine speed of 1,000 rpm or more
Determination of fuel injection time method
x Fuel injection time is set to 0 (fuel cut).
Deceleration volume increase zone (MTX)

Purpose
x Improved driveability
Control condition
x During Shifting
x Determined according to engine speed.
High load volume increase zone

Purpose
x Improved driveability
Control condition
x Either the engine speed, charging efficiency or AP opening angle is a fixed value or more.
x Corrections are added to the basic injection amount and the high load coefficient is calculated according to the
engine speed, mass intake airflow amount and the throttle valve opening angle.
Feedback Zone
Purpose
x Improved fuel economy
x Improved exhaust gas purification
Control condition
x During engine operation other than high load volume increase zone and engine start zone.
x During normal driving, the injection time is determined by the A/F sensor and HO2S and sets to the theoretical
air/fuel ratio.
01-40A–22
TO MODEL INDEX

Calculation method table for fuel injection time
(*: Fuel injection time base, x: Correction for fuel injection time)
Control zone
DECELERATION VOLUME INCREASE (MTX)
HIGH LOAD VOLUME INCREASE

DECELERATION FUEL CUT
Contents
(Fuel injection time, calculation method, or determination method)
EXCESSIVE ENGINE
SPEED FUEL CUT
FEEDBACK
START
Injection time at start Set value according to engine coolant temperature (low
*
engine coolant temperatureolong injection time)
Basic injection time Basic injection time = charging efficiency x fuel flow
* * *
coefficient
Fuel cut Fuel injection time = 0 * *
Ineffective injection Set time according to injector performance
* * * *
time
Purpose: Maintains stability of engine speed just after engine
start
Correction condition
Volume increase
x Specified time according to engine coolant temperature
correction after engine u u
directly after engine start
start
Correction amount
x Low engine coolant temperatureolarge correction
x Low intake air temperatureolarge correction
Purpose: Controls air/fuel ratio to theoretical air/fuel ratio
x When engine coolant temperature is at set value or more.
A/F sensor Correction amount
u
Feedback correction x A/F sensor current value 0 mA or lessovolume decrease
correction
x A/F sensor current value 0 mA or moreovolume increase
correction
Purpose: Ensures engine speed stability during D-range
shifting
D-range correction Correction condition
u u
(ATX, CVT) x Throttle valve fully-closed and shifted into D range
Correction amount
Purpose: Improved engine output, decrease of exhaust gas
temperature
x According to engine speed when the throttle valve opening
High load volume
angle is the fixed value or more, otherwise, according to u
increase correction
engine speed and charging efficiency.
Correction amount
x High engine speed, high charging efficiencyolarge
correction
Purpose: When engine coolant temperature is low, maintains
combustion stability
Warm-up volume
x While at set engine coolant temperature u
increase correction
Correction amount
x High charging efficiency, low engine coolant
temperatureolarge correction
01-40A–23
TO MODEL INDEX

Control zone
DECELERATION VOLUME INCREASE (MTX)
HIGH LOAD VOLUME INCREASE

DECELERATION FUEL CUT
Contents
(Fuel injection time, calculation method, or determination method)
EXCESSIVE ENGINE
SPEED FUEL CUT
FEEDBACK
START
Injection time at start Set value according to engine coolant temperature (low
*
engine coolant temperatureolong injection time)
Basic injection time Basic injection time = charging efficiency x fuel flow
* * *
coefficient
Fuel cut Fuel injection time = 0 * *
Ineffective injection Set time according to injector performance
* * * *
time
Purpose: Corrects fuel injection retard during acceleration/
deceleration to ensure drive stability
Acceleration/deceleration Correction conditions
volume increase x Acceleration/deceleration (change in amount of charging u u
correction efficiency) is at set value or more.
Correction amount
Purpose: Ensures stability of engine speed during recovery
from fuel cut
Deceleration volume Correction condition
u
increase correction x Recovery from deceleration fuel cut
Correction amount
x High engine speedosmall correction
Purpose: Corrects deviation in air/fuel ratio from changes due
to aged deterioration of mechanical devices
Learning correction x Under any condition except purge control u u
Correction amount
x Learning value based on average of feedback correction
value
Purpose: Ensures combustion stability when variable tumble
shutter valve is open
Variable tumble correction u
x Variable tumble shutter valve changes from closed to open
Correction amount
Fuel Cut
x Includes fuel cut under the following conditions except fuel cut at excessive engine speed according to engine
operation and deceleration fuel cut.
Shift fuel cut (ATX)

Purpose
x To reduces shift shock during shifting
Execution condition
x During shifting (fuel cut of No.1 and No.4 cylinder)
Sensor damage fuel cut

Purpose
x To prevent engine damage from abnormal ignition due to a malfunction input of a cylinder identification or the
engine speed signal.
01-40A–24
TO MODEL INDEX

Execution condition
x DTC stored for the following devices:
— CKP sensor
— CMP sensor
Dechoke Control
Purpose
x To improve engine starting startability when spark plugs are flooded.
Execution condition
x When cranking close to fully-open throttle valve
End Of Sie
FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4102000
x Performs energization of fuel pump relay only when engine is running (operates the fuel pump) to improve
safety and durability.
End Of Sie
FUEL PUMP CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4102100
x The PCM determines the engine starting condition based on each input signal and controls the fuel pump relay
on/off.
CKP SENSOR
PCM FUEL PUMP RELAY
IGNITION SWITCH
am2zzn0000068
End Of Sie
FUEL PUMP CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4102200
Operation Condition
x When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the PCM turns the fuel pump relay on for 1 s, then off.
x When it is detected that the NE signal falls during cranking, the fuel pump relay turns on.
x When the engine is stopped, the fuel pump relay turns off.
End Of Sie
ELECTRONIC SPARK ADVANCE OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4175100
x Controls ignition to optimum timing according to engine operation conditions.
End Of Sie
01-40A–25
TO MODEL INDEX

ELECTRONIC SPARK ADVANCE BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4174900
x The PCM determines the engine operation conditions based on input signals from sensors, blocks current to
the ignition coils by the calculated ignition timing, and discharges (ignition) the spark plugs based on the effect
of electromagnetic mutual induction.
PCM
CPP SWITCH (MTX)

IGNITER OPERATION TIME IGNITION COIL
ECT SENSOR
IAT SENSOR
IGNITION TIMING
CKP SENSOR
CMP SENSOR
APP SENSOR NO.1, NO.2 CYCLE ESTIMATED IGNITION

FIXED
MAF SENSOR IGNITION
IDLE SPARK ADVANCE
KS
BASIC SPARK ADVANCE
TR SWITCH (ATX)
BRAKE SWITCH NO.1

CORRECTIONS
A/C SIGNAL
(A/C SWITCH, CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT,
SWITCH (LOW, HIGH)
CAN
am2zzn0000070
End Of Sie
ELECTRONIC SPARK ADVANCE OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4175000
Ignition Method
x The PCM excites the ignition coils employing either fixed ignition or cycle estimated ignition according to engine
operation conditions.
Ignition
Ignition timing Ignition coil energization period
method
Fixed Fixed at BTDC 6 q Fixed period at BTDC 6 q to end of energization
ignition
Cycle Ignition at timing appropriate to x Energization time (ignition coil energization time) to igniter is determined
estimated engine operation conditions according to battery voltage
ignition based on input signals x Cylinder independent ignition
01-40A–26
TO MODEL INDEX

Determination of Ignition Timing
Division of control zones
x The PCM divides the engine control operations into each control zone according to the engine speed and
throttle valve opening angle to determine the ignition timing by each of the control zones to perform optimum
ignition control under all engine operation conditions.
OPEN
CYCLE ESTIMATED ZONE
CYCLE ESTIMATED IGNITION
THROTTLE VALVE START
POSITION ZONE
FIXED IDLE ZONE

IGNITION
CLOSED
LOW ENGINE SPEED HIGH
am2zzn0000070
Control zone Control condition Ignition method

Engine speed is 500 rpm or less or when mass Fixed ignition
Start zone
airflow sensor is damaged.
Fully-closed throttle valve when engine speed is the Determines ignition timing adding each correction
Idle zone
target idle speed + 650 rpm or less. to the idle spark advance
Cycle estimated Determines ignition timing adding each correction
Engine operation except start zone and idle zone
zone to the basic spark advance
01-40A–27
TO MODEL INDEX

Ignition timing calculation method table
*: Ignition timing base, x: Correction for ignition timing
Control zone
estimated
Calculation method or determination method for ignition
Contents
timing, advance value and correction
Cycle
Start
Idle
Fixed ignition Fixed at BTDC approx. 6 qCA *
Cycle Idle spark Set value according to target speed and charging efficiency*1 *
estimated advance
ignition Basic spark Set value according to engine speed and charging efficiency*1 *
advance
Engine coolant Purpose: Protects combustion stability when engine coolant
temperature spark temperature is low.
advance Except during idling u u
correction x High charging efficiency*1, low engine coolant
temperatureolarge correction
Warm-up Purpose: Activates the catalytic converter earlier
promotion spark Constant period after engine start u
retard correction x According to engine coolant temperatureocorrection
Feedback Purpose: Ensures idling stability
correction During idling (inhibited during test mode)
x Large difference between actual engine speed and target
u
engine speedolarge correction
x Small difference between actual engine speed and target
engine speedosmall correction
Variable tumble Purpose: ignition timing optimization during variable tumble control
spark advance Controls spark advance amount according to the variable
correction tumble shutter valve open/closed condition u
x Closed conditionosmall spark advance amount
x Open conditionolarge spark advance amount
EGR correction Purpose: Prevents deviation of required ignition timing during EGR
correction gas feed
When EGR valve position is the specified value or more
except during EGR valve initialization u
x According to engine speed and charging
efficiency*1ocorrection
Shift spark retard Purpose: Reduces shift shock during shifting
correction Determined according to torque reduction request signal from
u
(ATX) the ATX control
x Large torque down request during shiftingolarge correction
Deceleration fuel Purpose: Reduces shock after recovery from deceleration fuel cut
cut recovery and during re-acceleration while in deceleration fuel cut
retard correction Re-acceleration after recovery from deceleration fuel cut and u u
while in deceleration fuel cut
Acceleration spark Purpose: Prevents knocking and shock during sudden acceleration
retard correction Acceleration when charging efficiency*1volume increase u
(acceleration amount) is constant value or more.
x High acceleration amountohigh retard
Knocking spark Purpose: Knocking suppression
retard correction When knocking is detected while driving under high load u
x Large amount of knockingolarge correction
*1
: Charging efficiency is ratio of actual intake air amount to maximum air charging amount (mass volume) of
cylinder. This value increases proportionately to the increase in engine load.
End Of Sie
EGR CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4171400
x Adjusts the EGR valve to the optimum opening angle according to engine operation conditions.
x The valve in the EGR valve allows for more precise control by being driven by the stepping motor.
End Of Sie
01-40A–28
TO MODEL INDEX

EGR CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4171500
x The PCM determines the engine conditions based on input signals and sends an operation signal to the EGR
valve.
PCM
NEUTRAL SWITCH (MTX) EGR VALVE OPERATION

EGR VALVE
STEP NUMBER
CPP SWITCH (MTX)
ECT SENSOR
TARGET CURRENT
IAT SENSOR EGR EGR
VALVE VALVE
POSITION POSITION
CKP SENSOR
MAF SENSOR BASIC EGR

VALVE POSITION
MAP SENSOR
CORRECTIONS
am2zzn0000068
End Of Sie
EGR CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4171600
Stepping Motor Operation Principles
x The PCM opens/closes the EGR valve by controlling the amount of stepping motor rotation (step number).
x The stepping motor operates by the combination of coils No.1—4 according to the stepping motor step number.
Energization condition for each coil
ON: Energization, OFF: Non-energization
When current step number Evenly One Two Three Four Five Six Seven
divided by eight divisible leftover leftover leftover divisible leftover leftover leftover
No.1 coil ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
No.2 coil OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
No.3 coil OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
No.4 coil ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
Example of energization condition for each coil and step number

ON: Energization, OFF: Non-energization
Step number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 30 52
No.1 coil ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
No.2 coil OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
No.3 coil OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON
No.4 coil ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
x The energization condition of stepping motor coils No.1—4 can be verified by verifying the step number from
“SEGRP” on the PID/data monitor function of the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
01-40A–29
TO MODEL INDEX

Control outline
x The PCM constantly calculates the optimum target EGR valve position according to the engine operation
conditions and controls the EGR stepping motor step number so that the current EGR valve position is close to
the target.
x If the current EGR valve position is smaller than the target EGR position (deviation is a positive number), the
PCM increases the stepping motor step number and opens the EGR valve. If larger (deviation is a negative
number), the PCM decreases the stepping motor step number and closes the EGR valve. Step numbers are
increased or decreased by one step at a time.
Target EGR valve position

x The PCM determines the value to increase or decrease the EGR valve opening angle according to the engine
operation conditions. The PCM determines the target EGR valve position through each correction based on the
basic EGR valve position that is set according to the engine speed and load.
Target EGR valve position determination table
Contents Method for calculating or determining the EGR valve position and correction
Within steps 0—52 in the stepping motor, determined as follows:
x When the engine speed is 1,187—4,200 rpm and the charging efficiency*1 is within
Basic EGR valve position 12.5—75%, the engine speed and charging efficiency are determined to be at basic
position
x When the EGR control inhibition conditions are met, step 0.
Purpose: Improved driveability
Engine coolant Engine coolant temperature is 65—75qC {149—167qF}
temperature x The step number is restricted between 0—100% of the basic EGR valve position
correction according to the engine coolant temperature.
(Low engine coolant temperatureolow step number)
Purpose: Improved driveability
Intake air Intake air temperature is -5—0qC {23—32qF} or the intake air temperature is
temperature 60 qC {140qF} or more
correction x Step number is restricted between 40—100% of basic EGR valve position
(Low intake air temperatureolarge step number)
correction*2 Purpose: Improved driveability
Acceleration/ During acceleration/deceleration, when the throttle valve opening angle
deceleration fluctuation rate is the set value or more
correction x During accelerationostep number is restricted to 10% of basic EGR value position.
x During decelerationostep number is restricted to 0% of basic EGR valve position.
Purpose: EGR volume optimization during variable tumble control
Controls EGR volume according to whether variable tumble shutter valve is
Variable tumble
correction open or closed
x Valve closeosmall correction
x Valve openolarge correction
*1
: The charging efficiency is the ratio of the actual amount of intake air to the maximum air charging amount
(mass volume) of the cylinder. This value increases proportionately to the increase in engine load.
*2 : The correction is to restrict the basic EGR valve position value. Except for the above conditions and inhibition
conditions, the correction value is 100%, and the target EGR valve position equals the EGR valve position
value.
Inhibition conditions
x To improve driveability and ensure exhaust emission performance, the EGR valve closes when any of the
following conditions are met.
— At engine start
— Idling
— Engine speed is less than 1,187 rpm or more than 4,200 rpm.
— Engine coolant temperature is lass than 65qC {149qF}
— Charging efficiency is less than 12.5% or the charging efficiency is 75% or more.
— When the fuel injection control is in the high load volume increase zone
— Decelerated
— During TCS control
— Intake air temperature is less than -5qC {23qF}
End Of Sie
PURGE CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4175700
x An appropriate amount of evaporative gas is fed into the intake manifold by the driving of the purge solenoid
valve according to the engine operation conditions to ensure driveability and prevent release of evaporative gas
into the atmosphere.
End Of Sie
01-40A–30
TO MODEL INDEX

PURGE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4175500
the purge solenoid valve.
PCM
ECT SENSOR PURGE SOLENOID VALVE PURGE SOLENOID

ENERGIZATION TIME VALVE
IAT SENSOR
CKP SENSOR

PURGE FLOW AMOUNT
MAF SENSOR
A/F SENSOR
HO2S BASIC PURGE

FLOW AMOUNT
BRAKE SWITCH NO.1
CORRECTIONS
BATTERY
MAP SENSOR
am2zzn0000104
End Of Sie
PURGE CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4175600
Determination of Purge Solenoid Valve Energization Time
x The PCM determines the target purge flow amount according to engine operation conditions as the basic flow
amount. The actual operation delays the build-up of operation current from coil inductance and corrects
energization time according to fluctuation in battery voltage to cause operation delay based on the mass of the
needle valve and plunger, and spring resistance. The lower the rate of battery positive voltage, the longer the
energization time.
Calculation Method for Purge Flow Amount

x The PCM determines the purge flow amount through the addition of each correction to the basic purge flow
amount.
Contents Calculation or determination method of purge flow amount and correction
The basic purge flow amount is determined by multiplying the intake temperature and
barometric pressure correction to the purge mass volume which is calculated by multiplying
Basic purge flow amount
the base purge rate and the intake air mass volume, which differs according to engine
conditions.
Purpose: Prevents a sudden change in air/fuel ratio during the start-up of purge control.
Purge start-up
During purge control start-up
correction
x When purge control operation conditions are metocorrection
correction
Purpose: Decreases the amount of purge flow and stabilizes the air/fuel ratio.
Volume decrease
When fuel injection control feedback correction value is unstable
correction
x According to the A/F sensor feedback condition
Operation condition
x For purge control during normal driving, the PCM sends a duty signal to the purge solenoid valve when all of
the following conditions are met.
— Fuel injection control is in feedback zone or high load volume increase zone.
— Airflow passage damage related DTC is not stored.
— Engine coolant temperature is 80q {176qF} or more.
End Of Sie
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) HEATER CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4782000
x Based on the control of the front and HO2S heaters, a stabilized oxygen concentration is detected even at low
exhaust temperatures and feedback control of fuel injection even during cold engine start is made possible for
improved cold temperature exhaust emission performance.
01-40A–31
TO MODEL INDEX

x When exhaust gas temperature is high, the front and HO2S are protected from a rise in temperature by the
stopping of actuation to the A/F sensor and HO2S heaters.
End Of Sie
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) HEATER CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
[ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4782100
the A/F sensor or HO2S.
ECT SENSOR
IAT SENSOR
CKP SENSOR
A/F SENSOR HEATER
PCM
HO2S HEATER
MAF SENSOR
MAP SENSOR
BATTERY
am2zzn0000104
End Of Sie
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) HEATER CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ,
ZY]
id0140c4782200
A/F sensor heater
x The PCM operates the A/F sensor heater according to engine operation conditions as shown in the table
below.
Drive duty ratio Engine operation conditions
Determines the duty ratio by x Engine coolant temperature reaches 15qC {59qF} after 18 s have elapsed since engine
measuring the element start (drive duty ratio: 1.1—20%)
temperature with the A/F sensor x Engine coolant temperature sensor malfunction (drive duty ratio: 1.1—67%)
heater element impedance x Under conditions except above (drive duty ratio: 67—100%)
HO2S heater
x The PCM operates the HO2S heater according to engine operation conditions as shown in the table below.
Drive duty ratio Engine operation conditions
x Engine coolant temperature is -10qC {14qF} or less
x Battery voltage is less than 9V or the battery voltage is 16V or more
0% x Heavy load condition
x While engine is stopped
x During a certain period after engine start
x After a certain period has elapsed since engine start
x During engine rotation except under heavy load
40%
x Engine coolant temperature is -10qC {14qF} or more
x DTC has been stored for the ECT sensor
x For a fixed period of time after engine start when the engine coolant temperature at
engine start is 12qC {54qF} or less than the engine coolant temperature when the engine
50—90%
is stopped from a previous operation (differs from engine coolant temperature at engine
start [lower water temperatureolonger time]).
End Of Sie
A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4103500
x The current application (energize/non-energize) to the A/C relay (magnetic clutch) is controlled according to the
engine operation conditions to prevent deterioration of engine performance, damage to the engine, and
deterioration of the A/C function.
End Of Sie
01-40A–32
TO MODEL INDEX

A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4103600
x The PCM determines the engine operation conditions based on signals from the various input parts and sends
an on/off control signal to the A/C relay.
CPP SWITCH (MTX)
ECT SENSOR

(BUILT-INTO PCM)
CKP SENSOR PCM
TP SENSOR NO.1, NO.2 A/C RELAY
CURRENT SENSOR
(WITH CURRENT SENSOR)
SENSOR (WITH MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER)
TR SWITCH (ATX)
A/C SIGNAL
CONTROL UNIT,
SWITCH (LOW, HIGH)
MAP SENSOR
CAN
am2zzn0000125
End Of Sie
A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4103700
Operation Condition
x The PCM stops energization to the A/C relay when any of the following conditions are met:
01-40A–33
TO MODEL INDEX

A/C cut-off control operation conditions
Operation condition A/C relay non-energization period Purpose
At engine start Approx. 4 s Improved startability
At drive-away Improved drive-away
Approx. 3 s
performance
During acceleration (throttle valve opening angle Improved acceleration
Approx. 5 s
50% or more) performance
When engine coolant temperature is 113qC Repeatedly turns on and off every 10 s until the Improved engine reliability
{235qF} engine coolant temperature is less than approx.
107qC {225qF}
Engine coolant temperature is 117qC {243qF} or Until engine coolant temperature is less than Improved engine reliability
more 110qC {230qF}
At high engine speed Until engine speed decreases to less than Improved A/C compressor
(engine speed 6,800 or more) 6,300 rpm reliability
When temperature in PCM is 115qC {239qF} or Until temperature is PCM decreases to less PCM protection
more than 112qC {234qF}
When evaporator temperature sensor is less To prevent blocking the air
than 3.7qC {39qF}*1 Until evaporator temperature sensor is 4.5qC passing through
{40qF} or more evaporator due to freezing
of dripping water.
x Brake pedal is depressed with all of the Braking performance
following conditions met improvement
— Generator output current is at specified
value or more Approx. 2 s
— Estimated value of the power brake unit
vacuum is at the specified value or less
— Vehicle speed is at specified value or less
*1
End Of Sie
ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4103800
x Through cooling of the radiator and condenser by operation of the cooling fan according to vehicle conditions,
engine reliability and cooling performance have been improved.
End Of Sie
ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4103900
x The PCM determines the engine operation conditions based on input signals from the sensors and controls the
cooling fan relay NO.1, NO.2.
ECT SENSOR

(BUILT-INTO PCM)
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL PCM

COOLING FAN RELAY NO.1, NO.2
A/C SIGNAL
CONTROL UNIT,
SITCH (LOW, HIGH))
SWITCH (MIDDLE)
BATTERY
am2zzn0000082
End Of Sie
ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4104000
Operation
x The PCM operates cooling fan relays No.1 and No.2 as indicated in the table below.
01-40A–34
TO MODEL INDEX
Fan operation Cooling fan relay Cooling Fan relay

Operation condition
conditions No.1 No.2
x Except for low-speed and high speed operation
Stop OFF OFF
conditions.
x Engine coolant temperature is 100qC {212qF} or more
x When all of the following conditions are met.
Low-speed rotation ON OFF
— Vehicle speed is less than 100 km/h {62 mph}
— A/C on (refrigerant pressure switch (middle) off)
x Engine coolant temperature 108qC {227qF} or more
x Temperature in PCM is 110qC {230qF} or more
x ECT sensor malfunction
HIgh-speed rotation ON ON
x When all of the following conditions are met:
— A/C on {refrigerant pressure switch (middle) on}
— Vehicle speed is 100 km/h {62 mph} or less
End Of Sie
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4172000
x Theft deterrence has been improved by controlling energization to the starter relay according to an engine stop
request signal from the immobilizer system.
End Of Sie
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4172100
CAN PCM STARTER RELAY
am2zzn0000067
End Of Sie
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4172200
x The PCM stops energization of the starter relay according to an engine stop request from the immobilizer
system.
When receiving engine stop request signal
— The PCM does not establish a ground to the starter circuit. Therefore, the starter motor does not rotate
because there is no energization of the starter relay even if the ignition switch is turned to the START
position, and the engine does not start.
When not receiving engine stop request signal
— The PCM establishes a ground to the starter circuit. Therefore, when the ignition switch is turned to the
START position, the starter relay is energized and the starter motor rotates. As a result, the engine starts
normally.
WHEN NOT RECEIVING ENGINE STOP WHEN ENGINE STOP REQUEST SIGNAL
REQUEST SIGNAL IS RECEIVED
IGNITION IGNITION FROM BATTERY
FROM BATTERY
SWITCH SWITCH
PCM START SIGNAL PCM START SIGNAL
EXCEPT MTX EXCEPT MTX

STARTER RELAY
STARTER RELAY
TR SWITCH
TR SWITCH
M STARTER STARTER M
STARTER STARTER
INTERLOCK SWITCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
MTX MTX
am2zzn0000067
End Of Sie
01-40A–35
TO MODEL INDEX

GENERATOR CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4172300
x Generator output is optimized according to the engine operation and electrical load conditions, ensuring idling
stability and anti-load performance.
End Of Sie
GENERATOR CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4172400
x The PCM determines the engine operation and electrical load conditions based on input signals, and controls
excitation time of the generator field coil.
PCM
CURRENT SENSOR
(WITH CURRENT SENSOR) FIELD COIL GENERATOR
EXCITATION TIME (TERMINAL D: FIELD COIL)
MAP SENSOR
TARGET EXCITATION
ECT SENSOR CURRENT
CKP SENSOR GENERATOR

ROTATION
SPEED
GENERATOR TARGET GENERATED

(TERMINAL P: STATOR COIL) CURRENT
BATTERY
TARGET BATTERY VOLTAGE

CAN (REGULATING VOLTAGE)
am2zzn0000125
End Of Sie
GENERATOR CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4172500
Determination of Field Coil Excitation Time
1 CYCLE
EXCITATION TIME
am2zzn0000065
x The PCM increases or decreases the field coil excitation current by sending a duty signal to the power
transistor built into the generator.
x The PCM changes the duty ratio of the duty signal to change the energization time of the power transistor. As a
result, field coil excitation current is changed. For example, when the battery positive voltage drops, the duty
ratio of the duty signal sent to the power transistor is larger, increasing the field coil excitation current.
Control
x To maintain optimum battery voltage, the PCM increases and decreases the field coil excitation current.
x The generator rotation speed is calculated based on the ratio between the generator pulley and eccentric shaft
pulley, and the engine speed.
x The target output current is calculated from the difference obtained by comparison between present battery
positive voltage and target battery positive voltage (regulated voltage), calculated based on the IAT, engine
speed, and vehicle speed.
x When an electrical load is applied, power consumption increases and the battery positive voltage drops,
increasing the target engine speed at idling.
01-40A–36
TO MODEL INDEX

x The PCM calculates the target excitation current based on the battery charge condition. The battery charge
condition is estimated based on the battery charge/discharge flow from the current sensor. (With current
sensor)
x If the current sensor is malfunctioning (DTC P1515:00 is stored), the PCM, as in the past, calculates the target
excitation current based on the targeted generator current (target generated current) and the generator rotation
speed at that time. (With current sensor)
End Of Sie
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c410410
x The PCM sends and receives signals to and from the CAN system related modules through the CAN.
x Refer to “CAN System” for a detailed explanation of the CAN.
(See 09-40-7 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) SYSTEM OUTLINE.)
(See 09-40-9 CAN SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW.)
(See 09-40-10 CAN SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM.)
(See 09-40-10 CAN SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.)
End Of Sie
PCM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4105300
Function List
x The control descriptions are as shown below.
Function Description
Main relay When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the main relay turns on.
Drive-by-wire control The drive-by-wire control calculates the optimum target throttle valve opening angle at all
ranges of engine speeds and controls the throttle valve actuator.
Variable intake air control Switches energization of the variable intake air shutter valve actuator according to engine
(With variable intake air speed to enhance the inertia charging effect.
system only)
Variable tumble control At cold engine start, the following effects occur due to the closing of the variable tumble shutter
valve for improved cold engine emission performance.
x Improved intake airflow speed near injectors
x Strong air tumble occurs in the combustion changer, promoting vaporization mixture of
intake air and fuel
Variable valve timing control Changes the intake valve timing according to engine operation conditions to improve engine
output, fuel economy and exhaust emission performance.
Fuel injection control Performs optimum fuel injection according to engine operation conditions.
Fuel pump control Performs energization of the fuel pump relay only when the engine is running (operates fuel
pump) to improve stability and durability.
ESA control Control ignition to optimum timing according to engine operation conditions.
Evaporative purge control An appropriate amount of evaporative gas is fed into the dynamic chamber by the driving of the
purge solenoid valve according to the engine operation conditions to ensure driveability and
prevent release of fuel vapor gas into the atmosphere.
EGR control Adjusts the EGR to the optimum opening angle according to engine operation conditions.
A/F sensor heater, HO2S Based on the control of the A/F sensor heater and HO2S heater, a stabilized oxygen
heater control concentration is detected even at low exhaust gas temperature and feedback control of fuel
injection even during cold engine start is made possible for improved cold temperature
emission performance.
A/C cut-off control The current application (energize/non-energize) to the A/C relay (magnetic clutch) is controlled
according to the engine operation conditions to prevent deterioration of engine performance,
damage to the engine, and deterioration of the A/C function.
Electrical fan control Through cooling of the radiator and condenser by operation of the cooling fan according to
vehicle conditions, engine reliability and cooling performance have been improved.
Starter cut-off control Theft deterrence has been improved by controlling energization to the starter relay according to
an engine stop request signal from the immobilizer system.
Generator control Generator output is optimized according to the engine operation and electrical load conditions,
ensuring idling stability and anti-load performance.
CAN The PCM sends and receives signals to and from the CAN system related modules via CAN.
End Of Sie
PCM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4105400
Structure
x A 120-pin (two-block) PCM connector has been adopted.
01-40A–37
TO MODEL INDEX

Caution
x The PCM is built into the air cleaner cover. Applying excessive pressure to the cover could
damage the PCM. Be careful not to put your hands on the PCM during the removal/installation.
Removing the PCM from the air cleaner could damage the sealing or the circuitry. Do not remove
PCM from the air cleaner.
PCM heat resistance

x Contains a structure to allow air passage below the PCM case of the PCM, which is located on the engine,
using forced air while the vehicle is driven.
x The PCM case has a filter to adjust the pressure differences in the PCM case from the heat.
PCM durability
x Rubber bushes are used in the installation area of the air cleaner to the engine, to reduce vibration from the
engine.
PCM water resistance
x Sealing rubber is used in the PCM case and sealing surfaces of the PCM to prevent water penetration to the
PCM case.
x Water-resistance processing is used to prevent water penetration to the PCM area from the filter used for
pressure adjustment.
PCM STRUCTURE
PCM
HEAT RESISTANCE
WATER RESISTANCE
WIND BLOWING AIR CLEANER COVER

AGAINST VEHICLE
WATER
REPELLING
FILTER
INTAKE AIR
SEAL RUBBER
AIR CLEANER INSTALLATION POINT PCM CASE (SHEATH STRUCTURE)

VIBRATION RESISTANCE WATER RESISTANCE
BOLT
WATER REPELLING FILTER
AIR CLEANER CASE
PCM CASE
SEAL RUBBER
ENGINE
PCM
RUBBER BUSHING
am2zzn0000065
End Of Sie
NEUTRAL SWITCH FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4177000
MTX
x Installed to the neutral position of the shift lever.
End Of Sie
NEUTRAL SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4176900
MTX
x Installed to the clutch housing.
01-40A–38
TO MODEL INDEX
SEC. A —A
CRANK LEVER
A
A
CONTROL ROD END
CONTROL ROD
NEUTRAL SWITCH
am2zzn0000027
x An ON/OFF type switch has been adopted.

x The contact point is on when in neutral to output voltage and off when not in neutral.
EXCEPT NEUTRAL (OFF)

NEUTRAL (ON)
PCM
EXCEPT NEUTRAL (OFF)
CPU
NEUTRAL (ON)
NEUTRAL SWITCH
am2zzn0000027
End Of Sie
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4177800
MTX
x Detects the connection status of the clutch.
End Of Sie
01-40A–39
TO MODEL INDEX

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4177700
MTX
x Installed to the clutch pedal.
x An ON/OFF type switch has been adopted.
x The contact point is on and voltage is output
when the clutch pedal is engaged, and off when CPP SWITCH
the clutch pedal is not engaged.
CLUTCH PEDAL
am2zzn0000028
CPP SWITCH
PCM
CLUTCH PEDAL RELEASED (OFF)
CPU
CLUTCH PEDAL DEPRESSED (ON)
CLUTCH PEDAL RELEASED (OFF)
CLUTCH PEDAL DEPRESSED (ON)
am2zzn0000028
End Of Sie
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4173300
x Detects the engine coolant temperature.
End Of Sie
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4173400
x Installed to the cylinder head.
CYLINDER HEAD
x A thermistor-type sensor (negative characteristic
thermistor) has been adopted.
ECT SENSOR
am2zzn0000032
01-40A–40
TO MODEL INDEX

x Voltage is output based on the resistance value which changes according to the engine coolant temperature.
PCM ECT SENSOR CHARACTERISTIC
10
RESISTANCE (kilohm)
ECT SENSOR
CPU
5
0
-20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 (˚C)
{˚F}
-4 32 68 104 140 176 212 248
ECT
am2zzn0000082
End Of Sie
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4173500
x Detects the intake air temperature.
End Of Sie
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4173600
x Built into the MAF sensor.
MAF/IAT SENSOR
IAT
SENSOR
am2zzn0000029
x A thermistor-type sensor (negative characteristic thermistor) has been adopted.
01-40A–41
TO MODEL INDEX

x Outputs voltage based on the resistance value which changes according to the intake air temperature.
IAT SENSOR CHARACTERISTIC

30
20
PCM
10
RESISTANCE(kilohm)
7
IAT SENSOR
5
3
CPU
2
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
-20 0 20 40 60 80 (˚C)
-4 32 68 104 140 176 {˚F}
IAT
am2zzn0000029
End Of Sie
PCM TEMPERATURE SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4182000
x Detects the temperature of the PCM.
End Of Sie
PCM TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4181900
x Built into the PCM.
x A thermistor-type sensor (negative pressure thermistor) has been adopted.
x Voltage is output based on the resistance value which changes according to the temperature of the PCM.
LARGE

PCM
CHARACTERISTIC
RESISTANCE
CPU
PCM
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
SMALL
LOW PCM TEMPERATURE HIGH
am2zzn0000082
End Of Sie
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4172600
x Detects the mass intake airflow amount.
End Of Sie
01-40A–42
TO MODEL INDEX

MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4172700
x Installed to the air cleaner cover.
AIR CLEANER COVER
MAF/IAT SENSOR
MAF SENSOR
INTAKE
AIR
am2zzn0000029
x A hot wire type sensor has been adopted.

x The sensor, which contains a heat resistor and temperature compensating resistor positioned in the air intake,
maintains the temperature of the heat resistor to a specified temperature higher than the intake air temperature.
x The mass intake airflow amount is output as voltage based on the intake airflow amount and intake air density
correction amount.
MAF SENSOR PCM MAF SENSOR CHARACTERISTIC
HIGH
CONTROL CIRCUIT
TEMPERATUR
COMPENSATING HEAT RESISTOR
VOLTAGE
RESISTOR CPU
LOW
LOW MASS INTAKE AIRFLOW AMOUNT HIGH

am2zzn0000029
End Of Sie
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4174700
x Detects how much the accelerator pedal is depressed.
End Of Sie
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4174800
x Built into the accelerator pedal mechanism.
x A hall element has been adopted. APP SENSOR
x Voltage is output according to the amount the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
MAGNET HALL
A A ELEMENT
SEC. A —A
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
am2zzn0000034
01-40A–43
TO MODEL INDEX

x The accelerator pedal position sensor contains a main sensor and sub-sensor which output voltage using a 2-
circuit system. The PCM compares the output value from the 2-circuit system to perform precise malfunction
detection
APP SENSOR CHARACTERISTIC
HIGH
APP SENSOR PCM
HALL ELEMENT
MAIN SENSOR
CPU
VOLTAGE
SUB-SENSOR
CPU
LOW
MAGNET
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
SMALL LARGE
DEPRESSION AMOUNT
am2zzn0000029
End Of Sie
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4173900
x Detects the throttle valve opening angle.
End Of Sie
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4174000
x Built into the throttle body.
SEC. A —A
THROTTLE BODY
A
THROTTLE VALVE
HALL ELEMENT
MAGNET
TP SENSOR
am2zzn0000030
x A hall element-type sensor has been adopted.

x Voltage is output according to the throttle valve angle.
01-40A–44
TO MODEL INDEX

x The throttle position sensor has a main sensor and sub-sensor, and outputs voltage using a 2-circuit system.
The PCM can always obtain correct values even if a malfunction occurs in one of the sensors.
TP SENSOR CHARACTERISTIC
HIGH
TP SENSOR PCM
MAIN SENSOR
HALL ELEMENT
VOLTAGE
SUB-SENSOR
CPU
CPU
LOW
MAGNET
SMALL THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE LARGE

am2zzn0000030
End Of Sie
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4104700
x Detects the rotation angle of the crankshaft.
End Of Sie
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4104800
x Installed to the engine front cover.
x A GMR element-type sensor has been installed.
CKP SENSOR
am2zzn0000032
01-40A–45
TO MODEL INDEX

x The crankshaft rotation angle, which fluctuates according to the rotation angle of the camshaft on the intake
side, is output as voltage that has been changed to a rectangular wave form by the processing circuit.
PCM
CKP SENSOR PULSE WHEEL
GMR PROCESSING
CPU
ELEMENT CIRCUIT
CKP SENSOR
CAMSHAFT ON ROTATION
CRANK ANGLE 0˚ 180˚ 360˚ 540˚ 720˚
30 PULSE 30 PULSE
am2zzn0000032
End Of Sie
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4104900
x Detects the rotation angle of the camshaft on the intake side.
End Of Sie
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4105000
x Installed to the cylinder head cover tilted at a 30°angle.
CMP SENSOR
CYLINDER HEAD COVER

am2zzn0000032
x A GMR element-type sensor has been adopted.
01-40A–46
TO MODEL INDEX

x The resistance value, which fluctuates according to the rotation angle of the camshaft on the intake side, is
output as voltage that has been changed to a rectangular wave form by the processing circuit.
CMP SENSOR
PCM
CMP SENSOR
PULSE WHEEL
CAMSHAFT
GMR PROCESSING CPU
ELEMENT CIRCUIT
CAMSHAFT ON ROTATION
0˚ 180˚ 360˚ 540˚ 720˚

CRANK ANGLE
6 PULSE
am2zzn0000030
End Of Sie
KNOCK SENSOR (KS) FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4174100
x Detects abnormal combustion in the engine.
End Of Sie
KNOCK SENSOR (KS) CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4174200
x Installed on the left-front of the cylinder block
(intake manifold side).
KS
am2zzn0000031
01-40A–47
TO MODEL INDEX

x A piezoelectric-type sensor has been adopted.
x Voltage is output according to engine vibration PCM
occurring from malfunctions in the engine
combustion.
KS
End Of Sie
CPU
am2zzn0000031
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4259800
x A/F sensor: detects the oxygen concentration (all-range air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust gas.
x HO2S: detects the oxygen concentration (theoretical air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust gas.
End Of Sie
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4257800
A/F Sensor
x Installed to the exhaust manifold.
x A zirconia element-type sensor (all-range air/fuel
ratio) has been adopted. A/F SENSOR
— All-range air/fuel ratio sensor
x Utilizes a characteristic in which the
electrical current fluctuates minutely
according to the size of the air/fuel ratio
(remaining oxygen concentration).
x The air/fuel ratio outputs minute values in
the rich-to-lean range to enable fine
monitoring of the degree to which the air/
fuel ratio is rich or lean.
x Electrical current is output based on the oxygen
am2zzn0000104
concentration in the exhaust gas.
A/F SENSOR PCM

1 (WITH HEATER)
0.5 CPU
CURRENT (mA)
A/F SENSOR
0
-0.5
-1
-1.5
HEATER
10.29 11.76 13.23 14.7 16.17 17.64 19.11 20.58
(AIR/FUEL RATIO)
am2zzn0000105
HO2S
x Installed to the exhaust gas manifold.
x A zirconia element-type sensor (theoretical air/
fuel ratio sensor) has been adopted.
— Theoretical air/fuel ratio sensor
x Utilizes the characteristic in which the
voltage changes significantly at the border
of the theoretical air/fuel ratio (A/F = HO2S
14.7).
x The size (remaining oxygen
concentration) of the air/fuel ratio in
relation to the theoretical air/fuel ratio is
determined by how small (rich) or how
am2zzn0000105
large (lean) the air/fuel ratio is.
01-40A–48
TO MODEL INDEX

x Voltage is output based on oxygen concentration in the exhaust gas.
THEORETICAL AIR/FUEL RATIO
HO2S PCM
SENSOR CHARACTERISTIC
(WITH HEATER)
1.0 CPU
HO2S
VOLTAGE (V)
0.5
HEATER
0
14.7
SMALL AIR/FUEL RATIO LARGE
am2zzn0000105
A/F Sensor Heater, HO2S Heater

x A heater element is integrated so that
electromotive force does not occur while the
zirconia element temperature is low (after cold- A/F SENSOR, HO2S CHARACTERISTIC
A/F SENSOR, HO2S OUTPUT

engine starts). The heater warms the sensor
which promotes activation of the sensor and
stabilizes its output.
End Of Sie WITH
HEATER
WITHOUT
HEATER
TIME ELAPSED AFTER COLD ENGINE START
DURING WARM-UP AFTER WARM-UP
am2zzn0000108
CURRENT SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0140c4184000
With Current Sensor
x Current sensor detects the battery charge/discharge current.
End Of Sie
CURRENT SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4184100
With Current Sensor
x Installed on the battery.
CURRENT
x The hall element design has been adopted for the SENSOR
sensor.
x Voltage is output based on the electrical current
flowing to the negative battery cable.
BATTERY
am2zzn0000125
01-40A–49
TO MODEL INDEX

Current sensor characteristic
End Of Sie
• •• • • •
VOLTAGE
(V)
• •• • • •
• •• • • •
•• • • • • • • •• ••••••
CURRENT
(A)
am2zzn0000125
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]

id0140c4173000
x Detects intake air pressure in the intake manifold.
End Of Sie
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]
id0140c4173100
x Installed to the intake manifold.
x A piezoelectric-type sensor has been adopted. MAP SENSOR
x Voltage is output according to the intake air
pressure.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
am2zzn0000030
MAP SENSOR CHARACTERISTIC
PCM 4.5
MAP SENSOR
VOLTAGE (V)
PRESSURE 2.6
SENSOR CPU
1.0
13 100 200
INTAKE AIR PRESSER (kPa)
am2zzn0000030
End Of Sie
01-40A–50
TO MODEL INDEX
SUSPENSION 02
SECTION
Toc of SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-00

OUTLINE FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . 02-13
WHEEL AND TIRES . . . . . . . . 02-12 REAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . 02-14
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Toc of SCT
02-00 OUTLINE
SUSPENSION FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . 02-00–1 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-00–1
SUSPENSION SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . 02-00–1 Wheel and Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-00–2
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
SUSPENSION FEATURES
NG: SUSPENSION
id020000100200
x Strut type front suspension adopted

Improved rigidity and handling
x Torsion beam axle system for the rear suspension adopted
stability
x Flat surface type front crossmember adopted
Improved handling and riding x Separated input type front shock absorber mount adopted
comfort x Large-sized rubber bushing for the torsion beam adopted
Enlarged trunk compartment x Separated positioning of rear shock absorber and coil spring adopted
x Adhesive-type balance weights adopted (aluminum alloy wheels)
Improved marketability
x Instant mobility system adopted (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo for European (L.H.D.) specs.)
Environmental consideration x Steel balance weights adopted to reduce the use of lead
End Of Sie
SUSPENSION SPECIFICATIONS
id020000100300
Suspension
Specification
Item Except AutoAlliance Thailand AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
(AAT) manufactured vehicles manufactured vehicles
Type Strut type Strut type
Spring type Coil spring Coil spring
Shock absorber type Cylindrical, double-acting Cylindrical, double-acting
Type Torsion bar Torsion bar
Stabilizer Standard Suspension: 15.9
DJVA-EL: 15.9 {0.626}
Diameter (mm {in}) {0.626}
Except DJVA-EL: 19.0 {0.748}
Sport Suspension: 19.0 {0.748}
Tire
[Tolerance r4 3 {0.1} 4 {0.2}
{0.2}]
Vehicle equipped with 14 inch
Total (mm {in}) wheel: 2 {0.08}
Rim inner
toe-in Vehicle equipped with 15 inch
Front [Tolerance r3 2 {0.08}
suspension wheel: 3 {0.1}
{0.1}]
Vehicle equipped with 16 inch
wheel: 3 {0.1}
Wheel (degree) 0q17cr0q24c 0q24cr0q24c
alignment
Maximum steering Inner 40q03c 40q03c
(Unloaded*)
angle
[Tolerance r3q] Outer 33q03c 33q03c
Caster angle (Reference value)
3q16c 3q41c
[Tolerance r1q]
Camber angle (Reference
value) -0q41c -0q41c
[Tolerance r1q]
Steering axis inclination
13q22c 13q17c
(Reference value)
02-00–1
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Specification
Item Except AutoAlliance Thailand AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
(AAT) manufactured vehicles manufactured vehicles
Type Torsion beam axle Torsion beam axle
Spring type Coil spring Coil spring
Shock absorber type Cylindrical, mono-tube Cylindrical, mono-tube
Tire
Standard Suspension: 3 {0.1}
[Tolerance r4 3 {0.1}
Total {0.2}] Sport Suspension: 4 {0.2}
toe-in (mm {in})
Rim inner
(Refe Standard Suspension: 2 {0.08}
Rear [Tolerance r3 2 {0.08}
suspension Wheel rence Sport Suspension: 3 {0.1}
{0.1}]
value
alignment ) Standard Suspension:
(Unloaded*) (degree) 0q17cr0q24c 0q18cr0q24c
Sport Suspension: 0q23cr0q24c
Camber angle (Reference
-1q31c -1q31c
value) [Tolerance r1q]
Thrust angle (Reference value)
0q 0q
[Tolerance r0q48c]
* : Unloaded: Fuel tank is full. Engine coolant and engine oil are at specified level. Spare tire, jack and tools are in
designated position.
Wheel and Tire
Standard wheel and tire

Item Specification
185/60R14
82H
(MZ-CD 1.4
165/70R14 175/65R14 185/55R15 185/55R15 195/45R16
Size DI Turbo
81S 82H 81V 82V 80W
Tire and MZ-CD
1.6 (Y6)
only)
Remaining
(mm {in}) 1.6 {0.063}
tread
Size 14u5 1/2J 14u6J 15u6J 15u6J 16u6 1/2J
Steel or
Aluminum Aluminum
Material Steel Aluminum
alloy alloy
Wheel alloy
Wheel offset (mm {in}) 40 {1.6} 45 {1.8} 50 {2.0}
Wheel pitch circle
(mm {in}) 100 {3.94}
diameter
Steel: 2.5
{0.098}
Wheel and tire runout Lateral direction 2.5 {0.098} 2.0 {0.079} Aluminum 2.0 {0.079}
alloy: 2.0
{0.079}
(mm {in}) Radial direction 1.5 {0.059}
Spare wheel and tire

Item Specification
Tire Size T115/70D14 88M 175/65R14 82H
Size 14u4T 14u6J
Material Steel Steel
Wheel Wheel offset (mm {in}) 40 {1.6} 45 {1.8}
Wheel pitch circle
(mm {in}) 100 {3.94} 100 {3.94}
diameter
End Of Sie
02-00–2
TO MODEL INDEX
WHEEL AND TIRES
02-12 WHEEL AND TIRES

WHEELS AND TIRES OUTLINE. . . . . . . 02-12–1 INSTANT MOBILITY SYSTEM
WHEELS AND TIRES STRUCTURAL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-12–1
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-12–1
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
WHEEL AND TIRES

WHEELS AND TIRES OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: WHEELS AND TIRES
End of Toc id021200100100

x Adhesive-type balance weights have been adopted for the outer side of the aluminum alloy wheels. As a result,
wheel design freedom has been improved.
x In consideration of the environment, steel balance weights have been adopted to reduce the use of lead in the
vehicle.
End Of Sie
WHEELS AND TIRES STRUCTURAL VIEW
NG: WHEELS AND TIRES
id021200100200
14-INCH STEEL WHEEL 15-INCH STEEL WHEEL
15-INCH ALUMINUM 16-INCH ALUMINUM

ALLOY WHEEL ALLOY WHEEL
ADHESIVE-TYPE
BALANCE WEIGHT
KNOCK-TYPE
BALANCE WEIGHT
OUTER INNER
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
(ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS)
am2zzn0000070
End Of Sie
INSTANT MOBILITY SYSTEM OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: PUNCTURE REPAIR KIT
id021200629600
x For the vehicle with MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo (European (L.H.D.) specs.), an instant mobility system has been
provided instead of a temporary spare tire. This system enables temporary repair of a puncture without tire
removal.
02-12–1
TO MODEL INDEX
WHEEL AND TIRES

x The instant mobility system is located in the trunk
compartment and includes the following:
— Repair agent INSTANT
— Repair agent filler hose MOBILITY
— Air compressor SYSTEM
— Tire valve core
— Tire valve core tool
— Instruction manual
— Speed limit label
— Filled tire indication label
x The accessory socket (12 V CD) is used as an
input power source for the air compressor and the
am2zzn0000098
compressor plug includes a 10 A fuse.
Note
x The expiration data of the repair agent is printed on the repair agent bottle. Do not use the repair agent if
it has passed the expiration data.
x Dispose of repair agent according to local waste disposal law.
x The repair agent consists of the following ingredients:
— Deproteinized natural rubber latex
— Emulsified adhesive resin
— Propylene glycol
End Of Sie
02-12–2
TO MODEL INDEX
FRONT SUSPENSION
02-13 FRONT SUSPENSION

FRONT SUSPENSION OUTLINE . . . . . . 02-13–1 FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL
FRONT SUSPENSION STRUCTURAL SPRING CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . 02-13–1
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-13–1
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
FRONT SUSPENSION
FRONT SUSPENSION OUTLINE
NG: FRONT SUSPENSION
id021300100100
x A strut-type front suspension has been adopted.
x Large-sized rubber mounts have been adopted for the front lower arm, improving the suspension rigidity.
x A separated input type shock absorber mount has been adopted, improving steering stability and ride comfort.
End Of Sie
FRONT SUSPENSION STRUCTURAL VIEW
id021300100200
FRONT SHOCK
FRONT ABSORBER AND FRONT SHOCK
STABILIZER CONTROL LINK STABILIZER COIL SPRING ABSORBER
FRONT LOWER ARM FRONT CROSSMEMBER
am2zzn0000058
End Of Sie
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL SPRING CONSTRUCTION
SOKYU_NG: FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER
id021300110900
x A separated, input-type shock absorber mount has been adopted in which the plate receiving input from the
piston rod is separated from the coil spring.
02-13–1
TO MODEL INDEX
FRONT SUSPENSION
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND

COIL SPRING
MOUNTING RUBBER
BEARING
COIL SPRING
adejjn00000625
End Of Sie
02-13–2
TO MODEL INDEX
REAR SUSPENSION
02-14 REAR SUSPENSION

REAR SUSPENSION OUTLINE . . . . . . . 02-14–1 REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
REAR SUSPENSION CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-14–2
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-14–1 TORSION BEAM AXLE
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-14–2
TO MODEL INDEX
REAR SUSPENSION
End of Toc
REAR SUSPENSION OUTLINE
NG: REAR SUSPENSION
id021400100100
x A torsion beam axle rear suspension has been adopted.
x Mono-tube rear shock absorbers with stable damping force have been adopted, improving handling stability.
x Large-sized rubber bushings have been adopted for the torsion beam, improving riding comfort.
x A wider cabin space has been attained due to the separated positioning of the shock absorber and coil spring.
End Of Sie
REAR SUSPENSION STRUCTURAL VIEW
id021400100200
REAR SHOCK
ABSORBER
TORSION
BEAM AXLE
REAR COIL
SPRING
am2zzn0000058
End Of Sie
NG: REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
02-14–1
TO MODEL INDEX
REAR SUSPENSION
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER CONSTRUCTION
id021400100500
x Mono-tube shock absorbers with superior
damping characteristics and tuning flexibility have
been adopted, improving handling stability and
riding comfort.
x Chambers that are gas-pressurized via a free
piston have been equipped to provide excellent oil
cooling capability and minimized cavitation. Due
to this, stable damping force is provided.
End Of Sie
NG: TORSION BEAM AXLE
OIL SEAL
OIL
HIGH PULLEY PISTON

PRESSURE
GAS
am2zzn0000052
TORSION BEAM AXLE CONSTRUCTION

id021400111000
x A highly rigid rear torsion beam axle with a U-shaped cross-section has been adopted, ensuring high camber
and toe rigidity.
TORSION BEAM AXLE
SEC. A—A
adejjn00000626
End Of Sie
02-14–2
TO MODEL INDEX
DRIVELINE/AXLE 03
SECTION
Toc of SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-00

OUTLINE REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-12
FRONT AXLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-11 DRIVE SHAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-13
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Toc of SCT
03-00 OUTLINE
DRIVELINE/AXLE ABBREVIATIONS . . . 03-00–1 DRIVELINE/AXLE SPECIFICATIONS . . . 03-00–1
DRIVELINE/AXLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . 03-00–1
oc
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
DRIVELINE/AXLE ABBREVIATIONS
NG: DRIVELINE/AXLE
id030000150300
ATX Automatic transaxle

CVT Continuously variable transaxle
MTX Manual transaxle
End Of Sie
DRIVELINE/AXLE FEATURES
id030000100100
Reduced noise and vibration x Constant velocity joint adopted for front drive shaft
Improved driving performance x Joint shaft adopted
Improved serviceability x Unit bearing that does not require pre-load adjustment adopted
End Of Sie
DRIVELINE/AXLE SPECIFICATIONS
id030000100200
Item Specifications
Front axle Bearing type Angular ball bearing (unit-type)
Rear axle Bearing type Angular ball bearing (unit-type)
Wheel side Bell joint
Joint type MTX: Double off set joint
Differential side
Drive shaft ATX, CVT: Tripod joint
ZJ, ZY: 22.0 {0.87}
Shaft diameter (mm {in})
MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6): 26.0 {1.02}
ZJ, ZY: 26.0 {1.02}
Joint shaft Shaft diameter (mm {in})
MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6): 28.0 {1.10}
End Of Sie
03-00–1
TO MODEL INDEX
FRONT AXLE
03-11 FRONT AXLE

FRONT AXLE OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-11–1 FRONT AXLE CROSS-SECTIONAL
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-11–1
TO MODEL INDEX
End of Toc
FRONT AXLE
FRONT AXLE OUTLINE
NG: FRONT AXLE
id031100100100
x With the adopted of a unit bearing (angular ball bearing) that does not require pre-load adjustment,
serviceability has been improved.
End Of Sie
FRONT AXLE CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
id031100100200
End Of Sie
WHEEL BEARING
am2zzn0000128
03-11–1
TO MODEL INDEX
REAR AXLE
03-12 REAR AXLE

REAR AXLE OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-12–1 REAR AXLE CROSS-SECTIONAL
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-12–1
TO MODEL INDEX
End of Toc
REAR AXLE
REAR AXLE OUTLINE
NG: REAR AXLE
id031200100100
x With the adoption of a unit bearing that does not require pre-load adjustment, serviceability has been improve.
End Of Sie
REAR AXLE CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
id031200100200
End Of Sie
WHEEL BEARING
am2zzn0000047
03-12–1
TO MODEL INDEX
DRIVE SHAFT
03-13 DRIVE SHAFT

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT OUTLINE . . . . . . 03-13–1 DRIVE SHAFT CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . 03-13–1
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT STRUCTURAL JOINT SHAFT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-13–1
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-13–1
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT OUTLINE
NG: FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
id031300100100
x With the adoption of a constant velocity joint driveshaft, vibration and noise have been greatly reduced.
End Of Sie
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT STRUCTURAL VIEW
id031300100200
MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, JOINT SHAFT

MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)
ZJ, ZY
DRIVE SHAFT
am2zzn0000127
End Of Sie
DRIVE SHAFT CONSTRUCTION
NG: DRIVE SHAFT
id031300152000
x A bell joint has been adopted for the wheel-side constant velocity joint, reducing vibration and noise.
x A tripod joint and double offset joint have been adopted for the differential side constant velocity joint to reduce
booming noise during high-speed driving and vibration when idling.
End Of Sie
JOINT SHAFT OUTLINE
NG: JOINT SHAFT
id031300100500
x Due to the adoption of a joint shaft, which has right and left shafts of equal length, torque steer* when suddenly
accelerating from a standing start is greatly reduced, thus improving driving performance.
03-13–1
TO MODEL INDEX
DRIVE SHAFT
ZJ, ZY
MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)
am2zzn0000127
* : Torque steer
The tendency of the vehicle to pull to one side due to the difference in right and left moment created by traction
when accelerating in general or from a standing start.
End Of Sie
03-13–2
TO MODEL INDEX
BRAKES 04
SECTION
Toc of SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-00

OUTLINE CONVENTIONAL BRAKE
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11
[ABS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02A PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM. . . 04-12
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . 04-13
[DYNAMIC STABILITY DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)] . . . . . . . . . 04-02B CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Toc of SCT
04-00 OUTLINE
BRAKE ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 04-00–1 BRAKE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . 04-00–2
BRAKE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-00–1
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
BRAKE ABBREVIATIONS
NG: BRAKES
id040000100100

CM Control Module
CVT Continuously Variable Transaxle
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
EBD Electronic Brakeforce Distribution
EPS Electric Power Steering
HU Hydraulic Unit
IG Ignition
LF Left Front
L.H.D. Left Hand Drive
LR Left Rear
MTX Manual Transaxle
OFF Switch Off
ON Switch On
PID Parameter Identification
RF Right Front
R.H.D. Right Hand Drive
RR Right Rear
SW Switch
TCS Traction Control System
End Of Sie
BRAKE FEATURES
id040000100200
Improved safety x Intrusion-minimizing brake pedal adopted

x Large power brake unit (9-inch) with brake assist (dual servo ratio) mechanism adopted
x Electronic brakeforce distribution (EBD) control adopted
x ABS (antilock brake system) adopted
x Dynamic stability control (DSC) adopted
Both high brake x Large diameter front disc brakes adopted
functionality and excellent x Rear drum brakes with wide linings adopted
brake-feel achieved x Vacuum pump adopted (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
Size and weight reduction x ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM adopted with the hydraulic unit (HU) and control module (CM)
integrated
Operability improvement x Center lever-type parking brake equipment adopted
04-00–1
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Servicability improvement x Parking brake equipment, adjustable from vehicle interior, adopted
x Enhanced malfunction diagnosis system for use with Mazda Modular Diagnostic System (M-
MDS)
x Combined sensor integrating yaw rate and lateral-G sensors adopted
x Specialized controller area network (CAN) communication adopted for communications
Improved reliability between the combined sensor and the DSC HU/CM
x DSC HU/CM with built-in brake fluid pressure sensor
End Of Sie
BRAKE SPECIFICATIONS
id040000100300
Item Specification
Type Suspended
Brake pedal Pedal lever ratio 2.85
Max. stroke (mm {in}) 140 {5.51}
Type Tandem (Plunger type)
Master cylinder
Cylinder bore (mm {in}) 20.6 {0.811}
Type Ventilated disc
MTX, ATX: 53.9 {2.12}
Cylinder bore (mm {in})
CVT: 51.1 {2.01}
MTX, ATX (European (L.H.D. U.K.) specs.): 4,000 x 11 {6.200
x 0.43}
Front brake Pad dimensions (mm2 x mm
MTX, ATX (Australian, General (L.H.D.) specs.): 4,000 x 9
(Surface area x Thickness) {in2 x in}) {6.200 x 0.35} or 4,000 x 11 {6.200 x 0.43}
CVT: 3,800 x 10 {5.890 x 0.39}
Disc plate dimensions
MTX, ATX: 258 x 23 {10.2 x 0.91}
(Outer diameter x (mm {in})
CVT: 239 x 20 {9.41 x 0.79}
Thickness)
Type Leading/trailing type drum
Wheel cylinder inner MTX, ATX: 19.0 {0.748}
(mm {in})
diameter CVT: 17.4 {0.685}
Rear brake (mm x mm x
(Drum) Lining dimensions MTX, ATX: 191.8 x 30.0 x 4.1 {7.551 x 1.18 x 0.16}
mm {in x in x
(Length x Width x Thickness) CVT: 161.7 x 25.0 x 4.2 {6.366 x 0.984 x 0.17}
in})
MTX, ATX: 200 {7.87}
Drum inner diameter (mm {in})
CVT: 180 {7.09}
Power brake Type Vacuum servo (with mechanical brake assist function)
unit Outer diameter (mm {in}) 248 {9.76}
Rear-wheel
braking force Type EBD (Electronic brake force distribution)
control system
Type Mechanical design, rear two-wheel braking
Parking brake Operating method (application/release) Manual lever type
Play-adjust system Auto-adjuster
Brake piping Piping system X-type
Type (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
manufactured vehicles)
Brake fluid European (L.H.D. U.K.) specs.: SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT-
Type (except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) 3 or DOT-4
manufactured vehicles) Australian, General (L.H.D. R.H.D.) specs.: SAE J1703,
FMVSS 116 DOT-3
End Of Sie
04-00–2
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ABS]
04-02A ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ABS]

OUTLINE [ABS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02A–1 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES FUNCTION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM [ABS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02A–4
FUNCTION [ABS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02A–2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
Malfunction detection function . . . . . . . 04-02A–2 EXTERNAL TESTER COMMUNICATION
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02A–2 FUNCTION [ABS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02A–4
DTC 7-digit code definition. . . . . . . . . . 04-02A–2 Serial communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02A–5
Fail-safe function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02A–2 DLC-2 CONSTRUCTION [ABS]. . . . . . . . 04-02A–5
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION
[ABS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OUTLINE [ABS]
ON-BOARD
NG: ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
id0402a7181400
x The on-board diagnostic system consists of a malfunction detection system that detects malfunctions in input/
output signals when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, a PID/data monitor function that reads out
specified input/output signals, and a active command modes function that allows for override operation of
output parts (such as solenoid valves).
x The data link connector 2 (DLC-2), which groups together all the connectors used for malfunction diagnosis
and detecting/repair into a single location, has been adopted, thereby improving serviceability.Diagnosis is
performed by connecting the Integrated diagnostic software (IDS) to the DLC-2.
x In addition to DTC read-out, the Integrated diagnostic software (IDS) is used to clear DTCs using the
display screen of the diagnostic tester, and to access the PID/data monitor and active command modes
functions, providing enhanced malfunction diagnosis and improved serviceability.
Block diagram
BRAKE SYSTEM ABS WARNING

WARNING LIGHT LIGHT
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
MALFUNCTION
DISPLAY FUNCTION
MEMORY
FUNCTION
SERIAL
DLC-2
COMMUNICATION
MALFUNCTION PID/DATA
ACTIVE COMMAND
DETECTION MONITOR INTEGRATED
MODES FUNCTION
FUNCTION FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC
SOFTWARE (IDS)
FAIL-SAFE HU INSPECTION
FUNCTION FUNCTION
INPUT OUTPUT
NORMAL CONTROL AREA
DEVICE DEVICE
am2zzn0000121
End Of Sie
04-02A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION [ABS]
id0402a7182100
Malfunction detection function
x The malfunction detection function detects and displays malfunctions in the input/output signal system of the
ABS HU/CM when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
x When the ABS HU/CM is activated, the following malfunction detection is performed.
— The ABS and brake system warning lights illuminate for approx. 3.0 s when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position to inspect for open circuits in the lights.At the same time, the fail-safe relay is operated, and
the input/output signals of each part are monitored for malfunction diagnosis.After initial acceleration, the
pump motor is operated while the vehicle speed is approx. 10 km/h {6.2 mph} or more to perform
malfunction diagnosis again. Input/output signals are monitored for malfunction determination when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
x If the above malfunctions are detected, the corresponding lights are illuminated to alert the driver. DTCs can be
output through the CAN_H and CAN_L of the DLC-2 using the external tester communication function. At the
same time, malfunction detection results are sent to the memory and fail-safe functions.
Memory function
x The memory function stores DTCs of malfunctions in input/output signal systems. With this function, once a
DTC is stored it is not cleared after the ignition switch has been turned off (LOCK position), even if the
malfunctioning signal system has returned to normal.
x Since the ABS HU/CM has a built-in non-volatile memory, DTCs are not cleared even if the battery is removed.
Therefore, it is necessary to clear the memory after performing repairs.Refer to the Workshop Manual for the
DTC clearing procedure.
DTC 7-digit code definition

x When related systems or components have failed, the CM stores the DTC of the malfunctioning part in the CM
memory, and allows for the retrieval of the store data using scanning tool when necessary. The DTCs are
indicated using seven digits. Each digit indicates the following.
C 0 0 1 0:0 1
Specify the area failure sub type
00: No sub type information 47: Watchdog/safety 㱘C malfunction
01: General electrical malfunction 48: Supervision software malfunction
07: Mechanical malfunctions 49: Internal electronic malfunction
16: Circuit voltage below threshold 64: Signal plausibility malfunction
17: Circuit voltage above threshold 71: Actuator stuck
1C: Circuit voltage out of range 88: Bus off
Manufacturer controlled
Indicates subgroup
Network Electrical (U code) Chassis (C code)
0: Network Electrical Manufacturer controlled
1: Network communication
Indicates who was responsible for DTC definition
0: ISO/SAE controlled
2: There are ISO/SAE controlled just for powertrain, all others are manufacturer controlled.
3: For P3000 to P3399 is manufacturer controlled, all others are ISO/SAE controlled.
Indicates DTC function
C: Chassis
U: Network Electrical
am2zzn0000135
Fail-safe function
x When the malfunction detection function determines a malfunction, each light illuminates to advise the driver.At
this time, the fail-safe function controls the ABS and EBD as indicated in the fail-safe function table.
Warning
x If EBD control is prohibited the rear wheels could lock-up before the front wheels.If this occurs,
the vehicle could yaw and become unstable. Therefore always inspect the system immediately if
EBD control is prohibited.
04-02A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

Fail-safe Function Malfunction Contents
Fail-safe function
DTC No.
Warning light illumination status Control status
Malfunction Mazda Modular Brake system
location Diagnostic warning light
ABS warning light ABS control EBD control
System (M- (parking brake
MDS) display released)
ABS HU/CM internal
malfunction (LF inlet C0010:01
solenoid)
ABS HU/CM internal
malfunction (LF C0011:01
outlet solenoid)
ABS HU/CM internal
malfunction (RF inlet C0014:01
solenoid)
ABS HU/CM internal
malfunction (RF C0015:01
outlet solenoid)
Illuminated Illuminated Control disabled Control disabled
ABS HU/CM internal
malfunction (LR inlet C0018:01
solenoid)
ABS HU/CM internal
malfunction (LR C0019:01
outlet solenoid)
ABS HU/CM internal
malfunction (RR inlet C001C:01
solenoid)
ABS HU/CM internal
malfunction (RR C001D:01
outlet solenoid)
C0020:01
Pump motor, motor
C0020:1C Illuminated Not illuminated Control disabled Control enabled
relay
C0020:71
C0030:07
C0033:07
ABS sensor rotor Illuminated Not illuminated*1 Control disabled Control enabled*2
C0036:07
C0039:07
C0031:01
ABS wheel C0034:01
speed sensor
Illuminated Not illuminated*1 Control disabled Control enabled*2
C0037:01
C003A:01
C0031:07
ABS wheel-speed C0034:07
sensor/ABS sensor Illuminated Not illuminated*1 Control disabled Control enabled*2
rotor C0037:07
C003A:07
Brake switch C0040:64 Not illuminated Not illuminated Control enabled Control enabled
U0001:88 Not illuminated Not illuminated Control enabled Control enabled
U0100:00 Not illuminated Not illuminated Control enabled Control enabled
CAN line
U0155:00 Illuminated Not illuminated Control disabled Control enabled
U2101:00 Illuminated Not illuminated Control disabled Control enabled
U3000:47
ABS CM (internal
U3000:48 Illuminated Illuminated Control disabled Control disabled
malfunction)
U3000:49
Not illuminated*3 Control enabled*3
U3003:16 Illuminated Control disabled Control
Power supply system Illuminated*4
disabled*4
U3003:17 Illuminated Illuminated Control disabled Control disabled
*1 : Illuminates when two wheels or more have a malfunction.
04-02A–3
TO MODEL INDEX

*2
: Control disabled when two wheels or more have a malfunction.
*3
: Detected if condition of 9.4—10.0 V or less continues for 210 ms or more.
*4 : Detected if condition of 7.55—8.45 V or less continues for 30 s or more.
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION [ABS]
NG: ABS/TCS HYDRAULIC UNIT/CONTROL MODULE
id0402a7181800
x The PID/data monitor function is used for optionally selecting input/output signal monitor items preset in the
ABS HU/CM and reading them out in real-time.
PID/data monitor table
Unit/Operation
integrated Diagnostic software
Data contents integrated Diagnostic
(IDS) display
Software (IDS) display)
BRAKE_SW Brake switch signal Off/On
PMP_MTR Pump motor Off/On
VSPD Vehicle speed signal KPH, MPH
VPWR Battery voltage V
V_LF_INT LF inlet solenoid valve) Off/On
V_LF_OTL LF outlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_LR_INT LR inlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_LR_OTL LR outlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_RF_INT RF inlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_RF_OTL RF outlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_RR_INT RR inlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_RR_OTL RR outlet solenoid valve Off/On
WSPD_LF ABS wheel-speed sensor (LF) KPH, MPH
WSPD_LR ABS wheel-speed sensor (LR) KPH, MPH
WSPD_RF ABS wheel-speed sensor (RF) KPH, MPH
WSPD_RR ABS wheel speed sensor (RR) KPH, MPH
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM ACTIVE COMMAND MODES FUNCTION [ABS]
id0402a7181500
x The active command modes function is used for optionally selecting simulation items of input/output parts
preset in the ABS HU/CM, and to operate them regardless of CM control.
x To protect the hydraulic unit interior, operate output related parts for only 2 s or less when using the active
command modes function.
ACTIVE COMMAND MODE TABLE
Operating
Command name Output part name Operation
condition
PMP_MTR Pump motor
V_LF_INT LF inlet solenoid valve)
V_LF_OTL LF outlet solenoid valve
V_LR_INT LR inlet solenoid valve
Ignition switch at
ON
V_RF_INT RF inlet solenoid valve
V_RF_OTL RF outlet solenoid valve
V_RR_INT RR inlet solenoid valve
V_RR_OTL RR outlet solenoid valve
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM EXTERNAL TESTER COMMUNICATION FUNCTION [ABS]
id0402a7181600
x The external tester communication function enables communication of diagnostic data (DTC read-outs, input/
output signal read-outs, operation of input/output parts) between the ABS HU/CM and an external tester.
04-02A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

Connections/Communication Contents
External tester
Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS)
Connection Communication method
On-board diagnostic
Input/output: CAN_H (HS), CAN_L (HS)
(malfunction detection) Serial communication
terminals
function
PID/data monitor function Serial communication
terminals
active command modes Input/output: CAN_H (HS), CAN_L (HS)
Serial communication
function terminals
x Serial communication (two-way communication) allows for multiple data to be sent and received instantly along
the same line.
x By connecting the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) to the DLC-2, diagnostic data can be sent and
received between the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) and the ABS HU/CM using the CAN_H and
CAN_L terminals (within the DLC-2).
x The ABS HU/CM receives the command signals of the malfunction detection function, PID/data monitor
function, and the active command modes function based on the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS),
and sends DTCs and data regarding the operating condition and status of each input/output part to the
Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
Diagnostic function name Signal received Signal sent
Malfunction detection function DTC verification signal DTC
Command signal to read selected Monitored data for requested monitor
PID/data monitor function
monitor item item
Operation command signal for selected
active command modes function Output part drive signal
active command modes item
End Of Sie
NG: DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
DLC-2
am2zzw0000126
DLC-2 CONSTRUCTION [ABS]

id0402a7180800
x A connector (DLC-2) conforming to International Organization for Standardization (ISO) standards has been
added.
x Shape and terminal arrangement as stipulated by the ISO 15031-3 (SAE J1962) international standard has
been adopted for this connector.The 16-pin connector consists of a CAN_H (HS) terminal, CAN_L (HS)
terminal, CAN_H (MS) terminal, CAN_L (MS) terminal, GND1 terminal, GND2 terminal, and B+ terminal.
DLC-2
CAN_L CAN_L
B+
(HS) (MS)
CAN_H CAN_H
GND2 GND1
(HS) (MS)
am2zzn0000064
Terminal Function
CAN_L (HS) Serial communication Lo terminal (HS)
CAN_H (HS) Serial communication Hi terminal (HS)
CAN_L (MS) Serial communication Lo terminal (MS)
04-02A–5
TO MODEL INDEX

Terminal Function
CAN_H (MS) Serial communication Hi terminal (MS)
GND1 Body ground terminal
GND2 Serial communication ground terminal
B+ Battery power supply terminal
End Of Sie
04-02A–6
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
04-02B ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [DYNAMIC STABILITY

CONTROL (DSC)]
OUTLINE [DYNAMIC STABILITY ACTIVE COMMAND MODES FUNCTION
CONTROL (DSC)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02B–1 [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (DSC)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02B–7
FUNCTION [DYNAMIC STABILITY ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
CONTROL (DSC)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02B–2 EXTERNAL TESTER COMMUNICATION
Malfunction detection function . . . . . . . 04-02B–2 FUNCTION [DYNAMIC STABILITY
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02B–2 CONTROL (DSC)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02B–7
DTC 7-digit code definition. . . . . . . . . . 04-02B–3 Serial communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02B–7
Fail-safe function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02B–3 DLC-2 CONSTRUCTION [DYNAMIC
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)] . . . . . . . . 04-02B–8
PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION
[DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
(DSC)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02B–6
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OUTLINE [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
id0402b2181400
x The on-board diagnostic system consists of a malfunction detection system that detects malfunctions in input/
output signals when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, a PID/data monitor function that reads out
specified input/output signals, and a active command modes function that allows for override operation of
output parts (such as solenoid valves).
and detecting/repair into a single location, has been adopted, thereby improving serviceability.Diagnosis is
performed by connecting the Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) to the DLC-2.
x In addition to DTC read-out, the Integrated diagnostic system (IDS) is used to clear DTCs using the
display screen of the diagnostic tester, and to access the PID/data monitor and active command modes
functions, providing enhanced malfunction diagnosis and improved serviceability.
04-02B–1
TO MODEL INDEX

Block diagram
DSC ABS
DSC OFF BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR WARNING
LIGHT WARNING LIGHT
LIGHT LIGHT
MALFUNCTION
DISPLAY FUNCTION
MEMORY
FUNCTION
SERIAL
COMMUNICATION DLC-2
MALFUNCTION PID/DATA
ACTIVE COMMAND
DETECTION MONITOR
MODES FUNCTION
INTEGRATED
FUNCTION FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC
SOFTWARE (IDS)
FAIL-SAFE HU INSPECTION
FUNCTION FUNCTION
INPUT OUTPUT
NORMAL CONTROL AREA
DEVICE DEVICE
am2zzn0000121
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
id0402b2182100
x The malfunction detection function detects and displays malfunctions in the input/output signal system of the
DSC HU/CM when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
x When the DSC HU/CM is activated, the following malfunction detection is performed.
— The ABS and brake system warning lights, DSC indicator lights and DSC OFF light illuminate for approx.
3.0 s when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to inspect for open circuits in the lights. At the
same time, the fail-safe relay is operated, and the input/output signals of each part is monitored for
malfunction diagnosis. After starting to drive, the first time the vehicle speed is approx. 10 km/h {6.2 mph}
or more the pump motor is operated and malfunction diagnosis is performed again. Input/output signals
are monitored for malfunction determination when the ignition switch is at the ON position.
x If the above malfunctions are detected, the corresponding lights are illuminated to alert the driver. DTCs can be
output through the CAN_H and CAN_L of the DLC-2 using the external tester communication function. At the
same time, malfunction detection results are sent to the memory and fail-safe functions.
Memory function
x Since the DSC HU/CM has a built-in non-volatile memory, DTCs are not cleared even if the battery is removed.
Therefore, it is necessary to clear the memory after performing repairs.Refer to the Workshop Manual for the
DTC clearing procedure.
04-02B–2
TO MODEL INDEX

DTC 7-digit code definition
C 0 0 0 1:0 1
00: No sub type information 47: Watchdog/safety 㱘C malfunction
01: General electrical malfunction 48: Supervision software malfunction
04: System internal malfunctions 49: Internal electronic malfunction
07: Mechanical malfunctions 54: Missing calibration
16: Circuit voltage below threshold 64: Signal plausibility malfunction
17: Circuit voltage above threshold 68: Event information
1C: Circuit voltage out of range 71: Actuator stuck
28: Signal bias level out of range/zero 88: Bus off
adjustment malfunction
Indicates subgroup
Network Electrical (U code) Chassis (C code)
0: Network Electrical Manufacturer controlled
1: Network communication
4: Network data
1: Manufacturer controlled
3: For P3000 to P3399 is manufacturer controlled, all others are ISO/SAE controlled.
C: Chassis
am2zzn0000135
Fail-safe function
x When the malfunction detection function determines a malfunction, each light illuminates to advise the driver.
At this time, the fail-safe function controls the ABS, EBD, TCS and DSC as shown in the fail-safe function
malfunction contents table.
Warning
x If EBD control is prohibited the rear wheels could lock-up before the front wheels.If this occurs,
the vehicle could yaw and become unstable. Therefore always inspect the system immediately if
EBD control is prohibited.
04-02B–3
TO MODEL INDEX

Fail-safe Function Malfunction Contents
Fail-safe function
DTC No.
Brake TCS Control
Mazda
Malfunction system
Modular
location ABS warning DSC DSC
Diagnostic ABS EBD DSC
warning light indicator OFF
System (M- control control Brake Engine Control
light (parking light light control control
MDS)
brake
display
released)
DSC HU/CM C0001:01
internal
Not Control Control Control
malfunction Illuminate Illuminate Illuminate
illuminat disable disable Control disabled disable
(Traction control C0002:01 d d d
ed d d d
solenoid valve
system)
DSC HU/CM C0003:01
internal
Not Control Control Control
malfunction Illuminate Illuminate Illuminate
(Stability control C0004:01 d d d
ed d d d
solenoid valve
system)
DSC HU/CM
internal
C0010:01
malfunction (LF
inlet solenoid)
DSC HU/CM
internal
C0011:01
malfunction (LF
outlet solenoid)
DSC HU/CM
internal
C0014:01
malfunction (RF
inlet solenoid)
DSC HU/CM
internal
C0015:01
malfunction (RF
outlet solenoid) Not Control Control Control
Illuminate Illuminate Illuminate
DSC HU/CM d d d
ed d d d
internal
C0018:01
malfunction (LR
inlet solenoid)
DSC HU/CM
internal
C0019:01
malfunction (LR
outlet solenoid)
DSC HU/CM
internal
C001C:01
malfunction (RR
inlet solenoid)
DSC HU/CM
internal
C001D:01
malfunction (RR
outlet solenoid)
C0020:01 Not Not Control Control
Pump motor, motor Illuminate Illuminate Control
C0020:1C illuminate illuminat disable Control disabled disable
relay d d enabled
C0020:71 d ed d d
C0030:07
Not Not Control Control Control
C0033:07 Illuminate illuminate Illuminate
ABS sensor rotor illuminat disable enabled Control disabled disable
C0036:07 d d
d*1 ed d *2 d
C0039:07
C0031:01
Not Not Control Control Control
ABS wheel C0034:01 Illuminate illuminate Illuminate
illuminat disable enabled Control disabled disable
speed sensor C0037:01 d d
d*1 ed d *2 d
C003A:01
04-02B–4
TO MODEL INDEX

Fail-safe function
DTC No.
Brake TCS Control
Mazda
Malfunction system
Modular
MDS)
brake
display
released)
C0031:07
ABS wheel-speed Not Not Control Control Control
C0034:07 Illuminate
sensor/ABS sensor illuminate Illuminate illuminat disable enabled Control disabled disable
C0037:07 d d
rotor d*1 ed d *2 d
C003A:07
Not Not Not Not
Control Control Control
Brake switch C0040:64 illuminate illuminate illuminate illuminat Control enabled
enabled enabled enabled
d d d ed
C0044:01 Not Not Not Control
Brake fluid Illuminate Control Control
C0044:28 illuminate illuminate illuminat Control disabled disable
pressure sensor d enabled enabled
C0044:64 d d ed d
Abnormal message Not Not Not Control Control
Illuminate Control Control Control
from EPS control C0051:28 illuminate illuminate illuminat disable disable
d enabled enabled enabled
module d d ed d d
Not Not Not Not Control
TCS/DSC control Control Control Control Control
C0072:68 illuminate illuminate illuminate illuminat disable
system enabled enabled enabled enabled
d d d ed d
C0061:01
C0061:28
C0061:64
C0063:01
C0063:28 Not Not Not Control Control
Combined sensor illuminate Control Control Control
C0063:64 illuminate illuminate illuminat disable disable
system d enabled enabled enabled
C006A:04 d d ed d d
C006A:16
C006A:17
C006A:47
C1108:01
Not Not Not Control Control
TCS/DSC control illuminate Control Control Control
C006B:00 illuminate illuminate illuminat disable disable
system d enabled enabled enabled
d d ed d d
Not Not Not Not
Control Control Control
DSC OFF switch C1109:64 illuminate illuminate illuminate illuminat Control enabled
enabled enabled enabled
d d d ed
U0001:88 Not
Control Control
U0100:00 illuminate
Not Not enabled enabled Control Control
U0126:00 d illuminate Control
CAN line illuminate illuminat disable disable
U0155:00 d Control enabled
Illuminate d ed Control d d
disable
U2101:00 d enabled
d
Combined sensor U0125:00 Not Not Not Control Control
illuminate Control Control Control
system (CAN2 line illuminate illuminate illuminat disable disable
U0125:88 d enabled enabled enabled
malfunction) d d ed d d
Abnormal message illuminate Control Control Control
U0401:68 illuminate illuminate illuminat disable disable
from PCM d enabled enabled enabled
d d ed d d
Abnormal message U0428:00 Not Not Not Control Control
from EPS control U0428:64 illuminate illuminate illuminat disable disable
module U0428:68 d d ed d d
Configuration data illuminate Control Control Control
U2100:00 illuminate illuminate illuminat disable disable
not recorded d enabled enabled enabled
d d ed d d
04-02B–5
TO MODEL INDEX

Fail-safe function
DTC No.
Brake TCS Control
Mazda
Malfunction system
Modular
MDS)
brake
display
released)
U3000:47 Not Control Control Control
DSC CM (internal Illuminate Illuminate illuminate
U3000:48 illuminat disable disable Control disabled disable
malfunction) d d d
U3000:49 ed d d d
Combined sensor
system Not Not Not Control Control
(unperformed U3000:54 illuminate illuminate illuminat disable disable
initialization d d ed d d
procedure)
Not Control
illuminate enabled
d*3 Control *3
Illuminate
U3003:16 disable
d Not Control Control
Power supply Illuminate illuminate d
illuminat disable Control disabled disable
system d*4 d
ed d*4 d
Control Control
Illuminate Illuminate
U3003:17 disable disable
d d
d d
*1
: Illuminates when two wheels or more have a malfunction.
*2 : Control disabled when two wheels or more have a malfunction.
*3
: Detected if condition of 9.4—10.0 V or less continues for 210 ms or more.
*4
: Detected if condition of 7.55—8.45 V or less continues for 30 s or more.
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
NG: ABS/TCS HYDRAULIC UNIT/CONTROL MODULE
id0402b2181800
DSC HU/CM and reading them out in real-time.
Unit/Operation
Integrated Diagnostic Software
Data contents ( Integrated Diagnostic
(IDS) display
BRAKE_SW Brake switch signal Off/On
DSC_SW DSC OFF switch Off/On
LAT_ACCL Combined sensor (lateral-G sensor) G
MCYLI P Brake fluid pressure sensor Pa, psi
PMP_MTR Pump motor Off/On
STEER_ANGL Steering angle sensor q
VSPD Vehicle speed signal KPH, MPH
VPWR Battery voltage V
V_LF_INT LF inlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_LF_OTL LF outlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_LR_INT LR inlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_RF_INT RF inlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_RR_INT RR inlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_RR_OTL RR outlet solenoid valve Off/On
V_STB_L Left stability control solenoid valve Off/On
V_STB_R Right stability control solenoid valve Off/On
V_TRC_L Left traction control solenoid valve Off/On
V_TRC_R Right traction control solenoid valve Off/On
04-02B–6
TO MODEL INDEX

Unit/Operation
Integrated Diagnostic Software ( Integrated Diagnostic
Data contents
(iDS) display
WSPD_LF ABS wheel-speed sensor (LF) KPH, MPH
WSPD_LR ABS wheel-speed sensor (LR) KPH, MPH
WSPD_RF ABS wheel-speed sensor (RF) KPH, MPH
WSPD_RR ABS wheel speed sensor (RR) KPH, MPH
YAW_RATE Combined sensor (yaw rate value) q/s
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM ACTIVE COMMAND MODES FUNCTION [DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)]
id0402b2181500
x The active command modes function is used for optionally selecting simulation items of input/output parts
preset in the DSC HU/CM, and to operate them regardless of CM control.
x To protect the hydraulic unit interior, operate output related parts for only 2 s or less when using the active
command modes function.
ACTIVE COMMAND MODE TABLE
Operating
Command name Output part name Operation
condition
PMP_MTR Pump motor
V_LF_INT LF inlet solenoid valve)
V_LF_OTL LF outlet solenoid valve
V_LR_INT LR inlet solenoid valve
V_LR_OTL LR outlet solenoid valve
V_RF_INT RF inlet solenoid valve
Ignition switch at
ON
V_RR_INT RR inlet solenoid valve
V_RR_OTL RR outlet solenoid valve
V_STB_L Left stability control solenoid valve
V_STB_R Right stability control solenoid valve
V_TRC_L Left traction control solenoid valve
V_TRC_R Right traction control solenoid valve
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM EXTERNAL TESTER COMMUNICATION FUNCTION [DYNAMIC
STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]
id0402b2181600
output signal read-outs, operation of input/output parts) between the DSC HU/CM and an external tester.
Connections/Communication Contents
External tester
Integrated Diagnostic Software(iDS)
On-board diagnostic
(malfunction detection) Serial communication
terminals
function
PID/data monitor function Serial communication
terminals
active command modes Input/output: CAN_H (HS), CAN_L (HS)
function terminals
the same line.
received between the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) and the DSC HU/CM using the CAN_H and
CAN_L terminals (within the DLC-2).
x The DSC HU/CM receives the command signals of the malfunction detection function, PID/data monitor
function, and the active command modes function based on the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS),
and sends DTCs and data regarding the operating condition and status of each input/output part to the
Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
04-02B–7
TO MODEL INDEX

monitor item item
Operation command signal for selected
active command modes function Output part drive signal
active command modes item
End Of Sie
DLC-2
am2zzw0000126
DLC-2 CONSTRUCTION [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)]

id0402b2180800
added.
been adopted for this connector.The 16-pin connector consists of a CAN_H (HS) terminal, CAN_L (HS)
terminal, CAN_H (MS) terminal, CAN_L (MS) terminal, GND1 terminal, GND2 terminal, and B+ terminal.
DLC-2
CAN_L CAN_L
B+
(HS) (MS)
CAN_H CAN_H
GND2 GND1
(HS) (MS)
am2zzn0000064
Terminal Function
End Of Sie
04-02B–8
TO MODEL INDEX
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
04-11 CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–4
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–1 MASTER CYLINDER
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–5
STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . 04-11–1 POWER BRAKE UNIT FUNCTION . . . . . 04-11–6
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM POWER BRAKE UNIT CONSTRUCTION/
STRUCTURAL VIEW OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–6
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–6
(Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–7
INTRUSION-MINIMIZING BRAKE PEDAL FRONT BRAKE (DISC)
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–3 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–9
INTRUSION-MINIMIZING BRAKE PEDAL REAR BRAKE (DRUM)
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 04-11–3 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–9
Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–4
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM OUTLINE
NG: CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
id041100100100
x An intrusion-minimizing brake pedal mechanism has been adopted for improved safety.
x A power brake unit with a brake assist (dual servo ratio) mechanism has been adopted for improved safety.
x With the adoption of large diameter front disc brakes and rear drum brakes with wide linings, both high braking
performance and excellent brake-feel have been achieved.
x A vacuum pump has been adopted, improving braking force. (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
End Of Sie
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]
id0411001002h1
R.H.D.
POWER
BRAKE UNIT
BRAKE PEDAL
MASTER
CYLINDER
REAR BRAKE (DRUM)
FRONT BRAKE (DISC)
am2zzn0000118
End Of Sie
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]
id0411001002g8
04-11–1
TO MODEL INDEX

R.H.D.
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

BRAKE
PEDAL
POWER
BRAKE UNIT
MASTER
CYLINDER
VACUUM PUMP
REAR BRAKE (DRUM)
VACUUM PUMP
(MZ-CD 1.4 DI
Turbo)
FRONT BRAKE (DISC)
am2zzn0000118
End Of Sie
INTRUSION-MINIMIZING BRAKE PEDAL FUNCTION
NG: BRAKE PEDAL
id041100100500
x The intrusion-minimizing brake pedal mechanism reduces impact to the lower extremities of the driver by
minimizing the amount of rearward brake pedal thrust in a frontal collision.
End Of Sie
INTRUSION-MINIMIZING BRAKE PEDAL CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id041100101000
x The intrusion minimizing brake pedal mechanism is structured on the brake pedal and consists of the following
parts.
— Pedal arm
— Lever
— Pin A
— Pin B
— Pin C
— Bracket
04-11–3
TO MODEL INDEX

Construction
LEVER
PIN C
PIN A
BRACKET
PIN B
PEDAL ARM
am2zzn0000036
Operation
During normal braking
x When the brake pedal is depressed, the pedal arm rotates at the pin A fulcrum point, and the pedal depression
force is transmitted to the fork of the power brake unit.
x This pedal depression force pushes in the fork to operate the brakes.
PIN A
PEDAL ARM
PEDAL
am2zzn0000038
Intrusion-minimizing operation
x In a frontal collision, the brake pedal is forced rearward by the movement of the dashboard.
x In response to this, force in the direction of X is applied to the brake pedal lever because the dashboard
member and brake pedal lever interfere.
04-11–4
TO MODEL INDEX

x With the addition of force in the direction of X, the lever rotates around the pin B fulcrum point.
x When the lever rotates, it obstructs pin A at the fulcrum point of the pedal arm.
x If the pedal rotates further, pin A separates from the bracket (notch), and the pedal is freed.
x By freeing the pedal arm, the force applied to the lower extremities is reduced.
LEVER
BRACKET PIN A
PIN B
NOTCH
BRACKET
am2zzn0000037
End Of Sie
MASTER CYLINDER CONSTRUCTION
NG: MASTER CYLINDER
id041100100700
x A mini-master cylinder has been adopted which has an overall shorter cylinder length for an assured fit in the
engine compartment space.
x The mini-master cylinder, a plunger type (cup does not slide) with an inner cylinder diameter of 20.6 mm {0.811
in}, provides improved durability.
Note
x Plunger type: The cup is fixed to the cylinder with the piston sliding along the internal surface of the cup.
x The master cylinder cannot be disassembled. Therefore, if there is any malfunction in the interior of the master
cylinder, replace the master cylinder component without disassembling.
04-11–5
TO MODEL INDEX
EXTERNAL VIEW
L.H.D. R.H.D.
NO.1 RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK
RESERVE TANK HOSE
CYLINDER COMPONENT
CYLINDER COMPONENT
NO.2 RESERVE TANK
RELIEF PORT
RELIEF PORT
PRIMARY CUP
CYLINDER BODY
SECONDARY CUP PRIMARY PISTON
PRIMARY RETURN SPRING

SECONDARY RETURN SPRING SECONDARY PISTON
am2zzn0000118
End Of Sie
POWER BRAKE UNIT FUNCTION
NG: POWER BRAKE UNIT
id041100100800
x A 9-inch, single diaphragm-type power brake unit with a brake assist (dual servo ratio) mechanism has been
adopted, achieving both high braking performance and excellent brake-feel.
End Of Sie
POWER BRAKE UNIT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id041100181100
Construction
x The construction of the brake assist (dual servo ratio) mechanism-equipped power brake unit is fundamentally
the same as a conventional power brake unit except that there is a depression in the contacting surface of the
plunger plate of the plunger.
04-11–6
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER BRAKE UNIT CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
REACTION DISC
PLUNGER PLATE
VALVE BODY PLUNGER
am2zzn0000037
Operation
x During normal braking, only the flat surface area of the valve body contacts the reaction disc to transmit braking
force.
REACTION DISC
PLUNGER PLATE
VALVE BODY PLUNGER
am2zzn0000079
During brake assist operation

x During emergency braking when there is increased input to the brake pedal of a force greater than that during
normal braking, the reaction disc deforms in accordance with the displacement of the concave ring of the valve
body. When this occurs, the surface area of the valve body contacting the reaction disc increases in
comparison to normal braking resulting in a larger servo ratio compared to normal braking. As a result, the dual
servo ratio mechanism is actuated and transmits a greater than normal amount of brake force.
04-11–7
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER BRAKE UNIT CHARACTERISTIC

REACTION DISC
PLUNGER PLATE
OUTPUT
SERVO RATIO
SWITCH POINT
VALVE BODY PLUNGER
INPUT
am2zzn0000079
04-11–8
TO MODEL INDEX

FRONT BRAKE (DISC) CONSTRUCTION
id041100100400
MTX, ATX
x Ventilated disc type front brakes with a 258 mm
{10.2 in} diameter and 23 mm {0.91 in} thickness
have been adopted.
CVT
x Ventilated disc type front brakes with a 239 mm
{9.41 in} diameter and 20 mm {0.79 in} thickness
have been adopted.
End Of Sie
NG: REAR BRAKE (DRUM)
adejjn00000136
REAR BRAKE (DRUM) CONSTRUCTION

id041100810800
MTX, ATX
x A leading/trailing type rear drum brake with a 200 mm {7.87 in} drum inner diameter and 19.0 mm {0.748 in}
wheel cylinder inner diameter has been adopted.
x Braking stability is ensured by use of 30.0 mm {1.18 in} width linings.
x An auto-adjuster has been adopted which
maintains a fixed clearance between the brake
drum and brake shoe.
am2zzn0000127
CVT
x A leading/trailing type rear drum brake with a 180 mm {7.09 in} drum inner diameter and 17.4 mm {0.685 in}
wheel cylinder inner diameter has been adopted.
x Braking stability is ensured by use of 25.0 mm {0.984 in} width linings.
x An auto-adjuster has been adopted which
maintains a fixed clearance between the brake
drum and brake shoe.
End Of Sie
am2zzn0000127
04-11–9
TO MODEL INDEX
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
04-12 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM

PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM OUTLINE. . 04-12–1 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-12–1
TO MODEL INDEX
End of Toc
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM OUTLINE
NG: PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
id041200100100
x A center lever-type parking brake has been adopted for improved operability.
x The parking brake can be adjusted from the vehicle interior for improved serviceability.
End Of Sie
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id041200100200
R.H.D.
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
FRONT PARKING BRAKE CABLE

END CABLE
REAR PARKING BRAKE CABLE
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
ADJUSTING NUT
am2zzn0000116
End Of Sie
04-12–1
TO MODEL INDEX
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
04-13 ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

ABS OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–1 EBD CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . 04-13–9
ABS STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–1 Operating Condition Transition
ABS SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . 04-13–3 Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–9
ABS HU/CM CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . 04-13–3 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
ABS HU PART FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–3 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–9
ABS HU PART CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . 04-13–3 Data sent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–9
Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–3 Data received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–10
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–4 ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND
ABS CM PART FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–6 ABS SENSOR ROTOR FUNCTION . . . . 04-13–10
Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–6 ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND
ABS CONTROL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–7 ABS SENSOR ROTOR
Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–7 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 04-13–10
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–7 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–10
ABS CONTROL OPERATION. . . . . . . . . 04-13–7 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–11
Control outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–7 BRAKE SYSTEM/ABS WARNING LIGHT
EBD CONTROL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–8 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–11
Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–8 BRAKE SYSTEM/ABS WARNING LIGHT
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–8 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 04-13–11
TO MODEL INDEX

ABS OUTLINE
id041300183600
End of Toc
x EBD has been adopted for improved safety.
x The ABS HU/CM, integrating both the hydraulic unit (HU) and control module (CM), has been adopted,
resulting in a size and weight reduction of the system.

x A semiconductor element type ABS wheel-speed sensor has been adopted, improving reliability and reducing
size and weight.
x An enhanced malfunction diagnosis system made possible by the use of Integrated Diagnostic Software
(IDS) has improved serviceability.
End Of Sie
ABS STRUCTURAL VIEW
id041300184900
R.H.D.
ABS WARNING LIGHT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
REAR ABS SENSOR

ROTOR
BRAKE SWITCH
REAR ABS WHEEL-

SPEED SENSOR
ABS HU/CM

am2zzn0000116
End Of Sie
04-13–1
TO MODEL INDEX

ABS SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id041300185000
ABS 40A
BRAKE SYSTEM
SAS 10A WARNING LIGHT
N Y
IG SW
ABS WARNING LIGHT
Q
RF
O
I
ABS WHEEL LF
K
SPEED
SENSOR E
RR
C
U B
LR
W
CAN
BATTERY DRIVER
ABS HU/CM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CAN_H
CAN H
DRIVER L PCM
CAN_L
CAN
DRIVER
DLC-2
am2zzn0000117
End Of Sie
ABS HU/CM CONSTRUCTION
NG: ABS HYDRAULIC UNIT/CONTROL MODULE
id041300185600
x A high-reliability, reduced size and weight ABS
HU/CM, integrating both the ABS HU and ABS
CM, has been adopted.
End Of Sie
adejjn00000424
ABS HU PART FUNCTION

id041300185500
x The ABS HU adjusts the fluid pressure to the caliper pistons and wheel cylinders by controlling (on/off) each
solenoid valve and pump motor according to signals from the ABS CM of the ABS HU/CM.
End Of Sie
ABS HU PART CONSTRUCTION
id041300184300
Construction
x The ABS HU mainly consists of the inlet/outlet solenoid valves, pump motor (pump) and reservoir tank.
04-13–3
TO MODEL INDEX

Function Of Main Component Parts
Part name Function
Inlet solenoid valve x Adjusts the fluid pressure in each brake system according to ABS CM signals.
Outlet solenoid valve x Adjusts the fluid pressure in each brake system according to ABS CM signals.
x Temporarily holds the brake fluid from the caliper piston to ensure smooth
Reservoir
pressure reduction.
Pump x Returns brake fluid held in the reservoir back to the master cylinder.
Pump motor x Operates the pump according to ABS CM signals.
Hydraulic circuit diagram
MASTER CYLINDER
DAMPER
CHAMBER
PUMP MOTOR
PUMP
INLET
INLET SOLENOID
RESERVOIR
SOLENOID RESERVOIR VALVE
VALVE
OUTLET OUTLET OUTLET OUTLET

SOLENOID RF SOLENOID LR RR SOLENOID LF SOLENOID
VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE
am2zzn0000038
Operation
x During normal braking, the solenoid valves are not energized and they are all off. When the brake pedal is
depressed, brake fluid pressure is transmitted from the master cylinder, through the inlet solenoid valves, and
then to the caliper piston.(The figure shows control for only one, front wheel.)
04-13–4
TO MODEL INDEX

Solenoid valve operation table
Inlet solenoid valve Outlet solenoid valve
Pump motor, pump
LF RF LR RR LF RF LR RR
OFF (open) OFF (closed) OFF

MASTER CYLINDER
DAMPER CHAMBER PUMP

MOTOR
PUMP
RESERVOIR
INLET
SOLENOID
VALVE
OUTLET
SOLENOID
CALIPER PISTON VALVE
am2zzn0000038
During ABS and EBD control

x When wheel lock-up is about to occur, the inlet and outlet solenoid valves are energized and controlled in three
pressure modes (increase, maintain, or reduction), thereby adjusting brake fluid pressure.Brake fluid during
pressure reduction is temporarily held in the reservoir after which the pump motor operates the pump to return
the fluid to the master cylinder.(The figure shows the control for only one, front wheel)
Pump motor, pump
LF RF LR RR LF RF LR RR
During pressure
OFF (open) OFF (closed) OFF
increase mode
During pressure
ON (closed) OFF (closed) OFF
maintain mode
During pressure
ON (closed) ON (open) ON
reduction mode
04-13–5
TO MODEL INDEX

DURING PRESSURE INCREASE MODE
MASTER CYLINDER
DAMPER
CHAMBER
INLET
PUMP SOLENOID
VALVE
PUMP MOTOR
DURING PRESSURE MAINTAIN MODE
MASTER CYLINDER
RESERVOIR
INLET
CALIPER PISTON OUTLET DAMPER SOLENOID
SOLENOID PUMP
CHAMBER VALVE
VALVE
DURING PRESSURE REDUCTION MODE
PUMP MOTOR
MASTER CYLINDER
RESERVOIR
DAMPER
CHAMBER
PUMP OUTLET
INLET CALIPER PISTON SOLENOID
SOLENOID VALVE
VALVE
PUMP MOTOR
RESERVOIR
OUTLET
SOLENOID
VALVE
CALIPER PISTON
am2zzn0000038
End Of Sie
ABS CM PART FUNCTION
id041300185300
x The ABS CM detects the vehicle wheel speeds based on the signals from the four ABS wheel-speed sensors.
The CM calculates the rotation condition of each wheel from the relation between the detected vehicle wheel
speed and the estimated (based on the detected speed) vehicle speed from there on. It then controls brake
fluid pressure to each wheel to prevent lock-up.
Function Table
Function name Contents
ABS control function x Controls brake fluid pressure when braking to maintain directional
stability, ensure steerability and reduce stopping distance.
Electronic brake force distribution (EBD) control x Constantly controls proper distribution of brake fluid pressure to the front
function and rear wheels according to vehicle load, road surface and vehicle
speed conditions to prevent early lock-up of the rear wheels.
04-13–6
TO MODEL INDEX

CAN communication function x Outputs the vehicle wheel-speed signal and ABS system warning
control data via CAN lines.
On-board diagnostic system x Main components of the ABS control system have a self-diagnosis
function. In case a malfunction occurs, warning lights illuminate to alert
the driver, and at the same time a DTC is stored in the ABS HU/CM.
x When a malfunction is determined as a result of the on-board diagnostic
test, system control is disabled or limited to prevent any dangerous
situation while driving.
End Of Sie
ABS CONTROL OUTLINE
id041300184200
Feature
x ABS control occurs when wheel slip is determined by the ABS CM (based on the four ABS wheel-speed
sensors). Then, the ABS HU inlet and outlet solenoid valves are operated and brake fluid pressure is controlled
accordingly to prevent wheel lock-up.
x Use of ABS control during emergency braking or on slippery road surfaces allows directional stability to be
maintained, steerability ensured and stopping distance to be reduced.
x The ABS control system has independent front wheel control and unified control (select low) for the rear
wheels.
Note
x Select low control: A control system in which the left and right vehicle wheel speeds are compared and
brake fluid pressure is controlled according to the wheel most likely to lock-up.
Structure
Block Diagram
ABS HU/CM
CM HU
ABS WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR (LF) CALIPER PISTON (LF)
SOLENOID
VALVE
ABS WHEEL-SPEED
CALIPER PISTON (RF)
SENSOR (RF)
CPU
ABS WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR (LR)
PUMP
MOTOR WHEEL CYLINDER (LR)
ABS WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR (RR)
WHEEL CYLINDER (RR)
am2zzn0000038
End Of Sie
ABS CONTROL OPERATION
id041300184100
Control outline
x When the ABS CM determines wheel slip conditions based on the signals from the ABS wheel-speed sensors
during braking, the ABS CM operates the ABS HU inlet and outlet solenoid valves, reducing and maintaining
brake fluid pressure in accordance with the wheel slip factors. Then, when the wheel slip condition has passed,
brake fluid pressure is increased and maintained, ensuring braking with a constantly stable brake force.
04-13–7
TO MODEL INDEX

Control condition transition diagram
ESTIMATED VEHICLE SPEED
HIGH
WHEEL SPEED
SPEED
0
TIME
PRESSURE
REDUCTION
SOLENOID
VALVE PRESSURE
CONTROL MAINTAINED
PRESSURE
INCREASE
HIGH
BRAKE FLUID
PRESSURE
0
TIME
am2zzn0000040
End Of Sie
EBD CONTROL OUTLINE
id041300185800
Feature
x EBD control uses the ABS system to control brake fluid pressure distribution to the rear wheels so that they do
not lock-up prior to the front wheels during braking, thereby preventing the loss of handling stability.
x EBD control has independent control systems for both the front and rear wheels.
x EBD control constantly and properly distributes brake fluid pressure regardless of vehicle weight.
Structure
Block Diagram
ABS HU/CM
CM HU
ABS WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR (LF) CALIPER PISTON (LF)
SOLENOID
VALVE
ABS WHEEL-SPEED
CALIPER PISTON (RF)
SENSOR (RF)
CPU
ABS WHEEL-SPEED
PUMP WHEEL CYLINDER (LR)
SENSOR (LR)
MOTOR
ABS WHEEL-SPEED
WHEEL CYLINDER (RR)
SENSOR (RR)
am2zzn0000038
End Of Sie
04-13–8
TO MODEL INDEX

EBD CONTROL OPERATION
id041300185700
x EBD control detects the slip ratio between the estimated vehicle speed and rear wheels from the ABS wheel-
speed sensor signals. If the slip ratio of the rear wheels as compared to the front wheels is larger than the fixed
limit, the ABS HU/CM reduces brake pressure being distributed to the rear wheels. Due to this, brake pressure
distribution is constantly controlled in the proper proportion and in relation to vehicle load, road surface
conditions and vehicle speed.
x Determination of the rear wheel slip ratio, based on a comparison of the lowest front wheel speed and the
estimated vehicle speed with the rear wheel speeds, is divided into conditions 0-3 shown in the table below.
x The ABS HU outlet and inlet solenoid valves are operated and the brake fluid pressure controlled according to
these conditions.
x If ABS control conditions are met during EBD control, EBD control is stopped and ABS control is given priority.
Rear wheel slip ratio
Status EBD control Solenoid valve Comment
determination
0 No slip No control Pressure increase —
1 D%—E% Control Pressure maintained —
2 After EBD control, slip ratio is J% Control Increase/maintain —
Pressure reduction/
3 Front wheel slip ratio is G% or more Control ABS control operates
maintained/increase
D—G: Specified value
Operating Condition Transition Diagram
HIGH
VEHICLE SPEED
REAR WHEEL SPEED
SPEED EBD INITIAL CONTROL VALUE FRONT

WHEEL
SPEED
ABS INITIAL CONTROL VALUE
0
TIME
PRESSURE
REAR REDUCTION
SOLENOID
VALVE PRESSURE
CONTROL MAINTAINED
PRESSURE
INCREASE
HIGH
FRONT
BRAKE FLUID
PRESSURE
BRAKE FLUID REAR

PRESSURE BRAKE
FLUID
PRESSURE
0
0 1 2 3 TIME
EBD CONTROL AREA ABS CONTROL AREA
am6zzn0000010
End Of Sie
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) OUTLINE
id041300184600
x The ABS HU/CM sends and receives data to and from other modules via the CAN system. Refer to BODY &
ACCESSORIES for a detailed explanation of the CAN system. (See 09-40-7 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK
(CAN) SYSTEM OUTLINE.)
Data sent
x Brake system condition
x Wheel speeds of all four wheels
x Brake system warning light illumination request
04-13–9
TO MODEL INDEX

x ABS warning light illumination request
Data received
x Brake pedal position
x Brake switch information
x Tire size
x Model information
End Of Sie
ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND ABS SENSOR ROTOR FUNCTION
NG: FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
id041300185200
x The ABS wheel-speed sensor and ABS sensor rotor detect the rotation condition of each wheel and transmit
this information to the ABS HU/CM.
x The signal from the ABS wheel speed sensor is the primary signal that the ABS HU/CM uses when carrying out
control.
End Of Sie
ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND ABS SENSOR ROTOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id041300185100
Construction
x The ABS wheel speed sensor utilizes a semiconductor element that contains an active drive circuit (MR
element*). The front sensor is installed on the steering knuckle.The rear sensor is installed on the torsion beam
axle.
x The ABS sensor rotor utilizes a magnetic encoder made of magnetic rubber. The front sensor rotor is integrated
with the wheel bearing oil seal.The rear sensor rotor is pressed into the rear wheel bearing.
*: Magneto-resistive: A magneto-resistive force means that an exterior magnetic field acts on the element,
changing the resistance of the element.
Caution
x When inspecting the ABS wheel speed sensor, do not use an ohmmeter to inspect resistance. It is
possible that the voltage from the ohmmeter could damage the semiconductor inside the ABS
wheel speed sensor.Inspect using the PID data monitor of the Integrated diagnostic software
(IDS).
x When replacing the front wheel bearing, be careful of the direction in which the bearing is
assembled.If the assembly direction is incorrect, the ABS sensor rotor cannot function.
Note
x Magnetic encoder: A plate that has positive and negative poles (marked out) in a continuous, alternating
line.
ABS wheel-speed sensor and ABS sensor rotor (front)
WHEEL BEARING
am2zzn0000041
04-13–10
TO MODEL INDEX

ABS wheel speed sensor and ABS sensor rotor (rear)
WHEEL HUB COMPONENT
REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
REAR ABS SENSOR ROTOR

am2zzn0000041
Operation
x As the ABS sensor rotor rotates, the magnetic flux between the ABS wheel speed sensor and the ABS sensor
rotor change periodically. This cycle change appears in proportion to the rotation speed.
x The semiconductor element in the wheel speed sensor detects the change in magnetic flux, and the active
drive circuit converts it to a rectangular wave signal, which is transmitted to the ABS HU/CM.
x For every single rotation of the ABS sensor rotor, a 44-pulse rectangular wave signal is output.The CM in the
ABS HU/CM calculates the wheel speed from the periodicity of these pulses.
DETECTION PRINCIPLE OUTPUT WAVE PATTERN
ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR

ACTIVE DRIVE CIRCUIT
ACTIVE DRIVE
CIRCUIT HI
RECTANGULAR
WAVE SIGNAL
SEMICONDUCTOR LO
ELEMENT
MAGNETIC RUBBER
(MAGNETIC ENCODER) SEMICONDUCTOR
ELEMENT
ABS SENSOR ROTOR

am2zzn0000117
End Of Sie
BRAKE SYSTEM/ABS WARNING LIGHT FUNCTION
id041300200100
x The brake system/ABS warning light is built into the instrument cluster. If a malfunction is detected in the
system with the parking brake released, the warning light illuminates to notify the driver.
End Of Sie
BRAKE SYSTEM/ABS WARNING LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id041300200200
x When the ABS and CAN lines are functioning normally, the brake system/ABS warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to check for a burned-out bulb, and then turns off after Approx.
3 s. At this time, while the parking brake is activated, the brake system warning light remains illuminated,
however, it turns off after the parking brake is released.
x The brake system/ABS warning light illuminates during a system malfunction, and the control is as follows:
Brake system warning light illuminated:
— EBD control disabled.
ABS warning light illuminated:
— ABS control disabled.
04-13–11
TO MODEL INDEX
ABS WARNING LIGHT
am2zzn0000117
End Of Sie
04-13–12
TO MODEL INDEX
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
04-15 DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) Understeer Tendency
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–1 Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–15
DSC Operation Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–1 DSC CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . 04-15–15
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) Oversteer Tendency Suppression . . . . . 04-15–15
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–3 Understeer Tendency Suppression . . . . 04-15–16
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–4 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–16
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) Data sent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–16
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . 04-15–5 Data received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–16
DSC HU/CM CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . 04-15–5 ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND
DSC HU PART FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–6 ABS SENSOR ROTOR FUNCTION . . . . 04-15–17
DSC HU PART ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND
ONSTRUCTION/OPERATION. . . . . . . . 04-15–6 ABS SENSOR ROTOR
Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–6 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 04-15–17
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–7 COMBINED SENSOR FUNCTION . . . . . . 04-15–17
DSC CM PART FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–12 COMBINED SENSOR
Function Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–12 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 04-15–17
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–13 BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR
ABS CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–13 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–18
EBD CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–14 BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–14 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–18
TCS CONTROL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–14 DSC INDICATOR LIGHT FUNCTION. . . . 04-15–18
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–14 DSC INDICATOR LIGHT
TCS CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . 04-15–14 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–18
DSC CONTROL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–15 DSC Indicator Light Operation . . . . . . . 04-15–18
Vehicle Condition Determination . . . . . 04-15–15 DSC OFF SWITCH, DSC OFF LIGHT
Oversteer Tendency Determination . . . 04-15–15 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–19
DSC OFF SWITCH, DSC OFF LIGHT
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–19
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) OUTLINE
id041500100300
x The DSC HU/CM, integrating both the hydraulic unit (HU) and control module (CM), has been adopted,
resulting in a size and weight reduction.
x A combined sensor, integrating both the yaw rate sensor and lateral-G sensor, has been adopted, improving
serviceability.
x The specialized controller area network (CAN) system has been adopted for use between the combined sensor
and DSC HU/CM, improving serviceability and reliability.
x An enhanced malfunction diagnosis system, used with the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS),
improving serviceability.
x Serviceability improved by the automatic configuration function.
DSC Operation Outline

x The ABS prevents wheel lock-up during braking. The TCS detects drive wheel spin due to the accelerator pedal
being pressed too hard or similar causes and controls engine speed to suppress wheel spin. With these
systems, safety is assured when driving or stopping.
x Additionally, sudden changes in vehicle attitude, due to evasive steering or road conditions, are controlled by
the DSC. The DSC suppresses vehicle sideslip when driving due to vehicle spin (oversteer) or drift-out
(understeer) by controlling braking and engine speed. At this time, the DSC indicator light illuminates to alert
the driver that the DSC is operating due to a dangerous situation. As a result, the driver can calmly react and is
provided leeway for the next maneuver, resulting in safe driving conditions.
x In this way the combination of DSC + ABS + TCS ensures driving, stopping and turning safety in all aspects.
04-15–1
TO MODEL INDEX

Results Of DSC Operation
WITHOUT DSC WITH DSC
DRIFT OUT
(UNDERSTEER)
DRIFT OUT
SUPPRESSION
(UNDERSTEER)
WITHOUT DSC WITH DSC
VEHICLE SPIN
VEHICLE SPIN (OVERSTEER)
(OVERSTEER) SUPPRESSION
am2zzn0000052
Caution
x While the DSC is a steering safety system, it does not improve normal steering function.
Therefore, always drive carefully, even if the vehicle has DSC, and do not overestimate the DSC
capability.
x If the initialization procedures for the combined and brake fluid pressure sensors are not
performed correctly, an incorrectly determined initial point may cause a discrepancy between the
actual driving conditions of the vehicle and the signals from the sensors, resulting in improper
DSC operation. Therefore, after replacing or removing the following parts, make sure to perform
the DSC HU/CM initialization procedures of the sensors with the vehicle stopped on a level ground
to insure proper DSC operation. For the initialization procedures of the sensors, refer to the
Workshop Manual.
— DSC HU/CM
— Combined sensor
x The DSC and ABS will not operate normally under the following conditions:
— With tires that are not of the specified size, manufacturer or tread pattern, or not inflated
according to specification
— With tires that have significant comparative wear variation
— With tire chains
— With an emergency spare tire
End Of Sie
04-15–2
TO MODEL INDEX

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) STRUCTURAL VIEW
R.H.D.
ABS WARNING LIGHT DSC OFF LIGHT
BRAKE SYSTEM
DSC WARNING LIGHT
INDICATOR
LIGHT
REAR ABS
WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR
DSC OFF SWITCH
EPS CONTROL
MODULE
COMBINED
SENSOR
REAR ABS
DSC HU/CM SENSOR ROTOR
(BUILT INTO DSC HU/CM)
PCM (ZJ, ZY)
PCM (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)) FRONT ABS SENSOR ROTOR
am2zzn0000117
End Of Sie
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) CONSTRUCTION
id041500100500
x The DSC system consists of the following parts. While each part has a regular function in other systems, only
the function during DSC control is listed.
Part name Function
x Makes calculations using input signals from each sensor, controls brake fluid pressure
to each wheel, and actuates each function (ABS, EBD, TCS and DSC) of the DSC
system.
DSC HU/CM x Outputs the torque reduction request signal, wheel speed signal and DSC system
warning control data via CAN lines.
x Controls the on-board diagnostic system and fail-safe function when there is a
malfunction in the DSC system.
x Controls engine output based on signals from the DSC HU/CM.
x Transmits engine speed, tire and shift position data via CAN communication to the
PCM DSC HU/CM.
x Transmits gear/selector lever position data via CAN communication to the DSC HU/
CM.
EPS control module x Transmits steering angle data via CAN communication to the DSC HU/CM.
x Informs the driver that the DSC is operating (vehicle sideslip occurring).
DSC indicator light x Informs the driver that the TCS is operating (drive wheel is spinning).
x Informs the driver of DSC/TCS malfunction.
DSC OFF switch x Transmits driver intention to release DSC control to the DSC HU/CM.
DSC OFF light x Informs driver that DSC control has been released due to DSC OFF switch operation.
ABS wheel-speed sensor x Detects the rotation condition of each wheel and transmits it to the DSC HU/CM.
x Detects the lateral-G (vehicle speed increase) and the yaw rate (vehicle turning angle)
Combined sensor
of the vehicle and transmits them to the DSC HU/CM.
04-15–4
TO MODEL INDEX

Part name Function
Brake fluid pressure sensor (Built
x Detects the fluid pressure from the master cylinder.
into DSC HU/CM)
End Of Sie
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC) SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id041500100600
DSC P 30A
BRAKE SYSTEM
DSC V 20A WARNING LIGHT
ABS WARNING LIGHT

SAS 10A
Y AU
IG SW
AP
RF
AS
AT
ABS WHEEL I
LF
SPEED F DSC OFF
SENSOR O LIGHT
RR
R DSC
AJ
INDICATOR
LR LIGHT
AG CAN
B DRIVER
BATTERY
DSC HU/CM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CAN_H
CAN M
DRIVER J
CAN_L PCM
CONNECTOR 6-PIN TYPE
CAN2_H CAN
CAN B AO CAN DRIVER
DRIVER A AL DRIVER
CAN2_L
D AC EPS CONTROL MODULE
COMBINED
SENSOR E H
CAN
DRIVER
CAN C
DRIVER B
A DLC-2
COMBINED
SENSOR D
CONNECTOR 4-PIN TYPE DSC OFF SWITCH

A AA
am2zzn0000121
End Of Sie
DSC HU/CM CONSTRUCTION
id041500100700
x A high reliability, reduced size and weight DSC
HU/CM, integrating both the DSC HU and the
DSC CM, has been adopted.
End Of Sie
am2zzn0000053
04-15–5
TO MODEL INDEX

DSC HU PART FUNCTION
id041500100800
x According to DSC CM signals, the DSC HU controls (on/off) each solenoid valve and the pump motor, adjusts
fluid pressure in each caliper piston, and actuates each function (ABS, EBD (Electronic Brakeforce
Distribution), TCS and DSC) of the DSC system.
End Of Sie
DSC HU PART CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id041500100900
Construction
x The DSC HU mainly consists of the inlet/outlet solenoid valves, pump motor (pump), traction control solenoid
valves and stability control solenoid valves.
Function Of Main Component Parts
Part name Function
x Adjusts the fluid pressure in each brake system according to DSC HU/CM
Inlet solenoid valve
signals.
x Adjusts the fluid pressure in each brake system according to DSC HU/CM
Outlet solenoid valve
signals.
x Switches the brake hydraulic circuits during and according to normal braking,
Stability control solenoid valve
ABS and EBD control, TCS control and DSC control.
x Switches the brake hydraulic circuits during and according to normal braking,
Traction control solenoid valve
ABS and EBD control, TCS control and DSC control.
x Temporarily stores brake fluid from the caliper piston to ensure smooth
Reservoir
pressure reduction during ABS and EBD control, TCS control and DSC control.
x Returns the brake fluid stored in the reservoir to the master cylinder during ABS
and DSC control.
Pump
x Increases brake fluid pressure and sends brake fluid to each caliper piston
during TCS control and DSC control.
Pump motor x Operates the pump according to DSC HU/CM signals.
x Shifts fluid flow from constricted paths during pressure reduce mode to
Flow control valve
suppress noise. (Only installed on the front system.)
04-15–6
TO MODEL INDEX
MASTER CYLINDER
TRACTION
CONTROL DAMPER TRACTION
DAMPER
SOLENOID CHAMBER CONTROL
CHAMBER
VALVE SOLENOID
PUMP MOTOR VALVE
PUMP
STABILITY RESERVOIR
CONTROL CHECK VALVE
SOLENOID CHECK STABILITY
VALVE RESERVOIR VALVE CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE
INLET
SOLENOID
INLET VALVE
SOLENOID
VALVE
FLOW
CONTROL
FLOW
VALVE
CONTROL
VALVE
OUTLET OUTLET INLET OUTLET OUTLET

SOLENOID RF SOLENOID LR SOLENOID RR SOLENOID LF SOLENOID
VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE
am2zzn0000053
Operation
x During normal braking, the solenoid valves are not energized and all of them are off. When the brake pedal is
depressed, brake fluid pressure is transmitted from the master cylinder, through the traction control solenoid
and inlet solenoid valves, and then to the caliper piston.
Traction control solenoid Stability control solenoid Inlet side Outlet side Pump
valve valve Solenoid valve Solenoid valve motor,
LFRR RFLR LFRR RFLR LF RF LR RR LF RF LR RR pump
OFF (open) OFF (closed) OFF (open) OFF (closed) Stopped
04-15–7
TO MODEL INDEX

Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
MASTER CYLINDER
TRACTION
CONTROL TRACTION
SOLENOID PUMP CONTROL
VALVE SOLENOID
PUMP PUMP MOTOR VALVE
STABILITY
CONTROL
SOLENOID INLET INLET STABILITY
VALVE SOLENOID SOLENOID CONTROL
VALVE VALVE SOLENOID
VALVE
INLET
SOLENOID
VALVE INLET
SOLENOID
VALVE
FLOW
CONTROL FLOW
VALVE CONTROL
VALVE
OUTLET OUTLET OUTLET OUTLET

SOLENOID RF SOLENOID LR RR SOLENOID LF SOLENOID
VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE
PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE
INCREASE INCREASE INCREASE INCREASE
am2zzn0000053
During ABS and EBD control

x During ABS and EBD control, when wheel lock-up is about to occur, the traction control solenoid and stability
control solenoid valves are not energized, and the inlet and outlet solenoid valves are energized and controlled
in three pressure modes (increase, reduction or maintain), thereby adjusting brake fluid pressure. Brake fluid
during pressure reduction is temporarily stored in the reservoir and afterwards the pump motor operates the
pump to return the fluid to the master cylinder. (The following figure shows these conditions: right front wheel
pressure increased, left front wheel pressure maintained, and both rear wheels pressure decreased.))
Traction control Stability control Inlet side Outlet side Pump
solenoid valve solenoid valve Solenoid valve solenoid valve motor,
During
pressure
OFF (open) OFF (closed) OFF (open) OFF (closed) Stopped
increase
mode
During
pressure
OFF (open) OFF (closed) ON (closed) OFF (closed) Stopped
maintain
mode
04-15–8
TO MODEL INDEX

Traction control Stability control Inlet side Outlet side Pump
solenoid valve solenoid valve Solenoid valve solenoid valve motor,
During
pressure
OFF (open) OFF (closed) ON (closed) ON (open) Operating
reductio
n mode
MASTER CYLINDER
P
TRACTION
CONTROL
SOLENOID DAMPER DAMPER TRACTION
VALVE CHAMBER CHAMBER CONTROL
SOLENOID
PUMP MOTOR VALVE
PUMP
STABILITY
CONTROL RESERVOIR RESERVOIR
SOLENOID STABILITY
VALVE CHECK CHECK CONTROL
VALVE VALVE SOLENOID
VALVE
INLET INLET
SOLENOID SOLENOID
VALVE VALVE
FLOW
CONTROL FLOW
VALVE CONTROL
VALVE
OUTLET OUTLET INLET OUTLET OUTLET

SOLENOID RF SOLENOID LR SOLENOID RR SOLENOID LF SOLENOID
VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE
PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE
INCREASE REDUCTION REDUCTION MAINTAINED
am2zzn0000053
During DSC control (to suppress oversteer tendency) and TCS control
x When a large oversteer tendency or driving wheel spin is determined, the traction control solenoid and stability
control solenoid valves are energized, switching the hydraulic circuits. At the same time, the pump motor is
actuated to operate the pump, thereby increasing pressure by supplying brake fluid pressure to the caliper
piston of the outer front wheel or the slipping driving wheel. Also at this time, the inlet solenoid valve of the inner
rear wheel is energized and the hydraulic circuit of this wheel is closed.
x After a pressure increase, brake fluid pressure is adjusted using the three pressure modes (reduction,
maintain, increase) so that the target wheel speed is obtained. (The following figure shows a left turn, or control
of right front wheel spin (during pressure increase mode).)
04-15–9
TO MODEL INDEX

Traction control Stability control Pump
solenoid valve solenoid valve motor,
During
ON OFF
pressure OFF ON OFF ON OFF
(clos (ope OFF (closed) Operating
increase (open) (closed) (closed) (open) (open)
ed) n)
mode
During
OFF OFF
pressure OFF ON ON
OFF (closed) (ope (ope OFF (closed) Stopped
maintain (open) (closed) (closed)
n) n)
mode
During
OFF OFF OFF ON
pressure OFF ON ON OFF
OFF (closed) (ope (ope (clos (ope Operating
reductio (open) (closed) (closed) (closed)
n) n) ed) n)
n mode
MASTER CYLINDER
TRACTION P
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE DAMPER
CHAMBER
STABILITY PUMP PUMP MOTOR

CONTROL
SOLENOID RESERVOIR
VALVE
CHECK
VALVE
INLET
SOLENOID
VALVE
FLOW
CONTROL
VALVE
OUTLET OUTLET INLET

SOLENOID RF SOLENOID LR SOLENOID RR LF
VALVE VALVE VALVE
PRESSURE
INCREASE
am2zzn0000053
04-15–10
TO MODEL INDEX

During DSC control (to suppress understeer tendency)
x When a large understeer tendency is determined, the traction control solenoid and stability control solenoid
valves are energized, switching the hydraulic circuits. At the same time, the pump motor is actuated to operate
the pump, supplying brake fluid pressure from the reservoir to the inner rear wheel cylinder. Also at this time,
the inlet solenoid valve of the outer front wheel is energized and the hydraulic circuit of this wheel is closed.
x After a pressure increase, brake fluid pressure is adjusted using the three pressure modes (reduction,
maintain, increase) so that the target wheel speed is obtained. (The following figure shows control during a left
turn during pressure increase mode.)
Traction control Stability control Pump
solenoid valve solenoid valve motor,
LFRR RFLR LFRR RFLR LF RF LR RR LF RF LR RR pump,
During
OFF ON
pressure OFF ON OFF ON OFF
(ope (clos OFF (closed) Operating
increase (open) (closed) (closed) (open) (open)
n) ed)
mode
During
OFF OFF
pressure OFF ON ON
OFF (closed) (ope (ope OFF (closed) Stopped
maintain (open) (closed) (closed)
n) n)
mode
During
OFF OFF ON OFF
pressure OFF ON ON OFF
OFF (closed) (ope (ope (ope (clos Operating
reductio (open) (closed) (closed) (closed)
n) n) n) ed)
n mode
04-15–11
TO MODEL INDEX

MASTER CYLINDER
P
TRACTION
CONTROL
SOLENOID DAMPER
VALVE CHAMBER
PUMP PUMP MOTOR
STABILITY RESERVOIR
CONTROL
SOLENOID CHECK
VALVE VALVE
INLET
SOLENOID
VALVE
FLOW
CONTROL
VALVE
OUTLET OUTLET INLET

RF LR RR LF
SOLENOID SOLENOID SOLENOID
VALVE VALVE PRESSURE VALVE
INCREASE
am2zzn0000053
End Of Sie
DSC CM PART FUNCTION
id041500101000
x The DSC CM makes calculations using signals input from each sensor, outputs a brake fluid pressure control
signal to the DSC HU to actuate DSC system functions and outputs an engine output control signal to the PCM.
x The DSC HU/CM controls the following functions:
Function Table
ABS control function x Controls brake fluid pressure when braking to maintain directional
stability, ensure steerability and reduce stopping distance.
Electronic brakeforce distribution (EBD) control x Constantly controls proper distribution of brake fluid pressure to the front
function and rear wheels according to vehicle load, road surface and vehicle
speed conditions to prevent early lock-up of the rear wheels.
TCS control function x Controls traction to within the road surface friction limit and according to
road and driving conditions to improve starting and acceleration
performance, and safety.
DSC control function x Suppresses strong over-steer and under-steer tendencies when turning
by controlling engine output and braking of each wheel to assure driving
safety.
CAN communication function x Outputs the vehicle speed signal and DSC system warning control data
via CAN lines.
04-15–12
TO MODEL INDEX

On-board diagnostic system x A function that allows important parts of the DSC control system to
perform self-diagnosis. In case a malfunction occurs, the warning lights
illuminate to alert the driver, and at the same time a DTC is stored in the
DSC HU/CM.
x When a malfunction is determined as a result of the on-board diagnostic
test, system control is suspended or limited to prevent any dangerous
situation while driving.
Automatic configuration function x When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or the engine is
started after the DSC HU/CM or DSC CM has been replaced, the DSC
CM reads data from the instrument cluster via CAN communication to
perform automatic configuration.
Block Diagram
INPUT CM INTERNAL CALCULATION OUTPUT
ABS WHEEL- WHEEL-SPEED

SPEED SENSOR CALCULATION
ESTIMATED VEHICLE PUMP

SPEED CALCULATION ABS MOTOR
CONTROL
AMOUNT
BRAKE SWITCH BRAKE OPERATING FRONT

CONDITION DETERMINATION SOLENOID
VALVE
PCM
ENGINE SPEED
ENGINE SPEED
ASSIMILATED
EBD REAR
CONTROL SOLENOID
THROTTLE THROTTLE OPENING
AMOUNT VALVE
OPENING ANGLE ANGLE DATA ASSIMILATED
OUTPUT TORQUE/ OUTPUT TORQUE/ TRACTION

TORQUE REDUCTION TORQUE RESUCTION CONTROL
INHIBITED INHIBITED DATA ASSIMILATED SOLENOID
VALVE
DSC OFF REQUIREMENT STABILITY

DSC OFF SWITCH
DETERMINED CONTROL
TCS
SOLENOID
CONTROL
EPS CONTROL MODULE VALVE
AMOUNT
STEERING ANGLE
STEERING ANGLE
CALCULATION
PCM
COMBINED SENSOR
YAW RATE YAW RATE

SENSOR CALCULATION
LATERAL-G
LATERAL-G
CALCULATION
SENSOR
DSC
DSC HU/CM CONTROL
AMOUNT
BRAKE FLUID MASTER CYLINDER
PRESSURE SENSOR FLUID PRESSURE CALCULATION
am2zzn0000117
End Of Sie
ABS CONTROL FUNCTION
id041500101100
x The ABS control system (same as vehicles with ABS), has independent front wheel control and unified control
(select low) for the rear wheels.
04-15–13
TO MODEL INDEX

Note
x Select low control: A control system in which the left and right vehicle wheel speeds are compared and
brake fluid pressure is controlled according to the wheel most likely to lock-up.
End Of Sie
EBD CONTROL FUNCTION
id041500101200
Outline
x EBD control has an independent control system for the front and rear wheels (same as vehicles with ABS)
which constantly and properly distributes brake fluid regardless of vehicle weight (number of passengers).
End Of Sie
TCS CONTROL OUTLINE
id041500101300
Outline
x TCS control actuates torque reduction through electronic throttle control, fuel cut and ignition timing control, as
well as using brake control to control traction.
Note
x Brake control: Brake fluid pressure from the hydraulic unit to the slipping driving wheel is increased,
operating the brake and preventing driving wheel slip.
Features
x The left and right wheels are controlled at the same time by electronic throttle control, fuel cut and ignition
timing control. Therefore, when the road surface friction coefficients differ between the left and right wheels,
proper torque reduction cannot be performed separately for each wheel. When this occurs, torque reduction is
performed by independent left and right wheel brake control, providing much stabler vehicle control.
STRUCTURE
Block Diagram
DSC HU/CM
CM HU
ABS WHEEL-SPEED SOLENOID CALIPER PISTON (LF)
SENSOR (LF) VALVE
ABS WHEEL-SPEED PUMP

MOTOR CALIPER PISTON (RF)
SENSOR (RF)
CPU
ABS WHEEL-SPEED BRAKE FLUID

SENSOR (LR) PRESSURE
SENSOR
ABS WHEEL-SPEED
PCM
SENSOR (RR)
EPS CONTROL COMBINED

MODULE SENSOR
am2zzn0000117
End Of Sie
TCS CONTROL OPERATION
id041500101400
x TCS control detects driving wheel spin based on the signals listed below, sends torque reduction request
signals to the PCM, and also controls the solenoid valves and pump motor in the DSC HU/CM.
— Vehicle wheel speed signals from the font and rear ABS wheel-speed sensors
— Engine torque signal from the PCM
— Steering angle signal from the EPS control module
— Yaw rate and lateral-G signals from the combined sensor
— Fluid pressure signal from the brake fluid pressure sensor (built into the DSC HU/CM)
End Of Sie
04-15–14
TO MODEL INDEX

DSC CONTROL OUTLINE
id041500101500
x While a vehicle normally turns safely in response to steering operation, there are instances when the limits of
tire lateral grip is surpassed due to road surface conditions or vehicle speed, and the influence of evasive
steering to avoid an accident or similar situations.
x Tires surpassing lateral grip exhibit one of the following conditions: Strong oversteer tendency: The rear wheels
are relatively losing their grip as compared to the front wheels Strong understeer tendency: The front wheels
are relatively losing their grip as compared to the rear wheels
x DSC operates at vehicle speeds of approx. 12.6 km/h {7.83 mph} or more in the conditions described above,
controlling engine output and wheel braking to suppress oversteer and understeer tendencies.
Vehicle Condition Determination

x The vehicle speed, steering angle, lateral-G and yaw rate are detected by the sensors and used in calculations
by the DSC HU/CM to determine the vehicle condition. Then, depending on the difference between the target
yaw rate, calculated with the values input from each sensor, and the value detected by the yaw rate sensor, an
oversteer or understeer tendency can be determined.
UNDERSTEER LINE OF TRAVEL
YAW MOMENTUM
TARGET YAW RATE PATH
OVERSTEER LINE OF TRAVEL
am2zzn0000053
Oversteer Tendency Determination

x When turning, if the actual vehicle yaw rate is larger than the target yaw rate (the yaw rate that should normally
be formed as determined by the steering angle and vehicle speed), it means that the vehicle is in or about to be
in a spin. Therefore the vehicle is determined to have an oversteer tendency.
Understeer Tendency Determination

x When turning, if the actual vehicle yaw rate is less than the target yaw rate (the yaw rate that should normally
be formed as determined by the steering angle and vehicle speed), it means that the vehicle is not properly
turning. Therefore the vehicle is determined to have an understeer tendency.
End Of Sie
DSC CONTROL OPERATION
id041500101600
x When the DSC HU/CM determines that the vehicle has a strong oversteer or understeer tendency, engine
output is lowered and, at the same time, it suppresses the yaw moment by affecting the braking of the front or
rear wheels to inhibit the oversteer or understeer tendency.
Oversteer Tendency Suppression

x When a large oversteer tendency is determined, braking is applied the outer front wheel according to the
degree of the tendency. As a result, a yaw moment is formed towards the outer side of the vehicle and the
oversteer tendency is suppressed.
04-15–15
TO MODEL INDEX
CORNERING TO RIGHT
OUTWARD YAW MOMENTUM
BRAKE FORCE FROM

HYDRAULIC BRAKES
YAW MOMENTUM
am2zzn0000053
Understeer Tendency Suppression

x When a large understeer tendency is determined, engine output is controlled and braking is applied to the inner
rear wheel according to the degree of the tendency. As a result, a yaw moment is formed towards the inner side
of the vehicle and the understeer tendency is suppressed.
CORNERING TO RIGHT
INWARD YAW MOMENTUM
BRAKE FORCE FROM ENGINE BRAKING
BRAKE FORCE FROM HYDRAULIC BRAKES
am2zzn0000053
End Of Sie
id041500101700
x The DSC HU/CM sends and receives data to and from other modules via the CAN system. Refer to BODY &
ACCESSORIES for a detailed explanation of the CAN system. (See 09-40-7 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK
(CAN) SYSTEM OUTLINE.)
Data sent
x Brake system condition
x Wheel speeds of all four wheels
x Brake system warning light illumination request
x ABS warning light illumination request
x DSC indicator light illumination request
x DSC OFF light illumination request
x Torque reduction request
Data received
x Engine condition
04-15–16
TO MODEL INDEX

x Engine torque
x Engine speed
x Accelerator pedal position
x Brake pedal position
x Brake switch information
x Gear/selector lever position
x Steering angle/steering angle sensor condition
x Transaxle type
x Transaxle status
x Engine specifications
x Tire size
x Vehicle specification
x Instrument cluster configuration information
End Of Sie
ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND ABS SENSOR ROTOR FUNCTION
NG: FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
id041500102800
x The ABS wheel-speed sensor detects and transmits the rotation condition of each wheel to the DSC HU/CM.
x The signal from the ABS wheel-speed sensors is the primary signal for DSC HU/CM control.
End Of Sie
ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND ABS SENSOR ROTOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id041500105000
x The construction and operation of the ABS wheel-speed sensor is the same as that of vehicles with ABS. (See
04-13-10 ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND ABS SENSOR ROTOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION.)
End Of Sie
COMBINED SENSOR FUNCTION
NG: COMBINED SENSOR
id041500101800
x A combined sensor, which integrates the yaw rate and lateral-G sensors, has been adopted.
x The combined sensor, located on the floor under the front seat (RH) detects the vehicle yaw rate (vehicle
turning angle speed) and lateral-G (vehicle speed increase), and transmits them to the DSC HU/CM.
End Of Sie
COMBINED SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id041500101900
x The combined sensor is located in the floor under the front seat (RH).
x The combined sensor, which integrates the yaw rate and lateral-G sensors, detects and calculates the vehicle
yaw and lateral-G rates, and transmits this to the DSC HU/CM via special CAN2 line between the sensor and
module.
x The yaw rate sensor detects a Coriolis force created by, and in proportion to, the rotation speed of a rotating
tuning fork.
x The lateral-G sensor detects an inertial force created by, and in proportion to, a G-force acting on a silicon
detection component.
Note
x Coriolis force: When an object on a rotating disc attempts to move toward the center of the disc, force is
produced at a right angle to the intended path of travel of the object. This results in the direction of
movement being unchanged from its original point of departure, and the object does not reach the center.
When looking at this effect from outside the disc, it appears as if a force is deflecting the object away from
the center. This appearance of force is called a Coriolis force, and the object actually advances in a
straight course.
04-15–17
TO MODEL INDEX
EXTERNAL VIEW SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
VEHICLE FRONT
COMBINED SENSOR DSC HU/CM
D AC
E H
CAN B AO
CAN
DRIVER A AL DRIVER
COMBINED SENSOR
EXTERNAL VIEW SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
VEHICLE FRONT
COMBINED SENSOR DSC HU/CM
A AC
D H
CAN C AO
CAN
DRIVER B AL DRIVER
COMBINED SENSOR
am2zzn0000109
End Of Sie
BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
NG: BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR
id041500102000
x The brake fluid pressure sensor detects the fluid pressure from the master cylinder and transmits it to the DSC
HU/CM.
End Of Sie
BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION
id041500102100
x The brake fluid pressure sensor is built into the DSC HU/CM. Therefore if there is any malfunction of the brake
fluid pressure sensor, replace the DSC HU/CM.
End Of Sie
DSC INDICATOR LIGHT FUNCTION
NG: DSC INDICATOR LIGHT
id041500102200
The DSC indicator light, built into the instrument cluster, informs the driver of the following vehicle conditions.
— DSC is operating. (Vehicle side-slip condition.)
— TCS is operating. (Drive wheel is slipping.)
— TCS or DSC system malfunction.
End Of Sie
DSC INDICATOR LIGHT OPERATION
id041500102300
x When the DSC system and CAN lines are normal, the DSC indicator light illuminates for approx. 3.0 s when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to check the light function. When the system is malfunctioning,
the DSC indicator light remains illuminated.
x When the DSC or TCS is operating (DSC has not been disabled by pressing the DSC OFF switch), the DSC
indicator light operates as follows:
DSC Indicator Light Operation

Item DSC indicator light
TCS, DSC not operating Not illuminated
TCS operating
Flashes (0.5 s intervals)
DSC operating
TCS, DSC system malfunction Illuminated
04-15–18
TO MODEL INDEX
DSC INDICATOR LIGHT
am2zzn0000117
End Of Sie
DSC OFF SWITCH, DSC OFF LIGHT FUNCTION
NG: DSC OFF SWITCH
id041500102600
x The DSC OFF switch, located on the dashboard, allows for optionally enabling/disabling the DSC control at
driver discretion.
x The DSC OFF light, built into the instrument cluster, informs the driver that DSC control has been disabled by
operation of the DSC OFF switch.
End Of Sie
DSC OFF SWITCH, DSC OFF LIGHT OPERATION
id041500102700
x When the DSC system and CAN lines are functionally normally, the DSC OFF light illuminates for approx. 1.8
s when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to check the light function.
x When the DSC OFF switch is pressed to disable DSC control, the DSC OFF light illuminates.
Note
x When releasing the DSC, continue to press the DSC OFF switch until the DSC OFF light illuminates.
04-15–19
TO MODEL INDEX
DSC OFF LIGHT
L.H.D. R.H.D.
DSC OFF SWITCH DSC OFF SWITCH
am2zzn0000117
End Of Sie
04-15–20
TO MODEL INDEX
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE 05
SECTION
Toc of SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00

OUTLINE MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC MECHANISM[F35M-R]. . . . . . 05-16A
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC MECHANISM[B65M-R] . . . . . 05-16B
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
CLUTCH[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . 05-10A [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17
CLUTCH[B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . 05-10B AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT
MANUAL TRANSAXLE MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18
[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A CVT(CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
MANUAL TRANSAXLE TRANSAXLE)[DJVA-EL] . . . . 05-19
[B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B CVT(CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSAXLE) SHIFT
MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Toc of SCT
05-00 OUTLINE
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–3
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE Clutch [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–3
FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–2 Clutch [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–3
Clutch [F35M-R]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–2 Manual Transaxle [F35M-R (AutoAlliance
Clutch [B65M-R]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–2 Thailand (AAT) manufactured
Manual Transaxle [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . 05-00–2 vehicles)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–4
Manual Transaxle [B65M-R]. . . . . . . . . 05-00–2 Manual Transaxle [F35M-R (Except
Manual Transaxle Shift Mechanism AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–2 manufactured vehicles)] . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–4
Manual Transaxle Shift Mechanism Manual Transaxle [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . 05-00–5
[B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–3 Manual Transaxle Shift Mechanism. . . . 05-00–5
Automatic Transaxle [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . 05-00–3 Automatic Transaxle [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . 05-00–5
Automatic Transaxle Shift Automatic Transaxle Shift
Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–3 Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–5
CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle) CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle)
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–3 [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–6
CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle) CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle)
Shift Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–3 Shift Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–6
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
d of Toc
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE ABBREVIATIONS
NG: TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
id050000100100

AD Analog to Digital
APP Accelerator Pedal Position
ATF Automatic Transaxle Fluid
B+ Battery Positive Voltage
CKP
Crankshaft Position Sensor
sensor
CM Control Module
CVT Continuously Variable Transaxle
DC Drive Cycle
DLC Data Link Connector
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
05-00–1
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
EC-AT Electronically Controlled Automatic Transaxle
ECT Engine Coolant Temperature
EEPRO Electronic Erasable Programmable Read Only
M Memory
EGR Exhaust Gas Recirculation
GND Ground
HU Hydraulic Unit
IG Ignition
KOEO Key On Engine Off
KOER Key On Engine Running
MAF Mass Air Flow
MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
OBD On-board Diagnostic
PCM Powertrain Control Module
RAM Random Access Memory
ROM Read Only Memory
SS Sport and Slope
TCC Torque Converter Clutch
TCM Transaxle Control Module
TFT Transaxle Fluid Temperature
TR Transaxle Range
VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor
1GR First Gear
2GR Second Gear
3GR Third Gear
4GR Fourth Gear
End Of Sie
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE FEATURES
id050000100200
Clutch [F35M-R]
Improved operability x Hydraulic clutch control mechanism adopted
Clutch [B65M-R]
Improved operability x Hydraulic clutch control mechanism adopted
Manual Transaxle [F35M-R]

x Linked, double-cone synchronizer mechanism adopted for 1st and 2nd gears
x Double-ball construction detent balls adopted (small balls positioned on the backside of the
balls inserted in the rod end)
Improved operability x Optimal control rod end load characteristics
x Special surface finish (bushings with teflon coating for low friction resistance adopted) used
on shafts of linkage parts (shift rod, crank lever, control rod)
x Optimal positioning of reverse link support/leverage points
Improved reliability x Double engagement prevention mechanism (interlock mechanism) adopted
Mis-shift prevention x Cam-type reverse lock-out mechanism adopted
Manual Transaxle [B65M-R]

x A two shaft type, five-speed B65M-R manual transaxle adopted
x All gear wheels are helical toothed, synchronised(except reverse gear) and run in plain
Improved operability
bearings
x Double-cone synchronizer mechanism adopted for 1st and 2nd gears
Improved serviceability x There is no need to change the oil
Manual Transaxle Shift Mechanism [F35M-R]

x A cable type operation system adopted
Mis-shift prevention
x Reverse lockout mechanism adopted
05-00–2
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Manual Transaxle Shift Mechanism [B65M-R]
Mis-shift prevention x A cable type operation system adopted
Automatic Transaxle [FN4A-EL]

x Direct electric shift control adopted
x Feedback control system adopted
Superior shift quality
x Centrifugal balance clutch chamber adopted
x Engine-transaxle total control system adopted
High efficiency,
x Miniature trochoid gear oil pump with torque converter direct drive adopted
compactness, lightweight
Improved reliability x Variable resistor type TR switch has been adopted
x Control feature for climbing/descending hills adopted, improving driveability when climbing/
Improved driveability
descending
Automatic Transaxle Shift Mechanism

x A key interlock system has been adopted
x A shift-lock system has been adopted
CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle) [DJVA-EL]

x CVT adopted which enables smooth shifting without any steps in drive force
Power performance
x Automatic shift control adopted which enables maintenance of acceleration at maximum
improvement
engine output speed
x Automatic shift control adopted which enables driving in optimum engine performance and
efficiency range
Improved fuel economy
x Neutral control adopted which reduces engine load while stopped and loss caused by torque
converter drag
CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle) Shift Mechanism

x A key interlock system has been adopted
x A shift-lock system has been adopted
End Of Sie
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE SPECIFICATIONS
id050000100600
Clutch [F35M-R]
Item Specifications
Clutch control Hydraulic
Spring type Diaphragm
Clutch cover
Set load (N {kgf, lbf}) 4315 {440.0, 970.1}
Clutch disc
Inner diameter (mm {in}) 132 {5.20}
Type Suspended
Clutch pedal Pedal ratio 5.54
Full stroke (mm {in}) 125 {4.92}
Clutch master cylinder inner diameter (mm {in}) 19.05 {0.7500}
Clutch release cylinder inner diameter (mm {in}) 19.05 {0.7500}
European (L.H.D. U.K.) specs.: SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3 or
Clutch fluid type DOT-4
Australian, General (L.H.D.) specs.: SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3
Clutch [B65M-R]
Item Specifications
Clutch control Hydraulic
Clutch cover Spring type Diaphragm
Type Suspended
Clutch pedal Pedal ratio 5.54
Full stroke (mm {in}) 135 {5.31}
Clutch master cylinder inner diameter (mm {in}) 19.05 {0.7500}
Clutch fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
05-00–3
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Manual Transaxle [F35M-R (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)]
Item Specifications
Engine type ZJ ZY
Forward Synchromesh
Shift assist
Reverse Selective sliding and synchromesh
1GR 3.416
2GR 1.842
3GR 1.290
Gear ratio
4GR 0.972
5GR 0.820
Reverse 3.214
Final gear ratio 4.388
Grade API service GL-4 or GL-5
All season SAE 75W-90
Viscosity
Oil Above 10qC {50qF} SAE 80W-90
Capacity
(L {US qt, Imp qt}) 2.91 {3.07, 2.56}
(approx. quantity)
Manual Transaxle [F35M-R (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)]

Item Specifications
Engine type ZJ ZY
Forward Synchromesh
Shift assist
Reverse Selective sliding and synchromesh
1GR 3.416
2GR 1.842
3GR 1.290
Gear ratio
4GR 0.972
5GR 0.775
Reverse 3.214
Grade API service GL-4 or GL-5
All season SAE 75W-90
Viscosity
Type A*1 Above 10qC {50qF} SAE 80W-90
Capacity
(L {US qt, Imp qt}) 3.04 {3.21, 2.67}
Oil (approx. quantity)
Grade API service GL-4
Viscosity SAE 75W-80
Type B*2
Capacity
(L {US qt, Imp qt}) 3.04 {3.21, 2.67}
(approx. quantity)
*1 *2
: Applied VIN (assumed) : Applied VIN (assumed)
JMZ DE1352*# 100001—JMZ DE1352*# 121497 JMZ DE1352*# 121498—
JMZ DE13J2*# 100001—JMZ DE13J2*# 121490 JMZ DE13J2*# 121491—
JMZ DE13K2*# 100001—JMZ DE13K2*# 121459 JMZ DE13K2*# 121460—
JMZ DE1452*# 100001—JMZ DE1452*# 228626 JMZ DE1452*# 228627—
JMZ DE14J2*# 100001—JMZ DE14J2*# 228543 JMZ DE14J2*# 228544—
JMZ DE14K2*# 100001—JMZ DE14K2*# 228631 JMZ DE14K2*# 228632—
JMZ DE13J20# 100001—JMZ DE13J20# 121489 JMZ DE13J20# 121490—
JMZ DE13K20# 100001—JMZ DE13K20# 121496 JMZ DE13K20# 121497—
JMZ DE14520# 100001—JMZ DE14520# 228628 JMZ DE14520# 228629—
JMZ DE14J20# 100001—JMZ DE14J20# 228634 JMZ DE14J20# 228635—
JMZ DE14K20# 100001—JMZ DE14K20# 228525 JMZ DE14K20# 228526—
JM0 DE10Y1*0 100001—JM0 DE10Y1*0 134545 JM0 DE10Y1*0 134546—
JM7 DE10J1*0 100001—JM7 DE10J1*0 135053 JM7 DE10J1*0 135054—
JM7 DE10Y1*0 100001—JM7 DE10Y1*0 134566 JM7 DE10Y1*0 134567—
05-00–4
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Manual Transaxle [B65M-R]
Item Specifications
Forward Synchromesh
Shift assist
Reverse Selective sliding
1GR 3.583
2GR 1.925
3GR 1.281
Gear ratio
4GR 0.951
5GR 0.756
Reverse 3.620
Type WSD-M2C200-C
Oil Capacity
(L {US qt, Imp qt}) 2.3 {2.4, 2.0}
(approx. quantity)
Manual Transaxle Shift Mechanism

Item Specifications
Transaxle type F35M-R B65M-R
Transaxle control Floor-shift
Operation system Cable
Automatic Transaxle [FN4A-EL]

Item Specifications
Engine type ZY
1GR 2.816
2GR 1.553
Gear ratio 3GR 1.000
4GR 0.695
Reverse 2.279
Type ATF M-V
ATF Capacity
(L {US qt, lmp qt}) 7.0 {7.4, 6.1}
(Approx. quantity)
Torque converter stall torque ratio 2.25
Forward clutch 4/4
Hydraulic system 3-4 clutch 3/3
(Number of drive/driven gear plates) Reverse clutch 2/2
Low and reverse brake 5/5
Servo diameter
Band servo (mm {in}) 64.6 {2.54}
(Piston outer dia.)
Front sun gear 49
Front planetary gear
Front pinion gear 20
(Number of teeth)
Front internal gear 89
Rear sun gear 43
Rear planetary gear
Rear pinion gear 27
(Number of teeth)
Rear internal gear 98
Primary gear (number of teeth) 86
Secondary gear (number of teeth) 82
Output gear (number of teeth) 20
Ring gear (number of teeth) 87
Automatic Transaxle Shift Mechanism

Item Specifications
Transaxle type FN4A-EL
05-00–5
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle) [DJVA-EL]
Item Specifications
Engine type ZJ
Forward 2.386—0.426
Gear ratio
Reverse 2.505
Type Mobil CVTF 3320
CVT fluid Capacity (L {US qt, lmp
6.7 {7.1, 5.9}
(Approx. quantity) qt})
Torque converter stall torque ratio 1.88
Hydraulic system Forward clutch 3/3
(Number of drive/driven gear
plates) Reverse brake 3/3
Sun gear 40
Planetary gear Pinion gear No.1 18
(Number of teeth) Pinion gear No.2 17
Internal gear 82
Reduction drive gear (number of teeth) 29
Reduction driven gear (number of teeth) 43
Counter gear (number of teeth) 21
Differential ring gear (number of teeth) 76
CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle) Shift Mechanism

Item Specifications
Transaxle type DJVA-EL
End Of Sie
05-00–6
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [FN4A-EL]
05-02A ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [FN4A-EL]

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM DTC Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–3
OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–1 Fail-Safe Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–6
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System KOEO/KOER Self-test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–7
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–1 Freeze Frame Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–7
MALFUNCTION INDICATION FUNCTION MEMORY FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . 05-02A–9
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–2 PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION
MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–9
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–2 Monitor Item Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–9
Malfunction Detection Function . . . . . . 05-02A–2 Simulation Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–10
DTC 7-digit Code Definition . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–2 Simulation Item Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–10
DTC Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–2 DLC-2 OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–10
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
ON-BOARD
NG: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
id050218100100
x The OBD system has the following functions:
— Malfunction detection function: detects malfunctions of the input/output devices and system components of
the ATX.
— Fail-safe function: fixes the output device function and input value of the sensors/switches to ensure
minimum vehicle drivability when a malfunction is detected.
— Memory function: stores the DTC when a malfunction is detected.
— PID data monitoring function: monitors the input/output signal and calculated value of the PCM and sends
the monitoring data to the scan tool.
— Simulation function: Allows override operation of simulation items for input/output system parts preset in the
PCM.
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Block Diagram
PCM
OBD SYSTEM
HOLD INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION
LIGHT
INDICATION
FUNCTION
MIL
TESTER
MEMORY COMMUNICATION DLC-2
FUNCTION FUNCTION
INTEGRATED
DIAGNOSTIC
SOFTWARE (IDS)
MALFUNCTION PID DATA
MONITORING SIMULATION
DETECTION
FUNCTION FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FAIL-SAFE
FUNCTION
INPUT OUTPUT
PARTS TRANSAXLE CONTROL SYSTEM PARTS
am2zzn0000049
05-02A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

End Of Sie
MALFUNCTION INDICATION FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]
id050218100500
x The malfunction indication function illuminates the MIL and/or flashes HOLD indicator light when it determines
transaxle has a malfunction.
End Of Sie
MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]
id050218100300
Malfunction Detection Function
x In the malfunction detection function, the PCM detects malfunctions in the transaxle while driving.
x When vehicle driving conditions correspond with a preset malfunction detection condition, the PCM determines
that the transaxle has a malfunction and stores the corresponding DTC.
x When a malfunction is detected, stored DTCs can be retrieved using the scan tool connected to the DLC-2.
DTC 7-digit Code Definition

P 0 0 1 1:0 0
00: No sub type information
Indicates subgroup
Powertrain (P code)
5: Vehicle speed, idle control, and auxiliary input
7: Transmission
8: Transmission
1: Manufacturer controlled

P: Powertrain
am2zzn0000140
DTC Table
X: Applicable
HOLD
Monitor Memory
DTC No. Condition MIL indicator DC
item function
light
P0706:00 TR switch circuit range/performance ON Flash 2 CCM X
P0707:00 TR switch circuit low input ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0708:00 TR switch circuit high input ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0711:00 TFT sensor circuit range/performance ON OFF 2 CCM X
P0712:00 TFT sensor circuit low input ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0713:00 TFT sensor circuit high input ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0715:00 Input/turbine speed sensor circuit malfunction ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0720:00 VSS circuit malfunction ON Flash 2 CCM X
P0731:00 Gear 1 incorrect ratio OFF Flash 1 CCM X
P0741:00 TCC stuck off OFF Flash 1 CCM X
P0742:00 TCC stuck on OFF Flash 1 CCM X
P0745:00 Pressure control solenoid malfunction OFF Flash 1 CCM X
P0751:00 Shift solenoid A stuck off ON Flash 2 CCM X
P0752:00 Shift solenoid A stuck on ON Flash 2 CCM X
05-02A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

HOLD
Monitor Memory
DTC No. Condition MIL indicator DC
item function
light
P0753:00 Shift solenoid A electrical malfunction ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0756:00 Shift solenoid B stuck off ON Flash 2 CCM X
P0757:00 Shift solenoid B stuck on ON Flash 2 CCM X
P0758:00 Shift solenoid B electrical malfunction ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0761:00 Shift solenoid C stuck off ON Flash 2 CCM X
P0762:00 Shift solenoid C stuck on ON Flash 2 CCM X
P0763:00 Shift solenoid C electrical malfunction ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0766:00 Shift solenoid D stuck off ON Flash 2 CCM X
P0767:00 Shift solenoid D stuck on OFF Flash 2 CCM X
P0768:00 Shift solenoid D electrical malfunction ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0771:00 Shift solenoid E stuck off ON Flash 2 CCM X
P0772:00 Shift solenoid E stuck on ON Flash 2 CCM X
P0773:00 Shift solenoid E electrical malfunction ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0883:00 TCM B+ high ON Flash 1 CCM X
P0894:00 Transaxle component slipping OFF Flash 1 CCM X
P1566:00 TCM B+ low OFF Flash 1 CCM X
P1783:00 ATF high oil temperature malfunction OFF Flash 1 CCM X
DTC Detection Condition

DTC No. On-board diagnostic function Detection condition
x The PCM detects no position/range signal for 100 s when the
P0706:00 TR switch circuit range/performance — Vehicle speed: more than 20 km/h {12 mph}
— Engine speed: more than 530 rpm
— Input voltage from the TR switch: more than 0.49 V
x The PCM detects that input voltage from the TR switch is less than
0.49 V for 100 s when the following conditions are met.
P0707:00 TR switch circuit low input
— Vehicle speed: more than 20 km/h {12 mph}
x The PCM detects that input voltage from the TR switch is more
than 4.78 V for 100 s when the following conditions are met.
P0708:00 TR switch circuit high input
x The PCM detects that input voltage from the TFT sensor is less
than 0.03 V when the following conditions are met.
— Time since engine start: more than 180 s
P0711:00 TFT sensor circuit range/performance
— Vehicle is driven for 90 s or more at vehicle speed between
25—59 km/h {15—36 mph}, and then 60 km/h {37 mph} or more
for 60 s or more
x The PCM detects that input voltage from the TFT sensor is less
P0712:00 TFT sensor circuit low input
than 0.05 V for 150 s at vehicle speed 20 km/h {12 mph} or more.
x The PCM detects that input voltage from the TFT sensor is more
P0713:00 TFT sensor circuit high input
than 4.66 V for 150 s at vehicle speed 20 km/h {12 mph} or more.
Input/turbine speed sensor circuit x The PCM detects no signal from the input/turbine speed sensor at
P0715:00
malfunction vehicle speed 41 km/h {25 mph} or more.
x The PCM detects no signal from the VSS when the following
conditions are met.
P0720:00 VSS circuit malfunction — Engine coolant temperature: more than 60 qC {140 qF}
— D, S or L range
— Turbine speed: more than 1,500 rpm
x The PCM detects that revolution ratio of the input revolution to
output revolution is less than 2.185 four times when the following
P0731:00 Gear 1 incorrect ratio conditions are met.
— 1GR
— Throttle opening angle: 3.17%
P0732:00 Gear 2 incorrect ratio output revolution in 2GR is more than 2.185 or less than 1.277
three times.
05-02A–3
TO MODEL INDEX

output revolution is between 1.404—1.704 when the following
conditions are met.
— 3GR
— TCC operation: Off
P0733:00 Gear 3 incorrect ratio x The PCM detects that revolution ratio of the input revolution to
output revolution is less than 0.848 when the following conditions
are met.
— 3GR
— Vehicle speed: more than threshold (changes by throttle
opening angle)
output revolution is more than 1.277 or less than 0.57 when the
— 4GR
P0734:00 Gear 4 incorrect ratio x The PCM detects that revolution ratio of the input revolution to
conditions are met.
— 4GR
x The PCM detects that difference between the engine revolution
and turbine revolution is more than 100 rpm when the following
conditions are met.
P0741:00 TCC stuck off — 4GR
— Vehicle speed: between 60—100 km/h {38.0—62.1 mph}
— TCC operation: On
— Shift solenoid A duty ratio: more than 99.2%
and turbine revolution is less than 50 rpm when the following
conditions are met.
— 4GR
P0742:00 TCC stuck on
— Throttle opening angle: less than 0.78%, 3.125—10.1% or more
than 10.1%
x The PCM detects that output voltage to the pressure control
P0745:00 Pressure control solenoid malfunction solenoid is stuck at 0 V or B+ when the solenoid valve operates
according to PCM calculation.
conditions are met.
P0751:00 Shift solenoid A stuck off
— 4GR
x The PCM detects that turbine revolution is more than 187.5 rpm
P0752:00 Shift solenoid A stuck on
with the vehicle stopped in D range.
x The PCM detects that output voltage to the shift solenoid A is stuck
P0753:00 Shift solenoid A electrical malfunction at 0 V or B+ when the solenoid valve operates according to PCM
calculation.
conditions are met.
P0756:00 Shift solenoid B stuck off
— D range
— 1GR
05-02A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

output revolution in 2GR is more than 2.185 or less than 1.277
three times.
P0757:00 Shift solenoid B stuck on output revolution is between 0.91—1.09 when the following
conditions are met.
— 4GR
x The PCM detects that output voltage to the shift solenoid B is stuck
P0758:00 Shift solenoid B electrical malfunction at 0 V or B+ when the solenoid valve operates according to PCM
calculation.
conditions are met.
— 1GR
P0761:00 Shift solenoid C stuck off
output revolution in 2GR is more than 2.185 or less than 1.277
three times.
conditions are met.
P0762:00 Shift solenoid C stuck on
— 3GR
x The PCM detects that output voltage to the shift solenoid C is
P0763:00 Shift solenoid C electrical malfunction stuck at 0 V or B+ when the solenoid valve operates according to
PCM calculation.
x The PCM detects that vehicle speed is more than 27 km/h {17
mph} when the following conditions are met.
P0766:00 Shift solenoid D stuck off
— Revolution ratio of the input revolution to output revolution is
more than 1.277 or less than 0.57 in 4GR
output revolution is less than 0.848 when the following conditions
are met.
P0767:00 Shift solenoid D stuck on — 3GR
— Vehicle speed: more than threshold (changes by throttle
opening angle)
x The PCM detects that output voltage to the shift solenoid D is
P0768:00 Shift solenoid D electrical malfunction stuck at 0 V or B+ when the solenoid valve operates according to
PCM calculation.
and turbine revolution is more than 100 rpm when the following
conditions are met.
P0771:00 Shift solenoid E stuck off — 4GR
— Vehicle speed: between 60—100 km/h {38.0—62.1 mph}
— TCC operation: On
— Shift solenoid A duty ratio: more than 99.2%
and turbine revolution is less than 50 rpm when the following
conditions are met.
— 4GR
P0772:00 Shift solenoid E stuck on
— Throttle opening angle: less than 0.78%, 3.125—10.1% or more
than 10.1%
x The PCM detects that output voltage to the shift solenoid E is stuck
P0773:00 Shift solenoid E electrical malfunction at 0 V or B+ when the solenoid valve operates according to PCM
calculation.
P0883:00 TCM B+ high x The PCM detects that battery voltage is more than 16.01 V.
05-02A–5
TO MODEL INDEX

x The PCM detects that turbine revolution is more than 187 rpm
when the following conditions are met.
— Vehicle stopped (brake pedal is depressed)
P0894:00 Transaxle component slipping
— Accelerator pedal is fully released
— Engine running at idle
— Selector lever position moved to D range from N position
x The PCM detects that battery voltage is less than threshold
P1566:00 TCM B+ low
(changes by ATF temperature) at engine speed 500 rpm or more.
x The PCM detects that ATF temperature is more than 149.5qC
{301.1 qF} when the following conditions are met.
P1783:00 ATF high oil temperature malfunction
— TFT sensor circuit malfunction: not stored
— Input voltage from the TFT sensor is more than 0.06 V
Fail-Safe Function
x In the fail-safe function, minimum vehicle drivability is obtained by changing the signals that are determined to
be malfunctions by the malfunction detection function to the preset values, and limiting PCM control.
DTC No. On-board diagnostic function Fail-safe TCC
x Inhibits 1GR and 4GR
P0706:00 TR switch circuit range/performance Enabled
x Inhibits feedback correction
P0707:00 TR switch circuit low input Enabled
P0708:00 TR switch circuit high input Enabled
P0711:00 TFT sensor circuit range/performance N/A Disabled
x Switch the shift pattern to high temperature mode
P0712:00 TFT sensor circuit low input Enabled
P0713:00 TFT sensor circuit high input Enabled
Input/turbine speed sensor circuit x Inhibits shifting to 4GR from 3GR
P0715:00 Disabled
malfunction x Inhibits feedback correction
P0720:00 VSS circuit malfunction x Inhibits feedback correction Enabled
x Inhibits 1GR
P0731:00 Gear 1 incorrect ratio Enabled
x Inhibits 2GR
P0732:00 Gear 2 incorrect ratio x Maximizes line pressure Enabled
P0733:00 Gear 3 incorrect ratio x Inhibits feedback correction Enabled
x Inhibits 4GR
P0734:00 Gear 4 incorrect ratio x Maximizes line pressure Enabled
x Maximizes line pressure
P0741:00 TCC stuck off Disabled
P0742:00 TCC stuck on Disabled
P0745:00 Pressure control solenoid malfunction Enabled
x Inhibits 4GR
P0751:00 Shift solenoid A stuck off x Maximizes line pressure Disabled
x Inhibits 1GR, 2GR and 3GR
P0752:00 Shift solenoid A stuck on Enabled
x Inhibits 4GR
P0753:00 Shift solenoid A electrical malfunction x Maximizes line pressure Disabled
x Inhibits shifting to 3GR from 2GR
P0756:00 Shift solenoid B stuck off x Inhibits shifting to 4GR from 3GR Enabled
P0757:00 Shift solenoid B stuck on x Maximizes line pressure Enabled
05-02A–6
TO MODEL INDEX

DTC No. On-board diagnostic function Fail-safe TCC
x Inhibits shifting to 3GR from 2GR
P0758:00 Shift solenoid B electrical malfunction x Inhibits shifting to 4GR from 3GR Enabled
P0761:00 Shift solenoid C stuck off x Maximizes line pressure Enabled
P0762:00 Shift solenoid C stuck on x Maximizes line pressure Enabled
P0763:00 Shift solenoid C electrical malfunction x Maximizes line pressure Enabled
x Inhibits 4GR
P0766:00 Shift solenoid D stuck off x Maximizes line pressure Enabled
P0767:00 Shift solenoid D stuck on x Maximizes line pressure Disabled
x Inhibits 4GR
P0768:00 Shift solenoid D electrical malfunction x Maximizes line pressure Disabled
P0771:00 Shift solenoid E stuck off Disabled
x Inhibits 1GR
P0772:00 Shift solenoid E stuck on x Maximizes line pressure Disabled
P0773:00 Shift solenoid E electrical malfunction Disabled
P0883:00 TCM B+ high Enabled
P0894:00 Transaxle component slipping x Maximizes line pressure Enabled
P1566:00 TCM B+ low Enabled
P1783:00 ATF high oil temperature malfunction Enabled
KOEO/KOER Self-test
x On-board diagnosis is performed using the flow pre-set in the PCM, and according to the test execute
command sent to the PCM from the external tester.
x If a malfunction is detected as a result of the on-board diagnosis, a DTC is recorded in the PCM.
x Refer to the self test table for DTCs corresponding to the self test function.
KOEO (Key ON, Engine Off) self-test

x The KOEO self test is a powertrain control system self-diagnosis, performed when the ignition is switched to
ON and the engine is stopped. A KOEO self test begins when the connected IDS sends an execute
command to the PCM.
x As the KOEO self test is performed, the PCM performs the inspection for set DTCs and if a malfunction is
detected, the DTC is displayed on the IDS.
KOER (Key ON, Engine Running) self-test

x The KOER self test is a powertrain control system self-diagnosis, performed when the ignition is switched to
ON and the engine is idling. A KOER self test begins when the connected IDS sends an execute command
to the PCM.
x As the KOER self test is performed, the PCM performs the inspection for set DTCs and if a malfunction is
detected the DTC is displayed on the IDS.
Freeze Frame Data

Freeze frame data
x The freeze frame data consists of data for vehicle and engine control system operation conditions when
malfunctions in the engine control system are detected and stored in the PCM.
05-02A–7
TO MODEL INDEX

x Freeze frame data is stored at the instant the malfunction indicator lamp illuminates, and only a part of the DTC
data is stored.
x For the freeze frame data, if there are several malfunctions in the engine control system, the data for the
malfunction which occurred initially is stored. Thereafter, if a misfire or fuel injection control malfunction occurs,
data from the misfire or fuel injection control malfunction is written over the initially stored data. However, if the
initially stored freeze frame data is a misfire or fuel injection control malfunction, it is not overwritten.
Snapshot data
x The recording timing for the freeze frame data/snap shot data differs depending on the number of DTC drive
cycles.
— For a DTC with a drive cycle number 1, only the malfunction determination data is recorded.
— For a DTC with a drive cycle number 2, both the malfunction determination and undetermined data is
recorded.
Freeze frame data table

Corresponding
Freeze frame data
Unit Description PID data monitor
item
item
Open Loop/
Closed
Loop/OL-
FUELSYS1 Fuel system status FUELSYS
Drive/OL-
Fault/CL-
Fault
LOAD % Calculated engine load —
ECT qC { qF} Engine coolant temperature ECT
SFT1 % Short term fuel trim SHRTFT1
LFT1 % Long term fuel trim LONGFT1
MAP Pa {kgf/m2, Manifold absolute pressure MAP

psi}
VS KPH {MPH} Vehicle speed VSS
IAT qC { qF} Intake air temperature IAT
g/sec {lb/
MAF Mass airflow MAF
min}
TP % Throttle valve position No.1 TP1
RUNTM hh:mm:ss Time from engine start —
EGRPCT % Target EGR valve position SEGRP_DSD
EVAPPCT % Purge solenoid valve controlled value EVAPCP
WARMUPS — Number of warm-up cycle after DTC cleared —
CLRDIST Km {mile} Mileage after DTC cleared —
BARO Pa {kgf/m2, Barometric pressure —

psi}
CATTEMP11 qC { qF} Estimated catalytic converter temperature —
ALV % Engine load LOAD
TP_REL % Relative throttle position TP REL
TP_B % Throttle valve position No.2 TP2
APP_D % Accelerator pedal position No.1 APP1
APP_E % Accelerator pedal position No.2 APP2
TAC_PCT % Target throttle valve position ETC_DSD
Snapshot data table

Corresponding
Snapshot data
item
item
OL/CL/OL-
Drive/OL-
FUELSYS Fuel system status FUELSYS
Fault/CL-
Fault
05-02A–8
TO MODEL INDEX

Corresponding
Snapshot data
item
item
LOAD_C % Calculated engine load —
ECT qC { qF} Engine coolant temperature ECT
SHRTFT1 % Short term fuel trim SHRTFT1
LONGFT1 % Long term fuel trim LONGFT1
MAP Pa {kgf/m2, Manifold absolute pressure MAP

psi}
VSS KPH {MPH} Vehicle speed VSS
IAT qC { qF} Intake air temperature IAT
g/sec {lb/
MAF Mass airflow MAF
min}
EG_RUN_TIME — Time from engine start —
SEGRP_DSD % Target EGR valve position SEGRP DSD
EVAPCP % Purge solenoid valve controlled value EVAPCP
FLI % Fuel level in fuel tank —
CLR_CNT — Number of warm-up cycle after DTC cleared —
CLR_DIST Km {mile} Mileage after DTC cleared —
FTP Pa {kgf/m2, Fuel tank pressure —

psi}
BARO Pa {kgf/m2, Barometric pressure —

psi}
CATT11_DSD qC {qF} Estimated catalytic converter temperature —
LOAD % Engine load LOAD
EQ_RAT11_DSD — Target equivalence ratio (lambda) EQ_RAT11_DSD
TP REL % Relative throttle position TP REL
AAT qC {qF} Ambient air temperature —
ETC_DSD % Target throttle valve position ETC_DSD
End Of Sie
MEMORY FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]
id050218100400
x The memory function stores malfunction information detected in the malfunction detection function. Once
malfunction information is stored, the memory will not be cleared even when the ignition switch is turned off
(LOCK position) or the malfunction is repaired.
x The stored memory (malfunction information) can be cleared using the scan tool, or by disconnecting the
negative battery cable.
End Of Sie
PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]
id050218101000
x The PID mode allows access to certain data values, analog and digital input and output, calculations and
system state information.
Monitor Item Table

GEAR Gear commanded by module 1st/2nd/3rd/4th
Indicates number of high oil temperature mode (ATF temperature at 130 qC
HTM_CNT —
{266 qF} or more) operations
Indicates travel distance after operation of high oil temperature mode (ATF
HTM_DIS km {mile}
temperature at 130 qC {266 qF} or more)
LINEDES Target line pressure Pa {kgf/m2, psi}
05-02A–9
TO MODEL INDEX

LPS Pressure control solenoid control signal in PCM A
OSS Output shaft speed RPM
SSA/SS1 Shift solenoid A control signal in PCM %
SSB/SS2 Shift solenoid B control signal in PCM %
SSC/SS3 Shift solenoid C control signal in PCM %
SSD/SS4 Shift solenoid D control signal in PCM On/Off
SSE_SS5 Shift solenoid E control signal in PCM On/Off
TCS HOLD switch On/Off
TFT ATF temperature qC {qF}
TFTV ATF temperature signal voltage V
TR Transaxle range P/R/N/D/S/L
TR_SENS TR switch signal voltage V
TSS Input/turbine speed RPM
Simulation Function
x By using the scan tool, simulation items for input/output parts preset in the PCM can be optionally selected and
operated regardless of PCM control conditions.
Simulation Item Table
X: Available
Operation
Simulation item Applicable component Unit/Condition
IG ON Idling
LPS Pressure control solenoid control signal in PCM A X
SSA/SS1 Shift solenoid A control signal in PCM % X
SSB/SS2 Shift solenoid B control signal in PCM % X
SSC/SS3 Shift solenoid C control signal in PCM % X
SSD/SS4 Shift solenoid D control signal in PCM On/Off X
SSE_SS5 Shift solenoid E control signal in PCM On/Off X
End Of Sie
DLC-2 OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id050218100900
adopted.
been adopted for this connector. The connector has a 16-pin construction that includes the KLN, CAN_H,
CAN_L, GND1, GND2 and B+ terminals.
DLC-2
B+ CAN_L
KLN CAN_H GND2 GND1
am2zzn0000016
Terminal Function
KLN Serial communication terminal (malfunction diagnosis use)
CAN_L Serial communication terminal (Lo)
CAN_H Serial communication terminal (Hi)
End Of Sie
05-02A–10
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [DJVA-EL]
05-02B ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [DJVA-EL]

OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–1 DIAGNOSTIC DATA MEMORY FUNCTION
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–1 [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–10
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM MALFUNCTION INDICATION FUNCTION
MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–10
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–2 EXTERNAL TESTER COMMUNICATION
DTC 7-digit Code Definition . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–2 FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–10
DTC Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–3 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DTC Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–4 PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION
Drive Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–6 [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–11
Pending Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–7 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–11
Snap Shot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–7 PID/DATA Monitor Item Table . . . . . . . . 05-02B–11
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . 05-02B–7 SIMULATION FUNCTION
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–7 [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–11
Fail-safe Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–7 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–11
Emergency Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–10 Simulation Item Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02B–11
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
NG: ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
id050212280000
Features
x The OBD system adopted consisting of the following functions:
— Malfunction detection function
— Fail-safe function
— Diagnostic data memory function
— Malfunction indication function
— External tester communication function
— PID/DATA monitor function
— Simulation function
x AT warning light adopted
x DLC-2 adopted
x CAN adopted
05-02B–1
TO MODEL INDEX

Block Diagram
TCM
OBD SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION
INDICATION AT WARNING
FUNCTION LIGHT
TESTER
MEMORY
COMMUNICATION DLC-2
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
INTEGRATED
DIAGNOSTIC
SOFTWARE (IDS)
MALFUNCTION PID DATA
SIMULATION
DETECTION MONITORING
FUNCTION
FUNCTION FUNCTION
FAIL-SAFE
FUNCTION
INPUT PARTS TRANSAXLE CONTROL SYSTEM OUTPUT PARTS
am2zzn0000125
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id050212280100
Function
x In the malfunction detection function, the TCM detects malfunctions in the transaxle while driving.
x When vehicle driving conditions correspond with a preset malfunction detection condition, the TCM determines
that the transaxle has a malfunction and stores the corresponding DTC.
x When a malfunction is detected, stored DTCs can be retrieved using the scan tool connected to the DLC-2.
DTC 7-digit Code Definition

05-02B–2
TO MODEL INDEX
P 0 0 1 1:0 0
00: No sub type information
Indicates subgroup
Powertrain (P code) Network Electrical (U code)
6: Computer and auxiliary output 0: Network Electrical
7: Transmission 1: Network communication
8: Transmission
9: Transmission


P: Powertrain
am3zzn0000302
DTC Table
DTC No. Definition AT warning light DC Pending code
P0601:00 Flash ROM malfunction Illuminate 1 -
P0603:00 EEPROM malfunction Illuminate 1 -
P0604:00 RAM malfunction Illuminate 1 -
P0707:00 TR switch multi-input Illuminate 1 -
P0708:00 TR switch open circuit Illuminate 2 Available
P0711:00 TFT sensor function malfunction - 2 Available
P0712:00 TFT sensor short to GND Illuminate 1 -
P0713:00 TFT sensor open circuit, power supply short circuit Illuminate 1 -
P0715:00 Input/turbine speed sensor signal malfunction Illuminate 1 -
P0717:00 Input/turbine speed sensor signal not input Illuminate 1 -
P0720:00 Secondary pulley speed sensor signal malfunction Illuminate 1 -
P0722:00 Secondary pulley speed sensor signal not input Illuminate 1 -
P072A:00 Neutral control engagement malfunction - 2 Available
P072C:00 Down shift malfunction, up shift disabled - 2 Available
P073C:00 Up shift malfunction, down shift disabled - 2 Available
P0740:00 TCC solenoid open circuit, power supply short circuit Illuminate 1 -
P0741:00 Neutral control release malfunction - 2 Available
P0742:00 Clutch slippage - 2 Available
P0743:00 TCC solenoid short to GND Illuminate 1 -
P0793:00 Primary pulley speed sensor signal not input Illuminate 1 -
P0841:00 Oil pressure sensor function malfunction - 2 Available
P0842:00 Oil pressure sensor signal circuit short to GND Illuminate 1 -
Oil pressure sensor power supply circuit short to GND,
P0843:00 Illuminate 1 -
power supply short circuit
P0864:00 Grade sensor function malfunction Illuminate 1 -
Grade sensor signal circuit short to GND, open circuit,
power supply short circuit
Grade sensor power supply circuit short to GND, power
supply short circuit
P0882:00 Battery voltage low - 1 -
P0883:00 Battery voltage high - 1 -
P0973:00 Shift control solenoid No. 1 short to GND Illuminate 1 -
Shift control solenoid No. 1 open circuit, power supply
short circuit
05-02B–3
TO MODEL INDEX

DTC No. Definition AT warning light DC Pending code
P0976:00 Shift control solenoid No. 2 short to GND Illuminate 1 -
Shift control solenoid No. 2 open circuit, power supply
short circuit
P2714:00 Belt grip pressure malfunction - 2 Available
P2719:00 Belt grip pressure linear solenoid stuck Illuminate 1 -
P2720:00 Belt grip pressure linear solenoid short to GND Illuminate 1 -
Belt grip pressure linear solenoid open circuit, power
P2757:00 Stuck in TCC OFF - 2 Available
P2758:00 Stuck in TCC ON - 1 -
TCC engage solenoid open circuit, power supply short
circuit
P2764:00 TCC engage solenoid short to GND Illuminate 1 -
U0073:00 Control module communication bus off Illuminate 1 -
U0100:00 Lost communication with PCM Illuminate 1 -
U0121:00 Lost communication with ABS HU/CM Illuminate 1 -
DTC Detection Condition

DTC No. Definition Detection condition
x Condition: TCM communication normal
P0601:00 Flash ROM malfunction x Status: Detects internal flash ROM malfunction
x Period: Confirmed 1 time
P0603:00 EEPROM malfunction x Status: Detects check sum value error
P0604:00 RAM malfunction x Status: Detects RAM read/write malfunction
x Condition: TCM normal during engine rotation
P0707:00 TR switch multi-input x Status: Detects TR switch multiple input
x Period: Confirmed 5 times in 2 s or more
x Status: Detects no output of TR switch at vehicle speed of 30 km/h
P0708:00 TR switch open circuit
{19 mph} or higher
x Condition: While driving in D range or R position with engine
rotating
P0711:00 TFT sensor function malfunction
x Status: Detects no change in CVT fluid temperature status
x Period: Confirmed 1 time continuously for 10 min or more
P0712:00 TFT sensor short to GND x Status: Detects short to GND in oil temperature sensor system
x Condition: TCM communication normal while engine rotates in
TFT sensor open circuit, power supply warm-up condition
P0713:00
short circuit x Status: Detects open or short circuit in TFT sensor system
Input/turbine speed sensor signal
P0715:00 x Status: AD value not within specification
malfunction
x Period: Confirmed 300 times
Input/turbine speed sensor signal not x Status: input/turbine speed sensor signal not input during
P0717:00
input secondary pulley speed sensor 6-pulse detection
Secondary pulley speed sensor signal
P0720:00 x Status: AD value not within specification
malfunction
Secondary pulley speed sensor signal x Status: secondary pulley speed sensor signal not input during
P0722:00
not input input/turbine speed sensor 30-pulse detection
05-02B–4
TO MODEL INDEX

x Condition: Engine rotating while in D range
x Status: After engagement control implemented, no engagement
P072A:00 Neutral control engagement malfunction
detected even after specified time or more has elapsed
x Period: Confirmed continuously for 2 s
x Condition: During constant driving with accelerator opening angle
at 20% or more and vehicle speed of 15 km/h {9.3 mph} or more
Down shift malfunction, up shift
P072C:00 x Status: Detects no acceleration to target engine speed during
disabled
acceleration
x Condition: During constant driving with accelerator opening angle
at 20% or more and vehicle speed of 15 km/h {9.3 mph} or more
Up shift malfunction, down shift
P073C:00 x Status: Detects no deceleration to target engine speed during
disabled
deceleration
x Condition: TCC solenoid signal not operating while TCM is normal
TCC solenoid open circuit, power x Status: Detects open or short circuit in TCC signal solenoid
P0740:00
supply short circuit system
x Period: Confirmed 1 time in 0.5 s or more
x Condition: Engine rotating while in D range
x Status: If specified time or more has elapsed after release control
implemented. Or input engine speed of 100 rpm or less is detected
P0741:00 Neutral control release malfunction
after difference of 100 rpm or less is detected between target input
engine and actual input engine speed
x Period: Confirmed continuously for 500 ms
x Condition: TCC is off while engine is rotating in D range
P0742:00 Clutch slippage x Status: Detects forward clutch, reverse brake slippage
x Period: Confirmed continuously for 200 ms
x Condition: TCC solenoid signal not operating while TCM is normal
P0743:00 TCC solenoid short to GND x Status: Detects short to GND in TCC solenoid system
Primary pulley speed sensor signal not x Status: Primary pulley speed sensor signal not input during
P0793:00
input secondary pulley speed sensor 4-pulse detection
x Condition: Warm-up completed while engine speed is 1,500 rpm
Oil pressure sensor function or more
P0841:00
malfunction x Status: Detects no change in oil pressure
x Period: Confirmation by detection every 5,000 ms
Oil pressure sensor signal circuit short
P0842:00 x Status: Detects short circuit in signal circuit
to GND
x Period: Confirmed 100 times in 0.1 s or more
Oil pressure sensor power supply circuit
P0843:00 x Status: Open or short circuit detected in power supply circuit
short to GND, power supply short circuit
x Period: Confirmed 100 times in 0.1 s or more
x Status: Detects no change in grade sensor value during
P0864:00 Grade sensor function malfunction
deceleration
Grade sensor signal circuit short to
x Status: Detects GND short or open circuit in signal circuit
P0865:00 GND, open circuit, power supply short
Detects short circuit in signal circuit and power supply
circuit
x Period: Confirmed 5 times continuously for 2 s or more
Grade sensor power supply circuit short x Status: Detects GND short in power supply circuit
P0866:00
to GND, power supply short circuit Detects short circuit in power supply circuit and power supply
x Period: Confirmed 100 times continuously for 0.1 s or more
x Condition: TCM communication normal while engine is idling
P0882:00 Battery voltage low x Status: Detects terminal B+ voltage of 9.05 V or less
x Condition: TCM communication normal while engine is idling
P0883:00 Battery voltage high x Status: Detects terminal B+ voltage of 18.00 V or higher
x Condition: During signal output from shift control solenoid No.1
Shift control solenoid No. 1 short to while TCM is normal
P0973:00
GND x Status: Detects short to GND in shift control solenoid No.1
05-02B–5
TO MODEL INDEX

x Condition: During no signal output from shift control solenoid No.1
Shift control solenoid No. 1 open circuit, while TCM is normal
P0974:00
power supply short circuit x Status: Detects open or short circuit in shift control solenoid No.1
x Condition: During signal output from shift control solenoid No.2
Shift control solenoid No. 2 short to while TCM is normal
P0976:00
GND x Status: Detects short to GND in shift control solenoid No.2
x Condition: During no signal output from shift control solenoid No.2
Shift control solenoid No. 2 open circuit, while TCM is normal
P0977:00
power supply short circuit x Status: Detects open or short circuit in shift control solenoid No.2
x Condition: No change in accelerator opening angle while engine is
rotating
P2714:00 Belt grip pressure malfunction x Status: Detects oil pressure sensor value as higher than target oil
pressure
x Period: Confirmed 3 s continuously
x Status: Detects feedback current in relation to electrical current
P2719:00 Belt grip pressure linear solenoid stuck
command value of belt grip pressure linear solenoid as incorrect
x Period: Confirmed 2 times continuously
Belt grip pressure linear solenoid short x Status: Detects short to GND in belt grip pressure linear solenoid
P2720:00
to GND system
Belt grip pressure linear solenoid open x Status: Detects open or short circuit in belt grip pressure linear
P2721:00
circuit, power supply short circuit solenoid system
x Condition: TCC is on while engine is rotating in D or L range
x Status: Absolute value is calculated for difference between engine
P2757:00 Stuck in TCC OFF speed during 1 s , and engine speed detected by input speed
sensor, and detects condition whereby total is 2,000 rpm or more
x Condition: TCC is off while engine is rotating in D or L range
x Status: Absolute value is calculated for difference between engine
speed every 131.072 ms for 4 times continuously, and engine
P2758:00 Stuck in TCC ON
speed detected by input speed sensor, and detects condition
whereby total is 100 rpm or less
x Condition: During no signal output from TCC engage solenoid
TCC engage solenoid open circuit, while TCM is normal
P2763:00
power supply short circuit x Status: Detects open or short circuit in TCC engage solenoid
x Condition: During signal output from TCC engage solenoid while
TCM is normal
P2764:00 TCC engage solenoid short to GND
x Status: Detects short to GND in TCC engage solenoid
x Condition: —
U0073:00 Control module communication bus off x Status: Detects CAN Bus Off malfunction
x Period: After CAN controller reset, confirmed by re-detection
U0100:00 Lost communication with PCM x Status: Detects communication error with PCM
x Period: Detects communication time-out
U0121:00 Lost communication with ABS HU/CM x Status: Detects communication error at ABS HU/CM
x Period: Detects communication time-out
Drive Cycle
x The drive cycle is the period from the time the engine is started to being stopped. One drive cycle indicates the
period from the time the engine is started and stopped one time. If this period is repeated twice it then becomes
05-02B–6
TO MODEL INDEX

2 drive cycles.
ENGINE ON ENGINE ON ENGINE ON
IG SWITCH ON
IG SWITCH OFF
1DC 2DC 3DC

am3zzn0000289
x The drive cycles are the DTC and pending code recording/clearing, and the AT warning light illumination on/off
conditions.
Pending Code
x The pending code is a temporary DTC detected.
x If the malfunction is repaired after being detected and the engine is started, the pending code is cleared.
Snap Shot Data

x Records only the data during malfunction determination.
Snapshot data table
Corresponding PID data monitor
Snapshot data item Unit Definition
item
ECT qC {qF} Engine coolant temperature ECT
VSS KPH {MPH} Vehicle speed VSS
TPOP % Throttle valve position No.1 THOP
N·m {kgf·m,
ENG_TORQ Engine torque ENG_TORQ
ft·lbf}
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id050212280200
Function
x If a transaxle malfunction is detected by the malfunction detection function, the fail-safe function assures
vehicle driveability by limiting the TCM control and switching the transaxle control value to a preset value.
Fail-safe Table
DTC No. Definition Fail-safe TCC
x Inhibits learning
P0601:00 Flash ROM malfunction Inhibited
x Set to emergency mode
P0603:00 EEPROM malfunction x Controls using initial value Normal
x Inhibits learning
P0604:00 RAM malfunction Inhibited
x Determines selected range order of priority as follows:
P0707:00 TR switch multi-input — N (P) >D>L>R Inhibited
x Inhibits neutral control
x Determines selected range as D
P0708:00 TR switch open circuit Inhibited
x Sets CVT fluid temperature at 80 qC {176 qF}
TFT sensor function x Inhibits learning
P0711:00 Normal
malfunction x Implements auto shift control during fully open throttle at within 5,500
rpm
x Increases idling rpm
05-02B–7
TO MODEL INDEX

TFT sensor short to x Inhibits learning
P0712:00 Normal
GND x Implements auto shift control during fully open throttle at within 5,500
rpm
TFT sensor open circuit,
x Inhibits learning
P0713:00 power supply short Normal
x Implements auto shift control during fully open throttle at within 5,500
circuit
rpm
Input/turbine speed x Uses primary pulley speed sensor signal
P0715:00 sensor signal x Inhibits neutral control Normal
malfunction x Inhibits learning
x Uses primary pulley speed sensor signal
Input/turbine speed
P0717:00 x Inhibits neutral control Normal
sensor signal not input
x Inhibits learning
Secondary pulley speed x Uses ABS HU/CM signal
P0720:00 sensor signal x Inhibits neutral control Inhibited
malfunction x Inhibits learning
x Uses ABS HU/CM signal
Secondary pulley speed x Inhibits neutral control
P0722:00 Inhibited
sensor signal not input x Inhibits learning
x Inhibits manual mode
Neutral control
P072A:00 engagement x Inhibits neutral control Normal
malfunction
Down shift malfunction,
P072C:00 - Inhibited
up shift disabled
Up shift malfunction,
P073C:00 - Inhibited
down shift disabled
TCC solenoid open x Inhibits neutral control
P0740:00 circuit, power supply x Inhibits learning Normal
short circuit x Inhibits manual mode
Neutral control release
P0741:00 x Inhibits neutral control Normal
malfunction
P0742:00 Clutch slippage x Changes solenoid pattern when TCC is off Normal
TCC solenoid short to
P0743:00 x Inhibits learning Normal
GND
x Uses input/turbine speed sensor signal
Primary pulley speed x Inhibits neutral control
P0793:00 Normal
sensor signal not input x Inhibits learning
Oil pressure sensor
function malfunction
Oil pressure sensor
P0842:00 signal circuit short to x Inhibits learning Normal
GND
Oil pressure sensor
power supply circuit
short to GND, power
x Sets acceleration speed to 0 m/s2 {0 ft/s2}
Grade sensor function x Inhibits neutral control
P0864:00
malfunction x Inhibits learning Normal
x Raises oil pressure
Grade sensor signal x Sets acceleration speed to 0 m/s2 {0 ft/s2}

circuit short to GND, x Inhibits neutral control
P0865:00
open circuit, power x Inhibits learning Normal
supply short circuit x Increases idling rpm
05-02B–8
TO MODEL INDEX

Grade sensor power x Sets acceleration speed to 0 m/s2 {0 ft/s2}

supply circuit short to x Inhibits neutral control
P0866:00
GND, power supply x Inhibits learning Normal
short circuit x Increases idling rpm
x Inhibits learning
P0882:00 Battery voltage low Inhibited
P0883:00 Battery voltage high - Normal
x Turns off shift control solenoid No.1
Shift control solenoid x Implements auto shift control during fully open throttle at within 4,000
P0973:00 Inhibited
No. 1 short to GND rpm
Shift control solenoid x Turns off shift control solenoid No.1
No. 1 open circuit, x Implements auto shift control during fully open throttle at within 4,000
P0974:00 Inhibited
power supply short rpm
circuit x Inhibits manual mode
x Turns off shift control solenoid No.2
Shift control solenoid x Implements auto shift control during fully open throttle at within 4,000
P0976:00 Inhibited
No. 2 short to GND rpm
Shift control solenoid x Turns off shift control solenoid No.2
No. 2 open circuit, x Implements auto shift control during fully open throttle at within 4,000
P0977:00 Inhibited
power supply short rpm
circuit x Inhibits manual mode
Belt grip pressure
P2714:00 x Fixes gear ratio to 1 Inhibited
malfunction
x Turns off belt grip pressure linear solenoid
Belt grip pressure linear
P2719:00 x Inhibits learning Inhibited
solenoid stuck
x Fixes gear ratio to 1
solenoid short to GND
solenoid open circuit,
power supply short
circuit
P2757:00 Stuck in TCC OFF x Inhibits manual mode Inhibited
x Changes solenoid pattern when TCC is off
P2758:00 Stuck in TCC ON Normal
TCC engage solenoid x Inhibits neutral control
P2763:00 open circuit, power x Inhibits learning Normal
supply short circuit x Inhibits manual mode
TCC engage solenoid
short to GND
x Sets engine torque to maximum
x Sets throttle opening angle to 7.7%
Control module x Inhibits neutral control
U0073:00 Inhibited
communication bus off x Inhibits learning
x Sets engine torque to maximum
x Sets throttle opening angle to 7.7%
Lost communication x Inhibits neutral control
U0100:00 Inhibited
with PCM x Inhibits learning
Lost communication
U0121:00 x Inhibits manual mode Inhibited
with ABS HU/CM
05-02B–9
TO MODEL INDEX

Emergency Mode
x The emergency mode is a control that uses modes which are set in the event the TCM internal processing is no
longer functional to prevent vehicle inoperability resulting from a non-functioning TCM.
x If these modes are set, the TCM output is inhibited. Therefore, all solenoids are turned off and the following
conditions occur.
— Engine speed is higher than normal when accelerator is depressed
— When NoD range and NoR position are selected, shift shock is greater than during normal shifting
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC DATA MEMORY FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id050212280300
x In the diagnostic data memory function, the TCM can store or clear the following information:
— Number of stored DTC
— Stored DTC
— Pending code
— Snap shot data
x The memory function stores malfunction information detected in the malfunction detection function. Once
malfunction information is stored, the memory will not be cleared even when the ignition switch is turned off
(LOCK position) or the malfunction is repaired.
x The stored memory (malfunction information) can be cleared using the scan tool.
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM MALFUNCTION INDICATION FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id050212280400
x The malfunction indication function illuminates the
AT warning light when it determines transaxle has AT WARNING LIGHT
a malfunction.
End Of Sie
am2zzn0000125
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM EXTERNAL TESTER COMMUNICATION FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]

id050212280500
x A connector (DLC-2) conforming to International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) standards
has been adopted.
DLC-2
am2zzn0000125
x Shape and terminal arrangement as stipulated by

the ISO 15031-3 (SAE J1962) international
standard has been adopted for this connector. DLC-2
The connector has a 16-pin construction that
includes +B, CAN_H, CAN_L, GND1 and GND2
terminals.
B+ CAN_L
Terminal Function
B+ Battery power supply terminal CAN_H GND2 GND1
CAN_H Serial communication terminal (Hi)
CAN_L Serial communication terminal (Lo)
GND1 Body GND terminal
am2zzn0000140
GND2 Serial communication GND terminal
End Of Sie
05-02B–10
TO MODEL INDEX

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id050212280600
Function
x The PID mode allows access to certain data values, analog and digital input and output, calculations and
system state information.
PID/DATA Monitor Item Table

Monitor item Definition Unit/Condition
ACCLMTR Grade sensor condition G
BOO Brake switch condition On/Off
DS1 Shift control solenoid No.1 condition %
DS2 Shift control solenoid No. 2 condition %
DSU TCC engage solenoid %
DTCCUT Number of DTCs stored in TCM —
ECT Engine coolant temperature °C {qF}
ENG_TORQ Engine torque N·m {kgf·m, ft·lbf}
GEAR_RA Gear ratio —
ISS Primary pulley speed RPM
OIL_LRN Oil pressure sensor learn result Not Learnt/Learnt
OIL_PRES Oil pressre sensor condition kPa { kgf/cm2, psi}
OSS Secondary pulley speed RPM
PNP Park / neutral On/Off
RPM Engine speed RPM
SL TCC solenoid condition On/Off
SLT Belt grip pressre linear solenoid condition A
SS_SW SS mode switch condition On/Off
TEST_WSPD ABS malfunction determination avoidance mode On/Off
TFT CVT fluid temperature °C {qF}
TFTV CVT fluid temperature V
THOP Throttle valve position No.1 %
TR Transaxle range P/R/N/D/L/SS
TRD Transaxle D range switch On/Off
TRL Transaxle L range switch On/Off
TRR Transaxle R position switch On/Off
TSS Input/turbine speed RPM
VPWR Module supply voltage V
VSS Vehicle Speed KPH {MPH}
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM SIMULATION FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id050212280700
Function
x By using the scan tool, simulation items for output parts preset in the TCM can be optionally selected and
operated regardless of TCM control conditions.
Simulation Item Table

Test condition
Item Related to Unit/Condition
Switch the ignition to ON Idling
DS1 Shift control solenoid No.1 % X —
DS2 Shift control solenoid No.2 % X —
DSU TCC engage solenoid % X —
SL TCC solenoid On/Off X —
SLT Belt grip pressure linear solenoid A X —
ABS malfunction determination
TEST_WSPD On/Off X X
avoidance mode
X:Available
End Of Sie
05-02B–11
TO MODEL INDEX
CLUTCH [F35M-R]
05-10A CLUTCH [F35M-R]

CLUTCH OUTLINE [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . 05-10A–1 CONSTRUCTION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . 05-10A–1
CLUTCH STRUCTURAL VIEW CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER
[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-10A–1 CONSTRUCTION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . 05-10A–2
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
CLUTCH [F35M-R]
CLUTCH OUTLINE [F35M-R]
NG: CLUTCH
id051005100300
x A hydraulic clutch control mechanism is used.
End Of Sie
CLUTCH STRUCTURAL VIEW [F35M-R]
id051005100500
L.H.D. R.H.D. L.H.D. R.H.D.
RESERVOIR TANK RESERVOIR TANK
CLUTCH CLUTCH
PEDAL PEDAL
CLUTCH
CLUTCH MASTER
MASTER CYLINDER
CYLINDER
CLUTCH RELEASE
CYLINDER CLUTCH RELEASE
COLLAR
FLYWHEEL
CLUTCH RELEASE FORK
CLUTCH DISC
CLUTCH COVER
am2zzn0000071
End Of Sie
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER CONSTRUCTION [F35M-R]
NG: CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
id051005210700
x The clutch master cylinder consists of the cylinder body and piston component in which the push rod is
integrated.
x The clutch master cylinder cannot be disassembled.
05-10A–1
TO MODEL INDEX
CLUTCH [F35M-R]
End Of Sie
NG: CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER
PISTON COMPONENT
CYLINDER BODY
am2zzn0000049
CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER CONSTRUCTION [F35M-R]

id051005210600
x The clutch release cylinder consists of a return spring, piston, push rod and a bleeder screw for bleeding air.
x Due to spring pressure maintaining play between the push rod end and the release fork at zero, an automatic
adjusting, maintenance-free design has been achieved.
x The clutch release cylinder cannot be disassembled.
End Of Sie BLEEDER SCREW
PUSH ROD
PISTON RETURN SPRING

am2zzn0000049
05-10A–2
TO MODEL INDEX
CLUTCH [B65M-R]
05-10B CLUTCH [B65M-R]

CLUTCH OUTLINE [B65M-R]. . . . . . . . . 05-10B–1 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
CLUTCH STRUCTURAL VIEW CONSTRUCTION [B65M-R]. . . . . . . . . . 05-10B–1
[B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-10B–1
TO MODEL INDEX
CLUTCH [B65M-R]
End of Toc
CLUTCH OUTLINE [B65M-R]
NG: CLUTCH
id0510h3100300
x A hydraulic clutch control mechanism has been adopted.
End Of Sie
CLUTCH STRUCTURAL VIEW [B65M-R]
id0510h3100500
L.H.D. R.H.D. L.H.D. R.H.D.
RESERVOIR TANK RESERVOIR TANK
CLUTCH CLUTCH
PEDAL PEDAL
CLUTCH CLUTCH
MASTER MASTER
CYLINDER CYLINDER
CLUTCH RELEASE
CYLINDER
FLYWHEEL
CLUTCH DISC
CLUTCH COVER
am2zzn0000124
End Of Sie
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER CONSTRUCTION [B65M-R]
NG: CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
id0510h3210700
x The clutch master cylinder consists of the cylinder body and piston component in which the push rod is
integrated.
x The clutch master cylinder cannot be disassembled.
05-10B–1
TO MODEL INDEX
CLUTCH [B65M-R]
End Of Sie
PISTON COMPONENT
CYLINDER BODY
am2zzn0000049
05-10B–2
TO MODEL INDEX
MANUAL TRANSAXLE [F35M-R]
05-15A MANUAL TRANSAXLE [F35M-R]

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OUTLINE DOUBLE SYNCHRONIZER MECHANISM
[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–1 STRUCTURE [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–5
MANUAL TRANSAXLE Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–5
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW DOUBLE SYNCHRONIZER MECHANISM
[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–1 OPERATION [F35M-R]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–6
MANUAL TRANSAXLE POWER FLOW SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM
[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–4 FUNCTION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–7
CONTROL ROD CONSTRUCTION/ SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM
OPERATION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–4 OPERATION [F35M-R]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–7
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–7
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OUTLINE [F35M-R]
NG: MANUAL TRANSAXLE
id0515a11008
00
x A constant mesh type shift assist has been adopted.
x A double-cone synchronizer mechanism adopted for 1st and 2nd gears.
End Of Sie
MANUAL TRANSAXLE CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW [F35M-R]
id0515a11007
00
REVERSE
IDLER
3RD GEAR 1ST
GEAR GEAR
2ND
4TH
GEAR
GEAR
5TH
GEAR
PRIMARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY
5TH GEAR
SECONDARY
4TH GEAR
SECONDARY
3RD GEAR
SECONDARY
2ND GEAR
SECONDARY
1ST GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR
am2zzn000005
0
05-15A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles
C REVERSE LEVER
B
D
C
A
A B SEC. B — B
REVERSE LINK PARTS
CONTROL ROD
SHIFT ROD
DETENT BALL
CRANK LEVER
CONTROL ROD END
SEC. A —A SEC. C — C
am3zzn0000237
05-15A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles
D
REVERSE LEVER
C
A
A C
SEC. C — C
REVERSE LINK PARTS
CONTROL ROD
SHIFT ROD
DETENT BALL
CRANK LEVER
CONTROL ROD END
SEC. A —A SEC. D —D
am2zzn0000126
End Of Sie
05-15A–3
TO MODEL INDEX

MANUAL TRANSAXLE POWER FLOW [F35M-R]
id0515a1100900
1ST 2ND
3RD 4TH
5TH REVERSE
TO A
am2zzn0000004
End Of Sie
CONTROL ROD CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [F35M-R]
id0515a1100100
x Movement of the shift lever when operated is transmitted as follows, resulting in gear shifting: cableoshift lever
shaftocrank leverocontrol rod.
05-15A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

SELECT
SELECT
A SHIFT
SHIFT
SHIFT LEVER SHAFT
CONTROL ROD
SHIFT LEVER
SHAFT
CRANK LEVER
SHAFT
CRANK LEVER
CRANK LEVER
SHAFT
A SEC. A - A
am3zzn0000239
SHIFT LEVER SHAFT

A
SHIFT LEVER SHAFT
CONTROL ROD
CRANK LEVER
SHAFT CRANK LEVER
CRANK LEVER SHAFT
SEC. A - A
A CONTROL ROD
am2zzn0000003
End Of Sie
DOUBLE SYNCHRONIZER MECHANISM STRUCTURE [F35M-R]
id0515a1100500
Features
x A double cone synchronizer mechanism has been adapted for the 1st and 2nd gears.
x The double cone synchronizer mechanism is a compact device capable of heavy duty meshing.
x The synchronizer mechanism reduces meshing time and improves operation.
05-15A–5
TO MODEL INDEX

x The double cone synchro mechanism includes a synchronizer ring, double cone, and an inner cone.
Structure
1ST GEAR
INNER CONE
DOUBLE CONE
SYNCHRONIZER RING
SYNCHRONIZER KEY
CLUTCH HUB
CLUTCH HUB SLEEVE
SYNCHRONIZER RING
DOUBLE CONE
INNER CONE
2ND GEAR
am3zzn0000206
End Of Sie
DOUBLE SYNCHRONIZER MECHANISM OPERATION [F35M-R]
id0515a1100400
1. Shifting is performed according to the following operations of the double cone synchronizer mechanism when
the shift lever is operated (Operation when shifting to 2nd).
05-15A–6
TO MODEL INDEX

2. When the hub sleeve moves to the left (in the SYNCHRONIZER KEY
direction of the arrow), the synchronizer key
presses against the synchronizer ring.
CLUTCH HUB
SYNCHRONIZER
SLEEVE
RING
DOUBLE
CONE
INNER CONE
am2zzn0000049
3. As the hub sleeve continues moving to the left,

SYNCHRONIZER
the key causes friction between the synchronizer RING
ring, double cone, and inner cone. The
synchronizer ring turns only the distance that the
SYNCHRONIZER
key groove gap allows, aligning the teeth of the
KEY
hub sleeve and the synchronizer ring. As the hub
sleeve continues moving, the friction between the
cones becomes greater, and the difference
between the rotational speeds of the synchronizer KEY GROOVE
ring, inner cone, and double cone (unified with the
gear) gradually disappears.
am2zzn0000049
4. The hub sleeve then moves up onto the

synchronizer key and engages the synchronizer
ring.
SYNCHRONIZER RING
CLUTCH HUB
SLEEVE
am2zzn0000049
5. The hub sleeve then engages the synchronizer

teeth of the gear to complete shifting.
End Of Sie
SYNCHRONIZER TEETH
am2zzn0000050
SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM FUNCTION [F35M-R]

id0515a1101300
x This provides reliable double-engagement prevention.
End Of Sie
SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM OPERATION [F35M-R]
id0515a1101400
Structure
x During shifting, the shift rods, except for the one in operation, are locked in the neutral position by the interlock
sleeve.
Neutral condition
x The interlock sleeve fits into the notches of the 1st/2nd and 5th/reverse shift forks.
x The control lever fits into the notch of the 3rd/4th shift fork.
05-15A–7
TO MODEL INDEX
SHIFT FORK
SHIFT FORK
INTERLOCK
SLEEVE
COTROL LEVER
am3zzn0000206
Select condition
x The shift lever is moved laterally to the 1st/2nd position.
x Both the control lever and the interlock sleeve turn in the direct shown by the arrow.
x The control lever fits into the notch of the 1st/2nd shift fork.
x The interlock sleeve fits into the notches of the 3rd/4th and 5th/reverse shift forks.
SHIFT FORK (1ST/2ND)
am2zzn0000050
Shift condition
x The shift lever is moved vertically to the 2nd position.
x The control lever moves up the 1st/2nd shift fork and the change to 2nd gear is complete.
x The interlock sleeve holds the 3rd/4th and 5th/reverse shift forks at the neutral position, preventing double
engagement of gears.
x The operation procedure is the same for other gear positions.
SHIFT FORK
(5TH/REVERSE)
SHIFT FORK
(3RD/4TH)
am3zzn0000206
End Of Sie
05-15A–8
TO MODEL INDEX
MANUAL TRANSAXLE [B65M-R]
05-15B MANUAL TRANSAXLE [B65M-R]

MANUAL TRANSAXLE Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–4
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM
[B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–2 FUNCTION [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–4
MANUAL TRANSAXLE POWER FLOW SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM
[B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–3 OPERATION [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–4
DOUBLE SYNCHRONIZER MECHANISM Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–4
STRUCTURE [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–4
End of Toc
NG: MANUAL TRANSAXLE
05-15B–1
TO MODEL INDEX

MANUAL TRANSAXLE CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW [B65M-R]
id0515h3100700
REVERSE
IDLER GEAR
1ST
GEAR
5TH 4TH 3RD 2ND
GEAR GEAR GEAR GEAR
PRIMARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY
5TH GEAR
SECONDARY
4TH GEAR
SECONDARY
3RD GEAR
SECONDARY
2ND GEAR
SECONDARY
1ST GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR
am2zzn0000123
End Of Sie
05-15B–2
TO MODEL INDEX

MANUAL TRANSAXLE POWER FLOW [B65M-R]
id0515h3100900
1ST 2ND
3RD 4TH
5TH
am2zzn0000098
05-15B–3
TO MODEL INDEX
REVERSE
am2zzn0000098
End Of Sie
DOUBLE SYNCHRONIZER MECHANISM STRUCTURE [B65M-R]
id0515h3100500
Features
x A double cone synchronizer mechanism is used for the 1st and 2nd gears.
x The effective synchronization surface for double synchronization is almost twice that of simple synchronization.
Because of this, the speeds of the gearwheels are equalized much faster, which considerably improves gear
shifting comfort.
Structure
GEAR WHEEL
INNER SYNCHRONIZER RING OUTER SYNCHRONIZER RING

CONICAL RING
SYNCHRONIZER RING HUB
am2zzn0000100
End Of Sie
SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM FUNCTION [B65M-R]
id0515h3101300
x This provides reliable double-engagement prevention.
End Of Sie
SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM OPERATION [B65M-R]
id0515h3101400
Structure
x During shifting, the shift rods, except for the one in operation, are locked in the neutral position by the interlock
sleeve.
05-15B–4
TO MODEL INDEX

Layout
x The shift locking bush prevents two gears from being engaged at the same time.
The selector interlock maintains engagement of the selected gear.
Both the shift and the select process is performed through the selector shaft.
REVERSE GEAR
SPRING SELECTOR SHAFT
SHIFT LOCKING BUSH
GUIDE PLATE
GUIDE SLEEVE CONTROL ROD INTERLOCK SNAP RING 5TH REVERSE SHIFT ROD
am2zzn0000097
Select movement
x The axial movement of the selector cable is transferred at the transmission to the selector shaft which can turn
in its bearing.
If the gearshift lever is moved to the left or right, the selector shaft and the selector boss both turn together in
the corresponding direction.
As this happens, the selector shaft is guided by a pin in the selector gate.
The selector boss selects the required selector fork.
At the same time the shift locking bush prevents access to other gear combinations.
05-15B–5
TO MODEL INDEX
SHIFT LOCKING BUSH
CONTROL ROD
CONTROL LEVER
1 3 5
GUIDE PLATE
2 4 R
am2zzn0000097
Shift movement
x After the gear pair to be shifted has been selected, the shift movement takes place.
Here the axial movement of the shift cable at the transmission produces an axial movement of the selector
shaft.
If the gearshift lever is moved forwards or backwards, the selector shaft and the selector boss both move
vertically together.
As this happens, the selector shaft is guided by a pin in the selector gate.
The selector boss shifts the required selector fork.
05-15B–6
TO MODEL INDEX
SHIFT LOCKING BUSH
CONTROL ROD
CONTROL LEVER
1 3 5
GUIDE PLATE
2 4 R
am2zzn0000097
Engage reverse gear

x In order to select reverse gear, the gearshift lever must be moved to the right over and past the reverse gear
inhibit device. As this occurs the axial movement of the selector cable is transferred to the selector shaft which
can turn in its bearing.
When shifting into reverse gear, the gearshift lever is moved backwards. The selector boss engages in the 5th
gear/reverse gear shift rod, which in turn engages through a pin in the reverse gear selector shaft.
During the select and shift process the selector shaft is guided through the selector gate by a pin.
The reverse gear idler is slid by the reverse gear selector shaft and reverse gear is engaged.
05-15B–7
TO MODEL INDEX
REVERSE GEAR
SHIFT LOCKING BUSH
SELECTOR SHAFT
CONTROL ROD
1 3 5 CONTROL LEVER
2 4 R
GUIDE PLATE
5TH REVERSE SHIFT ROD

am2zzn0000097
End Of Sie
05-15B–8
TO MODEL INDEX
MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM [F35M-R]
05-16A MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM [F35M-

R]
MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT REVERSE LOCKOUT MECHANISM
MECHANISM OUTLINE [F35M-R] . . . . 05-16A–1 FUNCTION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-16A–1
MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT REVERSE LOCKOUT MECHANISM
MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-16A–1 [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-16A–2
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-16A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc
MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM OUTLINE [F35M-R]
NG: SHIFT MECHANISM
id0516b3100100
x A cable type operation system has been adopted.
End Of Sie
MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW [F35M-R]
id0516b3100500
MAIN SELECT CABLE
MAIN SHIFT CABLE
SELECT RETURN MECHANISM
SELECT
ARM SELECT RETURN
SPRING
BASE PLATE
am2zzn0000004
End Of Sie
REVERSE LOCKOUT MECHANISM FUNCTION [F35M-R]
id0516b3100300
x The reverse lockout mechanism prevents the driver from accidentally shifting into reverse gear when
downshifting from 5th to 4th gear.
End Of Sie
05-16A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

REVERSE LOCKOUT MECHANISM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [F35M-R]
id0516b3100400
Structure
x If, when downshifting from 5th to 4th, the gear shift lever is shifted into reverse unintentionally, the reverse gate
locks the gear shift leverÅfs movement to prevent operation error.When shifting again into reverse, temporarily
returning the gear shift lever to the neutral position to push out the reverse gate cancels the lock and enables
shifting to take place.
GEAR SHIFTING FROM 5TH TO REVERSE DIRECTLY
1
2
3
4
R PREVENTS
5
SHIFTING
REVERSE GATE
NEUTRAL POSITION
SELECTOR
GEAR SHIFTING FROM 5TH TO REVERSE VIA NEUTRAL POSITION
NEUTRAL POSITION
1
2
3
4 SELECTOR
5 R
REVERSE GATE
CANCELS
NEUTRAL POSITION
LOCKOUT
am3zzn0000239
05-16A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

GEAR SHIFTING FROM 5TH TO REVERSE DIRECTLY
PREVENTS SELECTOR
SHIFTING
REVERSE GATE
NEUTRAL POSITION
GEAR SHIFTING FROM 5TH REVERSE VIA

NEUTRAL POSITION
CANCELS LOCKOUT
REVERSE GATE
NEUTRAL POSITION
SELECTOR
am2zzn0000050
End Of Sie
05-16A–3
TO MODEL INDEX
MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM [B65M-R]
05-16B MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM [B65M-

R]
MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT
MECHANISM OUTLINE [B65M-R] . . . . 05-16B–1 MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW
[B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-16B–1
TO MODEL INDEX
MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM [B65M-R]

End of Toc
MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM OUTLINE [B65M-R]
NG: SHIFT MECHANISM
id0516h3100100
x A cable type operation system has been adopted.
End Of Sie
MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW [B65M-R]
id0516h3100500
MAIN SELECT CABLE
MAIN SHIFT CABLE
SELECT RETURN MECHANISM
SELECT
ARM SELECT RETURN
SPRING
BASE PLATE
am2zzn000009
End Of Sie 6
05-16B–1
TO MODEL INDEX
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [FN4A-EL]
05-17 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [FN4A-EL]

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OUTLINE VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–2 FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–24
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–2 [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–24
OUTLINE OF OPERATION PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–2 (LINEAR TYPE) OUTLINE
EC-AT OPERATION CHART [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–25
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–4 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
POWERFLOW OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . 05-17–4 (LINEAR TYPE) OPERATION
POWERFLOW STRUCTURE [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–25
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–5 SHIFT SOLENOID A, B AND C
POWERFLOW OPERATION (DUTY-CYCLE TYPE) OUTLINE
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–5 [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–25
Component description . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–5 SHIFT SOLENOID A, B AND C
TORQUE CONVERTER OUTLINE (DUTY-CYCLE TYPE) FUNCTION
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–12 [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–25
CENTRIFUGAL BALANCE CLUTCH SHIFT SOLENOID A, B AND C
OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–13 (DUTY-CYCLE TYPE) OPERATION
CENTRIFUGAL BALANCE CLUTCH [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–26
STRUCTURE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–13 SHIFT SOLENOID D AND E
CENTRIFUGAL BALANCE CLUTCH (ON/OFF TYPE) OUTLINE
OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–13 [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–26
OUTPUT GEAR OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . 05-17–15 SHIFT SOLENOID D AND E
OIL PUMP OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . 05-17–15 (ON/OFF TYPE) FUNCTION
OIL PUMP STRUCTURE [FN4A-EL] . . . 05-17–16 [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–27
OIL PUMP OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . 05-17–17 SHIFT SOLENOID D AND E
CONTROL VALVE BODY OUTLINE (ON/OFF TYPE) OPERATION
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–17 [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–27
FORWARD CLUTCH, 3-4 CLUTCH PCM FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–27
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT OUTLINE SHIFT CONTROL STRUCTURE
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–18 [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–28
COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–28
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–19 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVING MODE DETERMINATION
OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–20 OPERATION [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM D Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29
FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–20 S, L Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM SLOPE MODE CONTROL OUTLINE
BLOCK DIAGRAM [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . 05-17–21 [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM SLOPE MODE CONTROL OPERATION
CONSTRUCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . 05-17–21 [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH Climbing hill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29
FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–22 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH CONTROL OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . 05-17–29
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–22 OPERATION [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–30
HOLD SWITCH FUNCTION TCC Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–30
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–23 TCC Engaging Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–31
HOLD SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/ Determination of TCC Inhibition . . . . . . 05-17–32
OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–23 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL OUTLINE
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–32
(TFT) SENSOR FUNCTION DIRECT ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–23 OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–33
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE DIRECT ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL
(TFT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/ OPERATION [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–34
OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–24 When Shifting No D or No R Shift . . . 05-17–34
INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR Up-Down Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–34
FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–24 FEEDBACK CONTROL OPERATION
INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–34
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION ENGINE-TRANSAXLE TOTAL CONTROL
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–24 OPERATION [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–35
End of Toc
05-17–1
TO MODEL INDEX

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
NG: AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
id051701101700
x The FN4A-EL type automatic transaxle is used.
x The construction and operation of the FN4A-EL automatic transaxle is essentially carried over from the
previous one.
End Of Sie
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW [FN4A-EL]
id051701101900
FRONT
2-4 BRAKE PLANETARY FORWARD
BAND GEAR CLUTCH
REAR
PLANETARY
GEAR
TORQUE
CONVERTER
REVERSE
CLUTCH
3-4 CLUTCH OIL PUMP
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
LOW AND
PRIMARY GEAR
REVERSE
BRAKE
SECONDARY GEAR
OUTPUT GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
am2zzn0000017
End Of Sie
OUTLINE OF OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701111000
x The operation of the electronic automatic transaxle is classified into three systems: the electronic control
mechanism, the hydraulic pressure control mechanism, and the powertrain mechanism (includes the torque
converter mechanism). The operation of each system is as follows:
— Powertrain mechanism
x The driving force from the engine is transmitted through the torque converter to the transaxle.
05-17–2
TO MODEL INDEX

x The transmitted driving force operates each clutch and brake according to the clutch engagement
pressure from the duty-cycle type solenoid, and the planetary gears change the gear ratio to the
optimal driving force. The changed driving force is transmitted through the differential to the axle shaft
and then the tires.
— Hydraulic pressure control mechanism
x According to the signals from the PCM, each solenoid operates to switch the hydraulic passages in the
control valve body and controls the clutch engagement pressure.
x The line pressure is adjusted by the linear type pressure control solenoid. The hydraulic passages are
switched by the ON/OFF type solenoids (shift solenoids D and E.) And the clutch engagement pressure
is controlled by the duty-cycle type solenoids (shift solenoids A, B, and C).
— Electronic control mechanism
x According to the signals from the switches and sensors in the input system, the PCM outputs the signal
which matches the present driving condition to the linear type solenoid, ON/OFF type solenoids and the
duty-cycle type solenoids in the hydraulic pressure control mechanism.
CONVERTER
POWER TRAIN
PLANETARY
CLUTCHES
MECHANISM
TORQUE
BRAKES
GEAR
CLUTCHES,
BRAKES ENGAGEMENT,
RELEASE PRESSURE
TIRE DIFFEREN- TIRE

TIAL
*1: SHIFT SOLENOID D,E

HYDRAULIC (ON/OFF TYPE)
PRESSURE CONTROL
*2: PRESSURE CONTROL
CONTROL *1 SOLENOID (LINER TYPE)
VALVE BODY
MECHANISM *3: SHIFT SOLENOID A,B,C
(DUTY-CYCLE TYPE)
*4: VEHICLE SPEED
*2 *3
*5: ATF TEMPERATURE
*6: FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM
REVOLUTION SPEED
OIL *7: ENGINE REVOLUTION SPEED
PUMP *8: THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL
*9: ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SIGNAL
ELECTRONIC
CONTROL PCM POWER FLOW
MECHANISM
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
*4 *5 *6 *7 *8 ELECTRONIC SIGNAL
*9
am2zzn0000079
End Of Sie
05-17–3
TO MODEL INDEX

EC-AT OPERATION CHART [FN4A-EL]
id051701102100
Shift pattern Transaxle Operation of shift solenoid

2-4 Solenoid
Solenoid valve
brake valve (ON /
(duty-cycle type)
Low and reverse

band OFF type)
Position/Range
Forward clutch
One-way clutch
Reverse clutch
Engine brake
Mode Gear position
solenoid A
solenoid B
solenoid C
solenoid D
solenoid E
3-4 clutch
Released
Applied
brake
Shift
Shift
Shift
Shift
Shift
Shift
TCC
P - - - - - - - ON OFF
R - Reverse 2.279 - OPEN OPEN OPEN OFF OFF
N - - - - - - - ON OFF
1GR 2.816 OPEN CLOSED CLOSED OFF OFF
2GR 1.553 OPEN OPEN CLOSED OFF OFF
*1
3GR 1.000 OPEN OPEN OPEN OFF OFF
POWER/
NORMAL 4GR 0.695 CLOSED OPEN OPEN ON OFF
D 4GR * 2
0.695 CLOSED OPEN OPEN ON ON
TCC ON
HOLD 3GR 1.000 OPEN OPEN OPEN OFF OFF
4GR * 3 0.695 CLOSED OPEN OPEN ON OFF
Non- 2GR 1.553 OPEN OPEN CLOSED OFF OFF
HOLD 3GR 1.000 OPEN OPEN OPEN OFF OFF
S 4GR * 3 0.695 CLOSED OPEN OPEN ON OFF
HOLD 3GR * 3 1.000 OPEN OPEN OPEN OFF OFF
Non- 2GR 1.553 OPEN OPEN CLOSED OFF OFF
HOLD 3GR * 3 1.000 OPEN OPEN OPEN OFF OFF
L
1GR 2.816 OPEN OPEN CLOSED ON ON
2GR * 3 1.553 OPEN OPEN CLOSED OFF OFF
HOLD
3GR * 3 1.000 OPEN OPEN OPEN OFF OFF
: Automatic shift according to set speed and throttle opening anglel
1 : Automatically switches between POWER and NORMAL modes according to accelerator pedal depressing
*
speed.
2 : Performs TCC operation in NORMAL mode.
*
* 3 : To prevent engine overspeed inhibits downshift until the engine speed is reduced to the preset speed.
: Operating
: Transmits the torque only when driving.
OPEN: Engages the line pressure to the clutch pressure.
CLOSED: Drains the clutch pressure.
ON: Engages the output port and the supply port (Solenoid reducing pressure).
OFF: Engages the output port and the drain port (Drains the output port).
am2zzn0000022
End Of Sie
POWERFLOW OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701111100
x In the powertrain mechanism, hydraulic pressure is transmitted from the control valves or shift solenoid A, B, or
C (duty-cycle type) to operate the clutches and brakes, and the planetary gear changes the gear ratio
according to the vehicle driving condition.
End Of Sie
05-17–4
TO MODEL INDEX

POWERFLOW STRUCTURE [FN4A-EL]
id051701102200
x The powertrain mechanism of the FN4A-EL type consists of three pairs of clutches, brake, band brake, one-
way clutch, and two pairs of single type planetary gears.
LOW AND REVERSE BRAKE
REVERSE CLUTCH FORWARD CLUTCH
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
REAR
3-4 CLUTCH
PLANETARY
GEAR
2-4 BRAKE FRONT
BAND PLANETARY
GEAR
am2zzn0000017
REAR PLANETARY
2-4 BRAKE BAND GEAR
REVERSE CLUTCH FRONT
PLANETARY
GEAR
3-4 CLUTCH
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
FORWARD CLUTCH
am2zzn0000017
End Of Sie
POWERFLOW OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701102300
Component description
Component Function
Forward clutch x Transmits the input torque from the turbine shaft to the front sun gear.
x Operates in the forward range of the first, second, or third gear position.
3-4 clutch x Transmits the input torque from the turbine shaft to the rear planetary
carrier.
x Operates in the forward range of the third or fourth gear position.
05-17–5
TO MODEL INDEX

Component Function
Reverse clutch x Transmits the input torque from the turbine shaft to the rear sun gear.
x Operates when the vehicle is backing up.
2-4 brake band x Locks rotation of the reverse drum and fixes the rear sun gear.
x Operates in the second or fourth gear position.
Low and reverse brake x Fixes the rotation of the front internal gear.
x Operates when the vehicle is backing up or in the first gear position (L range
HOLD mode 1GR).
One-way clutch x Locks the counterclockwise rotation of the front internal gear.
(Directions of rotation is viewed from the torque converter.)
Planetary gear x The planetary gear functions as a transmission due to the engagement/
disengagement of clutches and/or brakes, converts the transmitted driving
force of the turbine shaft and transmits it to the output gear.
Note
x All directions of rotation are viewed from the torque converter.
05-17–6
TO MODEL INDEX

1GR (D range)
FORWARD CLUTCH
ONE-WAY
CLUTCH
INPUT
PRIMARY GEAR
OUTPUT GEAR
FRONT OUTPUT
INTERNAL
FRONT GEAR
SUN GEAR SECONDARY GEAR
RING GEAR
FRONT FRONT (DIFFERENTIAL)
PLANETARY PINION GEAR
CARRIER
ONE-WAY
CLUTCH PRIMARY GEAR
FRONT
INTERNAL
GEAR
OUTPUT
FORWARD CLUTCH
FRONT
PLANETARY
CARRIER
FRONT
SUN GEAR
INPUT
FRONT
PINION GEAR
am2zzn0000018
05-17–7
TO MODEL INDEX

1GR (L range HOLD)
FORWARD CLUTCH
ONE-WAY
CLUTCH INPUT
PRIMARY GEAR
OUTPUT GEAR
OUTPUT
FRONT
INTERNAL
FRONT GEAR
SUN GEAR
SECONDARY GEAR
FRONT FRONT RING GEAR

PLANETARY PINION GEAR (DIFFERENTIAL)
CARRIER
FRONT ONE-WAY CLUTCH

INTERNAL
PRIMARY GEAR
GEAR
OUTPUT
FORWARD CLUTCH
FRONT
PLANETARY
CARRIER
FRONT
SUN GEAR
FRONT INPUT
PINION GEAR
am2zzn0000018
05-17–8
TO MODEL INDEX

2GR
REAR FORWARD CLUTCH
INTERNAL
GEAR
REAR
PLANETARY CARRIER INPUT
PRIMARY GEAR
REAR
PINION GEAR
REAR
SUN GEAR OUTPUT GEAR
OUTPUT
FRONT
INTERNAL
FRONT GEAR
SUN GEAR
SECONDARY GEAR
RING GEAR
FRONT FRONT (DIFFERENTIAL)
PLANETARY PINION GEAR
2-4 BRAKE BAND CARRIER
REAR FRONT
PLANETARY INTERNAL
REAR CARRIER GEAR
INTERNAL PRIMARY GEAR
GEAR
OUTPUT
FORWARD CLUTCH
FRONT
PLANETARY
CARRIER
FRONT
SUN GEAR
REAR FRONT INPUT

REAR
PINION GEAR SUN GEAR PINION GEAR
am2zzn0000018
05-17–9
TO MODEL INDEX

3GR
FORWARD CLUTCH
REAR
PLANETARY CARRIER
INPUT
PRIMARY GEAR
REAR
PINION GEAR
REAR
SUN GEAR
OUTPUT GEAR
FRONT OUTPUT
INTERNAL
GEAR
FRONT
SUN GEAR SECONDARY GEAR
RING GEAR
3-4 CLUTCH REAR FRONT (DIFFERENTIAL)
INTERNAL PINION GEAR
GEAR
REAR
PLANETARY FRONT PRIMARY GEAR
CARRIER INTERNAL
GEAR
OUTPUT
FORWARD CLUTCH
FRONT
PINION GEAR
FRONT
SUN GEAR
INPUT
3-4 CLUTCH REAR REAR
PINION GEAR SUN GEAR
am2zzn0000018
05-17–10
TO MODEL INDEX

4GR
REAR
INTERNAL GEAR
INPUT
PRIMARY GEAR
REAR
PINION GEAR
REAR
OUTPUT
FRONT SECONDARY GEAR

PLANETARY
CARRIER RING GEAR
(DIFFERENTIAL)
3-4 CLUTCH
2-4 BRAKE BAND
REAR
INTERNAL GEAR PRIMARY GEAR
OUTPUT
FRONT
PLANETARY
CARRIER
INPUT
3-4 CLUTCH REAR REAR
am2zzn0000018
05-17–11
TO MODEL INDEX

R position
INPUT
PRIMARY GEAR
REAR
PINION GEAR
REAR
OUTPUT
SECONDARY GEAR
FRONT
PLANETARY CARRIER
REAR RING GEAR
INTERNAL GEAR (DIFFERENTIAL)
REVERSE CLUTCH LOW AND REVERSE BRAKE
PRIMARY GEAR
OUTPUT
FRONT
PLANETARY
CARRIER
INPUT
REAR REAR
am2zzn0000018
End Of Sie
TORQUE CONVERTER OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701100700
x The torque converter clutch mechanism mechanically engages the pump impeller and the turbine runner under
a specified condition, and transmits the power, not through the fluid, but directly, preventing the slip loss of the
torque converter.
x The torque converter has obtained sufficient transaxle efficiency and torque converting ratio that matches the
output characteristic of each engine.
05-17–12
TO MODEL INDEX

End Of Sie
PUMP TCC PISTON
IMPELLER
TURBINE
RUNNER
STATOR TURBINE HUB
ONE -WAY OIL

CLUTCH COOLER
am2zzn0000024
CENTRIFUGAL BALANCE CLUTCH OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]

id051701109800
x A centrifugal balance clutch mechanism, which cancels the centrifugal oil pressure, has been adopted to
improve clutch control.
x A bonded seal piston (press-worked component of a piston and a seal) has been adopted for each clutch and
brake to reduce the piston size and weight.
End Of Sie
CENTRIFUGAL BALANCE CLUTCH STRUCTURE [FN4A-EL]
id051701109900
x The centrifugal balance clutch chambers are installed opposite the clutch chamber. The centrifugal balance
clutch chambers are constantly filled with ATF from an exclusive hydraulic passage of the turbine shaft.
End Of Sie
BONDED SEAL PISTON
CLUTCH DRUM
SEAL
CLUTCH
BALANCE
CHAMBER
CLUTCH
SEAL
CHAMBER
SEAL PLATE
CLUTCH PRESSURE
LUBRICATION PASSAGE
am2zzn0000026
CENTRIFUGAL BALANCE CLUTCH OPERATION [FN4A-EL]

id051701109700
When clutch pressure is not applied
x When the clutch drum rotates, centrifugal force acts on the residual ATF in the clutch chamber to push against
the piston. However, centrifugal force also acts on the ATF filling the centrifugal balance clutch chamber to push
back the piston. As a result, the two forces are cancelled out and the piston remains stationary, thus preventing
clutch engagement.
05-17–13
TO MODEL INDEX

When clutch pressure is applied
x When clutch pressure is applied to the clutch chamber, the clutch pressure overcomes the oil pressure and
spring force in the opposite centrifugal balance clutch chamber, and pushes the piston to engage the clutches.
Because the centrifugal force acting on the clutch pressure in the clutch chamber is canceled by another
centrifugal force acting on the ATF filling the centrifugal balance clutch chamber, the influence of the centrifugal
force created by the clutch drum revolution speed is eliminated. As a result, stable piston pushing force is
obtained in all rotation ranges, and smoother shifts can be made.
End Of Sie CHANGES ACCORDING TO
THE ROTATION SPEED OF
TWO FORCES CLUTCH DRUM
CANCEL OUT
CENTRIFUGAL CENTRIFUGAL
HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE OF PRESSURE OF
PISTON BALANCE
CHAMBER CHAMBER
CLUTCH SPRING FORCE
PRESSURE
PISTON
PISTON PUSHING PISTON PUSHING
FORCE CLUTCH FORCE REQUIRED TO
PRESSURE OBTAIN SHIFT QUALITY
DRUM REVOLUTION
SPEED
am2zzn0000025
05-17–14
TO MODEL INDEX

OUTPUT GEAR OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701111200
x The two-step final drive mechanism has been adopted by arranging the secondary gear and the output gear on
the output gear shaft to miniaturize the transaxle.
PRIMARY GEAR
SECONDARY GEAR
OUTPUT GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
POWERFLOW
am2zzn0000021
End Of Sie
OIL PUMP OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701105600
x The light-weight, compact, and quiet trochoid gear type oil pump has been adopted to reduce the pump driving
torque.
x The direct drive type oil pump has been adopted and placed behind the torque converter.
05-17–15
TO MODEL INDEX
OIL PUMP
TORQUE CONVERTER
am2zzn0000018
End Of Sie
OIL PUMP STRUCTURE [FN4A-EL]
id051701109600
x The outer rotor and the inner rotor are installed in
the oil pump housing.
x The inner rotor in the oil pump housing is driven
by the torque converter. OIL PUMP HOUSING
End Of Sie
OIL PUMP COVER

INNER ROTOR
OUTER ROTOR
am2zzn0000023
05-17–16
TO MODEL INDEX

OIL PUMP OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701105500
x When the inner rotor in the oil pump rotates, the
PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE
ATF is drawn to the oil pump and then discharged
from the oil pump. The discharge amount is
proportional to the rotating speed of the torque
converter. The ATF discharge amount is
controlled by the pressure regulator valve and the
pressure control solenoid.
End Of Sie IN
OUT
am2zzn0000023
CONTROL VALVE BODY OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]

id051701110100
x The control valve body is composed of three bodies: the upper control valve body, main control valve body, and
the solenoid control valve body.
x Because the clutch engagement pressure is controlled electronically, the hydraulic circuits are simplified, the
valve types are reduced, and the control valve body is miniaturized.
x The nonwoven fabric oil strainer is installed in the control valve body to prevent contamination.
05-17–17
TO MODEL INDEX
UPPER CONTROL VALVE BODY
MAIN CONTROL VALVE BODY
OIL STRAINER
SHIFT SOLENOID E
SHIFT SOLENOID D
SHIFT SOLENOID B
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID
SHIFT SOLENOID C
SOLENOID VALVE BODY
SHIFT SOLENOID A
am2zzn0000020
End Of Sie
FORWARD CLUTCH, 3-4 CLUTCH HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701110000
x By designing exclusive passages for the forward clutch and the 3-4 clutch in the transaxle case, via the oil
pump and end cover the hydraulic pressure passages are shortened and control during clutch engagement is
improved.
05-17–18
TO MODEL INDEX
END COVER
OIL PUMP
3-4 CLUTCH
HYDRAULIC
PASSAGE
FORWARD CLUTCH
HYDRAULIC PASSAGE
3-4 CLUTCH FORWARD CLUTCH
3-4 CLUTCH HYDRAULIC

PASSAGE
3-4 CLUTCH HYDRAULIC FORWARD CLUTCH

PASSAGE HYDRAULIC PASSAGE
END COVER OIL PUMP
am2zzn0000020
End Of Sie
COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701104000
x A water-cooled AT oil cooler installed in the
radiator has been adopted.
End Of Sie
FLOW
am2zzn0000024
05-17–19
TO MODEL INDEX

ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701104300
x A PCM that is integrated with the PCM for engine control has been adopted for transaxle control. The PCM
outputs the control signal to the engine and the transaxle according to the signal from each sensor and/or
switch.
x Due to the adoption of the line pressure adjusting control by the linear type pressure control solenoid and the
clutch engaging pressure control by duty-cycle type shift solenoids A, B, and C, excellent shift quality is
obtained.
End Of Sie
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]
id051701117000
Part name Function

HOLD switch x Selects driving modes (HOLD) and changes driving patterns.
TR switch x Detects selector lever ranges/positions.
TFT sensor x Detects the ATF temperature.
Input/turbine speed sensor x Detects the forward clutch drum (input) revolution speed.
Input VSS x Detects the differential gear case (output) revolution speed.
system Brake switch x Detects the use of service brake.
ECT sensor x Detects the engine coolant temperature.
MAF sensor x Detects the intake air amount.
APP sensor x Detects the accelerator pedal depressing amount.
CKP sensor x Detects the engine revolution speed.
Linear type Pressure control solenoid x Adjusts the line pressure.
Shift solenoid A x Controls the clutch engagement pressure.
Duty-cycle type Shift solenoid B x Controls the clutch engagement pressure.
Shift solenoid C x Controls the clutch engagement pressure.
Output x Switches the hydraulic passages for bypass valve and 3-4
Shift solenoid D
system shift valve.
ON/OFF type
x Switches the hydraulic passages for low and reverse shift
Shift solenoid E
valve, TCC, and control valve.
x By switching HOLD switch, illuminates to indicate that it is in
HOLD indicator light HOLD mode.
x Flashes when failure is detected by diagnosis function.
End Of Sie
05-17–20
TO MODEL INDEX

ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM [FN4A-EL]
id051701100200
INPUT SIGNALS PCM INPUT SIGNALS
BRAKE SWITCH HOLD SWITCH

ECT SENSOR TR SWITCH
MAF SENSOR TFT SENSOR
APP SENSOR INPUT/TURBINE
ENGINE CONTROL SPEED SENSOR
CKP SENSOR
SYSTEM
VSS
ENGINE CONTROL
OUTPUT SIGNALS
OUTPUT SIGNALS
TRANSAXLE
CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
SHIFT SOLENOID A
SHIFT SOLENOID B
DLC-2
SHIFT SOLENOID C
INPUT SIGNALS ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SHIFT SOLENOID D
SYSTEM SHIFT SOLENOID E
OUTPUT SIGNALS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
SELECTOR
INDICATOR LIGHT
HOLD INDICATOR
LIGHT
am2zzn0000022
End Of Sie
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION [FN4A-EL]
id051701100100
HOLD INDICATOR LIGHT BRAKE SWITCH APP SENSOR
SELECTOR INDICATOR LIGHT
HOLD SWITCH HOLD SWITCH
L.H.D. R.H.D.
am2zzn0000064
05-17–21
TO MODEL INDEX
ECT SENSOR PCM MAF SENSOR VSS
TFT SENSOR
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID
SHIFT SOLENOID A, B, C SHIFT SOLENOID D, E
CKP SENSOR INPUT/TURBINE SPEED TR SWITCH

SENSOR
am2zzn0000024
End Of Sie
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]
id051701109300
x The transaxle range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the PCM and the
instrument cluster.
End Of Sie
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701109200
x A variable resistor type switch has been adopted for the transaxle range switch.
x Because the transaxle range switch and the selector lever are connected by the selector cable, the transaxle
range switch indicates a specified resistance according to selector lever operation and from this the PCM
determines the selector lever position. The corresponding signal are sent from the PCM to other related parts.
End Of Sie INCREASES
RESISTANCE
P R N D S L
POSITION/RANGE
am2zzn0000025
05-17–22
TO MODEL INDEX

HOLD SWITCH FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]
id051701112900
x The HOLD switch detects the switch condition and send a signal to the PCM.
End Of Sie
HOLD SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701112800
x The HOLD switch is integrated with selector lever knob.
R.H.D.
x The contact in the switch closes during the switch
is depressed.
End Of Sie
HOLD SWITCH
am2zzn0000025
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]

id051701109100
x The TFT sensor, which is installed in the oil
strainer, detects the ATF temperature in the oil
pan, and sends the control signal to the PCM.
The PCM controls the driving pattern selection
and the TCC based on the signal from the TFT
sensor.
End Of Sie
OIL STRAINER
TFT SENSOR
am2zzn0000020
05-17–23
TO MODEL INDEX

TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701109000
x The TFT sensor is a thermistor type and the
resistance changes according to the ATF
temperature.
x The characteristic of the resistance is as shown in
the figure below: when the ATF temperature INCREASES
increases, the resistance decreases, and when
the ATF temperature decreases, the resistance CHARACTERISTIC OF
increases. TFT SENSOR
End Of Sie
RESISTANCE
ATF TEMPERATURE INCREASES
am2zzn0000020
INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]

id051701108900
x The input/turbine speed sensor is located in the transaxle case with clearance between it and the forward
clutch drum, and detects the rotating speed of the forward clutch drum (turbine).
End Of Sie
INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701108800
x The input/turbine speed sensor is a magnetic pickup type. A 32-pulse signal is generated per rotation of the
forward clutch drum, and input to the PCM.
x The PCM detects the shift start and end timing according to the signal from the input/turbine speed sensor, and
performs detailed control, improving shift quality.
INPUT/TURBINE
SPEED SENSOR
WAVE FORM
FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM
am2zzn0000025
End Of Sie
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]
id051701109500
x The VSS is located in the converter housing with clearance between it and the sensor rotor in the differential
case, and detects the differential rotating speed.
End Of Sie
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701109400
x The VSS is a GMR element type. A 24-pulse signal is generated per rotation of the sensor rotor and the VSS
sends this signal to the PCM.
x Consists of an IC in which a giant magneto resistive (GMR) element and signal processing circuit have been
integrated, and a magnet. Signal reliability has been improved with the adoption of the GMR element resulting
in the signal amplitude being wider compared to the hall element.
x Signal detection uses the special characteristics of GMR to change the electrical resistance corresponding to
the magnetic field.
x The size (GMR output) of the magnetic field detected by the GMR element is changed into short waves as a
sensor output signal at the signal processing circuit.
x The PCM performs EC-AT control based on the VSS and throttle position sensor signals.
05-17–24
TO MODEL INDEX

x The PCM also outputs the vehicle speed signal to the instrument cluster.
VSS
WAVE FORM
5V
0V
SENSOR ROTOR
am2zzn0000025
End Of Sie
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID (LINEAR TYPE) OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701110300
x A pressure control solenoid with high stability in hydraulic pressure has been adopted for the line pressure
control.
x Because the pressure control solenoid controls the hydraulic pressure according to the current value, the
degree of freedom in control increases. The controllability is maintained even under aeration, and pressure
variation can be reduced.
End Of Sie
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID (LINEAR TYPE) OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701110200
x By changing the electrical current value (0 A—1 A) inside the solenoid, the pressure control solenoid adjusts
the hold power of the hold pressure valve, controlling the pressure control solenoid pressure to the prescribed
hydraulic pressure.
SOLENOID REDUCING INCREASES

PRESSURE
HOLD PRESSURE
PRESSURE CONTROL
VALVE
HYDRAULIC SOLENOID PRESSURE
TO PRESSURE
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
0 1
DRAIN
ELECTRICAL
CURRENT VALUE [A]
am2zzn0000026
End Of Sie
SHIFT SOLENOID A, B AND C (DUTY-CYCLE TYPE) OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701110600
x A clutch pressure direct control, which supplies the clutch pressure directly to each clutch and/or brake, has
been adopted. A three-way duty-cycle type solenoids with excellent controllability have been adopted, to
improve response.
End Of Sie
SHIFT SOLENOID A, B AND C (DUTY-CYCLE TYPE) FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]
id051701110400
x The duty-cycle type shift solenoid adjusts the amount of output pressure according to the signal from the PCM,
and controls the pressure of each clutch.
05-17–25
TO MODEL INDEX

x The duty-cycle type shift solenoid, which switches
on/off at 50 Hz (20 ms cycle) and controls the
output pressure, is adopted. By changing the on
time ratio a cycle (0—100%), the solenoid adjusts
the time ratio of the open (supply) and close OUTPUT PORT
(CLUTCH PRESSURE)
(drain), and maintains the clutch pressure at the
designated hydraulic pressure. As a result, the
clutch pressure rises when the duty ratio (50 Hz
on time ratio) is reduced, and falls when the duty
ratio is raised.
End Of Sie
SUPPLY PORT
DRAIN (LINE PRESSURE)
am2zzn0000021
SHIFT SOLENOID A, B AND C (DUTY-CYCLE TYPE) OPERATION [FN4A-EL]

id051701110500
Open:When the electrical current does not flow, the supply port (line pressure) in the solenoid opens and is
engaged with the output port (clutch pressure). As a result, hydraulic pressure is supplied to the hydraulic
passage for the clutch pressure.
Close:When the electrical current flows, the supply port (line pressure) in the solenoid closes and the output port
(clutch pressure) and the drain port are engaged to drain the clutch pressure.
End Of Sie ELECTRICAL CURRENT OUTPUT PORT
DOES NOT FLOW (OPEN) (CLUTCH PRESSURE)
SUPPLY PORT
(LINE PRESSURE)
ELECTRICAL CURRENT
FLOWS (CLOSE) OUTPUT PORT
(CLUTCH
PRESSURE)
DRAIN
am2zzn0000021
SHIFT SOLENOID D AND E (ON/OFF TYPE) OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]

id051701110900
x A compact, light-weight three-way solenoid has been adopted for shift solenoids D and E to reduce
consumption discharge amount.
Shift solenoid Function
Shift solenoid D Switches the bypass valve and 3-4 shift valve.
Shift solenoid E Switches the low and reverse shift valve and TCC control valve.
End Of Sie
05-17–26
TO MODEL INDEX

SHIFT SOLENOID D AND E (ON/OFF TYPE) FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]
id051701110700
x An on/off type solenoid valve switches the supply
drain of output port according to the electrical
current flow switching.
End Of Sie
OUTPUT PORT
SUPPLY PORT
(SOLENOID REDUCING
PRESSURE)
DRAIN
am2zzn0000021
SHIFT SOLENOID D AND E (ON/OFF TYPE) OPERATION [FN4A-EL]

id051701110800
On: When the electrical current flows, the output port and the supply port (solenoid reducing pressure) are
engaged in the solenoid, and the output pressure becomes equivalent to the solenoid reducing pressure.
Off: When the electrical current does not flow, the output port and the drain port are engaged in the solenoid, and
the output pressure is drained.
End Of Sie
ELECTRICAL CURRENT
OUTPUT PORT
FLOWS
SUPPLY PORT
(SOLENOID REDUCING
PRESSURE)
ELECTRICAL CURRENT
DOES NOT FLOW OUTPUT PORT
DRAIN
am2zzn0000021
PCM FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]

id051701104800
Item Content
Shift control x Detects engine load condition and vehicle speed, and switches to the most suitable
gear position according to the preset shift diagram.
x In D range, automatically switches between POWER and NORMAL modes according
to accelerator pedal depressing speed.
TCC control x According to preset TCC point, performs TCC operation via smooth TCC.
Slope mode control x Changes the shift point to prevent frequent shifting up/down when climbing hills.
Line pressure control x Using linear type pressure control solenoid, adjusts line pressure according to engine
load condition and vehicle driving condition.
Clutch pressure direct control x With duty-cycle type shift solenoids A, B, and C, directly performs electronic control for
(Direct electric shift control) clutch engagement pressure according to engine load condition and vehicle driving
condition.
05-17–27
TO MODEL INDEX

Item Content
Feedback control x Performs real-time feedback correction for clutch engagement pressure to achieve
target shifts.
x Performs optimal correction for clutch engagement pressure to reduce changes in
engine performance and/or elapsed transaxle.
Engine-transaxle total control x Optimally controls engine output torque when shifting.
x Operates optimal clutch engagement pressure corresponding to engine output torque.
Control item
Clutch
pressure
direct Engine-
Component Line
Shift TCC Slope mode control Feedback transaxle
pressure
control control control (Direct control total
control
electric control
shift
control)
Input
HOLD switch X
TR switch X X X
APP sensor X X X X
Input/turbine speed
O X X X X
sensor
VSS X X X X X
Brake switch X
TFT sensor X X X X X
ECT sensor X
CKP sensor X X X X
MAF sensor X X X X X
Output
Pressure control solenoid X
Shift solenoid A X X X X X
Shift solenoid B X X X
Shift solenoid C X X X
Shift solenoid D X X
Shift solenoid E X X X
HOLD indicator light X
X : Available
O : Back up
End Of Sie
SHIFT CONTROL STRUCTURE [FN4A-EL]
id051701106300
Features
x The PCM selects and determines the shift diagram on the results of the range and driving mode judgements.
Then, based on shift diagram, the PCM sends the signal duty-cycle type solenoid valves and the ON/OFF type
solenoid valves, according to the VSS signal and the APP sensor signal, to perform shifting.
05-17–28
TO MODEL INDEX

Structure
SHIFT SOLENOID A
HOLD SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID B
TR SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID C
TFT SENSOR
SHIFT SOLENOID D
PCM
INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
SHIFT SOLENOID E
VSS
SELECTOR INDICATOR LIGHT
APP SENSOR
HOLD INDICATOR LIGHT
am2zzn0000024
End Of Sie
DRIVING MODE DETERMINATION OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701108000
D Range
x Non-HOLD and HOLD modes can be selected by switching the HOLD switch ON/OFF.
x When above a certain vehicle speed and the accelerator pedal depressing speed is above the preset value, the
driving mode is automatically switched to POWER mode, and shifts the shift point to high speed side.
x When the ATF temperature is high or low, each shift pattern switches automatically: when the ATF temperature
is high (above 128 qC {262 qF}), the torque converter clutch point is shifted to low speed side, and when the
ATF temperature is low (below -6 qC {21 qF}), 4GR is inhibited.
S, L Range
x Non-HOLD and HOLD modes can be selected by switching the HOLD switch ON/OFF.
End Of Sie
SLOPE MODE CONTROL OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701108500
x Climbing is determined based on the engine output torque and the vehicle acceleration, and the shift gear is
controlled to realize smooth vehicle driving.
Block diagram
SHIFT SOLENOID A
VSS
SHIFT SOLENOID B
BRAKE SWITCH PCM

SHIFT SOLENOID C
SHIFT SOLENOID D
MAF SENSOR
SHIFT SOLENOID E
am2zzn0000025
End Of Sie
SLOPE MODE CONTROL OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701108400
Climbing hill
x When the hill is steeper than a specified grade, unnecessary shift up is prevented by holding an appropriate
shift gear.
End Of Sie
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) CONTROL OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701108600
x The PCM selects and determines the TCC diagram based on the shift control results. With this TCC diagram,
and according to the signals from VSS, TP sensor, and other switches and sensors, the PCM sends the signal
to the duty-cycle type shift solenoids A and on/off type shift solenoid E to operate TCC control.
x Smooth TCC control, which engages the TCC gradually, has been adopted to reduce the shock when the TCC
engages.
05-17–29
TO MODEL INDEX
TFT SENSOR

SHIFT SOLENOID A
VSS
BRAKE SWITCH
PCM
ECT SENSOR
SHIFT SOLENOID E
APP SENSOR
CKP SENSOR
am2zzn0000025
End Of Sie
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701108700
TCC Release
x The PCM sends an OFF signal to shift solenoid E when the TCC is determined to be released. In this condition,
the TCC control valve is pushed to the right by the spring force, and torque converter pressure acts on the
torque converter front chamber, releasing the TCC from the converter cover.
05-17–30
TO MODEL INDEX
TORQUE CONVERTER
FRONT CHAMBER
TCC PISTON
OIL COOLER
TORQUE CONVERTER
PRESSURE
SHIFT SOLENOID E
OFF
SOLENOID
REDUCING
PRESSURE
• • • •• • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
am2zzn0000025
TCC Engaging Operation

x When the PCM determines that TCC operation is smooth, it sends an on signal to the shift solenoid E to push
the TCC control valve to the left. After engaging the torque converter front chamber and shift solenoid A, the
PCM gradually increases the signal of duty ratio (50 Hz ON time ratio) to shift solenoid A. As a result, the
torque converter pressure acted on the torque converter front chamber is drained gradually by shift solenoid A.
By reducing the torque converter pressure in the torque converter front chamber gradually in this way, the TCC
is pressed smoothly to the torque converter cover, and smooth TCC operation is possible.
05-17–31
TO MODEL INDEX
TORQUE CONVERTER
FRONT CHAMBER
TCC PISTON
TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER

PRESSURE
TORQUE CONVERTER
PRESSURE (DRAIN)
SHIFT SOLENOID E
ON
• • • •• • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
SHIFT SOLENOID A
TORQUE CONVERTER
PRESSURE (DRAIN)
am2zzn0000025
Determination of TCC Inhibition

x The TCC control is inhibited when any of the following conditions are met:
x Engine coolant temperature is below 60 qC {140 qF}
x ATF temperature is low
x Brake switch is on (when depressing the brake pedal)
x Accelerator depressing speed and accelerator opening angle are above specified value
x Engine speed signal is below specified value
x Malfunction is detected by diagnosis function
End Of Sie
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701108200
x The PCM determines the optimum line pressure and drives the liner-type pressure control solenoid based on
input signals in accordance with the vehicle driving conditions including the engine torque (calculated from
throttle opening angle, vehicle speed, engine speed, gear position, intake air rate, and other operational
parameters). As a result, the line pressure is controlled very accurately and closely.
05-17–32
TO MODEL INDEX
TR SWITCH
TFT SENSOR
VSS PCM PRESSURE CONTROL

SOLENOID
MAF SENSOR
APP SENSOR
CKP SENSOR
am2zzn0000024
LOW LINE PRESSURE
PRESSURE CONTROL PRESSURE

SOLENOID PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE
INCREASES
• •
LINE
PRESSURE CONTROL PRESSURE
SOLENOID DRAIN
HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE LINE
HIGH LINE PRESSURE PRESSURE
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID PRESSURE
0 1
LINE ELECTRICAL CURRENT
PRESSURE VALUE [A]
DRAIN
am2zzn0000024
End Of Sie
DIRECT ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]
id051701107900
x The PCM determines the optimum clutch engagement pressure and drives the duty-cycle shift solenoids based
on input signals in accordance with the vehicle driving conditions including the engine torque (calculated from
throttle opening angle, vehicle speed, engine speed, gear position, intake air rate, and other operational
parameters).
x By driving the duty-cycle solenoid valves, and performing the electronic control of the clutch engagement
pressure directly through the PCM, minute hydraulic control, which could not be obtained by the clutch
engagement pressure control with the accumulator, is obtained.
05-17–33
TO MODEL INDEX

Block diagram
TR SWITCH
TFT SENSOR
SHIFT SOLENOID A
VSS
SHIFT SOLENOID B
•• • • • •
MAF SENSOR
APP SENSOR SHIFT SOLENOID C
CKP SENSOR
am2zzn0000025
End Of Sie
DIRECT ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL OPERATION [FN4A-EL]
id051701107800
When Shifting No D or No R Shift
x When shifting No D or No R, the pressure control solenoid is driven to control the clutch engagement
pressure optimally.
Up-Down Shift
x The clutch engagement pressure is directly controlled to be optimal by the duty-cycle solenoid valves.
x When shifting 2GRo 3GR, 3GRo 4GR, 3GRo
2GR, or 4GRo 3GR, the clutch pressures of
engagement side and release side are controlled
CLUTCH
simultaneously. As a result, the clutch capacities
of both clutches are controlled relatively when
switching the clutches. This prevents sudden
increases in engine speed and clutch interlocks
during shifting, realizing smooth and responsive
shifting.
End Of Sie
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE

(DUTY-CYCLE TYPE)
WHEN SHIFTING
am2zzn0000019
FEEDBACK CONTROL OPERATION [FN4A-EL]

id051701108100
x When shifting, real-time feedback correction of the clutch engagement pressure is operated by the duty-cycle
solenoid valves so that the speed change of the turbine shaft (change of the turbine rotating speed) matches
the predetermined target value.
05-17–34
TO MODEL INDEX

x Also, the clutch engagement pressure is optimally
CONTROLS TURBINE CHANGE RATE
corrected so as to absorb the changes in engine AT START OF SHIFT SO THAT TARGET
performance and/or of elapsed transaxle, VALUE IS OBTAINED
according to the shift results in the past.
End Of Sie TARGET TURBINE
ROTATING SPEED
TURBINE
ROTATING
SPEED
TURBINE
ROTATING
SPEED
HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE CLUTCH
ENGAGEMENT
PRESSURE
TIME
PERFORMS FEEDBACK
CONTROL SO THAT TARGET
CHANGE RATE OF THE
TURBINE ROTATING SPEED
IS OBTAINED
am2zzn0000019
ENGINE-TRANSAXLE TOTAL CONTROL OPERATION [FN4A-EL]

id051701103400
x When shifting, engine output torque is reduced temporarily and the clutch is engaged smoothly by engine
ignition timing retard control to reduce the fluctuation of the output shaft torque during shifting.
x Engine output torque is estimated according to
the engine speed, intake air amount, etc., and the
clutch engagement pressure is determined
according to the engine output torque. Thus the
ENGINE
set accuracy of the clutch hydraulic pressure OUTPUT
control is improved, realizing smooth shifting. TORQUE WITHOUT ENGINE
End Of Sie IGNITION TIMING
RETARD CONTROL
WITH ENGINE
IGNITION TIMING
RETARD CONTROL
OUTPUT
SHAFT
TORQUE
TIME
am2zzn0000018
05-17–35
TO MODEL INDEX
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM
05-18 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM STRUCTURE . . . 05-18–4
MECHANISM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–1 SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . 05-18–4
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . 05-18–1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–5
SELECTOR LEVER OUTLINE . . . . . . . . 05-18–2 KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
SELECTOR LEVER STRUCTURE . . . . . 05-18–3 STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–5
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–3 KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . 05-18–4 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–5
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM OUTLINE
NG: SHIFT MECHANISM
id051800100100
Improved operability x Selector lever located in the center of dashboard

Mis-shift prevention x Shift lock system adopted
x Key interlock mechanism adopted
End Of Sie
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id051800100200
R.H.D.
KEY CYLINDER
LOCK UNIT
SELECTOR LEVER
INTERLOCK CABLE
SELECTOR CABLE
am2zzn0000034
End Of Sie
SELECTOR LEVER OUTLINE
id051800100300
x The selector lever has been positioned in the center of the dashboard, improving operability.
05-18–1
TO MODEL INDEX

SELECTOR LEVER STRUCTURE
id051800100400
x Mainly consists of a push button, guide pin, and interlock cam.
L.H.D. R.H.D.
PUSH
BUTTON
PUSH
BUTTON
GUIDE GUIDE
PIN PIN
INTERLOCK CAM INTERLOCK CAM
am2zzn0000035
Operation
x The interlock cam is locked in the position shown
in the figure when the brake pedal is not
PUSH BUTTON
depressed. In this condition, movement of the
guide pin is restricted by the interlock cam.
Therefore the selector lever cannot be shifted
from P to other positions.
GUIDE PIN
INTERLOCK CAM
am2zzn0000079
05-18–3
TO MODEL INDEX

x The interlock cam is unlocked when the brake
pedal is depressed. In this condition, the interlock
cam does not restrict movement of the guide pin,
PUSH BUTTON
allowing the selector lever to be shifted from P to
other positions.
End Of Sie
NG: SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
INTERLOCK CAM GUIDE PIN
am2zzn0000079
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE

id051800101000
x The shift-lock system is a device that prevents shifting of the selector lever from P to other positions when the
brake pedal is not depressed.
End Of Sie
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM STRUCTURE
id051800101100
x Mainly consists of the interlock cable and lock
LOCK UNIT
unit.
End Of Sie INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY CYLINDER SIDE
SELECTOR LEVER SIDE

am2zzn0000035
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OPERATION

id051800100800
x When the brake pedal is released, the slider pin is
BRAKE PEDAL CAM
positioned as shown in the figure. In this
SLIDER
condition, the slider pin restricts movement of the PIN
cam and slider block, therefore the interlock cable
cannot move to the selector lever side. As a
result, the selector lever cannot be shifted from P SELECTOR
to other positions. LEVER SIDE
SLIDER BLOCK
INTERLOCK CABLE
am2zzn0000035
05-18–4
TO MODEL INDEX

x When the brake pedal is depressed, the slider pin
BRAKE PEDAL CAM
is positioned as shown in the figure. In this
SLIDER
condition, the slider pin does not restrict PIN
movement of the cam and slider block, allowing
the interlock cable to move to the selector lever
side. As a result, the selector lever can be shifted
from P to other positions. SELECTOR
End Of Sie
NG: KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
LEVER SIDE
SLIDER BLOCK
INTERLOCK CABLE
am2zzn0000035
KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE

id051800100500
x The key interlock system is a device that allows the ignition switch to be turned to the LOCK position only when
the selector lever is in the P position.
End Of Sie
KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM STRUCTURE
id051800100900
x Mainly consists of the cable end, cam, and key cylinder.
KEY CYLINDER
CAM
CABLE END
am2zzn0000035
End Of Sie
KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM OPERATION
id051800100600
x When the selector lever is in the P position, the
cable end is positioned as shown in the figure. In
this condition, the cable end does not restrict the
cam rotation and the ignition switch can be turned
to the LOCK position.
CAM
CABLE END
am2zzn0000035
x When the selector lever is not in the P position,

the cable end is positioned as shown in the figure.
In this condition, the cable end restricts the cam
rotation so the ignition switch cannot be turned to
the LOCK position.
End Of Sie
CAM
CABLE END
am2zzn0000035
05-18–5
TO MODEL INDEX
PAGE 1 0F 2 CVT(CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSAXLE) [DJVA-EL]
05-19 CVT(CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSAXLE)

[DJVA-EL]
CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
TRANSAXLE) OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–17
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–2 OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
CVT (Continuously Variable CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
Transaxle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–2 [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–17
CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE GRADE SENSOR FUNCTION
TRANSAXLE) CROSS-SECTIONAL [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–17
VIEW [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–3 GRADE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
POWERTRAIN SYSTEM OUTLINE OPERATION [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–18
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–4 INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
POWERTRAIN SYSTEM OPERATION FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–18
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–4 INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
P, N position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–4 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
R position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–5 [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–18
D range (minimum speed variation PRIMARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR
ratio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–6 FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–18
D range (maximum speed variation PRIMARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR
ratio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–7 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
TORQUE CONVERTER OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–19
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–8 SECONDARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR
FORWARD/REVERSE SWITCHING FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–19
MECHANISM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . 05-19–9 SECONDARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR
STEPLESS-SPEED VARIATION CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
MECHANISM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . 05-19–9 [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–19
DECELERATION MECHANISM OUTLINE SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.1
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–9 FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–19
HYDRAULIC CONTROL MECHANISM SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.1
OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–10 OPERATION [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–20
OIL PUMP OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . 05-19–11 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.2
CONTROL VALVE BODY OUTLINE FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–20
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–11 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.2
COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE OPERATION [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–20
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–12 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM SOLENOID FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . 05-19–20
CONSTRUCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . 05-19–13 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM SOLENOID OPERATION [DJVA-EL] . . . 05-19–20
FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–13 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
Input/Output Signal Component ENGAGE SOLENOID FUNCTION
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–13 [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–20
Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–13 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
Input/Output Signal Component And ENGAGE SOLENOID OPERATION
Control Correlation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–14 [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–21
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM BELT GRIP PRESSURE LINEAR
STRUCTURAL VIEW [DJVA-EL] . . . . . 05-19–15 SOLENOID FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . 05-19–21
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH BELT GRIP PRESSURE LINEAR
FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–16 SOLENOID OPERATION
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–21
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION TCM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–21
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–16 AUTOMATIC SHIFT CONTROL OUTLINE
SS MODE SWITCH FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–23
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–16 Automatic Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–23
SS MODE SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/ D Range Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–23
OPERATION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–16 SS Mode Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–23
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE L Range Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–23
(TFT) SENSOR FUNCTION TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–16 CONTROL OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . 05-19–24
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE HIGH/LOW TEMPERATURE MODE
(TFT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/ CONTROL OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . 05-19–24
OPERATION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–17 Low Temperature Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–24
High Temperature Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–24
05-19–1
TO MODEL INDEX
PAGE 2 0F 2 CVT(CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSAXLE) [DJVA-EL]

NEUTRAL CONTROL OUTLINE GRADE SENSOR LEARNING OUTLINE
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–24 [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–24
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR LEARNING
OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–24
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
CVT(CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSAXLE) [DJVA-EL]
CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSAXLE) OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]

NG: CVT
id051901280000
CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle)
x CVT (Continuously Variable Transaxle) has been adopted with a newly developed DJVA-EL type TCC
mechanism.
x By enabling continuously changing gear ratios, the merits of CVT compared with a conventional step-type ATX
are as follows:
Fuel economy improvement
— Fuel economy is improved by enabling the vehicle to be driven in the best range for optimum engine
performance. A particular contribution to fuel economy has been made in the low vehicle speed range.
— Because of a wider gear ratio, the engine speed is reduced when driving at high speeds in high gear which
improves fuel economy.
Engine performance improvement
— Acceleration performance is improved
because acceleration can be maintained at
the maximum engine speed output. HIGH
ENGINE SPEED
CVT
STEP-TYPE
ATX
TIME
FULLY OPEN THROTTLE ACCELERATION
am3zzn0000289
— Smooth shifting and maximized engine HIGH

performance are possible without the uneven CVT
drive force of a step-type ATX.
STEP-TYPE
DRIVE FORCE
End Of Sie ATX

CVT DRIVE
1GR
FORCE
2GR UTILIZATION
3GR RANGE
4GR
WHEEL AXLE SPEED HIGH

DRIVE FORCE CHARACTERISTICS GRAPH
am3zzn0000289
05-19–2
TO MODEL INDEX

CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSAXLE) CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW [DJVA-EL]
id051901280100
PRIMARY PULLEY PLANETARY GEAR
TORQUE
CONVERTER
BELT
INPUT SHAFT
FORWARD
CLUTCH
REVERSE
BRAKE
REDUCTION DRIVE
GEAR
REDUCTION DRIVEN
GEAR
COUNTER GEAR
SECONDARY PULLEY
DIFFERENTIAL
am3zzn0000290
End Of Sie
NG: CVT POWERTRAIN MECHANISM
05-19–3
TO MODEL INDEX

POWERTRAIN SYSTEM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901280300
x The powertrain mechanism consists of the forward/reverse switching mechanism, the stepless-speed variation
mechanism, and the deceleration mechanism.
FORWARD/REVERSE
SWITCHING MECHANISM
PLANETARY GEAR
REVERSE BRAKE
STEPLESS-SPEED
VARIATION FORWARD CLUTCH
MECHANISM
PRIMARY PULLEY INPUT SHAFT
INPUT
BELT
REDUCTION DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY PULLEY
COUNTER GEAR REDUCTION DRIVEN GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
OUTPUT OUTPUT
DECELERATION MECHANISM
am2zzn0000136
End Of Sie
POWERTRAIN SYSTEM OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901280400
P, N position
Forward/reverse switching mechanism
Solenoid valve function
function Primary pulley
Shift control solenoid Shift control solenoid pressure
Forward clutch Reverse brake
No.1 No.2
Release Release OFF OFF Constant pressure
05-19–4
TO MODEL INDEX
PRIMARY PLANETARY REVERSE FORWARD

PULLEY GEAR BRAKE CLUTCH
PLANETARY GEAR
PULLEY
INPUT
OUTPUT
BELT
SECONDARY
PULLEY
am3zzn0000293
1 Torque converter rotates clockwise
2 Input shaft rotates clockwise
3 Sun gear rotates clockwise
4 Pinion gear No. 1 free-rotates counterclockwise, pinion gear No.2 free-rotates clockwise
5 Internal gear rotates clockwise without transmitting force to planetary gear
6 Because force is not transmitted, planetary gear does not rotate

am3zzn0000290
R position
No.1 No.2
Release Engage OFF Duty control Low pressure
05-19–5
TO MODEL INDEX

PULLEY PLANETARY GEAR
INPUT
OUTPUT
BELT
SECONDARY
PULLEY
am3zzn0000293
3 Sun gear rotates clockwise
4 Pinion gear No. 1 free-rotates counterclockwise, pinion gear No.2 free-rotates clockwise
Reverse brake operates. (Stops rotation of internal gear)
5 Planetary gear rotates counterclockwise based on reverse force of pinion gears No.1 and No.2
6 Primary pulley rotates counterclockwise
Secondary pulley increases/reduces counterclockwise rotation speed based on control of primary and
7 secondary pulley diameter depending on throttle opening angle.
8 Drive shaft rotates counterclockwise via reduction gear, differential

am2zzn0000136
D range (minimum speed variation ratio)

No.1 No.2
Engage Release OFF Duty control Low pressure
05-19–6
TO MODEL INDEX


Pulley width:
Wide
INPUT
Diameter:
Small
Diameter:
Large
OUTPUT
Pulley width: BELT

Narrow
SECONDARY
PULLEY
am3zzn0000294
Forward clutch operates.
3 Planetary carrier rotates clockwise 3 Sun gear rotates clockwise
4 Planetary gear rotates clockwise as a single unit because pinion gears No.1 and No. 2 cannot rotate freely.
5 Primary pulley rotates clockwise
6 Because primary pulley diameter is small and secondary pulley diameter is large, secondary pulley decelerates
and rotates clockwise
7 Drive shaft rotates clockwise via reduction gear, differential

am3zzn0000290
D range (maximum speed variation ratio)

No.1 No.2
Engage Release Duty control OFF High pressure
05-19–7
TO MODEL INDEX


Pulley width:
Narrow
INPUT
Diameter:
Large
Diameter:
Small
OUTPUT
BELT
Pulley width:
Wide
SECONDARY
PULLEY
am3zzn0000294
Forward clutch operates.
3 Planetary carrier rotates clockwise 3 Sun gear rotates clockwise
4 Planetary gear rotates clockwise as a single unit because pinion gears No.1 and No. 2 cannot rotate freely.
5 Primary pulley rotates clockwise
6 Because primary pulley diameter is large and secondary pulley diameter is small, secondary pulley accelerates
and rotates clockwise
7 Drive shaft rotates clockwise via reduction gear, differential

am3zzn0000290
End Of Sie
TORQUE CONVERTER OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901280500
x The torque converter consists mainly of the pump impeller, turbine runner, starter, and TCC.
x The torque converter transmits and amplifies torque by producing a current from the CVT fluid charge in the
torque converter.
x The engine and CVT are engaged by the operation of the TCC which improves fuel economy by enhancing the
transmission efficiency.
05-19–8
TO MODEL INDEX
CONBERTER CASE
PUMP IMPELLER
STATOR
INPUT SHAFT
OIL PUMP
TURBINE RUNNER
TCC
am3zzn0000294
End Of Sie
FORWARD/REVERSE SWITCHING MECHANISM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901280600
Forward clutch
x The forward clutch transmits drive force from the input shaft to the planetary gear via the wet-type multi-plate
clutch which engages during forward acceleration.
Reverse brake
x The reverse brake fixes the rotation of the internal gear via the wet-type multi-plate clutch which engages when
the vehicle is put in reverse.
Planetary gear
x A ravigneaux-type planetary gear has been adopted which switches the drive force and rotation direction
transmitted to the stepless shift mechanism by the engagement of the forward clutch and reverse brake.
End Of Sie
STEPLESS-SPEED VARIATION MECHANISM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901280700
x The stepless shift mechanism consists of the primary and secondary pulleys, and the belt which connects
them.
Primary pulley
SECONDARY PULLEY
x The primary pulley piston operates by oil pressure
to perform variable shifting across the width of the
primary pulley.
Belt BELT
x Consisting of metal elements and a metal link, the
drive force is transmitted to the secondary pulley PRIMARY PULLEY
from primary pulley by compression action of the
element.
Secondary pulley
x The secondary pulley piston operates by oil
pressure to maintain pull on the belt, which
am3zzn0000290
rotates variably across the width of the secondary
pulley, so that it does not slip.
End Of Sie
DECELERATION MECHANISM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901280800
x A deceleration function has been adopted which performs 2-step deceleration by first decelerating using the
drive gear-reduction driven gear, and then using the counter gear-differential.
05-19–9
TO MODEL INDEX
REDUCTION DRIVE GEAR

REDUCTION DRIVEN GEAR
COUNTER GEAR
SECONDARY PULLEY
DIFFERENTIAL
POWER TRANSMISSION
ROUTE
am3zzn0000294
End Of Sie
HYDRAULIC CONTROL MECHANISM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
NG: CVT HYDRAULIC PRESSURE CONTROL MECHANISM
id051901280900
x The oil pressure control mechanism consists mainly of the oil pump, control valve body, and the oil cooler.
x The manual shaft and solenoid valve operate according to the vehicle status and perform lubrication to each
part, switching of oil passages, and oil pressure adjustment.
05-19–10
TO MODEL INDEX
TCM
Sends signal
Operates PULLEY
TORQUE pressure
CONTROL VALVE BODY
Lubrication
SOLENOID LINEAR SOLENOID
Forward
and reverse
switching INPUT SHAFT
REGULATOR VALVE
Lubrication MODULATOR VALVE
Return Lubrication
OIL COOLER OIL PUMP
Return
Lubrication
CVT FLUID
am3zzn0000294
End Of Sie
OIL PUMP OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901281000
x The oil pump is driven directly by the torque converter to feed CVT fluid to the control valve body.
End Of Sie
CONTROL VALVE BODY OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901281100
x The control valve body, operated by a signal sent to the solenoid valve from the TCM in accordance with the
vehicle conditions, delivers the appropriate amount of oil pressure and oil quantity to the torque converter,
planetary gear, pulleys, and the clutch and brake based on the oil pressure produced by the oil pump.
05-19–11
TO MODEL INDEX

End Of Sie
CONTROL
VALVE BODY
am3zzn0000294
COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]

id051901281200
x A water cooled-type oil cooler has been adopted which shortens the CVT oil passage because it is installed
directly to the CVT.
x The CVT fluid is warmed when it is at low
temperature by the engine coolant and,
conversely, cooled when it is at high temperature.
End Of Sie
NG: CVT ELECTRONIC CONTROL MECHANISM
OIL COOLER
am3zzn0000294
05-19–12
TO MODEL INDEX

ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION [DJVA-EL]
id051901281300
Engine speed signal

GRADE
Throttle opening signal SENSOR
SIGNAL
Engine coolant
temperature signal
PCM TCM
Torque control signal

SS MODE
SWITCH
Engine torque signal SIGNAL
CAN
Position range signal
CVT fluid temperature signal
Input/turbine rotation signal
Primary pulley rotation signal
Oil pressure signal
Secondary pulley rotation

signal
Solenoid valve
ENGINE CVT
CONTROL
VALVE BODY
am2zzn0000125
End Of Sie
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id051901281400
Input/Output Signal Component Function
Input/output signal component Function
TR switch Detects selector lever position
SS mode switch Detects switching operation of SS mode switch
TFT sensor Detects CVT fluid temperature
Oil pressure sensor Detects belt grip
Input
Grade sensor Detects vehicle inclination
Input/turbine speed sensor Detects forward clutch drum rotation speed
Primary pulley speed sensor Detects primary pulley rotation speed
Secondary pulley speed sensor Detects secondary pulley rotation speed
Shift control solenoid No.1 Increases primary pulley pressure
Shift control solenoid No.2 Reduces primary pulley pressure
output TCC solenoid Opens/closes oil passages to engage TCC clutch
TCC engage solenoid Adjusts TCC engagement oil pressure
Belt grip pressure linear solenoid Adjusts belt grip pressure
Sends/receives information to and from external tester
CAN
based on multiplex communication
Control Function
Control Function
x Controls gear ratio according to driving conditions so that fuel economy performance
Auto shift control
and driving performance are optimum.
05-19–13
TO MODEL INDEX

Control Function
x Directly connects engine and CVT according to driving conditions so that transmission
TCC control
of drive force is improved
High/low temperature mode x Suppresses maximum engine speed to prevent overheating of CVT
control x Sets minimum engine speed higher to promote CVT warming
x Shifts to neutral when vehicle is stopped in a forward driving range to improve fuel
Neutral control
economy
Grade sensor learning x Learns vehicle horizontal point
Oil pressure sensor learning x Learns belt grip pressure
Input/Output Signal Component And Control Correlation

Control
Input/output signal High/low Oil pressure
component/signal Auto Shift Neutral Grade sensor
TCC control temperature sensor
Control control learning
mode control learning
Input
TR switch X X X X X
SS mode switch X X
TFT sensor X X X X
Oil pressure sensor X
Grade sensor X X
Input/turbine speed
X X
sensor
Primary pulley speed
X X X
sensor
Secondary pulley speed
X X X X X
sensor
Engine speed signal X X X X
Engine coolant
X X X
temperature signal
Throttle opening signal X X X X
Brake signal X
Output
Shift control solenoid No.1 X
Shift control solenoid No.2 X
TCC solenoid X
TCC engage solenoid X
X X
solenoid
X:Available
End Of Sie
05-19–14
TO MODEL INDEX

ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [DJVA-EL]
id051901281500
• O
• IL PRESSUER SENSOR • T
• R SWITCH
• S
• ECONDARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR
• I•NPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
• P
• RIMARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR
• T
• FT SENSOR
• S
• OLENOID VALVE
• S
• S MODE SWITCT
TCM
• G
• RADE SENSOR
• • IINPUT
•NPUT
• PARTS
• • O• UTPUT
OUTPUT
• PARTS
am2zzn0000126
End Of Sie
NG: CVT INPUT DEVICE
05-19–15
TO MODEL INDEX

TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id051901281600
x The TR switch detects the range position of the selector lever.
End Of Sie
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901281700
x The TR switch is connected to the manual shaft and installed to the transaxle case.
x The multi-position-type inhibitor switch changes
the internal circuit combination according to the
selector lever position. TR SWITCH
am3zzw0000850
Range Starter circuit Position circuit

/Position I H C G E F D A
P
R I G E C
N
H F D B A
D
L
Polarity
am2zzn0000126
End Of Sie
SS MODE SWITCH FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id051901281800
x The SS mode switch detects the switching operation of the SS mode switch.
End Of Sie
SS MODE SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901281900
x The SS mode switch is installed to the selector
lever.
x The contact point closes only when the
momentary-type SS mode switch is pressed. SS MODE SWITCH
x The automatic shift control in the TCM can be
switched to the SS mode using the SS mode
switch when the selector lever is in the D range. If
the automatic shift control in the TCM is switched
to the SS mode, the SS mode indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminates.
End Of Sie
am2zzn0000127
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]

id051901282000
x The TFT sensor detects the temperature of the CVT fluid in the oil pan.
End Of Sie
05-19–16
TO MODEL INDEX

TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901282100
x The TFT sensor is integrated with the coupler
component and installed to the control valve body.
TFT SENSOR
am3zzn0000294
x The sensor resistance value changes according HIGH

to the temperature of the CVT fluid.
End Of Sie
RESISTANCE
CVT FLUID HIGH
TEMPERATURE
am2zzn0000126
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]

id051901282200
x The oil pressure sensor detects the belt grip pressure.
End Of Sie
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901282300
x The oil pressure sensor is installed to the
transaxle side cover.
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
am3zzn0000295
x The output voltage of the oil pressure sensor

HIGH
changes according to the belt grip pressure.
End Of Sie
VOLTAGE
BELT GRIP HIGH

PRESSUER
am3zzn0000295
GRADE SENSOR FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]

id051901282400
x The grade sensor detects the inclination of the vehicle.
End Of Sie
05-19–17
TO MODEL INDEX

GRADE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901282500
x The grade sensor is installed to the body on the
bottom of the rear console.
GRADE SENSOR
am2zzn0000126
x The output voltage of the inclination sensor

HIGH
changes according to the inclination of the
vehicle.
End Of Sie
VOLTAGE
-90 0 +90
INCLINATION(˚)
am3zzn0000295
INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]

id051901282600
x The input/turbine speed sensor detects the rotation speed of the forward clutch drum.
End Of Sie
INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901282700
x The input speed sensor is installed to the
transaxle case having clearance with the forward
clutch drum.
x For every 1 rotation of the forward clutch drum, a
24-pulse signal waveform of the input speed
sensor is output.
INPUT SPEED SENSOR
am3zzn0000295
INPUT SPEED SENSOR

INPUT SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT WAVE PATTERN
TCM
FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM

am3zzn0000296
End Of Sie
PRIMARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id051901282800
x The primary pulley speed sensor detects the rotation speed of the primary pulley.
End Of Sie
05-19–18
TO MODEL INDEX

PRIMARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901282900
x The primary pulley speed sensor is installed to
the transaxle case having clearance with the
primary pulley cylinder of the primary pulley.
x For every 1 rotation of the primary pulley cylinder,
a 40-pulse signal waveform of the primary pulley
speed sensor is output.
PRIMARY PULLEY
SPEED SENSOR
am3zzn0000296
PRIMARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR PRIMARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR

OUTPUT WAVE PATTERN
TCM
PRIMARY PULLEY CYLINDER
am3zzn0000296
End Of Sie
SECONDARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
id051901283000
x The secondary pulley speed sensor detects the speed of the secondary pulley.
End Of Sie
SECONDARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901283100
x The secondary pulley speed sensor is installed to
the transaxle case having clearance with the SECONDARY PULLEY
parking lock gear of the secondary pulley. SPEED SENSOR
x For every 1 rotation of the parking lock gear, a 13-
pulse signal waveform of the secondary pulley
speed sensor is output.
am3zzn0000296
SECONDARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR

SECONDARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT WAVE PATTERN
TCM
PARKING LOCK GEAR

am3zzn0000296
End Of Sie
SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.1 FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]
NG: CVT OUTPUT DEVICE
id051901283200
x Shift control solenoid No.1 controls primary pulley pressure based on the control signal from the TCM.
End Of Sie
05-19–19
TO MODEL INDEX

SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.1 OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901283300
x Shift control solenoid No.1 is installed to the
control valve body.
x Shift control solenoid No.1 is a duty-type solenoid
which narrows the width of the primary pulley by
increasing the primary pulley pressure during
acceleration.
End Of Sie
SHIFT
CONTROL
SOLENOID NO.1
am2zzn0000135
SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.2 FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]

id051901283400
x The shift control solenoid No.2 controls primary pulley pressure based on the control signal from the TCM.
End Of Sie
SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.2 OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901283500
x Shift control solenoid No.2 is installed to the
control valve body.
x Shift control solenoid No.2 is a duty-type solenoid
which expands the width of the primary pulley by
decreasing the primary pulley pressure during
deceleration.
End Of Sie
SHIFT CONTROL
SOLENOID NO.2
am3zzn0000296
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) SOLENOID FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]

id051901283600
x The TCC solenoid opens and closes the oil passage to engage the TCC based on the control signal from the
TCM.
End Of Sie
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) SOLENOID OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901283700
x The TCC solenoid is installed to the control valve
body.
x The TCC solenoid is an ON/OFF type solenoid
which opens and closes the oil passage to
engage the TCC by controlling the ON/OFF
signal.
End Of Sie
TCC SOLENOID
am3zzn0000296
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) ENGAGE SOLENOID FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]

id051901283800
x The TCC engage solenoid controls the TCC engagement oil pressure based on the control signal from the
TCM.
End Of Sie
05-19–20
TO MODEL INDEX

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) ENGAGE SOLENOID OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901283900
x The TCC engage solenoid is installed to the
control valve body.
x The TCC engage solenoid is a duty-type solenoid
which adjusts the TCC engagement oil pressure
by controlling the duty signal to the solenoid.
End Of Sie
TCC ENGAGE
SOLENOID
am3zzn0000296
BELT GRIP PRESSURE LINEAR SOLENOID FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]

id051901284000
x The belt grip pressure linear solenoid controls belt grip pressure based on the control signal from the TCM.
End Of Sie
BELT GRIP PRESSURE LINEAR SOLENOID OPERATION [DJVA-EL]
id051901284100
x The belt grip pressure linear solenoid is installed
to the control valve body.
x The belt grip pressure linear solenoid is a linear-
type solenoid which adjusts belt grip pressure by
controlling the energization current to the
solenoid.
End Of Sie
NG: CVT TCM
BELT GRIP PRESSURE

LINEAR SOLENOID
am3zzn0000296
TCM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]

id051901284200
Terminal
A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7
A24 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18
adejjn00000767
05-19–21
TO MODEL INDEX

Wiring diagram
TCM
IG SWITCH
A6 B5
B14
A24
FUSE
BATTERY PRIMARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR

A19
A9
TR SWITCH
B20 SECONDARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR

B16
B1
B8 B6
B7
SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.1
B19
A15
SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.2

A14
SS MODE SWITCH
TCC SOLENOID
B21 A16
TCC ENGAGE SOLENOID
A5
TFT SENSOR
BELT GRIP PRESSUER LINEAR SOLENOID
A11
A4
A12 A2
OTHER MODULES
OIL PRESSUER SENSOR
A20 A17
A3
A7
A10
B4 DLC-2
GRADE SENSOR
A21
A22 A1
A13 A23
am2zzn0000126
End Of Sie
05-19–22
TO MODEL INDEX

AUTOMATIC SHIFT CONTROL OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901284300
Automatic Shift Control
x The CVT shift control sets the target input shaft rotation speed in the TCM based on information such as the
throttle opening angle, vehicle speed, and brake signal so that the optimum gear ratio and shift speed are
obtained. Also, to optimize the gear ratio, it also outputs signals to shift control solenoids No.1 and No.2 so that
the rotation speed obtained from the target input shaft rotation speed and the actual rotation speed from the
primary pulley speed sensor match.
Ascent Mode
x When the vehicle is driven on an up slope, the TCM determines that the vehicle is on an up slope based on the
signal from the PCM and the output rotation speed, and automatically switches the driving mode to ascent
mode. As a result, traction reduction is prevented.
Descent Mode
x When the vehicle is driven on a down slope, the TCM determines that the vehicle is on a down slope based on
the signal from the PCM and the output rotation speed, and automatically switches the driving mode to descent
mode. As a result, optimum engine braking occurs.
D Range Shifting
x Controls the gear ratio to obtain both fuel Maximum
economy and driving performance based on deceleration
information such as the throttle opening angle ratio
ROTATION AMOUNT
PRIMARY PULLEY
and vehicle speed.
Control range
Minimum
deceleration
ratio
VEHICLE SPEED
am3zzn0000297
SS Mode Shifting
x When the SS mode switch is pressed, the shift Maximum
control range on acceleration side is restricted, deceleration
optimum engine braking occurs, excellent shifting ratio
ROTATION AMOUNT
Control range
PRIMARY PULLEY
response is realized, and crisp and precise

driving is possible.
Minimum
deceleration
ratio
VEHICLE SPEED
am2zzn0000126
L Range Shifting
x Powerful engine braking is possible because the Maximum
shift control range is set to the maximum deceleration
deceleration side. ratio
ROTATION AMOUNT
Control range
PRIMARY PULLEY
End Of Sie
Minimum
deceleration
ratio
VEHICLE SPEED
am2zzn0000126
05-19–23
TO MODEL INDEX

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) CONTROL OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901284400
x Based on the TCC diagram, the TCC control performs TCC point control of the CVT by controlling the TCC
engagement solenoid from the vehicle speed and throttle opening angle.
End Of Sie
HIGH/LOW TEMPERATURE MODE CONTROL OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901288800
Low Temperature Mode
x The TCM determines if there is a cold condition based on the engine coolant temperature signal received from
the PCM.
x If a cold condition is determined, the TCM sets the minimum engine speed higher. As a result, warming of the
CVT is promoted by setting the minimum engine speed higher than normal.
High Temperature Mode

x The TCM determines if there is an excessive rise in oil temperature based on the CVT fluid temperature and
the engine coolant temperature signal received from the PCM.
x If it is determined that the oil temperature and water temperature have risen excessively, the TCM regulates the
maximum engine rotation speed. As a result, overheating of the CVT is prevented by setting the engine speed
lower than normal.
End Of Sie
NEUTRAL CONTROL OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901284700
x The TCM releases the forward clutch if the following conditions are met and shifts the CVT to neutral. As a
result, engine load is reduced, and fuel economy is improved by reducing drag loss in the torque converter.
— Vehicle stopped on flat road
— D range
— When brake pedal is depressed
x If the brake pedal is released during neutral control, the forward clutch is re-engaged, the normal CVT forward
drive conditions are enabled, and creep force occurs.
x The TCM detects the amount of vehicle inclination using the inclination sensor and does not implement neutral
control if it determines that the vehicle is on an ascending or descending road.
End Of Sie
GRADE SENSOR LEARNING OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901284800
x The TCM learns the horizontal point of the grade sensor to correctly detect the inclination of the vehicle.
x If the following parts are replaced, always implement the grade sensor learning using the Integrated
Diagnostic Software (IDS).
— TCM
— Grade sensor
x Perform the grade sensor learning on a flat road surface.
End Of Sie
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR LEARNING OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]
id051901284900
x The TCM learns the association between the oil pressure sensor and belt grip pressure to perform optimum
shifting.
x If the following parts are replaced, always perform oil pressure learning using the Integrated Diagnostic
Software (IDS).
— CVT
— TCM
— Oil pressre sensor
End Of Sie
05-19–24
TO MODEL INDEX
CVT(CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSAXLE) SHIFT MECHANISM
05-20 CVT(CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSAXLE)

SHIFT MECHANISM
CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM
TRANSAXLE) SHIFT MECHANISM STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–3
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–1 SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . 05-20–3
CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
TRANSAXLE) SHIFT MECHANISM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–4
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–1 KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
SELECTOR LEVER OUTLINE . . . . . . . . 05-20–1 STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–4
SELECTOR LEVER STRUCTURE . . . . . 05-20–2 KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–4
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . 05-20–3
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc
CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSAXLE) SHIFT MECHANISM OUTLINE
NG: SHIFT MECHANISM
id052000274500
x Selector lever located in the center of

Improved operability
dashboard
x Shift lock system adopted
x Key interlock mechanism adopted
End Of Sie
CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSAXLE) SHIFT MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id052000274600
KEY CYLINDER
LOCK UNIT
SELECTOR LEVER
INTERLOCK CABLE
SELECTOR CABLE
am2zzn0000130
End Of Sie
SELECTOR LEVER OUTLINE
id052000274700
x The selector lever has been positioned in the center of the dashboard, improving operability.
05-20–1
TO MODEL INDEX

End Of Sie
SELECTOR LEVER STRUCTURE

id052000274800
x Mainly consists of a push button, guide pin, and
interlock cam.
PUSH
BUTTON
GUIDE
PIN
INTERLOCK CAM
am2zzn0000126
Operation
x The interlock cam is locked in the position shown
in the figure when the brake pedal is not
PUSH BUTTON
depressed. In this condition, movement of the
guide pin is restricted by the interlock cam.
Therefore the selector lever cannot be shifted
from P to other positions.
GUIDE PIN
INTERLOCK CAM
am2zzn0000079
05-20–2
TO MODEL INDEX

x The interlock cam is unlocked when the brake
pedal is depressed. In this condition, the interlock
cam does not restrict movement of the guide pin,
PUSH BUTTON
allowing the selector lever to be shifted from P to
other positions.
End Of Sie
NG: SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
INTERLOCK CAM GUIDE PIN
am2zzn0000079
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE

id052000275200
x The shift-lock system is a device that prevents shifting of the selector lever from P to other positions when the
brake pedal is not depressed.
End Of Sie
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM STRUCTURE
id052000275300
x Mainly consists of the interlock cable and lock
LOCK UNIT
unit.
End Of Sie INTERLOCK CABLE
KEY CYLINDER SIDE
SELECTOR LEVER SIDE

am2zzn0000035
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OPERATION

id052000275400
x When the brake pedal is released, the slider pin is
BRAKE PEDAL CAM
positioned as shown in the figure. In this
SLIDER
condition, the slider pin restricts movement of the PIN
cam and slider block, therefore the interlock cable
cannot move to the selector lever side. As a
result, the selector lever cannot be shifted from P SELECTOR
to other positions. LEVER SIDE
SLIDER BLOCK
INTERLOCK CABLE
am2zzn0000035
05-20–3
TO MODEL INDEX

x When the brake pedal is depressed, the slider pin
BRAKE PEDAL CAM
is positioned as shown in the figure. In this
SLIDER
condition, the slider pin does not restrict PIN
movement of the cam and slider block, allowing
the interlock cable to move to the selector lever
side. As a result, the selector lever can be shifted
from P to other positions. SELECTOR
End Of Sie
NG: KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
LEVER SIDE
SLIDER BLOCK
INTERLOCK CABLE
am2zzn0000035
KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE

id052000274900
x The key interlock system is a device that allows the ignition switch to be turned to the LOCK position only when
the selector lever is in the P position.
End Of Sie
KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM STRUCTURE
id052000275000
x Mainly consists of the cable end, cam, and key cylinder.
KEY CYLINDER
CAM
CABLE END
am2zzn0000035
End Of Sie
KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM OPERATION
id052000275100
x When the selector lever is in the P position, the
cable end is positioned as shown in the figure. In
this condition, the cable end does not restrict the
cam rotation and the ignition switch can be turned
to the LOCK position.
CAM
CABLE END
am2zzn0000035
x When the selector lever is not in the P position,

the cable end is positioned as shown in the figure.
In this condition, the cable end restricts the cam
rotation so the ignition switch cannot be turned to
the LOCK position.
End Of Sie
CAM
CABLE END
am2zzn0000035
05-20–4
TO MODEL INDEX
STEERING 06
SECTION
Toc of SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-00

OUTLINE ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC. . . . 06-02 (EPS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
06-00
Toc of SCT OUTLINE
STEERING ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . 06-00–1 STEERING SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . 06-00–1
STEERING FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-00–1
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
STEERING ABBREVIATIONS
NG: STEERING
id060000100400

End Of Sie
STEERING FEATURES
id060000246600
Improved handling, fuel

x Column assist-type Electric Power Steering (EPS) adopted
economy, marketability
Improved operability x Steering column with tilt mechanism adopted
Improved safety x Steering column and shaft with energy absorbing mechanism adopted
x Enhanced malfunction diagnosis system for use with Mazda modular diagnostic system (M-
Improved serviceability
MDS)
End Of Sie
STEERING SPECIFICATIONS
id060000246000
Item Specification
Steering wheel
Maximum turns (turns) 2.7
Shaft type Collapsible design
Steering shaft Coupling type Cross-shaped joint design
Tilt amount (mm {in}) 50 {2.0}
Type Rack and pinion design
Steering gear and linkage
Rack stroke (mm {in}) 144.8—146.8 {5.701—5.779}
Power steering Power assist system Electric motor assist (Column assist type)
End Of Sie
06-00–1
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
06-02 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC

OUTLINE [ELECTRIC POWER PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION
STEERING (EPS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–1 [ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–1 (EPS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–3
FUNCTION [ELECTRIC POWER EXTERNAL TESTER
STEERING (EPS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–1 COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
Malfunction Detection Function . . . . . . 06-02–1 [ELECTRIC POWER
Malfunction Display Function . . . . . . . . 06-02–2 STEERING (EPS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–3
Memory Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–2 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–3
Fail-safe Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–2 DLC-2 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–4
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OUTLINE [ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)]
NG: ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
id0602002399a1
x The on-board diagnostic system consists of a malfunction detection system that detects abnormalities in input/
output signals when the ignition switch is at the ON position, a data monitor function that reads out specified
input/output signals.
into a single location, has been adopted, thereby improving serviceability. Diagnosis is performed by
connecting the Integrated Diagnostic Software(IDS) to the DLC-2.
x In addition to DTC read-out, the Integrated Diagnostic Sofware (IDS) is used to clear DTCs using the
display screen of the diagnostic tester, and to access the PID/data monitor, providing enhanced malfunction
diagnosis and improved serviceability.
Block Diagram
EPS CONTROL MODULE
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION EPS WARNING

LIGHT
MALFUNCTION
DISPLAY EXTERNAL
FUNCTION TESTER CAN
DLC-2
COMUNICATION DRIVER
MEMORY FUNCTION
FUNCTION
INTEGRATED
DIAGNOSTIC
SOFTWARE
(IDS)
MALFUNCTION
DETECTION PID/DATA MONITOR
FUNCTION FUNCTION
OTHER MODULE
FAIL-SAFE
FUNCTION
INPUT OUTPUT
EPS NORMAL CONTROL AREA
DEVICE DEVICE
am2zzn0000047
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION [ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)]
id0602002400a1
x The malfunction detection function detects malfunctions in the input/output signal system of the EPS control
module when the ignition switch is at the ON position or driving the vehicle.
06-02–1
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Malfunction Display Function
x When the malfunction detection function detects a malfunction, the EPS warning light illuminates or flashes to
advise the driver. Using the external tester communication function, DTCs can be output to the DLC-2 via the
CAN line. At the same time, malfunction detection results are sent to the memory and fail-safe functions.
x The EPS warning light may not illuminate depending on the detected malfunction.
Memory Function
x Since the EPS control module has a built-in non-volatile memory, DTCs are not cleared even if the battery is
removed. Therefore, it is necessary to clear the memory after performing repairs. Refer to the Workshop
Manual for the DTC clearing procedure.
Fail-safe Function
x When the malfunction detection function determines a malfunction, the EPS warning light illuminates or flashes
to advise the driver. At this time, the fail-safe function disables system control.
Fail-safe Function Table

DTC (Integrated Fail-safe function
System Malfunction Location Diagnostic Software EPS warning light
(iDS) display) Control status
illumination status
Steering angle sensor C1B00:2F Not illuminated Control enabled*1
Steering angle sensor C1B00:54 Illuminated*2 Control enabled*1
Steering angle sensor C1B00:61 Illuminated Control disabled
Steering angle sensor C1B00:62 Not illuminated Control enabled*1
Steering angle sensor (mis-assembly) C1B00:95 Illuminated*3 Control enabled*1
Torque sensor C200B:2F Illuminated Control disabled
Torque sensor C200B:61 Illuminated Control disabled
Torque sensor C200C:2F Illuminated Control disabled
EPS motor C200D:49 Illuminated Control disabled
CAN system communication error U0001:88 Illuminated Control enabled*1
CAN system communication error U0100:00 Not illuminated*4 Control disabled*5
EPS control module U0300:00 Not illuminated Control enabled*1
CAN system communication error U0401:00 Not illuminated*4 Control disabled*5
EPS motor U2011:49 Illuminated Control disabled
EPS motor U2011:61 Illuminated Control disabled
EPS configuration U2100:00 Illuminated Control disabled*5
EPS control module U3000:05 Illuminated Control disabled
EPS control module U3000:43 Not illuminated Control disabled
EPS control module U3000:46 Not illuminated Control disabled
Battery power supply U3003:16 Illuminated Control disabled
Battery power supply U3003:17 Illuminated Control disabled
*1 : Control is maintained in fail mode.
*2
: The EPS warning light illuminates when a present malfunction is detected. When the ignition switch is turned
off and then turned to the ON position after detecting a malfunction, the EPS warning light flashes if the
malfunction was caused by an incorrect installation, and re-illuminates if the cause is the EPS control module
internal malfunction.
*3
: Illuminates only when a present malfunction is detected. Does not illuminate when a past malfunction is
detected (Ignition switch is turned off after detection).
*4
: Illuminates if a malfunction is detected when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It does not
illuminate if a malfunction is detected after the engine is started.
06-02–2
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
*5
: Control is inhibited if a malfunction is detected when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. Control is
maintained in fail mode if a malfunction is detected after the engine is started.
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION [ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)]
id0602002397a1
EPS control module and reading them out in real-time.
Monitor item (Integrated
Diagnostic Software (IDS) Data contents Unit/Operation
display)
Circuit board temperature inside the EPS control
BOARD_T qC, qF
module
DTC_CNT DTC (amount detected)
ENG_RPM Engine speed RPM
MTR_CUR EPS motor control current A
SS_TRQ1 Steering torque Nm
SS_TRQ2 Steering torque Nm
STEER_ANGL Steering angle q
STEER_SPD Steering speed q/s
VPWR Power supply voltage V
VSPD Vehicle speed KPH, MPH
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM EXTERNAL TESTER COMMUNICATION FUNCTION [ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING (EPS)]
id0602002398a1
Outline
output signal read-outs) between the EPS control module and an external tester.
Connections and Communication Contents

External tester
Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS)
On-board diagnostic (malfunction
Input/output: CAN_H (HS), CAN_L (HS) Serial communication
detection) function
PID/DATA monitor function Input/output: CAN_H (HS), CAN_L (HS) Serial communication
the same line.
received between the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) and the EPS control module via the CAN
line.
x The EPS control module receives the command signals of the malfunction detection function, PID/data monitor
function from the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS), and sends DTCs and data regarding the
operating condition and status of each input/output part to the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
DLC-2
am2zzw0000126
06-02–3
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC

monitor item item
End Of Sie
DLC-2 CONSTRUCTION
id060200239600
added.
been adopted for this connector. The connector has a 16-pin construction that includes the CAN_L (HS),
CAN_H (HS), CAN_L (MS), CAN_H (MS), GND1, GND2 and B+ terminals.
DLC-2
CAN_L CAN_L
B+
(HS) (MS)
CAN_H CAN_H
GND2 GND1
(HS) (MS)
am2zzn0000048
Terminal Function
End Of Sie
06-02–4
TO MODEL INDEX
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
06-13 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–12
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–1 REDUCTION GEAR CONSTRUCTION AND
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–12
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–3 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–12
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–13
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . 06-13–5 TORQUE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION AND
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–13
CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION . . 06-13–5 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–13
Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–14
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–6 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
Component Parts and Function . . . . . . 06-13–6 CONTROL MODULE CONSTRUCTION
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–14
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–7 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–14
STEERING COLUMN AND SHAFT Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–15
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–8 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
STEERING COLUMN AND SHAFT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–16
CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION . . 06-13–9 Data sent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–16
Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–9 Data received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–16
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–9 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) WARNING LIGHT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . 06-13–16
MOTOR CONSTRUCTION AND ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–11 WARNING LIGHT OPERATION . . . . . . . 06-13–16
Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–11
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) OUTLINE
NG: ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
id061300246000
x A column assist-type EPS has been adopted for all models.
x EPS provides smooth handling from low to high speeds as a result of the excellent steering feel provided by the
electronic control and the vehicle-speed responsive control.
x EPS does not require a power steering oil pump and generates assist force only when the steering wheel is
steered. As a result, engine load is lowered and fuel efficiency is improved.
Warning
x Always inspect the steering component carefully for any shock or impact which may have
occurred during a collision or servicing operation. If a damaged part or a part suspected of being
damaged is used, it could result in an unexpected accident due to the steering mechanism being
inoperative. Always replace the damaged part or part suspected of being damaged.
x If the steering mechanism is turned from lock to lock continuously or the steering rack terminal
limit is reached repeatedly, such high-load steering action increases the temperature of the
steering column (to approx. 85 °C {185°F}), causing severe burns. Be careful when handling the
steering column.
x Turn off the ignition switch when servicing the vehicle with the tires raised such as when the
vehicle is lifted. Otherwise, the steering mechanism may actuate accidentally while servicing,
resulting in serious injury. Set the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove the
key to lock the steering wheel before performing the procedure. If the procedure needs to be
performed with the ignition switch ON or the engine running, remove the main fuse (EPAS 60A)
from the EPS system before servicing.
x Handling the air bag module improperly when working on the steering component parts can
accidentally deploy the air bag, causing serious injury. Read the service warnings/cautions in the
Workshop Manual before handling the air bag module.
x If the steering column is dropped, the EPS control module could be damaged internally causing
the steering mechanism to become inoperative, which could result in an unexpected accident.
Always replace the steering column if it has been subjected to an impact.
Caution
x If the steering column is stored in a humid place, the EPS system may not operate properly when
installed to the vehicle. Store the steering column in a suitable place.
x If the steering shaft is installed after it has been rotated 360 degrees once accidentally while
servicing, the absolute steering angle position is erased from the EPS control module and a
steering angle sensor malfunction is detected. After servicing, always carry out the EPS steering
angle configuration so that the EPS operates normally.
06-13–1
TO MODEL INDEX

x Before performing the work on the steering wheel, set the steering wheel to the straight-ahead
position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, then turn the ignition switch off. Without
this procedure, a malfunction may occur in the EPS system after completing the work on the
steering system.
x Be careful when handling the steering column because it weighs approximately 10 kg {22 lb} and it
could fall off and be damaged while servicing.
x If the intermediate shaft is connected to the steering gear (pinion) before installing the steering
column to the dashboard member, the weight of the steering column could cause damage to the
intermediate shaft slider/bush/yoke. Always follow the procedure in the Workshop Manual.
x The universal joint could be damaged if subjected to an impact when the intermediate shaft
(pinion) is disconnected. Perform the servicing carefully avoiding impact when disconnecting the
intermediate shaft from the steering gear (pinion).
x Do not touch the EPS control module connector terminals, since static electricity could damage
the electronic circuit.
x Do not release the lock of the tilt lever when handling the steering column unless it is securely
installed to the dashboard member. If the tilt lever is unlocked with the steering column not
securely installed, the steering column and other parts could be damaged.
x A new steering column is shipped in a pre-set condition. Maintain this condition until the steering
column is completely installed to the dashboard member so as to avoid damage during
transportation and installation.
x When removing/installing the steering column, keep the wiring harness away from the steering
column installation area so as to prevent the steering column from being caught in the wiring
harness and damaged.
Note
x When installing a replacement part, be careful not to rotate the steering shaft until the installation has
been completed.
x In order to completely interrupt the EPS system power supply, do not disconnect the battery for 20 s or
more after the ignition switch is turned off.
x Do not replace the steering column (EPS system) with that of another vehicle even if they are the same
model.
x Before connecting the EPS control module connector, remove the fuse or disconnect the battery to
interrupt the power supply completely.
x Verify that all the connectors are securely connected after finishing the work on the steering system.
End Of Sie
06-13–2
TO MODEL INDEX

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) STRUCTURAL VIEW
R.H.D.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
STEERING WHEEL
EPS WARNING LIGHT
STEERING COLUMN
IINTERMEDIATE SHAFT
PCM (ZJ, ZY)
PCM
(MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo,
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
am2zzn0000122
End Of Sie
06-13–4
TO MODEL INDEX

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id061300246200
STEERING COLUMN
EPS CONTROL MODULE EPS MOTOR
POWER RELAY
EPAS 60A
3A
ENG 10A
1F
IG SW
BATTERY
2A
MOTOR
RELAY
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CAN_H
1G CAN
CAN
DRIVER 1H DRIVER
CAN_L
EPS PCM
WARNING
TORQE SENSOR
LIGHT
CAN
DRIVER
DLC-2
am2zzw0000034
End Of Sie
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
id061300246300
Construction
x The EPS consists of the following parts:
— Electric assist and manual steering mechanism
Consists of the steering wheel, steering column, intermediate shaft, steering gear and linkage, reduction
gears integrated in the steering column, and EPS motor.
— Control system
Consists of the EPS control module, reduction gear, EPS motor and torque sensor integrated in the
steering column, PCM, and vehicle speed/engine speed/condition signals input from the PCM.
06-13–5
TO MODEL INDEX
STEERING WHEEL STEERING COLUMN BATTERY POWER

SUPPLY
SENSOR
SIGNAL IGNITION POWER
SUPPLY
SENSOR EPS
POWER CONTROL
SUPPLY MODULE CAN LINE PCM,
INSTRUMENT
TORQUE —VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CLUSTER,
SENSOR —VEHICLE STATUS SIGNALS DSC HU/CM
—ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
EPS MOTOR —STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL
DRIVE
DECELERATION EPS CURRENT
DEVICE MOTOR
EPS MOTOR POSITION SIGNAL
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
acmzzc00000028
Operation
x The EPS assists the manual steering mechanism operation using the EPS motor to provide supplemental
manual power during steering operation, reducing the load on the driver.
Manual steering mechanism operation

x The steering force, generated when the driver operates the steering wheel, is transmitted to the wheels and
tires via the steering column, intermediate shaft, and steering gear and linkage.
Control system operation

x The torque sensor detects the steering force (road surface reaction force) according to the steering action of
the driver, converts it to an electric signal, and then inputs it to the EPS control module.
x The EPS control module determines optimum assist force per each vehicle speed signal based on the signals
from the torque sensor, and outputs current to drive the EPS motor.
Power assist mechanism operation

x The EPS motor is driven by the current from the EPS control module and the force is transmitted to the
intermediate shaft via the reduction gears, thus assisting steering operation of the driver.
Component Parts and Function

Part name Function
Steering wheel x Transmits steering force from the driver to the steering column.
06-13–6
TO MODEL INDEX

Part name Function
x Detects steering force and outputs it to the EPS control module as
Torque sensor
an electric signal.
x Control the current to the EPS motor based on the electric signals
from the torque sensor and vehicle speed signals from the PCM.
x Controls the on-board diagnostic system and fail-safe function
EPS control module
when a malfunction is detected in the EPS system.
Steering column x Transmits the steering angle signal via CAN lines to the DSC HU/
CM.
x Generates drive force based on the target current from the EPS
EPS motor
control module.
x Transmits the drive force from the EPS motor to the intermediate
Reduction gear
shaft.
x Transmits the drive force from the reduction gear to the steering
Intermediate shaft
gear and linkage.
x Transmits the drive force from the intermediate shaft to the wheels
Steering gear and linkage
and tires.
x Outputs vehicle speed signal to the EPS control module via the
PCM
CAN lines.
x Alerts the driver by illuminating/flashing the EPS warning according
Instrument cluster to the signals from the EPS control module if the EPS has a
malfunction.
End Of Sie
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE CONSTRUCTION
NG: STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
id061300246400
x A size and weight-reduced rack and pinion system steering gear has been adopted.
x Response and handling stability have been improved by the heightened support rigidity due to the integration of
the steering gear mounts (three locations) and gear housing.
06-13–7
TO MODEL INDEX
SEC. A—A
B C D
A A
D
B C
SEC. B—B SEC. C—C SEC. D—D
am2zzn0000052
End Of Sie
STEERING COLUMN AND SHAFT OUTLINE
NG: STEERING COLUMN AND SHAFT
id061300246500
x A steering column, in which the Electric Power Steering (EPS) control module, torque sensor, EPS motor, and
reduction gears are integrated, has been adopted to simplify the construction.
x A steering column equipped with a tilt mechanism has been adopted for improved operability.
x A steering shaft and intermediate shaft with impact-absorbing mechanism have been adopted for improved
safety.
End Of Sie
06-13–8
TO MODEL INDEX

STEERING COLUMN AND SHAFT CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
id061300246600
Construction
x The steering column consists of the Electric Power Steering (EPS) control module, torque sensor, EPS motor,
and reduction gears, steering shaft, and the intermediate shaft.
STEERING SHAFT
EPS CONTROL MODULE
EPS MOTOR
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT REDUCTION GEAR

TORQUE SENSOR
acmzzc00000029
x As a result of impact absorbing mechanisms on the steering shaft and intermediate shaft, when a collision
occurs, the steering shaft effectively absorbs the impact energy that would be transmitted to the driver, thereby
reducing injury.
Intermediate shaft construction
YOKE SLIDER YOKE
(STEERING (STEERING
GEAR SIDE) SHAFT SIDE)
BUSH
am2zzn0000080
Operation
EPS mechanism
x The EPS control module drives the EPS motor based on the signals from the torque sensor and the vehicle
speed signals from the PCM to transmit the assist torque to the intermediate shaft via the reduction gears.
06-13–9
TO MODEL INDEX

Impact absorbing mechanism
x At the moment of a collision, the rearward collapse of the steering gear (first stage impact) due to impact
energy from the front causes the intermediate shaft to contract, effectively absorbing and softening the impact
on the driver.
x When the steering wheel contacts the body of the driver (second stage impact), the capsule rivet is sheared
and the bracket and outer tube slide as a single unit along the slider and inner tube. At that time, the outer tube
utilizes slide resistance during the slide to absorb impact energy.
INNER TUBE
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
CAPSULE
FIRST STAGE IMPACT
FUSE
FIRST STAGE IMPACT

ABSORPTION
SLIDER
BRACKET
OUTER TUBE
SECOND STAGE IMPACT SECOND STAGE IMPACT

ABSORPTION
am2zzn0000052
Tilt mechanism
x The steering wheel can be adjusted upward or downward when the tilt lever is pulled to the driver's side and the
tilt mechanism is unlocked.
x The tilt mechanism has a stepless, 50 mm {2.0 in} upward/downward adjustment range.
06-13–10
TO MODEL INDEX
TILT AMOUNT
50 mm {2.0 in}
LOCK RELEASE
LOCK
TILT LEVER
am2zzn0000031
End Of Sie
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) MOTOR CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
NG: ELECTRIC POWER STEERING MOTOR
id061300246700
Construction
x The EPS motor is integrated with the steering column.
x The EPS motor is a brushless motor which consists of a three-phase star-connected stator, a permanent
magnet rotor, and Hall element sensors.
06-13–11
TO MODEL INDEX
EPS MOTOR
acmzzc00000030
Operation
x Current flows from the EPS control module to the stator to rotate the motor axis which is integrated with the
rotor.
x Hall element sensors, which are integrated with the EPS motor and detect the rotor position, transmit the rotor
position to the EPS control module.
x Based on the rotor position input from the Hall element sensors, the EPS control module switches the current
flow to each stator.
End Of Sie
REDUCTION GEAR CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
NG: REDUCTION GEAR
id061300246800
Construction
x The reduction gear consists of the worm wheel located on the steering column main shaft and the worm shaft
connected to the Electric Power Steering (EPS) motor, and is integrated with the steering column.
06-13–12
TO MODEL INDEX
REDUCTION GEAR
acmzzc00000031
Operation
x The assist torque generated by the EPS motor is transmitted to the worm wheel via the worm shaft drives the
steering column main shaft.
x The assist torque from the EPS motor is amplified by the reduction ratio (20.5:1) between the worm shaft and
worm wheel, and is transmitted to the steering column main shaft.
End Of Sie
TORQUE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
NG: TORQUE SENSOR
id061300246900
Construction
x The torque sensor, which is located on the shaft of the steering column, detects the steering torque and the
steering direction, and outputs the signal to the Electric Power Steering (EPS) control module.
x The torque sensor is an optical torque sensor which consists of an input shaft disc, output shaft disc, light pipes
(light guide), LEDs, and linear array detectors.
06-13–13
TO MODEL INDEX
TORQUE SENSOR
acmzzc00000032
Operation
x A semi-transparent planer disc which has slits along its perimeter is located on the input shaft, and another
similar disc is located on the output shaft.
x The input shaft and output shaft are engaged by the torsion bar. When the driver operates the steering wheel,
torsion occurs on the torsion bar due to the steering force input to the input shaft and the road surface
resistance on the steering gear side.
x Torsion to the torsion bar causes the input and output shafts to move relative to each other. Due to this, the
discs on each shaft also move relative to each other.
x The slits on each disc are arranged such that no two slits are located in the same position on either disc. This
arrangement changes the brightness of the light from the LED which strikes the linear array detection device
via the light pipe.
x The linear array detection device converts the change in brightness to an electrical signal which is output to the
EPS control module.
x The two electrical signals output from the torque sensor are calculated in the EPS control module, and the
average is used for various control as the steering torque signal.
End Of Sie
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) CONTROL MODULE CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
NG: ELECTRIC POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE
id061300247100
Construction
x The EPS control module is integrated with the steering column.
x The module calculates the proper assist current based on the signal from the torque sensor installed on the
steering column, and the vehicle speed signals from the PCM using CAN communication, and then outputs the
control current to the EPS motor.
Function table
Control items Function
x Calculates the proper assist current based on the steering force, and the vehicle and engine
Motor current control
speeds, and outputs a target current to the EPS motor.
x Important parts of the system control have an on-board diagnostic function. In case a
malfunction occurs, the EPS warning light illuminates to inform the driver and, at the same
On-board diagnostic
time, a DTC is stored in the EPS CM.
function
x When a malfunction is determined as a result of the on-board diagnosis, system control is
suspended or limited to prevent any dangerous occurrence while driving.
06-13–14
TO MODEL INDEX

Control items Function
x The configuration function according to the suspension type has been adopted to optimize the
Configuration function
steering characteristic.
Block Diagram
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
EPS WARNING
LIGHT
EPS WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATION

STEERING COLUMN COMMAND SIGNAL (CAN)
EPS CONTROL MODULE
EPS MOTOR
SIGNAL
STEERING EPS
FORCE CONTROL
MOTOR
SIGNAL CURRENT
TORQUE TORQUE SENSOR TORQUE CONTROL MOTOR CONTROL
SENSOR SIGNAL CALCULATION CALCULATION
PROCESSING
CURRENT
MOTOR
SIGNAL
CURRENT
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL (CAN)
PCM
am2zzn0000080
Operation
Motor current control
x The optimum assist current is calculated based on the steering force signal from the torque sensor and the
vehicle speed signal from the PCM, and then the control current is output to the EPS motor.
x Also, various control corrections are performed according to the vehicle driving conditions.
TORQUE SENSOR TORQUE CONTROL CALCULATION

SIGNAL PROCESSING MOTOR
CONTROL
STEERING ASSIST AND CALCULATION
FORCE SIGNAL STABILITY CONTROL
STEERING SPEED YAW DAMPING

COMMAND
SIGNAL CONTROL MOTOR
ASSIST TORQUE TORQUE
CONTROL CURRENT
STEERING ANGLE
ACTIVE RETURN CONTROL
SENSOR
(ABSOLUTE CONTROL
STEERING ANGLE)
STEERING FORCE TORQUE DAMPING

SIGNAL CONTROL
am2zzn0000080
Assist and Stability Control

x The assist and stability control is calculated based on the steering force signal and the vehicle speed signal
from the PCM, which then becomes the basic current for driving the EPS motor.
06-13–15
TO MODEL INDEX

Yaw Damping Control
x The yaw damping control compensates for the influence caused by the revolution inertia of the EPS motor
(insufficient torque when starting, torque continuance when stopping).
x The control current is calculated based on the steering speed signal.
Active Return Control

x The active return control corrects the steering wheel recovery force.
x The control current is calculated based on the steering angle signal (absolute steering angle) and the vehicle
speed signal.
Torque Damping Control

1. The torque damping control reduces minute vibrations (kick-back) transmitted to the steering wheel from the
road surface by correcting the control current to the EPS motor.
2. The control current is calculated based on the steering force signal and the vehicle speed signal.
System Overheating Protection Control

x The system overheating protection control lowers the current output to the EPS motor if the steering
mechanism is turned from lock to lock continuously or the steering rack turning limit is reached repeatedly.
Note
x During system overheating protection control, the assist force will feel weaker due to a decrease in the
control current. This is normal for the EPS control module to prevent the EPS motor from burning or
seizure, and it does not indicate a malfunction.
x While the assist force weakens during this period of time, steering operation can be performed.
x The current output returns to normal if the temperature in the system decreases to the normal operation
temperature.
Note
x The temperature decreases to the normal operation temperature within 2 min unless a steering
operation is performed, and the system returns to normal control conditions. If a steering operation is
performed, the time required to return to normal control conditions is extended.
End Of Sie
id061300247400
x The Electric Power Steering (EPS) control module sends and receives data to and from other modules via the
CAN. Refer to Section 09 for a detailed explanation of the CAN system. (See 09-40-7 CONTROLLER AREA
NETWORK (CAN) SYSTEM OUTLINE.)
Data sent
x EPS condition
x Steering angle
Data received
x Engine condition
x Vehicle speed
x Engine speed
End Of Sie
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) WARNING LIGHT FUNCTION
NG: EPS WARNING LIGHT
id061300247500
x The EPS warning light is integrated in the instrument cluster, and if the system has a malfunction, it illuminates
or flashes to alert the driver.
End Of Sie
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) WARNING LIGHT OPERATION
id061300247600
x When the EPS and CAN lines are normal, the EPS warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position and turns off when the engine is started for a bulb check.If the system has a malfunction, the
EPS warning light stays illuminated.
x The EPS warning light normally illuminates when the system is malfunctioning. However, it flashes if any of the
following conditions are met:
— The steering column is replaced (in initial condition)
— The steering column is removed and then installed with the steering shaft rotated 360 degrees (single
rotation) or more (incorrect installation)
— The intermediate shaft is disconnected and then connected with the steering shaft rotated 360 degrees
(single rotation) or more (incorrect installation)
06-13–16
TO MODEL INDEX

End Of Sie
EPS WARNING LIGHT
am2zzn0000051
06-13–17
TO MODEL INDEX

AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 07
SECTION
Toc of SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00

OUTLINE CONTROL SYSTEM[FULL-AUTO
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC AIR CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . 07-40A
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONTROL SYSTEM[MANUAL
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . 07-02 AIR CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . 07-40B
BASIC SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Toc of SCT
07-00 OUTLINE
HVAC ABBREVIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–1 HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [FULL-AUTO
HVAC FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–2 AIR CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–4
HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [FULL-AUTO AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
AIR CONDITIONER Manufactured Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–4
(MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–2 Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
Basic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–2 Manufactured Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–5
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–2 HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [MANUAL AIR
HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–6
CONDITIONER (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))] . . . . 07-00–3 AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
Basic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–3 Manufactured Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–6
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–3 Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
Manufactured Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–8
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
HVAC ABBREVIATION
A/C Air Conditioning id070000100100
BCM Body Control Module

B+ Battery Positive Voltage
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code(s)
HI High
HVAC Heater, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
IG Ignition
LH Left Hand
LO Low
M Motor
MAX Maximum
OFF Switch Off
ON Switch On
POWER
Power Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect
MOS
Transistor
FET
PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient
REC Recirculate
RH Right Hand
SW Switch
TNS Tail Number Side
End Of Sie
07-00–1
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
HVAC FEATURES
id070000100200
Size/weight reduction x A/C unit adopted with cooling, heating, and air blow functions integrated
Improved air conditioning performance x Sub-cooling system to multi-flow condenser adopted
Improved comfort x Air filter adopted
Reduced fuel consumption when the A/C x Refrigerant pressure switch with medium-pressure switch adopted
is operating (Reduced idling increase
amount when A/C compressor is
operating)
Improved operability x Climate control unit with enlarged operation dial and switch adopted
End Of Sie
HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))]
id0700001003b2
Basic System
Item Specification
Heating capacity (kW {kcal/h}) 5.2 {4,471}
L.H.D.: 4.8 {4,127}
Cooling capacity (kW {kcal/h})
R.H.D.: 4.7 {4,041}
Type R-134a
Refrigerant Regular amount
(g {oz}) 500—550 {17.7—19.4}
(approx. quantity)
Type Rotary scroll
(ml {cc, fl
Discharge capacity 86.5 {86.5, 2.9}
oz})
A/C compressor Max. allowable speed (rpm) 8,100
Type FD46XG
Lube oil Sealed volume (ml {cc, fl
120 {120, 4.06}
(approx. quantity) oz})
Type Multiflow
Condenser
Radiated heat (kW {kcal/h}) 5.4 {4,643}
(ml {cc, fl
Capacity 240 {240, 8.12}
Receiver/drier oz})
Desiccant Synthetic zeolite
Expansion valve Type Block type
Evaporator Type Tube fin type
Temperature control Reheat full air mix type
Control System
Item Specification
Airflow volume
(during heater operation)
Blower motor (m3/h) 250
Electricity consumption
Blower motor (W) 170
Heating capacity PTC heater (kW {kcal/h}) 0.95
PTC heater (W) 950
(MAX HOT operation)
Airflow volume (during air
conditioner operation)
Electricity consumption Blower motor (W) 200
(during air conditioner
operation) Magnetic clutch (W) 46
Magnetic clutch clearance (mm {in}) 0.35—0.75 {0.014—0.029}
Fan type Blower motor Sirocco fan
Type Capacitance type
Refrigerant pressure (See 07-40A-16 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
sensor Sensor operation SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].)
07-00–2
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Item Specification
Solar radiation sensor Photodiode
Ambient temperature sensor
Sensor
Cabin temperature sensor Thermistor
Evaporator temperature sensor
Air intake actuator Mechanical lock type
Actuator Air mix actuator
Potentiometer type
Airflow mode actuator
End Of Sie
HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))]
id0700001003b3
Basic System
Item Specification
L.H.D.: 4.8 {4,127}
R.H.D.: 4.7 {4,041}
Type R-134a
(g {oz}) 500—550 {17.7—19.4}
(approx. quantity)
Type Rotary scroll
(ml {cc, fl
Discharge capacity 86.5 {86.5, 2.9}
oz})
Type FD46XG
120 {120, 4.06}
Type Multiflow
Condenser
(ml {cc, fl
Capacity 240 {240, 8.12}
Receiver/drier oz})
Control System
Item Specification
Airflow volume
PTC heater (W) 950
(MAX HOT operation)
Refrigerant pressure (See 07-40B-12 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
sensor Sensor operation SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
Sensor Evaporator temperature sensor Thermistor
End Of Sie
07-00–3
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id070000104700
AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles
Basic system
Item Specification
Cooling capacity (kW {kcal/h}) 4.8 {4,127}
Type R-134a
(g {oz}) 470—500 {16.6—17.6}
(approx. quantity)
Type Vane-rotary
(ml {cc, fl
Discharge capacity 90 {90, 3.0}
oz})
Type ATMOS GU10
110 {110, 3.72}
Type Multiflow (sub-cooling type)
Condenser (ml {cc, fl
Receiver/drier capacity 180 {180, 6.08}
oz})
Control system
Item Specification
Airflow volume
Type Triple-pressure
HI AND LO PRESSURE
0.176—0.216 2.94—3.34
{1.795—2.202, 25.53—31.31} {30.0—34.0, 427—483}
ON
2.35—2.75
{24.0—28.0,
341—398}
OFF
0.02
Refrigerant pressure {0.20, 2.84}
0.195—0.250 0.39—0.79
switch Operating 2, {1.989—2.549, {3.98—8.05,
pressure (MPa {kgf/cm psi}) or less
28.30—36.24} 57—114}
MEDIUM PRESSURE
1.08—1.38
{11.1—14.0, 158—199}
ON
OFF
1.39—1.65
{14.2—16.8, 202—238}
07-00–4
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Item Specification
Type Bimetallic (Indirect sensing type)
135—145 {275—293}
ON
Thermal protector Operating

(qC {qF})
temperature
OFF
113—127 {236—260}

Sensor
Potentiometer type
Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles

Basic system
Item Specification
L.H.D.: 4.8 {4,127}
R.H.D.: 4.7 {4,041}
Type R-134a
(g {oz}) 470—500 {16.6—17.6}
(approx. quantity)
Vane-rotary (ZJ, ZY)
Type
Rotary scroll (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
(ml {cc, fl 90 {90, 3.0} (ZJ, ZY)
Discharge capacity
oz}) 86.5 {86.5, 2.9} (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
8,200 (ZJ, ZY)
A/C compressor Max. allowable speed (rpm)
8,100 (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
ATMOS GU10 (ZJ, ZY)
Type
FD46XG (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
Lube oil
Sealed volume (ml {cc, fl 110 {110, 3.72} (ZJ, ZY)
(approx. quantity) oz}) 120 {120, 4.06} (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
oz})
Control system
Item Specification
Airflow volume
PTC heater (W) 950
(MAX HOT operation)
07-00–5
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Item Specification
0.3—0.5 {0.012—0.019} (ZJ, ZY)
Magnetic clutch clearance (mm {in})
0.35—0.85 {0.014—0.033} (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
HI AND LO PRESSURE
0.176—0.216 2.94—3.34
{1.795—2.202, 25.53—31.31} {30.0—34.0, 427—483}
ON
2.35—2.75
{24.0—28.0,
341—398}
OFF
0.02
0.195—0.250 0.39—0.79
switch (ZJ, ZY) Operating {1.989—2.549, {3.98—8.05,
pressure (MPa {kgf/cm2, psi}) or less
28.30—36.24} 57—114}
MEDIUM PRESSURE
1.08—1.38
{11.1—14.0, 158—199}
ON
OFF
1.39—1.65
{14.2—16.8, 202—238}

sensor (MZ-CD 1.4 DI (See 07-40A-16 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
Turbo) Sensor operation SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER].)
135—145 {275—293}
ON

(qC {qF})
temperature
OFF
113—127 {236—260}

Sensor
Potentiometer type
End Of Sie
HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
id070000104800
Basic system
Item Specification
Cooling capacity (kW {kcal/h}) 4.8 {4,127}
Type R-134a
(g {oz}) 470—500 {16.6—17.6}
(approx. quantity)
07-00–6
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Item Specification
Type Vane-rotary
(ml {cc, fl
Discharge capacity 90 {90, 3.0}
oz})
Type ATMOS GU10
110 {110, 3.72}
oz})
Control system
Item Specification
Airflow volume 3/h)
Blower motor (m 340
HI AND LO PRESSURE
0.176—0.216 2.94—3.34
{1.795—2.202, 25.53—31.31} {30.0—34.0, 427—483}
ON
2.35—2.75
{24.0—28.0,
341—398}
OFF
0.02
0.195—0.250 0.39—0.79
switch Operating 2, {1.989—2.549, {3.98—8.05,
pressure (MPa {kgf/cm psi}) or less
28.30—36.24} 57—114}
MEDIUM PRESSURE
1.08—1.38
{11.1—14.0, 158—199}
ON
OFF
1.39—1.65
{14.2—16.8, 202—238}

135—145 {275—293}
ON

(qC {qF})
temperature
OFF
113—127 {236—260}
07-00–7
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Basic system
Item Specification
L.H.D.: 4.8 {4,127}
R.H.D.: 4.7 {4,041}
Type R-134a
(g {oz}) 470—500 {16.6—17.6}
(approx. quantity)
Vane-rotary (ZJ, ZY)
Type
Rotary scroll (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
(ml {cc, fl 90 {90, 3.0} (ZJ, ZY)
Discharge capacity
oz}) 86.5 {86.5, 2.9} (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
8,200 (ZJ, ZY)
A/C compressor Max. allowable speed (rpm)
8,100 (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
ATMOS GU10 (ZJ, ZY)
Type
FD46XG (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
Lube oil
Sealed volume (ml {cc, fl 110 {110, 3.72} (ZJ, ZY)
(approx. quantity) oz}) 120 {120, 4.06} (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
oz})
Control system
Item Specification
Airflow volume
PTC heater (W) 950
(MAX HOT operation)
0.3—0.5 {0.012—0.019} (ZJ, ZY)
Magnetic clutch clearance (mm {in})
0.35—0.85 {0.014—0.033} (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo)
07-00–8
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Item Specification
HI AND LO PRESSURE
0.176—0.216 2.94—3.34
{1.795—2.202, 25.53—31.31} {30.0—34.0, 427—483}
ON
2.35—2.75
{24.0—28.0,
341—398}
OFF
0.02
0.195—0.250 0.39—0.79
switch (ZJ, ZY) Operating {1.989—2.549, {3.98—8.05,
pressure (MPa {kgf/cm2, psi}) or less
28.30—36.24} 57—114}
MEDIUM PRESSURE
1.08—1.38
{11.1—14.0, 158—199}
ON
OFF
1.39—1.65
{14.2—16.8, 202—238}

sensor (MZ-CD 1.4DI (See 07-40B-12 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
Turbo) Sensor operation SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
135—145 {275—293}
ON

(qC {qF})
temperature
OFF
113—127 {236—260}
End Of Sie
07-00–9
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
07-02 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [FULL-AUTO AIR

CONDITIONER]
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR BLOCK DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-02–1 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-02–1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-02–1 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-02–2
Malfunction Detection Function. . . . . . . 07-02–2
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0702c1100100
Features
x The on-board diagnostic function consists of a malfunction detection function that detects malfunctions in input/
output signals, a memory function that stores detected malfunctions, a fail-safe function that prevents an
operating malfunction of output parts where a malfunction is detected, and a malfunction display function that
displays detected malfunctions.
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION BLOCK DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0702c1100200
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
MALFUNCTION
DISPLAY
FUNCTION
PRESENT
MALFUNCTION REC
INDICATION INDICATOR
MODE LIGHT
PAST
MALFUNCTION
INDICATION
MODE
MEMORY FUNCTION
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
NG
OK
MALFUNCTION NORMAL OUTPUT DEVICE
INPUT DEVICE
DETECTION CONTROL
FUNCTION
am2zzn0000043
07-02–1
TO MODEL INDEX

State transition chart
NORMAL CONTROL
1. TEMPERATURE SETTING DIAL: 15/18 (MAX COLD)

2. FAN DIAL: OFF
3. MODE DIAL: DEFROSTER
4. REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH AND
A/C SWITCH ARE PRESSED AT THE SAME
TIME (HOLD BOTH SWITCHES PRESSED)
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC 5. IGNITION SWITCH ON
FUNCTION
5s
PRESENT MALFUNCTION
INDICATION MODE
DTC DISPLAY
A/C SWITCH ON
PAST MALFUNCTION
INDICATION MODE
DTC DISPLAY
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH

AND REC/FRESH SWITCH ARE
PRESSED AT THE SAME TIME
(HOLD BOTH SWITCHES PRESSED)
PAST MALFUNCTION
MEMORY CLEARING
am2zzn0000128
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0702c1100300
x Detects errors in the input and output signals. (Ignition switch at ON or engine running.)
x If a malfunction is detected, a DTC is output to the REC switch indicator light on the climate control unit through
the malfunction display function. At the same time, malfunction detection results are sent to the fail-safe and
memory functions.
Fail-safe function
x If a malfunction is detected by the malfunction detection function and a malfunction is determined, the following
controls are performed to prevent an operation malfunction of the full-auto air conditioner and malfunction of
output parts.
07-02–2
TO MODEL INDEX

Fail-safe function table
Part where malfunction is Malfunction already exists when IG SW
Malfunction determined when IG SW at ON
determined turned to ON
Solar radiation sensor input value is fixed at the Solar radiation sensor input value is fixed at 0
Solar radiation sensor
value right before the malfunction. W/m2.
Cabin temperature sensor input value is fixed at Cabin temperature sensor input value is fixed
Cabin temperature sensor
the value right before the malfunction. at 25 qC {77 qF}.
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature sensor input value is fixed Ambient temperature sensor input value is
sensor at the value right before the malfunction. fixed at 15qC {59 qF}.
Evaporator temperature Evaporator temperature sensor input value is
m
sensor fixed at 0 qC {32 qF}.
ECT sensor input value is fixed at 85 qC {185
ECT sensor m
qF}.
Control based on ambient temperature.
MAX COLD
x Air mix actuator drive signal is stopped right

after the malfunction is determined. MAX HOT
x However, it is fixed at MAX COLD when the
Air mix actuator manually set temperature is at 15 (left side 13 {55} 17 {63} ˚C {˚F}
(Potentiometer) of temperature setting dial) and fixed at
MAX HOT when the manually set AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
temperature is at 29 (right side of
temperature setting dial). However, it is fixed at MAX COLD when the
manually set temperature is at 15 (left side of
temperature setting dial) and fixed at MAX HOT
when the manually set temperature is at 29
(right side of temperature setting dial).
Control based on ambient temperature.
VENT
x Airflow mode actuator drive signal is

stopped right after the malfunction is DEFROSTER
determined.
(Potentiometer)
x For manual operation using the mode dial, 13 {55} 17 {63} ˚C {˚F}
only vent or defroster mode is operable.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
For manual operation using the mode dial, only
vent or defroster mode is operable.
After the ignition switch is turned to the ON
Air mix actuator drive signal is stopped right
position, the air mix actuator drive signal is
after the malfunction is determined.
Air mix actuator output normally again.
After this, a drive signal is output to the air mix
(Motor lock) After this, a drive signal is output to the air mix
actuator and malfunction determination is
actuator and malfunction determination is
performed approx. every 5 min.
After the ignition switch is turned to the ON
Airflow mode actuator drive signal is stopped
position, the airflow mode actuator drive signal
right after the malfunction is determined.
Airflow mode actuator is output normally again.
After this, a drive signal is output to the airflow
(Motor lock) After this, a drive signal is output to the airflow
mode actuator and malfunction determination is
mode actuator and malfunction determination
is performed approx. every 5 min.
Sensor signal delay function

x The ambient and cabin temperatures may change intermittently, partially, or suddenly due to factors such as
direct and intermittent sunlight (traveling through a city or a highway tunnel), or radiant heat from the ground
under a parked vehicle as well as the opening and closing of doors. If control was performed based exactly on
these variations that are input from each sensor, the air conditioning function would be negatively affected and
smooth control could not occur. In order to prevent this, the climate control unit delays the input signals for solar
radiation, and the ambient and cabin temperature as shown in the following figure. Stable control occurs due to
the reading out of an average of all the variations.
x The ambient temperature sensor may detect a temperature higher than the actual ambient temperature when
the engine is restarted after it has been temporarily stopped while the temperature around the engine was high.
To prevent this, the ambient temperature is corrected based on the data for the ambient temperature before the
engine was stopped which is stored in the climate control unit, and control is then performed accordingly.
07-02–3
TO MODEL INDEX
SOLAR RADIATION DELAY
1163 W/m2
(EXAMPLE)
ACTUAL SOLAR
RADIATION VARIATION 0 W/m2
DELAYED SOLAR 1163 W/m2

RADIATION
DETERMINATION BY
0 W/m2
CLIMATE CONTROL
UNIT
TIME
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DELAY
26 ˚C {79 ˚F}
(EXAMPLE)
ACTUAL AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE 25 ˚C {77 ˚F}
VARIATION
26 ˚C {79 ˚F}
DELAYED AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE
DETERMINATION BY
CLIMATE CONTROL 25 ˚C {77 ˚F}
UNIT
TIME
CABIN TEMPERATURE DELAY
(EXAMPLE) 26 ˚C {79 ˚F}

ACTUAL CABIN
TEMPERATURE
25 ˚C {77 ˚F}
VARIATION
DELAYED CABIN 26 ˚C {79 ˚F}

TEMPERATURE
DETERMINATION BY
25 ˚C {77 ˚F}
CLIMATE CONTROL
UNIT
TIME
am2zzn0000044
Memory function
x The memory function stores malfunctions in input/output signal systems. With this function, malfunction data is
not cleared after the ignition switch is turned off (LOCK position), even if the malfunctioning signal system has
returned to normal.
x To clear stored malfunction data, disconnect the negative battery cable or press the rear window defroster
switch and REC/FRESH switch on the climate control unit at the same time while in the past malfunction
indication mode.
Display function
x The display function outputs present or past malfunctions as a DTC to the REC switch indicator light on the
climate control unit.
x A DTC is output when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position with the dial or switch operated as follows.
— Temperature setting dial: 15/18 (MAX COLD)
— Fan dial: Off
— Mode dial: Defroster
— Rear window defroster switch and a/c switch are pressed at the same time (hold both switches pressed)
x DTCs are indicated by the number of flashes of the REC indicator light on the climate control unit.
x If there is more than one malfunction, DTCs are output in numerical order, from lower to higher numbers.
07-02–4
TO MODEL INDEX

DTC display example
EXAMPLES: DTC 22 DETECTED BY THE
MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
A: approx. 1.3 s
B: approx. 0.4 s
C: approx. 1.6 s
D: approx. 4 s
A B A C B B B D
am2zzn0000072
Present Malfunction Indication Mode

x Present malfunctions in the control system circuits (open/short circuits) are detected, and the DTCs shown in
the table are indicated by the number of flashes of the REC indicator light on the climate control unit.
DTC table
Memo
No System malfunction ry
Flashing pattern Detection condition
. location functi
on
ON Open/short circuit in solar
02 Solar radiation sensor —
OFF radiation sensor
ON Open/short circuit in cabin

06 Cabin temperature sensor —
OFF temperature sensor
ON Evaporator temperature Open/short circuit in evaporator

10 —
OFF sensor temperature sensor
ON
Open/short circuit in ambient
12 Ambient temperature sensor —
ON Open/short circuit in ECT

14 ECT sensor —
OFF sensor
ON
Air mix actuator Open/short circuit in air mix
18 —
OFF (potentiometer) actuator (potentiometer)
ON Airflow mode actuator Open/short circuit in airflow

21 —
OFF (potentiometer) mode actuator (potentiometer)
Past Malfunction Indication Mode

x Past malfunctions in the control system circuits (open/short circuits) are stored, and the DTCs shown in the
table are indicated by the number of flashes of the REC indicator light on the climate control unit. Clear past
malfunctions after completing repairs since once a past malfunction is stored, it will remain stored even after
the malfunction has been repaired.
x To clear stored malfunction data, disconnect negative battery or press the rear window defroster switch and
REC/FRESH switch on the climate control unit at the same time while in the past malfunction indication mode.
07-02–5
TO MODEL INDEX

DTC table
Memo
No System malfunction ry
Flashing pattern Detection condition
. location functi
on
ON Detected open/short circuits
07 Cabin temperature sensor once or more in cabin X
Evaporator temperature
11 once or more in evaporator X
OFF sensor
temperature sensor
13 Ambient temperature sensor once or more in ambient X
15 ECT sensor X
OFF once or more in ECT sensor

Air mix actuator
19 once or more in air mix X
OFF (potentiometer)
actuator (potentiometer)
22 once or more in airflow mode X
OFF (potentiometer)
actuator (potentiometer)
ON Detected motor lock once or
58 Air mix actuator (motor lock) X
OFF more in air mix actuator circuit
ON Detected motor lock once or

Airflow mode actuator (motor
59 more in airflow mode actuator X
OFF lock)
circuit
End Of Sie
07-02–6
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
07-11 BASIC SYSTEM

BASIC SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–1 AIR INTAKE DUCT
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–1 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 07-11–17
BASIC SYSTEM STRUCTURAL Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–17
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–18
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–1 AIR FILTER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–18
Refrigerant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–3 U.K. Specs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–18
BASIC SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM. . . . . 07-11–10 A/C COMPRESSOR
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–10 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–19
Refrigerant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–11 ZJ, ZY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–19
A/C UNIT CONDENSER CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . 07-11–19
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 07-11–11
REFRIGERANT LINE
Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–11
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–20
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–13
Spring-lock Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–22
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
End of Toc
BASIC SYSTEM OUTLINE
NG: HVAC BASIC SYSTEM
id071100100100
Features
Size/weight reduction x A/C unit adopted with cooling, heating, and air blow functions integrated
Cooling performance improved x Sub-cooling function adopted with a receiver/drier installed to the condenser
Improved comfort x Air filter adopted which purifies air flowing into the cabin
End Of Sie
BASIC SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id071100100200
Ventilation System
R.H.D.
AIR INTAKE DUCT A/C UNIT 07
HEAT DUCT (RH)

HEAT DUCT (LH)
am2zzn0000027
07-11–1
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
Refrigerant System
R.H.D. (ZJ, ZY)
REFRIGERANT LINE EXPANSION

VALVE EVAPORATOR
A/C COMPRESSOR
CONDENSER
RECEIVER/DRIER
am2zzn0000028
07-11–5
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
BASIC SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM
id071100100300
Ventilation System
ZJ, ZY
SIDE SIDE
DEMISTER DEFROSTER DEFROSTER DEMISTER
AIRFLOW
MODE DOOR
BLOWER MOTOR
AIRFLOW
MODE
DOOR
FRESH
AIR INTAKE
SIDE CENTER CENTER SIDE DOOR
VENT VENT VENT VENT
RECIRCULATE
AIR FILTER
HEATER CORE EVAPORATOR

HEAT HEAT
AIR MIX DOOR
am2zzn0000026
07-11–10
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
Refrigerant System
LOW-PRESSURE EXPANSION VALVE
CHARGING VALVE
EVAPORATOR
A/C COMPRESSOR
HIGH-PRESSURE
CHARGING VALVE
CONDENSER
am2zzn0000026
End Of Sie
A/C UNIT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
NG: FRONT A/C UNIT
id071100100400
Construction
x Consists of the following parts:
— Evaporator
— Heater core
— Expansion valve
— Air mix door
— Airflow mode door
— Evaporator temperature sensor
— Resistor (manual air conditioner)
— Power MOS FET (full-auto air conditioner)
— Air mix actuator (full-auto air conditioner)
— Airflow mode actuator (full-auto air conditioner)
— Air filter
— Blower motor
— PTC heater (L.H.D. MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
07-11–11
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
R.H.D.
AIRFLOW MODE
DOOR
BLOWER MOTOR
AIRFLOW MODE
POWER MOS FET DOOR
(FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER) EXPANSION VALVE
RESISTOR
(MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER) AIR MIX ACTUATOR
AIR MIX DOOR
AIRFLOW MODE EVAPORATOR

ACTUATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
AIR FILTER HEATER CORE

EVAPORATOR
am2zzn0000028
07-11–12
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
Evaporator
x A tube-fin type evaporator has been adopted. By adopting a new flow pattern for the refrigerant, the cooling
performance is maintained while employing a thin, lightweight evaporator.
IN
a
OUT b
b
a
a
b
b
a
a
b
b
a: SEPARATION PART
a
b: REJOINING POINT
am2zzn0000026
Expansion valve
x The expansion valve causes a sudden decrease in the pressure of the liquid refrigerant. This atomizes the
refrigerant, making it easier for the evaporator to vaporize it. The expansion valve also regulates the flow
volume of the refrigerant sent to the evaporator.
x The amount of refrigerant delivered to the evaporator is adjusted by the opening angle of the ball valve in the
expansion valve.
x Opening angle is adjusted by a balance of the R-134a pressure (Pd) in the diaphragm, and a composite force
of evaporator discharge pressure (PI) against the lower part of the diaphragm and spring force (Fs) pushing up
the ball valve. When PI increases, the temperature of the temperature sensor near the diaphragm rises and the
Pd heated by the R-134a in the diaphragm increases. When the Pd increases more than PI + Fs, the
diaphragm is pushed down, and the shaft attached to end of the temperature sensor rod pushes down the ball
valve, increasing the amount of liquid refrigerant flow. When the evaporator discharge refrigerant temperature
decreases, PI + Fs increases more than Pd, the ball valve is pushed up, and the amount of liquid refrigerant
flow decreases.
DIAPHRAGM
Pd
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
Pl TEMPERATURE
TO
FROM SENSOR
A/C
EVAPORATOR COMPRESSOR SHAFT
SHAFT
TO
EVAPORATOR
FROM
CONDENSER
Pd: Pressure diaphragm
BALL VALVE Fs Pl: Pressure low
Fs: Force spring
SPRING
acxuun00000157
Operation
Air mix door
x The air mix door, installed in the A/C unit, controls HOT or COLD position, depending on the position of the
temperature control dial. As a result, airflow distribution changes, and the airflow temperature is controlled.
07-11–13
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
R.H.D.
HEATER
CORE
EVAPORATOR
AIR MIX DOOR COLD AIR
FROM AIR AIR MIX DOOR
INTAKE DUCT
WARM AIR
[COLD]
[HOT]
am2zzn0000028
Airflow mode door

x The airflow mode doors move to VENT, BI-LEVEL, HEAT, HEAT/DEF, or DEFROSTER position, depending on
the position of the airflow mode selector dial. As a result, airflow mode changes.
07-11–14
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
R.H.D.
AIRFLOW MODE TO CENTER
DOOR VENT AND
TO DEFROSTER
SIDE VENT
AND SIDE
DEMISTER
TO FRONT
HEAT
AIRFLOW MODE
DOOR
TO CENTER
HEATER VENT AND
CORE SIDE VENT
EVAPORATOR
AIR MIX DOOR TO TO FRONT HEAT
FROM AIR
FRONT
INTAKE DUCT
HEAT
[VENT] [HEAT]
TO DEFROSTER AND
SIDE DEMISTER
TO DEFROSTER AND
SIDE DEMISTER
TO
FRONT
HEAT
TO FRONT HEAT
[BI-LEVEL]
COLD AIR
TO FRONT HEAT
WARM AIR
[HEAT/DEF] [DEFROSTER]
am2zzn0000028
R.H.D.
Airflow volume ratio* (%)
(Approx. quantity)
VENT HEAT DEFROSTER
Airflow
mode Passenger Passenger
Driver side Driver side
side Tot Passenger Tot side Tot
Driver side
Cente Cente al side al Cente Cente al
Side Side Side Side
r r r r
10
VENT 25 25 25 25 — — — — — — — —
0
BI-LEVEL 16.25 16.25 16.25 16.25 65 17.5 17.5 35 — — — — —
HEAT — — — — — 40 40 80 10 10 20
HEAT/DEF — — — — — 20 20 40 30 30 60
DEFROSTE 10
— — — — — — — — 50 50
R 0
* : Fan volume MAX HI
07-11–16
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
End Of Sie
AIR INTAKE DUCT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
SOKYU_NG: BLOWER UNIT
id071100352700
Construction
— Air intake door
— Air intake actuator (full-auto air conditioner)
AIR INTAKE DUCT
AIR INTAKE AIR INTAKE

DOOR ACTUATOR
am2zzn0000027
07-11–17
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
Operation
Air intake door
x The air intake door moves in the recirculate direction and fresh air direction in line with the operation of the air
intake link.
FRESH AIR INTAKE DOOR
AIR INTAKE DOOR

RECIRCULATE
am2zzn0000027
End Of Sie
AIR FILTER FUNCTION
NG: AIR FILTER
id071100101500
U.K. Specs.
Full-auto air conditioner
x An air filter with a dust collection function has been adopted which has a suppression effect on allergens and
fungi that cause allergies, as well as bacteria and viruses.
x The filter material has been processed to prevent intake of collected bacteria, fungi spores and other allergy-
causing substances to create a cabin environment in which the onset of allergies is significantly reduced even if
these substances become redispersed in the event of vibration to the vehicle or when the climate control
system is turned on and off.
x It is necessary to periodically replace the filter because it cannot be reused through cleaning.
Manual air conditioner
x A dust collecting air filter has been adopted.
x The filter material can remove pollen and dust.
Australian, European (L.H.D.), General (L.H.D.) Specs.

x A dust collecting air filter has been adopted.
x The filter material can remove pollen and dust.
AIR FILTER
am2zzn0000027
End Of Sie
07-11–18
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
A/C COMPRESSOR CONSTRUCTION
NG: A/C COMPRESSOR
id071100100600
ZJ, ZY
— A/C compressor THERMAL
— Magnetic clutch PROTECTOR A/C
— Thermal protector COMPRESSOR
x A rotary-vane type (V09A1) A/C compressor body
has been adopted for size, weight, and operation
vibration reduction.
MAGNETIC
CLUTCH
am2zzn0000027
CONDENSER CONSTRUCTION
id071100100800
x A sub-cooling condenser has been adopted (a receiver/driver is equipped to a multi-flow condenser which
circulates refrigerant through a few separate tubes).
x The sub cool condenser separates liquid-gas refrigerant initially cooled at the condenser via the receiver/drier,
where it returns again to the condenser sub cooling part and is cooled, accelerating liquefaction and improving
cooling capacity.
End Of Sie CONDENSER REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING
PART
RECEIVER/
DRIER SUB COOLING PART
am2zzn0000114
REFRIGERANT LINE CONSTRUCTION

id071100806500
x The pipes in the refrigerant lines are made of aluminum alloy, the cooler hose (HI) is made of nylon, and the
cooler hose (LO) is made of rubber (flexible hose).
x A high-pressure charging valve is located on the cooler hose (HI) and a low-pressure charging valve is located
on the cooler hose (LO). (ZJ, ZY)
x A high-pressure charging valve and low-pressure charging valve are located on the cooler hose. (MZ-CD 1.4 DI
Turbo)
07-11–19
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
ZJ, ZY
COOLER HOSE (LO) A/C UNIT
A/C COMPRESSOR CONDENSER COOLER HOSE (HI) COOLER PIPE

am2zzn0000044
Spring-lock Coupling
x Spring-lock coupling is used for pipe-to-pipe connections. As a result, pipes can be connected easily,
maintenance of torque is unnecessary, and serviceability is improved.
x There is a garter spring in the cage on the male side of spring-lock coupling type and the end of the pipe on the
female side is flared. When the pipes are being connected, the flared end of the female side forces the garter
spring on the female side to expand, and by fully inserting the male side into the female side, the flared end is
locked by the garter spring. When the cooler pipe or cooler hose is replaced, the additional indicator ring comes
out after connecting, indicating that the flared end is locked.
07-11–21
TO MODEL INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM
CAGE GARTER SPRING UN LOCKED LOCKED

GARTER SPRING
MALE SIDE FEMALE SIDE
FLARED END
FLARED END
FEMALE SIDE CAGE

INDICATOR RING
MALE SIDE
acxuun00000162
07-11–23
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
07-40A CONTROL SYSTEM [FULL-AUTO AIR

CONDITIONER]
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE CONTROL
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–2 OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–2 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–22
CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–22
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–2 AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE CONTROL
CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM SYSTEM DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–8 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–23
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE CONTROL
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–11 OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
AIR MIX ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–23
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–11 Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–24
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL OUTLINE
CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–25
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–12 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–25
BLOWER MOTOR CONSTRUCTION AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–12 DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR
POWER METAL OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–25
FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (POWER AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL
MOS FET) CONSTRUCTION OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–13 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–25
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–13 Airflow volume automatic control. . . . . . 07-40A–25
Construction/Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–13 AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL OUTLINE
MAGNETIC CLUTCH CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–27
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–13 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–27
THERMAL PROTECTOR CONSTRUCTION AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL SYSTEM
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–14 DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR
SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–28
CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL OPERATION
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–14 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–28
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Airflow Mode Automatic Control . . . . . . 07-40A–28
CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–28
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–15 Airflow Mode Manual Control . . . . . . . . 07-40A–29
CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR AIR INTAKE CONTROL OUTLINE
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–15 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–29
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AIR INTAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–15 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–29
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH AIR INTAKE CONTROL OPERATION
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–15 Air Intake Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–29
High and Low Pressure Switch . . . . . . 07-40A–16 A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL OUTLINE
Medium-pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–16 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–29
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–29
CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL SYSTEM
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–16 DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR
Pressure Detecting Part. . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–17 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–30
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL
CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–18 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–30
FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER A/C compressor automatic control . . . . 07-40A–30
FUNCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR SERIAL COMMUNICATION OUTLINE
CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–18 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–31
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–18 PTC HEATER CONSTRUCTION
Control Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–19 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . 07-40A–32
Control Transition by Switch Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–32
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–21 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–33
System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–34
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–34
End of Toc
07-40A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NG: HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM
id0740a1100100
Features
Reduced fuel consumption when the A/C x Refrigerant pressure switch with medium-pressure switch adopted (ZJ, ZY)
is operating (Reduced idling increase x Refrigerant pressure sensor adopted (MZ-CD 1.4DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
operating)
Improved comfortably x PTC heater adopted (L.H.D. MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
End Of Sie
CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1100200
R.H.D. (ZJ, ZY)
*1 : AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles
*2 : Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles
*2
A/C RELAY BLOWER RELAY
AMBIENT
ENGINE COOLANT
SOLAR RADIATION TEMPERATURE
PCM TEMPERATURE
SENSOR SENSOR
SENSOR
*1
BLOWER RELAY
BCM
AIR INTAKE
ACTUATOR
POWER MOS FET
AIRFLOW MODE
ACTUATOR
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
CABIN REFRIGERANT
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR MIX MAGNETIC
TEMPERATURE BLOWER PRESSURE
UNIT ACTUATOR CLUTCH
SENSOR MOTOR SWITCH
am2zzn0000127
07-40A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1100400
ZJ, ZY
IG2 B+ B+
TNS BCM
CABIN RELAY
TEMPERATURE IG2 B+
M CLIMATE
SENSOR CONTROL UNIT
MOTOR
C E I
A/C RELAY
R
5V PCM
a CABIN TEMPERATURE
SENSOR MAGNETIC
Q CLUTCH
REFRIGERANT
EVAPORATOR 5V 5V
PRESSURE SWITCH
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
O X
K
AIRFLOW MODE
S
ACTUATOR
F M
AMBIENT H
5V
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR b
INSTRUMENT T
CLUSTER M
L AIR MIX
ACTUATOR
G M
ENGINE
COOLANT CPU J
CAN
TEMPERATURE a
SENSOR A
AIR INTAKE
PCM ACTUATOR
D M
B+ IG2
SOLAR RADIATION
SENSOR BLOWER MOTOR
BLOWER
b P W M RELAY
POWER
U MOS FET
BCM
ILLUMINATION IG2
LIGHT 12V REAR WINDOW
DEFROSTER
V CPU
REAR WINDOW
B
DEFROSTER
INDICATOR
N
ALL CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCHES

AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL DIAL
AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL
DIAL
TEMPERATURE SETTING DIAL
REC/FRESH SWITCH
A/C SWITCH
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
SWITCH
am2zzw0000374
07-40A–8
TO MODEL INDEX

AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1101700
x A mechanical lock type has been adopted.
End Of Sie
NG: AIR MIX ACTUATOR L.H.D. R.H.D.
FRESH
RECIRCULATE
90˚
3.5˚
RECIRCULATE
86.5˚
FRESH
B
H G F E D C B A
M
C
am2zzn0000044
AIR MIX ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a1103600
x A potentiometer has been adopted.
End Of Sie
NG: AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR
L.H.D. R.H.D.
MAX HOT
10˚
90˚
MAX
HOT
10˚
MAX 90˚
COLD MAX
COLD
M H G F E D C B A
C
MAX COLD MAX HOT
E
F
G
am2zzn0000044
07-40A–11
TO MODEL INDEX

AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1101800
x A potentiometer has been adopted.
End Of Sie
NG: BLOWER MOTOR
VENT 90˚ DEFROSTER
45˚
M H G F E D C B A
C
DEFROSTER VENT
E
F
G
am2zzn0000044
BLOWER MOTOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a1101500
x A sirocco fan has been adopted.
End Of Sie
NG: POWER MOS FET
SIROCCO FAN
BLOWER MOTOR
acxuun00000685
07-40A–12
TO MODEL INDEX

POWER METAL OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (POWER MOS FET)
CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1104700
Function
x Controls the supply voltage to the blower motor
according to the gate voltage sent from the
POWER MOS FET
climate control unit and adjusts the rotation speed
(airflow volume).
B+ IG2
BLOWER RELAY
BLOWER MOTOR
GATE VOLTAGE
M
CLIMATE
CONTROL
UNIT POWER MOS FET
acxuun00000169
Construction/Operation
x There are three electrodes: source, gate, and
DRAIN
drain electrodes.
B
E C A
F D B
GATE E
A
SOURCE
acxuun00000230
x The resistance between terminals B and A

(between drain and source) changes according to LOW GATE VOLTAGE HIGH GATE VOLTAGE
the voltage (gate voltage) applied to terminal E B B
(gate).
x When the gate voltage increases, the resistance
between terminals B and A decreases, allowing
the current to flow easily.
End Of Sie
NG: MAGNETIC CLUTCH
E E
A A
SMALL CURRENT LARGE CURRENT
acxuun00000171
MAGNETIC CLUTCH CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a1101300
— Pressure plate
— Shim
— Snap ring
— A/C compressor pulley
— Stator and thermal protector (ZJ, ZY)
— Stator (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
07-40A–13
TO MODEL INDEX

ZJ, ZY
SNAP RING
SNAP RING
PRESSURE
PLATE
STATOR AND THERMAL

PROTECTOR
SHIM A/C COMPRESSOR

PULLEY
am2zzn0000121
THERMAL PROTECTOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a1101200
x An indirect sensing type has been adopted,
THERMAL
reducing the number of the component parts.
PROTECTOR
End Of Sie
NG: SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR
am2zzn0000030
SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a1281800
x A photo diode (light-receiving diode) has been
adopted.
End Of Sie
NG: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
SOLAR RADIATION
SENSOR
acxaan00000221
07-40A–14
TO MODEL INDEX

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1104000
x A thermistor type has been adopted.
End Of Sie
NG: CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
acxuun00000191
CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a1107100
End Of Sie
NG: EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CABIN
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
am2zzn0000030
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a1101600
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
am2zzn0000134

End Of Sie
NG: REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
acxuun00000175
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a1103700
x A triple pressure type has been adopted.
x Consists of the low/high-pressure switch that protects the refrigerant cycle by cutting the A/C signal when
pressure in the refrigerant cycle is abnormally high or low, and the medium-pressure switch that outputs an
idling increase signal according to the A/C compressor operation load.
07-40A–15
TO MODEL INDEX

High and Low Pressure Switch
x When pressure is abnormal, the refrigerant pressure switch turns off and cuts the signal sends to the magnetic
clutch, thereby stopping the A/C compressor.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH A/C RELAY

(HIGH AND LOW PRESSURE)
0.176—0.216 2.94—3.34
{1.795—2.202, 25.53—31.31} {30.0—34.0, 427—483} PCM
ON
2.35—2.75
HIGH AND LOW
{24.0—28.0, PRESSURE SWITCH
341—398} A
OFF
0.02 MAGNETIC
0.195—0.250 0.39—0.79
{0.20, 2.84} CLUTCH
{1.989—2.549, {3.98—8.05,
or less
28.30—36.24} 57—114}
MPa {kgf/cm2, psi}

am2zzn0000102
Medium-pressure Switch
x When the refrigerant pressure is approx. 1.39 MPa {14.2 kg/cm2, 202 psi} or more, the contact is energized
and an idling increases signal is output to the PCM.
(MEDIUM-PRESSURE SWITCH)
OPERATION PRESSURE PCM
1.08—1.38 IDLING INCREASE

{11.1—14.0, 158—199} SIGNAL
ON
MEDIUM-PRESSURE
OFF SWITCH
1.39—1.65
{14.2—16.8, 202—238}
MPa {kgf/cm2, psi}
acxuun00000189
End Of Sie
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1105000
x A capacitance type refrigerant pressure sensor, which converts refrigerant pressure into a linear electric signal,
has been adopted.
x Consists of a pressure detecting part and signal processing part.
x The pressure detecting part is a variable capacity condenser which changes capacitance according to the
pressure.
07-40A–16
TO MODEL INDEX

x The signal processing part detects the capacitance of pressure detecting part, converts it to voltage, then
outputs it to the PCM.
5
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

4
CONNECTOR
OUTPUT (V)
3
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT)
2
1
PRESSURE
SENSOR
0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
PRESSURE
{5, 73} {10, 145} {15, 218} {20, 290} {31, 363} {31, 435} {36, 508}
2
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE (MPa {kgf/cm , psi})
am2zzn0000095
x When pressure is abnormal, the PCM cuts the signal sends to the magnetic clutch, thereby stopping the A/C
compressor.
A/C RELAY
PCM
0.176—0.215 2.94—3.33
{1.80—2.19, 25.6—31.1} {30.0—33.9, 427—482}
ON
A/C
OPERATION A MAGNETIC
PRESSURE
CLUTCH
SIGNAL
OFF
0.019 REFRIGERANT
0.205—0.250 0.392—0.784
{0.19, 2.8}
{2.10—2.54, {4.00—7.99, PRESSURE
or less
29.8—36.2} 56.9—113.0} SENSOR
MPa {kgf/cm2, psi}
am2zzn0000095
Pressure Detecting Part

x There is a clearance between the movable ceramic diaphragm and the ceramic base, and each side has an
electrode.
x When pressure is applied from the ceramic diaphragm side, the ceramic diaphragm deforms, and the clearance
between the electrodes changes. As a result, capacitance is changed and pressure is detected.
End Of Sie
NG: FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
ELECTRODE
CLEARANCE
CERAMIC BASE
CERAMIC DIAPHRAGM
(MOVABLE)
APPLIE PRESSURE
am2zzn0000102
07-40A–17
TO MODEL INDEX

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1100900
x Each switches and dials have been enlarged to
improve ease of operation. REAR WINDOW
End Of Sie A/C SWITCH
DEFROSTER SWITCH
TEMPERATURE
SETTING DIAL
AIRFLOW MODE REC/FRESH AIRFLOW VOLUME

CONTROL DIAL SWITCH CONTROL DIAL
am2zzn0000030
FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER FUNCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a1100600
Block Diagram
x The climate control unit performs airflow temperature control, airflow volume control, airflow mode control, air
intake control, and A/C compressor control based on input signals from the each sensor, and outputs signals to
each actuator, power MOS FET, and refrigerant pressure switch (high pressure and lower pressure switches)
(ZJ, ZY) / refrigerant pressure sensor (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)).
x The PCM performs A/C cut control and idle air control based on input signals from switches such as the
refrigerant pressure switch (ZJ, ZY) / refrigerant pressure sensor (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)), and
outputs operation signals to the A/C relay and the throttle valve actuator.
07-40A–18
TO MODEL INDEX
AMBIENT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
AIR MIX ACTUATOR
AIRFLOW
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
CABIN
TEMPERATURE POWER MOS FET BLOWER MOTOR
SENSOR
AIRFLOW
VOLUME
CONTROL
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR
ECT AIRFLOW
SENSOR MODE
CONTROL
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR
SENSOR
AIR INTAKE
CONTROL
PCM MAGNETIC
A/C THERMAL CLUTCH
SOLAR RADIATION A/C RELAY PROTECTOR
SENSOR COMPRESSOR
CONTROL A/C CUT-OFF
CONTROL
HI AND LO
PRESSURE
REFRIGERANT IDLE AIR THROTTLE VALVE

PRESSURE SENSOR CONTROL ACTUATOR
(MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MEDIUM
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)) PRESSURE (THROTTLE BODY)
REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(ZJ, ZY)
am2zzn0000044
Control Table
x The full-auto air conditioner system functions based on five basic types of controls and three supplementary
functions.
Basic Control Control description Correction control
Airflow temperature control Airflow temperature automatic control x Air intake correction
x A/C correction
x MAX HOT and MAX COLD correction
x Water temperature correction
07-40A–19
TO MODEL INDEX

Basic Control Control description Correction control
Airflow volume control Airflow volume automatic control x Water temperature correction (Warm-up
correction)
x Mild start correction
x MAX HOT and MAX COLD correction
x Window fogging prevention correction at start
x Starting compensation correction
x Defroster correction
x Start-up burn-out prevention function
Airflow volume manual control x Defroster correction
x Excess current prevention function during
start-up
Airflow mode control Airflow mode automatic control x Water temperature correction (Warm-up
correction)
Airflow mode manual control
Air intake control Air intake manual control x Defroster correction
A/C compressor control A/C compressor automatic control x Defroster correction
x Ambient temperature correction
x MAX COLD correction
A/C compressor manual control x Defroster correction
x Ambient temperature correction
Supplementary function
Fail-safe function
Sensor signal delay function
On-board Diagnostic Function
07-40A–20
TO MODEL INDEX

Control Transition by Switch Operation
Airflow temperature control, airflow volume control
Airflow
temperature Airflow volume control
control
Control before
Operation switch
switch Control before switch operation
operation
Automatic Automatic Automatic control
Manual control OFF
control control (Defroster correction)
Airflow OFF Automatic control OFF OFF OFF
volume Automatic Automatic
AUTO Automatic control
control control control
dial Manual Automatic control Manual control Manual control Manual control
Automatic control
Automatic
AUTO Automatic control (Defroster correction No change No change
control
cancel)
Automatic control
Automatic
VENT Automatic control (Defroster correction No change No change
control
cancel)
Automatic control
Airflow Automatic
BI-LEVEL Automatic control (Defroster correction No change No change
mode control
cancel)
control
dial Automatic control
Automatic
HEAT Automatic control (Defroster correction No change No change
control
cancel)
Automatic control
Automatic
HEAT/DEF Automatic control (Defroster correction No change No change
control
cancel)
Defroster
DEFROSTER Automatic control No change No change
correction
Automatic
A/C switch Automatic control No change No change No change
control
Automatic
REC/FRESH switch Automatic control No change No change No change
control
15 (left end)*2, *4/
MAX COLD MAX HI MAX HI No change No change
18 (left end)*3
Tempera
ture 16—28*2, *4/ Automatic
Automatic control Defroster correction No change No change
setting 19—31*3 control
dial
29 (right end)*2, *4/
MAX HOT AUTO HI*1 AUTO HI No change No change
32 (right end)*3
*1
: Water temperature correction takes precedence.
*2
: Except General (L.H.D.) specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)
*3 : General (L.H.D.) specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)
*4
: AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles
07-40A–21
TO MODEL INDEX

Airflow mode control, air intake control, A/C compressor control
Air intake
Airflow mode control A/C compressor control
control
Control before
Operation switch Control before switch operation Control before switch operation
switch operation
Automatic Automatic
Manual control Manual control OFF
control control
Fixed at mode
OFF No change No change OFF OFF
prior to fan OFF
Airflow
Automatic
volume AUTO Automatic control No change No change No change
control
control dial
Automatic
Manual Automatic control No change No change No change
control
AUTO Automatic control No change *2 Auto control *3 No change *3
VENT VENT VENT No change *2 Auto control *3 No change *3
Airflow BI-LEVEL BI-LEVEL BI-LEVEL No change*2 Auto control *3 No change*3
mode HEAT HEAT HEAT No change*2 Auto control *3 No change*3
control dial
HEAT/DEF HEAT/DEF HEAT/DEF No change*2 Auto control *3 No change*3
Defroster Defroster Defroster
Defroster DEFROSTER DEFROSTER
correction correction correction
Automatic
A/C switch Automatic control No change No change OFF
control
RECIRCULATEo
FRESH Automatic
REC/FRESH switch Automatic control No change No change
FRESHoRECIR control
CULATE
15 (left end)*4, *6/ Automatic Automatic
No change No change No change
18 (left end)*5 control*1 control
Temperatur
16—28*4, *6/ Automatic Automatic
e setting No change No change No change
dial 19—31*5 control*1 control
29 (right end)*4, *6/ Automatic Automatic
No change No change No change
32 (right end)*5 control*1 control
*1
: Water temperature correction takes precedence.
*2 : If operation is from the defroster, returns to condition prior to the defroster. However, it does not change if the
REC/FRESH switch is operated during defrost.
*3
: If operation is from the defroster, returns to the condition prior to defrost. However, it does not change if the A/
C switch is operated during defrost.
*4
: Except General (L.H.D.) specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)
*5
: General (L.H.D.) specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)
End Of Sie
AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE CONTROL OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NG: AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE CONTROL
id0740a1102100
Features
x The airflow temperature is constantly controlled automatically. The climate control unit controls the airflow
temperature via the air mix actuator.
End Of Sie
07-40A–22
TO MODEL INDEX

AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1102200
SET CABIN
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
AMBIENT AIRFLOW CLIMATE AIR MIX AIR MIX

TEMPERATURE MODE CONTROL ACTUATOR DOOR
UNIT
OUTPUT OPERATION
SIGNAL
AIRFLOW
TEMPERATURE
CHANGE
EVAPORATOR AIR INTAKE FEEDBACK
TEMPERATURE MODE
SOLAR A/C
RADIATION COMPRESSOR
AMOUNT CONTROL
CONDITION
am2zzn0000044
End Of Sie
AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE CONTROL OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1102300
x The climate control unit calculates the air mix actuator opening angle characteristic for the given ambient
temperature based on the set temperature, solar radiation amount, and airflow mode. The air mix actuator
opening angle characteristic decreases as the sunlight intensity increases.
x The opening angle characteristic of the air mix actuator and the current ambient temperature are compared
and the basic opening angle for the air mix actuator is determined according to the A/C compressor control
status. The opening angle maintains the target temperature (calculated control value T1) in the cabin against
changes in external factors such as sunlight intensity and ambient temperature.
x If there is a difference between the target temperature (calculated control value T1) and current cabin
temperature, the basic opening angle of the air mix actuator is corrected so that the cabin temperature rapidly
reaches the target temperature.
x Calculated control value T1 is the target cabin temperature as set by the climate control unit based on
differences between the set temperatures, temperatures input from the sensors, and sunlight intensity.
Calculated control value T1 is constantly calculated according to the set temperature and the changes in the
signals input from the sensors.
LOW SUNLIGHT INTENSITY

FULLY OPEN
(MAX HOT) HIGH SUNLIGHT INTENSITY
AIR MIX ACTUATOR OPENING ANGLE

AIR MIX ACTUATOR
CHARACTERISTIC (A/C OFF MODE)

OPENING ANGLE
AIR MIX ACTUATOR OPENING ANGLE

CHARACTERISTIC (A/C ON MODE)
FULLY CLOSED
(MAX COLD)
LOW HIGH
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
acxuun00000178
07-40A–23
TO MODEL INDEX

Correction
Air intake correction
x When the air intake mode is switched from FRESH to REC with the A/C off, a correction is added to the air mix
actuator opening angle to prevent a rise in airflow temperature. In addition, the air mix actuator operation is
delayed to prevent a sudden drop in airflow temperature because of this correction.
FRESH FRESH
AIR INTAKE
DOOR
REC
HOT
AIR MIX ACTUATOR

OPENING ANGLE
CORRECTION AMOUNT
COLD
TIME
acxuun00000179
A/C correction
x When the A/C compressor control is switched from A/C on mode to off mode, the opening angle of the air mix
actuator is switched from the A/C on mode opening angle to the A/C off mode opening angle to prevent a rise
in airflow temperature. In addition, this correction delays the air mix actuator operation to prevent a sudden drop
in airflow temperature. However, the operation is not delayed when the evaporator temperature is 15 qC {59 qF}
or more.
A/C ON A/C ON
A/C MODE MODE
COMPRESSOR A/C OFF
CONTROL MODE
HOT
AIR MIX ACTUATOR

OPENING ANGLE
CORRECTION AMOUNT
COLD
TIME
acxuun00000180
MAX HOT and MAX COLD correction

x When the temperature is set to 29/32 (right end of temperature setting dial), the air mix actuator opening angle
is fixed at fully open, and when set to 15/18 (left end of temperature setting dial), it is fixed at fully closed.
Engine coolant temperature correction
x Corrects the air mix actuator opening angle so that it is adjusted to HOT to prevent discomfort caused by cold
air blown from the vent. However, the engine coolant temperature correction is not performed when the ambient
temperature is 25 qC {77 qF} or more.
End Of Sie
NG: AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL
07-40A–24
TO MODEL INDEX

AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1102400
Features
x Consists of the airflow volume automatic and manual controls with the climate control unit controlling the airflow
volume (blower motor applied voltage) via the power MOS FET.
End Of Sie
AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1102500
FAN VOLUME AMBIENT

TEMPERATURE
SET
TEMPERATURE CABIN
TEMPERATURE
CLIMATE POWER BLOWER
CONTROL MOS FET MOTOR
UNIT
OUTPUT OPERATION
SIGNAL
AIRFLOW ENGINE AIRFLOW
MODE COOLANT VOLUME
TEMPERATURE CHANGE
ECT FEEDBACK
SENSOR
SOLAR
RADIATION
AMOUNT
am2zzn0000044
End Of Sie
AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1102600
Airflow volume automatic control
x The climate control unit calculates the blower motor applied voltage characteristic based on the set
temperature and ambient temperature.
x Compares the differences among this blower motor applied voltage characteristic and the target temperature
(Calculated control value T2) and then determines the blower motor applied voltage (AUTO voltage).
x Calculated control value T2 is the target cabin temperature as set by the climate control unit based on
differences between the set temperatures and temperatures input from the sensors. Calculated control value
T2 is constantly calculated according to the set temperature and the changes in the signals input from the
sensors.
07-40A–25
TO MODEL INDEX
(V) TRANSITION STABLE PERIOD TRANSITION

PERIOD PERIOD
BLOWER MOTOR APPLIED VOLTAGE

WHEN COOLING WHEN HEATING
MAX-HI
MIDDLE-HI
AUTO-HI
CHARACTERISTIC
INCREASES/DECREASES BLOWER MOTOR

LINEARLY WITH SUNLIGHT APPLIED VOLTAGE
INTENSITY. CHARACTERISTIC
(-) 0 (+)
CALCULATED CONTROL VALUE T2
acxuun00000231
Correction
Engine coolant temperature correction (warm-up correction)
x Controls the blower motor applied voltage according to the increase in engine coolant temperature to prevent
discomfort caused by a high volume of cold air blown from the vents after the engine is started in winter.
However, the engine coolant temperature correction is not performed during defroster correction and when the
cabin temperature is 20 qC {68 qF} or more, and the airflow mode is in VENT mode.
BLOWER MOTOR APPLIED
(V)
RISES TO AUTO VOLTAGE.

VOLTAGE
0
LOW HIGH
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
acxuun00000232
Mild start correction

x Limits blower motor applied voltage for 3 s after
the blower motor is started in summer to prevent
discomfort caused by a high volume of hot air
blown from the vent. However, the mild start RISES TO AUTO
correction is not performed when the cabin (V) VOLTAGE.
temperature is 20 qC {68 qF} or less and when
APPLIED VOLTAGE
the airflow is in any mode other than VENT.

BLOWER MOTOR
MAX HOT and MAX COLD correction

x When the temperature is set to 29/32 (right end of
temperature setting dial), the blower motor
applied voltage is fixed at AUTO-HI, and when set
to 15/18 (left end of temperature setting dial), it is
fixed at MAX-HI. However, MAX HOT correction is 0
not performed during engine coolant correction. 0 3 (S)
TIME
acxuun00000234
Correction Set temperature Blower motor applied voltage

MAX HOT correction 29 12.1 (V):AUTO-HI
MAX COLD correction 15 14.6 (V): MAX-HI
07-40A–26
TO MODEL INDEX

Window fogging prevention correction at engine start-up
x The A/C compressor does not turn on due to PCM A/C cut-off control just after the engine is started. Therefore,
the windshield and front door glass are easily fogged when the heater is turned on and air blows from the
defroster. To prevent this, blower motor applied voltage is fixed at 0 V for 6 s after the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position. However, window fogging prevention correction at start-up is not performed when the airflow
mode is in any mode other than HEAT, HEAT/DEF or defroster.
Starting compensation correction
x When the blower motor is started at the lowest speed (3.2 V), the blower motor applied voltage is fixed at 4.4 V
for 2 s to stabilize blower motor start-up operation.
Defroster correction
x To improve defrosting of the windows, a (+2 V) correction is added to the blower motor applied voltage when
the defroster switch is turned on.
Excess current prevention function during start-up
x When the blower motor is started-up from the stopped status with a blower motor applied voltage of 4.4 V or
more, the blower motor applied voltage is fixed at 4.4 V for 1 s to prevent damage to the MOS FET from
excessive current.
Airflow volume manual control

x The blower motor applied voltage (airflow volume) can be switched in seven steps using the fan switch.
Fan switch Blower motor applied voltage
1st 4.4 V
2nd 6.1 V
3rd 7.8 V
4th 9.5 V
5th 10.8 V
6th 12.1 V
7th 14.6 V
End Of Sie
AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NG: AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL
id0740a1102700
Features
x Consists of the airflow mode automatic and manual controls with the climate control unit controlling the airflow
mode via the airflow mode actuator.
End Of Sie
07-40A–27
TO MODEL INDEX

AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1102800
AIRFLOW CABIN
MODE TEMPERATURE
ENGINE
COOLANT CLIMATE AIRFLOW AIRFLOW
AIR MIX ACTUATOR
TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODE MODE
TEMPERATURE
OPENING DEGREE UNIT ACTUATOR DOOR
ECT
SENSOR OUTPUT
SIGNAL OPERATION
AIRFLOW
AMBIENT MODE
TEMPERATURE CHANGE
FEEDBACK
A/C
COMPRESSOR
CONTROL
CONDITION
SOLAR
RADIATION
AMOUNT
am2zzn0000044
End Of Sie
AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1102900
Airflow Mode Automatic Control
x The climate control unit determines the airflow mode based on the current air mix actuator opening angle.
AMOUNT VARIES
VENT
BI-LEVEL
HEAT
COLD AIR MIX ACTUATOR OPENING ANGLE HOT

am2zzn0000044
Correction
Engine coolant temperature correction (Warm-up correction)
x Switches the airflow mode after the engine is
started in winter in accordance with the increase
DEFROSTER
in engine coolant temperature to prevent
discomfort caused by cold air blown towards the HEAT/DEF
feet. The engine coolant temperature correction is
performed only when the cabin temperature is 13 HEAT
qC {55 qF} or less, or the cabin temperature is 23
qC {73 qF} or less and sunlight intensity is AUTO
relatively low.
LOW ENGINE COOLANT HIGH
TEMPERATURE
acxuun00000236
07-40A–28
TO MODEL INDEX

Airflow Mode Manual Control
x The airflow modes can be switched by operating the each mode switches.
Airflow mode Switch operated Air vent
VENT CENTER VENT, SIDE VENT
BI-LEVEL CENTER VENT, SIDE VENT, FRONT HEAT
MODE switch SIDE VENT (low volume, L.H.D.), FRONT HEAT, SIDE DEMISTER
HEAT
(low volume), DEFROSTER (low volume)
SIDE VENT (low volume, L.H.D.), FRONT HEAT, SIDE DEMISTER,
HEAT/DEF
DEFROSTER
DEFROSTER DEFROSTER switch SIDE VENT (low volume, L.H.D.), SIDE DEMISTER, DEFROSTER
End Of Sie
AIR INTAKE CONTROL OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NG: AIR INTAKE CONTROL
id0740a1103300
Features
x Consists of the air intake automatic and manual controls with the climate control unit controlling the air intake
mode via the air intake actuator.
End Of Sie
AIR INTAKE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1103400
REC/FRESH
SWITCH
CLIMATE AIR INTAKE AIR INTAKE
CONTROL ACTUATOR DOOR
UNIT
SIGNAL OUTPUT OPERATION

AIR INTAKE
MODE
AIRFLOW CHANGE
MODE
am2zzn0000045
End Of Sie
AIR INTAKE CONTROL OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1103500
Air Intake Manual Control
x The air intake modes can be switched by operating the REC/FRESH switch.
Air intake mode REC/FRESH switch operation
FRESH Fixed to FRESH when the REC/FRESH switch is turned on during REC mode
REC Fixed to REC when the REC/FRESH switch is turned on during FRESH mode
Correction
x When the mode dial is set to the defroster position, the air intake is set to FRESH to improve defrosting. The air
intake is fixed at FRESH even if it has been set to REC manually.
End Of Sie
A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NG: A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL
id0740a1103000
Features
x Consists of the A/C compressor automatic and manual controls with the climate control unit outputting the A/C
signal to the PCM to control the A/C compressor.
x The PCM controls the A/C relay.
End Of Sie
07-40A–29
TO MODEL INDEX

A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1103100
A/C AMBIENT
SWITCH TEMPERATURE
SET
TEMPERATURE CABIN
CLIMATE MAGNETIC
TEMPERATURE A/C
CONTROL CLUTCH
UNIT RELAY
OUTPUT OPERATION
SIGNAL OUTPUT
PCM
AIRFLOW EVAPORATOR
MODE TEMPERATURE
OPERATION
SOLAR RADIATION
AMOUNT
am2zzn0000045
End Of Sie
A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1103200
A/C compressor automatic control
x The climate control unit determines the A/C ON/OFF mode based on the ambient temperature.
x In A/C ON mode, the A/C signal (magnetic clutch) is turned on/off according to the temperature of the air
passing through the evaporator. The temperature of the air passing through the evaporator at which the A/C
signal turns off is determined by the ambient temperature calculation value that is calculated based on the
ambient temperature, set temperature, cabin temperature, and sunlight intensity. By setting the A/C signal off-
temperature low when strong cooling performance is needed, such as when the ambient temperature is high,
and setting it high in other conditions, cooling comfort and fuel economy during A/C operation are improved.
07-40A–30
TO MODEL INDEX
A/C MODE (ON, OFF) DETERMINATION
A/C ON MODE
A/C OFF MODE
-5 {23} 0 {32} ˚C {˚F}

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
A/C SIGNAL (ON, OFF) DETERMINATION DURING A/C ON MODE
VARIES WITH CALCULATED AMBIENT TEMPERATURE VALUE.
A/C SIGNAL ON
A/C SIGNAL OFF
3.7 {39} 4.5 {40} 8.0 {46} 8.8 {48} ˚C {˚F}
TEMPERATURE OF AIR PASSING THROUGH EVAPORATOR
am2zzn0000045
Correction
x When the DEFROSTER switch is turned on, the system is switched to A/C ON mode and the A/C signal on/off
temperature is set to 4.5/3.7 qC {40/39 qF} to improve defrosting.
Ambient temperature correction
x When the ambient temperature is 5 qC {23 qF} or less, the system is fixed in A/C OFF mode to protect the A/
C compressor (to prevent A/C compressor fluid from being pressurized). During this operation, manual
operation using the A/C switch is not available.
MAX COLD correction
x When the temperature is set to 15/18 (left end of temperature setting dial), the A/C signal ON/OFF temperature
is fixed at 4.5/3.7 qC {40/39 qF}.
Window fogging prevention correction at start
x The A/C compressor does not turn on due to PCM A/C cut-off control just after the engine is started. Therefore,
the windshield and front door glass are easily fogged when the heater is turned on and air blows from the
defroster. To prevent this, no A/C signal is output from the climate control unit to the PCM for 6 s after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The window fogging prevention correction at start is not performed
when the airflow mode is in any mode other than HEAT, HEAT/DEF, and DEFROSTER during airflow volume
automatic control.
A/C compressor manual control

x A/C on or off mode is selected by operating the A/C switch.
A/C switch Operation condition
A/C switch ON (A/C switch LED illuminated) Operates in A/C ON mode
A/C switch OFF (A/C switch LED not illuminated) Fixed in A/C OFF mode.
End Of Sie
SERIAL COMMUNICATION OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
NG: CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
id0740a1265000
x A serial communication system (time-division communication) has been adopted for simplification of the wiring
harness between the climate control unit and the instrument cluster.
x Conventional communication systems require the same number of wiring harnesses as the number of signals,
however, the serial communication system only requires one communication path to transmit multiple signals
by sending them at different times, making it possible to transmit more information using fewer wiring
harnesses.
x The climate control unit receives the following information from the instrument cluster using serial
communication.
07-40A–31
TO MODEL INDEX

Data received
— Engine coolant temperature signal (-40—100 qC {-40—212 qF})
— Ambient temperature signal (-32—69.6 qC {-25—157 qF})
— PTC heater relay on/off signal (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
— Evaporator temperature signal (-10—30 qC {14—86 qF}) (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEX SYSTEM
NON-MULTIPLEX SYSTEM
DATA
E D C B A
A 0 A 0 0 1 1 0
0 0
B 1 B
1 1
C 1 C A A
1 1 0 0
D 0 D B B
0 0 1 1
E 0 E C 0=OFF C
0 0 1 1=ON 1
D D
0 0
E E
0 0
EACH SIGNAL IS TRANSMITTED EACH SIGNAL IS OUTPUT ONE BY

ONE BY ONE THROUGH THE ONE AS IT IS RECEIVED FROM THE
CHANNEL AS IT IS RECEIVED. CHANNEL.
am2zzn0000072
End Of Sie
PTC HEATER CONSTRUCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a1106500
Outline
x The PTC heater is supplementary heater to assist
A/C unit heating performance.
PTC HEATER
am2zzn0000094
07-40A–32
TO MODEL INDEX

System Wiring Diagram
B+ IG1 B+
ENGINE
AMBIENT COOLANT
SENSOR SENSOR
PTC HEATER PTC HEATER
RELAY NO.2 RELAY NO.1
CAN
INSTRUMENT
PCM
CLUSTER
PTC T O
HEATER
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
am2zzn0000099
07-40A–33
TO MODEL INDEX

System Block Diagram
PCM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CAN
PTC HEATER
ENGINE COOLANT PTC HEATER
RELAY
TEMPERATURE SIGNAL RELAY
OPERATION
ENGINE OPERATION NO.1/NO.2
CONTROL
CONDITION SIGNAL
PTC HEATER
CLIMATE OPERATION
CONTROL UNIT PTC HEATER PERMISSION
OPERATION CONTROL
REQUEST SIGNAL
PTC HEATER
AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE AMBIENT
SENSOR TEMPERATURE
SIGNAL
CAN ELECTRICAL
LOAD
PTC HEATER ON/OFF
CONTROL
REQUEST SIGNAL
CAN DETECTION OF
USED CURRENT/
PRESENT CURRENT VOLTAGE
INPUTABLE CURRENT
BATTERY VOLTAGE
PTC HEATER
OPERATION
PATTERN
FAIL-SAFE
CONTROL
am2zzn0000099
Operation
x The climate control unit outputs a PTC heater operation request signal to the instrument cluster according to
the ambient temperature signal, engine coolant temperature signal, and temperature control dial position
information sent from instrument cluster by serial communication. The instrument cluster controls the PTC
heater by operating PTC heater relay No.1/No.2 according to the ambient temperature and engine coolant
temperature signals.
x PTC heater operation is stopped if the following conditions are met:
— The ignition switch is in the LOCK position, or the engine is not started
— The engine is cranking
— The engine is stalled
x The PCM temporarily stops PTC heater operation to prevent lowering of engine startability caused by high
electrical current use during PTC heater operation.
x If the current/voltage information signal (present current, inputable current, and battery voltage) which is input
from the PCM is lower than the specified value, the instrument cluster restricts the PTC heater operation
pattern.
End Of Sie
07-40A–34
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
07-40B CONTROL SYSTEM [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]

CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . 07-40B–1 CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–1 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–11
CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW High and Low Pressure Switch . . . . . . . 07-40B–11
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . 07-40B–2 Medium-pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–12
CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR
(MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–6 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–12
CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM Pressure Detecting Part . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–13
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . 07-40B–8 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
BLOWER MOTOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . 07-40B–10 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–13
RESISTOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER FUNCTION
AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–10 [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . 07-40B–14
MAGNETIC CLUTCH CONSTRUCTION Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–14
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . 07-40B–10 A/C Compressor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–14
THERMAL PROTECTOR CONSTRUCTION PTC HEATER CONSTRUCTION
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . 07-40B–11 [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . 07-40B–15
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–15
SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–16
AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–11 System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–17
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–17
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc
CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a2100100
Features
Reduced fuel consumption when the A/C x Refrigerant pressure switch with medium-pressure switch adopted (ZJ, ZY)
is operating (Reduced idling increase x Refrigerant pressure sensor adopted (MZ-CD 1.4DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
operating)
Improved comfortably x PTC heater adopted (L.H.D. MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
End Of Sie
07-40B–1
TO MODEL INDEX

CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a2100200
R.H.D. (ZJ, ZY)

A/C RELAY BLOWER RELAY *2 PCM ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE SENSOR
*1
BLOWER RELAY
BCM
RESISTOR
CLIMATE CONTROL EVAPORATOR BLOWER MAGNETIC REFRIGERANT

UNIT TEMPERATURE MOTOR CLUTCH PRESSURE
SENSOR SWITCH
am2zzn0000128
07-40B–2
TO MODEL INDEX

R.H.D.
A/C RELAY BLOWER RELAY PCM ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
BCM
RESISTOR
CLIMATE CONTROL
UNIT
EVAPORATOR BLOWER MAGNETIC REFRIGERANT
TEMPERATURE MOTOR CLUTCH PRESSURE
SENSOR SENSOR
am2zzn0000116
End Of Sie
07-40B–7
TO MODEL INDEX

CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a2100400
ZJ, ZY
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
TNS RELAY
A
WITHOUT PANEL
LIGHT CONTROL
WITH PANEL
LIGHT CONTROL
ENGINE
COOLANT EVAPORATOR
SENSOR SENSOR
INSTRUMENT IG2 B+
CLUSTER CAN
A/C RELAY
CPU I PCM
BCM
MAGNETIC
G
REFRIGERANT CLUTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
REAR WINDOW K
DEFROSTER
IG2 SWITCH
B
IG2 B+
A/C
SWITCH
BLOWER
RELAY
CONTROL
L CIRCUIT F
BLOWER MOTOR M
RESISTOR FAN SWITCH
0
C 1
E 2
3
F
D 4
am2zzw0000214
07-40B–8
TO MODEL INDEX

BLOWER MOTOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a2101500
x A sirocco fan has been adopted.
End Of Sie
NG: RESISTOR
SIROCCO FAN
BLOWER MOTOR
acxuun00000685
RESISTOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a2101400
x A thin card type has been adopted for weight
reduction.
End Of Sie
NG: MAGNETIC CLUTCH
CARD-SHAPED
RESISTOR
am2zzn0000045
MAGNETIC CLUTCH CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a2101300
— Pressure plate
— Shim
— Snap ring
— A/C compressor pulley
— Stator and thermal protector (ZJ, ZY)
— Stator (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
ZJ, ZY
SNAP RING
SNAP RING
PRESSURE
PLATE
STATOR AND THERMAL

PROTECTOR
SHIM A/C COMPRESSOR

PULLEY
am2zzn0000122
MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)

End Of Sie
NG: THERMAL PROTECTOR
A/C COMPRESSOR PULLEY
SNAP RING
PRESSURE
PLATE
STATOR
SNAP RING
SHIM
am2zzn0000095
07-40B–10
TO MODEL INDEX

THERMAL PROTECTOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a2101200
x An indirect sensing type has been adopted,
THERMAL
reducing the number of the component parts.
PROTECTOR
End Of Sie
NG: EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
am2zzn0000030
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a2101600
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
am2zzn0000134

End Of Sie
NG: REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
acxuun00000175
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a2103700
x A triple pressure type has been adopted.
x Consists of the low/high-pressure switch that protects the refrigerant cycle by cutting the A/C signal when
pressure in the refrigerant cycle is abnormally high or low, and the medium-pressure switch that outputs an
idling increase signal according to the A/C compressor operation load.
High and Low Pressure Switch

x When pressure is abnormal, the refrigerant pressure switch turns off and cuts the signal sends to the magnetic
clutch, thereby stopping the A/C compressor.
07-40B–11
TO MODEL INDEX
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH A/C RELAY

(HIGH AND LOW PRESSURE)
0.176—0.216 2.94—3.34
{1.795—2.202, 25.53—31.31} {30.0—34.0, 427—483} PCM
ON
2.35—2.75
HIGH AND LOW
{24.0—28.0, PRESSURE SWITCH
341—398} A
OFF
0.02 MAGNETIC
0.195—0.250 0.39—0.79
{0.20, 2.84} CLUTCH
{1.989—2.549, {3.98—8.05,
or less
28.30—36.24} 57—114}
MPa {kgf/cm2, psi}

am2zzn0000102
Medium-pressure Switch
x When the refrigerant pressure is approx. 1.39 MPa {14.2 kg/cm2, 202 psi} or more, the contact is energized
and an idling increases signal is output to the PCM.
(MEDIUM-PRESSURE SWITCH)
OPERATION PRESSURE PCM
1.08—1.38 IDLING INCREASE

{11.1—14.0, 158—199} SIGNAL
ON
MEDIUM-PRESSURE
OFF SWITCH
1.39—1.65
{14.2—16.8, 202—238}
MPa {kgf/cm2, psi}
acxuun00000189
End Of Sie
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
id0740a2105000
x A capacitance type refrigerant pressure sensor, which converts refrigerant pressure into a linear electric signal,
has been adopted.
x Consists of a pressure detecting part and signal processing part.
x The pressure detecting part is a variable capacity condenser which changes capacitance according to the
pressure.
x The signal processing part detects the capacitance of pressure detecting part, converts it to voltage, then
outputs it to the PCM.
5
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

4
CONNECTOR
OUTPUT (V)
3
SIGNAL PROCESSOR
(ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT)
2
1
PRESSURE
SENSOR
0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
PRESSURE
{5, 73} {10, 145} {15, 218} {20, 290} {31, 363} {31, 435} {36, 508}
2
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE (MPa {kgf/cm , psi})
am2zzn0000095
07-40B–12
TO MODEL INDEX

x When pressure is abnormal, the PCM cuts the signal sends to the magnetic clutch, thereby stopping the A/C
compressor.
A/C RELAY
PCM
0.176—0.215 2.94—3.33
{1.80—2.19, 25.6—31.1} {30.0—33.9, 427—482}
ON
A/C
OPERATION A MAGNETIC
PRESSURE
CLUTCH
SIGNAL
OFF
0.019 REFRIGERANT
0.205—0.250 0.392—0.784
{0.19, 2.8}
{2.10—2.54, {4.00—7.99, PRESSURE
or less
29.8—36.2} 56.9—113.0} SENSOR
MPa {kgf/cm2, psi}
am2zzn0000095
Pressure Detecting Part

x There is a clearance between the movable ceramic diaphragm and the ceramic base, and each side has an
electrode.
x When pressure is applied from the ceramic diaphragm side, the ceramic diaphragm deforms, and the clearance
between the electrodes changes. As a result, capacitance is changed and pressure is detected.
End Of Sie
NG: FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
ELECTRODE
CLEARANCE
CERAMIC BASE
CERAMIC DIAPHRAGM
(MOVABLE)
APPLIE PRESSURE
am2zzn0000102
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a2100900
x A wire-type climate control unit is used with the manual air conditioner.
x The airflow mode selector dial, temperature control dial, airflow volume control dial have been enlarged to
improve ease of operation.
07-40B–13
TO MODEL INDEX
REAR WINDOW AIRFLOW VOLUME A/C SWITCH AIRFLOW MODE

DEFROSTER SWITCH CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL
REC/FRESH LEVER
TEMPERATURE REC/FRESH LEVER
SETTING DIAL L.H.D. R.H.D.
am2zzn0000045
End Of Sie
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER FUNCTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]
SOKYU_NG: MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL SYSTEM
id0740a2638600
Block Diagram
x The PCM performs A/C compressor control, A/C cut-off control, and idle air control based on the input signals
from each sensor and switch, then outputs operation signals to the A/C relay and throttle valve actuator.
EVAPORATOR PCM
TEMPERATURE MAGNETIC
SENSOR THERMAL CLUTCH
A/C RELAY PROTECTOR
CLIMATE A/C CUT-

CONTROL OFF
UNIT CONTROL
A/C SWITCH
IDLE AIR THROTTLE VALVE

CONTROL ACTUATOR
REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE
SWITCH (THROTTLE BODY)
AIRFLOW VOLUME (MZ-CD 1.4DI Turbo,
CONTROL DIAL MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
HI AND LO
PRESSURE
SWITCH MEDIUM PRESSURE
(ZJ, ZY)
am2zzn0000045
A/C Compressor Control

x The PCM performs all of the air conditioner controls including the climate control unit functions which have
been integrated into the PCM.
x The PCM controls the A/C relay (magnetic clutch) and the throttle valve actuator based on the input signals
from each sensor and switch.
07-40B–14
TO MODEL INDEX

System diagram
EVAPORATOR MAGNETIC
TEMPERATURE A/C RELAY CLUTCH
SENSOR
OUTPUT
SIGNAL OUTPUT
PCM
A/C SWITCH
SIGNAL
THROTTLE VALVE
OUTPUT ACTUATOR
(THROTTLE BODY)
AIRFLOW VOLUME
CONTROL DIAL
am2zzn0000045
A/C Signal On/Off Determination during A/C On

x To prevent the evaporator being frozen while the
A/C is on (A/C and fan switches are on), the PCM
switches the A/C signal on/off (on/off of the A/C SIGNAL ON
magnetic clutch) based on the temperature signal
from the evaporator temperature sensor so that
the temperature of the air passing through the A/C SIGNAL OFF
evaporator is within a certain range.
End Of Sie
3.7 {39} 4.5 {40} ˚C {˚F}
TEMPERATURE OF AIR PASSING

THROUGH EVAPORATOR
am2zzn0000046
PTC HEATER CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]

id0740a2106500
Outline
x The PTC heater is supplementary heater to assist
A/C unit heating performance.
PTC HEATER
am2zzn0000094
07-40B–15
TO MODEL INDEX

B+ IG1 B+
ENGINE
AMBIENT COOLANT
SENSOR SENSOR
RELAY NO.2 RELAY NO.1
CAN
INSTRUMENT
PCM
CLUSTER
PTC J
HEATER
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
am2zzn0000099
07-40B–16
TO MODEL INDEX

System Block Diagram
PCM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CAN
PTC HEATER
ENGINE COOLANT PTC HEATER
RELAY
TEMPERATURE SIGNAL RELAY
OPERATION
ENGINE OPERATION NO.1/NO.2
CONTROL
CONDITION SIGNAL
PTC HEATER
CLIMATE OPERATION
CONTROL UNIT PTC HEATER PERMISSION
OPERATION CONTROL
REQUEST SIGNAL
PTC HEATER
AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE AMBIENT
SENSOR TEMPERATURE
SIGNAL
CAN ELECTRICAL
LOAD
PTC HEATER ON/OFF
CONTROL
REQUEST SIGNAL
CAN DETECTION OF
USED CURRENT/
PRESENT CURRENT VOLTAGE
INPUTABLE CURRENT
BATTERY VOLTAGE
PTC HEATER
OPERATION
PATTERN
FAIL-SAFE
CONTROL
am2zzn0000099
Operation
x When the climate control unit detects that the fan switch is turned on, it outputs a PTC heater operation request
signal to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster controls the PTC heater by operating PTC heater relay
No.1/No.2 according to the ambient temperature and engine coolant signals.
x PTC heater operation is stopped if the following conditions are met:
— The ignition switch is in the LOCK position, or the engine is not started
— The engine is cranking
— The engine is stalled
x The PCM temporarily stops PTC heater operation to prevent lowering of engine startability caused by high
electrical current use during PTC heater operation.
x If the current/voltage information signal (present current, inputable current, and battery voltage) which is input
from the PCM is lower than the specified value, the instrument cluster restricts the PTC heater operation
pattern.
End Of Sie
07-40B–17
TO MODEL INDEX
RESTRAINTS 08
SECTION
Toc of SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-00

OUTLINE AIR BAG SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 08-10
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC. . . . 08-02 SEAT BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Toc of SCT
08-00 OUTLINE
RESTRAINTS ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . 08-00–1 AutoAilliance Thailand (AAT)
RESTRAINTS FEATURES manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-00–2
[3HB, 5HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-00–2 RESTRAINTS FEATURES [4SD] . . . . . . . 08-00–3
Except AutoAilliance Thailand (AAT) Vehicles With Rear Center Seat Belt
manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-00–2 (Two-point Seat Belt). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-00–3
Vehicles With Rear Center Seat Belt
(Three-point Seat Belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-00–3
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
RESTRAINTS ABBREVIATIONS
NG: RESTRAINTS
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor

id080000100100
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
GND Ground
IG Ignition
LED Light Emitting Diode
LH Left Hand
RH Right Hand
SAS Sophisticated Air Bag Sensor
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
End Of Sie
08-00–1
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
RESTRAINTS FEATURES [3HB, 5HB]
id0800001002a4
Except AutoAilliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles
x A driver-side air bag module has been adopted.
x A passenger-side air bag module has been adopted.
x A side air bag module has been adopted.
x A curtain air bag module has been adopted.
General (L.H.D.) specs.
x Three-point front seat belts with the following functions for front seat passengers adopted.
— ELR (Emergency Locking Retractor: emergency locking mechanism)
— Pre-tensioner seat belt (See 08-10-10 PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT CONSTRUCTION/
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
x Three-point rear seat belts with the following functions for rear seat (left and right seats)
passengers adopted.
— ELR
— ALR (Automatic Locking Retractor: child-restraint seat locking mechanism)
Improved safety
x Two-point seat belt for rear seat passenger (center seat) adopted.
Except General (L.H.D.) specs.
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
— ALR (Australian specs., Honk Kong specs. only)
x Three-point rear center seat belt with the following functions for rear seat (center seat)
passenger adopted.
— ELR
AutoAilliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

OPERATION)
Improved safety
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
— ALR (General (L.H.D. R.H.D.) specs. only)
passenger adopted.
— ELR
End Of Sie
08-00–2
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
RESTRAINTS FEATURES [4SD]
id0800001002a3
Vehicles With Rear Center Seat Belt (Two-point Seat Belt)
General (R.H.D.) specs.
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
Improved safety — ELR
Except General (R.H.D.) specs.
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
Vehicles With Rear Center Seat Belt (Three-point Seat Belt)

Vehicles with child-restraint seat anchor (tether strap anchor type)
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
— ALR (Australian specs. only)
Improved safety
passenger adopted.
— ELR
Vehicles without child-restraint seat anchor (tether strap anchor type)
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
— ALR
passenger adopted.
— ELR
End Of Sie
08-00–3
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
08-02 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC

OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-02–1 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-02–1
Self-diagnostic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-02–1
PID/Data Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . 08-02–4
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OUTLINE

NG: AIR BAG SYSTEM
id080200300200
x The on-board diagnostic function consists of the following functions: a failure detection function, which detects
malfunctions in the air bag system-related parts; a memory function, which stores detected DTCs; a self-
diagnostic function, which indicates system malfunctions using DTCs; a PID/data monitoring function, which
reads out specific input/output signals.
x Using the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS), DTCs can be read out and deleted, and the PID/data
monitoring function can be activated.
x A fail-safe function, prevents the abrupt activation of the air bag module and the pre-tensioner seat belt in case
of an air bag system malfunction.
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
id080200300300
Self-diagnostic Function
x Detects overall malfunctions in the air bag system-related parts.
Fail-safe function
x If the SAS control module performance/function cannot be maintained due to any cause, the fail-safe function
stops air bag system control and flashes the air bag system warning light to prevent the air bags from operating
(deploying) accidentally.
Memory function
x Stores malfunctions in the air bag system-related parts detected by the malfunction detection function, and the
stored malfunction contents are not cleared even if the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position or the
negative battery cable is disconnection.
Display function
x When the malfunction detection function detects a malfunction, the air bag system warning light illuminates to
advise the driver. Using the external tester communication function, DTCs can be output to the DLC-2 via the
CAN.
DTC table
DTC
Mazda Air bag system warning light
Modular System malfunction location
Diagnostic Priority
System (M- Flashing pattern
ranking
MDS) menu
Driver-side air bag module circuit short to body
B0001:11
ground
Driver-side air bag module circuit short to power
B0001:12
supply
Driver-side air bag module circuit open circuit or
B0001:13
resistance high
19 11 Short circuit to driver-side air bag module and
B0001:19
other air bag module circuits
B0001:1A Driver-side air bag module circuit resistance low
Diagnostic circuit voltage malfunction in driver-
B0001:1C
side air bag module
Configuration setting error (driver-side air bag
B0001:55
module structural malfunction)
Operation (deployment) inhibited due to
B0003:53 59 4
configuration setting
08-02–1
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC
Diagnostic Priority
ranking
MDS) menu
Passenger-side air bag module circuit short to
B0010:11
body ground
Passenger-side air bag module circuit short to
B0010:12
power supply
Passenger-side air bag module circuit open circuit
B0010:13
or resistance high
Short circuit to passenger-side air bag module
B0010:19 21 10
and other air bag module circuits
Passenger-side air bag module circuit resistance
B0010:1A
low
Diagnostic circuit voltage malfunction in
B0010:1C
passenger-side air bag module
Configuration setting error (passenger-side air
B0010:55
bag module structural malfunction)
Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit short to
B0070:11
body ground
Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit short to
B0070:12
power supply
Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit open
B0070:13
circuit or resistance high
Short circuit todriver-side pre-tensioner seat belt
B0070:19 33 13
Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit
B0070:1A
resistance low
B0070:1C
side pre-tensioner seat belt
Configuration setting error (driver-side pre-
B0070:55
tensioner seat belt structural malfunction)
Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit
B0072:11
short to body ground
B0072:12
short to power supply
B0072:13
open circuit or resistance high
Short circuit to passenger-side pre-tensioner seat
B0072:19 34 12
belt and other air bag module circuits
B0072:1A
resistance low
B0072:1C
passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt
Configuration setting error (passenger-side pre-
B0072:55
tensioner seat belt structural malfunction)
B00D2:01 Continuously illuminated 1 Air bag system warning light malfunction
B1011:95 58 6 SAS control module connector poor connection
Driver- side side air bag sensor circuit short to

B10FD:11
body ground
Driver-side side air bag sensor circuit open circuit
B10FD:15
or short to power supply
43 8 Configuration setting error (driver-side side air
B10FD:55
bag sensor structural malfunction)
B10FD:76 Driver-side side air bag sensor ID mismatch
Driver-side side air bag sensor internal
B10FD:96
malfunction
08-02–2
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC
Diagnostic Priority
ranking
MDS) menu
Passenger-side side air bag sensor short to body
B10FE:11
ground
Passenger-side side air bag sensor circuit open
B10FE:15
circuit or short to power supply
44 7 Configuration setting error (passenger-side side
B10FE:55
air bag sensor structural malfunction)
B10FE:76 Passenger-side side air bag sensor ID mismatch
Passenger-side side air bag sensor internal
B10FE:96
malfunction
Driver-side side air bag module circuit short to
B1126:11
body ground
Driver-side side air bag module circuit short to
B1126:12
power supply
Driver-side side air bag module circuit open circuit
B1126:13
or resistance high
Short circuit to driver-side side air bag module
B1126:19 22 15
Driver-side side air bag module circuit resistance
B1126:1A
low
B1126:1C
side side air bag module
Configuration setting error (driver-side side air
B1126:55
Passenger-side side air bag module circuit short
B1127:11
to body ground
Passenger-side side air bag module circuit short
B1127:12
to power supply
Passenger-side side air bag module circuit open
B1127:13
Short circuit to passenger-side side air bag
B1127:19 23 14
module and other air bag module circuits
Passenger-side side air bag module circuit
B1127:1A
resistance low
B1127:1C
passenger-side side air bag module
Configuration setting error (passenger-side side
B1127:55
air bag module structural malfunction)
Driver-side curtain air bag module circuit short to
B1128:11
body ground
Driver-side curtain air bag module circuit short to
B1128:12
power supply
Driver-side curtain air bag module circuit open
B1128:13
Short circuit to driver-side curtain air bag module
B1128:19 24 17
Driver-side curtain air bag module circuit
B1128:1A
resistance low
B1128:1C
side curtain air bag module
Configuration setting error (driver-side curtain air
B1128:55
08-02–3
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC
Diagnostic Priority
ranking
MDS) menu
Passenger-side curtain air bag module circuit
B1129:11
short to body ground
B1129:12
short to power supply
B1129:13
open circuit or resistance high
Short circuit to passenger-side curtain air bag
B1129:19 25 16
module and other air bag module circuits
B1129:1A
resistance low
B1129:1C
passenger-side curtain air bag module
Configuration setting error (passenger-side
B1129:55
curtain air bag module structural malfunction)
B1193:00 13 3 SAS control module operation (deployment)
U0001:88 CAN communication error

14 9
U0155:00 Instrument cluster communication error
U0300:00 Configuration setting invalid
54 5
U2100:00 Configuration not set
U3000:00 SAS control module malfunction

U3000:04 SAS control module internal malfunction
U3000:09 SRS air bag system structural malfunction
SAS control module circuit voltage value out of
U3000:1C
range
12 2
U3000:29 Invalid signal to SAS control module
U3000:42 SAS control module memory malfunction
U3000:47 SAS control module internal control malfunction
SRS air bag system non-operation (non-
U3000:53
deployment)
SAS control module power supply voltage
U3003:16
decreases (less than 9 V)
SAS control module power supply voltage
U3003:17 Continuously illuminated 18
increases (16 V or more)
SAS control module circuit voltage out of range
U3003:1C
(18 V or more)
PID/Data Monitoring Function

x By using the PID/data monitoring function, the monitored item of the input/output signal, as set on the SAS
control module, can be freely selected and read out in real-time.
x The Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) is used to read out PID/data monitor information.
08-02–4
TO MODEL INDEX
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
PID name Description Unit/Operation Terminal
BUCKLE_D Driver-side buckle switch status Buckled/Unbuckled 2M
BUCKLE_P Passenger-side buckle switch status Buckled/Unbuckled 2O
Off/Ready/Cranking/
Running/Stalled/
ENG_ST Engine status -
After Run/Shutdown/
Not Defined
P_ELT_SSR Occupancy sensor status Off/On 2J
RES_AB_D Driver-side air bag module resistance low ohm 3E, 3G
RES_AB_P Passenger-side air bag module resistance low ohm 3I, 3K
RES_CAB_D Driver-side curtain air bag module resistance low ohm 1I, 1K
RES_CAB_P Passenger-side curtain air bag module resistance low ohm 1M, 1O
RES_PT_D Driver-side pretensioner seat belt resistance low ohm 2A, 2C
RES_PT_P Passenger-side pretensioner seat belt resistance low ohm 2E, 2G
RES_SAB_D Driver-side side air bag module resistance low ohm 1A, 1C
RES_SAB_P Passenger-side side air bag module resistance low ohm 1E, 1G
VPWR SAS control module power voltage V 3A
VSPD Vehicle speed KPH -
Note
PAD_IL_OFF
x Displayed but not used in the inspection.
Note
PAD_SW
Note
PAD_SW_FLT
End Of Sie
08-02–5
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM
08-10 AIR BAG SYSTEM

AIR BAG SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . 08-10–1 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
AIR BAG SYSTEM STRUCTURAL CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 08-10–7
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–2 Inflator Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–7
AIR BAG SYSTEM WIRING PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–3 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–7
SAS CONTROL MODULE PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–3 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 08-10–7
Sensing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–3 Inflator Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–7
Backup power supply function . . . . . . . 08-10–3 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FUNCTION . . . 08-10–8
Configuration function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–4 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
SAS CONTROL MODULE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 08-10–8
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 08-10–4 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–8
Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–8
Side Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–5 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Side Air Bag Sensor System . . . . . . . . 08-10–5 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–9
AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–5 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 08-10–9
AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–9
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 08-10–6 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–9
AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING ALARM PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–6 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–10
AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING ALARM PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 08-10–6 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 08-10–10
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–10
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–6 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–10
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM

AIR BAG SYSTEM OUTLINE
NG: AIR BAG SYSTEM
id081000100100
x The air bag system is a device that supplements the passenger restraint function of the seat belts. The air bag
system will not have the designed effect if the seat belts are not worn properly.
x The air bag system is composed of the following parts:
Item Outline
x Recognizes actually equipped air bag module or pre-
Sophisticated air bag sensor (SAS) control module
tensioner seat belt based on module configuration.
x Detects degree of impact, converts to an electrical signal, and
sends the signal to the SAS control module. For operation,
Side air bag sensor refer to SAS control module and Air bag module deployment
operation. (See 08-10-4 SAS CONTROL MODULE
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION)
Driver-side air bag module
x Adopted to improve safety in frontal collisions.
Passenger-side air bag module
x Chest-protection type side air bag module is used in
Side air bag module
accordance with the adoption of the curtain air bag module.
Curtain air bag module x Adopted to improve safety in lateral collisions.
Pre-tensioner seat belt x Piston-type pre-tensioner seat belt has been adopted.
x LED has been adopted. (See 08-10-6 AIR BAG SYSTEM
Air bag system warning light
WARNING LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION.)
x If there is a malfunction in the air bag system warning light,
the air bag system warning alarm is triggered to notify the
Air bag system warning alarm
driver of the malfunction. (See 08-10-6 AIR BAG SYSTEM
WARNING ALARM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION)
End Of Sie
08-10–1
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM

AIR BAG SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id081000100200
CURTAIN DRIVER-SIDE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

AIR BAG AIR BAG
MODULE MODULE
0
0
CLOCK
SPRING
AIR BAG SYSTEM

WARNING LIGHT
PASSENGER-SIDE
AIR BAG MODULE
SAS CONTROL
MODULE
3HB CURTAIN AIR BAG SIDE AIR BAG SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE MODULE FRONT DRIVER SEAT MODULE
PASSENGER
SEAT
PRE-TENSIONER OCCUPANCY PRE-TENSIONER

SEAT BELT SENSOR SEAT BELT
SIDE AIR BAG

SENSOR
am2zzn0000108
End Of Sie
08-10–2
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM

AIR BAG SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id081000100300
IG1
CLOCK SPRING
SAS 10 A
B+ IG1
FUSE 3G 1C 1C 3A
3A DRIVER-SIDE
AIR BAG MODULE
3E 1D 1D 3B
AIR BAG
SEAT BELT 3K A
BZ SYSTEM PASSENGER-SIDE
WARNING WARNING AIR BAG MODULE
3I B
LIGHT LIGHT
MICRO-COMPUTER 1A A
DRIVER-SIDE SIDE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AIR BAG MODULE
1C B
3C 1E A
PASSENGER-SIDE SIDE
CAN SYSTEM-
1G AIR BAG MODULE
RELATED MODULE B
3D
1K A DRIVER-SIDE CURTAIN
AIR BAG MODULE
1I B
SAS
DLC-2 CONTROL 1O A PASSENGER-SIDE
MODULE CURTAIN AIR BAG
1M B MODULE
TWISTED PAIR
DRIVER-SIDE A 1L 2C A
DRIVER-SIDE PRE-
SIDE AIR BAG
2A TENSIONER SEAT BELT
SENSOR B 1J B
PASSENGER-SIDE A 1P 2G A PASSENGER-SIDE PRE-

SIDE AIR BAG TENSIONER SEAT BELT
SENSOR B 1N 2E B
1a POOR CONNECTION
DRIVER-SIDE DETECTOR BAR
BUCKLE SWITCH 1b
A B 2M 2a
POOR CONNECTION
PASSENGER-SIDE 2b DETECTOR BAR
BUCKLE SWITCH
B A 2O 3a POOR CONNECTION
DETECTOR BAR
3b
3J
2J A
OCCUPANCY
SENSOR
B
am2zzn0000110
End Of Sie
SAS CONTROL MODULE FUNCTION
NG: SAS CONTROL MODULE
id081000303500
Sensing function
x Crash sensor is built into the SAS control module.
x If the degree of impact detected by the crash sensor built into the SAS control module exceeds the set value
during a frontal collision to the vehicle, the SAS control module sends an operation (deployment) signal to the
air bag module and the pre-tensioner seat belts.
x If the degree of impact detected by side air bag sensor and the crash sensor built into the SAS control module
exceeds the set value during a side collision to the vehicle, the SAS control module sends an operation
(deployment) signal to the side air bag module and curtain air bag module.
Backup power supply function

x The backup power supply function enables the condenser to discharge and supply power to assure air bag
system operation/deployment properly for a specified time even if the power supply to the SAS control module
is cut due to a collision.
08-10–3
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM

Configuration function
x Identifies the variation of the air bag module installed to the vehicle when replacing the SAS control module
with a new one.
x If the air bag module installed to the vehicle and the module identified by the SAS control module differ, a DTC
is displayed.
x Refer to the Workshop Manual for the configuration setting procedure.
End Of Sie
SAS CONTROL MODULE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id081000303600
Air Bag System
1. The impact of a frontal or frontal offset collision to the vehicle is transmitted to the SAS control module.
2. The safing sensor inside the SAS control module detects the collision and activates. In addition, the crash
sensor determines the impact and converts it to an electronic signal and outputs it to the output control circuit.
SAS CONTROL MODULE
SAFING AIR BAG MODULE (DRIVER

SENSOR OR PASSENGER-SIDE AIR
BAG MODULE)
OUTPUT
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT

(DRIVER OR PASSENGER-
CRASH SIDE)
SENSOR
am2zzn0000035
3. The output control circuit calculates the electronic signals from the crash sensor and the valve is compared with
the preset valve. If the output signal received from the crash sensors exceeds the preset value, an ignition
circuit is completed and an operation (deployment) signal is sent to both the driver and passenger-side air bag
modules.
4. In conjunction with both the driver and passenger-side air bag module deployment, an ignition circuit for the
pre-tensioner seat belt is completed and an operation (deployment) signal is sent to the pre-tensioner seat belt.
SAS CONTROL MODULE
SAFING AIR BAG MODULE (DRIVER

SENSOR OR PASSENGER-SIDE AIR
BAG MODULE)
OUTPUT
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT

(DRIVER OR PASSENGER-
CRASH SIDE)
SENSOR
am2zzn0000035
08-10–4
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM

Side Air Bag System
1. During a lateral collision to the vehicle, the crash sensors in the side air bag sensor and SAS control module
detect the collision.
2. The degree of impact detected by the crash sensor in the side air bag sensor is converted to an electrical signal
and sent to the SAS control module through the signal amplification circuit.
3. Simultaneously, the SAS control module crash sensor converts the degree of impact detected to an electrical
signal.
4. The SAS control module processes the calculations for the two electrical signals at the output control circuit
and compares the value to a preset value.
5. The output control circuit determines the degree of impact to the vehicle by the value from the crash sensors,
completes a side air bag module ignition circuit, and sends the deployment signal to the air bag modules.
SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR SAS CONTROL MODULE
CRASH
SENSOR
SIGNAL
AMPLIFICATION
CIRCUIT
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
CRASH
SENSOR
OUTPUT CONTROL
CIRCUIT
am2zzn0000036
Side Air Bag Sensor System

1. Side air bag sensors have been placed in the area below the left/right B-pillars for improved impact sensitivity at
the vehicle’s sides.
SIDE AIR BAG

SENSOR
am2zzn0000056
End Of Sie
AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT FUNCTION
id081000302600
x The air bag system warning light illuminates or flashes if there is a malfunction in the SRS air bag system to
notify the driver of the malfunction.
End Of Sie
08-10–5
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM

AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id081000303000
x The air bag system warning light is built into the instrument cluster.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
0
0
AIR BAG SYSTEM

WARNING LIGHT
am2zzn0000012
x When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the air bag system warning light illuminates for approx. 6
s to indicate that the SRS air bag system is performing initialization diagnostics. If there is no malfunction in the
SRS air bag system, the indicator light turns off.
x If the SAS control module detects a malfunction in the SRS air bag system, it sends a warning signal as a CAN
signal to the instrument panel to illuminate or flash the air bag system warning light and display the DTC.
x If there is a malfunction in the SRS air bag system, DTCs are displayed according to the following patterns.
EXAMPLES: DTC 22 DETECTED BY THE
MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
ILLUMINATED
GOES OUT t1: 0.5 s

t1 t1 t2: 2 s
t1 t2 t1 t3 t3: 5 s
DTC 22
am2zzn0000057
x After the air bag system warning light repeats the display of the DTC 5 times, it remains illuminated. When the
indicator light illuminates continuously, other DTCs are not displayed even if there is a malfunction occurring in
another location, and the indicator light continues to remain illuminated.
x If there are several malfunctions in the SRS air bag system, the DTC of the highest priority ranking is displayed
first.
End Of Sie
AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING ALARM FUNCTION
id081000303100
x If there is a malfunction in the air bag system warning light, the air bag system warning alarm is triggered to
notify the driver of the malfunction.
End Of Sie
AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING ALARM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id081000303200
x If the following two conditions are met, the air bag system warning light is triggered to notify the driver of a
malfunction.
— SAS control module DTC B00D2:01 (air bag system warning light malfunction) is detected
— SAS control module DTC other than DTC B00D2:01 is detected
x The warning alarm trigger signal is sent to the instrument cluster via CAN communication to sound the buzzer
in the instrument cluster.
x Refer to the instrumentation/driver information specifications for the air bag system warning alarm sound
interval.
End Of Sie
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FUNCTION
NG: DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
id081000302900
x During a frontal or front offset collision, an operation signal from SAS control module is received and the front
air bag operates (deploys), softening the impact to the head and face areas of the drivers.
08-10–6
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM

End Of Sie
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION

id081000100900
x Installed in the center of the steering wheel.
x The inflator operates in the following order:
Inflator Operation
1. When an operation (deployment) signal is received from the SAS control module, the igniter built into the
inflator generates heat and ignites the ignition agent.
2. The ignition of the ignition agent causes the combustion of a gas generating agent which forms nitrogen gas.
3. The nitrogen gas is cooled at the filter and the filtrate is injected into the air bag.
INFLATION GAS GENERATION AGENT
AGENT
IGNITOR IGNITION OF
INFLATION AGENT
TO AIR TO AIR
BAG BAG
GAS GENERATING FILTER FILTER

AGENT COMBUSTION
am2zzn0000036
End Of Sie
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FUNCTION
NG: PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
id081000101700
x During a frontal or offset collision, an operation signal from SAS control module is received and the air bag
operates (deploys), softening the impact to the head and face areas of the front passenger.
End Of Sie
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id081000101800
x Installed in the dashboard upper garnish.
x The inflator operates in the following order:
Inflator Operation
1. When an operation (deployment) signal is received from the SAS control module, the igniter built into the
inflator generates heat and ignites the ignition agent.
2. The ignition of the ignition agent causes the combustion of a gas generating agent which forms nitrogen gas.
3. The nitrogen gas is cooled at the filter and the filtrate is injected into the air bag.
IGNITION OF
GAS GAS GAS GENERATING
INFLATION NITROGEN
GENERATION AGENT GENERATION AGENT COMBUSTION
AGENT GAS
AGENT TO AIR TO AIR
BAG BAG
IGNITOR FILTER FILTER
am2zzn0000036
08-10–7
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM

End Of Sie
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FUNCTION
NG: SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
id081000302200
x During a collision to the side of the vehicle, the air bag operates (deploys) after receiving an operation signal
from the SAS control module, defusing impact to the chest area of the driver and front passenger.
x Operates in conjunction with the curtain air bag module.
End Of Sie
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id081000302300
Construction
x Side air bag modules are installed on the outboard sides of the front seat backs.
x The side air bag module is composed of an inflator and air bag.
x When an air bag operates (deploys), the seat back trim is spread apart by argon gas generated from the
inflator, inflating the air bag.
INFLATOR
AIR BAG
SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE
AIR BAG
am2zzn0000012
Operation
Inflator operation
1. The igniter built into the inflator begins to build up heat when the operation (deployment) signal is sent from the
SAS control module. The inflation agent is ignited by the build up of heat in the igniter.
2. The argon gas expands due to the heat of the ignited inflation agent.
3. The expanding argon gas breaks the discharge barrier, is cooled and filtered by the filter, and then injected into
the air bag.
ARGON GAS EXPANSION
INFLATION AGENT ARGON GAS TO AIR
BAG
TO AIR
IGNITOR COMBUSTION OF DISCHARGE BARRIER BAG
INFLATION AGENT
acxuun00000280
End Of Sie
NG: CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
08-10–8
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM

CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE FUNCTION
id081000303300
x During a lateral collision to the vehicle, the air bag operates (deploys) after receiving an operation signal from
the SAS control module, defusing impact to the side of the head of the driver and other passengers
(passenger-side and rear outboard-seated passenger).
x Operates in conjunction with the side air bag module.
End Of Sie
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id081000100700
Construction
x The curtain air bag modules are equipped along the roof edge between the A and C pillars.
x The curtain air bag module is composed of the inflator and air bag.
x When the air bag operates (deploys), the A-pillar trim and headliner is spread apart by argon gas generated
from the inflator, inflating the air bag.
CURTAIN
AIR BAG
MODULE
INFLATOR AIR BAG
AIR BAG
am2zzn0000012
Operation
Inflator operation
1. The igniter built into the inflator begins to build up heat when the operation (deployment) signal is sent from the
SAS control module. The inflation agent is ignited by the build up of heat in the igniter.
2. The argon gas expands due to the heat of the ignited inflation agent.
3. The expanding argon gas breaks the discharge barrier, is cooled and filtered by the filter, and then injected into
the air bag.
08-10–9
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM
ARGON GAS
EXPANSION
INFLATION AGENT ARGON GAS TO AIR

BAG
TO AIR
IGNITOR COMBUSTION OF DISCHARGE BAG
INFLATION AGENT BARRIER
am2zzn0000036
End Of Sie
PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT FUNCTION
NG: PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
id081000101900
x When a vehicle is involved in a frontal or frontal offset collision and the front seat belts are buckled, the pre-
tensioner seat belt system receives an operation signal from the SAS control module, retracting and tightening
the belt webbing instantly on the driver and front passenger restraints.
End Of Sie
PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id081000102000
Construction
SPRING SEAT
SPRING SHAFT
SPRING
SPRING CASE
SPINDLE
BASE
PISTON CLUTCH
ROLLER
CAP NUT GEAR
COVER
GAS GENERATOR
CYLINDER
am2zzn0000072
Operation
Normal (Seat Belt Pre-tensioners Not Operating)
x Normally, the clutch roller installed to the outer circumference of the spindle sits in the recess of the gear and
does not interfere with the spindle.
x The gear does not rotate when the belt is pulled or retracted because the spindle and gear are not engaged.
08-10–10
TO MODEL INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM
GEAR
GEAR
SPINDLE
CLUTCH ROLLER
am2zzn0000072
Seat Belt Pre-tensioners Operating

1. When an operation signal is received from the SAS control module, the gas generator produces gas. Due to the
pressure from the gas, the piston in the cylinder is pressed up.
2. The gear rotates while the piston moves up.
3. Based on the gear rotation, the clutch roller in the gear presses against the spindle.Due to this, the gear and
spindle are engaged.
4. The belt is retracted in conjunction with the gear rotation.
GEAR
SPINDLE
CLUTCH ROLLER
GEAR
PISTON
GAS
GENERATOR
am2zzn0000072
End Of Sie
08-10–11
TO MODEL INDEX
SEAT BELT
08-11 SEAT BELT

SEAT BELT OUTLINE [3HB, 5HB] . . . . . 08-11–1 SEAT BELT STRUCTURAL VIEW
Except AutoAilliance Thailand (AAT) [4SD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–4
manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–1 LOAD LIMITER RETRACTOR
AutoAilliance Thailand (AAT) OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–4
manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–1 LOAD LIMITER RETRACTOR
SEAT BELT OUTLINE [4SD]. . . . . . . . . . 08-11–2 STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–4
Vehicles With Rear Center Seat Belt LOAD LIMITER RETRACTOR
(Two-point Seat Belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–5
Vehicles With Rear Center Seat Belt CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR
(Three-point Seat Belt). . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–2 CONSTRUCTION [3HB, 5HB] . . . . . . . . 08-11–5
SEAT BELT STRUCTURAL VIEW CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR
[3HB, 5HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–3 CONSTRUCTION [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–6
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT OUTLINE [3HB, 5HB]
NG: SEAT BELT
id0811003026c3
Except AutoAilliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
Improved safety Except General (L.H.D.) specs.
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
— ALR (Australian specs., Honk Kong specs. only)
passenger adopted.
— ELR
AutoAilliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles

OPERATION)
— Load limiter
Improved safety
passengers adopted.
— ELR
— ALR (General (L.H.D. R.H.D.) specs. only)
passenger adopted.
— ELR
End Of Sie
08-11–1
TO MODEL INDEX
SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT OUTLINE [4SD]
id0811003026c2
Vehicles With Rear Center Seat Belt (Two-point Seat Belt)
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
Improved safety Except General (R.H.D.) specs.
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
Vehicles With Rear Center Seat Belt (Three-point Seat Belt)

Vehicles with child-restraint seat anchor (tether strap anchor type)
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
— ALR (Australian specs. only)
passenger adopted.
— ELR
Improved safety
Vehicles without child-restraint seat anchor (tether strap anchor type)
OPERATION)
— Load limiter
passengers adopted.
— ELR
— ALR
passenger adopted.
— ELR
End Of Sie
08-11–2
TO MODEL INDEX
SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT STRUCTURAL VIEW [3HB, 5HB]
id0811003027c3
REAR SEAT BELT REAR BUCKLE FRONT SEAT BELT
CHILD-RESTRAINT
SEAT ANCHOR
REAR CENTER
SEAT BELT
(EXCEPT
GENERAL (L.H.D.)
SPECS.)
REAR CENTER FRONT BUCKLE

SEAT BELT
(GENERAL (L.H.D.)
SPECS.)
am2zzn0000012

CHILD-RESTRAINT
SEAT ANCHOR
REAR CENTER
SEAT BELT
FRONT BUCKLE
am2zzn0000132
End Of Sie
08-11–3
TO MODEL INDEX
SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]
id0811003027c2

CHILD-RESTRAINT
SEAT ANCHOR
REAR CENTER
FRONT BUCKLE
SEAT BELT
REAR CENTER SEAT BELT (VEHICLES WITH
(VEHICLES WITH THREE-POINT TWO-POINT SEAT
SEAT BELT) BELT)
am2zzn0000141
End Of Sie
LOAD LIMITER RETRACTOR OUTLINE
id081100302900
x Depending on the amount of weight applied to the belt, the belt restraining force is adjusted by the wire and
torsion bar.
End Of Sie
LOAD LIMITER RETRACTOR STRUCTURAL VIEW
id081100303000
CONNECTOR
HOUSING
BEARING A
TORSION BAR
SPINDLE
DRUM
GUIDE DRUM
BEARING B
PLATE
WIRE
RETAINER
am2zzn0000055
End Of Sie
08-11–4
TO MODEL INDEX
SEAT BELT
LOAD LIMITER RETRACTOR OPERATION
id081100303600
1. Initial state
adejjn00000343
2. If shock is applied to the belt, rotation of the

retraction shaft is stopped and the retractor is in
the ELR condition. Under the ELR condition, the
belt locks to secure the passenger’s body.
3. Depending on the increase in weight applied to
the belt under the ELR condition, the drum takes
in rotation force in the direction that the belt
webbing is being fed out.
4. If the weight applied to the belt exceeds the
specified value, the drum begins to rotate, the THE VEHICLE IS
torsion bar twists, and the wire transfers to the INVOLVED IN AN
guide drum. As a result, belt webbing is fed out, IMPACT
am2zzn0000057
and the restraining force of the belt loosens.
(Load limiter conditioner)
5. If the drum rotates beyond a certain level (belt webbing has been fed out), the wire pulls out from the guide
drum. If the weight applied to the belt increases further above the specified value, the load limiter condition is
maintained by the torsion bar.
6. When the load applied to the belt decreases below the specified level of the torsion bar, the load limiter
condition is canceled.
WIRE
PLATE
DIRECTION
OF DRUM
ROTATION GUIDE DRUM
am2zzn0000057
End Of Sie
CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR CONSTRUCTION [3HB, 5HB]
id0811006544c3
x ISOFIX anchors for securing an ISOFIX child-restraint seat, and tether strap anchors have been adopted.
Caution
x Installation procedure varies with the type of child-restraint seat. When installing a child-restraint
seat, be sure to follow the prescribed procedure for each type.
08-11–5
TO MODEL INDEX
SEAT BELT
CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR

(TETHER STRAP ANCHOR TYPE)
REAR SEAT
REAR SEAT
TRUNK
END TRIM
CHILD-RESTRAINT
SEAT ANCHOR
(ISOFIX ANCHOR
TYPE)
am2zzn0000012
End Of Sie
CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR CONSTRUCTION [4SD]
id0811006544c2
x ISOFIX anchors for securing an ISOFIX child-restraint seat, and tether strap anchors have been adopted.
Caution
x Installation procedure varies with the type of child-restraint seat. When installing a child-restraint
seat, be sure to follow the prescribed procedure for each type.

REAR SEAT
CHILD-RESTRAINT
SEAT ANCHOR
(ISOFIX ANCHOR
TYPE)
am2zzn0000141
End Of Sie
08-11–6
TO MODEL INDEX

SECTION
Toc of SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-00

OUTLINE SECURITY AND LOCKS
BODY PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10 [KEYLESS ENTRY
DOORS AND LIFTGATE . . . . . 09-11 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B
GLASS/WINDOWS/ EXTERIOR TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12 INTERIOR TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13 LIGHTING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . 09-18
SECURITY AND LOCKS WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM . . . 09-19
[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND ENTERTAINMENT . . . . . . . . . . 09-20
START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . 09-14A POWER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . 09-21
INSTRUMENTATION/
DRIVER INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22
CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . 09-40
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
Toc of SCT
09-00 OUTLINE
BODY AND ACCESSORIES BODY AND ACCESSORIES NEW
ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-00–1 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-00–2
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
BODY AND ACCESSORIES ABBREVIATIONS
NG: BODY AND ACCESSORIES
id090000100100
ACC Accessories
ALC Auto Level Control
BCM Body Control Module
CM Control Module
DIS Drive Information System
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
GND Ground
HI High
IC Integrated Circuits
IG Ignition
INT Intermittent
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LF Left Front
LH Left Hand
LO Low
LR Left Rear
M Motor
OFF Switch Off
ON Switch On
09-00–1
TO MODEL INDEX
OUTLINE
PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient
P/W CM Power Window Control Module
RF Right Front
RH Right Hand
RR Right Rear
SAS Sophisticated Air Bag Sensor
SW Switch
TCS Traction Control System
TNS Tail Number Side Lights
End Of Sie
BODY AND ACCESSORIES NEW FEATURES
id090000500100
x Triple-H structure adopted

Improved safety x Side impact bar adopted
x Shock-absorbing pad adopted
x Door module panel integrating internal parts adopted
x Power window system adopted
x Keyless entry system adopted
Improved marketability x Advanced keyless and start system adopted
x Electric liftgate opener switch adopted
x A center panel has been adopted with the audio switches, LCD display, and the audio unit
integrated
x IG OFF timer function adopted for power outer mirrors
x Auto light system adopted
Improved convenience
x Auto wiper system adopted
x Audio control switches on the left spoke of the steering wheel have been adopted
x Immobilizer system adopted
Improved security
x Theft-deterrent system adopted
Wiring harness
x Controller Area Network (CAN) system adopted
simplification
System simplification x Body Control Module (BCM) adopted
End Of Sie
09-00–2
TO MODEL INDEX
BODY PANELS
09-10 BODY PANELS

BODY PANEL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–1 BODY SHELL STRUCTURAL VIEW
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–1 [5HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–3
CRUSHABLE ZONE CABIN CONSTRUCTION [3HB] . . . . . . . 09-10–3
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–1 CABIN CONSTRUCTION [4SD, 5HB] . . . 09-10–3
BODY SHELL STRUCTURAL VIEW BUMPER CONSTRUCTION [3HB] . . . . . 09-10–4
[3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–2 BUMPER CONSTRUCTION [4SD] . . . . . 09-10–5
BODY SHELL STRUCTURAL VIEW BUMPER CONSTRUCTION [5HB] . . . . . 09-10–6
[4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–2
TO MODEL INDEX
BODY PANELS
End of Toc
BODY PANEL OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: BODY PANEL
id091000500600
Special Features
Improved safety x Triple-H structure adopted
End Of Sie
CRUSHABLE ZONE CONSTRUCTION
id091000511500
x To prevent deformation of the cabin during a collision, the front and rear frames have a crushable structure
which absorbs and disperses impact by deforming.
x The bumper reinforcement weakens impact and transmits it to the front side frames.
x If impact reaches near the cabin, it is dispersed to the side sill and front B frame through the torque box, thus
impact to the cabin is reduced.
TORQUE BOX
FRONT SIDE FRAME FRONT B FRAME
SHOCK
BUMPER REINFORCEMENT
SIDE SILL
am2zzn0000054
End Of Sie
09-10–1
TO MODEL INDEX
BODY PANELS
BODY SHELL STRUCTURAL VIEW [3HB]
id0910005117z3
BODY SHELL
am2zzn0000105
End Of Sie
BODY SHELL STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]
id0910005117z5
BODY SHELL
am2zzn0000144
End Of Sie
09-10–2
TO MODEL INDEX
BODY PANELS
BODY SHELL STRUCTURAL VIEW [5HB]
id0910005117j2
BODY SHELL
am2zzn0000054
End Of Sie
CABIN CONSTRUCTION [3HB]
id0910005114z3
x H-shaped structure have been adopted in which reinforcements are equipped in the floor, side frame, and roof,
and each connection area is strengthened. The combination of these three structural areas provide the strong
triple H-shaped structure.
x The steering performance has been improved due to the suppression of cabin torsion while driving.
ROOF REINFORCEMENT
ROOF RAIL REINFORCEMENT
B-PILLAR
SIDE SILL
SHOCK
CROSSMEMBER No.2.5
CROSSMEMBER No.2
am2zzn0000144
End Of Sie
CABIN CONSTRUCTION [4SD, 5HB]
id0910005114z8
x H-shaped structure have been adopted in which reinforcements are equipped in the floor, side frame, and roof,
and each connection area is strengthened. The combination of these three structural areas provide the strong
triple H-shaped structure.
09-10–3
TO MODEL INDEX
BODY PANELS
x The steering performance has been improved due to the suppression of cabin torsion while driving.
ROOF REINFORCEMENT
ROOF RAIL REINFORCEMENT
B-PILLAR
SIDE SILL
SHOCK
CROSSMEMBER No.2.5
CROSSMEMBER No.2
am2zzn0000144
End Of Sie
BUMPER CONSTRUCTION [3HB]
id0910005112z3
Standard or sport type bumper is available.End Of Sie

• S
• TANDARD TYPE
• S
• PORT TYPE
am2zzn0000144
09-10–4
TO MODEL INDEX
BODY PANELS
BUMPER CONSTRUCTION [4SD]
id0910005112z5
2 type bumpers are available.End Of Sie

TYPE A
TYPE B
am2zzn0000141
09-10–5
TO MODEL INDEX
BODY PANELS
BUMPER CONSTRUCTION [5HB]
id0910005112j2
Standard or sport type bumper is available.End Of Sie

• S
• TANDARD TYPE
TYPE A
TYPE B
• S
• PORT TYPE
TYPE A
TYPE B
am2zzn0000129
09-10–6
TO MODEL INDEX
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
09-11 DOORS AND LIFTGATE

DOORS AND LIFTGATE OUTLINE . . . . 09-11–1 DOOR STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD] . . . . . 09-11–2
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–1 SIDE IMPACT BAR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . 09-11–2
DOORS AND LIFTGATE OUTLINE SIDE IMPACT BAR CONSTRUCTION . . . 09-11–2
[4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–1 SIDE IMPACT BAR CONSTRUCTION
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–1 [4SD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–3
DOOR STRUCTURAL VIEW. . . . . . . . . . 09-11–1
TO MODEL INDEX
DOORS AND LIFTGATE

End of Toc
DOORS AND LIFTGATE OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: DOOR
id091100514500
Special Features
Improved safety x A rigid side impact bar has been adopted for each front door and rear door.
End Of Sie
DOORS AND LIFTGATE OUTLINE [4SD]
id091100514508
Special Features
Improved safety x A rigid side impact bar has been adopted for each front door and rear door.
End Of Sie
DOOR STRUCTURAL VIEW
id091100514600
SIDE IMPACT BAR LIFTGATE

FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
MODULE
PANEL
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
MODULE
PANEL
am2zzn0000009
End Of Sie
09-11–1
TO MODEL INDEX
DOORS AND LIFTGATE

DOOR STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]
id091100514608
FRONT DOOR SIDE IMPACT BAR
FRONT DOOR
MODULE
PANEL
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
MODULE
PANEL
am2zzn0000138
End Of Sie
SIDE IMPACT BAR FUNCTION
id091100513700
x The side impact bar, located on the bottom part of the door, prevents the door from deforming inward by
dispersing the impact to the floor in case of a side-impact collision.
x A corrugated side impact bar has been adopted to each door, improving rigidity in case of a collision.
End Of Sie
SIDE IMPACT BAR CONSTRUCTION
id091100513800
x Installed to the inside of the door.
REAR DOOR FRONT DOOR
SEC. B—B
A
B
SEC. A—A A
B
SIDE IMPACT BAR SIDE IMPACT BAR

am2zzn0000009
End Of Sie
09-11–2
TO MODEL INDEX
DOORS AND LIFTGATE

SIDE IMPACT BAR CONSTRUCTION [4SD]
id091100513808
x Installed to the inside of the door.
A
B
SEC. B—B SEC. A—A A
B
SIDE IMPACT BAR SIDE IMPACT BAR

am2zzn0000138
End Of Sie
09-11–3
TO MODEL INDEX
GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS
09-12 GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS
GLASS OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–1 Auto Reverse Pinch Protection
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–7
GLASS OUTLINE [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–1 Two-Step Down Function . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–7
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–1 IG OFF timer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–8
GLASS STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . 09-12–2 Fail-safe function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–8
GLASS STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]. . . . 09-12–3 POWER WINDOW MOTOR
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–8
FUNCTION OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–4 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–9
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–4 OUTER MIRROR OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–9
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–4 OUTER MIRROR STRUCTURAL
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–9
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–5 POWER OUTER MIRROR SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–10
STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD] . . . . . . . . . 09-12–6 POWER OUTER MIRROR
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–12
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–7 Mirror Glass Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–12
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Retract/Return. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–12
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–7 IG OFF timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–13
Manual Open/Close Function . . . . . . . 09-12–7 OUTER MIRROR HEATER
Auto-Open/Close Function. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–7 CONSTRUCTION OPERATION . . . . . . . 09-12–13
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
GLASS OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: WINDOW GLASS
id091200516800
Special Features
Improved comfort x UV protection front and rear door glass adopted
Improved visibility x Water repellent front door glass and windshield adopted
x Rear window defroster adopted which warms and defogs rear window glass using filaments.
End Of Sie
GLASS OUTLINE [4SD]
id091200516881
Special Features
Improved comfort x UV protection front and rear door glass adopted
Improved visibility x Rear window defroster adopted which warms and defogs rear window glass using filaments.
End Of Sie
09-12–1
TO MODEL INDEX
GLASS STRUCTURAL VIEW
id091200516900
WINDSHIELD
FRONT DOOR GLASS
REAR DOOR GLASS
REAR WINDOW GLASS

(FILAMENT)
am2zzn0000046
End Of Sie
09-12–2
TO MODEL INDEX
GLASS STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]
id091200516981
WINDSHIELD
REAR DOOR GLASS FRONT DOOR GLASS
REAR WINDOW GLASS

(FILAMENT)
am2zzn0000138
End Of Sie
SOKYU_NG: REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
09-12–3
TO MODEL INDEX
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER FUNCTION OPERATION
id091200519700
x When the rear window defroster switch is turned on, the rear window defroster relay in the BCM turns on and
the rear window defroster and the left and right heated outer mirrors operate.
x The rear defroster and the heated outer mirrors (Vehicles with heated outer mirror) operate as follows:
1. When the rear window defroster is turned on, the rear window defroster relay in the BCM turns on and the
heated outer mirror (Vehicles with heated outer mirror) operates.
+B
OUTER
MIRROR
HEATER
REAR WINDOW
DEFROSTER SWITCH
BCM
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER RELAY

adejjn00000801
2. After approx. 15-17 min have elapsed from the time the rear window defroster switch was turned on, the
timer control of the climate control unit automatically turns off the rear window defroster relay to stop the
operation of the rear window defroster and the heated outer mirrors (Vehicles with heated outer mirror).
End Of Sie
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
id091200515700
Special Features
x The following functions have been adopted for the driver's window.
— Manual open/close function
— Auto-open/close function
— Power-cut function
— Auto reverse pinch protection function
— Two-step down function
— IG OFF timer function
— Fail-safe function
x The following function has been adopted for all windows except the driver's window.
— Manual open/close function
x The power window control module (P/W CM) inside the power window main switch, which detects the door
glass movement distance and direction based on pulse signals from the power window motor, controls the
driver's window functions.
End Of Sie
09-12–4
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id091200515800
FRONT POWER
WINDOW MOTOR
POWER WINDOW
MAIN SWITCH
FRONT POWER
WINDOW REGULATOR
POWER WINDOW
SUB SWITCH REAR POWER
WINDOW MOTOR
POWER WINDOW
SUB SWITCH
REAR POWER
WINDOW REGULATOR
am2zzn0000140
End Of Sie
09-12–5
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]
id091200515881
FRONT POWER
WINDOW REGULATOR
POWER WINDOW
MAIN SWITCH
POWER WINDOW
SUB SWITCH
POWER WINDOW
SUB SWITCH
REAR POWER
WINDOW REGULATOR
am2zzn0000140
End Of Sie
09-12–6
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id091200518900
TO POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

IG1
1M
+B POWER-CUT
SWITCH
1N
CL OP CL OP CL OP
1B
MANUAL
MANUAL
CLOSE
AUTO
OPEN
1K
BCM 1F
1D P/W
CM
1A
1H
CLOSE OPEN
RELAY RELAY
1J 1L *1 *2 1C 1E 1I 1G
D A E D A E D A E
POWER
F E WINDOW
D SUB SWITCH
HALL EFFECT
B SWITCH 2 C F C F C F
C
HALL EFFECT
A SWITCH 1
F E F E F E
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
(DRIVER'S SIDE) M M M
POWER WINDOW MOTOR (EXCEPT DRIVER'S SIDE)
TERMINAL
CL = CLOSE *1: 2B (L.H.D.), 2L (R.H.D.)
OP = OPEN
*2: 2A (L.H.D.), 2K (R.H.D.)
am2zzn0000114
End Of Sie
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM FUNCTION
id091200501200
Manual Open/Close Function
x The door glass opens/closes according to the down (push) or up (pull) operation of the power window main
switches and the power window subswitches.
Auto-Open/Close Function
x The driver's door glass automatically moves to a fully-opened or closed position when the driver's window
switch on the power window main switches is operated two times, either down (push) or up (pull).
Auto Reverse Pinch Protection Function

x If any object is pinched in the door glass during the auto-close operation, the door glass automatically opens
approx. 200 mm.
Two-Step Down Function

x If the switch is lightly pressed (manual open operation) when the door glass is completely closed, the door
glass lowers a set distance. (Initial setting is approx. 30 mm.)
x If the manual open operation is performed with the two-step down function enabled, the door glass will always
stop momentarily. This is not a malfunction.
x The set distance that the door glass lowers can be changed. (Within a range of approx. 20—100 mm.)
x The two-step down function can be disabled. (Initial setting is enabled)
x If the operation of the auto open/close, manual close, or window obstruction is detected during the two-step
down function operation, the operation for each detection is given priority.
x Does not function during IG OFF timer operation.
09-12–7
TO MODEL INDEX
IG OFF timer function
x Allows operation of the driver's power window for approx. 43 s after the ignition switch has been turned from
the ACC to the LOCK position.
Fail-safe function
x When the P/W CM detects a malfunction in the pulse signal (Hall effect switch), the power window system is
switched to fail-safe mode to prevent incorrect operations.
Malfunction condition IG SW ON IG SW OFF Recovery Condition
Pulse 1 (for pinch and door glass position
detection) stopping malfunction
x Pulse 2 detected but pulse 1 is not detected
during close or open operation
Pulse 2 (for door glass direction detection)
stopping malfunction
x Pulse 1 detected but pulse 2 is not detected
during close or open operation
Pulse signal malfunction detected (inversion of
input signals or large phase deviation between Pulse signals 1 and 2 detected
pulses 1 and 2) Automatic Auto and manual normally during close
x Difference detected between the direction operation is operations are operation, and redetection of
detected by the signals of pulses 1 and 2, and prohibited prohibited fully-closed position return/
the actual direction during close or open non-return ranges
operation
Non-return range loweringn malfunction
x A signal input from pulse 1 is higher than the
position stored in the P/W main switch
detected during close operation
Pulse 1 and 2 stopping malfunction
x Pulse signals 1 and 2 are not detected after
the open operation is initiated from the fully
closed position
End Of Sie
POWER WINDOW MOTOR CONSTRUCTION
SOKYU_NG: WINDOW MOTOR
id091200516200
x Consists of a motor, connector, and gear.
x Two Hall effect switches are located in the connector.
x The Hall effect switch utilizes magnets set on a rotating axis to detect the motor rotation, and outputs a
synchronized pulse to the power window main switch.
x Hall effect switch 1 outputs one pulse cycle for each rotation of the power window motor axle and the power
window main switch detects motor rotation speed from this.
x Hall effect switch 2 outputs pulse according to the motor rotation in the same manner as Hall effect switch 1.
The high and low pulse points of Hall effect switches 1 and 2 are different during opening and closing because
the phase difference shifts by 90q, allowing the power window main switch to detect the rotational direction of
the power window motor.
HI
LO
MOTOR
HALL EFFECT HALL EFFECT
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
ONE REVOLUTION OF
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
PULS HI PULS HI
(HALL EFFECT (HALL EFFECT
SWITCH 1) SWITCH 1)
LO LO
MAGNET SHAFT PULS HI PULS HI
(HALL EFFECT (HALL EFFECT
SWITCH 2) SWITCH 2)
LO LO
OPEN CLOSE
am2zzn0000055
End Of Sie
SOKYU_NG: WINDOW SWITCH
09-12–8
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH CONSTRUCTION
id091200519800
x Manual and auto-open/close can be performed for the driver's door glass via operation of the driver seat
switches.
x Manual open/close can be performed for each specific door glass by operation of the switches at the front and
rear passenger seats.
x By locking the power cut switch, the circuit for each switch at the front and rear passenger seats is not
grounded, and operation of the switches is disabled.
x A built-in P/W CM (power window control module) controls the driver's power window system based on the
pulse signals from the driver's power window motor.
x The position and movement direction of the door glass is stored in the P/W CM at the time of vehicle delivery.
Therefore, initial position setting is required if the negative battery cable or the power window main switch
connector is disconnected.
Block Diagram
POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER-SIDE) POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH DRIVER-SIDE WINDOW
OPEN / CLOSE
PULS
P/W CM
(HALL EFFECT
SWITCH 1) DRIVER-SIDE WINDOW MOVEMENT DISTANCE
DRIVER-SIDE WINDOW MOVEMENT DIRECTION
PULS
(HALL EFFECT
SWITCH 2)
adejjn00000803
End Of Sie
OUTER MIRROR OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: OUTER MIRROR
id091200519200
Improved visibility x Water repellent outer mirror glass adopted

x Heated outer mirror adopted with which outer mirror glass is warmed by heater panel and
defogged
Improved convenience x Power outer mirror (mirror glass adjusting function, and retract/return function) adopted
x IG OFF timer function adopted for power outer mirror
End Of Sie
OUTER MIRROR STRUCTURAL VIEW
id091200519300
R.H.D. L.H.D.
POWER OUTER POWER OUTER

MIRROR SWITCH MIRROR SWITCH
am2zzn0000140
End Of Sie
09-12–9
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER OUTER MIRROR SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id091200520700
R.H.D.
POWER OUTER MIRROR (LH) POWER OUTER MIRROR (RH)
A A
DOWN DOWN
UP / DOWN UP / DOWN
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMEN
MOTOR UP T MOTOR UP RETRACTABLE MIRROR MOTOR
C C LH RH
RETURN RETRACT RETURN RETRACT
RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT
LEFT / RIGHT LEFT / RIGHT
ADJUSTMENT MOTOR ADJUSTMENT MOTOR
B B
D F D F
+B AC C
1N 2F 2C 2D 2A 2B 2H 2G 2I
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT

RETRACT
RETURN RETURN RETRACT
UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT
P/W
CM
IG OFF TIMER
RELAY
2E
am2zzn0000141
End Of Sie
09-12–10
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER OUTER MIRROR OPERATION
id091200520900
Mirror Glass Adjustment
x The left/right selection switch establishes the left or right side outer mirror circuit, and current is supplied in one
of the four directions according to the position of the mirror glass adjustment switch. As a result, the motor
rotates either up or down, left or right.
LEFT SIDE POWER OUTER MIRROR IS MOVED UPWARD
POWER OUTER
MIRROR SWITCH (RH)
A A
UP / DOWN
ADJUSTMENT
MOTOR
C C
B B
D F D F
+B AC C
1N 2F 2C 2D 2A 2B 2H 2G 2I
LEFT RIGHT
LEFT RIGHT
P/W
CM UP
2E
am2zzn0000141
Retract/Return
x When the retract/return switch is moved to the retract position, a circuit is established, and the retract/return
motor rotates in the retracting direction.
09-12–12
TO MODEL INDEX
x During return operation, the motor rotates in the opposite (returning) direction.
POWER OUTER MIRROR (LH) POWER OUTER MIRROR (RH)
A A
RETRACTABLE MIRROR MOTOR

C C LH RH
B B
D F D F
+B AC C
1N 2F 2C 2D 2A 2B 2H 2G 2I
P/W
CM
IG OFF TIMER
RELAY
2E
am2zzn0000141
IG OFF timer
x Allows operation of the power outer mirror for approx. 43 s after the ignition switch has been turned from the
ON to the LOCK position.
End Of Sie
OUTER MIRROR HEATER CONSTRUCTION OPERATION
id091200521900
x The heated outer mirror operates by turning the rear window defroster switch on.
x For the construction/operation of the heated outer mirror, refer to REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION. (See 09-12-4 REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER FUNCTION OPERATION.)
End Of Sie
09-12–13
TO MODEL INDEX
SEATS
09-13 SEATS
SEAT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–1 SEAT STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–1
SEAT SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–1
TO MODEL INDEX
SEATS
End ofOUTLINE
SEAT Toc
SOKYU_NG: SEATS
id091300518900
Improved safety x Front seats with side air bags adopted
End Of Sie
SEAT SPECIFICATION
SOKYU_NG: FRONT SEAT
id091300520000
Front seat x Reclining function

x Sliding function
x Seat lifting (driver's seat)
Rear seat x Fold-down
End Of Sie
SEAT STRUCTURAL VIEW
SOKYU_NG: SEATS
id091300519000
PUSH KNOB REAR SEAT FRONT SEAT

(3)
(4)
(4)
(1) SLIDER
(2) LIFTER
(3) RECLINER
(2)
(4) FOLD-DOWN
(1)
RECLINER LEVER LIFT LEVER
am2zzn0000130
End Of Sie
09-13–1
TO MODEL INDEX
SECURITY AND LOCKS [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

PAGE 1 0F 2
09-14A SECURITY AND LOCKS [ADVANCED KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM]
SECURITY AND LOCKS OUTLINE TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–2 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
SECURITY AND LOCKS STRUCTURAL SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–18
VIEW [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH
START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–3 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–3 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–4 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–18
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–5 KEYLESS BEEPER CONSTRUCTION/
SECURITY AND LOCKS SYSTEM OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–19
KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-14A–6 5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–19
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–19
OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–7 VIEW [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
SECURITY AND LOCKS CUSTOMIZE START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–20
FUNCTION OUTLINE [ADVANCED IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM WIRING
KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-14A–7 DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–21
OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–7 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
SECURITY AND LOCKS WARNING/ [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
GUIDANCE [ADVANCED KEYLESS SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–21
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–7 Engine Start Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–21
TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE Additional key programming . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–23
ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/ Related parts programming. . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–23
OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM FUNCTION
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–8 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
Release Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–9 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–23
LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK AUXILIARY KEY CONSTRUCTION
ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/ [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–24
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–9 COIL ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION
Unlock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–9 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM OUTLINE SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–24
[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SECURITY LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–10 OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OUTLINE AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–24
[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–24
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–10 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–24
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM OUTLINE
[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–10 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–25
Normal Keyless Entry Function . . . . . . 09-14A–10 THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
Advanced Keyless Function . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–11 STRUCTURAL VIEW [ADVANCED
ADVANCED KEYLESS START KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-14A–26
FUNCTION OPERATION [ADVANCED Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-14A–14 manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–26
KEYLESS ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION/ AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–27
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–15 THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM WIRING
5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–15 DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–16 START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–28
ADVANCED KEY CONSTRUCTION/ Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–28
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–17 AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
REQUEST SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/ manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–29
OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–18 OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–30
09-14A–1
TO MODEL INDEX

PAGE 2 0F 2
Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN FUNCTION
manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–30 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–36
manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–33 Standard Alert Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–37
INTRUDER SENSOR FUNCTION Open Circuit Alert Control . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–37
[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–35 OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS
INTRUDER SENSOR OPERATION AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–37
[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–37
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–36 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
FUNCTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–37
On-board Diagnostic Function. . . . . . . . 09-14A–37
PID/data Monitor Function. . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–39
TO MODEL INDEX

End of Toc
SECURITY AND LOCKS OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
SOKYU_NG: SECURITY AND LOCKS
id0914b0519800
Improved marketability x Power door lock system adopted

x Double locking system adopted
x Advanced keyless and start system adopted
Improved security x Immobilizer system adopted
End Of Sie
09-14A–2
TO MODEL INDEX

SECURITY AND LOCKS STRUCTURAL VIEW [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0519900
5HB
ADVANCED KEY STEERING

LOCK UNIT
AUXILIARY KEY
START KNOB
TRANSMITTER
IGNITION COIL
SWITCH ANTENNA
REQUEST KEYLESS REQUEST

SWITCH (LF) ANTENNA (RF) SWITCH (RF)
LIFTGATE OPENER
KEYLESS ANTENNA SWITCH
(LF)
LIFTGATE LATCH AND

LOCK ACTUATOR
KEYLESS BEEPER
FRONT DOOR LATCH

AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR LATCH

AND LOCK ACTUATOR
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(EXTERIOR, REAR)
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
80 100
KEYLESS RECEIVER
60 120
90
70 110
40 50 130 140
6 7 8
5 00r/min 30 150
x1 0
4 20 170
160
3 10
2
0 180
1
0
SECURITY LIGHT
KEYLESS INDICATOR
LIGHT (GREEN)
KEYLESS WARNING KEYLESS ANTENNA BCM KEYLESS CONTROL
KEYLESS ANTENNA
LIGHT (RED) (INTERIOR, FRONT) MODULE
(INTERIOR, REAR)
am2zzn0000134
09-14A–3
TO MODEL INDEX

3HB

LOCK UNIT
AUXILIARY KEY
START KNOB
TRANSMITTER
IGNITION COIL
SWITCH ANTENNA
REQUEST SWITCH REQUEST SWITCH (RF)

KEYLESS ANTENNA
(LF)
(RF)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(LF) LIFTGATE OPENER
SWITCH
LIFTGATE LATCH AND

LOCK ACTUATOR
KEYLESS BEEPER
FRONT DOOR LATCH
AND LOCK ACTUATOR
KEYLESS ANTENNA
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (EXTERIOR, REAR)
80 100
KEYLESS RECEIVER
60 120
90
70 110
40 50 130 140
6 7 8
5 00r/min 30 150
x1 0
4 20 170
160
3 10
2
0 180
1
0
SECURITY LIGHT
KEYLESS INDICATOR
LIGHT (GREEN)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(INTERIOR, REAR)
am2zzn0000103
09-14A–4
TO MODEL INDEX

4SD

LOCK UNIT
AUXILIARY KEY
START KNOB
TRANSMITTER
IGNITION COIL
SWITCH ANTENNA
REQUEST SWITCH KEYLESS ANTENNA REQUEST SWITCH

(LF) (RF) (RF)
TRUNK LID
OPENER SWITCH
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(LF)
TRUNK LID LATCH AND

RELEASE ACTUATOR
KEYLESS ANTENNA
FRONT DOOR LATCH (EXTERIOR, REAR)
AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR LATCH

AND LOCK ACTUATOR
KEYLESS BEEPER
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
KEYLESS ANTENNA
KEYLESS RECEIVER
60
80 100
120
(INTERIOR, REAR)
90
70 110
40 50 130 140
6 7 8
5 00r/min 30 150
x1 0
4 20 170
160
3 10
2
0 180
1
0
SECURITY LIGHT
KEYLESS INDICATOR
LIGHT (GREEN)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(INTERIOR, CENTER)
am2ccn0000002
End Of Sie
09-14A–5
TO MODEL INDEX

SECURITY AND LOCKS SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0522500
B+
B+ 3V
STEERING
3W LOCK UNIT WITH
THEFT-DETERRENT
1E
2L
THEFT-
DETERRENT
IG1
CONTROL
LIFTGATE OPENNER SWITCH
MODULE
2C
ACC (3HB,5HB) / TRUNK LID OPENER
SWITCH (4SD)
3G
2A
KEYLESS BCM
BUZZER 2F
A 3K
B
UNLOCK PCM
L
J 3P
LOCK
D
KEYLESS KEYLESS
DOOR LOCK CAN-H INDICATOR WARNING B+
B+ 2G
LINK SWITCH KEYLESS LIGHT LIGHT
(GREEN) (RED) SECURITY
CONTROL 2I ALARM
LIGHT
MODULE CAN-L
BCM
KEYLESS
RECEIVER
1D
D INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
C 2H 3U A
B D REQUEST SWITCH
3O B
KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, RF)
WITH IMMOBILIZER 3AD E
SYSTEM
IG1 3X A
REQUEST SWITCH
D
B 3F B
KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, LF)
C 2D 3AB E
COIL
ANTENNA
D 2B
3HB/5HB 4SD
F 3R C
3R C KEYLESS ANTENNA
3N D (INTERIOR, FRONT)
3AA D
3AA
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(INTERIOR, FRONT)
3I A KEYLESS ANTENNA
3I C (INTERIOR, REAR)
3Z B
3Z D
KEYLESS ANTENNA 3C C KEYLESS ANTENNA
(INTERIOR, REAR) (EXTERIOR, REAR)
3AC D
3C C
3AC D 3L C KEYLESS ANTENNA

KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER)
(EXTERIOR, REAR) 3Y D
am2zzw0000510
09-14A–6
TO MODEL INDEX

End Of Sie
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0501500
x A door lock-link switch interlock function has been adopted where all doors and the liftgate are locked/unlocked
when lock/unlock operation is performed using the driver's door lock knob or the door lock-link switch.
x A door key interlock function has been adopted where all doors and the liftgate are locked/unlocked when the
driver's door is locked/unlocked with the driver's door key cylinder.
End Of Sie
SECURITY AND LOCKS CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0523300
x The settings of the following functions, and warning and guidance functions for the advanced keyless entry
system can be turned ON/OFF optionally.
x The Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) is required to perform the setting. Refer to the Workshop
Manual for the detailed setting procedure.
Initial
Function name Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS display)
setting
Advanced Keyless Function Advanced Keyless Function ON
Answer Back Buzzer Volume Answer Back Buzzer Volume OFF
Advanced Key Battery Low Warning Advanced Key Battery Low Warning ON
Prevention Function of Key Containment in Trunk or Prevention Function of Key Containment in Trunk or
ON
Liftgate Liftgate
Warning Buzzer Volume Warning Buzzer Volume Level 10
End Of Sie
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0501600
x When the driver's door is locked/unlocked with the driver's door lock knob or key cylinder, the door lock-link
switch in the door lock actuator is locked/unlocked via the rod.
x The body control module (BCM) activates each lock actuator to lock/unlock according to the lock/unlock signal
from the door lock-link switch.
REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
,
DRIVER S DOOR LOCK KNOB
FRONT DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR
BCM
DOOR LOCK , LINK SWITCH
(IN DRIVER S DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR)
,
DRIVER S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER
FRONT DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR LIFTGATE LOCK
ACTUATOR
am2zzn0000007
End Of Sie
SECURITY AND LOCKS WARNING/GUIDANCE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0523800
x Warns the driver by operating the indicator light and alarm in the instrument cluster and the keyless beeper in
the rear bumper if any trouble is likely to happen due to incorrect operation.
09-14A–7
TO MODEL INDEX

x The locking/unlocking operation condition of the lock actuator is indicated by the indicator light and buzzer
sound to guide user operation.
Instrument cluster
Keyless
beeper Keyless
Item Operation conditions Keyless
(outside Alarm indicator
warning
the vehicle) (Interior) light
light (red)
(green)
Start knob not in Driver's door is open with start knob in Sounds 6
Illuminates
LOCK warning ACC position times
Start knob is pressed in LOCK Sounds 6
Illuminates
position times
Advanced key Advanced key cannot be detected
Sounds 3
out of vehicle inside vehicle with driver's door open Flashes*2
times
warning*1 and start knob not in LOCK position
Advanced key cannot be detected
Sounds 6
inside vehicle with all the doors closed Flashes*2
times
and start knob not in LOCK position
Advanced key Request switch is pressed from
left in vehicle outside vehicle with an advanced key Sounds for

warning inside vehicle and another advanced 10 sec.
key carried
Liftgate is closed with all doors locked Sounds for

and an advanced key inside vehicle 10 sec.
Any door or liftgate is open Sounds 6
Warning
times
Request switch
Start knob is not returned to LOCK Sounds 6
inoperable
position times
warning
Auxiliary key is inserted in ignition key Sounds 6

cylinder times
Advanced key battery is depleted Flashes*2
Advanced key not in operable range Flashes*2
Engine start not Advanced key is placed in an area
permitted Flashes*2
where it is difficult for system to detect
warning
A key from another manufacturer
similar to advanced key is in operation Flashes*2
range
Battery voltage If a low battery voltage code is Flashes
low indication received with ignition switch at ON (Approx. 30

position, and then it is turned off s after IG
OFF)
Start knob Start knob is operable (lock released)
Illuminated
operable when it is pressed
(Max. 3 s)
guidance
Start knob Start knob is inoperable (locked) when
inoperable it is pressed Flashes
Guidance
guidance
Lock/unlock Doors are locked/unlocked with Locked:
answer back*3 normal/advanced keyless entry Once

function Unlocked:
Twice
*1 : If the start knob is turned to the LOCK position with the advanced key out of the vehicle, the start knob is
inoperable (engine cannot be restarted). For vehicles with the immobilizer system, the engine cannot be
restarted by turning the start knob from the ACC position to the START position even though the start knob has
not been turned to the LOCK position.
*2 : Stops flashing and turns off if the advanced key is detected inside the vehicle.
*3 : SInitial setting is OFF.
End Of Sie
TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
START SYSTEM]
id0914b0545800
x Installed to the trunk lid.
x The trunk lid latch and release actuator releases the latch lever.
09-14A–8
TO MODEL INDEX

x If the trunk lid cannot be opened for reasons such as a dead battery or a malfunction in the electrical system,
the trunk lid can be opened using the trunk lid release lever which can release the trunk lid latch manually.
Release Operation
x The release signal is sent from the BCM to the trunk lid release actuator, and the trunk lid release actuator
frees (unlocked condition) the trunk lid latch. At the same time, the trunk lid lifts away via the spring force of the
trunk lid weatherstrip and stopper rubber to release the latch.
Note
x After the latch is released, the trunk lid latch is freed after approx. 0.5 s.
TRUNK LID LATCH AND TRUNK LID RELEASE

RELEASE ACTUATOR LEVER
LATCH LCOVER
LATCH LEVER
am2ccn0000005
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
START SYSTEM]
id0914b0525700
x Installed to the liftgate.
x The liftgate latch and lock actuator releases the latch lever.
x If the liftgate cannot be opened for reasons such as a dead battery or a malfunction in the electrical system, the
liftgate can be opened using the liftgate release lever which can release the liftgate latch manually.
Unlock Operation
x The unlock signal is sent from the BCM to the liftgate lock actuator, and the liftgate lock actuator frees
(unlocked condition) the liftgate. At the same time, the liftgate lifts away via the spring force of the liftgate
weatherstrip and stopper rubber to release the latch.
Note
x After the latch is released, the liftgate latch is freed (unlock operation) after approx. 1.5 s.
09-14A–9
TO MODEL INDEX
LOCK ACTOATOR
LIFTGATE RELEASE
LEVER
LATCH LEVER
LATCH LCOVER
am2zzn0000007
End Of Sie
DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0525800
x The double locking system disables unlock operation of the lock knob when all the doors and the liftgate are
closed and locked two times consecutively. The operation conditions of the double locking system are as
follows:
— The doors and the liftgate are locked twice within approx. 3 s using the request switch.
— The doors and the liftgate are locked twice within approx. 3 s using the LOCK button on the transmitter.
— The doors and the liftgate are locked twice within approx. 3 s using the key.
End Of Sie
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0521300
x An advanced keyless and start system has been adopted that enables the driver to start the engine or lock/
unlock the doors by carrying the advanced key that has been programmed to the vehicle.
x The doors can also be locked/unlocked by operating the key (auxiliary key) or transmitter (advanced key).
x The answer-back function has been adopted where the hazard warning light flashes to confirm that the doors
are locked/unlocked.
x The warning/guidance function has been adopted where the indicator light and alarm in the instrument cluster
and keyless beeper in the rear bumper operate if any trouble is likely to happen due to incorrect operation.
x A customize function that switches the activation/deactivation of each function has been adopted.
x A rolling code type transmitter (advanced key) has been adopted to prevent theft by radiowave interception.
x To prevent improper operation while the vehicle is moving, the doors cannot be locked/unlocked by operating
the transmitter (advanced key) or request switch if the start knob is not in the LOCK position.
End Of Sie
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0521400
Normal Keyless Entry Function
Lock/unlock
Note
x If any of the following conditions are met, the doors cannot be locked by operating the LOCK button of the
transmitter (advanced key).
— The auxiliary key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.
— The start knob is not in the LOCK position.
— The start knob is being pressed.
— Any door or the liftgate is open.
x If any of the following conditions are met, the doors cannot be unlocked by operating the UNLOCK button
of the transmitter (advanced key).
09-14A–10
TO MODEL INDEX

— The start knob is not in the LOCK position.
— The start knob is being pressed.
1. When the LOCK/UNLOCK button of the transmitter (advanced key) is operated, the transmitter (advanced key)
sends ID data and rolling code.
2. ID data and rolling code transmitted from the transmitter are received by the keyless receiver and sent to the
keyless control module.
3. The keyless control module verifies the transmitted ID number, and transmits lock/unlock signal to the BCM if
the ID number corresponds.
4. The BCM activates all lock actuators to lock/unlock, and at the same time, flashes the hazard warning light as
follows:
— The hazard warning lights flash once when the LOCK button is pressed
— The hazard warning lights flash two times when the UNLOCK button is pressed
DOOR LOCK LIFTGATE LOCK

ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
KEYLESS RECEIVER
KEYLESS
CONTROL
LOCK/UNLOCK OPERATION
MODULE
TRANSMITTER
(ADVANCED KEY)
HAZARD FLASH
BCM
am2zzn0000013
Advanced Keyless Function

Lock/unlock
Note
x If any of the following conditions are met, the doors cannot be locked by operating the request switch.
— Any door or liftgate is open
— The auxiliary key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder
— The start knob is not in the LOCK position, or it is pressed in the LOCK position
— An advanced key is not within the outside reception area
x If any of the following conditions are met, the doors cannot be unlocked by operating the request switch.
— The auxiliary key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder
— The start knob is not in the LOCK position, or it is pressed in the LOCK position
— An advanced key is not within the outside reception area
1. When any request switch is pressed, a request switch signal is input to the keyless control module.
2. The keyless control module transmits a request signal via all the inside antennas and the outside antenna of
the door in which the request switch was pressed.
3. The advanced key receives the request signal from the outside antenna, and transmits the ID data to the
keyless receiver.
4. The keyless receiver transmits the received ID data to the keyless control module.
5. The keyless control module verifies the ID data and transmits a lock/unlock signal to the BCM if it determines a
programmed advanced key is outside the vehicle.
6. The BCM activates all lock actuators to lock/unlock, and at the same time, flashes the hazard warning light as
follows:
— The hazard warning light flashes once when the doors are locked
— The hazard warning light flashes two times when the doors are unlocked
Note
x It takes approx. 1—2 s to lock/unlock since the operations shown in the figure are performed.
09-14A–11
TO MODEL INDEX
REQUEST TRANSMITTER
SIGNAL
REQUEST VEHICLE EXTERIOR,

SWITCH INTERIOR
ANTENNA DETERMINATION
SIGNAL
PUSH
REQUEST KEYLESS
SWITCH CONTROL RECEPTION RANGE (EXTERIOR)
MODULE RADIUS: APPROX. 80 cm {315 in}
SEND BACK ID DATA.
KEYLESS RECEIVER
BCM
TRANSFER ID DATA
DOOR LOCK LIFTGATE LATCH

ACTUATOR LOCK ACTUATOR
LOCK/UNLOCK OPERATION HAZARD FLASH
am2zzn0000013
Auto re-lock function

x The doors and the liftgate locks automatically when approx 30 s has elapsed after the UNLOCK button of the
transmitter (advanced key) was pressed.
Note
x If any of the following operation is not performed within approx. 30 s after the doors and the liftgate was
locked by pressing the UNLOCK button of the transmitter (advanced key) or the request switch, the auto
re-lock function operates.
— A door or the liftgate is opened.
— The start knob is pressed.
— The transmitter (advanced key) is operated. (If the UNLOCK button is pressed, the timer is reset.)
— A request switch is operated.
Liftgate opener function
Note
x If any of the following conditions are met, the liftgate cannot be unlocked by operating the liftgate opener
switch.
— An advanced key is not within outside reception area.
1. When the liftgate opener switch is pressed, a request switch signal is input to the keyless control module.
2. The keyless control module transmits a request signal via the outside antenna (rear) inside the rear bumper.
3. The advanced key receives the request signal from the outside antenna and transmits the ID data to the
keyless receiver.
5. The keyless control module verifies the ID data and transmits an unlatch signal to the BCM if it determines a
programmed advanced key is outside the vehicle.
09-14A–12
TO MODEL INDEX

6. The BCM unlocks the liftgate lock actuator (releases the latch) for approx. 1.5 s when the ignition switch is in
the LOCK position or all the following conditions are met.
x Ignition switch in the ON position
— Selector lever is in P position (ATX/CVT)
— Parking brake is applied (parking brake switch is on (MTX))
x Ignition switch in the off position
— Vehicle is stopping (There is no vehicle speed input)
Note
x The liftgate lock actuator operates to unlock approx. 1—2 s after the liftgate opener switch is pressed.
REQUEST
SIGNAL
REQUEST
SWITCH
SIGNAL VEHICLE EXTERIOR, TRANSMITTER
INTERIOR
PUSH DETERMINATION ANTENNA
LIFTGATE KEYLESS
OPENER CONTROL
SWITCH MODULE
RECEPTION RANGE (EXTERIOR)

RADIUS: APPROX. 80 cm {315 in}
SEND BACK ID DATA.
KEYLESS RECEIVER
BCM
TRANSFER ID DATA
LIFTGATE LATCH
LOCK ACTUATOR
UNLOCK OPERATION
am2zzn0000013
Out-of-area (reception area) autolock function

x When all doors are closed and the driver is out of the reception area carrying the advanced key, the doors are
automatically locked. (Initial setting is OFF.)
1. When all the following conditions are met and all doors are closed after any door open, the keyless buzzer
sounds and the function starts operation. (The doors are not locked at this time.)
x The advanced key is not inside the vehicle.
x The advanced key is within the reception area outside the vehicle.
x The auxiliary key is not inserted in the ignition key cylinder.
x Ignition is off (LOCK).
2. After the operation has started, the advanced key is monitored within the reception area by the keyless
antenna. After about 2 s from where the advanced key has been determined to be out of the reception area, all
lock actuators activate to lock. If approx. 30 s have passed since the operation started, the doors also locks
regardless of whether the advanced key is within or out of the reception area.
09-14A–13
TO MODEL INDEX

3. The hazard warning light flashes once and keyless buzzer sounds once at the same time the door locks.
Advanced key pause function

x The functions of all advanced keys in the vehicle pause approx. 12 s after the operation conditions are met for
an advanced key left in vehicle alert.
x The paused advanced key cannot perform the following operations:
— An operation using the request switch or the touch sensor
— Switching the ignition
— Starting the engine
x Paused advanced key restore procedure
— The functions of the paused advanced key are restored when any one of the following conditions is met:
x The lock/unlock button or the trunk button is pressed on the paused advanced key.
x The paused advanced key(s) and the valid advanced key are brought into the vehicle and the clutch
pedal (MTX) or the brake pedal (ATX) is depressed until the keyless indicator light illuminates.
x The paused advanced key(s) is (are) brought into the vehicle and the ignition is switched ON using the
auxiliary key.
End Of Sie
ADVANCED KEYLESS START FUNCTION OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0533100
x The engine can be started by operating the start knob with the advanced key carried, not by inserting the key.
1. When the start knob is pressed, a push switch signal is input to the keyless control module.
2. The keyless control module transmits a request signal via all the keyless antennas in the vehicle.
3. The advanced key receives the request signal from the inside antenna, and transmits ID data to the keyless
receiver.
5. The keyless control module verifies the ID data, and if it determines that the programmed advanced key is
inside the vehicle, releases the start knob of the steering lock unit. The keyless indicator light (green) in the
instrument cluster illuminates at the same time to indicate that the start knob is operable.
— If the ID verification is not acceptable (for reasons such as an unprogrammed advanced key, or advanced
key battery depletion), the start knob is not released and the keyless warning light (red) in the instrument
cluster illuminates to indicate that the start knob is inoperable.
— For vehicles with the immobilizer system, ID verification is performed when the start knob is turned to the
ON position. If the verification is acceptable, permission is given to start the engine.
09-14A–14
TO MODEL INDEX

6. The engine can be started by turning the start knob to the START position.
PUSH SWITCH REQUEST KEYLESS ANTENNA

SIGNAL SIGNAL
PUSH
KEYLESS RECEPTION RANGE

CONTROL (INTERIOR)
MODULE
SEND BACK ID DATA
KEYLESS RECEIVER
TRANSFER ID DATA
COLLATION ID DATA
ID VERIFICATION OK ID VERIFICATION NG
50 130
50 130
30 150
30 150
20 160 20 170
160
10
10 170
0 180 0 180
START KNOBLAUCH KEYLESS INDICATOR LIGHT

KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT
CANCELLATION (GREEN) (ILLUMINATED)
(RED) (FLASH)
am2zzn0000022
End Of Sie
KEYLESS ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0523400
5HB/3HB
x The antennas for request signal output form the request signal output range at 5 locations.
x The keyless antenna outputs request signals to the inside and outside of the vehicle based on the signals from
the keyless control module.
x The keyless control module locates the advanced key by determining which antenna is receiving the signal.
09-14A–15
TO MODEL INDEX
KEYLESS ANTENNA (LF) KEYLESS ANTENNA (RF)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(EXTERIOR, REAR)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(INTERIOR, FRONT)
(INTERIOR, REAR)
am2zzn0000142
4SD
x The antennas for request signal output form the request signal output range at 6 locations.
x The keyless antenna outputs request signals to the inside and outside of the vehicle based on the signals from
the keyless control module.
x The keyless control module locates the advanced key by determining which antenna is receiving the signal.
09-14A–16
TO MODEL INDEX
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(RF)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(LF)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(EXTERIOR, REAR)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(INTERIOR, REAR)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(INTERIOR, CENTER)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
(INTERIOR, FRONT)
am2zzn0000142
End Of Sie
ADVANCED KEY CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0534200
x A maximum of six transmitters can be programmed for one vehicle.
x A built-in operation indicator light illuminates according to the LOCK/UNLOCK button operation and the request
signal from the vehicle.
x In case the transmitter is inoperable due to battery depletion, the doors can be locked/unlocked and the engine
can be started using the auxiliary key.
x A transponder is built into the auxiliary key for vehicles with the immobilizer system.
09-14A–17
TO MODEL INDEX
INDICATOR LIGHT
LOCK BUTTON LOCK LEVER
UNLOCK BUTTON AUXILIARY KEY
TRUNK BUTTON (4SD)

TRANSMITTER
INTRUDER SENSOR
CANCEL BUTTON
WITH THEFT- TRANSPONDER
DETERRENT SYSTEM
am2zzn0000140
End Of Sie
REQUEST SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0524800
x Installed on the front outer handle (driver's side/passenger's side).
x The doors can be locked/unlocked by pressing the request switch with the advanced key carried.
INTERNAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
REQUEST D
SWITCH
am2zzn0000113
End Of Sie
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0535700
x Installed on the trunk lid.
x If the trunk lid opener switch is opened while the trunk lid is unlocked, the trunk lid latch can be released.
TRUNK LID OPENER

SWITCH
am2ccn0000002
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0524700
x Installed on the liftgate.
x If the liftgate opener switch is opened while the liftgate is unlocked, the liftgate latch can be released.
09-14A–18
TO MODEL INDEX
LIFTGATE OPENER
SWITCH
am2zzn0000014
End Of Sie
KEYLESS BEEPER CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0523600
5HB/3HB
x Installed inside the rear bumper.
x When lock/unlock operation is performed, the keyless beeper operates based on the signals from the keyless
control module (Initial setting is OFF).
KEYLESS BEEPER
am2zzn0000014
4SD
x Installed inside the rear bumper.
x When lock/unlock operation is performed, the keyless beeper operates based on the signals from the keyless
control module (Initial setting is OFF).
09-14A–19
TO MODEL INDEX
KEYLESS BEEPER
am2ccn0000003
End Of Sie
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0520700
SECURITY LIGHT KEYLESS CONTROL

TRANSPONDER
MODULE
PCM
COIL ANTENNA
am2zzn0000013
End Of Sie
09-14A–20
TO MODEL INDEX

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0520500
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
SECURITY
LIGHT
IG1 IG1 B+ IG1 IG1 B+
COIL ANTENNA
STARTER
RELAY
TX LINE
M STARTER
KEYLESS
CONTROL
RX LINE MODULE PCM
CAN LINE
am2zzn0000013
End Of Sie
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0520800
x The immobilizer system consists of the key (built-in transponder), coil, keyless control module, PCM, and
security light (in the instrument cluster).
x Keys for use with the immobilizer system have an electronic communication device (transponder) built into the
key head that retains specific electronic codes (key ID number).
x The immobilizer system cannot be disabled.
x The engine can be started using the keys previously programmed to the vehicle.
Caution
x If any metallic or magnetic object is near the key, communication between the key and the vehicle
may be obstructed, resulting in a failure to start the engine.
x The engine may not start due to malfunctions in other systems (engine, starter relay) even if the immobilizer
system is normal. If the immobilizer system has a malfunction, the security light indicates a DTC. The indicated
DTC is stored in the keyless control module and PCM.
Engine Start Operation

x The immobilizer system operates automatically when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK or ACC position.
When this occurs, the security light flashes repeatedly approx. 0.1 s every 2 s.
x Engine start is allowed in the following order.
09-14A–21
TO MODEL INDEX
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS SYSTEM]

THE IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED FROM THE LOCK (ACC) TO
THE ON (START) POSITION. (SECURITY LIGHT ILLUMINATES.)
(1) THE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE SENDS DATA A* TO THE

KEY (TRANSPONDER) VIA THE COIL.
(2) THE KEY (TRANSPONDER) CALCULATES DATA B FROM

RECEIVED DATA A AND SENDS ITS SPECIFIC KEY ID NUMBER
AND DATA B TO THE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE VIA THE
COIL.
(3) THE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE VERIFIES CONSISTENCY

BETWEEN THE RECEIVED KEY ID NUMBER AND THE UNSATISFACTORY RESULT
PREVIOUSLY REGISTERED KEY ID NUMBERS.
SATISFACTORY RESULT
(4) THE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE MAKES A CALCULATION UNSATISFACTORY RESULT

USING RECEIVED DATA B AND COMPARES IT WITH SENT DATA
A.
SATISFACTORY RESULT
(5) THE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REQUESTS DATA FOR

VERIFICATION FROM THE PCM.
(6) THE PCM SENDS DATA C* TO THE KEYLESS CONTROL

MODULE.
(7) THE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CALCULATES DATA D

FROM RECEIVED DATA C AND SENDS IT TO THE PCM.
(8) THE PCM MAKES A CALCULATION USING RECEIVED DATA UNSATISFACTORY RESULT
D AND COMPARES IT WITH SENT DATA C.
SATISFACTORY RESULT
ENGINE STARTING IS NOT PERMITTED.
(AFTER DETECTING THE ERROR (SUCH AS
ENGINE STARTING IS PERMITTED. NON-VERIFICATION OR MALFUNCTION).
(THE SECURITY LIGHT GOES OUT AFTER APPROX. 3S.) THE SECURITY LIGHT ILLUMINATES OR
FLASHES CONTINUOUSLY FOR APPROX. 1
MIN, AND THEN A DTC IS REPEATEDLY
*: DATA A AND C ARE DIFFERENT RANDOM VALUES EACH TIME DISPLAYED 10 TIMES.)
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
SECURITY LIGHT
COIL ANTENNA
KEY
KEYLESS CONTROL
MODULE PCM
(3), (4) (8)
(7)
(1)
(5), (7)
(2) (6)
am2zzn0000113
09-14A–22
TO MODEL INDEX

Additional key programming
x Additional keys can be programmed.
Note
x At least two key ID numbers must be programmed to start the engine, and a maximum of eight key ID
numbers can be programmed to one vehicle. Number of the programmed key ID numbers can be verified
by the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
x The Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) is necessary when there is one key that can start the engine
or an advanced key.
x If two keys that can start the engine are available, the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) is not
necessary. However, if Customer spare key programming disable is selected, the Mazda Modular Diagnostic
Software (DIS) is required.
Related parts programming

x If any of the following services is performed, reprogramming of the immobilizer system using the
Integrated Diagnostic Sofware (IDS) is necessary for proper immobilizer operation.
Caution
x The engine cannot be started unless reprogramming is performed using the Integrated
Diagnostic Software (IDS).
Items necessary for

Service procedure (prepare before Cautionary notes
starting procedure)
PCM replacement x New PCM x PCM configuration must be performed.
x Prepare one key that can
start the engine or an
advanced key.
x New steering lock unit x Steering lock unit must be programmed.
Steering lock unit replacement
x Programming keys (two or
(including key replacement)
more)
Keyless control module replacement x New keyless control module x Before beginning the procedure, verify that the
x Programming keys (two or customer has turned in all of the keys for the
more) vehicle.
x Unless key ID numbers are reprogrammed after
the procedure, the engine cannot be started.
x The keys (two or more) prepared before the
procedure do not have to be new ones and there
is no problem with using the keys that were used
to start the engine before the procedure.
Simultaneous replacement of PCM x New PCM x Unless keys are reprogrammed after the
and keyless control module x New keyless control module procedure, the engine cannot be started. Before
x Programming keys (two or beginning the procedure, verify that the customer
more) has turned in all of the keys for the vehicle.
x The keys (two or more) prepared before the
procedure do not have to be new ones and there
is no problem with using the keys that were used
to start the engine before the procedure.
End Of Sie
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM FUNCTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0520600
x The immobilizer system is a vehicle theft prevention device that only allows keys that have been previously
registered to the vehicle to start the engine, and prevents engine starting using any other means (such as with
an unregistered key or by a starter relay short).
End Of Sie
09-14A–23
TO MODEL INDEX

AUXILIARY KEY CONSTRUCTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0523000
x Keys for use with the immobilizer system have an
electronic communication device (transponder)
built into the key head that retains specific
TRANSPONDER
electronic codes (key ID number).
End Of Sie
am2zzn0000014
COIL ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914b0521000
x Installed on the steering lock.
x Forms a magnetic field near the steering lock and
receives the key signal.
x Demodulates the received key signal and outputs COIL ANTENNA
the signal to the keyless control module.
End Of Sie
am2zzn0000014
SECURITY LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]

id0914b0521100
Construction
x Allows visual verification of immobilizer system operation.
x If any malfunction is detected in the immobilizer system, the malfunction location can be verified by the security
light illumination/flashing pattern.
Caution
x Always use the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) to verify DTCs even if the security
light indicates a DTC. If the security light itself has a malfunction, it is possible that a DTC may not
be indicated properly.
Operation
x When the immobilizer system is operating, the security light flashes repeatedly 0.1 s every approx. 2 s.
APPROX. 2 s
ILLUMINATED
GOES OUT
APPROX. 0.1 s
am2zzn0000135
x When the immobilizer system is deactivated normally, the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s when the
start knob is turned to the ON position.
ILLUMINATED
GOES OUT
APPROX. 3 s
am2zzn0000135
x If the immobilizer system is not deactivated normally (malfunction detected by the malfunction diagnosis
function), the security light indicates a DTC. When the start knob is turned to the ON position, the security light
flashes or illuminates for 1 min in the following pattern:
— DTC 16 or under: Flashes
09-14A–24
TO MODEL INDEX

— DTCs 21, 22, and 23: Illuminated
EXAMPLES: DTC 12 DETECTED BY THE MALFUNCTION
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
ILLUMINATED
GOES OUT
APPROX. 1 MIN
DTC 12
am2zzn0000014
Note
x The security light indicates the DTC 10 times.
x If multiple DTCs that can be verified with the security light are detected, only the DTC with the lowest
number of those detected will be indicated by the security light.
End Of Sie
THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0100500
x The theft-deterrent system operates the siren and the hazard warning lights if a door, liftgate or the bonnet is
improperly opened, or if its sensor detects movement from an intrusion into the vehicle such as a window being
broken.
x Signal input/output of the theft-deterrent system is controlled by the theft-deterrent system control module.
End Of Sie
09-14A–25
TO MODEL INDEX

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0100600
THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN BONNET LATCH SWITCH
ADVANCED KEY
AUXILIARY KEY
TRANSMITTER
INTRUDER
SENSOR
CANCEL BUTTON
LIFTGATE LATCH
AND LOCK
ACTUATOR
FRONT DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR
SECURITY LIGHT
REAR DOOR LATCH AND

LOCK ACTUATOR
INSTRUMENT
KEYLESS
CLUSTER
CONTROL MODULE
INTRUDER SENSOR
BCM THEFT-DETERRENT
KEYLESS
CONTROL MODULE
RECEIVER
am2zzn0000011
09-14A–26
TO MODEL INDEX

THEFT-DETERRENT HORN BONNET LATCH SWITCH
ADVANCED KEY
AUXILIARY KEY
TRANSMITTER
LIFTGATE LATCH
AND LOCK
ACTUATOR
FRONT DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR
SECURITY LIGHT
REAR DOOR LATCH AND
LOCK ACTUATOR
INSTRUMENT
KEYLESS
CLUSTER
CONTROL MODULE
BCM THEFT-DETERRENT
KEYLESS
CONTROL MODULE
RECEIVER
am2zzn0000131
End Of Sie
09-14A–27
TO MODEL INDEX

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0100700
IG
B+ METER 10 A
B+ INSTRUMENT
ROOM 15 A
U CLUSTER
PUSH M SECURITY
SWITCH LIGHT
P
BCM
N
E
DOOR LATCH
X SWITCH
HAZARD WARNING
SWITCH
S
THEHT-DETERRENT
CONTROL MODULE
KEYLESS
CONTROL B+
CAN-H
MODULE
K
Q
CAN-L
I
BCM
V
UNLOCK LOCK
T
B+
LOCK LINK SWITCH
R WITH DOUBLE LOCKING

SYSTEM
B+
LIFTGATE INTRUDER
LATCH SENSOR
C
SWITCH
H B+
J
BONNET
LATCH THEFT-DETERRENT
SWITCH SIREN
am2zzn0000144
09-14A–28
TO MODEL INDEX

IG
B+ METER 10 A
B+ INSTRUMENT
ROOM 15 A
U CLUSTER
PUSH SECURITY
SWITCH THEHT-DETERRENT LIGHT
CONTROL MODULE
BCM
E S
X
HAZARD WARNING
SWITCH CAN-H
K
CAN-L
I
KEYLESS
CONTROL B+
BCM
MODULE
V
UNLOCK LOCK
T
LOCK LINK SWITCH

WITH DOUBLE LOCKING
SYSTEM
B+
H
HORN 15 A
BONNET
LATCH
SWITCH
F THEFT-DETERRENT
HORN
am2zzn0000144
End Of Sie
09-14A–29
TO MODEL INDEX

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0100800
Mode Transition
x The theft-deterrent control module switches the theft-deterrent system mode based on the ignition switch and
door conditions.
̪All doors include the following
doors: Operation Stop Mode SIREN: OFF
HAZARD: OFF
̆FRONT DOOR
̆REAR DOOR Ignition switch: LOCK Ignition switch: ON
̆LIFTGATE and or
̆BONNET Key reminder switch: OFF Key reminder switch: ON
and or
Push switch: OFF‫ޓ‬ Push switch: ON‫ޓ‬
SIREN: OFF
Initial Mode HAZARD: OFF
After all doors are closed, LOCK operation from

transmitter
Cancel Stand-by preparatory SIREN: OFF

mode HAZARD: OFF
Approx. 20 s
Cancel SIREN: OFF

Stand-by Mode HAZARD: OFF
Meets conditions for transition to alert mode
Cancel SIREN: ON
Alert Mode HAZARD: ON
Approx. 30 s Meets conditions for transition alert mode
Cancel Alarm preparatory SIREN: OFF

mode HAZARD: OFF
am2zzn0000084
Operation Stop Mode

x In this mode, all theft-deterrent system operations are stopped.
x The system changes to the operation stop mode when any of the following conditions are met.
— Ignition switch at ON
— Key reminder switch on
— Push switch on (Advanced keyless system)
Initial Mode
x This mode is the preparatory mode before changing to the stand-by mode. The system does not change
directly to the alert mode from this mode.
Transition condition to the initial mode
x The system changes from the operation stop mode to the initial mode if all of the following conditions are met.
— Ignition switch at LOCK
— Key reminder switch off
— Push switch off (Advanced keyless system)
x The system changes from the stand-by mode, alert mode 1, and alert mode 2 to the initial mode if any of the
following cancel conditions are met.
Transition condition to the stand-by preparation mode
x The system changes to the stand-by preparation mode if any of the following conditions are met.
— Locked using the transmitter (advanced key) LOCK button with the front doors, liftgate, and bonnet closed.
09-14A–30
TO MODEL INDEX

Stand-by preparatory mode
x This is mode prior to the stand-by mode.
x If the cancel conditions are met, the system changes to the initial mode.
Transition condition to the stand-by mode
x If the stand-by preparation mode continues for approx. 20 s, the system changes to the stand-by mode.
Cancel conditions
x If any of the following conditions are met, the stand-by preparation mode is canceled and the system changes
to the initial mode.
— Any door latch switch off (door is open), or liftgate latch switch on (liftgate is open), or bonnet latch switch
off (bonnet is open)
— Any door lock-link switch UNLOCK
— Key reminder switch on, or ignition switch ON
— Push switch on, and advanced key inside vehicle
— Unlock operation using transmitter (advanced key)
Stand-by Mode
x The system starts monitoring approx. 20 s after the doors are locked for unauthorized door opening/closing, or
movement from an intrusion into the vehicle such as a window being broken.If any unauthorized operation is
detected, the system changes to the alert mode.
x If the cancel condition is met, the system changes to the initial mode.
Transition condition to the alert mode
x If any of the following conditions are met, the system changes to the alert mode.
— Ignition switch ON (key reminder switch off, or push switch off)
— door latch switch off (door is open)
— Liftgate latch switch on (liftgate is open)
— Bonnet latch switch off (bonnet is open)
— Door lock-link switch UNLOCK
— Intrusion into vehicle is detected by intruder sensor
Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the stand-by mode is canceled and the system changes to the initial
mode.
— Key reminder switch on, ignition switch ON, and engine start
— Ignition switch at ON using advanced start function (Advanced key is inside vehicle, and push switch on),
and engine start
— Driver's side door lock-link switch at LOCK and liftgate opener switch on (with advanced key)
Alert Mode
x In this mode, the horn and hazard warning lights are operated to alert the surrounding area.
x When the alarm period (approx. 30 s) has elapsed, the system changes to the alert preparatory mode.
Approx. 30•• • •
330 ms
SIREN ON
HAZARD LIGHT
OFF
330 ms
am2zzn0000079
Transition condition to the alert preparation mode

x When the alarm period (approx. 30 s) has elapsed, the system changes to the alert preparation mode.
x The alarm period is not extended even if a transition condition to alert 1 mode is met again during an alarm
period.
Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the alert mode is canceled and the system changes to the initial
mode.
and engine start
— Driver's door lock-link switch LOCK and liftgate opener switch on (with advanced key)
09-14A–31
TO MODEL INDEX

Alert preparation mode
x In the alert preparation mode, the horn and hazard warning light are not operated, however, the alarm triggers
immediately if the condition is changed.
Transition condition to alert mode
x The system changes to the alert mode if any of the following conditions are met.
— Door latch switch off (door is open)
Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the alert preparation mode is canceled and the system changes to the
initial mode.
and engine start
— Driver's door lock-link switch at LOCK and liftgate opener switch on (with advanced key)
09-14A–32
TO MODEL INDEX

Mode Transition
x The BCM switches the theft-deterrent system mode based on the push button start and door conditions.
*All doors include the following

doors: Operation Stop Mode HORN:OFF
HAZARD: OFF
—FRONT DOOR
—REAR DOOR
—LIFTGATE Ignition switch: LOCK Ignition switch: ON
—BONNET and or
Key reminder switch: OFF Key reminder switch: ON
HORN:OFF

transmitter/advanced key
Cancel Stand-by preparatory HORN:OFF

mode HAZARD: OFF
Approx. 20 s
Cancel
Stand-by Mode 1 HORN:OFF
HAZARD: OFF
Meets conditions for

Transition to stand-by mode 2 5 s elapsed since
transition to alert mode
conditions met trunk lid/liftgate
was closed
Cancel
HAZARD: OFF
Transition to alert mode

conditions met
Cancel
Alert Mode HORN:ON
HAZARD: ON

Approx. 30 s transition alert
mode
Cancel Alert preparatory HORN:OFF

mode HAZARD: OFF
am2zzn0000134
Operation Stop Mode

— Key reminder switch ON or ACC
Initial Mode
09-14A–33
TO MODEL INDEX

x The system transitions from stand-by preparatory mode, stand-by mode 1, stand-by mode 2, alert mode, and
alert preparatory mode to the initial mode if the cancel conditions in each mode are met.
Transition condition to the stand-by preparatory mode
x The system changes to the stand-by preparatory mode if any of the following conditions are met.
— A lock operation was performed using the transmitter/advanced key lock button or the key with all the doors,
liftgate, and bonnet closed.
Note
x The hazard warning lights flash once.

x This is mode prior to the stand-by mode1.
x If the stand-by preparatory mode continues for approx. 20 s, the system changes to the stand-by mode1.
Cancel conditions
x If any of the following conditions are met, the stand-by preparatory mode is canceled and the system changes
— Ignition switch at ACC or ON
— Unlock operation using transmitter/advanced key
— The driver-side door key cylinder is unlocked.
Stand-by Mode 1
x The mode monitors for unauthorized door opening/closing approx. 20 s after the doors are locked. If any
unauthorized operation is detected, the system changes to alert mode.
— Ignition switch at ON (key reminder switch off or ACC off)
— Lifgate latch switch on (liftgate is open)
Transition condition to stand-by mode 2
x The system transitions to the stand-by mode 2 if any of the following conditions are met.
— Liftgate open switch (vehicle exterior) is on and liftgate latch switch is on (liftgate open)
Cancel Condition
mode.
— Key reminder switch on, Ignition switch at ON, and engine start
— Ignition switch at ACC, Ignition switch at ON and engine start (advanced key)
— Key reminder switch on, Ignition switch at ON
— Ignition switch at ACC, Ignition switch at ON (advanced key)
Stand-by mode 2
x The system transitions to this mode when the liftgate is opened/closed using a correct method after it has been
locked. If an unauthorized operation other than the liftgate is detected even while in this mode, the system
transitions to alert mode.
x When opening/closing of the liftgate using an appropriate method is completed, the system transitions to stand-
by mode 1.
x If the cancel condition is met, the system transitions to the initial mode.
Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the stand-by mode 2 is canceled, and the system changes to the
initial mode.
09-14A–34
TO MODEL INDEX

Alert Mode
Approx. 30•• • •
330 ms
HORN ON
HAZARD LIGHT
OFF
330 ms
am2zzn0000134
Transition condition to the alert preparatory mode

x The alarm period is not extended even if a transition condition to alert mode is met again during an alarm
period.
Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the alert mode is canceled, and the system changes to the initial
mode.
Alert preparatory mode

x In the alert preparatory mode, the horn and hazard warning light are not operated, however, the alarm triggers
Note
x Once the system switches to the alert mode, the system transitions to the alert mode by turning the
following switches ON/OFF.
— Ignition switch at ON (key reminder switch off)

Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the alert preparatory mode is canceled and the system changes to
the initial mode.
End Of Sie
INTRUDER SENSOR FUNCTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0115300
x The intruder sensor is located in center part of the roof the forward part of the roof.
x The intruder sensor detects movement in the vehicle by ultrasonic waves and sends the detection signal to the
theft-deterrent control module.
x An intruder sensor cancel button has been installed on the keyless entry system transmitter. If the intruder
sensor cancel button is on while the theft-deterrent system is pre-armed, intruder sensor ultrasonic wave output
is cut, and movement detection is stopped.
09-14A–35
TO MODEL INDEX
VEHICLE FRONT
INTRUDER
SENSOR
TRANSMITTER
INTRUDER SENSOR
CANCEL BUTTON
am2zzn0000075
End Of Sie
INTRUDER SENSOR OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0115400
1. When the theft-deterrent system is armed, the intruder sensor outputs ultrasonic waves in the passenger
compartment. The intruder sensor detects phase differences in the ultrasonic waves (reflected waves) that are
output and bounced off a target object.
2. When a phase difference in reflected waves occurs by movement in the vehicle (intruder), the CPU calculates
the level of phase difference.
3. If the level of phase difference is higher than specified, the intruder sensor sends a detection signal to the theft-
deterrent control module.
INTRUDER SENSOR
PHASE
RECEIVER DETECTION
AREA THEFT-
DETECTION DETERRENT
CPU SIGNAL CONTROL
OUTPUT MODULE
TARGET OBJECT
TRANSMITTER OSCILLATOR
am2zzn0000075
End Of Sie
THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN FUNCTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0115500
x The theft-deterrent siren is located on the rear, left side of the inside of the trunk side trim.
x Controlled by the following vehicle conditions:
— Standard alert control
— Open circuit alert control
09-14A–36
TO MODEL INDEX

Standard Alert Control
x The siren beeps when receiving an alert initialization signal from the theft-deterrent control module. When a go-
to-initial signal is received the siren is stopped.
B+
THEFT-DETERRENT THEFT-
CONTROL DETERRENT SIREN BEEPS
MODULE SIREN
ALERT
INITIALIZATION
SIGNAL
am2zzn0000075
Open Circuit Alert Control

x A back-up power supply is integrated in the theft-deterrent siren.
x When an open circuit is detected in the related wiring harness, the theft-deterrent siren beeps using the back-
up power supply.
x If any one of the following conditions are met, the siren is stopped:
— Receives go-to-initial signal from the theft-deterrent control module.
B+
Approx. 30 s
SIREN
BEEPS
DETERRENT SIREN
CONTROL
SIREN BEEPS
MODULE
SIREN
STOPS Approx. 10 s
Maximum 10 cycles
am2zzn0000077
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0521200
Special Features
x The advanced keyless entry system has an on-board diagnostic function to facilitate system diagnosis.
x The on-board diagnostic function consists of the following functions: a malfunction detection function, which
detects overall malfunctions in the advanced keyless entry system-related parts; a memory function, which
stores detected DTCs; a display function, which indicates system malfunctions via DTC display; and a PID/data
monitoring function, which reads out specific input/output signals.
x Using the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS), DTCs can be read out and deleted, and the PID/data
monitoring function can be activated.
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM FUNCTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]
id0914b0533300
x Detects overall malfunctions in the advanced keyless entry system-related parts.
Display Function
x If any malfunction is detected, the keyless warning light (red) in the instrument cluster illuminates to inform the
driver of a system malfunction.
Memory Function
x Stores malfunctions detected by the malfunction detection function as DTCs in the keyless control module. The
stored DTCs are not cleared even if the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position or the negative battery
cable is disconnected.
09-14A–37
TO MODEL INDEX
DTC
Integrated Diagnostic Software Detection Condition
(IDS) display
B1026:51 Steering lock unit not programmed
B1026:87 Communication error between keyless control module and steering lock unit
B1026:96 Steering lock unit status malfunction signal detected
B102B:51 No advanced key programming record (programming never performed in past)
B108A:29 Push switch off signal detected while ignition switch is at ON
B10A5:12 Keyless beeper output voltage malfunction
B10C6:1F Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (exterior, rear)
B10C7:1F Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (interior, rear)
B10C8:1F*1 Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (interior, center)
B10C9:1F Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (interior, front)
B10D1:23 Request switch (LF) ON signal detected while driving
B10D3:23 Request switch (RF) ON signal detected while driving
B113E:11 Liftgate open switch (5HB,3HB)/Trunk lid open switch (4SD) input voltage malfunction
B11FD:1F Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (exterior, LF)
B1210:1F Cannot receive signal correctly from keyless antenna (exterior, RF)
P1794:16 Keyless control module power voltage low (power from P/W 20 A fuse)
P1794:17 Keyless control module power voltage rising (power from P/W 20 A fuse)
U0001:88 Module communication error (HS-CAN)
U0028:87 Communication error (no response) between keyless control module and BCM
U0100:00 Communication error (no response) between keyless control module and PCM
U0401:68 Correct data cannot be received from PCM
U201F:00 Communication error between keyless control module and keyless receiver
U201F:13 Keyless receiver not connecting
U2100:00 Configuration error
U3000:41 Keyless control module internal malfunction
U3003:16 Keyless control module power voltage low (power from ROOM 15 A fuse)
U3003:17 Keyless control module power voltage rising (power from ROOM 15 A fuse)
U3004:16 Keyless control module ACC power voltage malfunction
*1
: 4SD

DTC
Integrated Detection Condition
Diagnostic Software Security light flashing pattern
(IDS) display
B10D5:13 Coil antenna malfunction
B10D7:05 Key ID number program error
B10D7:51 Keyless control module detected unprogrammed key ID number
Keyless control module cannot read key ID number data

B10D7:81
normally
B10D7:94 Key ID number data cannot be read
B10D8:00 Only one key ID number programmed
09-14A–38
TO MODEL INDEX

DTC
Integrated Detection Condition
Diagnostic Software Security light flashing pattern
(IDS) display
B10D9:87 No detected communication with coil antenna
Communication error between keyless control module and PCM

B10DA:51
(data transfer error)
ID number data between keyless control module and PCM are

B10DA:62
different
Communication error (no response/condition mismatch)

U0100:87
between keyless control module and PCM
With theft-deterrent system

DTC
Integrated Diagnostic Software Detection Condition
(IDS) display
B109F:49*1 Intruder sensor internal malfunction
*1 Signal error from intruder sensor
B109F:86
*1 Communication error between intruder sensor and theft-deterrent control module
B109F:87
*1 Theft-deterrent siren internal malfunction
B10A5:49
*1 Signal error from theft-deterrent siren
B10A5:86
*1 Communication error between theft-deterrent siren and theft-deterrent control module
B10A5:87
B1172:13 Door lock-link switch (driver-side) circuit malfunction
B1174:13 Door lock-link switch (passenger-side/LR/RR) circuit malfunction
B1175:13*1 Front door latch switch (driver-side) circuit malfunction
*1 Front door latch switch (passenger-side) circuit malfunction
B1176:13
*1 Liftgate latch switch circuit malfunction
B1178:11
*1 Rear door latch switch (RH) circuit malfunction
B11C0:13
*1 Rear door latch switch (LH) circuit malfunction
B11C1:13
P254F:13 Bonnet latch switch circuit malfunction
U0100:00 PCM communication error
U0140:00 BCM communication error
U0300:00
Configuration error
U2100:00
U3000:49 Theft-deterrent control module internal malfunction
U3003:16
Theft-deterrent control module power supply voltage is other than 9–16 V
U3003:17
PID/data Monitor Function

x With the PID/data monitor function, items set in the keyless control module can be selected and read out in
real-time.
x Use the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) to read the PID/data monitor.
PID name (definition) Unit/Operation Data contents Inspection item(s)
BZR_OUT
x Keyless beeper sound: On
(Keyless beeper Off/On Keyless beeper inspection
x Keyless beeper not sound: Off
status)
DTC_CNT x DTC detected: 1—255
Separate DTC inspection
(Number of DTCs) x DTC not detected: 0
09-14A–39
TO MODEL INDEX

IG_KEY_IN x Ignition key auxiliary key inserted: Key-
(Ignition key cylinder Key-Out/Key-In In Steering lock unit inspection
status) x No ignition key auxiliary key: Key-Out
IG_SW_ST Not Pushed/ x Push switch pushed: Pushed
Steering lock unit inspection
(Ignition switch status) Pushed x Push switch released: Not pushed
IMMOBI
x Immobilizer function present: On
(Immobilizer function Off/On* x Immobilizer function not present: Off
Keyless control module inspection
present/not present)
LOCK_SW_D
x Driver's door: UNLOCK: On
Door lock-link switch Off/On Door lock-link switch inspection
x Driver's door: LOCK: Off
status)
MASTERKEY* Not Pushed/ x Master key present: Present
(Master key present/ Keyless control module inspection
Pushed x Master key not present: Not present
not present)
NUMCARD
x Number of programmed advanced
(Number of advanced Keyless control module inspection
keys: 0—6
keys)
NUMKEY* x Number of programmed key codes:
Keyless control module inspection
(Number of key codes) 0—8
PWR_ACC
x Ignition switch at ACC: On
(ACC power supply Off/On Ignition switch inspection
x Ignition switch at LOCK: Off
status)
x Liftgate opener switch (5HB,3HB) /
REQ_SW_BK
Trunk lid opener switch (4SD) pressed:
(Liftgate opener switch Liftgate opener switch (5HB,3HB) /
On
(5HB,3HB) / Trunk lid Off/On Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)
x Liftgate opener switch(5HB,3HB) /
opener switch (4SD) inspection
Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)
status)
released: Off
REQ_SW_R
x Request switch (RF) pressed: On
Request switch (RF) Off/On Request switch (RF) inspection
x Request switch (RF) released: Off
status
REQ_SW_L
x Request switch (LF) pressed: On
Request switch (LF) Off/On Request switch (LF) inspection
x Request switch (LF) released: Off
status
VPWR_B+
(Keyless control
V x Continuous: Approx. 12 V Battery inspection
module power supply
voltage)
*
: With immobilizer system
09-14A–40
TO MODEL INDEX

DTC_CNT x DTC detected: 1–255
DRSW_D
x Driver's door open: Open
(Door latch switch Close/Open Door latch switch (driver's side)
x Driver's door closed: Close
(driver's door) status)
DRSW_P
(Door latch switch x Passenger's door open: Open Door latch switch (passenger's
Close/Open
(passenger's door) x Passenger's door closed: Close door)
status)
DRSW_RR*1 x Rear door (RH) open: Open
(Door latch switch (rear Close/Open Door latch switch (rear door (RH))
x Rear door (RH) closed: Close
door (RH)) status)
DRSW_LR*1 x Rear door (LH) open: Open
(Door latch switch (rear Close/Open Door latch switch (rear door (LH))
x Rear door (LH) closed: Close
door (LH) status)
HOOD_SW
x Bonnet open: Open
(Bonnet latch switch Close/Open Bonnet latch switch
x Bonnet closed: Close
status)
LLSW_D x Driver's door lock knob locked: Lock
(Door lock-link switch Unlock/Lock x Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Door lock-link switch
status) Unlock
LLSW_P+R x Door lock knob other than driver's door
(Door latch switch locked: Lock
Unlock/Lock Door lock-link switch
(passenger's door, rear) x Door lock knob other than driver's door
status) unlocked: Unlock
T_GATE_SW
x Liftgate open: Close
(Liftgate latch switch Close/Open Liftgate latch switch
x Liftgate closed: Open
status)
TRG1_01
x Driver's door lock knob unlocked: On
(Door lock-link switch Off/On Door lock-link switch
x Driver's door lock knob locked: Off
status)
TRG1_02 x Door lock knob other than driver's door
(Door latch switch unlocked: On
Off/On Door lock-link switch
status) locked: Off
TRG1_03 x Theft-deterrent control module power
(Theft-deterrent control supply interrupted: On
Off/On Theft-deterrent control module
module power supply x Theft-deterrent control module power
voltage) supply not interrupted: Off
TRG1_04 Note
Off/On
(Angle sensor status) x Displayed but not used in the inspection.
x Intruder sensor detected intrusion: On
TRG1_05
Off/On x Intruder sensor did not detect intruder sensor
(Intruder sensor status)
intrusion: Off
TRG1_06
x Driver's door open: On
(Door latch switch Off/On Door latch switch (driver's side)
x Driver's door closed: Off
TRG1_07
(Door latch switch x Passenger's door open: On Door latch switch (passenger's
Off/On
(passenger's door) x Passenger's door closed: Off door)
status)
TRG1_08*1 x Rear door (LH) open: On
(Door latch switch (rear Off/On Door latch switch (rear door (LH))
x Rear door (LH) closed: Off
door (LH) status)
TRG1_09*1 x Rear door (RH) open: On
(Door latch switch (rear Off/On Door latch switch (rear door (RH)
x Rear door (RH) closed: Off
door (RH)) status)
TRG1_10
x Liftgate open: On
(Liftgate latch switch Off/On Liftgate latch switch
x Liftgate closed: Off
status)
TRG1_11
x Bonnet open: On
(Bonnet latch switch Off/On Bonnet latch switch
x Bonnet closed: Off
status)
09-14A–41
TO MODEL INDEX

x Key reminder switch or push switch off
TRG1_12
and ignition switch on: On
(Ignition key cylinder Off/On Ignition key cylinder
status)
and ignition switch off: Off
TRG1_13 Note
Off/On
(Used key status) x Displayed but not used in inspection.
TRG1_ST_A x Theft-deterrent system in stand-by
(Theft-deterrent system Off/On preparatory mode: On Theft-deterrent control module
status) x Theft-deterrent system initial mode: Off
x Theft-deterrent system in stand-by
TRG1_ST_B
mode: On
(Theft-deterrent system Off/On Theft-deterrent control module
x Theft-deterrent system stand-by
status)
preparatory mode: Off
TRG2_01
status)
status) locked: Off
TRG2_04 Note
Off/On
TRG2_05
intrusion: Off
TRG2_06
TRG2_07
Off/On
status)
door (LH) status)
door (RH)) status)
TRG2_10
x Liftgate open: On
status)
TRG2_11
x Bonnet open: On
status)
TRG2_12
status)
TRG2_13 Note
Off/On
TRG2_ST_B
mode: On
status)
09-14A–42
TO MODEL INDEX

VPWR
(Theft-deterrent control
V x Continuous: Approx. 12 V Battery
module power supply
voltage)
*1 : 5HB
End Of Sie
09-14A–43
TO MODEL INDEX
SECURITY AND LOCKS [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
09-14B SECURITY AND LOCKS [KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM]
SECURITY AND LOCKS OUTLINE TRANSMITTER STRUCTURAL VIEW
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–2 [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–16
SECURITY AND LOCKS STRUCTURAL IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . 09-14B–3 VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . 09-14B–16
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–3 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–4 [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–17
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–5 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
SECURITY AND LOCKS SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–17
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–6 Engine Starting Enabled Operation. . . . 09-14B–17
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE Additional Key Programming . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–19
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–6 Programming of Related Parts . . . . . . . 09-14B–19
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM FUNCTION
OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–19
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–7 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–19
DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM OUTLINE KEY CONSTRUCTION [KEYLESS
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–7 ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–20
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION COIL ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–7 [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–20
TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE SECURITY LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/
ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/ OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY
OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–20
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–8 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–20
Release Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–8 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–20
TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM OUTLINE
OUTLINE [KEYLESS ENTRY [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–21
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–8 THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY
STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–22
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–9 Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM WIRING manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–22
DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–10 manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–23
TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM WIRING
OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–10 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–24
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–24
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–11 AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–25
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–11 OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY
Unlock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–11 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–26
LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM OUTLINE Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–12 manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–26
LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY manufactured vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–29
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–13 INTRUDER SENSOR FUNCTION
LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM WIRING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–31
DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY INTRUDER SENSOR OPERATION
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–14 [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–32
LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN FUNCTION
OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–32
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–14 Standard Alert Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–33
LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH Open Circuit Alert Control . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–33
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–15 FUNCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY
TRANSMITTER OUTLINE [KEYLESS SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–33
ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–15 DTC table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–33
PID/DATA Monitor Table . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–35
End of Toc
SOKYU_NG: SECURITY AND LOCKS
09-14B–1
TO MODEL INDEX

SECURITY AND LOCKS OUTLINE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3519800
Improved marketability x Power door lock system adopted

x Double locking system adopted
x Keyless entry system adopted
Improved security x Immobilizer system adopted
End Of Sie
09-14B–2
TO MODEL INDEX

SECURITY AND LOCKS STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3519900
5HB
TRANSMITTER
COIL ANTENNA IGNITION SWITCH
LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH
LIFTGATE LATCH AND

LOCK ACTUATOR
FRONT DOOR LATCH AND

LOCK ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR LATCH AND

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LOCK ACTUATOR
80 100
60 120
90
70 110
40 50 130 140
6 7 8
5 00r/min 30 150
x1 0
4 20 170
160
3 10
2
0 180
1
0 KEYLESS RECIEVER
SECURITY LIGHT
BCM
am2zzn0000112
09-14B–3
TO MODEL INDEX

3HB
TRANSMITTER
LIFTGATE LATCH AND

LOCK ACTUATOR
FRONT DOOR LATCH

AND LOCK ACTUATOR
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
80 100
KEYLESS RECIEVER
60 120
90
70 110
40 50 130 140
6 7 8
5 00r/min 30 150
x1 0
4 20 170
160
3 10
2
0 180
1
0
SECURITY LIGHT
BCM
am2zzn0000104
09-14B–4
TO MODEL INDEX

4SD
TRANSMITTER
TRUNK LID
OPENER SWITCH
TRUNK LID LATCH AND

RELEASE ACTUATOR
FRONT DOOR LATCH

AND LOCK ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR LATCH

AND LOCK ACTUATOR
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
80 100
60 120
90
70 110
40 50 130 140
6 7 8
5 00r/min 30 150
x1 0
4 20 170
160
3 10
2
0 180
1
0 KEYLESS RECIEVER
SECURITY LIGHT
BCM
am2zzn0000138
End Of Sie
09-14B–5
TO MODEL INDEX

SECURITY AND LOCKS SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3522500
B+ IG2
F.WIP 20 A
2F DOOR LOCK RELAY

3A
RWIP 10 A
2N LIFTGATE OPENER MOTOR (5HB,3HB) /
TRUNK LID OPENER MOTOR (4SD)
R.DEF 20 A
3C M
1C LIFTGATE OPENER
HAZARD 10 A RELAY
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
1J
ROOM 15 A 3O WITHOUT
DOUBLE
LOCKING
M M M
1O M
SYSTEM
TAIL 15 A 3M
1E
IG1 M M M M WITH
DOUBLE
LOCKING
IGNITION SWITCH SYSTEM
METER 10 A 3E
BCM
2G
DOOR KEY
CYLINDER
2M 7C SWITCH
2P 7K DOOR
B+ LOCK LINK
7Q SWITCH
KEYLESS 7G
RECIEVER 6W
DOOR LATCH
SWITCH(LR)
4S
7O
4Q
4U DOOR LATCH
SWITCH(RR)
4W 7M
CAN RELATED 4V DOOR LATCH
MODULE 4X SWITCH(LF)
7I
7X
7V DOOR LATCH
SWITCH(RF)
6X
THEFT-DETERRENT
6V CONTROL MODULE
WITH THEFT-DETERRENT
SYSTEM
am2zzn0000139
End Of Sie
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3501500
x A door lock-link switch interlock function has been adopted where all doors and the liftgate are locked/unlocked
when the door lock-link switch is operated or the driver's door is locked/unlocked using the driver's door lock
knob.
x A door key interlock function has been adopted where all doors and the liftgate are locked/unlocked when the
driver's door is locked/unlocked using the driver's door key cylinder.
End Of Sie
09-14B–6
TO MODEL INDEX

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3501600
x When the doors are locked/unlocked using the driver's key cylinder or the driver's door lock knob, the door lock-
link switch in the door lock actuator is locked/unlocked via the rod.
x The body control module (BCM) activates each lock actuator to lock/unlock according to the lock/unlock signal
from the door lock-link switch.
REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
,
DRIVER S DOOR LOCK KNOB
FRONT DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR
BCM
DOOR LOCK , LINK SWITCH
(IN DRIVER S DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR)
,
DRIVER S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER
FRONT DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR LOCK

LIFTGATE LOCK
ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
am2zzn0000009
End Of Sie
DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM OUTLINE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3525800
x The double locking system disables unlock operation of the lock knob when all the doors and the liftgate are
closed and locked two times consecutively. The operation conditions of the double locking system are as
follows:
— The doors and the liftgate are locked twice within approx. 3 s using the LOCK button on the transmitter.
— The doors and the liftgate are locked twice within approx. 3 s using the key.
End Of Sie
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3521400
x When the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons are operated at a distance (within approx. 2.5) from the vehicle, all the doors
and the liftgate lock/unlock.
x An auto-lock function has been adopted which automatically locks the doors and the liftgate if any one of the
following operations is not performed within 30 s after the UNLOCK button on the transsmitter is pressed.
— A door or the liftgate is opened.
— Locking/unlocking using the driver's front door key cylinder.
— Locking/unlocking using the driver's door lock knob.
— Ignition key is inserted into the steering lock.
x To prevent improper operation while the vehicle is moving, the doors cannot be locked/unlocked by operating
the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter while the key is inserted in the steering lock.
x An answer-back function has been adopted which flashes the hazard warning lights when the doors are locked/
unlocked using the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter.
— When the LOCK button is pressed, the hazard warning lights flash once
— When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the hazard warning lights flash two times
09-14B–7
TO MODEL INDEX
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR LIFTGATE LOCK
ACTUATOR
KEYLESS RECEIVER
LOCK/UNLOCK OPERATION
BCM
TRANSMITTER LOCK/UNLOCK
SIGNAL
HAZARD FLASH
am2zzn0000134
End Of Sie
TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3545800
x Installed to the trunk lid.
x The trunk lid latch and release actuator releases the latch lever.
x If the trunk lid cannot be opened for reasons such as a dead battery or a malfunction in the electrical system,
the trunk lid can be opened using the trunk lid release lever which can release the trunk lid latch manually.
Release Operation
x The release signal is sent from the BCM to the trunk lid release actuator, and the trunk lid release actuator
frees (unlocked condition) the trunk lid latch. At the same time, the trunk lid lifts away via the spring force of the
trunk lid weatherstrip and stopper rubber to release the latch.
Note
x After the latch is released, the trunk lid latch is freed after approx. 0.5 s.
TRUNK LID LATCH AND TRUNK LID RELEASE

RELEASE ACTUATOR LEVER
LATCH LCOVER
LATCH LEVER
am2ccn0000005
End Of Sie
TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM OUTLINE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3000800
x A trunk lid opener system has been adopted in which the trunk lid can be opened only by pressing the trunk lid
opener switch.
09-14B–8
TO MODEL INDEX

End Of Sie
TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]

id0914b3000900
TRUNK LID
OPENER SWITCH
TRUNK LID LATCH AND

RELEASE ACTUATOR
BCM
am2zzn0000138
End Of Sie
09-14B–9
TO MODEL INDEX

TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3001000
BCM
3A
+B TRUNK LID
OPENER MOTOR
3C M
D/L 20 A FUSE
1P
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH

6U
7A
am2zzn0000139
End Of Sie
TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3001100
1. When pressing the trunk lid opener switch while the doors are unlocked, the trunk lid opener switch turns on
and a trunk lid-open request signal is input to the BCM.
2. The BCM unlocks the trunk lid release actuator for approx. 1.5 s when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position or all the following conditions are met.
— Selector lever is in P position (ATX)
— Driver’s door is unlocked
Note
x It requires approx. 1 to 2 s for the trunk lid release actuator to perform an open operation after the trunk lid
opener switch is pressed.
3. When the trunk lid release actuator motor operates, the latch lever is freed and the trunk lid lifts up
simultaneously via the spring force of the trunk lid weatherstrip and stopper rubber, and opens.
09-14B–10
TO MODEL INDEX
BCM

7B
3A
TRUNK LID
+B
OPENER MOTOR
3C M
D/L 20 A FUSE
1P
4V
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
4X
6U
4U
TO CAN SYSTEM- 4W
7A
RELATED MODULE 7X
7V
6X
6V
am2zzn0000139
End Of Sie
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3535700
x Installed on the trunk lid.
x If the trunk lid opener switch is opened while the trunk lid is unlocked, the trunk lid latch can be released.
TRUNK LID OPENER

SWITCH
am2ccn0000002
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3525700
x Installed to the liftgate.
x The liftgate latch and lock actuator activates locking/unlocking of the latch lever.
x If the liftgate cannot be opened for reasons such as a dead battery or a malfunction in the electrical system, the
liftgate can be opened using the liftgate release lever which can release the liftgate latch manually.
Unlock Operation
x The unlock signal is sent from the BCM to the liftgate lock actuator, and the liftgate lock actuator frees
(unlocked condition) the liftgate. At the same time, the liftgate lifts away via the spring force of the liftgate
weatherstrip and stopper rubber to release the latch.
Note
x After the latch is released, the liftgate latch is freed (unlock operation) after approx. 1.5 s.
09-14B–11
TO MODEL INDEX
LOCK ACTOATOR
LIFTGATE RELEASE
LEVER
LATCH LEVER
LATCH LCOVER
am2zzn0000010
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM OUTLINE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3000000
x A liftgate opener system has been adopted in which the liftgate can be opened only by pressing the liftgate
opener switch.
End Of Sie
09-14B–12
TO MODEL INDEX

LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3000100
LIFTGATE LATCH AND

LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM
am2zzn0000135
End Of Sie
09-14B–13
TO MODEL INDEX

LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3000200
BCM
WITH TERMINAL 3A
3A
LIFTGATE OPENER WITHOUT

+B
MOTOR TERMINAL 3A
3C M
D/L 20 A FUSE
1P

6U
7A
am2zzn0000135
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3000300
1. When pressing the liftgate opener switch while the doors are unlocked, the liftgate opener switch turns on and
a liftgate-open request signal is input to the BCM.
2. The BCM unlocks the liftgate lock actuator (releases the latch) for approx. 1.5 s when the ignition switch is in
the LOCK position or all the following conditions are met.
— Selector lever is in P position (ATX/CVT)
Note
x It requires approx. 1 to 2 s for the liftgate lock actuator to perform an open operation after the liftgate
opener switch is pressed.
3. When the liftgate lock actuator motor operates, the latch lever is freed and the liftgate lifts up simultaneously via
the spring force of the liftgate weatherstrip and stopper rubber, and opens.
09-14B–14
TO MODEL INDEX
BCM

WITH TERMINAL 3A
7B
3A
LIFTGATE OPENER WITHOUT

+B TERMINAL 3A
MOTOR
3C M
D/L 20 A FUSE
1P
4V CVT
4X
6U
4U
TO CAN SYSTEM- 4W
7A
RELATED MODULE 7X
7V
6X
6V
am2zzn0000136
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3524700
x Installed on the liftgate.
x If the liftgate opener switch is opened while the liftgate is unlocked, the liftgate latch can be released.
INTERNAL CIRCUIT CHART

••
LIFTGATE OPENNER
SWITCH
••
am2zzn0000009
End Of Sie
TRANSMITTER OUTLINE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3521900
A retractable key-type transmitter has been adopted.
End Of Sie
09-14B–15
TO MODEL INDEX

TRANSMITTER STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3522000
LOCK BUTTON
UNLOCK BUTTON
WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM 4SD
INTRUDER SENSOR
CANCEL BUTTON TRUNK LID BUTTON
am2zzn0000141
End Of Sie
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3520700
SECURITY LIGHT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
TRANSPONDER
PCM
COIL ANTENNA
am2zzn0000133
End Of Sie
09-14B–16
TO MODEL INDEX

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3520500
IG1 B+
SECURITY
LIGHT IG1
IG1
COIL IG1 B+
ANTENNA
INSTRUMENT
STARTER
CLUSTER
TX LINE RELAY
PCM
M STARTER
RX LINE
CAN LINE
am2zzn0000010
End Of Sie
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3520800
x The immobilizer system consists of the key (built-in transponder), coil antenna, instrument cluster, PCM, and
the security light (in instrument cluster).
x Keys for use with the immobilizer system have an electronic communication device (transponder) built into the
key head that retains specific electronic codes (key ID number).
x The immobilizer system cannot be disabled.
x The engine cannot be started without a previously programmed key.
Caution
x If a metallic or magnetic object is near the key, communication between the key and the vehicle
may be obstructed resulting in the inability to start the engine.
x It is also possible that due to other malfunction causes in other systems (such as engine, starter relay) the
engine may not start even though the immobilizer system is operating normally. If the immobilizer system is
malfunctioning, the security light displays the DTC. The displayed DTC is recorded in the instrument cluster
and the PCM.
Engine Starting Enabled Operation

x The immobilizer system operates automatically when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK or ACC position.
When this occurs, the security light flashes repeatedly approx. 0.1 s every 2 s.
x The order of operation for enabling engine starting is as follows:
09-14B–17
TO MODEL INDEX
The ignition switch is turned from the LOCK (ACC) to the

ON (START) position. (Security light illuminates.)
(1) The Instrument cluster sends data A* to the key

(transponder) via the coil.
(2) The key (transponder) calculates data B from received

data A and sends its specific key ID number and data B to
the Instrument cluster via the coil.
(3) The Instrument cluster verifies consistency between the UNSATISFACTORY RESULT
received key ID number and the previously registered key ID numbers.
SATISFACTORY RESULT
(4) The Instrument cluster makes a calculation using received UNSATISFACTORY RESULT
data B and compares it with sent data A.
SATISFACTORY RESULT
(5) The Instrument cluster requests data for verification

from the PCM.
(6) The PCM sends data C* to the Instrument cluster.
(7) The Instrument cluster calculates data D from received

data C and sends it to the PCM.
UNSATISFACTORY RESULT
(8) The PCM makes a calculation using received data D
and compares it with sent data C.
SATISFACTORY RESULT
Engine starting is permitted. Engine starting is not permitted.

(The security light goes out after approx. 3 s.) (After detecting the error (such as non-verification or
malfunction), the security light illuminates or flashes
continuously for approx. 1 min, and then a DTC is
*: Data A and C are different random values each time repeatedly displayed 10 times.)
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
SECURITY LIGHT
COIL ANTENNA
KEY
(TRANSPONDER)
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
PCM
(3), (4) (8)
(7)
(1)
(5), (7)
(2) (6)
am2zzn0000112
09-14B–18
TO MODEL INDEX

Additional Key Programming
x Additional keys can be programmed for starting the vehicle engine.
Note
x Two or more programmed key ID numbers are necessary for starting the engine, and a total of 8 key ID
numbers can be programmed per vehicle. The number of programmed key ID numbers can be verified
using the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
x When there is one key which can start the engine or an advanced key, the Integrated Diagnostic Software
(IDS) is necessary.
x When there are two keys which can start the engine, the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) is not
necessary. However, if the customer spare key programming is disabled, the Integrated Diagnostic
Software (IDS) becomes necessary.
Programming of Related Parts

x When performing the following servicing, it is necessary to reprogram the immobilizer system. Always use the
Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) so that the immobilizer system operates normally.
Caution
x If reprogramming is not done using the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS), the engine
cannot be started.
Items necessary for

Service procedure (prepare before Cautionary notes
starting procedure)
PCM replacement x New PCM x PCM configuration is necessary.
x Have a key on hand which
can start the engine, or an
advanced key.
Instrument cluster replacement x New instrument cluster x Before beginning the procedure, verify that the
x Keys for programming (2 or customer has turned in all of the keys for the
more) vehicle.
x Unless the key ID numbers are reprogrammed
after the replacement, the engine cannot be
started.
x The keys (2 or more) prepared before beginning
the programming can be new keys or keys which
were able to start the engine.
PCM and instrument cluster replaced x New PCM x Unless keys are reprogrammed after the
simultaneously x New instrument cluster procedure, the engine cannot be started. Before
x Keys for programming (2 or beginning the procedure, verify that the customer
more) has turned in all of the keys for the vehicle.
x The keys (2 or more) prepared before beginning
the programming can be new keys or keys which
were able to start the engine.
End Of Sie
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM FUNCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3520600
Special Features
x The immobilizer system is a vehicle theft prevention device that only allows keys that have been previously
programmed to the vehicle to start the engine. Therefore, it functions to prevent the vehicle from being stolen by
thieves attempting to use a forged key or hotwiring.
x Consists of the key (with built-in transponder), coil antenna, PCM, and the instrument cluster.
End Of Sie
09-14B–19
TO MODEL INDEX

KEY CONSTRUCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3520900
x Keys for use with the immobilizer system have an
electronic communication device (transponder)
built into the key head that retains specific
electronic codes (key ID number).
End Of Sie
TRANSPONDER
am2zzn0000133
COIL ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]

id0914b3521000
x Installed on the steering lock.
x Forms a magnetic field near the steering lock and
receives the key signal.
x The received key signal is demodulated and input COIL ANTENNA
to the instrument cluster.
End Of Sie
am2zzn0000010
SECURITY LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]

id0914b3521100
Construction
x Allows visual verification of immobilizer system operation.
x If any malfunction is detected in the immobilizer system, the malfunction location can be verified by the security
light flashing pattern.
Caution
x Use the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) to verify DTCs even if the security light
indicates a DTC. If the security light itself has a malfunction, it is possible that a DTC may not be
indicated properly.
Operation
x When the immobilizer system is operating, the security light flashes repeatedly 0.1 s every approx. 2 s.
APPROX. 2 s
ILUMINATED
GOES OUT
APPROX. 3.5 s
am2zzn0000133
x When the immobilizer system is deactivated

normally, the security light illuminates for approx.
3 s when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. ILUMINATED
x If the immobilizer system is not deactivated
normally (malfunction detected by the on-board
diagnostic function), the security light indicates a GOES OUT
DTC. If this occurs, the security light flashes or
APPROX. 3 s
illuminates for 1 min when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, and then indicates the
DTC.
— DTC 16 or under: Flashes
am2zzn0000134
— DTC 21 or higher: Illuminated
09-14B–20
TO MODEL INDEX
EXAMPLES: DTC 12 DETECTED BY THE MALFUNCTION

DAIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
ILUMINATED
GOES OUT
APPROX. 1MIN
DTC 12
am2zzn0000010
Note
x The security light indicates the DTC 10 times.
x If multiple DTCs that can be verified with the security light are detected, only the DTC with the lowest
number of those detected will be indicated by the security light.
End Of Sie
THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM OUTLINE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3100500
x The theft-deterrent system operates the siren and the hazard warning lights if a door, liftgate or the bonnet is
improperly opened, or if its sensor detects movement from an intrusion into the vehicle such as a window being
broken.
x Signal input/output of the theft-deterrent system is controlled by the theft-deterrent system control module.
End Of Sie
09-14B–21
TO MODEL INDEX

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3100600
THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN BONNET LATCH SWITCH
TRANSMITTER
INTRUDER
SENSOR
CANCEL BUTTON
LIFTGATE LATCH
AND LOCK
ACTUATOR
FRONT DOOR LOCK SECURITY LIGHT

ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR LATCH AND

LOCK ACTUATOR
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
INTRUDER SENSOR
BCM THEFT-DETERRENT
KEYLESS
CONTROL MODULE
RECEIVER
am2zzn0000074
09-14B–22
TO MODEL INDEX

THEFT-DETERRENT HORN BONNET LATCH SWITCH
TRANSMITTER
LIFTGATE LATCH
AND LOCK
ACTUATOR
FRONT DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR
REAR DOOR LATCH AND SECURITY LIGHT

LOCK ACTUATOR
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
BCM THEFT-DETERRENT
KEYLESS
CONTROL MODULE
RECEIVER
am2zzn0000131
End Of Sie
09-14B–23
TO MODEL INDEX

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3100700
IG
B+ METER 10 A
B+ INSTRUMENT
ROOM 15 A
U CLUSTER
W
O
KEY SECURITY
M
REMINDER LIGHT
SWITCH
P
G
BCM
N
DOOR LATCH
X SWITCH
HAZARD WARNING
SWITCH
S
THEHT-DETERRENT
CONTROL MODULE
CAN-H
K
Q
CAN-L
I
BCM
KEYLESS
RECEIVER B+
V
UNLOCK LOCK
T
B+
LOCK LINK SWITCH
R WITH DOUBLE LOCKING

SYSTEM
B+
LIFTGATE INTRUDER
LATCH SENSOR
C
SWITCH
H B+
J
BONNET
LATCH THEFT-DETERRENT
SWITCH SIREN
am2zzn0000144
09-14B–24
TO MODEL INDEX

IG
B+ METER 10 A
B+ INSTRUMENT
ROOM 15 A
U CLUSTER
PUSH SECURITY
SWITCH THEHT-DETERRENT LIGHT
CONTROL MODULE
BCM
E S
X
HAZARD WARNING
SWITCH CAN-H
K
CAN-L
I
KEYLESS
CONTROL B+
BCM
MODULE
V
UNLOCK LOCK
T
LOCK LINK SWITCH

WITH DOUBLE LOCKING
SYSTEM
B+
H
HORN 15 A
BONNET
LATCH
SWITCH
F THEFT-DETERRENT
HORN
am2zzn0000131
End Of Sie
09-14B–25
TO MODEL INDEX

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3100800
Mode Transition
x The theft-deterrent control module switches the theft-deterrent system mode based on the ignition switch and
door conditions.
̪All doors include the following
doors: Operation Stop Mode SIREN: OFF
HAZARD: OFF
̆FRONT DOOR
̆REAR DOOR Ignition switch: LOCK Ignition switch: ON
̆LIFTGATE and or
̆BONNET Key reminder switch: OFF Key reminder switch: ON
and or
Push switch: OFF‫ޓ‬ Push switch: ON‫ޓ‬
SIREN: OFF

transmitter
Cancel Stand-by preparatory SIREN: OFF

mode HAZARD: OFF
Approx. 20 s
Cancel SIREN: OFF

Stand-by Mode HAZARD: OFF
Meets conditions for transition to alert mode
Cancel SIREN: ON
Alert Mode HAZARD: ON
Approx. 30 s Meets conditions for transition alert mode
Cancel Alarm preparatory SIREN: OFF

mode HAZARD: OFF
am2zzn0000084
Operation Stop Mode

— Push switch on (Advanced keyless system)
Initial Mode
— Push switch off (Advanced keyless system)
x The system changes from the stand-by mode, alert mode 1, and alert mode 2 to the initial mode if any of the
following cancel conditions are met.
Transition condition to the stand-by preparation mode
x The system changes to the stand-by preparation mode if any of the following conditions are met.
— Locked using the transmitter (advanced key) LOCK button with the front doors, liftgate, and bonnet closed.
09-14B–26
TO MODEL INDEX

x This is mode prior to the stand-by mode.
x If the stand-by preparation mode continues for approx. 20 s, the system changes to the stand-by mode.
Cancel conditions
x If any of the following conditions are met, the stand-by preparation mode is canceled and the system changes
— Key reminder switch on, or ignition switch ON
— Push switch on, and advanced key inside vehicle
Stand-by Mode
x The system starts monitoring approx. 20 s after the doors are locked for unauthorized door opening/closing, or
movement from an intrusion into the vehicle such as a window being broken.If any unauthorized operation is
detected, the system changes to the alert mode.
x If the cancel condition is met, the system changes to the initial mode.
— door latch switch off (door is open)
Cancel Condition
mode.
and engine start
— Driver's side door lock-link switch at LOCK and liftgate opener switch on (with advanced key)
Alert Mode
Approx. 30•• • •
330 ms
SIREN ON
HAZARD LIGHT
OFF
330 ms
am2zzn0000134
Transition condition to the alert preparation mode

x When the alarm period (approx. 30 s) has elapsed, the system changes to the alert preparation mode.
x The alarm period is not extended even if a transition condition to alert 1 mode is met again during an alarm
period.
Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the alert mode is canceled and the system changes to the initial
mode.
and engine start
— Driver's door lock-link switch LOCK and liftgate opener switch on (with advanced key)
09-14B–27
TO MODEL INDEX

Alert preparation mode
x In the alert preparation mode, the horn and hazard warning light are not operated, however, the alarm triggers
Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the alert preparation mode is canceled and the system changes to the
initial mode.
and engine start
— Driver's door lock-link switch at LOCK and liftgate opener switch on (with advanced key)
09-14B–28
TO MODEL INDEX

Mode Transition
x The BCM switches the theft-deterrent system mode based on the push button start and door conditions.
*All doors include the following

doors: Operation Stop Mode HORN:OFF
HAZARD: OFF
—FRONT DOOR
—REAR DOOR
—LIFTGATE Ignition switch: LOCK Ignition switch: ON
—BONNET and or
Key reminder switch: OFF Key reminder switch: ON
HORN:OFF

transmitter/advanced key
Cancel Stand-by preparatory HORN:OFF

mode HAZARD: OFF
Approx. 20 s
Cancel
HAZARD: OFF

Transition to stand-by mode 2 5 s elapsed since
transition to alert mode
conditions met trunk lid/liftgate
was closed
Cancel
HAZARD: OFF
Transition to alert mode

conditions met
Cancel
Alert Mode HORN:ON
HAZARD: ON

Approx. 30 s transition alert
mode
Cancel Alert preparatory HORN:OFF

mode HAZARD: OFF
am2zzn0000134
Operation Stop Mode

— Key reminder switch ON or ACC
Initial Mode
09-14B–29
TO MODEL INDEX

x The system transitions from stand-by preparatory mode, stand-by mode 1, stand-by mode 2, alert mode, and
alert preparatory mode to the initial mode if the cancel conditions in each mode are met.
Transition condition to the stand-by preparatory mode
x The system changes to the stand-by preparatory mode if any of the following conditions are met.
— A lock operation was performed using the transmitter/advanced key lock button or the key with all the doors,
liftgate, and bonnet closed.
Note
x The hazard warning lights flash once.

x This is mode prior to the stand-by mode1.
x If the stand-by preparatory mode continues for approx. 20 s, the system changes to the stand-by mode1.
Cancel conditions
x If any of the following conditions are met, the stand-by preparatory mode is canceled and the system changes
— Ignition switch at ACC or ON
Stand-by Mode 1
x The mode monitors for unauthorized door opening/closing approx. 20 s after the doors are locked. If any
unauthorized operation is detected, the system changes to alert mode.
— Ignition switch at ON (key reminder switch off or ACC off)
— Lifgate latch switch on (liftgate is open)
Transition condition to stand-by mode 2
x The system transitions to the stand-by mode 2 if any of the following conditions are met.
— Liftgate open switch (vehicle exterior) is on and liftgate latch switch is on (liftgate open)
Cancel Condition
mode.
Stand-by mode 2
x The system transitions to this mode when the liftgate is opened/closed using a correct method after it has been
locked. If an unauthorized operation other than the liftgate is detected even while in this mode, the system
transitions to alert mode.
x When opening/closing of the liftgate using an appropriate method is completed, the system transitions to stand-
by mode 1.
x If the cancel condition is met, the system transitions to the initial mode.
Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the stand-by mode 2 is canceled, and the system changes to the
initial mode.
09-14B–30
TO MODEL INDEX

Alert Mode
Approx. 30•• • •
330 ms
HORN ON
HAZARD LIGHT
OFF
330 ms
am2zzn0000134
Transition condition to the alert preparatory mode

x The alarm period is not extended even if a transition condition to alert mode is met again during an alarm
period.
Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the alert mode is canceled, and the system changes to the initial
mode.
Alert preparatory mode

x In the alert preparatory mode, the horn and hazard warning light are not operated, however, the alarm triggers
Note
x Once the system switches to the alert mode, the system transitions to the alert mode by turning the
following switches ON/OFF.
— Ignition switch at ON (key reminder switch off)

Cancel Condition
x If any of the following conditions are met, the alert preparatory mode is canceled and the system changes to
the initial mode.
End Of Sie
INTRUDER SENSOR FUNCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3115300
x The intruder sensor is located in center part of the roof the forward part of the roof.
x The intruder sensor detects movement in the vehicle by ultrasonic waves and sends the detection signal to the
theft-deterrent control module.
x An intruder sensor cut-off switch has been installed on the keyless entry system transmitter. If the intruder
sensor cut-off switch is on while the theft-deterrent system is pre-armed, intruder sensor ultrasonic wave output
is cut, and movement detection is stopped.
09-14B–31
TO MODEL INDEX
VEHICLE FRONT
INTRUDER
SENSOR
TRANSMITTER
INTRUDER SENSOR CANCEL

BUTTON
am2zzn0000075
End Of Sie
INTRUDER SENSOR OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3115400
1. When the theft-deterrent system is armed, the intruder sensor outputs ultrasonic waves in the passenger
compartment. The intruder sensor detects phase differences in the ultrasonic waves (reflected waves) that are
output and bounced off a target object.
2. When a phase difference in reflected waves occurs by movement in the vehicle (intruder), the CPU calculates
the level of phase difference.
3. If the level of phase difference is higher than specified, the intruder sensor sends a detection signal to the theft-
deterrent control module.
INTRUDER SENSOR
PHASE
RECEIVER DETECTION
AREA THEFT-
DETECTION DETERRENT
CPU SIGNAL CONTROL
OUTPUT MODULE
TARGET OBJECT
TRANSMITTER OSCILLATOR
am2zzn0000075
End Of Sie
THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN FUNCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3115500
x The theft-deterrent siren is located on the rear, right side of the inside of the trunk side trim.
x Controlled by the following vehicle conditions:
— Standard alert control
— Open circuit alert control
09-14B–32
TO MODEL INDEX

Standard Alert Control
x The siren beeps when receiving an alert initialization signal from the theft-deterrent control module. When a go-
to-initial signal is received the siren is stopped.
B+
CONTROL DETERRENT SIREN BEEPS
MODULE SIREN
ALERT
INITIALIZATION
SIGNAL
am2zzn0000075
Open Circuit Alert Control

x A back-up power supply is integrated in the theft-deterrent siren.
x When an open circuit is detected in the related wiring harness, the theft-deterrent siren beeps using the back-
up power supply.
x If any one of the following conditions are met, the siren is stopped:
— Receives go-to-initial signal from the theft-deterrent control module.
B+
Approx. 30 s
SIREN
BEEPS
DETERRENT SIREN
CONTROL
SIREN BEEPS
MODULE
SIREN
STOPS Approx. 10 s
Maximum 10 cycles
am2zzn0000075
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM FUNCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
id0914b3533300
DTC table
x The immobilizer system is provided with an on-board diagnostic function.
x On-board diagnosis of the immobilizer system occurs automatically when the ignition switch is turned from the
LOCK (ACC) to the ON (START) position.
x If the results of the malfunction diagnosis show a malfunction in the immobilizer system, the security light
indicates a DTC. DTCs are simultaneously saved in the instrument cluster and PCM. The number of saved
DTCs can be verified using the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
Caution
x Always use the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) or equivalent to verify DTCs even if
the security light indicates a DTC. If the security light itself has a malfunction, it is possible that a
DTC may not be indicated properly. In addition, there are DTCs which cannot be verified using the
security light, and can only be verified using the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
x DTCs for the immobilizer system that are stored in the instrument cluster and PCM are cleared
when the ignition switch is turned from the ON to the LOCK (ACC) position.
Note
x If two or more malfunctions are detected as a result of on-board diagnosis, only the DTC with the lowest
number of those detected will be indicated by the security light. The PCM and instrument cluster store
multiple DTCs at the same time.
x If two or more immobilizer system DTCs are detected, first repair the part for the DTC indicated by the
security light. After repairing one location, turn the ignition switch from the LOCK to the ON position and
perform the immobilizer system on-board diagnostic function.
09-14B–33
TO MODEL INDEX

Note
x In the approx. 1 min after detecting a malfunction and before indicating the DTC, the security light
illuminates or flashes in the following patterns:
Security light flashing pattern

DTC
(Before indicating a DTC)
ILLUMINATED
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
GOES OUT
ILLUMINATED
21, 22, 23
GOES OUT
DTC
Integrated Diagnostic Software
* Detection Condition
(IDS) display
Security light flashing pattern
Instrument
PCM
cluster
No detected communication with the coil

11 B10D9:87 P1260:00
antenna.
x Coil antenna malfunction

12 B10D5:13 P1260:00 x The PCM determined a malfunction in the
coil antenna even though it is normal.
B10D7:05 P1260:00 Key ID number program error
13
B10D7:94 P1260:00 The key ID number data cannot be read.
The instrument cluster cannot read key ID

14 B10D7:81 P1260:00
number data normally.
The instrument cluster has detected an

15 B10D7:51 P1260:00
unprogrammed key ID number.
Communication error between the instrument

16 U0100:87 P1260:00
cluster and the PCM (no response)
21 B10D8:00 P1260:00 Only one key has been programmed.

22 B10DA:51 P1260:00
cluster and the PCM (data transfer failure)

23 B10DA:62 P1260:00
cluster and the PCM (condition mismatch)
U0001:88 U0001:88 Module communication error (HS-CAN)

Not illuminated
U0100:00 - PCM communication error
* : The letters at the beginning of each DTC are only displayed when using the Integrated Diagnostic
Software (IDS), and refer to the following: B= Body system, P= Powertrain system, U= Network
communication system.
09-14B–34
TO MODEL INDEX

DTC
Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) Detection Condition
display
B109F:49*1 Intruder sensor internal malfunction
*1 Signal error from intruder sensor
B109F:86
Communication error between intruder sensor and theft-deterrent control
B109F:87*1 module
B10A5:49*1 Theft-deterrent siren internal malfunction
*1 Signal error from theft-deterrent siren
B10A5:86
Communication error between theft-deterrent siren and theft-deterrent
B10A5:87*1 control module
B1172:13 Door lock-link switch (driver-side) circuit malfunction
B1174:13 Door lock-link switch (passenger-side/LR/RR) circuit malfunction
B1175:13*1 Front door latch switch (driver-side) circuit malfunction
*1 Front door latch switch (passenger-side) circuit malfunction
B1176:13
*1 Liftgate latch switch circuit malfunction
B1178:11
*1 Rear door latch switch (RH) circuit malfunction
B11C0:13
*1 Rear door latch switch (LH) circuit malfunction
B11C1:13
P254F:13 Bonnet latch switch circuit malfunction
U0300:00
Configuration error
U2100:00
U3000:49 Theft-deterrent control module internal malfunction
U3003:16
Theft-deterrent control module power supply voltage is other than 9–16 V
U3003:17
PID/DATA Monitor Table

x The following item can be verified
— Number of individual keys programmed to the vehicle.
x Use the Integrated Diagnostic Ssoftware (IDS) or equivalent to read the PID/data monitor.
Note
x The engine cannot be started unless two or more keys are programmed to the vehicle.
x A maximum of eight keys can be programmed for one vehicle.
PID name (definition) Detection Condition

NUMKEYS
Number of programmed key ID numbers: 0–8
(Number of key ID numbers programmed in the instrument cluster)
09-14B–35
TO MODEL INDEX

With thft-deterrent system
DTC_CNT x DTC detected: 1–255
DRSW_D
x Driver's door open: Open
(Door latch switch Close/Open Door latch switch (driver's side)
x Driver's door closed: Close
DRSW_P
(Door latch switch x Passenger's door open: Open Door latch switch (passenger's
Close/Open
(passenger's door) x Passenger's door closed: Close door)
status)
DRSW_RR*1 x Rear door (RH) open: Open
(Door latch switch (rear Close/Open Door latch switch (rear door (RH))
x Rear door (RH) closed: Close
door (RH)) status)
DRSW_LR*1 x Rear door (LH) open: Open
(Door latch switch (rear Close/Open Door latch switch (rear door (LH))
x Rear door (LH) closed: Close
door (LH) status)
HOOD_SW
x Bonnet open: Open
(Bonnet latch switch Close/Open Bonnet latch switch
x Bonnet closed: Close
status)
LLSW_D x Driver's door lock knob locked: Lock
(Door lock-link switch Unlock/Lock x Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Door lock-link switch
status) Unlock
LLSW_P+R x Door lock knob other than driver's door
(Door latch switch locked: Lock
Unlock/Lock Door lock-link switch
status) unlocked: Unlock
T_GATE_SW
x Liftgate open: Close
(Liftgate latch switch Close/Open Liftgate latch switch
x Liftgate closed: Open
status)
TRG1_01
status)
status) locked: Off
TRG1_04 Note
Off/On
TRG1_05
intrusion: Off
TRG1_06
TRG1_07
Off/On
status)
door (LH) status)
door (RH)) status)
TRG1_10
x Liftgate open: On
status)
TRG1_11
x Bonnet open: On
status)
09-14B–36
TO MODEL INDEX

TRG1_12
status)
TRG1_13 Note
Off/On
TRG1_ST_B
mode: On
status)
TRG2_01
status)
status) locked: Off
TRG2_04 Note
Off/On
TRG2_05
intrusion: Off
TRG2_06
TRG2_07
Off/On
status)
door (LH) status)
door (RH)) status)
TRG2_10
x Liftgate open: On
status)
TRG2_11
x Bonnet open: On
status)
TRG2_12
status)
TRG2_13 Note
Off/On
TRG2_ST_B
mode: On
status)
09-14B–37
TO MODEL INDEX

VPWR
(Theft-deterrent control
V x Continuous: Approx. 12 V Battery
module power supply
voltage)
*1 : 5HB
End Of Sie
09-14B–38
TO MODEL INDEX
EXTERIOR TRIM
09-16 EXTERIOR TRIM

EXTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW EXTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW
[3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–1 [5HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–2
EXTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT OUTLINE
[4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–1 [3HB, 5HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–2
EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT OUTLINE
[4SD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–2
TO MODEL INDEX
EXTERIOR TRIM
EXTERIOR
End of Toc TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [3HB]
NG: EXTERIOR TRIM
id0916001002z3
RADIATOR GRILL
(SPORT TYPE)
REAR SPOILER
SIDE STEP MOLDING
RADIATOR GRILL REAR SPOILER

(MESH TYPE)
am2zzn0000106
End Of Sie
EXTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]
id0916001002z7
REAR SPOILER
SIDE STEP MOLDING
am2zzn0000141
End Of Sie
09-16–1
TO MODEL INDEX
EXTERIOR TRIM
EXTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [5HB]
id0916001002z8
RADIATOR GRILL
(SPORT TYPE)
REAR SPOILER
SIDE STEP MOLDING
RADIATOR GRILL REAR SPOILER

(MESH TYPE)
am2zzn0000073
End Of Sie
EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT OUTLINE [3HB, 5HB]
SOKYU_NG: EXTERIOR TRIM
id0916005227z6
Improved marketability x Side step molding adopted for sport type model
End Of Sie
EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT OUTLINE [4SD]
id0916005227z7
Improved marketability x Side step molding adopted
End Of Sie
09-16–2
TO MODEL INDEX
INTERIOR TRIM
09-17 INTERIOR TRIM

INTERIOR TRIM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–1 INTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW
INTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–2
[3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–1 INTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW
[5HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–3
TO MODEL INDEX
INTERIOR TRIM
End of Toc
INTERIOR TRIM OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: INTERIOR TRIM
id091700524000
Improved convenience x Magazine rack to store A4-sized papers and magazines adopted in glove compartment
x Cup holders adopted in rear console
Improved safety x Shock-absorbing pad for head protection adopted (vehicles without curtain air bags)
Improved comforty x Headliner adopted with a continuous, semi-permanent deodorizing effect based on
photocatalysis
End Of Sie
INTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [3HB]
id0917005237z3
R.H.D.
SHOCK-ABSORBING PAD
SUNVISOR
GROVE COMPERTMENT REAR CONSOLE

am2zzn0000143
End Of Sie
INTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]

R.H.D.
SUNVISOR SHOCK-ABSORBING PAD
GROVE COMPERTMENT REAR CONSOLE
am2zzn0000141
End Of Sie
09-17–1
TO MODEL INDEX
INTERIOR TRIM
INTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [5HB]
id0917005237z8
R.H.D.
SHOCK-ABSORBING PAD
SUNVISOR
GROVE COMPERTMENT
REAR CONSOLE
am2zzn0000129
End Of Sie
09-17–3
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
09-18 LIGHTING SYSTEMS

LIGHTING SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . 09-18–1 RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM WIRING
LIGHTING SYSTEM DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–14
SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–2 RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
LIGHTING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–15
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–3 2-Beam Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–15
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT 4-Beam Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–16
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–5 System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–16
2-Beam Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–5 2-Beam Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–17
4-Beam Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–5 4-Beam Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–18
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . 09-18–6 FRONT FOG LIGHT
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM STRUCTURAL CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–18
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–6 FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM WIRING CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–19
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–7 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
2-Beam Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–7 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–19
4-Beam Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–8 5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–19
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION . . . 09-18–8 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–20
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–8 INBOARD LIGHT CONSTRUCTION . . . . 09-18–20
Illumination operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–9 HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
Lights off operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–11 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–21
Fail-safe function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–11 5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–21
AUTO LIGHT SENSOR FUNCTION . . . . 09-18–12 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–21
AUTO LIGHT SENSOR OPERATION . . . 09-18–12 LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
Function description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–12 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–22
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM REAR FOG LIGHT CONSTRUCTION . . . 09-18–22
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–13 5HB/3HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–22
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–23
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–13 INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–23
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–13 INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–24
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–13 INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL
RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–24
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–14
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
LIGHTING SYSTEM OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: LIGHTING SYSTEMS
id091800503800
x Front combination lights adopted in which headlights, front turn lights, and parking lights are
Improved design ability
integrated
x Headlight leveling system adopted
x Front fog lights have been adopted (Located in front bumper)
Improved visibility x Running light system adopted
x Interior lights with variable illumination period and illumination level controlled by BCM
adopted
x Rear fog lights have been adopted (Located in rear bumper 5HB/3HB)
Improved safety x Rear fog lights have been adopted (Located in inboard light (driver-side) 4SD)
x LEDs have been adopted for the high-mount brake light (5HB/3HB)
Improved convenience x Auto light system adopted
End Of Sie
09-18–1
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
LIGHTING SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
id091800503900
Item Specifications (W) X

number
Headlight bulb (HI) 60 u 2
Headlight bulb (LO) 55 u 2
Parking light bulb 5u2
Except AutoAlliance Thailand
55 u 2
(AAT) manufactured vehicles
Front fog light bulb
AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT)
51 u 2
manufactured vehicles
Rear fog light bulb 21 u 1
Exterior light bulb capacity Front turn light bulb 21 u 2
Front side turn light bulb 5u2
Brake/taillight bulb 21/5 u 2
Rear turn light bulb 21 u 2
Back-up light bulb (5HB/3HB) 16 u 2
Back-up light bulb (4SD) 21 u 2
License plate light bulb 5u2
High-mount brake light (LED) (5HB/3HB) 2.4 u 1
High-mount brake light bulb (4SD) 18 u 1
Interior light bulb (Vehicles with intruder sensor) 8u2
Interior light bulb (Vehicles without intruder sensor) 10 u 1
Interior light bulb capacity
Cargo compartment light bulb (5HB/3HB) 5u1
Trunk compartment light bulb (4SD) 5u1
End Of Sie
09-18–2
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
LIGHTING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id091800504000
R.H.D.
REAR COMBINATION HI-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
LIGHT
AUTO LIGHT SENSOR

(RAIN SENSOR)
FRONT
COMBINATION LIGHT
HEADLIGHT LEVELING CARGO COMPARTMENT

ACTUATOR LIGHT
REAR FOG LIGHT LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
REAR COMBINATION INBOARD LIGHT

LIGHT
HI-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
FRONT FOG LIGHT FRONT SIDE

TURN LIGHT REAR FOG
LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE
LIGHT
TRUNK COMPARTMENT
LIGHT
INTERIOR LIGHT LIGHT SWITCH
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH
am2zzn0000137
End Of Sie
09-18–3
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT CONSTRUCTION
id091800524500
2-Beam Type
x Front combination lights in which the headlight, front turn light, and parking light are integrated have been
adopted to improve design ability.
A
A
PARKING
LIGHT
BULB
FRONT TURN
LIGHT BULB
HEADLIGHT BULB
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
SEC. A—A
am2zzn0000139
4-Beam Type
x Front combination lights in which the headlight, front turn light, and parking light are integrated have been
adopted to improve design ability.
x Projector-type halogen headlights have been adopted which emit light over a wide-area from the headlights.
A
A
PARKING
LIGHT
BULB
FRONT TURN
LIGHT BULB
HEADLIGHT BULB••(HI)
HEADLIGHT BULB••(LO)
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
SEC. A—A
am2zzn0000139
Projector-type headlight
x Light emitted from the first focal point is projected off the reflector, gathered at the second focal point, and
output through the convex lens.
09-18–5
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
End Of Sie FIRST FOCAL POSITION
SECOND FOCAL POSITION
CONVEX
LENS
REFLECTOR
am6xun0000024
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM OUTLINE

id091800526500
x An auto-light system that automatically and optimally illuminates and turns off the headlights in any situation
according to the level of light above and in front of the vehicle has been adopted.
End Of Sie
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id091800526600
LENS
WINDSHIELD
AUTO LIGHT SENSOR
(RAIN SENSOR)
LIGHT SWITCH BCM

am2zzn0000138
End Of Sie
09-18–6
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id091800526400
2-Beam Type
IG1 B+ B+
PARKING LIGHT/TAIL LIGHT/
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
TNS RELAY HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT

RELAY RELAY
(LOW-BEAM) (HIGH-BEAM)
ILLUMINATION
LIGHT
AUTO LIGHT MICRO

SENSOR COMPUTER
BCM
PASS HI
AUTO TNS
LO
OFF
HEAD
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
am2zzn0000142
09-18–7
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4-Beam Type
IG1 B+ B+

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

RELAY RELAY
ILLUMINATION
LIGHT
AUTO LIGHT MICRO

SENSOR COMPUTER
BCM
PASS HI
AUTO TNS
LO
OFF
HEAD
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
am2zzn0000142
End Of Sie
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION
id091800526700
Note
x The illumination intensity at which the auto light system operates is approximate and for reference
purposes. It varies depending on conditions in the surrounding area (weather, reflection off buildings).
Operation
Illumination condition
x When the ignition is switched to ON and the light switch is in the AUTO position, the headlight and tail number
side lights (TNS) illuminate under the following condition:
— The forward and upward illumination level sensors detect approx. 2,000 lux or less.
Lights off condition

x When the light switch is in the AUTO position, the headlight and TNS turn off under the following conditions:
— The forward and upward illumination level sensors detect approx. 4,000 lux or more for approx. 1.0 s.
— The ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position.
— The light switch is in the OFF position.
09-18–8
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
ON
IG1
OFF
ON
LIGHT SWITCH
(AUTO POSITION) OFF
BRIGHT
ILLUMINATION
LEVEL
DARK
ILLUMINATED
HEADLIGHT
NOT ILLUMINATED
ILLUMINATED
TNS
NOT ILLUMINATED
APPROX. 1.5—2.5 s
am2zzn0000143
Illumination operation
1. When the light switch is in the AUTO position, the illumination level sensors in the auto light sensor (installed in
windshield) detect the illumination level above and in front of the vehicle.
2. If the illumination level sensor detects approx. 2,000 lux or less, a TNS on control signal is sent to the body
control module (BCM).
3. When the microcomputer in the BCM receives the control signal, current (1) flows and transistor A is turned on.
4. When transistor A turns on, the TNS relay turns on. At the same time the TNS illuminate.
5. When the microcomputer in the BCM receives the control signal, current (2) flows and transistor B is turned on.
6. When the transistor turns on, the headlight relay turns on. At the same time the headlights (LO) illuminate.
09-18–9
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
2-Beam Type
IG1 B+ B+
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
(1) (2)
HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT
TNS RELAY RELAY RELAY
(1) (2)
ILLUMINATION
LIGHT
TRANSISTOR A
(2)
(1)
AUTO LIGHT (1) TRANSISTOR B

MICRO (2)
SENSOR COMPUTER
(2)
BCM
PASS HI
AUTO TNS
LO
OFF
HEAD
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
am2zzn0000142
09-18–10
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4-Beam Type
IG1 B+ B+

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
(1)
TNS RELAY HEADLIGHT (2) HEADLIGHT
RELAY RELAY
(1) (2)
ILLUMINATION
LIGHT
TRANSISTOR A
(1)
AUTO LIGHT (2)

MICRO (1)
SENSOR COMPUTER TRANSISTOR B
(2)
(2)
BCM
PASS HI
AUTO TNS
LO
OFF
HEAD
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
am2zzn0000142
Lights off operation

1. When the light switch is in the AUTO position, the illumination level sensors in the auto light sensor (installed in
the windshield) detect the illumination level.
2. If the upward and forward illumination level sensor detect approx. 4,000 lux or more for 1.0 s in front of and
above the vehicle, the headlight and TNS off control signal is sent to the BCM.
3. The microcomputer in the BCM receives the control signal and turns off the current to transistor A, causing the
headlight relay to turn off.
4. When the headlight relay turns off, the headlights (LO) turn off.
5. The microcomputer in the BCM receives the control signal and turns off the current to transistor B, causing the
TNS relay to turn off.
6. When the TNS relay turns off, the TNS turn off.
Fail-safe function
x When an auto-light sensor malfunction or auto-light sensor communication error is detected, the BCM initiates
controls as indicated in the fail-safe function table.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION TABLE

Fail-safe function
Malfunction Recovery condition
Before operation After operation
Headlights on Headlights remain on x Ignition switch is turned off
TNS on TNS remain on x Auto-light sensor malfunction is not
x Auto-light sensor malfunction
detected
x Auto-light sensor
x Communication is restored
communication error OFF (lights off) Lights remain off x Light switch is turned to a position
other than AUTO
End Of Sie
09-18–11
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
AUTO LIGHT SENSOR FUNCTION
id091800526800
x The auto-light sensor contains upward and forward illumination sensors which detect the level of illumination
above and in front of the vehicle respectively.
x When the upward and forward illumination sensors detect the illumination level at which the headlights should
be turned off, the sensors turn off the headlights at the optimal timing.
x When the upward and forward illumination sensors detect the illumination level at which the headlights should
be illuminated, the sensors illuminate the headlights at the optimal timing.
End Of Sie
AUTO LIGHT SENSOR OPERATION
id091800526900
Caution
x The auto-light sensor cannot detect the illumination level correctly under the following conditions,
which could cause the auto-lights to operate improperly.
— Stickers or labels are attached on the auto-light sensor in the windshield.
— Dirt is adhering to the auto-light sensor in the windshield.
x The auto-light sensor is installed to the lens in the center of the windshield.
LENS
AUTO LIGHT SENSOR

(RAIN SENSOR)
am2zzn0000138
x The auto-light sensor is integrated with the rain sensor as a single unit.
x The upward and forward illumination level sensors, which detect the level of illumination above and in front of
the vehicle respectively, are built-in.
FORWARD ILLUMINATION LEVEL SENSOR
RAIN SENSOR
AUTO LIGHT SENSOR DETECTION AREA
(RAIN SENSOR)
UPWARD ILLUMINATION LEVEL SENSOR
am2zzn0000143
Function description
Sensitivity adjustment function
x The illumination level sensitivity can be switched between “Standard (All others)“ and ” Low (All others)“ using
the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).

x The BCM detects an auto-light sensor malfunction, or a communication error between the auto-light sensor and
BCM, then the BCM outputs a DTC.
End Of Sie
09-18–12
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM OUTLINE
id091800504600
x Allows adjustment of the headlight optical axis (changes due to varying cargo and occupant conditions) from
the vehicle interior, in order to prevent blinding of oncoming vehicles.
x The headlight optical axis height can be freely adjusted by setting the headlight leveling switch between 0-3 (0
is the maximum upward angle, 3 is the maximum downward angle).
End Of Sie
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id091800504700
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH
HEADLIGHT LEVELING ACTUATOR

am2zzn0000139
End Of Sie
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM DIAGRAM
id091800504800
+B
HEADLIGHT
HEADLIGHT LEVELING
RELAY (LOW-BEAM) IC M ACTUATOR (LH)
3
2
LIGHT 1
SWITCH HEADLIGHT LEVELING
•• IC M ACTUATOR (RH)
HEADLIGHT
LEVELING SWITCH
am2zzn0000143
End Of Sie
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM OPERATION
id091800504900
1. Switch the headlight leveling switch.
2. The headlight leveling actuator detects the output voltage of the headlight leveling switch.
3. The motor inside the headlight leveling actuator operates according to the output voltage of the headlight
leveling switch, adjusting the headlight reflector height.
09-18–13
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
+B
HEADLIGHT • •• • • • HEADLIGHT LEVELING
RELAY (LOW-BEAM) IC M ACTUATOR (LH)
3 • •• • • •
2
LIGHT • •• • • •
1 • •• • • • HEADLIGHT LEVELING
SWITCH
•• IC M ACTUATOR (RH)
HEADLIGHT
LEVELING SWITCH
am2zzn0000144
End Of Sie
RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM OUTLINE
id091800103100
x The running light system operates the low-beam headlight and TNS automatically when the ignition switch
turns on. It is controlled by the BCM (Body control module).
End Of Sie
RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id091800103200
2-Beam Type
IG1 B+ B+

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

RELAY RELAY
ILLUMINATION
LIGHT
AUTO LIGHT MICRO

SENSOR COMPUTER
BCM
PASS HI
AUTO TNS
LO
OFF
HEAD
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
am2zzn0000143
09-18–14
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4-Beam Type
IG1 B+ B+

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

RELAY RELAY
ILLUMINATION
LIGHT
AUTO LIGHT MICRO

SENSOR COMPUTER
BCM
PASS HI
AUTO TNS
LO
OFF
HEAD
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
am2zzn0000143
End Of Sie
RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION
id091800103000
2-Beam Type
H/L SW HEADLIGHT RUNNING
DIMMER EXTERIOR INTERIOR
IG LIGHT
TNS HEAD SW LOW HIGH LIGHT LIGHT
MODE
LOW OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF PASS OFF ON OFF OFF
HIGH OFF OFF OFF OFF
LOW OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF PASS OFF ON ON ON OFF
HIGH OFF OFF ON ON
ON
LOW ON OFF ON ON
ON PASS OFF ON ON ON
HIGH OFF ON ON ON
09-18–15
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
IG LIGHT
MODE
LOW ON OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF PASS OFF ON ON OFF ON
HIGH ON OFF ON OFF
LOW OFF OFF ON ON
ON OFF PASS OFF ON ON ON
HIGH OFF OFF ON ON
ON OFF
LOW ON OFF ON ON
ON PASS OFF ON ON ON
HIGH OFF ON ON ON
4-Beam Type
IG LIGHT
MODE
LOW OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF PASS ON ON OFF OFF
HIGH OFF OFF OFF OFF
LOW OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF PASS ON ON ON ON OFF
HIGH OFF OFF ON ON
ON
LOW ON OFF ON ON
ON PASS ON ON ON ON
HIGH ON ON ON ON
LOW ON OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF PASS ON ON ON OFF ON
HIGH ON OFF ON OFF
LOW OFF OFF ON ON
ON OFF PASS ON ON ON ON
HIGH OFF OFF ON ON
ON OFF
LOW ON OFF ON ON
ON PASS ON ON ON ON
HIGH ON ON ON ON
System Operation
When the ignition switch turns to on:
1. Two transistors are turned on with current (1) flowing in transistor 1, and current (2) in transistor 2.
2. When transistors 1 and 2 are on, the headlight relay and TNS relay turn on, and the headlights (low-beam),
parking lights/taillights/license plate light, illumination light illuminate.
09-18–16
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
2-Beam Type
IG1 B+ B+
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT
TNS RELAY RELAY RELAY
ILLUMINATION
LIGHT
TRANSISTOR 1
(1)
AUTO LIGHT MICRO TRANSISTOR 2
SENSOR COMPUTER
(2)
BCM
PASS HI
AUTO TNS
LO
OFF
HEAD
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
am2zzn0000143
09-18–17
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4-Beam Type
IG1 B+ B+

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

RELAY RELAY
ILLUMINATION
LIGHT
TRANSISTOR 1
AUTO LIGHT MICRO (1)

SENSOR COMPUTER TRANSISTOR 2
(2)
BCM
PASS HI
AUTO TNS
LO
OFF
HEAD
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
am2zzn0000143
End Of Sie
FRONT FOG LIGHT CONSTRUCTION
id091800503300
x The front bumper built-in type front fog light with the aiming adjustment function has been adopted.
09-18–18
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

STANDARD TYPE SPORT TYPE
FRONT FOG FRONT FOG

LIGHT LIGHT
FRONT FOG FRONT FOG
LIGHT BULB LIGHT BULB

A STANDARD TYPE SPORT TYPE
FRONT FOG
FRONT FOG
A LIGHT
LIGHT
FRONT FOG
FRONT FOG
LIGHT BULB
LIGHT BULB
SEC. A—A
am2zzn0000129
End Of Sie
FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT CONSTRUCTION
id091800524600
x Installed on the left and right front fender panels by engaging the housing tabs.
x The front side turn light bulb is integrated with the front side turn light. (Bulb cannot be replaced. When
replacing the bulb, replace the front side turn light as a unit.)
FRONT SIDE
TURN LIGHT
TAB
FRONT FENDER
PANEL
am2zzn0000138
End Of Sie
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT CONSTRUCTION
id091800505000
5HB/3HB
x Light distribution is controlled by a step reflector which diffuses and reflects the light emitted from the bulb,
which enables the adoption of a flat lens without lens cutting.
x Rear combination lights have been adopted in which the brake/taillight, rear turn light, and back-up light are
integrated.
09-18–19
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
REAR TURN
LIGHT BULB
A
B BACK-UP LIGHT
A
B BULB
STEP
REFLECTOR
SEC. A—A
BLAKE /
TAILLIGHT BULB
SEC. B—B
am2zzn0000129
4SD
x Rear combination lights have been adopted in which the brake/taillight and rear turn light are integrated.
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
BRAKE / TAIL
LIGHT BULB
A A
B B
SEC. A—A
REAR TURN
LIGHT BULB
SEC. B—B
am2zzn0000136
End Of Sie
INBOARD LIGHT CONSTRUCTION
id091800107900
09-18–20
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
x Inboard lights have been adopted in which the rear fog light (driver-side) and back-up light (passenger-side) are
integrated.
INBOARD LIGHT REAR FOG LIGHT BULB (DRIVER-SIDE) /
BACK-UP LIGHT BULB (PASSENGER-SIDE)
A A
SEC. A—A
am2zzn0000136
End Of Sie
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT CONSTRUCTION
id091800525000
5HB/3HB
x Installed on the liftgate by engaging the tabs.
x Visibility has been improved with the adoption of nine built-in LEDs.
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
A B A
B
LED
SEC. A—A
TAB
TAB
SEC. B—B
am2zzn0000139
4SD
x Installed to the trunk lid with the connecting tabs and nuts.
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT TRUNK LID
NUT TAB TAB NUT
am2zzn0000139
End Of Sie
09-18–21
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT CONSTRUCTION
id091800524800
x Installed on the rear bumper by engaging the tabs.
x Because the lens can be removed using a flathead screwdriver, the license plate light bulb can be removed/
installed easily.
LISENCE LIGHT BULB

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
A
B
SEC. A—A
B
A TAB
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
SEC. B—B
am2zzn0000129
End Of Sie
REAR FOG LIGHT CONSTRUCTION
id091800111000
5HB/3HB
x Rear fog lights that are embedded in the rear bumper have been adopted.
REAR FOG LIGHT
REAR FOG REAR FOG LIGHT

LIGHT BULB
SEC.A• •A
am2zzn0000139
09-18–22
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4SD
x Rear fog lights that are embedded in the rear bumper have been adopted.
INBOARD LIGHT REAR FOG LIGHT BULB
(DRIVER-SIDE)
A A
SEC. A—A
am2zzn0000136
End Of Sie
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
id091800525800
x An interior light and cargo compartment light (5HB/3HB) /trunk compartment light (4SD) have been adopted.
x The interior light control system has been adopted for the interior light.
u : Applicable
Installation Interior light

Type
position control system
Interior light (Vehicles with intruder

Front area of roof u
sensor)
Interior light (Vehicles without

Front area of roof u
intruder sensor)
Cargo compartment light (5HB/ Trunk side trim

3HB) (RH)
Trunk compartment light (4SD) Trunk room
End Of Sie
09-18–23
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM
id091800534400
B+
TRUNK
COMPARTMENT
CARGO
LIGHT COMPARTMENT
LIGHT
4SD 5HB/3HB
OFF OFF
ON ON DOOR ON
OFF
ON ON
DOOR
DOOR LATCH SWITCH
BCM
INTERIOR INTERIOR LIGHT
LIGHT (WITHOUT
(WITH INTRUDER B+
INTRUDER SENSOR)
SENSOR)
STEERING LOCK UNIT
LIFTGATE
LATCH SWITCH
WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
TRUNK AND START SYSTEM
COMPARTMENT
LIGHT SWITCH
am2zzn0000142
End Of Sie
INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION
id091800526000
x The BCM changes the illumination condition and illumination level of the interior light (door position) according
to whether the doors are opened or closed.
Interior light
Conditions before operation Operation Set Cancel conditions
(All conditions met) conditions Illuminatio (Any conditions met)
illumination
n level
time
x Ignition switch at LOCK or ACC x Close all doors
position (IG OFF) Open any door (All door switches off)
Approx. 30
x All doors are closed (Any door switch 100 % x After set illumination time
min
(All door switches off) on)
passes*1
x Key is removed from steering lock x Turn ignition switch to ON
(Keyless switch off) position (IG ON)
x All doors are closed Unlock driver-side x Open any door
(All door switches off) door (Any door switch on)
x Driver-side door is locked (Door lock-link Approx. 30 s 100 % x Lock driver-side door
(Door lock-link switch at LOCK switch is (Door lock-link switch at LOCK
position) unlocked) position)
x After set illumination time
passes*1
x Key is inserted into steering lock x Turn ignition switch to ON
(Keyless switch on) position (IG ON)
x All doors are closed x Open any door
(All door switches off) Remove key from (Any door switch on)
steering lock x Lock driver-side door
Approx. 15 s 100 %
(Keyless switch (Door lock-link switch at LOCK
off) position)
passes*1
09-18–24
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
Interior light
Conditions before operation Operation Set Cancel conditions
(All conditions met) conditions Illuminatio (Any conditions met)
illumination
n level
time
x Ignition switch at LOCK or ACC x Turn ignition switch to ON
position (IG OFF) position (IG ON)
x Any door is open x Open any door
(Any door switch on) Close all doors (Any door switch on)
x Driver-side door is unlocked (All door switches Approx. 15 s 60 % x Lock driver-side door
(Door lock-link switch is unlocked) off) (Door lock-link switch at LOCK
position)
passes*1
*1
: When the interior light is turned off under the cancel conditions, it turns on again if any of the following
conditions are met.
x After closing all doors, any door is opened (All door switches off, then any door switch on)
x The ignition switch is turned to the ON position (IG ON)
DOOR LOCK LOCK

LINK SWITCH
UNLOCK
CLOSE
DOOR OPEN
KEYLESS ON
SWITCH OFF
ON
IG OFF
100%
INTERIOR 60%
LIGHT
0% t3 t3 t2 t3 t3 t3 t3 t3
t1 t2 t4
• •
100% 60%
t1• A
• PPROX. 30s
t2• A
• PPROX. 15s t3 t3
t3• A
• PPROX. 1s
t4• A
• PPROX. 30min VIEW • •
am2zzn0000108
End Of Sie
09-18–25
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
09-19 WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM

WIPER/WASHER OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–1 Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–15
WIPER/WASHER SPECIFICATION . . . . 09-19–1 AUTO WIPER SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . 09-19–15
WIPER/WASHER STRUCTURAL AUTO WIPER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–2 VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–16
WIPER/WASHER STRUCTURAL VIEW AUTO WIPER SYSTEM WIRING
[3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–4 DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–16
WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM AUTO WIPER SYSTEM OPERATION . . . 09-19–16
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–5 Intermittent Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17
WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM WIRING Low Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–6 High Speed Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE RAIN SENSOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–7 Rainfall Detection Function . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17
WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM Sensitivity Adjustment Function . . . . . . 09-19–17
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–7 Initial Setting Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17
Low-Speed Continuous Operation . . . . 09-19–7 On-board Diagnostic Function . . . . . . . 09-19–18
REAR WIPER SYSTEM WIRING Fail-safe Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–18
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–13 RAIN SENSOR CONSTRUCTION
REAR WIPER SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . 09-19–14 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–18
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–14 Operation With No Rainfall Contacting
REAR WIPER SYSTEM Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–19
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–14 Operation with Rainfall Contacting
Continuous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–14 Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–19
Auto-stop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–14
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
WIPER/WASHER OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: WIPER/WASHER SYSTEMS
id091900526200
x Auto wiper system adopted which enables fully automatic windshield wiper operation.
Improved convenience
(Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)
x Front wiper system with continuous (low/high), auto-stop, one-touch wiper, intermittent wiper,
and synchronized washer and wiper operation adopted.
x Rear wiper system with continuous, auto-stop, and intermittent operation, and washer
Improved marketability
adopted. (Except 4SD)
x Graphite-coated wiper blades for water-repellent glass adopted. (Vehicles with graphite-
coated wiper blade)
End Of Sie
WIPER/WASHER SPECIFICATION
id091900526400
x Washer tank capacity (reference): 2.5 L
End Of Sie
09-19–1
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
WIPER/WASHER STRUCTURAL VIEW
id091900526300
R.H.D.
WINDSHIELD WIPER
MOTOR
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM

AND BLADE
WINDSHIELD
WASHER NOZZLE
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE
WASHER TANK
WINDSHIELD
WASHER MOTOR
5HB
REAR WASHER HOSE

REAR WASHER NOZZLE
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REAR WIPER MOTOR
VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE
RAIN SENSOR RAIN SENSOR
WINDSHIELD
WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
am2zzn0000142
End Of Sie
09-19–2
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
WIPER/WASHER STRUCTURAL VIEW [3HB]

R.H.D.
WINDSHIELD WIPER
MOTOR
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM

AND BLADE
WINDSHIELD
WASHER NOZZLE
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE
WASHER TANK
WINDSHIELD
WASHER MOTOR
REAR WASHER HOSE

REAR WASHER NOZZLE
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REAR WIPER MOTOR
VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE
RAIN SENSOR RAIN SENSOR
WINDSHIELD
WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
am2zzn0000110
End Of Sie
WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM OUTLINE
id091900525600
x Equipped with continuous (low/high), auto-stop, one-touch wiper, intermittent wiper, and synchronized washer
and wiper operation.
End Of Sie
09-19–5
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id091900525800
VEHICLES WITHOUT AUTO LIGHT / WIPER SYSTEM IG2 TO

REAR WIPER SYSTEM
BCM
FRONT WIPER FRONT

LO RELAY WIPER HI
RELAY
FRONT REAR
WASHER WASHER
RELAY RELAY
LO TO
AUTO
REAR WIPER
STOP HI WASHER MOTOR SWITCH
SWITCH
WINDSHIELD WIPER
MOTOR
LO INT OFF WINDSHIELD

WASHER
TRANSISTOR
CPU 2 3 45 HI MIST
SWITCH
1 6
WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH
am2zzn0000110
09-19–6
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
VEHICLES WITH AUTO LIGHT / WIPER SYSTEM IG2

TO
REAR WIPER SYSTEM
BCM
FRONT WIPER FRONT

LO RELAY WIPER HI
RELAY
FRONT REAR
WASHER WASHER
RELAY RELAY
IG2
LO
AUTO TO
STOP HI REAR WIPER
WASHER MOTOR
SWITCH SWITCH
RAIN WINDSHIELD WIPER

SENSOR MOTOR
AUTO
WINDSHIELD
LO OFF
WASHER
TRANSISTOR
CPU 2 3 45 SWITCH
HI MIST
1 6
am2zzn0000120
End Of Sie
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE CONSTRUCTION
id091900526500
x A wiper blade construction for water repellent glass has been adopted.
x The wiper blades are coated with smooth graphite
to improve wiper performance and obtain long-
lasting water repellent effect. (Vehicles with
graphite-coating wiper brade)
End Of Sie
GRAPHITE -COATING
am2zzn0000060
WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM OPERATION

id091900525700
Low-Speed Continuous Operation
1. When the windshield wiper switch is turned to the LO position, current (1) flows to the front wiper low relay in
the BCM, turning on the front wiper low relay.
2. When the front wiper low relay turns on, current flows to the windshield wiper motor causing the windshield
wiper motor to operate at low speed.
09-19–7
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
3. When the windshield wiper switch is set to the OFF position, the wipers stop in the park position by the auto-
stop operation.
IG2 TO
REAR WIPER SYSTEM
(1)
FRONT WIPER FRONT

LO RELAY WIPER HI
RELAY
FRONT REAR
WASHER WASHER
RELAY RELAY
AUTO LO
TO
STOP HI WASHER MOTOR REAR WIPER
SWITCH
SWITCH
WINDSHIED WIPER
MOTOR
WINDSHIED
LO INT OFF
WASHER
TRANSISTOR SWITCH
CPU 2 3 45 HI MIST
1 6
BCM WINDSHIED WIPER SWITCH
am2zzn0000111
Hi-Speed Continuous Operation

1. When the windshield wiper switch is turned to the HI position, current (1) flows to the windshield wiper high
relay in the BCM, and current (2) flows to the front wiper low relay, which turns on the front wiper high relay and
the front wiper low relay.
2. When the windshield wiper relay turns on, current flows to the windshield wiper motor, which causes the
windshield wiper motor to operate at high speed.
09-19–8
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
3. When the windshield wiper switch is set to the OFF position, the wipers stop in the park position by the auto-
stop operation.
IG2 TO
REAR WIPER SYSTEM
(1) (2)
FRONT WIPER FRONT

LO RELAY WIPER HI
RELAY
FRONT REAR
WASHER WASHER
RELAY RELAY
AUTO LO HI
STOP TO
WASHER MOTOR REAR WIPER
SWITCH
SWITCH
WINDSHIED WIPER
MOTOR
LO OFF WINDSHIED
TRANSISTOR INT WASHER
CPU 2 3 45 HI MIST SWITCH
1 6
BCM WINDSHIED WIPER SWITCH
am2zzn0000111
09-19–9
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Auto-stop Operation
1. When the windshield wiper switch is set to the OFF position while the wipers are operating, current flows to the
auto-stop switch, which is on, and the windshield wiper motor operates until it returns to the park position,
stopping the wipers.
IG2 TO
REAR WIPER SYSTEM
BCM
FRONT WIPER FRONT

LO RELAY WIPER HI
RELAY
FRONT REAR
WASHER WASHER
RELAY RELAY
LO
AUTO TO
STOP HI WASHER MOTOR REAR WIPER
SWITCH SWITCH
WINDSHIED WIPER
MOTOR
LO INT OFF WINDSHIED

WASHER
TRANSISTOR
CPU 2 3 45 HI MIST
SWITCH
1 6
WINDSHIED WIPER SWITCH
am2zzn0000133
One-touch Wiper Operation

1. When the windshield wiper lever is pulled up, the one-touch switch is on and the current flows, causing the
windshield wiper motor to operate at low speed.
09-19–10
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
2. The windshield wipers operate at low speed while the windshield wiper lever is held up. When the windshield
wiper lever is released, the wipers stop in the park position by the auto-stop operation.
IG2 TO
REAR WIPER SYSTEM
BCM
FRONT
FRONT WIPER
LO RELAY
WIPER HI
RELAY
FRONT REAR
WASHER WASHER
RELAY RELAY
AUTO LO
STOP TO
HI WASHER MOTOR REAR WIPER
SWITCH
SWITCH
WINDSHIED WIPER
MOTOR
LO INT OFF
WINDSHIED
WASHER
TRANSISTOR SWITCH
CPU 2 3 45 HI MIST
1 6
am2zzn0000133
Intermittent Wiper Operation

1. When the windshield wiper switch is moved to the INT position, current flows from the control circuit in the BCM
to the transistor, and the windshield wiper motor operates at low speed.
2. When a pre-set time has passed, current from the control circuit is stopped. Accordingly, current flow to the
windshield wiper motor ceases, and the auto-stop operation causes the wipers to stop at the park position.
This sequence repeats causing the wipers to operate intermittently.
09-19–11
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
3. The wiper operation timing during intermittent operation can be set freely using the INT volume switch.
IG2 TO
REAR WIPER SYSTEM
BCM
FRONT WIPER FRONT

LO RELAY WIPER HI
RELAY
FRONT REAR
WASHER WASHER
RELAY RELAY
AUTO LO
STOP TO
HI WASHER MOTOR REAR WIPER
SWITCH
SWITCH
WINDSHIED WIPER
MOTOR

WASHER
TRANSISTOR SWITCH
CPU 2 3 45 HI MIST
1 6
am2zzn0000133
Synchronized Washer and Wiper Operation

1. When the windshield washer switch is turned on, current (1) flows to the washer relay (windshield) in the relay
block and the washer relay (windshield) turns on.
2. When the washer relay (windshield) turns on, the washer motor operates to spray washer fluid from the
windshield washer nozzle. At the same time, a washer motor operation signal is sent to the control circuit
causing the transistor to turn on. Accordingly, current (2) flows to the windshield wiper relay in the relay block
and the windshield wiper relay turns on.
09-19–12
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
3. When the windshield wiper relay turns on, the windshield wiper motor operates at low speed.
(1)
(2)
IG2
TO
REAR WIPER SYSTEM
BCM
FRONT WIPER FRONT

LO RELAY WIPER HI
RELAY
FRONT REAR
WASHER WASHER
RELAY RELAY
TO
AUTO LO
REAR WIPER
STOP
SWITCH
HI WASHER MOTOR SWITCH
WINDSHIED WIPER
MOTOR

WASHER
TRANSISTOR
CPU 2 3 45 HI MIST
SWITCH
1 6
am2zzn0000133
End Of Sie
REAR WIPER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id091900526100
End Of Sie IG2 REAR WIPER MOTOR
AUTO
STOP
SWITCH
REAR WASHER MOTOR
REAR
WASHER REAR WIPER
RELAY RELAY
CPU
BCM
ON REAR
OFF WASHER
SWITCH
REAR
WASHER
SWITCH
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
am2zzn0000060
09-19–13
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
REAR WIPER SYSTEM OUTLINE
id091900525900
Special Features
x Equipped with continuous, auto-stop, and washer functions.
End Of Sie
REAR WIPER SYSTEM OPERATION
id091900526000
Continuous Operation
1. When the rear wiper switch is turned to the ON position, current (1) flows to the rear wiper relay in the relay
block, turning it on.
2. When the rear wiper relay turns on, current (2) flows to the rear wiper motor and continuous operation starts.
3. When the rear wiper switch is turned to the OFF position while the rear wipers are operating, the rear wiper
motor performs an auto-stop operation and the wipers stop in the park position.
IG2 (1) REAR WIPER MOTOR
(2)
AUTO
STOP
REAR WASHER SWITCH
MOTOR
REAR
WASHER REAR WIPER
RELAY RELAY
CPU
BCM
ON
REAR
OFF WASHER
SWITCH
REAR
WASHER
SWITCH
am2zzn0000060
Auto-stop Operation
1. When the rear wiper switch is turned to the OFF position while the wipers are operating, current flows to the
auto-stop switch, which is on, and the rear wiper motor operates until it returns to the park position, stopping
the wipers.
09-19–14
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
IG2 REAR WIPER MOTOR
AUTO
STOP
REAR WASHER SWITCH
MOTOR
REAR WIPER
REAR
RELAY
WASHER
RELAY
CPU
BCM
ON
REAR
OFF WASHER
SWITCH
REAR
WASHER
SWITCH
am2zzn0000077
Washer Operation
x When the rear washer switch is pressed on, the rear washer relay turns on and the rear washer motor
operates.
End Of Sie
SOKYU_NG: AUTO WIPER SYSTEM
IG2 REAR WIPER MOTOR
AUTO
STOP
REAR WASHER SWITCH
MOTOR
REAR
WASHER REAR WIPER
RELAY RELAY
CPU
BCM
ON
REAR
OFF WASHER
SWITCH
REAR
WASHER
SWITCH
am2zzn0000081
AUTO WIPER SYSTEM OUTLINE

id091900526700
x An auto wiper system has been adopted that detects rainfall on the windshield and automatically controls all
operation (stop, interval, low, and high), relieving the driver from operating the switches.
End Of Sie
09-19–15
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
AUTO WIPER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id091900526800
LENS WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH
WINDSHELD
RAIN SENSOR
BCM
(BODY CONTROL MODULE)
am2zzn0000081
End Of Sie
AUTO WIPER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id091900526600
IG2
TO
REAR WIPER SYSTEM
BCM
FRONT WIPER FRONT

LO RELAY WIPER HI
RELAY
FRONT REAR
WASHER WASHER
RELAY RELAY
IG2
LO
AUTO TO
STOP HI REAR WIPER
WASHER MOTOR
SWITCH SWITCH

SENSOR MOTOR
AUTO
WINDSHIELD
LO OFF
WASHER
TRANSISTOR
CPU 2 3 45 SWITCH
HI MIST
1 6
am2zzn0000120
End Of Sie
AUTO WIPER SYSTEM OPERATION
id091900526900
1. When the wiper and washer switch is turned from the OFF to AUTO position, the windshield wiper operates
once at low speed and the rain sensor installed in the windshield detects the rainfall amount.
2. The detected rainfall amount is converted to an electronic signal and transmitted to the body control module
(BCM) as a windshield wiper operation control signal.
3. When the microcomputer in the BCM receives the control signal, current flows to the transistor and the
transistor is turned on.
4. When the transistor turns on, the windshield wiper relay turns on.
5. When the windshield wiper relay turns on, current flows to the windshield wiper motor and the wipers operate at
low speed.
09-19–16
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
IG2
TO
REAR WIPER SYSTEM
BCM
FRONT WIPER FRONT

LO RELAY WIPER HI
RELAY
FRONT REAR
WASHER WASHER
RELAY RELAY
IG2
LO
AUTO TO
STOP HI REAR WIPER
WASHER MOTOR
SWITCH SWITCH

SENSOR MOTOR
AUTO
WINDSHIELD
LO OFF
WASHER
TRANSISTOR
CPU 2 3 45 SWITCH
HI MIST
1 6
am2zzn0000120
Intermittent Operation
x If the rain sensor detects a specified amount of rainfall while the windshield wipers are stopped, the wipers
operate at low speed. The interval timing is adjusted according to the amount of rainfall detected.
Low Speed Operation

x If the rain sensor detects an amount of rainfall specific to wiper operation greater than low speed, but less than
high speed while the windshield wipers are operating intermittently, the wipers operate continuously at low
speed.
High Speed Operation

x If the rain sensor detects an amount of rainfall specific to high speed operation or greater while the windshield
wipers are operating at low speed or stopped, the wipers operate two times at high speed. If the rain sensor
receives a signal for high speed operation after the wipers operate two times at high speed, the high speed
operation is continued.
End Of Sie
RAIN SENSOR FUNCTION
id091900527000
Rainfall Detection Function
x The LED in the rain sensor emits infrared light which is reflected off the windshield via the lens and then
received by the photodiode in the rain sensor. If the rate of reflected infrared light is reduced, it is determined
that rain is contacting the windshield, and the intensity of the rainfall is calculated from the amount of reflection
rate reduction.
Sensitivity Adjustment Function

x By changing the sensitivity adjustment volume installed on the wiper and washer switch, the sensitivity of the
rain sensor can be freely adjusted.
Initial Setting Function

x When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position after replacing the rain sensor with a new one, the
initialization is stored after verifying the windshield condition.
09-19–17
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Note
x The rain sensor re-initialization can be performed optionally using the specified procedure.
— For the re-initialization method, refer to the Workshop Manual.

x If there is malfunction in the rain sensor, the rain sensor sends an error signal to the BCM and a DTC from the
BCM is detected.
x If there is a communication error between the rain sensor and BCM, the rain sensor sends an error signal to the
BCM and a DTC is output from the BCM.
Fail-safe Function
x If the rain sensor detects rainfall and then detects no change in the detected amount after the wipers have been
operated two times, the windshield is determined to be dirty and windshield wiper operation is stopped.
— If the windshield is dirty, set the wiper and washer switch to position 1 or 2 to operate the windshield wiper.
Or, remove the dirt from the windshield, then operate the auto wiper.
x When the temperature sensor inside the rain sensor detects approx. -10qC{ 14qF} or less when the vehicle
speed is 0 km/h{0 mph}, the windshield wipers do not operate.
End Of Sie
RAIN SENSOR CONSTRUCTION OPERATION
id091900527100
Warning
x The windshield wipers could operate automatically if servicing such as vehicle washing is
performed with the ignition switch in the ON position and the wiper and washer switch in the
AUTO position. Always turn the ignition switch, and the wiper and washer switch off before doing
servicing such as vehicle washing. Otherwise a pinched hand or fingers could result in injury, or
the wiper system could malfunction.
Caution
x In the following cases, the rain sensor cannot detect the rainfall amount correctly, which could
result in a windshield wiper malfunction.
— A sticker or label is adhered to the windshield above the rain sensor.
— The windshield is dirty above the rain sensor.
x The rain sensor is installed to the lens in the center of windshield on the upper side.
LENS
RAIN SENSOR
am2zzn0000112
x The rain sensor is integrated with the auto-light sensor.
09-19–18
TO MODEL INDEX
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
RAIN SENSOR
DITECTION AREA
RAIN SENSOR
(AUTO LIGHT SENSOR)
RAIN SENSOR
DITECTION AREA
AUTO LIGHT DITECTION AREA
am2zzn0000061
Operation With No Rainfall Contacting Windshield

1. Infrared light is emitted from the LED in the rain sensor towards the windshield.
2. The emitted infrared light passes through the lens and is reflected off the windshield.
3. The infrared light reflected off the windshield is received by the photodiode in the lens.
4. The photodiode receives the light, the microcomputer in the rain sensor calculates the rainfall amount from the
reflection rate, converts this to an electric signal and sends a windshield wiper control signal to the body control
module (BCM).
INFRARED LIGHT WINDSHIELD
EMITTED RECEIVEED
LIGHT LIGHT RAIN
SENSOR
LED LENS PHOTODIODE
am2zzn0000081
Operation with Rainfall Contacting Windshield

1. Infrared light is emitted from the LED in the rain sensor towards the windshield.
2. Emitted infrared light passing through the lens is received by the windshield and transmitted to the rainfall
contacting the windshield.
3. The infrared light that is not diffused is reflected by the windshield and received by the photodiode in the lens
sensor.
4. The photodiode receives the light, the microcomputer in the rain sensor calculates the rainfall amount from the
reflection rate, converts this to an electric signal and sends a windshield wiper control signal to the BCM.
End Of Sie INFRARED RAINFALL DIFFUSION WINDSHIELD
LIGHT
EMITTED RECEIVED
LIGHT LIGHT
RAIN
SENSOR
LED LENS PHOTODIODE
am2zzn0000081
09-19–19
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
09-20 ENTERTAINMENT
ENTERTAINMENT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . 09-20–1 On-board Diagnostic Function . . . . . . . 09-20–7
AUDIO SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–1 Diagnostic Assist Function . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–8
AUDIO SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS . . . . 09-20–2 SPEAKER CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–9
AUDIO SYSTEM STRUCTURAL 6-speaker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–9
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–2 4-speaker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–9
AUDIO SYSTEM BLOCK 2-speaker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–10
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–3 TWEETER CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . 09-20–10
CENTER PANEL UNIT OUTLINE . . . . . . 09-20–3 ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . 09-20–10
CENTER PANEL UNIT Center Roof Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–10
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–3 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
Structural View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–3 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–11
Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–4 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
Switch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–5 STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–11
AUDIO UNIT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–5 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
AUDIO UNIT CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . 09-20–5 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–11
AUTO LEVEL CONTROL (ALC) Function of Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–11
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–6 AUXILIARY JACK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . 09-20–12
AUTO LEVEL CONTROL (ALC) AUXILIARY JACK
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–6 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 09-20–12
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM Except Auto Alliance Thailand (AAT)
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–6 Manufactured Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–12
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM Auto Alliance Thailand (AAT)
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–7 Manufactured Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–13
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
ENTERTAINMENT OUTLINE
NG: AUDIO
id092000100100
Improved marketability x A center panel has been adopted with the audio switches, LCD, and the audio unit integrated
Improved convenience x Retractable center roof antenna with removable antenna rod adopted
x Audio control switches on the left spoke of the steering wheel have been adopted
x Auxiliary jack adopted which can connect to commercially available portable audio, and output
sound from speakers via audio unit
End Of Sie
AUDIO SYSTEM OUTLINE
id092000111000
x A center panel unit with the audio unit installed, and the following equipment built into the center panel has
been adopted.
— Audio switch
— LCD
x Two types of audio units, TYPE A (AM/FM tuner/MP3 applicable CD player-integrated) and TYPE B (AM/FM
tuner/MP3 applicable CD changer-integrated), are provided.
x ALC (auto level control) function has been adopted.
x All alphabetic character information related to the audio system is displayed on the LCD in the center panel.
x Three types of speakers have been provided as follows:
6-speaker type
— Front door speaker
— Rear door speaker (5HB)/rear speaker (3HB)
— Tweeter
4-speaker type
— Rear door speaker (5HB/4SD)/rear speaker (3HB)
2-speaker type
x A retractable center roof antenna with a removable antenna rod has been adopted.
x Audio control switches on the left spoke of the steering wheel have been adopted.
x Auxiliary jack has been adopted which can connect to commercially-available portable audio, and output sound
from the speakers via the audio unit.
End Of Sie
09-20–1
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
AUDIO SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
id092000100400
Audio unit
Item Specification
Rated voltage (V) 12
LW 153—279
AM (kHz) 531—1602 (European (L.H.D. U.K.) specs.)
Frequency
MW 530—1620 (With AM frequency pitch: 5KHz pitch)
range
522—1629 (With AM frequency pitch: 9KHz pitch)
FM (MHz) 87.5—108
Amplifier maximum output (W) 25 u 4
Output impedance (ohm) 3.4—4.6
Speaker
Specification
Item Front door Rear door speaker Rear speaker
Tweeter
speaker (5HB/4SD) (3HB)
Instantaneous
(W) 25
maximum input
Impedance (ohm) 3.4—4.6
Minimum resonance
(Hz) 75 —
frequency
Output sound pressure
(dB) 88 79
level
Size (cm {in}) 16.5 {6.5} 3 {1}
End Of Sie
AUDIO SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id092000100200
AUDIO CONTROL
CENTER TWEETER SWITCH
ROOF
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
FEEDER NO.2
3HB
ANTENNA
FEEDER NO.1
CENTER PANEL
UNIT
AUXILIARY JACK
REAR DOOR SPEAKER FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKER
am2zzn0000103
End Of Sie
09-20–2
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
AUDIO SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
id092000100300
CENTER ROOF ANTENNA
6-SPEAKER TYPE
TWEETER (RH)
AUDIO CONTROL FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (RH)

SWITCH
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (LH)

AUXILIARY JACK
TWEETER (LH)
AUDIO UNIT
BCM 6-SPEAKER TYPE
TNS SIGNAL REAR DOOR SPEAKER (5HB/4SD) (RH)/

REAR SPEAKER (3HB) (RH)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER REAR DOOR SPEAKER (5HB/4SD) (LH)/
VEHICLE SPEED REAR SPEAKER (3HB) (LH)
SIGNAL
AUDIO SWITCH
LCD
CENTER PANEL UNIT
am2zzn0000140
End Of Sie
CENTER PANEL UNIT OUTLINE
NG: AUDIO UNIT
id092000101400
x The center panel unit, which integrates the audio unit and switches on the center panel, has been adopted to
realize a design with a sense of unity.
End Of Sie
CENTER PANEL UNIT CONSTRUCTION
id092000101500
x A center panel unit has been adopted with the audio unit installed, and the audio switch and LCD built into the
center panel.
Structural View
AUDIO SWITCH
AUDIO
SWITCH
AUDIO UNIT
CENTER PANEL
LCD
AUDIO AUDIO SWITCH
SWITCH
am2zzn0000110
09-20–3
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
Input/Output Signals
Audio Unit
Terminal Signal
1A Front door speaker LH (+)
1B B+
1C Front door speaker LH (–)
1D Front door speaker RH (+)
1E TNS (+)
1F Front door speaker RH (–)
1G ILLMI (–)
1H
1I Vehicle speed signal
1J
1K
1L
1X 1V 1U 1S 1F 1D 1C 1A 1M
1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1N Audio control switch 1
1W 1T
1R 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E
1B 1O
1P Audio control switch 2
1Q
1R ACC
Rear door speaker (5HB/4SD)/rear speaker (3HB) LH
1S
(+)
1T
Rear door speaker (5HB/4SD)/rear speaker (3HB) LH (-
1U
)
Rear door speaker (5HB/4SD)/rear speaker (3HB) RH
1V
(+)
1W Power ground
Rear door speaker (5HB/4SD)/rear speaker (3HB) RH
1X
(-)
2A Power ground
2B
2C Audio input RH (+)
2D Audio input RH (-)*1
2E Audio input LH (+)
2F Audio input LH (-)*1
2G Signal ground*2
2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 2H
2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 2I
2J
2K
2L
2M AUX control
2N
2O
2P
*1
: With auxiliary jack type B
*2
: With auxiliary jack type A
09-20–4
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
Switch Location
1 2
3 4 5 12 13 14
6 7 8 15 16 17
9 10 11
am2zzn0000109
.
Without RDS (radio With RDS (radio data Without RDS (radio With RDS (radio data
No. No.
data system) system) data system) system)
1 LOAD switch 11 AUTO-M switch
2 EJECT switch 12 Preset switch 1
3 SEEK switch (+) 13 Preset switch 2
4 FM/AM switch 14 Preset switch 3/Disk up switch (with MP3 applicable
5 TEXT switch TA switch CD changer)
6 SEEK switch (-) 15 Preset switch 4
7 CD/AUX switch 16 Preset switch 5 Preset switch 5/TEXT
switch
8 CLOCK switch
17 Preset switch 6/Disk down switch (with MP3
9 MENU switch applicable CD changer)
10 POWER/VOLUME switch
End Of Sie
AUDIO UNIT OUTLINE
id092000108700
x Two types of units have been adopted, one integrated with AM/FM tuner/MP3 applicable CD player and the
other integrated with AM/FM tuner/MP3 applicable CD changer.
x A self-diagnostic function has been adopted.
x A diagnostic assist function has been adopted.
End Of Sie
AUDIO UNIT CONSTRUCTION
id092000108900
TYPE A
x Integrated with AM/FM tuner/MP3 applicable CD player.
TYPE B
x Integrated with AM/FM tuner/MP3 applicable CD changer.
09-20–5
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
Structural view
TYPE A TYPE B
AUDIO UNIT AUDIO UNIT

(AM/FM TUNER/MP3 APPLICABLE CD PLAYER) (AM/FM TUNER/MP3 APPLICABLE CD CHANGER)
am2zzn0000110
End Of Sie
AUTO LEVEL CONTROL (ALC) FUNCTION
id092000106900
x Adjusts the audio volume so that the sound is balanced against wind and road noise while driving.
End Of Sie
AUTO LEVEL CONTROL (ALC) OPERATION
id092000106800
x The audio unit changes the volume automatically based on the vehicle speed signal sent from the instrument
cluster.
HIGHER VEHICLE SPEED
AUDIO UNIT
SPEAKER
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ALC POWER HIGHER VOLUME

CIRCUIT AMPLIFIER
LOWER VEHICLE SPEED
AUDIO UNIT
SPEAKER
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ALC POWER NORMAL VOLUME

CIRCUIT AMPLIFIER
am2zzn0000110
x The ALC function is divided into four modes that can be used effectively to match the driving conditions.
Mode Condition
ALC function cancelled
Outside road noise low
Outside road noise slightly high
Outside road noise high
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OUTLINE
id092000101700
x The audio unit has an on-board diagnostic function and diagnostic assist function to facilitate system diagnosis.
End Of Sie
09-20–6
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
id092000101800
x Detects malfunctions in the audio unit.
Memory function
x Converts a malfunction detected by the malfunction detection function to a DTC and stores it. Up to three DTCs
can be stored. If a malfunction is detected with three DTCs already stored, the oldest DTC is cleared and the
new DTC is stored.
x The stored DTCs are not cleared even if the ignition switch is turned to the lock position or the negative battery
cable is disconnected. For clearing the stored malfunction contents, refer to the Workshop Manual. (See
MEMORY CLEARING PROCEDURE.)
Display function
x When the on-board diagnostic function is activated, DTCs stored by the memory function are displayed on the
LCD screen. The DTCs consist of the following:
— Device code (malfunction location)
— Error code (malfunction contents)
— Supplier code (supplier name)
x For the display method, refer to the Workshop Manual. (See STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE.)
Device
Device name
code ERROR CODE
09 Audio unit
10 MP3 applicable CD player
21 Center panel
22 MP3 applicable CD changer
Error code Malfunction contents

01 Mechanical malfunction SUPPLIER CODE DEVICE CODE
02 Servo malfunction
07 Disc reading error am2zzn0000022
10 BUS line (communication line) error

17 Incompatible destination
18 Unsupported cover
19 Communication error between panels
20 Improper power supply voltage
21 Amplifier related circuit
22 Tuner error
Supplier
Supplier name
code
01 SANYO Automedia
02 Panasonic
03 Clarion
04 Pioneer
Screen display
DTC System malfunction location
Error message
(When starting on-board
(When error is found)
diagnostic function)
09:Er20 Power supply circuit to audio unit
09:Er21 Audio unit (peripheral circuit for power amplifier)
09:Er22 Audio unit (peripheral circuit for tuner)
10:Er01 MP3 applicable CD player system
10:Er02 CHECK CD MP3 applicable CD player system
10:Er07 CHECK CD MP3 applicable CD player system
10:Er10 MP3 applicable CD player system
21:Er17 Center panel
09-20–7
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
Screen display
DTC System malfunction location
Error message
(When starting on-board
(When error is found)
diagnostic function)
22:Er01 MP3 applicable CD changer system
22:Er02 CHECK CD MP3 applicable CD changer system
22:Er07 CHECK CD MP3 applicable CD changer system
22:Er10 MP3 applicable CD changer system
no Err No DTC is stored
Diagnostic Assist Function

x Displays the operation condition of the following functions (parts) on the LCD or forces the operation to
examine the functions (parts).
x For start-up methods of each mode, refer to the Workshop Manual. (See DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION.)
LCD display
x Illuminates all the characters on the LCD and
checks if they are not truncated or faint.
DISC IN ST AF PTY RPT RDM TA TP AUTO-M
am2zzn0000022
Switch
x Activates a buzzer sound when a switch is
operated and examines each of the switches.
adejjn00000436
Speaker
x Verifies that the speakers output sound in the following order and examines the speakers and wiring harness
between the audio unit and speaker.
1. Front door speaker (LH) and tweeter (LH)
2. Front door speaker (RH) and tweeter (RH)
3. Rear door speaker (5HB/4SD) (RH)/rear speaker (RH) (3HB)
4. Rear door speaker (5HB/4SD) (LH)/rear speaker (LH) (3HB)
09-20–8
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
Radio
x Displays the radio reception status on the LCD
and examines the center roof antenna, antenna
feeder, and audio unit (tuner). (Display example
when receiving AM 522kHz)
0 9
am2zzn0000022
Center panel
x Displays the destination code of the center panel
on the LCD and examines the destination of the
center panel.
End Of Sie
NG: SPEAKER
PANEL ID DESTINATION CODE
am2zzn0000022
SPEAKER CONSTRUCTION
id092000107900
6-speaker Type
5HB
x The speakers are located inside the front and rear door trims. The tweeter is located inside the inner garnish.
3HB
x The speakers are located inside the front door trim and trunk side trim. The tweeter is located inside the inner
garnish.
3HB
TWEETER

REAR SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER
am2zzn0000103
4-speaker Type
5HB/4SD
x The speakers are located inside the front and rear door trims.
3HB
x The speakers are located inside the front door trim and trunk side trim.
09-20–9
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
3HB

REAR SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER
am2zzn0000103
2-speaker Type
5HB
x The speakers are located inside the front door trim. A hole cover is attached to the rear door trim.
3HB
x The speakers are located inside the front door trim.
HOLE COVER FRONT DOOR

SPEAKER
am2zzn0000103
End Of Sie
TWEETER CONSTRUCTION
NG: TWEETER
id092000103500
x Tweeters (speaker for the upper register sound
range) have been set inside the left/right inner
garnish to achieve a better sound effect.
End Of Sie
NG: ANTENNA
TWEETER
am2zzn0000015
ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION
id092000103200
Center Roof Antenna
x Installed to the center of the vehicle front.
x The antenna rod can be removed to prevent damage to the antenna when parking the vehicle in a covered
parking area or using an automatic car wash.
x The tilt angle of the antenna rod can be adjusted in the up/down direction to protect the antenna from
deformation by touching the cargo.
x Radio waves received from the center roof antenna are sent to the audio unit.
09-20–10
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
ANTENNA ROD
am2zzn0000103
End Of Sie
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH OUTLINE
NG: AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
id092000100500
x The audio control switches are located inside the left spoke of the steering wheel to make it possible to operate
the audio without changing the driving posture.
End Of Sie
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH STRUCTURE
id092000106700
x Located on the left spoke of the steering wheel.
x The audio control switches consist of a volume adjustment switch, automatic band selector switch, MODE
switch, INFO switch, and mute switch.
Structural view
End Of Sie
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
am2zzn0000016
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION

id092000106600
Function of Switch
.
1 2
4 5 6
am2zzn0000016
09-20–11
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
No. Name Function
1 Automatic band selector Searches for radio stations automatically
switch (-)
Cue switch (-) Searches for a track
2 Volume adjustment switch Audio volume adjustment
3 Automatic band selector Searches for radio stations automatically
switch (+)
Cue switch (+) Searches for a track
4 MODE switch Switches the audio mode
(FM1oFM2oAMoCDoAUXoOFF)
5 INFO switch (See 09-22-23 DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM OPERATION.)
6 Mute switch Mute audio
End Of Sie
AUXILIARY JACK FUNCTION
NG: AUDIO UNIT
id092000107400
x Connects commercially-available portable audio, and outputs the sound from the speaker via the audio unit.
End Of Sie
AUXILIARY JACK CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id092000110000
Except Auto Alliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles
x Auxiliary jack is installed to the console.
x External input jack is equipped on the upper part
of the auxiliary jack.
AUXILIARY JACK
TYPE A TYPE B
WITHOUT WHITE WITH WHITE
am2zzn0000140
09-20–12
TO MODEL INDEX
ENTERTAINMENT
Type A
Terminal Signal name
A -
B -
C External sound input (LH)
F E D C * * D Audio ground
E External sound input (RH)
F AUX detect
Type B
A -
B AUX detect 2
F E D C B * D Audio ground
F AUX detect 1
Auto Alliance Thailand (AAT) Manufactured Vehicles

x Auxiliary jack is installed to the console.
x External input jack is equipped on the upper part
of the auxiliary jack.
AUXILIARY JACK
am2zzn0000140

A -
B AUX detect 2
F E D C B * D Audio ground
F AUX detect 1
End Of Sie
09-20–13
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER SYSTEMS
09-21 POWER SYSTEMS

POWER SYSTEMS OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . 09-21–1 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–5
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–1 Structural View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–6
Structural View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–2 RELAY AND FUSE BLOCK
POWER SYSTEMS OUTLINE CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–7
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, FUSE BLOCK CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . 09-21–7
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–5
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER SYSTEMS
POWER SYSTEMS OUTLINE
SOKYU_NG: POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
id092100528600
Special Features
x Cartridge-type adopted for relay
Improved durability
x Blade-type and cartridge-type adopted for fuse
09-21–1
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER SYSTEMS
Structural View
Except Hong Kong specs.
RELAY AND FUSE
MAIN FUSE BLOCK
COOLING FAN
A/C RELAY No.1
BLOWER RELAY
RELAY HORN
RELAY FUEL PUMP RELAY
STERTER
RELAY REAR FOG LIGHT
RELAY
HEADLIGHT
RELAY (LO)
FRONT FOG LIGHT
RELAY HEADLIGHT
RELAY (HI)
FRONT COOLING FAN MAIN RELAY

RELAY No.2
L.H.D.
FUSE BLOCK IGNITION SWITCH
KEY REMINDER SWITCH

R.H.D. (WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM)
IGNITION SWITCH
FUSE BLOCK
KEY REMINDER SWITCH

(WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM)
am2zzn0000130
09-21–2
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER SYSTEMS
Hong Kong specs.
RELAY AND FUSE

MAIN FUSE BLOCK
A/C COOLING FAN

RELAY RELAY No.1 BLOWER
HORN RELAY
STERTER RELAY
RELAY
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
COOLING FAN
RELAY No.2
FRONT FOG
HEADLIGHT
LIGHT RELAY
RELAY (LO)
HEADLIGHT
RELAY (HI)
FRONT
MAIN
RELAY
KEY REMINDER SWITCH

AND START SYSTEM)
am2zzn0000130
09-21–3
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER SYSTEMS
RELAY AND FUSE
MAIN FUSE BLOCK
COOLING FAN
RELAY No.1 THEFT-DETERRENT
A/C RELAY HORN RELAY
HORN
RELAY FUEL PUMP
STERTER RELAY
RELAY
COOLING FAN
FRONT FOG RELAY No.2
LIGHT RELAY
HEADLIGHT
RELAY (LO)
BLOWER
RELAY HEADLIGHT
RELAY (HI)
MAIN
FRONT REAR FOG RELAY
LIGHT RELAY
L.H.D.
KEY REMINDER SWITCH

R.H.D. (WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM)
IGNITION SWITCH
FUSE BLOCK
KEY REMINDER SWITCH

AND START SYSTEM)
am2zzn0000130
End Of Sie
09-21–4
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER SYSTEMS
POWER SYSTEMS OUTLINE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]
id0921005286a3
Special Features
x Cartridge-type adopted for relay
Improved durability
x Blade-type and cartridge-type adopted for fuse
09-21–5
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER SYSTEMS
Structural View
RELAY AND FUSE COOLING FAN

MAIN FUSE BLOCK RELAY No.1
BLOWER RELAY
A/C RELAY
HORN FUEL WARMER
RELAY RELAY
STARTER
RELAY REAR FOG
LIGHT RELAY
FRONT FOG
LIGHT RELAY HEADLIGHT
RELAY (LO)
COOLING FAN
RELAY No.3 HEADLIGHT
RELAY (HI)
FRONT GLOW PLUG MAIN
RELAY RELAY

RELAY No.2 RELAY No.1
RELAY BOX (WITH PTC HEATER)
FRONT
L.H.D.
STEERING LOCK UNIT KEY REMINDER SWITCH

(WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS (WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM) AND START SYSTEM)
R.H.D.
STEERING LOCK UNIT KEY REMINDER SWITCH

(WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS (WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM) AND START SYSTEM)
am2zzn0000102
09-21–6
TO MODEL INDEX
POWER SYSTEMS
End Of Sie
RELAY AND FUSE BLOCK CONSTRUCTION
SOKYU_NG: MAIN FUSE
id092100555500
End Of Sie RELAY AND FUSE BLOCK
am2zzn0000045
FUSE BLOCK CONSTRUCTION

id092100528400
End Of Sie
FUSE
BLOCK
am2zzn0000045
09-21–7
TO MODEL INDEX
INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO.
09-22 INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OUTLINE. . . . 09-22–2 FUEL GAUGE CONTROL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 09-22–17
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–2 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–17
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SYSTEM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–17
WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–4 LOW ENGINE COOLANT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SYSTEM TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/
WIRING DIAGRAM [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, HIGH ENGINE COOLANT
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–6 TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER STRUCTURAL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–18
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–8 LOW ENGINE COOLANT
Meters And Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–8 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/
Warning And Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . 09-22–8 HIGH ENGINE COOLANT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER STRUCTURAL TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT
VIEW [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 09-22–18
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–11 LOW ENGINE COOLANT
Meters And Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–11 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/
Warning And Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . 09-22–11 HIGH ENGINE COOLANT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–13 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER WARNING [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo,
ALARM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–13 MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–18
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER WARNING ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC OUTLINE . . . 09-22–19
ALARM CONSTRUCTION/ ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–14 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–19
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–14 Malfunction Detection Function. . . . . . . 09-22–19
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–14 Odometer-data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–20
KEY REMINDER WARNING ALARM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–14 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo,
KEY REMINDER WARNING ALARM MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–20
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 09-22–14 Malfunction Detection Function. . . . . . . 09-22–20
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–14 Odometer-data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–21
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15 HORN CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–21
SEAT BELT WARNING ALARM PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15 INDICATOR OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–21
SEAT BELT WARNING ALARM PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 09-22–15 INDICATOR CONSTRUCTION/
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–22
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–22
TURN AND HAZARD INDICATOR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–22
ALARM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15 DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM
TURN AND HAZARD INDICATOR OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–22
ALARM CONSTRUCTION/ DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–16 WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–23
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–16 DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–16 STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–23
SPEEDOMETER CONTROL DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–16 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–23
SPEEDOMETER CONTROL Drive Information System Switch . . . . . 09-22–23
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 09-22–16 Drive Information System Display . . . . . 09-22–23
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–16 DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–16 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–24
TACHOMETER CONTROL Instant Update Fuel Economy Mode . . . 09-22–24
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–16 Average Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . 09-22–24
TACHOMETER CONTROL Remaining Possible Travel
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 09-22–17 Distance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–24
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–17 Average Vehicle Speed Mode . . . . . . . . 09-22–25
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–17 Ambient temperature display. . . . . . . . . 09-22–25
FUEL GAUGE CONTROL OUTLINE . . . 09-22–17 Vehicle speed alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–25
End of Toc
SOKYU_NG: INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO
09-22–1
TO MODEL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OUTLINE
id092200528900
Improved visibility x LCD odometer/tripmeter adopted

Improved reliability x Stepping motor adopted for speedometer and tachometer
Improved serviceability x CAN system adopted for communication between units
x On-board diagnostic system adopted for instrument cluster
x An automatic configuration function (With DSC)
Improved marketability x Trumpet type horn with spiral resonance tube adopted
End Of Sie
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SPECIFICATIONS
id092200532600
Item Specification
Meter type Stepping motor type
Input signal communication
Speedometer CAN system
system
Input signal source PCM
Meter type Stepping motor type
Tachometer CAN system
system
Meter type Digital type
Fuel gauge Non-multi-communication system
system
Input signal source Fuel gauge sender unit
Refer to 09-22-18 LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR LIGHT/HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION, 09-22-18
Low engine coolant Operation LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/
temperature indicator light/ HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT
High engine coolant CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD
temperature warning light 1.6 (Y6)]
CAN system
system
Display LCD
Indication digits Odometer: 6 digits, Tripmeter: 4 digits
Minimum display
(km) Odometer: 1, Tripmeter: 0.1
Odometer/tripmeter unit
CAN system
system
09-22–2
TO MODEL INDEX
Item Specification
Sound frequency (Hz) 1,500—1,900
Output sound pressure (dB) 55.0—87.0
Sound frequency (Hz) 1,500
Lights-on CONTINUOUS
reminder ON
warning alarm Sound cycle
OFF
Key reminder ON t 1 : approx. 0.22 s
warning alarm Sound cycle OFF t 2 : approx. 0.33 s
t 1
t 2 t 3 t 3 : approx. 1.25 s

TYPE A
t3
t1
ON t 1 : approx. 0.05 s
t 2 : approx. 1 s
t 3 : approx. 30—32 s
OFF
t2
Seat belt
warning alarm Sound cycle TYPE B
t5 t7
t6 t 1 : approx. 90—96 s
t4
Warning t 2 : approx. 62 s
ON
alarm t 3 : approx. 31 s
OFF t 4 : approx. 0.5 s
t 5 : approx. 1 s
t2 t3 t 6 : approx. 0.25 s
t1 t 7 : approx. 0.5 s

Advanced t 3
keyless entry ON t 1 : approx. 0.22 s
and start Sound cycle t 2 : approx. 0.33 s
warning alarm OFF t 3 : approx. 1.25 s
t 1
t 2
t 1
Air bag warning t 1 : approx. 2,100 s
ON
alarm Sound cycle t 2 : approx. 5 s
OFF t 3 : approx. 55 s
t 2 t 3
t1
120 km/h ON
t1: approx. 0.5 s
warning alarm Sound cycle t2: approx. 1.0 s
OFF t2
t3: approx. 5.0 s
t3
Output sound
Turn and (dB) 52.0—62.0
Indicator pressure
hazard
alarm Type A: 1,700—1,800
indicator alarm Sound frequency (Hz)
Type B: 1,300—1,400
End Of Sie
09-22–3
TO MODEL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id092200528800
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
B+
2D 2Q COIL
CAN RELATED
MODULE ANTENNA
2B 2M
VEHICLE SPEED
2O ODOMETER/TRIPMETER
SIGNAL OUTPUT
SELECTOR LEVER
AMBIENT ATX/CVT
2H POSITION INDICATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 2F FUEL GAUGE
TNS
2K
CLIMATE MICRO-
2I
CONTROL COMPUTER
UNIT
FUEL GAUGE
SENDER UNIT
BZ
2R
B+
2T
TRIPMETER SWITCH 2U
2A IG1
2S
WITH PANEL LIGHT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL SWITCH CONTROL SWITCH
INFO
PASSENGER SEAT BELT 2V WITH DIS
2X SWITCH
REMINDER INDICATOR
WITH GENERATOR
PASSENGER WARNING LIGHT
SEAT BELT
REMINDER MIL
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT
WARNING LIGHT
HIGH-BEAM
INDICATOR LIGHT
AIR BAG SYSTEM

WARNING LIGHT
WITH FRONT FRONT FOG LIGHT

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR LIGHT
EPS WARNING LIGHT
SECURITY LIGHT WITH IMMOBILIZER

WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM SYSTEM
THEFT-DETERRENT
CONTROL MODULE 2P
b c
a
: TO MICROCOMPUTER
am2zzn0000132
09-22–4
TO MODEL INDEX
a b c
OIL PRESSURE
WARNING LIGHT
ABS WARNING LIGHT
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT
CRUISE SET
WITH CRUSE INDICATOR LIGHT
CONTROL CRUISE MAIN
SYSTEM INDICATOR LIGHT
HOLD INDICATOR
ATX LIGHT
AT WARNING
LIGHT
CVT
SS MODE
INDICATOR LIGHT
DSC INDICATOR
LIGHT
DSC OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT
120 km/h WARNING

LIGHT
WITH REAR
REAR FOG LIGHT
FOG LIGHT
INDICATOR LIGHT
ATX/CVT
SELECTOR
INDICATOR LIGHT
P
R
N
SELECTOR
INDICATOR D
DRIVE
CIRCUIT
S
L
LOW ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR LIGHT
HIGH ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT
TURN INDICATOR
LIGHT (LH)
TURN INDICATOR
LIGHT (RH)
DOOR AJAR
WARNING LIGHT
KEYLESS
WITH ADVANCED WARNING LIGHT
KEYLESS AND
START SYSTEM KEYLESS
INDICATOR LIGHT
: TO MICROCOMPUTER
am2zzn0000131
End Of Sie
09-22–5
TO MODEL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]
id0922005288j5
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ILLUMINATION

PTC
A/C SWITCH HEATER
PTC HEATER
TACHO RELAY No.2
1C METER SPEEDO
METER
1E
CAN RELATED 2D
PTC REQUEST
MODULE 1A
SWITCH 2B
PTC HEATER
1I ODOMETER/
TRIPMETER RELAY No.1
VEHICLE SPEED
2O FUEL
SIGNAL OUTPUT
GAUGE
AMBIENT 2H
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 2F
TNS 2L
2K
IG2
2N
MICRO-
CLIMATE COMPUTER
EVAPORATIVE 2I
CONTROL
TEMPERATURE UNIT
SENSOR
FUEL GAUGE BZ
SENDER UNIT
B+
2R
2U
2T
TRIPMETER IG1
SWITCH
2A 2S
WITH PANEL 2Q
LIGHT PANEL LIGHT COIL
CONTROL CONTROL 2M ANTENNA
WITH SWITCH SWITCH
PASSENGER
SEAT BELT PASSENGER SEAT BELT INFO
2X 2V WITH DIS
REMINDER REMINDER INDICATOR SWITCH
INDICATOR GLOW INDICATOR
LIGHT
GENERATOR
WARNING LIGHT
MIL
SEAT BELT
WARNING LIGHT
HIGH-BEAM
INDICATOR LIGHT
AIR BAG SYSTEM

WARNING LIGHT
WITH FRONT FRONT FOG

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR LIGHT
EPS WARNING LIGHT
WITH THEFT- SECURITY LIGHT WITH IMMOBILIZER

DETERRENT SYSTEM SYSTEM
THEFT-DETERRENT 2P
CONTROL MODULE
b c
a
: TO MICROCOMPUTER
am2zzn0000132
09-22–6
TO MODEL INDEX
a b c
POWERTRAIN
WARNING LIGHT
OIL PRESSURE
WARNING LIGHT
ABS WARNING LIGHT
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT
REAR FOG
WITH REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR LIGHT
ACCEL PEDAL VCC

1F
ACCEL PEDAL
POSITION SENSOR
1D
ACCEL PEDAL GND

1G
CLUTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
1H
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
1B
FUEL IN OIL
WARNING LIGHT
DSC OFF LIGHT
DSC INDICATOR
LIGHT
LOW ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR LIGHT
HIGH ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT
TURN INDICATOR
LIGHT (LH)
TURN INDICATOR
LIGHT (RH)
DOOR AJAR
WARNING LIGHT
KEYLESS WITH ADVANCED

WARNING LIGHT KEYLESS AND
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS
INDICATOR LIGHT
: TO MICROCOMPUTER
am2zzn0000091
End Of Sie
SOKYU_NG: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
09-22–7
TO MODEL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER STRUCTURAL VIEW
id092200531300
Meters And Gauges
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE FUEL GAUGE
PANEL LIGHT TRIPMETER ODOMETER/ ODOMETER/

CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH TRIPMETER TRIPMETER
(WITH PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL SWITCH)
am2zzn0000130
Warning And Indicator Lights
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 10 11 12
13
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
am2zzn0000130
u : Applicable
Warning and indicator Input signal CAN

No. Description Note
light source system
When the front fog light illuminates, the front
1 Front fog indicator light BCM u With front fog lights
fog indicator light illuminates.
x Flashes when ignition switch is ON
2 Turn indicator light BCM u position during turn switch operation.
x Flashes when hazard switch is on.
High-beam indicator
3 BCM u Illuminates when light switch is at HI position.
light
09-22–8
TO MODEL INDEX
light source system
Illuminates or flashes when SRS air bag
Air bag system warning SAS control system has malfunction.
4 u
light module (See 08-10-6 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING
LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION.)
Illuminates when start knob is pressed.
Keyless indicator light (See 09-14A-7 SECURITY AND LOCKS
(green) WARNING/GUIDANCE [ADVANCED
KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM].)
Keyless control With advanced
5 u Illuminates or flashes when keyless control
module keyless system
module has malfunction.
Keyless warning light
(See 09-14A-7 SECURITY AND LOCKS
(red)
WARNING/GUIDANCE [ADVANCED
Illuminates when ABS system has
ABS HU/CM or malfunction.
6 ABS warning light u
DSC HU/CM (See 04-13-11 BRAKE SYSTEM/ABS
WARNING LIGHT FUNCTION.)
If the DSC system is malfunctioning, the DSC
OFF light remains Illuminates.
(See 04-15-19 DSC OFF SWITCH, DSC OFF
LIGHT OPERATION.)
7 DSC OFF light DSC HU/CM u
When the DCS OFF switch is pressed to
disable, the DCS OFF light illuminates.
LIGHT OPERATION.)
Illuminates when malfunction occurs in
charging system-related parts and DTC is
8 Generator warning light PCM u stored in PCM.
(See 01-17A-1 GENERATOR
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY].)
If the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km/h, the
120 km/h warning light PCM u
vehicle speed warning light illuminates.
The AT warning light illuminates to alert the
9 driver of a malfunction in the automatic
transaxle.
AT warning light TCM u CVT
(See 05-02B-10 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION INDICATION
FUNCTION [DJVA-EL].)
Cruise main indicator Illuminates if the cruise control system is in
light control status. With cruise control
10 PCM u
(See 01-20-1 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM system
Cruise set indicator light OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY].)
Illuminates or flashes when engine coolant
temperature is high.
High engine coolant (See 09-22-18 LOW ENGINE COOLANT
11 temperature warning PCM u TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/HIGH
light ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/
OPERATION.)
Illuminates when engine coolant temperature
is low.
Low engine coolant (See 09-22-18 LOW ENGINE COOLANT
12 temperature indicator PCM u TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/HIGH
light ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
OPERATION.)
Flashes when transaxle-related DTC is
detected.
(See 05-02A-2 MALFUNCTION INDICATION
HOLD indicator light PCM u ATX
FUNCTION [FN4A-EL].)
13 By switching HOLD switch, illuminates to
indicate that it is in HOLD mode.
Illuminates when SS mode.
SS mode indicator lights TCM u (See 05-19-16 SS MODE SWITCH CVT
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [DJVA-EL].)
09-22–9
TO MODEL INDEX
light source system
Selector lever position
PCM u Indicates selector lever position. ATX
indicator light
14
Selector lever position
TCM u Indicates selector lever position. CVT
indicator light
SAS control When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened, the
15 Seat belt warning light u
module seat belt warning light illuminates.
16 Door ajar warning light BCM u Illuminates when door or liftgate is open.
Oil pressure warning
17 BCM u Illuminates when oil pressure is low.
light
x Illuminates when brake system has
malfunction.
(See 04-13-11 BRAKE SYSTEM/ABS
Brake system warning ABS HU/CM or
18 u OPERATION.)
light DSC HU/CM
x Illuminates during parking brake operation.
OPERATION.)
Illuminates or flashes when immobilizer With advanced
Keyless control
u system has malfunction. keyless entry and
module
(See 09-14A-24 SECURITY LIGHT start system
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED
19 Security light
With keyless entry
PCM u (See 09-14B-20 SECURITY LIGHT
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [KEYLESS system
ENTRY SYSTEM].)
Illuminates when malfunction occurs in engine
control system and DTC is stored in PCM.
20 MIL PCM u (See 01-02A-20 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION DISPLAY
FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY].)
Illuminates or flashes when EPS system has
malfunction.
EPS (electric power EPS control
21 u (See 06-13-16 ELECTRIC POWER
steering) warning light module
STEERING (EPS) WARNING LIGHT
OPERATION.)
When the rear fog light illuminates, the rear
22 Rear fog indicator light BCM u With rear fog lights
x If the DSC system is malfunctioning, the
DSC indicator light remains illuminated.
(See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM FUNCTION [DYNAMIC
23 DSC indicator light DSC HU/CM u STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
x When the DSC or TCS is operating, the
DSC indicator light flashes.
(See 04-15-18 DSC INDICATOR LIGHT
OPERATION.)
End Of Sie
09-22–10
TO MODEL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER STRUCTURAL VIEW [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]
id0922005313j5
Meters And Gauges
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE FUEL GAUGE
PANEL LIGHT TRIPMETER ODOMETER/ ODOMETER/

CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH TRIPMETER TRIPMETER
(WITH PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL SWITCH)
am2zzn0000118
Warning And Indicator Lights
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 11 12 13
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
am2zzn0000091
u : Applicable

light source system
indicator light remains illuminated.
1 DSC indicator light DSC HU/CM u (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM FUNCTION [DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)].)
When the front fog light illuminates, the front
2 Front fog indicator light BCM u With front fog light
x Flashes when ignition switch is ON
3 Turn indicator light BCM u position during turn switch operation.
x Flashes when hazard switch is on.
High-beam indicator
4 BCM u Illuminates when light switch is at HI position.
light
09-22–11
TO MODEL INDEX
light source system
Illuminates or flashes when SRS air bag
Air bag system warning SAS control system has malfunction.
5 u
light module (See 08-10-6 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING
LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION.)
Illuminates when start knob is pressed.
Keyless indicator light (See 09-14A-7 SECURITY AND LOCKS
(green) WARNING/GUIDANCE [ADVANCED
Keyless control With advanced
6 u Illuminates or flashes when keyless control
module keyless system
module has malfunction.
Keyless warning light
(See 09-14A-7 SECURITY AND LOCKS
(red)
WARNING/GUIDANCE [ADVANCED
Illuminates when ABS system has
ABS HU/CM or malfunction.
7 ABS warning light u
DSC HU/CM (See 04-13-11 BRAKE SYSTEM/ABS
WARNING LIGHT FUNCTION.)
Abnormality occurs in an engine control
8 Powertrain warning light PCM u system and turns on when a DTC is
memorized in PCM.
Illuminates when malfunction occurs in
9 Generator warning light PCM u charging system-related parts and DTC is
stored in PCM.
Illuminates when the glow system is
10 Glow indicator light PCM u
operating.
Illuminates or flashes when engine coolant
temperature is high.
(See 09-22-18 LOW ENGINE COOLANT
High engine coolant
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/HIGH
11 temperature warning PCM u
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
light
OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD
1.6 (Y6)].)
Illuminates when engine coolant temperature
is low.
(See 09-22-18 LOW ENGINE COOLANT
Low engine coolant
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/HIGH
12 temperature indicator PCM u
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
light
OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD
1.6 (Y6)].)
When the TNS illuminates, the TNS indicator
13 TNS indicator light BCM u
light illuminates.
SAS control When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened, the
14 Seat belt warning light u
module seat belt warning light illuminates.
15 Door ajar warning light BCM u Illuminates when door or liftgate is open.
Oil pressure warning
16 BCM u Illuminates when hydraulic pressure is low.
light
x Illuminates when brake system has
malfunction.
Brake system warning ABS HU/CM or
17 u OPERATION.)
light DSC HU/CM
x Illuminates during parking brake operation.
OPERATION.)
Illuminates or flashes when immobilizer With advanced
Keyless control
u system has malfunction. keyless entry and
module
(See 09-14A-24 SECURITY LIGHT start system
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ADVANCED
18 Security light
With keyless entry
PCM u (See 09-14B-20 SECURITY LIGHT
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [KEYLESS system
ENTRY SYSTEM].)
09-22–12
TO MODEL INDEX
light source system
Illuminates when malfunction occurs in engine
19 MIL PCM u
control system and DTC is stored in PCM.
Illuminates or flashes when EPS system has
malfunction.
EPS (electric power EPS control
20 u (See 06-13-16 ELECTRIC POWER
steering) warning light module
STEERING (EPS) WARNING LIGHT
OPERATION.)
x When the engine oil dilution amount
exceeds the specified value, the fuel in oil
21 Fuel in oil warning light PCM u warning light illuminates.
x If the PCM detects DTC P253F, the fuel in
oil warning light illuminates.
When the rear fog light illuminates, the rear
22 Rear fog indicator light BCM u With rear fog light
OFF light remains Illuminates.
LIGHT OPERATION.)
23 DSC OFF light DSC HU/CM u
When the DCS OFF switch is pressed to
disable, the DCS OFF light illuminates.
LIGHT OPERATION.)
End Of Sie
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FUNCTION
id092200508600
x The microcomputer built into the instrument cluster controls the following functions:
Function Reference
(See 09-22-13 LIGHTS-ON REMINDER WARNING ALARM
Lights-on reminder warning alarm
OUTLINE.)
Key reminder warning alarm (See 09-22-14 KEY REMINDER WARNING ALARM OUTLINE.)
Seat belt warning alarm (See 09-22-15 SEAT BELT WARNING ALARM OUTLINE.)
(See 09-22-15 TURN AND HAZARD INDICATOR ALARM
Turn and hazard indicator alarm
OUTLINE.)
Speedometer control (See 09-22-16 SPEEDOMETER CONTROL OUTLINE.)
Tachometer control (See 09-22-16 TACHOMETER CONTROL OUTLINE.)
Fuel gauge control (See 09-22-17 FUEL GAUGE CONTROL OUTLINE.)
(See 09-22-18 LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT OUTLINE.)
Low engine coolant temperature indicator light/High
(See 09-22-18 LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
engine coolant temperature warning light
WARNING LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI
Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)].)
Malfunction diagnostic function (See 09-22-19 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC OUTLINE.)
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position after the DSC
HU/CM or DSC CM has been replaced, the DSC CM reads data from
Automatic configuration function
the instrument cluster via CAN communication to perform automatic
configuration.
End Of Sie
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER WARNING ALARM OUTLINE
id092200533700
x Alerts the driver that the headlight or TNS is illuminated when the driver's door is opened.
End Of Sie
09-22–13
TO MODEL INDEX
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER WARNING ALARM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id092200641600
IG1 B+
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
2S 2U
MICROCOMPUTER
BUZZER
AND
CAN
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
2D 2B 2A
DOOR LATCH SWITCH
(DRIVER'S SIDE) LIGHT SWITCH
BCM
am2zzn0000059
Operation
x A beeper in the instrument cluster sounds if all of the following three conditions are met:
— Ignition switch is at LOCK or ACC position
— Light switch is at TNS or headlight position
— Driver's door is open (driver's door latch switch is on)
Note
x If the conditions for the lights-on reminder warning alarm function and those of the key reminder warning
alarm function are met at the same time, the key reminder warning alarm function is given priority and
operates the beeper.
End Of Sie
KEY REMINDER WARNING ALARM OUTLINE
id092200641700
x Alerts the driver that the key is inserted in the steering lock when the driver's door is opened.
End Of Sie
KEY REMINDER WARNING ALARM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id092200641800
IG1 B+
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
2S 2U
MICROCOMPUTER BUZZER
AND
CAN
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
2D 2B 2A
DOOR LATCH SWITCH B+
(DRIVER'S SIDE)
BCM
KEY REMINDER SWITCH (WITH
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM) OR
STEERING LOCK UNIT
(WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
START SYSTEM)
am2zzn0000059
09-22–14
TO MODEL INDEX
Operation
x A beeper in the instrument cluster sounds intermittently if all of the following three conditions are met:
— Ignition switch is at LOCK or ACC position
— Key is inserted in steering lock (Key reminder switch is ON)
— Driver's door is open (Driver's door latch switch is on)
End Of Sie
SEAT BELT WARNING ALARM OUTLINE
id092200532200
x Alerts the driver that the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
End Of Sie
SEAT BELT WARNING ALARM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id092200641900
IG1 B+
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
2S 2U
MICROCOMPUTER
BUZZER
TIMER
AND
CAN
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
2A
2D 2B
BUCKLE SWITCH
(DRIVER'S SIDE)
SAS CONTROL
MODULE
am2zzn0000132
Operation
Australian, European (L.H.D. U.K.) specs.
x A beeper in the instrument cluster sounds intermittently for approx. 90—96 s if all of the following three
conditions are met:
— Ignition switch is in ON position
— Driver's seat belt is unfastened
— Vehicle speed is approx. 15—20 km/h {9.4—12.0 mph} or more
x A beeper in the instrument cluster sounds intermittently for approx. 32—34 s if all of the following three
conditions are met:
— Driver's seat belt is unfastened
— Vehicle speed is approx. 15—20 km/h {9.4—12.0 mph} or more
End Of Sie
TURN AND HAZARD INDICATOR ALARM OUTLINE
id092200658100
x Notifies the driver that the turn lights are flashing.
End Of Sie
09-22–15
TO MODEL INDEX
TURN AND HAZARD INDICATOR ALARM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id092200694900
IG1 B+
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
2S 2U
MICROCOMPUTER
BUZZER
AND
CAN
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
2D 2B 2A
BCM
am2zzn0000133
Operation
x Simultaneously activates a beeper sound and flashes the turn lights based on a signal from the BCM.
End Of Sie
SPEEDOMETER CONTROL OUTLINE
id092200529700
x Outputs the vehicle speed signal from the PCM to the microcomputer in the instrument cluster.
End Of Sie
SPEEDOMETER CONTROL CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id092200531400
IG1 B+
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
2S 2U
SPEEDOMETER
CAN CONTROL MICROCOMPUTER

CIRCUIT
2D 2B 2A
PCM
am2zzn0000132
Operation
x The vehicle speed signal sent from the PCM via the CAN system is input to the microcomputer in the
instrument cluster. The microcomputer calculates the current vehicle speed based on the vehicle speed signal,
and sends an output signal to the speedometer.
End Of Sie
TACHOMETER CONTROL OUTLINE
id092200530200
x Outputs the engine speed signal from the PCM to the microcomputer in the instrument cluster.
End Of Sie
09-22–16
TO MODEL INDEX
TACHOMETER CONTROL CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id092200531500
IG1 B+
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
2S 2U
TACHOMETER

CIRCUIT
2D 2B 2A
PCM
am2zzn0000132
Operation
x The engine speed signal sent from the PCM via the CAN system is input to the microcomputer in the
instrument cluster. The microcomputer calculates the current engine speed based on the engine speed signal,
and sends an output signal to the tachometer.
End Of Sie
FUEL GAUGE CONTROL OUTLINE
id092200530400
x Outputs the fuel level signal from the fuel gauge sender unit to the microcomputer in the instrument cluster.
x Fuel gauge variation caused by fluctuating fuel level when cornering or driving on a slope, is reduced by
microcomputer control.
End Of Sie
FUEL GAUGE CONTROL CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id092200531600
IG1 B+
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
2S 2U
FUEL
GAUGE
MICROCOMPUTER
2R 2T 2A
FUEL GAUGE
SENDER UNIT
am2zzn0000132
Operation
x The resistance according to the fuel level is input from the fuel gauge sender unit to the microcomputer. The
microcomputer calculates the average resistance within the specified time and outputs a control signal to the
fuel gauge based on the average resistance.
End Of Sie
09-22–17
TO MODEL INDEX
LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT OUTLINE
id092200600000
x Low engine coolant temperature indicator light illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is low.
x High engine coolant temperature warning light flashes/illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high.
x Both the low engine coolant temperature indicator light and the high engine coolant temperature warning light
turn off when the engine coolant temperature is normal.
End Of Sie
WARNING LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id092200600100
x The engine coolant temperature signal from the PCM via CAN communication is input to the microcomputer in
the instrument cluster. The microcomputer outputs a control signal to the low engine coolant temperature
indicator light/high engine coolant temperature warning light based on the engine coolant temperature signal.
The flash/illumination/lights off conditions are as follows:
— The low engine coolant temperature indicator light illuminates when the engine coolant temperature
decreases to 50qC {122qF} or less, and turns off when the engine coolant temperature is 55qC {131qF} or
more.
— The high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes when the engine coolant temperature increases
to 120qC {248qF} or more, and turns off when the engine coolant temperature is 117qC {243qF} or less.
— The high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates when the engine coolant temperature
increases to 125qC {257qF} or more, and flashes when the engine coolant temperature is 122qC {252qF} or
less.
IG1 B+
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

2S 2U WARNING LIGHT (RED)
LOW ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE ILLUMINATION
INDICATOR LIGHT(BLUE)
HIGH ENGINE COOLANT FLASHES

TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT (RED)
LIGHTS OFF

CIRCUIT LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
LIGHTS OFF
2D 2B 2A
ILLUMINATION
PCM
50 55 117 120 122 125
{122} {131} {243} {248} {252} {257}
COOLANT TEMPERATURE ˚C {˚F}
am2zzn0000132
End Of Sie
WARNING LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]
id0922006001j5
x The engine coolant temperature signal from the PCM via CAN communication is input to the microcomputer in
the instrument cluster. The microcomputer outputs a control signal to the low engine coolant temperature
indicator light/high engine coolant temperature warning light based on the engine coolant temperature signal.
The flash/illumination/lights off conditions are as follows:
— The low engine coolant temperature indicator light illuminates when the engine coolant temperature
decreases to 35qC {95qF} or less, and turns off when the engine coolant temperature is 40qC {104qF} or
more.
— The high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes when the engine coolant temperature increases
to 120qC {248qF} or more, and turns off when the engine coolant temperature is 117qC {243qF} or less.
— The high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates when the engine coolant temperature
increases to 125qC {257qF} or more, and flashes when the engine coolant temperature is 122qC {252qF} or
less.
09-22–18
TO MODEL INDEX
IG1 B+
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

2S 2U WARNING LIGHT (RED)
LOW ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE ILLUMINATION
HIGH ENGINE COOLANT FLASHES

TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT (RED)
LIGHTS OFF

CIRCUIT LOW ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
LIGHTS OFF
2D 2B 2A
ILLUMINATION
PCM
35 40 117 120 122 125
{95} {104} {243} {248} {252} {257}
COOLANT TEMPERATURE ˚C {˚F}
am2zzn0000132
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC OUTLINE
id092200530000
x If a malfunction occurs in the system, a malfunction detection function is equipped to record the malfunction as
a DTC. Recorded DTCs can be read by the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
x When configuring, the odometer (total traveled distance data) data can be transferred from the previous
instrument cluster to the new one.
End Of Sie
id092200530100
x If a malfunction occurs in the input/output signals, other units or the CAN system, it is recorded as a DTC.
Recorded DTCs can be read by the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
DTC Malfunction location
B10D5:13
x The PCM determined a malfunction in the coil antenna even though it is normal.
B10D7:51 The instrument cluster has detected unprogrammed key ID number.
B10D7:81 The instrument cluster cannot read key ID number data normally.
B10D7:94 The key ID number data cannot be read.
B10D8:00 Only one key ID number is programmed.
B10D9:87 No detected communication with the coil antenna.
B10DA:51 Communication error between the instrument cluster and the PCM (data transfer failure)
B10DA:62 Communication error between the instrument cluster and the PCM (mismatched conditions)
B1A84:41 Instrument cluster configuration data error
B1A84:51 Instrument cluster configuration not implemented
P0070:14 Ambient temperature cannot be displayed on LCD of meter
U0100:87 Communication error between the instrument cluster and the PCM (no response)
U0101:00 TCM communication error
ABS HU/CM communication error (With ABS)
U0121:00
DSC HU/CM communication error (With DSC)
U0131:00 EPS control module communication error
U0151:00 SAS control module communication error
U0214:00 Keyless control module communication error
U0300:00 Instrument cluster configuration data error
09-22–19
TO MODEL INDEX
U0401:68 Signal error from PCM
U0402:92 Signal error from TCM
Signal error from ABS HU/CM (With ABS)
U0415:92
Signal error from DSC HU/CM (With DSC)
U0420:92 Signal error from EPS
U0452:68 Signal error from SAS control module
U0515:68 Signal error from keyless control module
U2100:00 Instrument cluster configuration not implemented
U3000:41 Instrument cluster internal malfunction
U3003:16 Battery positive voltage is low
Odometer-data transfer
x If all the following conditions are met, the odometer data (total traveled distance) in the previous instrument
cluster is automatically transferred to a new instrument cluster during the configuration. If any of the conditions
are not met, the odometer-data transfer cannot be performed.
Previous instrument cluster
— No malfunction (Configuration data can be read using the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS))
New instrument cluster
— Odometer display is less than 100 km
— Odometer has no malfunction
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]
id0922005301j5
x If a malfunction occurs in the input/output signals, other units or the CAN system, it is recorded as a DTC.
Recorded DTCs can be read by the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS).
DTC table
B10D5:13
x The PCM determined a malfunction in the coil antenna even though it is normal.
B10D7:51 The instrument cluster has detected unprogrammed key ID number.
B10D7:81 The instrument cluster cannot read key ID number data normally.
B10D7:94 The key ID number data cannot be read.
B10D8:00 Only one key ID number is programmed.
B10D9:87 No detected communication with the coil antenna.
B10DA:51 Communication error between the instrument cluster and the PCM (data transfer failure)
B10DA:62 Communication error between the instrument cluster and the PCM (mismatched conditions)
B1A84:41 Instrument cluster configuration data error
B1A84:51 Instrument cluster configuration not implemented
B1B71:14 Evaporator temperature sensor circuit malfunction
P0070:14 Ambient temperature cannot be displayed on LCD of meter
P193B:14 Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit malfunction
U0100:87 Communication error between the instrument cluster and the PCM (no response)
ABS HU/CM communication error (With ABS)
U0121:00
DSC HU/CM communication error (With DSC)
U0131:00 EPS control module communication error
U0151:00 SAS control module communication error
U0214:00 Keyless control module communication error
U0300:00 Instrument cluster configuration data error
09-22–20
TO MODEL INDEX
Signal error from ABS HU/CM (With ABS)
U0415:92
Signal error from DSC HU/CM (With DSC)
U0420:92 Signal error from EPS
U0515:68 Signal error from keyless control module
U2100:00 Instrument cluster configuration not implemented
U3000:41 Instrument cluster internal malfunction
U3003:16 Battery positive voltage is low
Odometer-data transfer
x If all the following conditions are met, the odometer data (total traveled distance) in the previous instrument
cluster is automatically transferred to a new instrument cluster during the configuration. If any of the conditions
are not met, the odometer-data transfer cannot be performed.
Previous instrument cluster
— No malfunction (Configuration data can be read using the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS))
New instrument cluster
— Odometer display is less than 100 km
— Odometer has no malfunction
End Of Sie
HORN CONSTRUCTION
SOKYU_NG: HORN
id092200532500
x Trumpet type horn with a spiral resonance tube has been adopted.
HORN
am2zzn0000058
End Of Sie
PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR OUTLINE
NG: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
id092200970000
x Alerts the driver that the front passenger's seat belt is unfastened.
End Of Sie
09-22–21
TO MODEL INDEX
PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
id092200970100
IG1
A
PASSENGER
IG1 SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INDICATOR
2S
MICROCOMPUTER B
2X
AND
CAN CONTROL
CIRCUIT
2D 2B 2A
BUCKLE SWITCH
(PASSENGER'S SIDE)
SAS CONTROL
OCCUPANCY MODULE
SENSOR
am2zzn0000021
Operation
x Illuminates the front passenger seat belt reminder indicator light if the all of the following conditions are met.
— Front passenger seat belt is unfastened
— Vehicle speed is approx. 20 km/h {12 mph} or more
End Of Sie
DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM OUTLINE
NG: INFORMATION DISPLAY
id092200110900
x The microcomputer in the instrument cluster calculates ambient temperature data, distance driven and
specified time data, fuel consumption data, and fuel remaining data according to signal from signal source.
x Using these data, the microcomputer displays the following in the instrument cluster:
— Instant update fuel economy
— Average fuel economy
— Remaining possible travel distance
— Average vehicle speed
— Ambient temperature
— Vehicle speed alarm
x The driver information system switch comprises an INFO switch.
End Of Sie
09-22–22
TO MODEL INDEX
DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id092200111100
IG1 B+
2S 2U INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INFO‫ޓ‬ 2V
SWITCH MICROCOMPUTER LCD
PCM
2D 2B 2R 2T 2H 2F
FUEL
GAUGE
SENDER
CAN HARNESS AMBIENT
UNIT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
am2zzn0000016
End Of Sie
DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id092200111000
STEERING WHEEL
LCD
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INFO SWITCH
am2zzn0000016
End Of Sie
DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM OPERATION
id092200111200
Drive Information System Switch
x The drive information system switch comprises an INFO switch.
x The modes can be charged in a cyclic pattern by pressing the INFO switch.
INSTANT UPDATE INFO INFO REMAINING POSSIBLE
AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
FUEL ECONOMY TRAVEL DISTANCE
INFO INFO INFO INFO
VEHICLE SPEED AMBIENT
AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED
ALARM TEMPERATURE
am2zzn0000016
x The data displayed at the time can be reset by holding the INFO switch for 1 s or more. Data are calculated as
soon as the INFO switch is released.
Drive Information System Display

x The display changes for each mode as shown.
Remaining Average
Instant update Average fuel Ambient Vehicle speed
Type possible travel vehicle
fuel economy economy temperature alarm
distance speed
Type A
09-22–23
TO MODEL INDEX
Remaining Average
Instant update Average fuel Ambient Vehicle speed
Type possible travel vehicle
fuel economy economy temperature alarm
distance speed
Type B
Type C
End Of Sie
DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
id092200111300
Instant Update Fuel Economy Mode
x Instant update fuel economy is calculated from the trip distance and the fuel consumption in the previous 2 s.
Calculation
x Instrument fuel economy is updated from every 2 s (indication only changes when difference between present
value and next value is 0.8 L/100 km or more).
— Instant fuel economy (L/100km)= Fuel consumption over last 2 s (L) / Distance travelled over last 2 s
(km)u100
— Instant fuel economy (mile/gallon)= Distance travelled over last 2 s (mile) / Fuel consumption over last 2 s
(gallon)
x When fuel is not consumed, for example, when applying an engine brake, <0.0 L/100 km> or <99.9 mpg> is
displayed.
x When the vehicle speed is in the invalid display range (see the following chart), <----/100 km> or <---- mpg> is
displayed.
NORMAL DISPLAY
(MOMENTARY FUEL MILEAGE)
VEHICLE 4.24 7.06

SPEED {2.63} {4.39} km/h {mile/h}
INVALID RANGE DISPLAY
ac9uun00000660
Average Fuel Economy Mode

x Average fuel economy is calculated from the trip distance and the fuel consumption from the time when the
battery is last connected or the average fuel economy data is reset.
x Average fuel economy is updated every 1 min.
Calculation
x Average fuel economy (L/100 km)= Cumulative fuel consumption (L) / Cumulative trip distance (km) u 100
x Average fuel economy (gallon/mile)= Cumulative trip distance (mile) / Cumulative fuel consumption (gallon)
x When the cumulative trip distance is 0 km (0 mile) (vehicle has not traveled since battery was last connected or
average fuel economy function was last reset), <999.9 L/100 km> or <0.0 mpg> is displayed.
x When the INFO switch is pressed for 1 s or more while displaying the average fuel economy, the cumulative fuel
consumption data and cumulative trip distance data are reset.
x After the data are reset, <---- L/100 km> or <---- mpg> is displayed for 1 min.
Remaining Possible Travel Distance Mode

x Remaining possible travel distance is calculated from the past 0.1 km (0.06 mile) interval fuel consumption (L/
km or gallon/mile), the cumulative fuel consumption (L/km or gallon/mile), and the remaining travel quantity (L
or gallon).
x Remaining possible travel distance is updated every 1 s.
09-22–24
TO MODEL INDEX
Calculation
x Remaining travel distance (km or mile)= Remaining fuel quantity (L or gallon) / Cumulative fuel consumption (L/
km or gallon/mile) + Past 0.1 km (0.06 mile) interval fuel consumption (L/km or gallon/mile)
Average Vehicle Speed Mode

x Average vehicle speed is calculated from the distance driven and the specified time from the time the battery is
last connected or the average vehicle speed data is last reset.
x Average vehicle speed is updated every 10 s.
Calculation
x Average vehicle speed (km/h or mile/h)= Cumulative distance driven (km or mile) / Cumulative specified time
(hour)
x When the INFO switch is pressed for 1 s or more while displaying the average vehicle speed, the cumulative
distance driven data and the cumulative specified time data are reset.
x After the data are reset, <---- km/h> or <---- mile/h> is displayed for 1 min.
Ambient temperature display

x The instrument cluster detects the ambient temperature based on the signal from the ambient temperature
sensor and displays it in the LCD.
Vehicle speed alarm

x Displays the vehicle speed alert set by the driver.
x The possible speed setting range is 30—200 km/h (20—120 mph).
x The warning alarm, which triggers when the set speed is exceeded, sounds for approx.1 s, and the LCD in the
instrument cluster flashes for approx. 5 s.
Set vehicle speed is exceeded
End Of Sie ILLUMINATES
FLASHES
am2zzn0000028
09-22–25
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
09-40 CONTROL SYSTEM

BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) CAN SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–1 VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–9
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) CAN SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . 09-40–10
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–1 CAN SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . 09-40–10
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) Mechanism of CAN System-Related
WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–10
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC Twisted Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–11
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–4 Time Division Multiplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–11
Malfunction Detection Function . . . . . . 09-40–5 Vehicle CAN System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–12
PID/Data Monitor Function. . . . . . . . . . 09-40–6 CAN signal table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–13
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) On-board Diagnostic System
SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–7 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–16
On-board Diagnostic System
Construction and Operation . . . . . . . . 09-40–17
End of Toc
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) OUTLINE
NG: POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
id094000101400
x The following relays are built into the BCM:
— Door lock relay
— Door unlock relay
— Liftgate/trunk lid opener relay
— TNS relay
— Rear window defroster relay
— Windshield wiper LO relay
— Windshield wiper HI relay
— Windshield washer relay
— Rear washer relay
x The BCM controls the following system:
— Headlight/fog light
— Turn light/hazard warning light
— Wiper and washer
— Power door lock system
— Keyless entry system (without advanced keyless entry and start system)
— Interior light
— Rear window defroster
End Of Sie
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) STRUCTURAL VIEW
id094000101500
L.H.D. R.H.D.
BCM BCM
am2zzn0000005
End Of Sie
09-40–1
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) WIRING DIAGRAM
id094000101600
WITH TERMINAL 3A
LIFTGATE/TRUNK LID OPENER
RELAY 3A
LIFTGATE/TRUNK LIFTGATE
2M LID OPENER LOCK/TRUNK LID WITHOUT
RELAY RELEASE ACTUATOR TERMINAL 3A
3C M
2P
DOOR UNLOCK
RELAY
DOOR LOCK WITHOUT DOUBLE
ACTUATORS LOCKING SYSTEM
3O
D/L 20 A FUSE
DOOR LOCK M M M M
1P RELAY 3M
WITH DOUBLE LOCKING M M M M

IGNITION SWITCH SYSTEM
METER 10 A FUSE 3E
2G
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATORS
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH
7C
6R DOOR LOCK
WITH ADVANCED LINK SWITCH
KEYLESS AND START 7K
SYSTEM 7Q
*1
WITH THEFT-DETERRENT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (LH)
SYSTEM 7G
*1
REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (RH)
7O
DOOR LATCH SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)

7M

7I
7B
DOOR LATCH
SWITCH (DRIVER
EXCEPT MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, SIDE)
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)
4B
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
4A
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL 7E POWER WINDOW
SENSOR SWITCH MAIN SWITCH
WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS WITH IG OFF

AND START SYSTEM TIMER
THEFT-DETERRENT
6U CONTROL MODULE
LIFTGATE/TRUNK LID
WITH THEFT-DETERRENT
OPENER SWITCH
7A SYSTEM
KEYLESS CONTROL
MODULE
KEYLESS RECEIVER 6W
WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
START SYSTEM
am2zzn0000129
*1 : 5HB, 4SD
09-40–2
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
WITH ADVANCED
KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM
KEYLESS CONTROL
CVT 4V
MODULE
6W 4X
LIFTGATE/TRUNK 4U
LID OPENER SWITCH 4W TO CAN SYSTEM-
7A 7X RELATED MODULE
7V
6X
IG1 6V
MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, 1L

MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)
3L
FRONT TURN
4C REAR TURN LIGHT (LH)
LIGHT (LH)
BACK-UP LIGHT 1K
FRONT TURN
IG2 LIGHT (RH)
3J
REAR TURN
R.WIP 10A FUSE LIGHT (RH)
WITH RUNNING
2F
B+ F.WIP 20A LIGHT
FUSE
2N HEADLIGHT
LO RELAY HEADLIGHT
2-BEAM
HI RELAY
R.DEF 20A TYPE HEADLIGHT
FUSE 4M
1C
1J
HAZARD 10A FUSE
1O 4G
ROOM 15A FUSE
1E 4-BEAM
TAIL 15A FUSE TYPE HEADLIGHT
4O
HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT
WITH
(LO) (HI)
6K
RUNNING
LIGHT
6M
4I
6L FRONT
FOG
6J LIGHT
6E RELAY
6I 4E REAR FOG LIGHT
6O REAR FOG
LIGHT RELAY FRONT FOG
LIGHT
1G
WITHOUT RUNNING
LIGHT
3H
LIGHT SWITCH TAIL LIGHT PARKING
LIGHT
WITH
TNS RELAY LICENSE PLATE LIGHT CENTER PANEL
AUTO UNIT
LIGHT
SYSTEM 2O
WITHOUT PANEL LIGHT

CONTROL SWITCH
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
WITH PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL SWITCH
am2zzn0000129
09-40–3
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
WITH THEFT-
DETERRENT
SYSTEM
THEFT-DETERRENT
CONTROL MODULE
6Q REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

HAZARD WARNING INDICATOR
SWITCH
6G
6D
REAR WINDOW
DEFROSTER SWITCH
3B
WITH THEFT- FILAMENT
RELAY
DETERRENT
SYSTEM
THEFT-DETERRENT
CONTROL MODULE
LH
6B
7S
RH 6A
TURN SWITCH
INTERIOR LIGHT
3P
6P CARGO/TRUNK
COMPARTMENT
6N
ON OFF LIGHT
6S 3I DOOR
6F
6C
WINDSHIELD
2L
WIPER LOW WINDSHIELD WIPER
1B
2H RELAY MOTOR
1A
6H
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WINDSHIELD
WASHER SWITCH WIPER HI
RELAY 1F
1D
3D
REAR WASHER
RELAY REAR WIPER MOTOR
3F
1H
7U LIN
RAIN SENSOR
7W
WASHER MOTOR
WITH AUTO WIPER SYSTEM
1I
WINDSHIELD
WASHER RELAY
am2zzn0000142
End Of Sie
id094000101700
x The on-board diagnostic system consists of a malfunction detection system that detects abnormalities in input/
output signals, a data monitor function that reads out specified input/output signals.
09-40–4
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
and detecting/repair into a single location, has been adopted, thereby improving serviceability. Diagnosis is
performed by connecting the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) to the DLC-2.
x In addition to DTC read-out, the Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) is used to clear DTCs using the
display screen of the diagnostic tester, and to access the PID/data monitor function, providing enhanced
malfunction diagnosis and improved serviceability.

x The malfunction detection function detects malfunctions in the input/output signal system of the BCM.
DTC table
DTC No. Description Detection condition
B1B55:96 Rain sensor internal circuit malfunction Rain sensor malfunction
B1C53:13 Windshield wiper switch internal circuit malfunction Windshield wiper switch INT circuit malfunction
Short circuit to ground in wiring harness between turn
B1D06:11 Turn light (LH) circuit malfunction
light (LH) and BCM
Open circuit or short to power supply in wiring harness
B1D06:15 Turn light (LH) circuit malfunction
between turn light (LH) and BCM
Short to ground in wiring harness between turn light
B1D07:11 Turn light (RH) circuit malfunction
(RH) and BCM
Open circuit or short to power supply in wiring harness
B1D07:15 Turn light (RH) circuit malfunction
between turn light (RH) and BCM
Short to power supply in wiring harness between
B1D13:12 Interior light circuit malfunction
interior light and BCM
Short to ground in wiring harness between hazard
B1D35:11 Hazard warning switch circuit malfunction
warning switch and BCM for 10s or more
Short to ground in wiring harness between turn switch
B1D36:92 Turn switch circuit malfunction
and BCM
Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch
B10A6:92 Light switch circuit malfunction
and BCM
Short to ground in wiring harness between wiper and
B1008:11 Windshield wiper switch circuit malfunction
washer switch (windshield wiper INT) and BCM
Rear window defroster switch is in a pressed condition
B1013:23 Rear window defroster switch circuit malfunction
for 2 min or more (rear defroster switch stuck)
B1087:83 Rain sensor communication error
B1087:86 Communication error from rain sensor
Communication error between rain sensor and BCM
B1087:87 No response from rain sensor
B1087:88 Rain sensor BUS off
Lock/unlock signals are input simultaneously for 6 s or
B1172:92 Door lock link switch circuit malfunction
more
Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch
Front door latch switch (driver's side) circuit
B1175:13 switch in front door latch and lock actuator (driver's
malfunction
side) and BCM
Open circuit in wiring harness between front door latch
Front door latch switch (passenger's side) circuit
B1176:13 switch in front door latch and lock actuator (passenger's
malfunction
side) and BCM
Short to ground in wiring harness between liftgate/trunk
B1178:11 Liftgate/trunk lid latch switch circuit malfunction lid latch switch in liftgate/trunk lid latch and lock
actuator and BCM
U0001:88 Unit communication error BCM CAN system error
x Communication error with keyless control module
(vehicles with advanced keyless and start
U0028:81 system)
x Communication error with keyless receiver
(vehicles with keyless entry system)
x Communication error between keyless control
x Error signal from keyless control module (vehicles
module and BCM (vehicles with advanced keyless
with advanced keyless and start system)
U0028:83 and start system)
x Error signal from keyless receiver (vehicles with
x Communication error between keyless receiver and
keyless entry system)
BCM (vehicles with keyless entry system)
x No response from keyless control module
(vehicles with advanced keyless and start
U0028:87 system)
x No response from keyless receiver (vehicles with
keyless entry system)
09-40–5
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC No. Description Detection condition
U0100:00 Communication error with PCM Communication error between PCM and BCM
U0101:00*1 Communication error with TCM Communication error between TCM and BCM
x Communication error with ABS HU/CM (with x Communication error between ABS HU/CM and
ABS) BCM (with ABS)
U0121:00
x Communication error with DSC HU/CM (with x Communication error between DSC HU/CM and
DSC) BCM (with DSC)
x Correct data cannot be received from ABS HU/CM
x Error signal from ABS HU/CM (with ABS) (with ABS)
U0415:68
x Error signal from DSC HU/CM (with DSC) x Correct data cannot be received from DSC HU/CM
(with DSC)
U2100:00 BCM configuration not set
BCM configuration setting not done correctly
U3000:44 BCM configuration setting invalid
U3003:16 BCM power supply voltage low (less than 10 V). BCM power supply voltage less than 10 V
U3003:17 BCM power supply voltage high (16 V or more). BCM power supply voltage 16 V or more
*1 : CVT
PID/Data Monitor Function

BCM and reading them out in real-time.
PID/DATA
Unit/Condition Operation Condition Inspection item(s)
monitor item
x Light switch at AUTO position: On
AUTO_L_SW Off/On Light switch
x Light switch at position except AUTO: Off
x Brake fluid level above MIN: Normal
BRK_FLUID Normal/Low Brake fluid level sensor switch
x Brake fluid level less than MIN: Low
x Driver's door opened: Open Door latch switch (driver's
DRSW_D Close/Open
x Driver's door closed: Close side)
x Passenger's door opened: Open Door latch switch (passenger's
DRSW_P Close/Open
x Passenger's door closed: Close side)
x Rear door (RH) opened: Open Door latch switch (rear door
DRSW_RR Close/Open
x Rear door (RH) closed: Close (RH))
x Rear door (LH) opened: Open Door latch switch (rear door
DRSW_LR Close/Open
x Rear door (LH) closed: Close (LH))
D_LLSW_LO x Driver's door lock knob locked: Lock
Off/Lock Door lock-link switch
CK x Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Off
D_LLSW_UN x Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Unlock
Off/Unlock Door lock-link switch
CK x Driver's door lock knob locked: Off
DR_LOCK_A x Driver's door lock knob locked: Lock
Off/Lock Door lock actuator
CT x Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Off
DR_UNLK_A x Driver's door lock knob unlocked: Unlock
Off/Unlock Door lock actuator
CT x Driver's door lock knob locked: Off
x Light switch at FRONT FOG position, lights on
FOG_F_RLY Off/On condition: On Front fog light relay
x Light switch not at FRONT FOG position: Off
x Light switch at REAR FOG position, lights on condition:
FOG_R_RLY Off/On On Rear fog light relay
x Light switch not at REAR FOG position: Off
x Front fog light switch in on position: On
FOG_F_SW Off/On Light switch
x Front fog light switch in off position: Off
x Rear fog light switch in on position: On
FOG_R_SW Off/On Light switch
x Rear fog light switch in off position: Off
x Hazard warning switch in on position: On
HAZARD Off/On Hazard warning switch
x Hazard warning switch in off position: Off
x Light switch at HI: On
H/L_HI_SW Off/On Light switch
x Light switch not at HI: Off
x Light switch at LO: On
H/L_LO_SW Off/On Light switch
x Light switch not at LO: Off
x Headlights on: On
H/L_LO_RLY Off/On Headlight low relay
x Headlights off: Off
09-40–6
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
PID/DATA
Unit/Condition Operation Condition Inspection item(s)
monitor item
x Key inserted into key cylinder: Key-In
IG_KEY_IN Key-Out/Key-In Key reminder switch
x Except above: Key-Out
KEY_LOCK_ x Door key cylinder at LOCK: On
Off/On Door key cylinder switch
SW x Door key cylinder not at LOCK: Off
x Engine running: On
OIL_PRS_SW Off/On Oil pressure switch
x Engine stopped: Off
x Ignition switch at ON: On
PWR_IG1 Off/On Ignition switch
x Ignition switch is off: Off
x Intermittent operation control signal from rain sensor
sent: On
RAIN_SSR Off/On Rain sensor
x Any control signal such as stop, low or high operation
from rain sensor sent: Off
x Door opened: 100 %
ROOM_LMP % Interior light
x Door closed: 0 %
x Rear window defroster operating: On
R_DEF Off/On Filament
x Rear window defroster not operating: Off
x Rear window defroster switch pressed: On Climate control unit (rear
R_DEF_SW Off/On
x Rear window defroster switch not pressed: Off window defroster switch)
x Rear window defroster indicator illuminated: On Climate control unit (rear
R_DEF_IND Off/On
x Rear window defroster indicator not illuminated: Off window defroster indicator)
x Light switch at TNS position: On
TNS_SW Off/On Light switch
x Light switch not at TNS position: Off
x Turn light (LH) flashing: On
TURN_L_L Off/On Turn light
x Turn light (LH) off: Off
x Turn light (RH) flashing: On
TURN_L_R Off/On Turn light
x Turn light (RH) off: Off
x Turn switch at left position: On
TURN_SW_L Off/On Turn switch (light switch)
x Turn switch in off position: Off
x Turn switch at right position: On
TURN_SW_R Off/On Turn switch (light switch)
x Turn switch in off position: Off
x Liftgate/trunk lid opened: Open Liftgate/trunk lid latch and lock
TR/LG_SW Close/Open
x Liftgate/trunk lid closed: Close actuator
x Vehicle driven: Displays vehicle speed
VSPD KPH -
x Vehicle stopped: 0 km/h (mph)
x Windshield washer switch on: On
WASHER_F Off/On Washer switch
x Windshield washer switch off: Off
x Rear washer switch on: On
WASHER_R Off/On Washer switch
x Rear washer switch off: Off
x Windshield wiper switch at INT position: On
WIP_F_INT Off/On Windshield wiper switch
x Windshield wiper switch not at INT position: Off
x Windshield wiper switch at HI position: On
WIP_F_HI Off/On Windshield wiper switch
x Windshield wiper switch not at HI position: Off
x Windshield wiper switch at LO position: On
WIP_F_LO Off/On Windshield wiper switch
x Windshield wiper switch not at LO position: Off
x Rear wiper switch at ON: On
WIP_R_ON Off/On Windshield wiper switch
x Rear wiper switch at OFF: Off
x Windshield wiper operating at HI: On
WPRLY_F_HI Off/On Front wiper motor
x Windshield wiper operating in position except HI: Off
WPRLY_F_L x Windshield wiper operating at LO: On
Off/On Front wiper motor
O x Windshield wiper operating in position except LO: Off
x Rear wiper operating: On
WPRLY_R Off/On Rear wiper motor
x Rear wiper not operating: Off
End Of Sie
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) SYSTEM OUTLINE
NG: CAN SYSTEM
id094000101300
x Due to the simplification of the wiring harness, a CAN system for transmission of multiplex input/output signals
among electrical modules has been adopted.
x Twisted-pair wiring is used for connections between the following modules. (Each electrical module hereafter
referred to as a CAN system-related module):
— PCM
— ABS HU/CM (with ABS)
09-40–7
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
— DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
— BCM
— TCM (with CVT)
— Keyless control module (with advanced keyless and start system)
— SAS control module
— EPS control module
— Theft-deterrent control module (with theft-deterrent system)
— Instrument cluster
x With an on-board diagnostic function included for each multiplex module, display of DTCs using the
Integrated Diagnostic Software (IDS) has improved serviceability.
End Of Sie
09-40–8
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
id094000101100
INSTRUMENT
R.H.D. KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
CLUSTER
(WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM)
ABS HU/CM (WITH ABS)

DSC HU/CM (WITH DSC)
PCM (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo,

MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
PCM (ZJ, ZY) BCM

EPS CONTROL MODULE
TCM (WITH CVT) THEFT-DETERRENT
CONTROL MODULE
(WITH THEFT-
DETERRENT SYSTEM)
SAS CONTROL MODULE
am2zzn0000143
End Of Sie
09-40–9
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
id094000101200
R.H.D.
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)
301
PCM
309
MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo WITH CVT
1A TCM
SAS CONTROL EPS CONTROL
PCM
MODULE MODULE
A17 A7
1B
TWISTED PAIR 3C 3D 1G 1H
ZJ, ZY
4V 4X
1AE 4U 7X 2B
INSTRUMENT
PCM BCM CLUSTER
1AI 4W 7V 2D
6X 6V
M J H L TWISTED
PAIR K I F E
DSC HU/CM ABS HU/CM 2G 2I THEFT- DLC-2
DETERRENT
KEYLESS
CONTROL
WITH DSC WITH ABS CONTROL : CAN_H
MODULE
MODULE
: CAN_L
WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS WITH THEFT-DETERRENT
AND START SYSTEM SYSTEM
am2zzn0000133
End Of Sie
CAN SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
id094000101000
Mechanism of CAN System-Related Module
x A CAN system-related module is composed of an electrical circuit, CPU, and input/output interface.
x The size of the module has been reduced due to the elimination of the bulky, superfluous, input/output interface
in the conventional type of electrical module.
x The CPU (multiplex block) controls all signals exchanged on the CAN harness.
x Communication with non-multiplex parts is carried out by conventional input/output interface.
x The functions of each component are shown below.
09-40–10
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Function
Electrical circuit Supplies power to CPU and vicinity, and to input/output interface.
Computation processing block Control function has been expanded, and when transmission is necessary,
transmitted data is stored in a multiplex block. If a multiplex block receives a
request to read stored data, transmitted data is read from the multiplex block.
CPU
Multiplex block Transmits data received from bus line to computation processing block. In
addition, sends transmitted data stored from computation processing block to
bus line.
Input/Output interface Electrically converts information signals from switches to, be input to CPU,
and signals output from CPU for operating actuator or indicator lights.
CAN HARNESS
(TWISTED PAIR) CONVENTIONAL
WIRING HARNESS
INPUT OUTPUT
SIGNAL SIGNAL
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
INPUT OUTPUT CPU MULTIPLEX INPUT OUTPUT

BLOCK INTERFACE INTERFACE
INTERFACE INTERFACE
CPU
COMPUTATION
PROCESSING BLOCK
CONVENTIONAL MODULE
CAN SYSTEM-RELATED MODULE

am2zzn0000058
Twisted Pair
x The multichannel use two spirally twisted wires
called a twisted pair, and each wire, CAN_L and
CAN_H, has its own special function.
x Both bus lines are opposite phase voltage. This
allows for minimal noise being emitted and makes
if difficult for noise interference to be received. CA N_H
CA N_L
am2zzn0000058
Time Division Multiplex

x For information exchange between electrical modules in a conventional system, a wire connection was
necessary for each information signal. However, by sending the different signal at varying times over one
channel, it is possible to send a large amount of information via a small harness.
09-40–11
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
x In the conventional, non-multiplex system, in order to control the illumination of the five bulbs, one switch and
one channel was necessary for each bulb. For bulbs B and C to illuminate, switches B and C must be ON and
electricity must flow through the channel. With the time multiplex system, this can be done through one
channel. The channel is comprised of five data signal transmitters which transmit either a “0” or “1” signal to
indicate whether a bulb turns ON or OFF. For example, to illuminate bulbs B and C, transmitters B and C
transmit a “1” and transmitters A, D, and E transmit a “0”. When the receiver receives these signal, bulbs B and
C illuminate.
TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEX SYSTEM
NON-MULTIPLEX SYSTEM
DATA
E D C B A
A 0 A 0 0 1 1 0
0 0
B 1 B
1 1
C 1 C A A
1 1 0 0
D 0 D B B
0 0 1 1
E 0 E C 0=OFF C
0 0 1 1=ON 1
D D
0 0
E E
0 0
EACH SIGNAL IS TRANSMITTED EACH SIGNAL IS OUTPUT ONE BY

ONE BY ONE THROUGH THE ONE AS IT IS RECEIVED FROM THE
CHANNEL AS IT IS RECEIVED. CHANNEL.
am2zzn0000058
Vehicle CAN System

x By rearranging the multiple signal, common information between the CAN system-related modules is
transmitted and received through the multichannel.
x The signal transmitted by one CAN system-related module is sent through the multichannel to all the CAN
system-related modules, but only the concerned module (s) receives the signal and performs the appropriate
operation (ex. light illumination, fan operation).
CONVENTIONAL
SYSTEM CAN SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL CAN SYSTEM-

MODULE RELATED
MODULE
CAN SYSTEM- CAN SYSTEM-

ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL
RELATED RELATED
MODULE MODULE
MODULE MODULE
am2zzn0000059
09-40–12
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN signal table
x Signals transmitted using the CAN system are as follows:
HS-CAN (ZJ, ZY)
OUT: Output (sends signal)
IN: Input (receives signal)
Multiplex module
Keyles
s Theft-
control deterre
ABS
module nt
HU/CM
(with control
(with
Signal advanc SAS module EPS Instrum
ABS), TCM
PCM BCM ed control (with control ent
DSC (CVT)
keyless module theft- module cluster
HU/CM
entry deterre
(with
and nt
DSC)
start system
system )
)
Immobilizer system related OUT IN IN
information IN OUT
Engine condition OUT IN IN IN IN IN IN
IN
OUT
Engine torque (DSC)
OUT IN
Target engine torque IN OUT
Engine status at idle OUT IN
IN
OUT IN IN IN IN IN
Engine speed (DSC)
OUT IN
OUT IN IN IN IN IN
Vehicle speed
IN OUT
IN
Accelerator pedal position OUT IN
(DSC)
Brake pedal position OUT IN
Brake pedal switch condition OUT IN IN
Brake system condition OUT IN IN
Distance travelled OUT IN
IN OUT
Torque converter status IN OUT IN
OUT IN
Torque converter rotation ratio IN OUT
Selector lever position OUT IN IN IN
IN
OUT IN
(DSC)
IN OUT IN IN
Gear position
IN OUT IN
OUT IN
OUT IN
Target gear position IN OUT IN
Throttle position OUT IN
Target gear position OUT IN
Tire size OUT IN
Fuel cut request IN OUT
CVT system-related information IN OUT
Cruise control system-related
OUT IN
information
OUT IN IN
MIL illumination request
IN OUT
Fuel injection amount OUT IN
09-40–13
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
Multiplex module
Keyles
s Theft-
control deterre
ABS
module nt
HU/CM
(with control
(with
Signal advanc SAS module EPS Instrum
ABS), TCM
PCM BCM ed control (with control ent
DSC (CVT)
HU/CM
entry deterre
(with
and nt
DSC)
start system
system )
)
Engine coolant temperature OUT IN IN
Generator warning light illumination
OUT IN
request
Cruise control illumination request OUT IN
Wheel speed (LF, RF, LR, RR) IN OUT IN IN
Brake system status IN OUT IN
Brake system warning light
OUT IN
illumination request
ABS status IN OUT IN
ABS condition IN OUT IN
ABS warning light illumination
OUT IN
request
Door/liftgate opening and closing OUT IN IN
Door lock-link switch condition OUT IN IN
Key reminder switch condition OUT IN
Key cylinder switch condition OUT IN
Turn indicator light illumination
OUT IN
request
Liftgate opener condition OUT IN
High beam illumination request OUT IN
Front fog light condition OUT IN
Rear fog light condition OUT IN
Running light condition IN OUT IN
Parking brake position OUT IN
Brake fluid level OUT IN
TNS relay condition IN OUT IN
Oil pressure switch condition OUT IN
Front wiper switch condition IN OUT
Keyless warning buzzer operation
OUT IN
request
Keyless indicator light illumination
OUT IN
request
Keyless warning light illumination
OUT IN
request
Buckle switch condition (driver-side) IN OUT IN
Buckle switch condition (passenger-
OUT IN
side)
Air bag system warning buzzer
OUT IN
condition
Air bag system warning light OUT IN

illumination request IN OUT
Steering angle/steering angle IN
OUT
sensor condition (DSC)
EPS condition OUT IN
09-40–14
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
HS-CAN (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))
OUT: Output (sends signal)
IN: Input (receives signal)
Multiplex module
Keyless
control Theft-
ABS HU/
module deterren
CM
(with t control
(with
Signal advance SAS module EPS Instrum
ABS),
PCM BCM d control (with control ent
DSC HU/
CM
entry deterren
(with
and t
DSC)
start system)
system)
OUT IN IN
Immobilizer system related information
IN OUT
Engine condition OUT IN IN IN IN IN IN
IN
OUT
Engine torque (DSC)
OUT IN
IN
Engine speed OUT IN IN IN IN IN
(DSC)
Vehicle speed OUT IN IN IN IN IN
OUT IN
Accelerator pedal position
IN OUT
OUT IN IN
Brake pedal switch condition
IN OUT
Brake system condition OUT IN IN
Distance travelled OUT IN
IN
Gear position OUT IN
(DSC)
Tire size OUT IN
MIL illumination request OUT IN
Fuel injection amount OUT IN
Engine coolant temperature OUT IN
Generator warning light illumination
OUT IN
request
Cruise control illumination request OUT IN
Wheel speed (LF, RF, LR, RR) IN OUT IN
Brake system warning light illumination
OUT IN
request
ABS condition IN OUT
ABS warning light illumination request OUT IN
ABS torque data type IN OUT
Door/liftgate opening and closing OUT IN IN
Door lock-link switch condition OUT IN IN
Key reminder switch condition OUT IN
Key cylinder switch condition OUT IN
Turn indicator light illumination request OUT IN
Liftgate opener condition OUT IN
High beam illumination request OUT IN
Front fog light condition OUT IN
Rear fog light condition OUT IN
Parking brake position OUT IN
Brake fluid level OUT IN
Oil pressure switch condition OUT IN
Keyless warning buzzer operation
OUT IN
request
09-40–15
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
Multiplex module
Keyless
control Theft-
ABS HU/
module deterren
CM
(with t control
(with
Signal advance SAS module EPS Instrum
ABS),
PCM BCM d control (with control ent
DSC HU/
CM
entry deterren
(with
and t
DSC)
start system)
system)
Keyless indicator light illumination
OUT IN
request
Keyless warning light illumination
OUT IN
request
Buckle switch condition (driver-side) IN OUT IN
Buckle switch condition (passenger-
OUT IN
side)
Air bag system warning buzzer
OUT IN
condition
Air bag system warning light OUT IN

illumination request IN OUT
Steering angle/steering angle sensor IN
OUT
condition (DSC)
EPS condition OUT IN
Clutch pedal switch condition IN OUT
On-board Diagnostic System Outline

x The CAN system related module has an on-board diagnostic function. In case a malfunction occurs, the
malfunctioning part can be determined.
x The on-board diagnostic function consists of the following functions: a malfunction detection function, which
detects malfunctions in the CAN system-related parts; a memory function, which stores detected DTCs; a
display function, which indicates malfunctioning areas and status via DTC display.
x Using the Integrated Diagnostic Sofware (IDS), DTCs can be read out and deleted.
x A fail-safe function is equipped in case a malfunction occurs in the CAN system. The sending module sends an
error signal and the receiving module illuminates a warning light to ensure safety.
09-40–16
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
On-board Diagnostic System Construction and Operation
Block Diagram
R.H.D.
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)
301
PCM
309
CVT
MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo
1A TCM
SAS CONTROL EPS CONTROL
PCM
MODULE MODULE
A17 A7
1B
TWISTED PAIR 3C 3D 1G 1H
ZJ, ZY
4V 4X
1AE 4U 7X 2B
INSTRUMENT
PCM BCM CLUSTER
1AI 4W 7V 2D
6X 6V
M J H L TWISTED
PAIR K I F E
DSC HU/CM ABS HU/CM 2G 2I THEFT- DLC-2
DETERRENT
KEYLESS
CONTROL
WITH DSC WITH ABS CONTROL : CAN_H
MODULE
MODULE
: CAN_L
WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS WITH THEFT-DETERRENT
AND START SYSTEM SYSTEM
am2zzn0000134
Failure detection function

x The failure detection function in each CAN system-related module detects malfunctions in input/output signals.
x This function outputs the DTC for the detected malfunction to the DLC-2, and also sends the detected result to
the memory function and fail-safe function.
Fail-safe function
x When the failure detection function determines that there is a malfunction, the fail-safe function illuminates a
warning light to inform the driver of the malfunction.
09-40–17
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
Memory function
x The memory function stores the DTC for the malfunction of input/output signals for related parts, as determined
by the failure detection function.
Self-malfunction diagnostic function

x The self-malfunction diagnostic function determines that there is a malfunction, and outputs a signal, as a DTC,
to the DLC-2. The DTC can be read out using the Integretad Diagnostic Software (IDS).
HS-CAN
DTC output module DTC Malfunction location
U0073:00 CAN system communication error
U0101:00 Communication error to TCM
x Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with ABS)
U0121:00
PCM (ZJ, ZY) x Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
U0140:00 Communication error to BCM
U0151:00 Communication error to SAS control module
U0155:00 Communication error to instrument cluster
U0121:00
x Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
PCM (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo) U0140:00 Communication error to BCM
U0155 Communication error to instrument cluster
U0416 Communication error to EPS control module
U0423 Abnormal message from instrument cluster
U0121:00
U0122:86 x Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with ABS)
U0122:87 x Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
PCM (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)) U0155:00
x Communication error to keyless control module (vehicles with
advanced keyless and start system)
U0300:87
x Communication error to instrument cluster (vehicles with keyless entry
system)
U0100:00 Communication error to PCM
ABS HU/CM*1
U2101:00 Abnormal message from instrument cluster
DSC HU/CM*2 U0126:00 Communication error to EPS control module
U2101:00 Abnormal message from instrument cluster
BCM U0101:00 Communication error to TCM
U0121:00
TCM*3
U0121:00
*4 U0028:87 Communication error to BCM
Keyless control module
SAS control module
09-40–18
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC output module DTC Malfunction location
EPS control module
U0121:00
Theft-deterrent control
module*5
U0101:00 Communication error to TCM
U0121:00
Instrument cluster x Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
U0131:00 Communication error to EPS control module
U0151:00 Communication error to SAS control module
U0214:00 Communication error to keyless control module
*1 : With ABS
*2 : With DSC
*3 : CVT
*4 : With advanced keyless entry and start system
*5 : With theft-deterrent system
Narrowing down malfunction locations

x The on-board diagnostic function, by verifying the detected DTC information from each module, can narrow
down a CAN system malfunction location. Refer to the self-malfunction diagnostic function for detailed
information regarding DTCs. (See 09-40-18 Self-malfunction diagnostic function.)
09-40–19
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
Flowchart
Vehicle in repair shop
Verify repair order

form and symptom
When CAN system is thought to be malfunctioning based on repair order form and symptom,
perform on-board diagnosis using the following procedure.
Perform vehicle identification using IDS.
Yes No
Is vehicle identified?
Verify communication condition

Verify DTCs of all modules. between IDS and vehicle.
No
Are any DTCs Perform symptom troubleshooting.
output?
Yes
Perform troubleshooting according

Yes
Are DTCs not shown in to corresponding DTC inspection.
DTC table output? After repair, verify DTCs of all
control modules.
No
Yes
Are DTCs U0001:00, U0001:88, Inspect DTCs U0001:00, U0001:88, U0073:00.
U0073:00 displayed?
No
There could be open circuit in CAN lines.
Determine the open circuit location using DTC output pattern.
am2zzn0000134
Example (L.H.D. (ZJ, ZY)): DSC HU/CM-related wiring harness open circuit (if DTC is output)
1. Verify the CAN system-related module DTCs and the failed module using the Integrated Diagnostic
Software (IDS).
Module Displayed DTC Probable malfunction location
PCM (PCM) U0121:00 Communication error to DSC HU/CM
BCM (BCM) U0121:00 Communication error to DSC HU/CM
EPS (EPS control module) U0121:00 Communication error to DSC HU/CM
IC (Instrument cluster) U0121:00 Communication error to DSC HU/CM
Module Fail
ABS (DSC HU/CM) u
09-40–20
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
SAS EPS
CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE MODULE
1G 1H
3C 3D
NORMAL
CAN_H CONNECTOR
C-03
1AE 7X 6X 2B
BRANCH BRANCH BRANCH INSTRUMENT
PCM BRANCH BCM C
A B D CLUSTER
1AI 7V 6V 2D
COMMUNICATION
CAN_L ERROR
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
2G 2I F E
KEYLESS DLC-2
M J CONTROL
: FRONT HARNESS MODULE
DSC HU/CM : DASHBOARD HARNESS
FAIL : REAR HARNESS
am2zzn0000135
2. Despite normal communication between the PCM and instrument cluster, a communication error DTC is
displayed for the signal between the DSC HU/CM and PCM / BCM / EPS control module / instrument cluster. In
addition, the wiring harness between the DSC HU/CM and branch A is considered to be malfunctioning
because “Fail” is displayed for the DSC HU/CM.
Example (R.H.D. (ZJ, ZY)): DSC HU/CM-related wiring harness open circuit (if DTC is output)
1. Verify the CAN system-related module DTCs and the failed module using the Integrated Diagnostic
Software (IDS).
Module Displayed DTC Probable malfunction location
PCM (PCM) U0121:00 Communication error to DSC HU/CM
BCM (BCM) U0121:00 Communication error to DSC HU/CM
EPS (EPS control module) U0121:00 Communication error to DSC HU/CM
IC (Instrument cluster) U0121:00 Communication error to DSC HU/CM
Module Fail
ABS (DSC HU/CM) u
09-40–21
TO MODEL INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
SAS EPS
CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE MODULE
: FRONT HARNESS
3C 3D 1G 1H
: DASHBOARD HARNESS
: REAR HARNESS
NORMAL
CAN_H CONNECTOR
C-06
1AE 4U 7X 2B
BRANCH BRANCH INSTRUMENT
PCM BRANCH BCM
A B C CLUSTER
1AI 4W 7V 2D
6X 6V
CAN_L
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
ERROR ERROR
K I
THEFT- F E
M J 2G 2I
DETERRENT
KEYLESS CONTROL DLC-2
DSC HU/CM
CONTROL MODULE
FAIL MODULE
am2zzn0000135
2. Despite normal communication between the PCM and instrument cluster, a communication error DTC is
displayed for the signal between the DSC HU/CM and PCM / BCM / EPS control module / instrument cluster. In
addition, the wiring harness between the DSC HU/CM and branch A is considered to be malfunctioning
because “Fail” is displayed for the DSC HU/CM.
End Of Sie
09-40–22
TO MODEL INDEX
SECTION
PAGE 1 0F 17
AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING ALARM
A FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–6
AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/
A/C COMPRESSOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–6
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–19 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–5
OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR AIR BAG SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–3
CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–30 AIR CLEANER CONSTRUCTION
A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL OUTLINE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13B–2
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–29 AIR CLEANER CONSTRUCTION
A/C COMPRESSOR CONTROL SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13A–3
DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR AIR FILTER FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–18
CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–30 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR,
A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL BLOCK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–33 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . .01-40A–48
A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL OPERATION AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR,
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–33 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
A/C CUT-OFF CONTROL OUTLINE FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–48
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–32 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR,
A/C UNIT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . 07-11–11 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
ABS CM PART FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–6 HEATER CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
ABS CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–13 [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–32
ABS CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–7 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR,
ABS CONTROL OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–7 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
ABS HU PART CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–3 HEATER CONTROL OPERATION
ABS HU PART FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–3 [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–32
ABS HU/CM CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–3 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR,
ABS OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–1 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
ABS STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–1 HEATER CONTROL OUTLINE
ABS SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–3 [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–31
ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION
ABS SENSOR ROTOR [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–11
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–10 AIR INTAKE CONTROL OPERATION
ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–29
ABS SENSOR ROTOR AIR INTAKE CONTROL OUTLINE
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–17 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–29
ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND AIR INTAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
ABS SENSOR ROTOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–10 DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR
ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR AND CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–29
ABS SENSOR ROTOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–17 AIR INTAKE DUCT
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–17
SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION AIR MIX ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–9 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–11
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR
SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION CONSTRUCTION
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–6 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–12
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL OPERATION
SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–28
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–43 AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL OUTLINE
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–27
SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–43 AIRFLOW MODE CONTROL SYSTEM
ADVANCED KEY CONSTRUCTION/ DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR
OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–28
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–17 AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE CONTROL
ADVANCED KEYLESS START OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
FUNCTION OPERATION [ADVANCED CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–23
KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–14 AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE CONTROL
AIM OF DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–1 OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR
AIR BAG SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–1 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–22
AIR BAG SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . 08-10–2 AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE CONTROL
AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING ALARM SYSTEM DIAGRAM
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–6 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–23
AI–1
TO MODEL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PAGE 2 0F 17
AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL BASIC SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
OPERATION [FULL-AUTO AIR [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–7
CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–25 BASIC SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL OUTLINE VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–1
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–25 BELT GRIP PRESSURE LINEAR
AIRFLOW VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM SOLENOID FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–21
DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR BELT GRIP PRESSURE LINEAR
CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–25 SOLENOID OPERATION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . 05-19–21
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION BLOWER MOTOR CONSTRUCTION
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–15 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–12
ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–10 BLOWER MOTOR CONSTRUCTION
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–10
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–11 BODY AND ACCESSORIES
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-00–1
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–11 BODY AND ACCESSORIES NEW
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-00–2
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–11 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
AUDIO SYSTEM BLOCK OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–1
DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–3 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
AUDIO SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–1 STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–1
AUDIO SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
AUDIO SYSTEM STRUCTURAL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–2
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–2 BODY PANEL OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–1
AUDIO UNIT CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–5 BODY SHELL STRUCTURAL VIEW [3HB] . . . . . . 09-10–2
AUDIO UNIT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–5 BODY SHELL STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD] . . . . . . 09-10–2
AUTO LEVEL CONTROL (ALC) BODY SHELL STRUCTURAL VIEW [5HB] . . . . . . 09-10–3
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–6 BRAKE ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-00–1
AUTO LEVEL CONTROL (ALC) BRAKE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-00–1
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–6 BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR
AUTO LIGHT SENSOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–12 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–18
AUTO LIGHT SENSOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–12 BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–8 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–18
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–6 BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP)
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM STRUCTURAL SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–6 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–7
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM WIRING BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP)
DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–7 SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
AUTO WIPER SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–16 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–5
AUTO WIPER SYSTEM OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–15 BRAKE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-00–2
AUTO WIPER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL BRAKE SYSTEM/ABS WARNING LIGHT
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–16 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–11
AUTO WIPER SYSTEM WIRING BRAKE SYSTEM/ABS WARNING LIGHT
DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–16 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–11
AUTOMATIC SHIFT CONTROL OUTLINE BUMPER CONSTRUCTION [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–4
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–23 BUMPER CONSTRUCTION [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–5
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE BUMPER CONSTRUCTION [5HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–6
[FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–2
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OUTLINE
[FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–2
C
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT CABIN CONSTRUCTION [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–3
MECHANISM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–1 CABIN CONSTRUCTION [4SD, 5HB] . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–3
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR
MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–1 CONSTRUCTION
AUXILIARY JACK [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–15
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–12 CAMSHAFT CONSTRUCTION
AUXILIARY JACK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–12 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10B–6
AUXILIARY KEY CONSTRUCTION CAMSHAFT CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . 01-10A–11
[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–24 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–10
B CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
BASIC SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–10 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–7
BASIC SYSTEM OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–1
AI–2
TO MODEL INDEX
PAGE 3 0F 17 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP)
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–46 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40C–5
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP)
FUNCTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–10 SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–40
FUNCTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–7 CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP)
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR SWITCH FUNCTION
FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–46 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40B–6
CAN SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–10 CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP)
CAN SYSTEM STRUCTURAL SWITCH FUNCTION
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–9 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40C–5
CAN SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–10 CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP)
CATALYST EXHAUST GAS SWITCH FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–39
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION CONSTRUCTION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-10A–2
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–6 CLUTCH STRUCTURAL VIEW [B65M-R] . . . . . . .05-10B–1
CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM CLUTCH STRUCTURAL VIEW [F35M-R] . . . . . . .05-10A–1
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–5 COIL ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION
CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–5 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–24
CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM COIL ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–20
CENTER PANEL UNIT COMBINED SENSOR
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–3 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–17
CENTER PANEL UNIT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–3 COMBINED SENSOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–17
CENTRIFUGAL BALANCE CLUTCH COMMON RAIL CONSTRUCTION
OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–13 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14C–4
CENTRIFUGAL BALANCE CLUTCH COMMON RAIL CONSTRUCTION/
OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–13 OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–4
CENTRIFUGAL BALANCE CLUTCH COMMON RAIL INJECTION SYSTEM
STRUCTURE [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–13 OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–3
CHARCOAL CANISTER COMMON RAIL INJECTION SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . 01-16A–8 OUTLINE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–2
CHARCOAL CANISTER FUNCTION COMMON RAIL INJECTION SYSTEM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–8 OUTLINE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14C–2
CHARGING SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . 01-17A–1 CONDENSER CONSTRUCTION
CHARGING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–19
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-17B–1 CONDENSER CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–19
CHARGING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW CONNECTING ROD CONSTRUCTION
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-17C–1 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-10B–4
CHARGING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL CONNECTING ROD, CONNECTING
VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-17A–1 ROD BEARING CONSTRUCTION
CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-10A–6
[3HB, 5HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–5 CONTROL ROD CONSTRUCTION/
CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR CONSTRUCTION OPERATION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-15A–4
[4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–6 CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–2
CONSTRUCTION CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–18 [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40B–1
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONSTRUCTION CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–13 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–6
CONSTRUCTION [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-10B–1 CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–2
CONSTRUCTION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-10A–1 CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
CLUTCH OUTLINE [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-10B–1 [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
CLUTCH OUTLINE [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-10A–1 (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40B–6
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40B–2
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–7
AI–3
TO MODEL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PAGE 4 0F 17
CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–8 SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–45
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40B–8 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR FUNCTION [MZ-
CONTROL VALVE BODY OUTLINE CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–9
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–11 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
CONTROL VALVE BODY OUTLINE SENSOR FUNCTION
[FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–17 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–7
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–37 SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–45
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–9 CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–8
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) CRANKSHAFT, MAIN BEARING
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–16 CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–4
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM BLOCK
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–16 DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-20–2
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–7 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-20–1
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–1 STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-20–2
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM CRUSHABLE ZONE
STRUCTURAL VIEW CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–1
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 CURRENT SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
(Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–2 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–49
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM CURRENT SENSOR FUNCTION
STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–1 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–49
COOLING FAN COMPONENT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–9
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12B–4 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
COOLING FAN COMPONENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–9
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12C–2 TRANSAXLE) CROSS-SECTIONAL
COOLING FAN COMPONENT VIEW [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–3
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12A–3 TRANSAXLE) OUTLINE
COOLING SYSTEM CAP, COOLANT [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–2
RESERVE TANK CONSTRUCTION CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12B–2 TRANSAXLE) SHIFT MECHANISM
COOLING SYSTEM CAP, COOLANT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–1
RESERVE TANK CONSTRUCTION CVT (CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12C–1 TRANSAXLE) SHIFT MECHANISM
COOLING SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–1
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12B–2 CYLINDER BLOCK CONSTRUCTION
COOLING SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]. . .01-12A–2 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–3
COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . 05-19–12 CYLINDER HEAD CONSTRUCTION
COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10B–2
[FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–19 CYLINDER HEAD CONSTRUCTION
COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10C–2
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12B–1 CYLINDER HEAD CONSTRUCTION
COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–3
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12C–1 CYLINDER HEAD COVER
COOLING SYSTEM OUTLINE CONSTRUCTION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12A–1 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10B–1
COOLING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL CYLINDER HEAD COVER
VIEW [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12B–1 CONSTRUCTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . 01-10C–1
COOLING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW CYLINDER HEAD COVER
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12C–1 CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–2
COOLING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
VIEW [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12A–1 CONSTRUCTION
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10B–3
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40B–9 CONSTRUCTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . 01-10C–2
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–3
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–7
AI–4
TO MODEL INDEX
PAGE 5 0F 17
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
DSC CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–15
D DSC CONTROL OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–15
DSC HU PART FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–6
DSC HU PART
DECELERATION MECHANISM OUTLINE
ONSTRUCTION/OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–6
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–9
DSC HU/CM CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–5
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
DSC INDICATOR LIGHT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–18
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
DSC INDICATOR LIGHT
OPERATION
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–18
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–8
DIRECT ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL
FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–19
OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–34
DIRECT ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–19
OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–33
DTC DETECTION LOGIC AND
DLC-2 CONSTRUCTION [ABS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02A–5
CONDITIONS [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-02A–12
DLC-2 CONSTRUCTION [DYNAMIC
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)
STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-02B–8
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–4
DLC-2 CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–4
DLC-2 OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–10
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–1
DOOR STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–2
DOOR STRUCTURAL VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–1
STRUCTURAL VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–3
DOORS AND LIFTGATE OUTLINE
[4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–1
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–5
DOORS AND LIFTGATE OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–1
DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM OUTLINE [ADVANCED
KEYLESS AND START
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–10 E
DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM OUTLINE
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–7 EBD CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–14
DOUBLE SYNCHRONIZER MECHANISM OPERATION EBD CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–9
[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–6 EBD CONTROL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-13–8
DOUBLE SYNCHRONIZER MECHANISM STRUCTURE EC-AT OPERATION CHART [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . 05-17–4
[B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–4 EGR CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
DOUBLE SYNCHRONIZER MECHANISM STRUCTURE [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–29
[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–5 EGR CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . .01-40A–29
DRIVE BELT CONSTRUCTION EGR CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–28
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10B–5 EGR COOLER FUNCTION
DRIVE BELT CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . 01-10A–8 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16B–4
DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM EGR VALVE CONSTRUCTION/
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–24 OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . .01-16B–3
DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM EGR VALVE CONSTRUCTION/
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–23 OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16A–4
DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM EGR VALVE FUNCTION
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–22 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16B–3
DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM EGR VALVE FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16A–4
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–23 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–5
WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–23 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
DRIVE SHAFT CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-13–1 CONTROL MODULE CONSTRUCTION
DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL BLOCK AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–14
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–13 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL OPERATION MOTOR CONSTRUCTION AND
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–14 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–11
DRIVE-BY-WIRE CONTROL OUTLINE ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–12 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–1
DRIVELINE/AXLE ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 03-00–1 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
DRIVELINE/AXLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-00–1 STRUCTURAL VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–3
DRIVELINE/AXLE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . 03-00–1 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–5
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–7 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WARNING LIGHT FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–16
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–6 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
DRIVING MODE DETERMINATION WARNING LIGHT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–16
OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29 ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL BLOCK
DSC CM PART FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–12 DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–34
AI–5
TO MODEL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PAGE 6 0F 17
ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–34 (ECT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
ELECTRICAL FAN CONTROL OUTLINE OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–7
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–34 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM (ECT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
BLOCK DIAGRAM [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–21 OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–6
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–13 (ECT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–40
[FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM (ECT) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . 01-40A–40
FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–13 ENGINE FEATURES
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–4
FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–20 ENGINE FEATURES
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–4
OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–20 ENGINE FEATURES [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–2
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM ENGINE FRONT COVER
STRUCTURAL VIEW [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–15 CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–7
ELECTRONIC SPARK ADVANCE ENGINE MOUNT CONSTRUCTION
BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–26 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10B–8
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–26 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10C–4
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–25 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–21
EMISSION SYSTEM OUTLINE ENGINE MOUNT OPERATION
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16B–1 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–22
EMISSION SYSTEM OUTLINE ENGINE MOUNT OUTLINE
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16C–1 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10B–7
EMISSION SYSTEM OUTLINE ENGINE MOUNT OUTLINE
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16A–1 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10C–3
EMISSION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW ENGINE MOUNT OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–20
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16B–2 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
EMISSION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–8
VIEW [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16A–2 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–2 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–10
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM BLOCK ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00–5
DIAGRAM [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40B–6 ENGINE STRUCTURAL VIEW
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM BLOCK [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10B–1
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–10 ENGINE STRUCTURAL VIEW
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10C–1
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40B–3 ENGINE STRUCTURAL VIEW
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–2
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–5 ENGINE-TRANSAXLE TOTAL CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–35
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40B–1 ENTERTAINMENT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–1
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–1 CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–7
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–2 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM RELATION CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE
CHART [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–10 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–6
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
STRUCTURAL VIEW CONTROL SYSTEM STRUCTURE
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40B–2 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–6
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS (EVAP)
STRUCTURAL VIEW CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–2 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–3
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–4 CONSTRUCTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–15
DIAGRAM [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40B–4 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING SENSOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL
DIAGRAM [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–3 AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–11
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING EXHAUST GAS PURIFICATION SYSTEM
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–6 OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–3
AI–6
TO MODEL INDEX
PAGE 7 0F 17
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FUEL FILTER CONSTRUCTION

SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14C–5
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 FUEL FILTER CONSTRUCTION/
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–5
SYSTEM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 FUEL GAUGE CONTROL
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–17
SYSTEM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 FUEL GAUGE CONTROL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–17
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FUEL INJECTION CONTROL BLOCK
SYSTEM OUTLINE DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–20
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16B–3 FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–20
SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–4 FUEL INJECTION CONTROL OUTLINE
EXHAUST SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–19
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-15B–1 FUEL INJECTOR CONSTRUCTION
EXHAUST SYSTEM OUTLINE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–4
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-15C–1 FUEL INJECTOR CONSTRUCTION
EXHAUST SYSTEM OUTLINE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14C–5
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-15A–1 FUEL INJECTOR CONSTRUCTION/
EXHAUST SYSTEM STRUCTURAL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–6
VIEW [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-15B–1 FUEL INJECTOR FUNCTION
EXHAUST SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–6
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-15C–1 FUEL INJECTOR OPERATION
EXHAUST SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–5
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-15A–1 FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT OUTLINE CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[3HB, 5HB]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–2 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40B–10
EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT OUTLINE FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR
[4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–2 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
EXTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40C–8
[3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–1 FUEL PUMP CONTROL BLOCK
EXTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–25
[4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–1 FUEL PUMP CONTROL OPERATION
EXTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–25
[5HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–2 FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTLINE
[ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–25
FUEL PUMP RELAY FUNCTION
F [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–8
FUEL PUMP UNIT CONSTRUCTION/
FEEDBACK CONTROL OPERATION OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–5
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–34 FUEL PUMP UNIT FUNCTION
FORWARD CLUTCH, 3-4 CLUTCH [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–4
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT OUTLINE FUEL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–18 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14C–2
FORWARD/REVERSE SWITCHING FUEL SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . .01-14A–3
MECHANISM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–9 FUEL SYSTEM OUTLINE
FRONT AXLE CROSS-SECTIONAL [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–1
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-11–1 FUEL SYSTEM OUTLINE
FRONT AXLE OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-11–1 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14C–1
FRONT BRAKE (DISC) FUEL SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–1
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–9 FUEL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–2
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–5 FUEL SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-13–1 [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–2
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT STRUCTURAL FUEL TANK CONSTRUCTION
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-13–1 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–3
FRONT FOG LIGHT FUEL TANK CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–18 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14C–2
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND COIL FUEL TANK CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . .01-14A–3
SPRING CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-13–1 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–19 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40B–8
FRONT SUSPENSION OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-13–1 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
FRONT SUSPENSION STRUCTURAL CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-13–1 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40C–6
AI–7
TO MODEL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PAGE 8 0F 17
FUEL-FILLER CAP CONSTRUCTION/ HVAC ABBREVIATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–1
OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . .01-16B–5 HVAC FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–2
FUEL-FILLER CAP CONSTRUCTION/ HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [FULL-AUTO
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16A–8 AIR CONDITIONER
FUEL-FILLER CAP FUNCTION (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–2
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16B–5 HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [FULL-AUTO
FUEL-FILLER CAP FUNCTION AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–4
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16A–8 HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-00–3
FUNCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR HVAC SPECIFICATIONS [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] .
CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–18 07-00–6
FUSE BLOCK CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–7 HYDRAULIC CONTROL MECHANISM
OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–10
G I
GENERATOR CONSTRUCTION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-17A–1 IGNITION COIL CONSTRUCTION/
GENERATOR CONTROL BLOCK OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-18–2
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–36 IGNITION SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . 01-18–1
GENERATOR CONTROL OPERATION IGNITION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–36 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-18–1
GENERATOR CONTROL OUTLINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–36 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
GLASS OUTLINE [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–1 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
GLASS OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–1 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–21
GLASS STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–3 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
GLASS STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–2 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
GLOW PLUG CONSTRUCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–17
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13B–3 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM FUNCTION
GLOW PLUG FUNCTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13B–3 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–23
GLOW SYSTEM OPERATION IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM FUNCTION
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13B–3 [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–19
GLOW SYSTEM OUTLINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13B–3 VIEW [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
GLOW SYSTEM STRUCTURE START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–20
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13B–3 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
GRADE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/ VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14B–16
OPERATION [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–18 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM WIRING
GRADE SENSOR FUNCTION DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–17 AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–21
GRADE SENSOR LEARNING OUTLINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–24 [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–17
INBOARD LIGHT CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–20
H CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–18
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–13 FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–18
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–13 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–24
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–13 INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–24
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–13 INSTANT MOBILITY SYSTEM
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-12–1
CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–21 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
HIGH/LOW TEMPERATURE MODE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–13
CONTROL OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–24 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–2
HOLD SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/ INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
OPERATION [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–23 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–2
HOLD SWITCH FUNCTION INSTRUMENT CLUSTER STRUCTURAL
[FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–23 VIEW [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo,
HORN CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–21 MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–11
AI–8
TO MODEL INDEX
PAGE 9 0F 17
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER STRUCTURAL INTRUDER SENSOR OPERATION
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–8 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SYSTEM SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–36
WIRING DIAGRAM [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, INTRUDER SENSOR OPERATION
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–6 [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–32
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SYSTEM INTRUSION-MINIMIZING BRAKE PEDAL
WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–4 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–3
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) INTRUSION-MINIMIZING BRAKE PEDAL
SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–3
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–8
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT)
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–6
J
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) JOINT SHAFT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-13–1
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–41
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–41
K
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) KEY CONSTRUCTION [KEYLESS
SENSOR NO.2 CONSTRUCTION/ ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–20
OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–8 KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–5
SENSOR NO.2 CONSTRUCTION/ KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–6 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–4
INTAKE MANIFOLD CONSTRUCTION KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–4 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–5
INTAKE MANIFOLD CONSTRUCTION/ KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . 01-13B–3 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–4
INTAKE SHUTTER VALVE KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–5
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16B–4 KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM
INTAKE SHUTTER VALVE FUNCTION STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–4
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16B–4 KEY REMINDER WARNING ALARM CONSTRUCTION/
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . 01-13A–2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–14
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM OUTLINE KEY REMINDER WARNING ALARM
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13B–1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–14
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM OUTLINE KEYLESS ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13C–1 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM OUTLINE AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–15
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–1 KEYLESS BEEPER CONSTRUCTION/
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM STRUCTURAL OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
VIEW [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13B–1 AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–19
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM STRUCTURAL KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION [ADVANCED
VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–2 KEYLESS AND START
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM VACUUM HOSE SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–10
ROUTING DIAGRAM KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION [KEYLESS
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13B–2 ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–7
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM VACUUM HOSE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OUTLINE
ROUTING DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–3 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–10
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–24 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ,
INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–47
WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–24 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) FUNCTION
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–47
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–23 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . .01-02A–17
INTERIOR TRIM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–1
INTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [3HB]. . . . . 09-17–1
INTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD]. . . . . 09-17–2 L
INTERIOR TRIM STRUCTURAL VIEW [5HB]. . . . . 09-17–3
INTRUDER SENSOR FUNCTION LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–22
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–35 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK
INTRUDER SENSOR FUNCTION ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–31 OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–9
AI–9
TO MODEL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PAGE 10 0F 17
LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR LUBRICATION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION VIEW [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11C–1
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–11 LUBRICATION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–1
[ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–18
M
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION MAGNETIC CLUTCH CONSTRUCTION
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–15 [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–13
LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM MAGNETIC CLUTCH CONSTRUCTION
OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–10
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–14 MAIN RELAY CONTROL BLOCK
LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM OUTLINE DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–12
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–12 MAIN RELAY CONTROL OPERATION
LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–12
STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY MAIN RELAY CONTROL OUTLINE
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–13 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–12
LIFTGATE OPENER SYSTEM WIRING MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION
DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–2
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–14 MALFUNCTION INDICATION FUNCTION
LIGHTING SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–1 [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–2
LIGHTING SYSTEM MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–2 (MAP) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
LIGHTING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–10
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–3 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER WARNING (MAP) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
ALARM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . 09-22–14 OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–8
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER WARNING MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
ALARM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–13 (MAP) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL OUTLINE OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–50
[FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–32 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
LOAD LIMITER RETRACTOR (MAP) SENSOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . 01-40A–50
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–5 MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER FUNCTION
LOAD LIMITER RETRACTOR [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-40B–14
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–4 MANUAL TRANSAXLE
LOAD LIMITER RETRACTOR CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . 05-15B–2
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–4 MANUAL TRANSAXLE CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
LOW ENGINE COOLANT [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–1
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/ MANUAL TRANSAXLE OUTLINE [F35M-R] . . . . 05-15A–1
HIGH ENGINE COOLANT MANUAL TRANSAXLE POWER FLOW
TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT [B65M-R]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–3
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION MANUAL TRANSAXLE POWER FLOW
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–4
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–18 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT
LOW ENGINE COOLANT MECHANISM OUTLINE [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . 05-16B–1
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/ MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT
HIGH ENGINE COOLANT MECHANISM OUTLINE [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . 05-16A–1
TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–18 MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW
LOW ENGINE COOLANT [B65M-R]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-16B–1
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT/ MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT
HIGH ENGINE COOLANT MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VIEW
TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-16A–1
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–18 MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
LUBRICATION SYSTEM FLOW OPERATION
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-11A–2 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–8
LUBRICATION SYSTEM OUTLINE MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-11B–1 OPERATION
LUBRICATION SYSTEM OUTLINE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–6
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11C–1 MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
LUBRICATION SYSTEM OUTLINE OPERATION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-11A–1 [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–43
LUBRICATION SYSTEM STRUCTURAL MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
VIEW [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-11B–1 FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–42
AI–10
TO MODEL INDEX
PAGE 11 0F 17
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
MASTER CYLINDER ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM

CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–5 OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS
MECHANICAL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–1 AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–37
MEMORY FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–9 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
MILLER CYCLE ENGINE OUTLINE OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-02A–1
[ZJ (Miller Cycle Engine)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-02–2
N [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo,
MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–20
NEUTRAL CONTROL OUTLINE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–24 BLOCK DIAGRAM [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . 07-
NEUTRAL SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/ 02–1
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–38 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
NEUTRAL SWITCH FUNCTION OUTLINE [FULL-AUTO AIR
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–38 CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-02–1
NEW STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–26 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
NONRETURN VALVE FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–19
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . 01-14A–4 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
NONRETURN VALVE FUNCTION FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–4
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14A–3 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC OUTLINE
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-02B–1
O [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-02C–1
OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-02A–1
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–19 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–19
OIL FILTER COMPONENT ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION ACTIVE COMMAND MODES FUNCTION
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11B–1 [ABS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04-02A–4
OIL FILTER CONSTRUCTION ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–2 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES FUNCTION [DYNAMIC
OIL JET VALVE CONSTRUCTION/ STABILITY CONTROL
OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . 01-11B–3 (DSC)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04-02B–7
OIL JET VALVE CONSTRUCTION/ ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–3 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES FUNCTION
OIL PAN CONSTRUCTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-02B–10
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11B–2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
OIL PAN CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–2 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES FUNCTION
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-02A–19
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–17 DIAGNOSTIC DATA MEMORY FUNCTION
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-02B–10
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–17 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR LEARNING DIAGNOSTIC DATA MEMORY FUNCTION
OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–24 [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-02A–21
OIL PUMP CONSTRUCTION ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11B–2 EXTERNAL DIAGNOSTIC UNIT
OIL PUMP CONSTRUCTION COMMUNICATION FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . .01-02A–20
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–3 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
OIL PUMP OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–17 EXTERNAL TESTER COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
OIL PUMP OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–11 [ABS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04-02A–4
OIL PUMP OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–15 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
OIL PUMP STRUCTURE [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–16 EXTERNAL TESTER COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
OIL STRAINER CONSTRUCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-02B–10
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11B–2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
OIL STRAINER CONSTRUCTION EXTERNAL TESTER COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11A–2 [DYNAMIC STABILITY
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM CONTROL (DSC)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04-02B–7
FUNCTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–37 EXTERNAL TESTER
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
FUNCTION [KEYLESS ENTRY [ELECTRIC POWER
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–33 STEERING (EPS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–3
AI–11
TO MODEL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PAGE 12 0F 17
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . .05-02B–7 TEST MODE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–7
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING
FUNCTION [ABS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04-02A–2 DIAGRAM [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02B–2
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING
FUNCTION [DYNAMIC STABILITY DIAGRAM [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02C–2
CONTROL (DSC)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04-02B–2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02A–3
FUNCTION [ELECTRIC POWER OUTER MIRROR HEATER
STEERING (EPS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–1 CONSTRUCTION OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–13
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OUTER MIRROR OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–9
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-02–1 OUTER MIRROR STRUCTURAL VIEW. . . . . . . . . 09-12–9
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OUTLINE OF OPERATION [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . 05-17–2
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–7 OUTPUT GEAR OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . 05-17–15
MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-02B–2
P
MALFUNCTION DISPLAY FUNCTION PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . 04-12–1
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-02A–20 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-12–1
MALFUNCTION INDICATION FUNCTION PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-02B–10 INDICATOR CONSTRUCTION/
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–22
OUTLINE [ABS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04-02A–1 PASSENGER SEAT BELT REMINDER
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM INDICATOR OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–21
OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-02B–1 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE CONSTRUCTION/
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–7
OUTLINE [DYNAMIC STABILITY PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
CONTROL (DSC)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04-02B–1 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–7
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM PCM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
OUTLINE [ELECTRIC POWER [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40B–6
STEERING (EPS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–1 PCM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40C–4
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-02–1 PCM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–37
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–6 PCM FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–27
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM PCM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–37
PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION PCM TEMPERATURE SENSOR
[ABS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .04-02A–4 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–42
PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION PCM TEMPERATURE SENSOR
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-02B–11 FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–42
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION
PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-02A–9
[DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL(DSC)] . . . . . .04-02B–6 PISTON CONSTRUCTION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10B–3
PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION PISTON, PISTON RING, PISTON PIN
[ELECTRIC POWER STEERING CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–5
(EPS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-02–3 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (PCV) SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–5
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-02B–9 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (PCV) SYSTEM OPERATION
PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16B–4
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02C–10 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (PCV) SYSTEM OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . 01-16A–6
PID/DATA MONITOR FUNCTION POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-02A–18 (PCV) SYSTEM OUTLINE
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16B–4
SIMULATION FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . .05-02B–11 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (PCV) SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–5
TEST MODE [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . .01-02B–3 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (PCV) SYSTEM STRUCTURE
TEST MODE [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-02C–3 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16B–4
AI–12
TO MODEL INDEX
PAGE 13 0F 17
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT

(PCV) VALVE CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–10
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16C–1 PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–10
(PCV) VALVE CONSTRUCTION/ PRIMARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR
OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . 01-16B–5 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–19
(PCV) VALVE CONSTRUCTION/ PRIMARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–6 FUNCTION [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–18
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PTC HEATER CONSTRUCTION
(PCV) VALVE FUNCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–32
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16B–4 PTC HEATER CONSTRUCTION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40B–15
(PCV) VALVE FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . 01-16A–6 PURGE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
POWER BRAKE UNIT [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–31
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–6 PURGE CONTROL OPERATION
POWER BRAKE UNIT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–6 [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–31
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL OUTLINE
OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–30
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–7 PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . 09-14B–7 [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16A–7
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM PURGE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION
OUTLINE [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16A–7
START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–7
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–6
POWER METAL OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR
Q
FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (POWER QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR
MOS FET) CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–13 [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–6
POWER OUTER MIRROR OPERATION . . . . . . . 09-12–12 QUICK RELEASE CONNECTOR
POWER OUTER MIRROR SYSTEM FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–6
WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–10
POWER SYSTEMS OUTLINE
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo, MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)]. . . . . . . . . 09-21–5
POWER SYSTEMS OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–1
R
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH RADIATOR CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–9 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12B–3
POWER WINDOW MOTOR RADIATOR CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–8 [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12C–2
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM RADIATOR, COOLING SYSTEM CAP CONSTRUCTION
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–7 [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12A–2
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM RAIN SENSOR CONSTRUCTION
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–4 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–18
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM RAIN SENSOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17
STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–6 REAR AXLE CROSS-SECTIONAL
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-12–1
STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–5 REAR AXLE OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03-12–1
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING REAR BRAKE (DRUM)
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–7 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–9
POWERFLOW OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . 05-17–5 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
POWERFLOW OUTLINE [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–4 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–19
POWERFLOW STRUCTURE REAR FOG LIGHT CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–22
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–5 REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
POWERTRAIN SYSTEM OPERATION CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-14–2
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–4 REAR SUSPENSION OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-14–1
POWERTRAIN SYSTEM OUTLINE REAR SUSPENSION
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–4 STRUCTURAL VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-14–1
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
(LINEAR TYPE) OPERATION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . 05-17–25 FUNCTION OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–4
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID REAR WIPER SYSTEM
(LINEAR TYPE) OUTLINE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–14
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–25 REAR WIPER SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–14
AI–13
TO MODEL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PAGE 14 0F 17
REAR WIPER SYSTEM WIRING SAS CONTROL MODULE
DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–13 FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–3
RECEIVER/DRIER CONSTRUCTION SEAT BELT OUTLINE [3HB, 5HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–1
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–20 SEAT BELT OUTLINE [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-11–2
REDUCTION GEAR CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION SEAT BELT STRUCTURAL VIEW [3HB, 5HB]. . . . 08-11–3
06-13–12 SEAT BELT STRUCTURAL VIEW [4SD] . . . . . . . . 08-11–4
REFRIGERANT LINE CONSTRUCTION SEAT BELT WARNING ALARM
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–23 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15
REFRIGERANT LINE SEAT BELT WARNING ALARM
CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07-11–20 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION SEAT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–1
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–16 SEAT SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–1
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION SEAT STRUCTURAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–1
[MANUAL AIR SECONDARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR
CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40B–12 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH CONSTRUCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–19
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–15 SECONDARY PULLEY SPEED SENSOR
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH CONSTRUCTION FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–19
[MANUAL AIR SECURITY AND LOCKS CUSTOMIZE
CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40B–11 FUNCTION OUTLINE [ADVANCED
RELAY AND FUSE BLOCK KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–7
CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–7 SECURITY AND LOCKS OUTLINE
REQUEST SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/ [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–2
AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–18 SECURITY AND LOCKS OUTLINE
RESISTOR CONSTRUCTION [MANUAL [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–2
AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40B–10 SECURITY AND LOCKS STRUCTURAL
RESONANCE CHAMBER FUNCTION VIEW [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13B–2 START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–3
RESONANCE CHAMBER FUNCTION SECURITY AND LOCKS STRUCTURAL
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13A–3 VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–3
RESTRAINTS ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-00–1 SECURITY AND LOCKS SYSTEM
RESTRAINTS FEATURES WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED
[3HB, 5HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-00–2 KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–6
RESTRAINTS FEATURES [4SD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-00–3 SECURITY AND LOCKS SYSTEM
RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–3 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–6
RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM OUTLINE SECURITY AND LOCKS WARNING/
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14A–3 GUIDANCE [ADVANCED KEYLESS
REVERSE LOCKOUT MECHANISM CONSTRUCTION/ AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–7
OPERATION SECURITY LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/
[F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-16A–2 OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
REVERSE LOCKOUT MECHANISM AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–24
FUNCTION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .05-16A–1 SECURITY LIGHT CONSTRUCTION/
ROLLOVER VALVE CONSTRUCTION/ OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY
OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . .01-16B–5 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–20
ROLLOVER VALVE SELECTOR LEVER OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–2
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION SELECTOR LEVER OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–1
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16A–8 SELECTOR LEVER STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–3
ROLLOVER VALVE FUNCTION SELECTOR LEVER STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–2
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16B–5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION OUTLINE
ROLLOVER VALVE FUNCTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–31
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-16A–8 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.1
RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–19
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–15 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.1
RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–20
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–14 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.2
RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM WIRING FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–20
DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–14 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID NO.2
OPERATION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–20
SHIFT CONTROL STRUCTURE [FN4A-EL] . . . . 05-17–28
S SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM
FUNCTION [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–4
SAS CONTROL MODULE SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–4 FUNCTION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–7
AI–14
TO MODEL INDEX

SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM STARTING SYSTEM OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . .01-19A–1
OPERATION [B65M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15B–4 STARTING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
SHIFT INTERLOCK MECHANISM [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-19B–1
OPERATION [F35M-R] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-15A–7 STARTING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL VIEW
SHIFT SOLENOID A, B AND C [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-19C–1
(DUTY-CYCLE TYPE) FUNCTION STARTING SYSTEM STRUCTURAL
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–25 VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-19A–1
SHIFT SOLENOID A, B AND C STEERING ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-00–1
(DUTY-CYCLE TYPE) OPERATION STEERING COLUMN AND SHAFT
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–26 CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–9
SHIFT SOLENOID A, B AND C STEERING COLUMN AND SHAFT
(DUTY-CYCLE TYPE) OUTLINE OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–8
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–25 STEERING FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-00–1
SHIFT SOLENOID D AND E STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
(ON/OFF TYPE) FUNCTION CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–7
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–27 STEERING SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-00–1
SHIFT SOLENOID D AND E STEPLESS-SPEED VARIATION
(ON/OFF TYPE) OPERATION MECHANISM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–9
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–27 SUPPLY PUMP CONSTRUCTION
SHIFT SOLENOID D AND E [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–4
(ON/OFF TYPE) OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . 05-17–26 SUPPLY PUMP CONSTRUCTION/
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–4 OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14C–3
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–3 SUPPLY PUMP FUNCTION
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–4 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–3
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–3 SUPPLY PUMP OPERATION
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM STRUCTURE. . . . . . . . . . . 05-18–4 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-14B–4
SHIFT-LOCK SYSTEM SUSPENSION FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-00–1
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-20–3 SUSPENSION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-00–1
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–8
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . 08-10–8
SIDE IMPACT BAR CONSTRUCTION [4SD] . . . . . 09-11–3
T
SIDE IMPACT BAR CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–2 TACHOMETER CONTROL
SIDE IMPACT BAR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–2 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–17
SLOPE MODE CONTROL OPERATION TACHOMETER CONTROL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–16
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29 TAPPET CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . .01-10A–11
SLOPE MODE CONTROL OUTLINE TCM OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–21
[FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29 TCS CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–14
SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR TCS CONTROL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-15–14
CONSTRUCTION THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN FUNCTION
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER]. . . . . . . . . . 07-40A–14 [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
SPARK PLUG CONSTRUCTION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–36
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-18–1 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN FUNCTION
SPEAKER CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–9 [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–32
SPEEDOMETER CONTROL THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–16 OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SPEEDOMETER CONTROL OUTLINE . . . . . . . . 09-22–16 AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–30
SS MODE SWITCH CONSTRUCTION/ THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
OPERATION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–16 OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY
SS MODE SWITCH FUNCTION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–26
[DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–16 THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM OUTLINE
STARTER CONSTRUCTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-19B–1 START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–25
STARTER CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . 01-19A–1 THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM OUTLINE
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL BLOCK [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–21
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–35 THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL STRUCTURAL VIEW [ADVANCED
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–35 KEYLESS AND START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–26
STARTER CUT-OFF CONTROL THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–35 STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY
STARTING SYSTEM OUTLINE SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–22
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-19B–1 THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM WIRING
STARTING SYSTEM OUTLINE DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-19C–1 START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14A–28
AI–15
TO MODEL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PAGE 16 0F 17
THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM WIRING TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-14B–24 [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–16
THERMAL PROTECTOR CONSTRUCTION TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
[FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . .07-40A–14 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
THERMAL PROTECTOR CONSTRUCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–22
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER] . . . . . . . . . . . . .07-40B–11 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
THERMOSTAT CONSTRUCTION/ FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–16
OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo]. . . . . . . . . . .01-12B–3 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
THERMOSTAT CONSTRUCTION/ FUNCTION [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–22
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12A–2 TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
THROTTLE BODY CONSTRUCTION ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–1
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13A–4 TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
THROTTLE BODY FUNCTION FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–2
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-13A–4 TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
THROTTLE BODY OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . .01-13A–4 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-00–3
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR TRANSMITTER OUTLINE [KEYLESS
CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–15
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–44 TRANSMITTER STRUCTURAL VIEW
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–16
FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–44 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE
TIMING BELT CONSTRUCTION ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/
[MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-10B–5 OPERATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
TIMING BELT CONSTRUCTION AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–8
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10C–2 TRUNK LID LATCH AND RELEASE
TIMING CHAIN, CHAIN TENSIONER ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/
CONSTRUCTION [MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . 01-10C–3 OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . 09-14B–8
TIMING CHAIN, CHAIN TENSIONER TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-10A–13 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) [ADVANCED KEYLESS AND START
CONTROL OUTLINE [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–24 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14A–18
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
CONTROL OUTLINE [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–29 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–11
ENGAGE SOLENOID FUNCTION TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–20 OPERATION [KEYLESS ENTRY
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–10
ENGAGE SOLENOID OPERATION TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–21 OUTLINE [KEYLESS ENTRY
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–8
OPERATION [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–30 TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) STRUCTURAL VIEW [KEYLESS ENTRY
SOLENOID FUNCTION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–20 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–9
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) TRUNK LID OPENER SYSTEM WIRING
SOLENOID OPERATION [DJVA-EL] . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–20 DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY
TORQUE CONVERTER OUTLINE SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14B–10
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–8 TURBOCHARGER CONSTRUCTION/
TORQUE CONVERTER OUTLINE OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . 01-13B–3
[FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–12 TURN AND HAZARD INDICATOR
TORQUE SENSOR CONSTRUCTION AND ALARM CONSTRUCTION/
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06-13–13 OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–16
TORSION BEAM AXLE TURN AND HAZARD INDICATOR
CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-14–2 ALARM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE TWEETER CONSTRUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–10
(TFT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
OPERATION [DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–17
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE
(TFT) SENSOR CONSTRUCTION/
U
OPERATION [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–24 UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–25
(TFT) SENSOR FUNCTION
[DJVA-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-19–16
V
(TFT) SENSOR FUNCTION VACUUM PUMP CONSTRUCTION
[FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–23 [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–8
AI–16
TO MODEL INDEX

VACUUM PUMP CONSTRUCTION VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
[MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04-11–8 OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-40A–17
VALVE MECHANISM OUTLINE VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–9 CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-10A–15
VALVE MECHANISM STRUCTURAL VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM
VIEW [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–10 FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-10A–14
VALVE, VALVE SPRING, VALVE SEAL, VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM
VALVE GUIDE CONSTRUCTION OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-10A–16
[ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–10 VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-10A–13
BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL (VIN) CODE [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–24
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR CONTROL (VIN) CODE [4SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–21
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER (VIN) CODE [5HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–22
VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/ VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–6 (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00–24
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SHUTTER VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
VALVE ACTUATOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . 01-13A–6 CONSTRUCTION/OPERATION
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM [FN4A-EL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–24
FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–5 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM FUNCTION [FN4A-EL]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-17–24
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–6
VARIABLE INTAKE AIR SYSTEM
STRUCTURE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–5
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL BLOCK
W
DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 WATER PUMP CONSTRUCTION/
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL OPERATION [MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo] . . . . . . . . . .01-12B–4
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 WATER PUMP CONSTRUCTION/
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .01-12A–3
OUTLINE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–16 WHEELS AND TIRES OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-12–1
VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE WHEELS AND TIRES STRUCTURAL
ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION/ VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-12–1
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–8 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE
VARIABLE TUMBLE SHUTTER VALVE CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–7
ACTUATOR FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–8 WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM
VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–7
FUNCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–7 WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM
VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–5
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–8 WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM WIRING
VARIABLE TUMBLE SYSTEM DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–6
STRUCTURE [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13A–7 WIPER/WASHER OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–1
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ACTUATOR WIPER/WASHER SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–1
CONSTRUCTION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-10A–19 WIPER/WASHER STRUCTURAL VIEW
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL [3HB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–4
BLOCK DIAGRAM [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–17 WIPER/WASHER STRUCTURAL
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–2
OPERATION [ZJ, ZY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-40A–17
AI–17
BACK TO FRONT PAGE MAZDA2 2010.50MY WIRING DIAGRAM 5826-10-09I
VIEW MAIN INDEX
FOREWORD
This wiring diagram incorporates the wiring schematics of the Mazda2 and available optional
equipment. Actual vehicle wiring may vary slightly depending on optional equipment or local
specifications, or both.
For proper repair and maintenance, a thorough familiarization with this manual is important, and it
should always be kept in a handy place for quick and easy reference.
All the contents of this manual, including drawings and specifications, are the latest available at the
time of printing.
As modifications affecting repair or maintenance occur, relevant information supplementary to this
volume will be made available at Mazda dealers. This manual should be kept up-to-date.
Ford Motor Company reserves the right to alter the specifications and contents of this manual without
obligation or advance notice.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical-including photocopying and recording and the use of any kind of information
storage and retrieval system-without permission in writing.
WARNING
Servicing a vehicle can be dangerous. If you have not received service-related training, the risks of
injury, property damage, and failure of servicing increase. The recommended servicing procedures for
the vehicle in this workshop manual were developed with Mazda-trained technicians in mind. This
manual may be useful to non-Mazda trained technicians, but a technician with our service-related
training and experience will be at less risk when performing service operations. However, all users of
this manual are accepted at least to know general safety procedures.
This manual contains “Warnings” and “Cautions” applicable to risks not normally encountered in a
general technician’s experience. They should be followed to reduce the risk of injury and the risk that
improper service or repair may damage the vehicle or render it unsafe. It is also important to
understand that the “Warnings” and “Cautions” are not exhaustive. It is impossible to warn of all the
hazardous consequences that might result from failure to follow the procedures.
The procedures recommended and described in this manual are effective methods of performing
service and repair. Some require tools specifically designed for a specific purpose. Persons using
procedures and tools which are not recommended by Ford Motor Company must satisfy themselves
thoroughly that neither personal safety nor safety of the vehicle will be jeopardized.
The contents of this manual, including drawings and specifications, are the latest available at the time
of printing, and Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change the vehicle designs and alter the
contents of this manual without notice and without incurring obligation.
Parts should be replaced with genuine Mazda replacement parts or with parts which match the quality
of genuine Mazda replacement parts. Persons using replacement parts of lesser quality than that of
genuine Mazda replacement parts must satisfy themselves thoroughly that neither personal safety nor
safety of the vehicle will be jeopardized.
Ford Motor Company is not responsible for any problems which may arise from the use of this manual.
The cause of such problems includes but is not limited to insufficient service related training, use of
improper tools, use of replacement parts of lesser quality than that of genuine Mazda replacement
parts, or not being aware of any revision of this manual.
2010 FMCSA
Ford Motor Company
of Southern Africa
5826-10-09I
BACK TO FOREWORD & FRONT PAGE MAZDA2 2010.50MY WIRING DIAGRAM 5826-10-09I
CONTENTS
TITLE SECTION
Wiring Diagram
APPLICATION:
This manual is applicable to vehicles beginning with
the Vehicle Identification Numbers (VIN) shown on
the following page. ENGINE 01
SUSPENSION 02
DRIVELINE/AXLE 03
BRAKES 04
TRANSMISSION/
TRANSAXLE
05
STEERING 06

AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
07
RESTRAINTS 08
5826-10-09I
BACK TO CHAPTER INDEX MAZDA2 2010.50MY WIRING DIAGRAM 5826-10-09I
TO MODEL INDEX

(CHASSIS NUMBERS)

MM6 DE10J1*0
MM6 DE10Y1*0
Thailand
MM8 DE10Y100
BACK TO MAIN INDEX MAZDA2 2010.50MY WIRING DIAGRAM 5826-10-09I
TO MODEL INDEX
SYSTEM INDEX
00 GENERAL INFORMATION 09 BODY & ACCESSORIES

R READING WIRING DIAGRAMS 12 GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) CODE.......2 REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER .................................. 106
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (VIN)................3 POWER WINDOW...................................................... 108
CONTENTS OF WIRING DIAGRAMS ............................4 POWER OUTER MIRROR ......................................... 116
GROUND POINTS ..........................................................5 POWER RETRACTABLE OUTER MIRROR............... 116
SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM/CONNECTOR DIAGRAM ...6 14 SECURITY AND LOCKS
ROUTING DIAGRAM ......................................................8 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
HARNESS SYMBOLS.....................................................9 WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
WIRING COLOR CODE ..................................................9 START SYSTEM ................................................... 120
SYMBOLS .......................................................................9
WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND
SERVICE WARNING AND CAUTION FOR VEHICLES START SYSTEM ................................................... 132
WITH SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM...................................12 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM............................................. 148
SERVICE WARNING FOR VEHICLES THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM.................................. 150
WITH DISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS ............................12 18 LIGHTING SYSTEMS
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL .................12 HEADLIGHT ............................................................... 158
P ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL PROCEDURES......14 FRONT FOG LIGHT ................................................... 164
POWER, GROUND & COMMON CONNECTOR HEADLIGHT MANUAL LEVELING SYSTEM ............. 166
E ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC ...........................18 REAR FOG LIGHT...................................................... 168
F FUSE BOX ....................................................................20 LICENSE PLATE LIGHT ............................................. 170
C COMMON CONNECTOR LIST .....................................24 PARKING LIGHT......................................................... 170
G GROUND POINT...........................................................32 TAILLIGHT .................................................................. 170
ILLUMINATION LIGHT................................................ 172
DATA LINK CONNECTOR HAZARD LIGHT.......................................................... 178
D DATA LINK CONNECTOR ............................................36 TURN LIGHT .............................................................. 178
01 ENGINE BRAKE LIGHT ............................................................ 182
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT.................................... 182
12 COOLING SYSTEM ......................................................38 BACK-UP LIGHT ........................................................ 184
14 FUEL SYSTEM .............................................................42 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT............................... 186
17 CHARGING SYSTEM ...................................................44 INTERIOR LIGHT ....................................................... 186
19 STARTING SYSTEM.....................................................46
19 WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
40 CONTROL SYSTEM WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER ....................... 188
CONTROL SYSTEM(INCLUDES AUTOMATIC
REAR WIPER AND WASHER .................................... 192
TRANSAXLE CONTROL INFORMATION).................50
20 ENTERTAINMENT
04 BRAKES ACCESSORY SOCKET.............................................. 194
13 ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ......................................76 AUDIO SYSTEM ......................................................... 196
22 INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO.
06 STEERING INSTRUMENT CLUSTER........................................... 204
13 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) HORN ......................................................................... 218
EPS(ELECTRIC POWER STEERING) .........................80 40 CONTROL SYSTEM
07 HEATER, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING BCM(BODY CONTROL MODULE)............................. 220
(HVAC) AI ALPHABETICAL INDEX
40 CONTROL SYSTEM ALPHABETICAL INDEX ............................................. 246
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
MANUAL.....................................................................82
AUTO ..........................................................................86
MAGNETIC CLUTCH CONTROL SYSTEM..................94
08 RESTRAINTS
10 AIR BAG SYSTEM
AIR BAG SYSTEM (INCLUDES PRE-TENSIONER
SEAT BELT INFORMATION) ......................................96
Two digits (section ID) indicated in front of each title are commonly used with the Workshop Manual.
1
TO MODEL INDEX
00R Reading Wiring Diagrams

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) CODE
MM6 DE 1 0 Y 1 A 0 123456
Serial No.
(for Thailand, General (R.H.D.) specs.)

Plant W= AAT
(for Thailand)
Model year A= 2010

Check digit *= 0 to 9, X
Model change code 1
J= 1.3 L (ZJ)

Body style 4= 5HB



MM7= General (L.H.D.) specs., Mazda-AAT
World manufacturer identification MM8= Thailand, Mazda-AAT
2
TO MODEL INDEX
Reading Wiring Diagrams 00R


MM6 DE10J1*0
MM6 DE10Y1*0
Thailand
MM8 DE10Y100
3
TO MODEL INDEX

CONTENTS OF WIRING DIAGRAMS
• This manual comprises the sections shown below.
R Reading wiring diagrams A how-to on using and reading wiring

diagrams, using test equipment,
checking harness and connectors, and
Electrical system general finding trouble spots
P procedures
E Electrical wiring schematic Shows main fuses and other fuses for
each system
GENERAL INFORMATION 00 F Fuse box complete wiring
system
Shows internal circuits and connectors
Joint box/Junction box complete
J wiring system
Shows connectors common throughout
C Common connector list
system
G Ground point Ground routes from and to the battery
D Data link connector
12 Cooling system
14 Fuel system
17 Charging system
ENGINE 01 18 Ignition system
19 Starting system
20 Cruise control system
40 Control system
SUSPENSION 02 12 Wheel and tires
DRIVELINE/AXLE 03 18 4-Wheel drive
13 Antilock brake system
14 Traction control system
BRAKES 04 15 Dynamic stability control
18 Dynamic stability control/

Roll stability control
13 Automatic transmission
14 Automatic transmission shift

mechanism
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE 05 Shows circuit and connector diagrams
17 Automatic transaxle
and component and connector location
Automatic transaxle shift diagrams
18
mechanism
13 Electric power steering (EPS)
STEERING 06
14 Power steering
HEATER, VENTILATION & AIR
CONDITIONING (HVAC) 07 40 Control system
10 Air bag system
RESTRAINTS 08
11 Seat belt
12 Glass/Windows/Mirrors
13 Seats
14 Security and locks
15 Sunroof
16 Exterior trim
BODY & ACCESSORIES 09 18 Lighting systems
19 Wiper/Washer system
20 Entertainment
21 Power systems
22 Instrumentation/Driver info.
40 Control system
Gives page number of circuit diagram for
AI Alphabetical Index
each component
Depending on the vehicle model, the actual sections may be different.
4
TO MODEL INDEX

GROUND POINTS
• This shows ground points of the harness.
Ground indication
On vehide Indication
On circuit diagrams and ground points
The ground connection numbers in system circuit diagrams

correspond to those in the ground point diagram.
To circuit
5
TO MODEL INDEX

SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM/CONNECTOR DIAGRAM
• These diagrams show the circuits for each system, from the power supply to the ground. The power supply side
is on the upper part of the page, the ground side on the lower part. The diagrams describe circuits with the
ignition switch off.
Below is an explanation of the various points in the diagram.
System name
The number indicates that the circuit

continues to the related system
diagram.
Connector code
The prefix letter indicates the system in which the
connector is used.
F: Fuse box connectors

J: Joint box/Junction box connectors
C: Common connectors
G: Ground point connectors
D: Data link connector
0112: Cooling system connectors
0114: Fuel system connectors
0117: Charging system connectors
0118: Ignition system connectors
0119: Starting system connectors
0120: Cruise control system connectors
0140: Engine control system connectors
0212: Wheel and tires connectors
0318: 4-Wheel drive connectors
0413: Antilock brake system connectors
0414: Traction control system connectors
0415: Dynamic stability control connectors
0418: Dynamic stability control/Roll stability
control connectors
0513: Automatic transmission connectors
( )
0514: Automatic transmission shift mechanism 240 237
connectors
0517: Automatic transaxle connectors
0518: Automatic transaxle shift mechanism Y/V(EM) W/V(EM) BR/W(EM) SHIELD WIRE
connectors
0613: Electric power steering (EPS) connectors C-24
0614: Power steering connectors
Y/V W/V BR/W
0740: Heater, ventilation & air conditioning (HVAC) 0140-307
control system connectors
0810: Air bag system connectors
0811: Seat belt connectors CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
0912: Glass/Windows/Mirrors connectors
0913: Seats connectors
0914: Security and locks connectors
0915: Sunroof connectors Indicates shielded wire.*
0916: Exterior trim connectors
0918: Lighting systems connectors * Shielded wire :
0919: Wiper/Washer system connectors Prevents signal disturbances from
0920: Entertainment connectors electrical interference.
Wire is covered by a metal meshing for
grounding.
6
TO MODEL INDEX

Multiplex communication Current symbol
Indicates communication with connected parts. Current flows in the direction of the arrow.
Signals are transmitted back and forth between
connected parts.
System code Wire color code (harness symbol)
• Two-color wires are indicated by a two-letter
symbol.The first indicates the base color of the
wire, the second the color of the stripe.
For example:
W/R is a white wire with a red strip
BR/Y is a brown wire with a yellow strip
Symbol
(Example)
Solid color wire Striped wire
White
B Black W/R (base color)
(F) (F)
Red(stripe)
• The harness symbol is in ( ) following the harness

symbols (refer to P-9.).
Connector symbols
• Male and female connectors are represented as follows
in the circuit and connector diagrams.
Circuit diagram Connector
symbol diagram symbol
L
Male
Male R
Female
L
Female
R
Ground numbers • Like connectors are linked by dashed lines between the
A harness ground is represented differently than a connector symbols.
unit ground. • Connector diagrams show connectors on the harness
side. The terminal indicates the view from the harness
side.
Types of grounds Symbol
Harness (Example)
Connector on harness side

G03
Unit View from harness side
• Colors for connectors except white are given in locations.

Sensor
• Unused terminals are indicated by ∗ .
7
TO MODEL INDEX

ROUTING DIAGRAM
• The routing diagram shows where electrical components are on the system circuit diagram by call out line and
connector symbols.
Connector symbol Ground symbol Component name

Shows the system that uses the Shows the ground in system Shows the names of components
connector.
diagrams. in routing diagrams.
(Example)
Connector Symbol
Common connectors C-11
System connectors 0912-301
8
TO MODEL INDEX

HARNESS SYMBOLS
DESCRIPTION OF HARNESS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION OF HARNESS SYMBOL

FRONT HARNESS (F) DOOR No. 1 HARNESS (DR1)
FRONT No. 2 HARNESS (F2) DOOR No. 2 HARNESS (DR2)
—
ENGINE HARNESS (E) DOOR No. 3 HARNESS (DR3)
DASH HARNESS (D) DOOR No. 4 HARNESS (DR4)
REAR HARNESS (R) FLOOR HARNESS (FR) —
REAR No. 2 HARNESS (R2) INTERIOR LIGHT HARNESS (IN) —
REAR No. 3 HARNESS (R3) A/C HARNESS (AC) —
INSTRUMENT PANEL HARNESS (I) — INJECTION HARNESS (INJ) —
EMISSION HARNESS (EM) HAND BRAKE HARNESS (HB) —
EMISSION No. 2 HARNESS (EM2) —
EMISSION No. 3 HARNESS (EM3)
WIRING COLOR CODE
COLOR CODE COLOR CODE

BLACK B ORANGE O
BLUE L PINK P
BROWN BR RED R
DARK BLUE DL SKY BLUE SB
DARK GREEN DG TAN T
GRAY GY VIOLET V
GREEN G WHITE W
LIGHT BLUE LB YELLOW Y
LIGHT GREEN LG
SYMBOLS
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Battery • Generates electricity through chemical Light • Emits light and generates heat when
reaction. current flows through filament.
• Supplies direct current to circuits.
3.4W
Ground (1) • Connecting point to vehicle body or –––––––––––––––
other ground wire where current flows

from positive to negative terminal of
battery.
G01 • Ground (1) indicates a ground point to
body through wire harness.
Ground (2) • Ground (2) indicates point where Resistance • A resistor with a constant value.
component is grounded directly to • Mainly used to protect electrical
body. components in circuits by maintaining
rated voltage.
Remarks
• Current will not flow through a circuit if
Ground (3) ground is faulty. Motor • Converts electrical energy into
mechanical energy.
9
TO MODEL INDEX

Fuse • Melts when current flow exceeds that Pump • Pulls in and discharges gases and
specified for circuit, interrupts current liquids.
flow.
Precautions
• Do not replace with fuses exceeding
specified capacity. Cigarette lighter • Electrical coil that generates heat.
<Blade type> <Tube type>
Fuse (For high Accessory socket • Interior power supply.

current fuse)/
Fusible link
<Cartridge type> <Fusible link>
Horn • Generates sound when current flows.
Speaker
Transistor (1) • Electrical switching component.

• Turns on when voltage is applied to
the base (B).
Collector (C) Heater • Generates heat when current flows.
Collector
indication
Base (B) NPN mark C
B E
Emitter (E) EC B
E C
B
Transistor (2) • Reading code. Ignition switch • Turning ignition key switches circuit to
Collector (C)
operate various component.
2 S C 828 A Revision mark (NOTE)
B2 B1
A:High-frequency PNP ST Ignition switch is called engine switch
Base (B) PNP Semiconductor B:Low-frequency PNP OFF OFF on diesel vehicles.
Number of C:High-frequency NPN IG2
IG1 ACC
terminals D:Low-frequency NPN
Emitter (E)
Switch (1) • Allows or breaks current flow by Harness

opening and closing curcuits. Connection D D
A B A B
When circuit C-D

is connected to
Normally open circuit A-B, the C C
connection D is
Switch (2) indicated by a For vehicles with ABS, use the A-B
black dot. circuit.
Selection WITH ABS
A
Normally closed
Diversion point D D
Autostop switch • Automatically shuts off circuit when for the different B
certain conditions are met. circuits according WITHOUT ABS
to the vehicle’s
C
specification is
indicated by a
white dot. For vehicles without ABS, use the C-B
circuit.
Relay (1) • Current flowing through coil produces electromagnetic force causing contact to open or close.
No current to coil Current to coil
No flow Flow
Normally open
10
TO MODEL INDEX

Relay (2) • Current flowing through coil produces electromagnetic force causing contact to close.
No current to coil Current to coil
Flow No flow
Normally closed
Sensor (1) • Detects characteristics such as intake Solenoid • Current flowing through coil generates
manifold vacuum and airflow amount electromagnetic force to operate
according to resistance variation. plungers.
Sensor (2) • Detects resistance variation according Diode • Known as a semiconductor rectifier,
to operation of other parts. the diode allows current flow in one
direction only.
Cathode(K) Anode(A)
Sensor (3) • A resistor whose resistance variation Flow of electric current
according to temperature variation.
• When temperature increases, K A K A K A
resistance decreases.
Sensor (4) • Detects pulse signals from rotating Light-emitting • A diode that lights when current flows.
object. diode • Unlike ordinary bulbs, the diode does
(LED) not generate heat when lit.
Cathode(K) Anode(A)
Sensor (5) • Generates potential difference when Cathode(K)
tension or pressure is applied.
Anode(A)
Flow of current
Capacitor • Component that temporarily stores Reference diode • Allows current to flow in one direction
electrical charge. (Zener diode) up to a certain voltage; allows current
to flow in the other direction once that
voltage is exceeded.
Symbol Meaning
Extent of the change in the wiring position (1) • The wiring position can be exchanged freely within the
connector.
C A
E
E C A
B B B
B B B
F D B
F D B
Extent of the change in the wiring position (2) • The wiring position can be exchanged according to the
following combinations only.
C
E A Between A and B, Between C and D, Between E and F
B B B E C A
B B B
F D B F D B
Extent of the change in the wiring position (3) • The wiring position can be exchanged according to the
following combinations only.
3 2 1 2 1 Between 1, 2, 4 and 7.
L B B
5 4 • The wiring positions may be indicated by numbers for some
L B 4
connectors.
8 7 6
B/Y B R 7
11
TO MODEL INDEX

SERVICE WARNING AND CAUTION FOR VEHICLES WITH SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
If the SRS air bag system inspection is not performed correctly in accordance with the workshop manual procedures it could
cause the system to operate (deploy) accidentally, resulting in injury.
Always follow the service warnings and cautions in the workshop manual when performing the SRS air bag system-related
inspection or servicing.
SERVICE WARNING FOR VEHICLES WITH DISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS

If the discharge headlight inspection and servicing is not done using the correct procedures in the workshop manual, it could
result in electrical shock.
Always follow the service warnings and cautions in the workshop manual when performing the discharge headlight-related
inspection or servicing.
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

A AMPERE DTC DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE(S)
A/C AIR CONDITIONING DTM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
A/F AIR FUEL ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED
ECPS
AAS AUTO ADJUSTING SUSPENSION POWER STEERING
ABS ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ECT ENGINE CONTROL TEMPERATURE
ACC ACCESSORIES EGR EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
ACV AIR CONTROL VALVE ELECTRO HYDRAULIC POWER ASSIST
EHPAS
STEERING
ADD ADDITIONAL
EI ELECTRONIC IGNITION
AIS AIR INJECTION SYSTEM
ELEC ELECTRIC
ALL AUTOMATIC LOAD LEVELING
ELR EMERGENCY LOCKING RETRACTOR
AM AMPLITUDE MODULATION
ET ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
AMP AMPLIFIER
EPS ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
ANT ANTENNA
F FRONT
ASV AIR SUPPLY VALVE
F/I FUEL INJECTOR
AT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FICB FAST-IDLE CAM BREAKER
ATF AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
FM FREQUENCY MODULATION
ATX AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
FP FUEL PUMP
B+ BATTERY POSITIVE VOLTAGE
FPR FUEL PUMP RELAY
BAC BYPASS AIR CONTROL
GEN GENERATOR
BSM BLIND SPOT MONITORING
GND GROUND
CAN CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK
H/D HEATER/DEFROSTER
CIGAR CIGARETTE
HEAT HEATER
CONTINUOUS FUEL INJECTION
CIS HI HIGH
SYSTEM
EVAP EVAPORATIVE EMISSION HO2S HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
CKP CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR HS HIGH SPEED
CM CONTROL MODULE HU HYDRAULIC UNIT
CMP CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR IAC IDLE AIR CONTROL
COMBI COMBINATION IAT INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
CON CONDITIONER IG IGNITION
CONT CONTROL ILLUMI ILLUMINATION
CPU CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT INT INTERMITTENT
DEF DEFROSTER JB JOINT BOX
DI DISTRIBUTOR IGNITION KS KNOCK SENSOR
DLC DATA LINK CONNECTOR LCD LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
DLI DISTRIBUTORLESS IGNITION LF LEFT FRONT
DOHC DOUBLE-OVERHEAD CAMSHAFT LH LEFT HAND
DRL DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT LO LOW
DSC DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL LR LEFT REAR
12
TO MODEL INDEX

M MOTOR TEMP TEMPERATURE
MAF MASS AIR FLOW TFT TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE
MAX MAXIMUM TICS TRIPLE INDUCTION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAP MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE TNS TAIL NUMBER SIDE LIGHTS
MFI MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION TP THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
MID MIDDLE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
TPMS
MIL MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP SYSTEM
MIN MINIMUM TR TRANSMISSION(TRANSAXLE)RANGE
MIX MIXTURE TWS TOTAL WIRING SYSTEM
MPX MULTIPLEX V VOLT
MS MIDDLE SPEED VAF VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR
MT MANUAL TRANSMISSION VENT VENTILATION
MTX MANUAL TRANSAXLE VARIABLE INERTIA CHARGING
VICS
SYSTEM
N NEUTRAL
VOL VOLUME
NC NORMALLY CLOSED
VR VOLTAGE REGULATOR
NO NORMALLY OPEN
VARIABLE RESONANCE INDUCTION
O/D OVER DRIVE VRIS
SYSTEM
OBD ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC VSS VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
OFF SWITCH OFF VTCS VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL SYSTEM
ON SWITCH ON W WATT(S)
P POWER
P/S POWER STEERING
PCM POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
PJB PASSENGER JUNCTION BOX
PNP PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
PRC PRESSURE REGULATOR CONTROL
PRG PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
PSP POWER STEERING PRESSURE
POSITIVE TEMPERATURE
PTC
COEFFICIENT HEATER
PWM PULSE WIDTH MODULATION
QSS QUICK-START SYSTEM
R REAR
REC RECIRCULATION
RF RIGHT FRONT
RH RIGHT HAND
RPM REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE
RR RIGHT REAR
SAS SOPHISTICATED AIR BAG SENSOR
SEQUENTIAL MULTIPOINT FUEL
SFI
INJECTION
SOL SOLENOID
SPV SPILL VALVE
ST START
SW SWITCH
TC TURBOCHARGER
TCC TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION(TRANSAXLE)
TCM
CONTROL MODULE
TCS TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
13
TO MODEL INDEX
00P Electrical System General Procedures

ELECTRICAL PARTS B6U000000006W03
Battery Cable
• Before disconnecting connectors or removing
electrical parts, disconnect the negative battery cable. NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE
WGIWXX0007E
Wiring Harness
• To remove the wiring harness from the clip in the
engine room, pry up the hook of the clip using a
flathead screwdriver.
WGIWXX0039E
Caution
• Do not remove the Harness protective tape.
Otherwise, the wires could rub against the body,
which could result in water penetration and
electrical shorting.
CONNECTORS NO GOOD
WGIWXX0040E
Data Link Connector
• Insert the probe into the terminal when connecting a
jumper wire to the data link connector.
GOOD NO GOOD
Caution
• Inserting a jumper wire probe into the data link
connector terminal may damage the terminal.
X3U000WAY
Disconnecting Connectors
• When disconnecting connector, grasp the connectors,
not the wires.
NO GOOD
WGIWXX0041E
14
TO MODEL INDEX
Electrical System General Procedures 00P

• Connectors can be disconnected by pressing or
pulling the lock lever as shown.
WGIWXX0042E
Locking Connector
• When locking connectors, listen for a click indicating
they are securely locked.
X3U000WB1
Inspection
• When a tester is used to inspect for continuity or
measuring voltage, insert the tester probe from the
wiring harness side.
NO GOOD
WGIWXX0044E
• Inspect the terminals of waterproof connectors from

the connector side since they cannot be accessed
from the wiring harness side.
Caution
• To prevent damage to the terminal, wrap a thin
wire around the tester probe before inserting
into terminal.
NO GOOD
WGIWXX0045E
15
TO MODEL INDEX
00P Electrical System General Procedures

Terminals
Inspection
• Pull lightly on individual wires to verify that they are
secured in the terminal.
X3U000WB4
Replacement
• Use the appropriate tools to remove a terminal as
shown. When installing a terminal, be sure to insert it
until it locks securely.
• Insert a thin piece of metal from the terminal side of
the connector and with the terminal locking tab
pressed down, pull the terminal out from the
connector.
X3U000WB5
Sensors, Switches, And Relays

• Handle sensors, switches, and relays carefully. Do not
drop them or strike them against other objects. NO GOOD
X3U000WB6
Fuse
Replacement
• When replacing a fuse, be sure to replace it with one
of the same capacity. If a fuse fails again, the circuit
probably has a short and the wiring should be
inspected.
• Be sure the negative battery terminal is disconnected
before replacing a main fuse.
YMU000WA1
16
TO MODEL INDEX
Electrical System General Procedures 00P

• When replacing a pullout fuse, use the fuse puller.
YMU000WAK
ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS

Jumper Wire
• A jumper wire is used to create a temporary circuit.
Connect the jumper wire between the terminals of a
circuit to bypass a switch.
Caution
• Do not connect a jumper wire from the power
source line to a body ground. This may cause
burning or other damage to wiring harnesses or
electronic components.
X3U000WBB
Voltmeter
• The DC voltmeter is used to measure circuit voltage. A
voltmeter with a range of 15 V or more is used by
connecting the positive (+) probe (red lead wire) to the
point where voltage will be measured and the negative
(-) probe (black lead wire) to a body ground.
X3U000WBC
Ohmmeter
• The ohmmeter is used to measure the resistance
between two points in a circuit and to inspect for
continuity and short circuits. POWER SOURCE LINE
Caution NO GOOD
• Do not connect the ohmmeter to any circuit
where voltage is applied. This will damage the
ohmmeter. GROUND LINE
OHMMETER
YMU000WAL
17
TO MODEL INDEX
18
TO MODEL INDEX
19
TO MODEL INDEX
20
TO MODEL INDEX
21
TO MODEL INDEX
22
TO MODEL INDEX
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY

LEFT BLANK
TO MODEL INDEX
24
TO MODEL INDEX
25
TO MODEL INDEX
26
TO MODEL INDEX
27
TO MODEL INDEX
28
TO MODEL INDEX
29
TO MODEL INDEX
30
TO MODEL INDEX
31
TO MODEL INDEX
TO MODEL INDEX
33
TO MODEL INDEX
TO MODEL INDEX
35
TO MODEL INDEX
36
TO MODEL INDEX
37
TO MODEL INDEX
38
TO MODEL INDEX
39
TO MODEL INDEX
40
TO MODEL INDEX
41
TO MODEL INDEX
42
TO MODEL INDEX
43
TO MODEL INDEX
44
TO MODEL INDEX
45
TO MODEL INDEX
46
TO MODEL INDEX
47
TO MODEL INDEX
48
TO MODEL INDEX
49
TO MODEL INDEX
50
TO MODEL INDEX
51
TO MODEL INDEX
52
TO MODEL INDEX
53
TO MODEL INDEX
54
TO MODEL INDEX
55
TO MODEL INDEX
56
TO MODEL INDEX
57
TO MODEL INDEX
58
TO MODEL INDEX
59
TO MODEL INDEX
60
TO MODEL INDEX
61
TO MODEL INDEX
62
TO MODEL INDEX
63
TO MODEL INDEX
64
TO MODEL INDEX
65
TO MODEL INDEX
66
TO MODEL INDEX
67
TO MODEL INDEX
68
TO MODEL INDEX
69
TO MODEL INDEX
70
TO MODEL INDEX
71
TO MODEL INDEX
72
TO MODEL INDEX
73
TO MODEL INDEX
74
TO MODEL INDEX
75
TO MODEL INDEX
76
TO MODEL INDEX
77
TO MODEL INDEX
78
TO MODEL INDEX
79
TO MODEL INDEX
80
TO MODEL INDEX
81
TO MODEL INDEX
82
TO MODEL INDEX
83
TO MODEL INDEX
84
TO MODEL INDEX
85
TO MODEL INDEX
86
TO MODEL INDEX
87
TO MODEL INDEX
88
TO MODEL INDEX
89
TO MODEL INDEX
90
TO MODEL INDEX
91
TO MODEL INDEX
92
TO MODEL INDEX
93
TO MODEL INDEX
94
TO MODEL INDEX
95
TO MODEL INDEX
96
TO MODEL INDEX
97
TO MODEL INDEX
98
TO MODEL INDEX
99
TO MODEL INDEX
100
TO MODEL INDEX
101
TO MODEL INDEX
102
TO MODEL INDEX
103
TO MODEL INDEX
104
TO MODEL INDEX
105
TO MODEL INDEX
106
TO MODEL INDEX
107
TO MODEL INDEX
108
TO MODEL INDEX
109
TO MODEL INDEX
110
TO MODEL INDEX
111
TO MODEL INDEX
112
TO MODEL INDEX
113
TO MODEL INDEX
114
TO MODEL INDEX
115
TO MODEL INDEX
116
TO MODEL INDEX
117
TO MODEL INDEX
118
TO MODEL INDEX
119
TO MODEL INDEX
120
TO MODEL INDEX
121
TO MODEL INDEX
122
TO MODEL INDEX
123
TO MODEL INDEX
124
TO MODEL INDEX
125
TO MODEL INDEX
126
TO MODEL INDEX
127
TO MODEL INDEX
128
TO MODEL INDEX
129
TO MODEL INDEX
130
TO MODEL INDEX
131
TO MODEL INDEX
132
TO MODEL INDEX
133
TO MODEL INDEX
134
TO MODEL INDEX
135
TO MODEL INDEX
136
TO MODEL INDEX
TO MODEL INDEX
138
TO MODEL INDEX
139
TO MODEL INDEX
140
TO MODEL INDEX
141
TO MODEL INDEX
142
TO MODEL INDEX
143
TO MODEL INDEX
144
TO MODEL INDEX
145
TO MODEL INDEX
146
TO MODEL INDEX
147
TO MODEL INDEX
148
TO MODEL INDEX
149
TO MODEL INDEX
150
TO MODEL INDEX
151
TO MODEL INDEX
152
TO MODEL INDEX
153
TO MODEL INDEX
154
TO MODEL INDEX
155
TO MODEL INDEX
156
TO MODEL INDEX
157
TO MODEL INDEX
158
TO MODEL INDEX
159
TO MODEL INDEX
TO MODEL INDEX
161
TO MODEL INDEX
162
TO MODEL INDEX
163
TO MODEL INDEX
TO MODEL INDEX
165
TO MODEL INDEX
166
TO MODEL INDEX
167
TO MODEL INDEX
168
TO MODEL INDEX
169
TO MODEL INDEX
170
TO MODEL INDEX
171
TO MODEL INDEX
172
TO MODEL INDEX
173
TO MODEL INDEX
174
TO MODEL INDEX
175
TO MODEL INDEX
176
TO MODEL INDEX
177
TO MODEL INDEX
178
TO MODEL INDEX
179
TO MODEL INDEX
TO MODEL INDEX
181
TO MODEL INDEX
182
TO MODEL INDEX
183
TO MODEL INDEX
184
TO MODEL INDEX
185
TO MODEL INDEX
186
TO MODEL INDEX
187
TO MODEL INDEX
188
TO MODEL INDEX
or LIGHT GRAY
189
TO MODEL INDEX
190
TO MODEL INDEX
191
TO MODEL INDEX
192
TO MODEL INDEX
193
TO MODEL INDEX
194

Mazda 2 Service Shop Repair Manual - 2007 - 2014

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mazda 2 Service Shop Repair Manual - 2007 - 2014

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WORKSHOP REPAIR MANUAL

HEATER, VENTILATION &

BODY & ACCESSORIES 09

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (VIN)

Australian specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

General (R.H.D.) specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

Australian specs. (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

General (R.H.D.) specs. (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

Toc of SCT INFORMATION . . . 00-00

00-00 GENERAL INFORMATION

FRONT LOWER ARM FRONT CROSSMEMBER

REAR BRAKE (DRUM)

FRONT BRAKE (DISC)

BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT

REAR ABS SENSOR

REAR ABS WHEEL-

FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR

FRONT ABS SENSOR ROTOR

Dynamic stability control (DSC)

FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR

PCM (MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6)) FRONT ABS SENSOR ROTOR

B65M-R (MZ-CD 1.4 DI Turbo or MZ-CD 1.6 (Y6))

Continuously variable transaxle (CVT)

— Smooth shifting and maximized engine HIGH

WHEEL AXLE SPEED HIGH

PRIMARY PULLEY PLANETARY GEAR

EPS WARNING LIGHT

PCM (ZJ, ZY)

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE

(for Australian, General (R.H.D.) specs.)

(for Australian specs.)

(for General (L.H.D.) specs.)

(for Australian, General (R.H.D.) specs.)

(for Australian, General (R.H.D.) specs.)

(for General (L.H.D.) specs.) 3= Without Curtain, Side airbag

Vehicle type DE= Mazda2

MM0= Australian specs., Mazda-AAT

(for General (R.H.D.) specs.) No significance 0= Dummy

Model change code 1

Body style 10= Closed body

Vehicle type DE= Mazda2

JM0= Australian specs.

(for Australian, General (R.H.D.) specs.)

(for Australian specs.)

(for General (L.H.D.) specs.)

(for Australian, General (R.H.D.) specs.)

(for Australian, General (R.H.D.) specs.)

(for General (L.H.D.) specs.) 3= Without Curtain, Side airbag

Vehicle type DE= Mazda2

MM0= Australian specs., Mazda-AAT

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

General (R.H.D.) specs. (Except AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

Australian specs. (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

General (R.H.D.) specs. (AutoAlliance Thailand (AAT) manufactured vehicles)

Electrical current A (ampere)

Positive pressure kgf/cm2 (kilogram force per square

Upper and Lower Limits

210—260 kPa {2.1—2.7 kgf/cm2, 30—38 psi}

#1: Diagnostic trouble codes depend on the diagnostic test mode

Toc of SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00

ABS Antilock Brake System

MTX: ZJ46 18 110, ZJY6 18 110 ZJ46 18 110,

Recommended engine oil